JP7674021B1 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming machine having distinctive display and notification operations. [Solution] The machine is equipped with a display means capable of displaying a first display showing the number of games won corresponding to the game value won in a specific section, and when game value is awarded, a first display showing the number of games won plus the awarded game value can be displayed after an update display indicating the update of the first display, and when game value is awarded, a second display can be displayed if the value added with the awarded game value reaches a specified value, and when a bet process and start operation are executed during the update display, a first display showing the number of games won added with the awarded game value minus the amount bet can be displayed after the update display ends, and the second display can be displayed even if the first display has not reached the specified value when a bet process and start operation are executed during the update display when the specified value is reached.
[Selection] Figure 135

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pinball gaming machines (pachinko machines) and reel gaming machines (slot machines).

Conventionally, some gaming machines display and notify various information regarding the game (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2023-58762 A

There is room for improvement in display and notification operations on gaming machines like the one above.

The present invention aims to provide a gaming machine with distinctive display and notification operations.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of the present invention has:
A plurality of reels having a plurality of different patterns and driven to rotate;
A bet operation means;
a start operation means capable of executing a start operation for instructing the start of rotation of the plurality of reels;
a plurality of stop operation means capable of executing a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels;
a winning determination means for determining whether or not a winning has been won based on the display state of the plurality of reels;
a game value awarding means for awarding a game value in accordance with the winning determination;
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is capable of displaying a first display showing a number corresponding to a game value acquired in a specific section (hereinafter referred to as an "acquired number");
When the game value is awarded by the game value awarding means, an update display indicating an update of the first display is displayed, and then the first display indicating the acquired number obtained by adding the awarded game value to the acquired number before the game value was awarded is displayed,
When the game value is awarded by the game value awarding means, if a value obtained by adding the awarded game value to the number of acquisitions before the game value is awarded reaches a specified value, a second display can be displayed;
A betting process of a gaming value based on an operation of the betting operation means can be executed even during the display of the update display.
The start operation can be executed even during the display of the update display,
when the betting process and the start operation are executed during the display of the update display when the game value is awarded by the game value awarding means, the first display showing the acquired number obtained by adding the awarded game value to the acquired number before the game value was awarded and further subtracting the amount bet by the betting process can be displayed after the display of the update display ends,
When the betting process and the start operation are executed during the display of the update display when the specified value is reached, even if the first display displayed as a result of the betting process and the start operation being executed has not reached the specified value, the second display can be displayed.
It is characterized by:

The present invention makes it possible to provide a gaming machine with distinctive display and notification operations.

1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 as viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 4 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit. 4A and 4B are diagrams illustrating examples of connections between each board and each unit. 4 is a diagram showing an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in FIG. 3 and the reel unit 109 also shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a configuration diagram of a gaming system including the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 shown in FIG. This is a table summarizing gaming machine status information, gaming machine performance information, and gaming machine installation information. A diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control status command is sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350. A diagram showing details of the communication between the medal count control unit 350 and the lending machine 700. 13A is a diagram showing details of hole control and fraud monitoring information, and FIG. 13B is a list of error codes. 13 is a table showing game control state commands. 13 is a table showing medal count control state commands. A diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control priority command is sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350. 13A is a diagram showing details of the game control priority command, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing details of the response command returned from the medal count control unit 350 to the game control unit 302. FIG. A diagram showing a communication sequence when a game control priority command 2 is sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of a game control unit. 16 is a flowchart of the medal insertion/start lever acceptance process (step S102) in FIG. 15. 17 is a flowchart of the medal insertion process (step S1011) in FIG. 16. 18 is a flowchart of the settlement button process (step S1102) in FIG. 17. This is a flowchart of the process of sending variable information to the medal count control unit (steps S1111, S1205, and S1605) in Figures 17, 18, and 22. 20 is a flowchart of triple command transmission processing (step S1307) in FIG. 19. 20 is a flowchart of the process of sending a priority command to the medal count control unit (steps S1014, S1403, S1406, and S1409) in FIG. 16 is a flowchart of a medal awarding process (step S109) in FIG. 15. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of a game control unit timer interrupt process. 24 is a flowchart of a disconnection determination process, which is one of the error monitoring processes (step S203) in FIG. 23. 24 is a flowchart of the medal count control command receiving process (step S206) in FIG. 23. 24 is a flowchart of the game control command transmission process (step S207) in FIG. 23. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of a medal count control unit main process. 28 is a flowchart of a RAM abnormality determination process (step S302) in FIG. 27; 11 is a table showing a target range of a RAM clear process. 30 is a flowchart of an error request setting process (step S3022) in FIG. 28 etc. 28 is a flowchart of the preparation process (step S303) in FIG. 27. 28 is a flowchart of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S304) in FIG. 27. 33 is a flowchart of the gaming machine information type acquisition process (step S3305) in FIG. 32. 28 is a flowchart of the counting notification transmission process (step S305) in FIG. 27. 28 is a flowchart of a lending notification reception confirmation process (step S306) in FIG. 27. 28 is a flowchart of a loan acceptance result response transmission process (step S308) in FIG. 27. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of medal count control unit timer interrupt processing. 38 is a flowchart of the lending notification receiving process (step S404) in FIG. 37. 40 is a flowchart of the lending number determination process (step S4004) in FIG. 38. 38 is a flowchart of a process for updating the number of sheets to be counted (step S405) in FIG. 37. 38 is a flowchart of the game control unit command receiving process (step S406) in FIG. 37. This is a flowchart of the game control state command receiving process (step S4304) in Figure 41. This is a flowchart (first half) of the game control priority command receiving process (step S4305) in Figure 41. This is a flowchart (second half) of the game control priority command receiving process (step S4305) in Figure 41. 45 is a flowchart of a submission command receiving process (step S4517) in FIG. 44. 45 is a flowchart of the settlement command receiving process (step S4519) in FIG. 44. 45 is a flowchart of a start lever acceptance command receiving process (step S4521) in FIG. 44. This is a flowchart of the game information setting process (steps S4806, S4A19) in Figures 47 and 49. This is a flowchart of the payout command receiving process (step S4523) in Figure 44. This is a flowchart of the game medal number overflow confirmation process (step S4A11) in Figure 49. 45 is a flowchart of an error occurrence command receiving process (step S4524) in FIG. 44. 38 is a flowchart of an error monitoring process (step S407) in FIG. 37. 38 is a flowchart of the process of sending a medal count control command to the game control unit (step S408) in FIG. 37. 38 is a flowchart of a display device display process (step S409) in FIG. 37. 18 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the medal insertion process of FIG. 17. 21 is a flowchart showing a variation of the triple command transmission process of FIG. 20 . 46 is a flowchart showing a variation of the input command receiving process of FIG. 45 . 41 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the planned count number update process of FIG. 40 . 41 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the planned count number update process of FIG. 40 . (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by CPU 404 of first sub-control unit 400, (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of first sub-control unit 400, (c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of first sub-control unit 400, and (d) is a flowchart of command processing (step S307) in (a). (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500, (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500, (c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a first example in which the count button 171 is operated. 13 is a timing chart showing a first example of a presentation when counting is being performed. 13 is a timing chart showing an example in which a bet operation has been performed before the operation of the count button 171 and the bet amount is not 0. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of a counting end presentation. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where the settlement button 134 is operated. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example in which the number of counted sheets increases as the operation time of the count button 171 becomes longer. 67(a) is a timing chart showing an example of a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 67(c), and FIG. 67(b) is a timing chart showing an example of a case in which a power outage occurs when the planned number of sheets to be counted is set to 30 sheets in the example shown in FIG. 67(c) and then power is restored. 60 is a timing chart showing an example in which the expected count number update process of FIG. 59 is adopted. (a) is a timing chart showing an example in which automatic counting ends when the value of the “number of game medals” stored in RAM 358 reaches a certain value, and (b) is a timing chart showing an example in which power is interrupted during automatic counting and then restored. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display indicating that automatic counting is in progress. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a sound output indicating that automatic counting is in progress. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a power interruption occurs before 0.5 seconds, which is the determination time for a long press operation, has elapsed after the operation of the counting button 171 is started. 74 is a timing chart showing a modification of the example shown in FIG. 73. 74 is a timing chart showing another modified example of the example shown in FIG. 73. 13A is a diagram showing an example of a change display (subtraction) on the game medal count display device 170, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of a change display (addition) on the game medal count display device 170. FIG. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing other examples of change display in the game medal count display device 170. This figure shows an example in which the "game medal count" stored in RAM 358 is displayed not only on the game medal count display device 170 but also on the performance image display device 157. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 78. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing another example that is completely different from the example shown in FIG. 78. 13A is a timing chart showing a case where a payout is attempted that exceeds the payout threshold, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing another example of an upper limit exceeding error notification. 13A is a timing chart showing a case where a payout is about to be made when the second payout threshold value is exceeded, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing another example of a notification that the upper limit is approaching. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example in which a notification urging a count overlaps with a highly urgent error notification. 13A shows an example in which the notification prompting counting continues even after switching to a demonstration display, and FIG. 13B shows an example of the notification after the count button 171 is operated during the demonstration. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a notification when the "number of game medals" exceeds a certain specified number, such as a payout threshold or a second payout threshold, and then falls below that specified number, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a notification that prompts counting when the "number of game medals" exceeds the second payout threshold over multiple games. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a notification prompting the player to count each time the "number of game medals" increases by a specified number, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a case where the counting button 171 is operated in a state advantageous to the player, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of a case where the counting button 171 is operated in a state disadvantageous to the player. (a) is a diagram showing a modified example of the example shown in Figure 86(b), (b) is a diagram showing an example in which counting that was forcibly stopped is restarted, and (c) is an example of the modified example described using (a) and (b) when the player is in a disadvantageous state (e.g., a normal state). This is a timing chart showing an example of when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a second modified example in which the operation differs depending on whether the “number of game medals” is less than a certain threshold value. A timing chart showing another example of when the VL signal from the rental machine 700 is turned off. A diagram showing the change in the number of game medals when the count button 171 is pressed and held. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an effect executed according to the number of game medals. A figure showing an example of a presentation executed depending on the number of medals acquired in the AT state. A figure showing an example of the operation when an overflow of the number of game medals occurs. A diagram showing an example of operation when a medal count control wire break error (error code E0) occurs. A figure showing an example of the operation when an error in which the number of game medals exceeds the upper limit and an error in which the number of medals control is broken (error code E0) occur simultaneously. A diagram showing an example of operation when a medal number control unit disconnection error occurs. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of an operation in which, when a counting sound is output in response to a counting process, an output permission period for the sound is provided. A diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 during the operation of FIG. 98(a). A diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 during the operation of FIG. 98(b). FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a communication cycle between each control unit and the device. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the counting notification sending process (step S305) in the medal count control unit main process of FIG. 27. A flowchart showing an example of sound control processing (step S511) in the main processing of the first sub-control unit 400 in Figure 60 (a). FIG. 104 is a diagram showing an example of a counting sound set in the process of FIG. 103. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of an operation based on FIGS. 101 to 104. A figure showing an example of the operation when no bet operation or start lever operation is made when the count-up display is being executed in the AT gaming state. A figure showing an example of the operation when a bet operation is performed when a count-up display is being executed in the AT gaming state. A figure showing an example of the operation when a bet operation and a lever operation are performed when a count-up display is being executed in the AT gaming state. A figure showing an example of the operation when power is interrupted and restored while a count-up display is being executed in the AT game state. A figure showing an example of the operation when the complete function is activated in the AT gaming state. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an operation when a reel effect is executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the operation from an internal win of a bonus to transition to a bonus state. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the operation from an internal win of a bonus to transition to a bonus state. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a demo screen is displayed from the bonus type selection display. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a demo screen is displayed from the bonus type selection display. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a bonus type selection display is displayed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a demo screen is displayed from the bonus type selection display. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a menu screen is displayed from a bonus type selection display. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of operation during a simulated game. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the number of game medals is 0, and an example of the operation when a replay is won. This is a diagram showing the flow from starting a game to transitioning to an AT game state to ending the AT game state. A diagram showing the flow of operations when the complete function is activated during AT gaming. A diagram showing the flow of operations when the complete function is activated during AT gaming. 1A and 1B are figures showing an example of a menu display being executed when the complete function is activated, and 1C and 1D are figures showing an example of displaying the remaining number of coins to be acquired until the complete function is activated, using a range of 100 coins. 1 is a perspective view of the appearance of a slot machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side). 1A is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open, FIG. 1B is a front view showing an example of a main board display 190, and FIG. 1C is a front view showing an example of an LED-compatible sticker 192. 2 shows a circuit block diagram of a control unit. (a) is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel (left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112) in a flat layout. (b) is a diagram showing the types of winning roles (including activated roles), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning role, and the activation or payout of each winning role. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing of a main control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of an initial setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of a setting change process. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of a main control unit timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of a device monitoring process. 1A is a diagram showing the control status of each button when the power is turned on, (b) is a diagram showing the control status of each button when the power is turned on (error detection state), and (c) is a diagram showing the control status of each button when the power is turned on with a setting change. 13A is a diagram showing an example of the control status of each button when a setting change state is ended, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of the control status of each button when a setting confirmation state is ended. 1A is a diagram showing an example of control when a valid button (second operation means) is simultaneously operated when the power is turned on, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of control when a valid button (second operation means) is simultaneously operated when the power is turned on (in an error detection state). 10A to 10C are diagrams showing an example of the control states of each button when each button is operated; (a) is a diagram showing a time series of the flow from when a power outage occurs until power is restored when the MAX BET button 132 is pressed down. (b) is a diagram showing a time series of the flow from when a power outage occurs until power is restored when the start lever 135 is pressed down. (a) is a diagram showing a time series of the flow from when the setting key SW is ON, the front door 102 is closed, and the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is performed, to when the front door 102 is opened and the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is not performed. (b) is a diagram showing a time series of the flow from when the setting key SW is ON, the front door 102 is closed, and the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is performed, to when the front door 102 is opened and power is restored in the third stop operation state. (a) is a diagram showing a time series of the flow from when a power interruption occurs while the reel 112 is rotating to when power is restored by pressing the stop button 139. (b) is a diagram showing a time series of the flow from when a power interruption occurs while the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the first stop mode to when power is restored by pressing the stop button 139. 13A is a diagram showing a time series of the flow from when a power outage occurs in an error detection state until power is restored when the reset button 243 is pressed down. 13B is a diagram showing a time series of the flow of powering on with a transition to a setting changeable state when the reset button 243 is pressed down. (a) A diagram showing the control state (variant) of each button when the power is turned on, which corresponds to Fig. 159(a). (b) A diagram showing the control state (variant) of each button when the power is turned on (error detection state), which corresponds to Fig. 159(b). (c) A diagram showing the control state (variant) of each button when the power is turned on with a setting change, which corresponds to Fig. 159(c). 160(a) and 160(b) are diagrams showing an example of the control status of each button when the setting change state is ended, the diagram corresponding to FIG. 160(a) and FIG. 160(b) showing an example of the control status of each button when the setting confirmation state is ended; 1A and 1B are diagrams showing another example of control when valid buttons are simultaneously operated when the power is turned on (in an error detection state); 13A to 13C are diagrams showing modified examples of the control states of other buttons when each button is operated. 1A is a diagram showing an example of control over the effect button 156 and control over the volume button 193a in chronological order, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing another example of control over the effect button 156 and control over the volume button 193a in chronological order. FIG. 13 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 1100 and a dispenser machine 1700 according to a modified example, as viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 11 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of a slot machine 1100 according to a modified example. (a) is a diagram showing the control state of the count button and the game medal number clear button when the power is turned on. (b) is a diagram showing the control state of the count button and the game medal number clear button when the setting change state ends. (c) is a diagram showing the control state of the count button and the game medal number clear button when the setting confirmation state ends. (d) is a diagram showing an example of control when the count button and the game medal number clear button are operated simultaneously. (e) is a diagram showing an example of the control state of the game medal number clear button when the count button is operated. (f) is a diagram showing an example of the control state of the count button when the game medal number clear button is operated. 1A is a diagram showing the maximum protruding height of the operation surface of each button, with each button extracted from a front view of the slot machine 100. FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the area of the operation surface of each button, with each button extracted from a front view of the slot machine 100. (a) A diagram showing the control state of each button when the power is turned on with the door closed (modification 2), which corresponds to Fig. 167(a). (b) A diagram showing the control state of each button when the power is turned on with the door open (modification 2), which corresponds to Fig. 167(a). (c) A diagram showing the control state of each button when the power is turned on (error detection state) (modification 2), which corresponds to Fig. 167(b). (a) A diagram showing the control state of each button when the power is turned on with a setting change (Modification 2), which corresponds to Fig. 167(c). (b) A diagram showing the control state of each button when the setting change state ends (Modification 2), which corresponds to Fig. 168(a). (c) A diagram showing the control state of each button when the setting confirmation state ends (Modification 2), which corresponds to Fig. 168(b). 169(a) and 169(b) are diagrams showing modified examples of control when valid buttons are simultaneously operated when the power is turned on (in an error detection state); 1A is a diagram showing a time series of the flow from when a power outage occurs with the front door 102 closed (door closed state) to when power is restored by pressing the OK button 193b. (B) is a diagram showing a time series of the flow from when a power outage occurs with the front door 102 open (door open state) to when power is restored by pressing the OK button 193b. FIG. 13A is a chronological diagram showing the flow from when a power outage occurs while the stop button 139 and the OK button 193b are not operated, to when power is restored while the stop button 139 and the OK button 193b are operated simultaneously (pressed simultaneously). 13A is a diagram showing an example of a display when a medal clearing operation is performed when the door is open, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of a display when a medal clearing operation is performed when the door is open. 13A is a diagram showing another example of a display when a medal clearing operation is performed when the door is open, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing another example of a display when a medal clearing operation is performed when the door is closed. 13A is a diagram showing an example of a display when a setting key is operated while the door is open, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing another example of a display when a setting key is operated while the door is closed. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a display when the clear button and the setting key are simultaneously operated when the door is open, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a display when the clear button and the setting key are simultaneously operated when the door is closed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a connection of circuit boards inside a gaming machine. 13A is a diagram showing the flow of operations when the harness is normally connected, and FIGS. 13B and 13C are diagrams showing an example of operations when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected. FIG. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating an example of an operation when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is disconnected. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when the lever unit harness HA1, the stop button unit harness HA2, and the bet button unit harness HA3 are each unplugged. FIG. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of an operation when the menu button unit harness HC1 is disconnected and reconnected. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating an example of wiring of the menu button unit. A diagram showing an example of the operation when a harness connecting a main control board and a sub-control board is disconnected and reconnected. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the flow of operations in a normal game. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of an operation according to a time lapse from a lever operation. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing an example of an operation when an abnormality occurs in the reel after a lever operation. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing an example of an operation when an abnormality occurs in the reel after a lever operation. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of an operation when an abnormality occurs in the stop button unit after a lever operation. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of an operation when an abnormality occurs in the stop button unit after a lever operation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an operation when a reel effect is executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a simulated game is executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a simulated game is executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a power outage occurs and is restored during play. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an operational flow when an abnormality occurs while a game is not being played. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an operational flow when an abnormality occurs while a game is not being played. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a power restoration operation when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a power restoration operation when the bet button unit harness HA3 is disconnected. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of control when the stop button unit harness HA2 is disconnected and reconnected. 13A is a diagram showing an example of control when the stop button unit harness HA2 is disconnected during a power interruption during a third stop operation, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of control when the stop button unit harness HA2 is disconnected during a power interruption during reel rotation. 1A is a diagram showing a flow of a normal setting change mode in chronological order, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a flow of a normal setting confirmation mode in chronological order. (a) A diagram showing a time series of an example of a state in which a game becomes playable when the front door 102 is closed in the setting confirmation mode. (b) A diagram showing a time series of an example of maintaining the setting confirmation mode when the front door 102 is closed in the setting confirmation mode. (c) A diagram showing an example of a control state of the game medal count clear button when the count button is operated. (d) A diagram showing an example of a control state of the count button when the game medal count clear button is operated. 11 is a time-series diagram illustrating an example of control when a setting change operation (Example 1) is performed with the door closed. FIG. 13 is a time-series diagram illustrating an example of control when a setting change operation (Example 2) is performed with the door closed. FIG. 13 is a time-series diagram illustrating an example of control when a setting change operation (Example 3) is performed with the door closed. FIG. 13 is a time-series diagram illustrating an example of control when a setting change operation (Example 4) is performed with the door closed. FIG. 13 is a time-series diagram illustrating an example of control when a setting change operation (Example 5) is performed with the door closed. FIG. 1 is a side view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 in a closed state. 1A is a diagram showing the lock body 1401A from the side of the slot machine 100 when the lock mechanism 1401 is in an unlocked state, FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the lock body 1401A in FIG. 1A from the rear side of the slot machine 100, and FIG. 1C is a diagram showing the lock body 1401A from the side of the slot machine 100 when the lock mechanism 1401 is in a locked state. 14(a) to 14(d) are diagrams showing the operation of the lock main body 1401A and the locked shaft 1401B. 1A is a side view showing the setting key SK inserted into the lock body 1401A, FIG. 1B is a side view showing the setting key SK in FIG. 1A in solid lines, FIG. 1C is a rear view of the lock body 1401A in FIG. 1A, FIG. 1D is a diagram showing a state in which the engaged shaft 1401B cannot enter along the entry path 1404ER, and FIG. 1E is a diagram showing a state in which the engaged shaft 1401B cannot enter along the entry path 1404ER. 1A is a side view showing the state in which the setting key SK is inserted into the lock body 1401A with the engaging portion 1402 accommodated in the accommodating portion 1404, (b) is a side view showing the setting key SK in (a) in solid lines, (c) is a view of the lock body 1401A in (a) from the rear side, (d) is a diagram showing a state in which the engaged shaft 1401B cannot enter along the entry path 1404ER, and (e) is a diagram showing a state in which the engaged shaft 1401B cannot enter along the entry path 1404ER. 219(d) is a diagram showing an example in which the door key is operated from the state of FIG. 219(d), but the locking part 1402 and the setting key SK do not move, and (b) is a diagram showing an example in which the door key is operated from the state of FIG. 219(e), causing the locking part 1402 to move but not the game medal MD. (c) to (f) are diagrams showing a state in which a metal piece for maintaining the unlocked state is inserted obliquely from the outside of the inner wall 1404WA that forms the slit 1401SL, and the tip of the metal piece is pressed against the locking part 1402. 14 is a diagram showing a locking portion 1402 provided with a protrusion 1402PR. FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a configuration in which a plurality of locking mechanisms 1401 are provided. 1A to 1D are diagrams showing an example of the positional relationship between a wiring pattern on a substrate and a sticker attached to the substrate. 1A and 1B are diagrams showing an example of the positional relationship between a wiring pattern on a substrate and a sticker attached to the substrate. 223(a) is a diagram showing an example in which silk-screen printing SP indicating the attachment positions of the four corners of a sticker is applied to the configuration of FIG. 223(c), and FIG. 223(b) is a diagram showing an example in which silk-screen printing SP indicating the attachment positions of the two corners, the upper right and the lower left, of a sticker is applied to the configuration of FIG. 223(c). 1A is a diagram showing an example in which a sticker ST1 (facing upward) affixed to a substrate A and a sticker ST2 (facing right) affixed to a substrate B are different in relation to the reference direction, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example in which a sticker ST1 (facing upward) affixed to a substrate A and a sticker ST3 (facing downward) affixed to the case of the substrate A are different in relation to the reference direction. A figure showing an example in which the two-dimensional code QRA1 (facing upward) of substrate A and the two-dimensional code QRB1 (facing downward) of substrate B are different from each other with respect to the reference direction. A figure showing an example in which the two-dimensional code QRA1 (facing upward) of substrate A and the two-dimensional code QRB1 (facing downward) of substrate B are different from each other with respect to the reference direction. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of a power supply module PM. 1A is a view of the lower surface BT from below, FIG. 1B is a view showing a cross section along line A-A in FIG. 1A, and FIG. 1C is a view showing a cross section along line B-B in FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a power supply board PW. FIG. 231. (a) is a view looking rearward from the cross section along line AA in FIG. 231, and (b) is a view looking from the front of the power supply board PW with cover CA1 attached to the power supply board PW. 231. (a) is a view looking forward from the cross section along line B-B in FIG. 231, and (b) is a view looking from the rear of the power supply board PW with cover CA1 attached to the power supply board PW. 231 when viewed from below, and FIG. 232 (b) is a view of the power supply board PW with cover CA1 attached thereto when viewed from below. 232 shows the state in which a cover CA1 is attached to the power supply board PW of FIG. 231. 1A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the configuration of a board and a board case, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram showing a configuration in which a crimp CL is provided in an unmounted land area NA.

The following describes a slot machine according to an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention, using the drawings.

<Basic embodiment>
Hereinafter, a slot machine according to an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that this embodiment employs a so-called medal-less configuration in which information equivalent to the number of real medals (virtual medal number) is used instead of actual medals, but in the following description, this information will be referred to as "medal number."

The slot machine described below is a gaming machine in which a predetermined number of game medals are inserted, and multiple reels with multiple types of symbols each start spinning when a predetermined operation to start spinning is received, and a lottery is held to determine whether multiple types of internal winning combinations have been won based on the reception of the operation to start spinning, and each of the multiple reels stops spinning individually when a predetermined operation to stop spinning is received. If the conditions determined by the combination of symbols when the multiple reels stop based on the results of the lottery match the predetermined payout conditions, a process to pay out the number of game medals is executed and the game ends, but if they do not match, the process to pay out the number of game medals is not executed and the game ends.

First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 will be described using Figure 1. Figure 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of a gaming machine of the present invention, and comprises a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front side of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed relative to the main body 101. Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) with multiple types of patterns arranged on the outer periphery are stored inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are configured to rotate inside the slot machine 100. These reels 110 to 112 are rotated by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, each symbol is printed in an appropriate number at equal intervals on a strip-shaped member, and this strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to form each reel 110 to 112. When viewed by a player, the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically in roughly three rows through the display window 113, making a total of nine symbols visible. The symbol displayed on the top row of the left reel 110 is called the left reel top symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle row of the left reel 110 is called the left reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the bottom row of the left reel 110 is called the left reel bottom symbol, the symbol displayed on the top row of the middle reel 111 is called the middle reel top symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle row of the left reel 111 is called the middle reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the bottom row of the middle reel 111 is called the middle reel bottom symbol, the symbol displayed on the top row of the right reel 112 is called the right reel top symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle row of the right reel 112 is called the right reel middle symbol, and the symbol displayed on the bottom row of the right reel 112 is called the right reel bottom symbol, and each of the symbols on each of the reels 110 to 112 is displayed vertically in three rows on each of the reels 110 to 112 through the display window 113, for a total of nine. By spinning each of the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of multiple types of symbols. Note that, in addition to reels, electronic image display devices such as liquid crystal display devices can also be used as such displays. Also, although the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 has three reels inside and at the center of the slot machine 100, the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is provided on the back of each of the reels 110 to 112 to illuminate the individual symbols displayed in the display window 113. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that each symbol can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112, and a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of this optical sensor. Based on the detection result of this optical sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the winning line that is valid. The winning line is a line that is used to determine whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning role is displayed. The winning lines that are valid are determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. There are five winning lines. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid. When two medals are bet, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added, making three lines valid. When three medals are bet, five lines are valid, making five lines valid, making five lines valid, making five lines valid, making five lines valid. Note that the number of winning lines is not limited to five. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the lower right winning line, and the upper right winning line may be valid as winning lines. Hereinafter, the valid winning lines may be called valid lines.

The notification lamp 123 is a lamp that notifies the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (e.g., a bonus combination or a special combination) has been internally won in an internal lottery described below, or that this internal winning state has been carried over. The medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp that notifies the player that a medal can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 is a lamp that notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no medal insertion is required) if a replay combination, which is one of the winning combinations, was won in the previous game. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for presentation purposes.

The bet button 130 or 132 is a button for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, one medal is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed. Pressing the button once inserts one medal, pressing it once again inserts one additional medal (total of two medals), and pressing it once again inserts one additional medal (total of three medals). Pressing the bet button 132 inserts three medals. Hereinafter, the bet button 130 may be referred to as the one-coin bet button, and the bet button 132 may be referred to as the max bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of medals inserted, and when the specified number of medals have been inserted, the game start lamp 121 lights up to indicate that the game can be started.

The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to a player as a result of winning some kind of winning combination. Note that in the following, the expression "granted to the player" may be used in the same sense as "paid out to the player." The game information display 126 and the payout number display 127 are configured as seven-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. In other words, when the bet button 130 or 132 is operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate. The operation of the start lever 135 is called the start operation of the game.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 consisting of a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each of the reels 110 to 112. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right reel 112 can be stopped by operating the right stop button 139. Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as the second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as the third stop operation. The reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as the first stop reel, the second stop reel, and the third stop reel, respectively. Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated to stop all of the reels 110 to 112 that are rotating is called the operation order or push order. Furthermore, the operation order in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110, the second stop operation is the stop operation of the center reel 111, and the third stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112 is called the "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the stop operation in which the first stop operation is the stop operation of the right reel 112, the second stop operation is the stop operation of the center reel 111, and the third stop operation is the stop operation of the left reel 110 is called the "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push". Note that light-emitting bodies may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light-emitting bodies may be lit to notify the player.

The instruction monitor 125 is a display for displaying information regarding the operation sequence (press order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139. This instruction monitor 125 is also composed of a seven-segment (SEG) display. For example, when instructing to operate the left stop button 137, the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 in that order, the instruction monitor 125 displays "1," and when instructing to operate the left stop button 137, the right stop button 139, and the middle stop button 138 in that order, the instruction monitor 125 displays "2."

The settlement button 134 is a button for returning the inserted gaming medals (number of bets) to the medal number control unit 350. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key to unlock the front door 102 of the slot machine 100.

The game medal count display device 170 is a five-digit seven-segment (SEG) display that displays the game medal count recorded by the medal count control unit 350 shown in FIG. 2.

The count button 171 is an operating means for transmitting information on the number of game medals recorded in the medal count control unit 350 shown in FIG. 2 to the lending machine 700.

Below the stop button unit 136 is a title panel 162 that displays the model name and allows various certificate stamps to be affixed.

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker 277 (see FIG. 2) provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for livening up the game. A performance device 160 is provided on the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the top of the performance device 160 for outputting the sound of the speaker 272 (see FIG. 2) to the outside. This effect device 160 is equipped with a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and left shutters 163b that can be opened and closed horizontally, and an effect image display device 157 (liquid crystal display device) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (player side, front side). Note that the display device may not be a liquid crystal display device, but may be any display device capable of displaying various effect images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. The display screen is rectangular and configured so that the entire screen can be viewed by the player. In this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may also be square. In addition, decorations (not shown) can be provided around the periphery of the display screen, so that part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decorations, causing the display screen to appear irregular. In this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but it may also be curved. This performance image display device 157 corresponds to an example of a performance means.

The lending machine 700 shown in FIG. 1 is sometimes called a card unit and corresponds to an example of the gaming media management device of the present invention. This lending machine 700 is installed in a one-to-one relationship with the slot machine 100.

The lending machine 700 accepts cards. There are two types of "cards" referred to here. One is a visitor card (also called a general card) with a prepaid function, which is a storage medium for gaming issued to general players who are not registered as members. The other is a member card, which is a storage medium for gaming issued to member players who are registered as members at the gaming center. An IC card is used as the card.

The card stores a value. The value stored on the card includes the "number of medals held" and the "money balance", which is the remaining amount of prepaid money.

The lending machine 700 that accepts the card has the function of converting the "number of medals held" stored on the card into the "number of gaming medals (number of credits)."

The "number of gaming medals (number of credits)" is data that can be used to set the bet amount and can be converted into the "number of possessed medals." The "number of gaming medals" is obtained by debiting the "money balance" or "number of possessed medals" on the card. The "number of gaming medals" also includes the number of medals won by winning. This "number of gaming medals" is managed by the medal count control unit 350 shown in FIG. 2, and is the number of electronic medals electromagnetically stored (amount of electronic gaming value). The "number of gaming medals" is decremented by inserting medals using the bet buttons 130, 132.

The "number of medals possessed" is a value obtained by converting the "number of game medals (number of credits)" into a count. This "number of medals possessed" is stored in a manner that allows it to be specified by the player's card. In other words, by operating the count button 171, the "number of game medals" is converted into the "number of medals possessed" and can be stored on the card. The "number of medals possessed" may be managed by a management device for managing the number of medals possessed that is installed in the gaming facility.

The front side of the lending machine 700 is provided with a bill insertion slot 701 at the top for inserting bills, and a card insertion slot 702 at the bottom for inserting cards. A membership card or visitor card inserted into this card insertion slot 702 is accepted by a card reader/writer, and the information stored on the card is read. The authenticity and type of bill inserted into the bill insertion slot 701 are identified, and the face value of the bill is stored as the "money balance" on the card inserted into the card insertion slot 702.

An information display 703 is provided below the bill insertion slot 701. This information display 703 is a display that provides operation guidance for the lending machine 700 and the status of the slot machine 100 through text and images. The surface may be configured as a touch panel, allowing various operations to be input by touching the various displayed display items with a finger.

Below the information display 703, a money balance display 705 and a medal count balance display 706 are arranged in two rows, one above the other. The money balance display 705 displays the "money balance" stored in the card inserted in the card insertion slot 702 as a monetary amount. Meanwhile, the medal count balance display 706 displays the "number of medals held" stored in the card inserted in the card insertion slot 702 as the number of medals.

A loan button 707 and a card return button 708 are provided in the vertical center of the loaner 700. The loan button 707 is an operating means for withdrawing the "money balance" stored in the card inserted in the card insertion slot 702 to obtain the "number of game medals". Specifically, if the card inserted in the card insertion slot 702 has a "money balance", the LED lamp built into the loan button 707 lights up in a manner indicating that withdrawal is possible. By operating the loan button 707 in this state, the "number of game medals" is added according to the money to be withdrawn. For example, a "number of game medals" equivalent to 1000 yen is added as a predetermined amount. Also, if the "money balance" of the card is less than a predetermined amount (for example, less than 1000 yen), only the "number of game medals" converted from the current balance at a predetermined rate is added. Even if the "money balance" of the card is less than a predetermined amount, the "number of possessed medals" stored in the card may be replenished and the "number of game medals" may be increased by a predetermined amount. The card return button 708 is operated when the player ends the game, and is an operation means for storing the "number of possessed medals" determined at the end of the game in the card inserted in the card insertion slot 702 and discharging it. The "number of possessed medals" determined at the end of the game is the number of medals obtained by subtracting the number of medals converted to the "number of game medals" from the "number of possessed medals" stored in the card inserted in the card insertion slot 702, and adding the number of game medals counted by the counting operation.

The data of "money balance", "number of medals held", and "number of game medals" explained above are converted in the following order: "money balance" and "number of medals held" → "number of game medals" → "number of medals held". In this way, the "number of medals held" specified by the card is converted into the "number of game medals", and in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, the "number of game medals" can be used to set the number of bets. Therefore, it is possible to provide a new slot machine (managed game machine) that does not use real medals for playing games, without confusing players who are accustomed to conventional slot machines in which real medals are loaned out, credits are secured by inserting the real medals, and the number of bets is set using the credits.

In this specification, the "number of medals saved" is not mentioned, but the "number of medals saved" is the number of medals deposited in the game center, not stored on the card. In the game center, the number of medals saved that the player has won in the game may be managed as "points saved" during the day by the hall management terminal 800 shown in FIG. 5 or other management computer, and may be managed as "number of medals saved" from the day after the acquisition. When both the "number of medals saved" and the "number of medals saved" are stored, the "number of medals saved" is deducted first. In addition, both the "number of medals saved" and the "number of medals saved" may be stored in a higher-level server (the intermediate management terminal 810 or management server 820 shown in FIG. 5) in association with the card number. In the case of a visitor card, the "number of medals saved" is stored directly in the visitor card, but the "number of medals saved" may be stored in an upper-level server in association with the card number. When storing in the upper server in association with the card number, data that can identify the time when the data was stored in the upper server may be written onto the card (member card, visitor card) and then discharged. The "money balance" is written directly onto the card (member card, visitor card) and then discharged. The "number of medals held" is stored on the card (member card, visitor card) or the upper server when, for example, the counting button 171 is operated and counting processing is performed. However, instead of this, the data may be stored all at once when the card is returned. Furthermore, when a player finishes playing and returns the card from the lending machine 700, the "number of medals held" stored in the lending machine 700 may be temporarily stored as saved medals in the hall management terminal 800, and when the player inserts the card into the same or a different lending machine 700 again on the same day that the card is returned, only the "number of medals held" for that day that was temporarily stored as saved medals may be stored again in the lending machine 700, and the "number of medals played" may be added within the range of the "number of medals held" so that the player may play.

The rental machine 700 may also be equipped with an IR photosensitive unit that receives infrared signals from a remote control carried by an attendant at the amusement center, converts them into electronic signals, and outputs them.

... If there are "points" remaining, the LED lamp built into the replay button will light up in a manner that indicates withdrawal is possible. By operating the replay button in this state, a predetermined number (e.g., 50) of "game medals" may be added to the number of "game medals."

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 2. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The slot machine 100's control units are broadly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the main presentation in response to command signals (hereafter simply referred to as "commands") sent by the main control unit 300, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands sent by the first sub-control unit 400. With regard to the main control unit 300, a large data capacity makes it difficult to verify the program and can also become a breeding ground for illegal tampering, which can lead to security issues, so there is a limit to the data capacity of the ROM 306 and RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

Main Control Unit
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 has a game control unit 302 that controls the progress of the game and a medal count control unit 350 that controls the number of game medals owned by the player. The game control unit 302 corresponds to an example of a game control means, and the medal count control unit 350 corresponds to an example of a game value number control means. The game control unit 302 is equipped with a CPU 304, a ROM 306 that stores control program data, lottery data used during internal lottery of winning roles, reel pattern arrangement and stop positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input and output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT (watchdog timer) not shown. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this also applies to the medal count control unit 350, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator (not shown) as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 determines an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor and transmits a drive pulse in response to the interrupt request. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time for interruption is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 is equipped with a random number generating circuit (not shown) that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the value within the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from a crystal oscillator (not shown), and a start signal output circuit (not shown) that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When a start signal is input from this start signal output circuit, the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 starts game control (starts the main control unit main processing described below).

The CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 monitors the state of each bet button 130, 132, the start lever 135, each stop button 137-139, and the settlement button 134 at each interrupt time. For example, when it detects that the bet buttons 130, 132 are turned on, a process is executed to electronically insert medals stored electronically in the medal count control unit 350 as medals to be inserted into the game. When it detects that the start lever 135 is turned on, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number generation circuit. The random number generation circuit that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores random numbers to be used in the lottery. When it detects that the left stop button 137, the center stop button 138, or the right stop button 139 is turned on, if the reels 110-112 corresponding to each stop button are in a stoppable state, it executes stop control of the reels 110-112. When it detects that the settlement button 134 has been turned on, it executes a process to electronically return the inserted gaming medals to the medal count control unit 350.

The CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 also monitors the status of various sensors 318 (optical sensors of the left reel 110, the center reel 111, the right reel 112, etc.) at each interrupt time. The optical sensors of the left reel 110, the center reel 111, and the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110 to 112, and become L level every time a light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes by. Rotational position information indicating how far the reel has rotated from the reference position from the time it becomes L level until it becomes L level again is calculated based on the count value of the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the motors 110m-112m (see FIG. 3) provided on the reels 110-112, a drive circuit 324 that drives display devices such as the indication monitor 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127, and a drive circuit 326 that drives various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, medal insertion lamp 129, and game start lamp 121).

Furthermore, the slot machine 100 has setting values that give players different degrees of advantage. Setting 1 to Setting 6 are available as setting values. The higher the setting value, the higher the advantage the player tends to have. Specifically, an internal probability of winning is determined for each setting value. A setting change button 175 that is operated when changing the setting value is connected to the game control unit 302.

In addition, an information output circuit 328 is connected to the game control unit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs game information (e.g., information indicating the game status) of the slot machine 100 to an information input circuit 650 provided in an external hall computer 600 (see Figure 5) or the like via this information output circuit 328.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit (not shown) that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from a power supply management unit (not shown), and this voltage monitoring circuit outputs a low voltage signal indicating a drop in voltage to each of the game control unit 302 and the medal count control unit 350 when the voltage value of the power supply is below a predetermined value (e.g., 9V).

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for sending commands to the first sub-control unit 400, enabling communication with the first sub-control unit 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be sent from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

The medal count control unit 350, like the game control unit 302, is equipped with a CPU 354, a ROM 356, a RAM 358, an I/O 360 for controlling input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 362 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 304 and the CPU 354 are provided on the same board and are connected via a buffer IC. This allows the CPU 304 to use the ROM 306 and the RAM 308 without using the ROM 356 and the RAM 358, and allows the CPU 354 to use the ROM 356 and the RAM 358 without using the ROM 306 and the RAM 308. In addition, a WDT (watchdog timer) not shown in the figure is also installed. The CPU 354 of the medal count control unit 350 also operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator not shown as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 354 transmits frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 356 to the counter timer 362, and the counter timer 362 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 354 for each interrupt time. The CPU 354 operates in response to this interrupt request. This medal count control unit 350 executes interrupt processing (medal count control unit timer interrupt processing, described below) every 0.745 ms. Also, communication with the lending machine 700 is repeated at 300 ms intervals.

The CPU 354 of the medal count control unit 350 also has a start-up signal output circuit (not shown) that outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and when a start-up signal is input from this start-up signal output circuit, the CPU 354 of the medal count control unit 350 also starts medal count control (starts the medal count control unit main processing described below).

The basic circuit of the medal count control unit 350 is connected to a game medal count display device 170 consisting of a 5-digit 7-segment (SEG) display, a count button 171, and a game medal count clear button 172.

The medal count control unit 350's basic circuit is also connected to the lending machine 700 via the lending machine connection terminal board 790. The medal count control unit 350 communicates bidirectionally with the lending machine 700.

The medal count control unit 350 transmits various commands to the game control unit 302. The game control unit 302 also transmits various commands to the medal count control unit 350. In other words, communication between the medal count control unit 350 and the game control unit 302 is also two-way communication.

The medal count control unit 350 also stores the "game medal count" in a specified area of the RAM 358. Specifically, the "game medal count" is stored in a credit counter. The medal count control unit 350 updates the "game medal count" stored in a specified area of the RAM 358 by addition or subtraction. Examples of addition include processing based on a payout command sent from the game control unit 302, processing based on a settlement command sent from the game control unit 302, and processing based on a loan notification sent from the loaner machine 700. On the other hand, examples of subtraction processing include counting processing based on the operation of the count button 171, and processing based on an input command sent from the game control unit 302.

The medal count clear button 172 shown in FIG. 2 is provided in a position where it cannot be operated by the player (for example, in a position where it cannot be operated without opening the front door 102), and is an operating means for clearing the "medal count" stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 358. For example, if a player is absent with "2" remaining in the medal count, it becomes difficult to determine whether the player who left "2" intends to continue playing, and another player cannot start playing. However, if the medal count can be cleared by the store clerk's operation, another player can be welcomed sooner. Note that the medal count does not necessarily have to be cleared when the medal count clear button 172 is operated. For example, it may be cleared when the medal count is two or less, and counted in the same way as when the count button 171 is operated when the medal count is three or more. If the counting button 171 malfunctions and cannot recognize that it has been operated, there is a risk that the "number of game medals" cannot be converted to the "number of medals held," which could cause a disadvantage to the player. However, if counting can be done by the operation of the store clerk, the player will not be disadvantaged. Furthermore, there is no need to provide a new counting button for the store clerk, so there is no increase in costs. It is possible to separate clearing and counting by the operation method of the game medal number clear button 172, rather than determining the number of game medals and separating them into clearing and counting. For example, clearing is performed when the game medal number clear button 172 is pressed for a short time, and counting is performed when the game medal number clear button 172 is pressed for a long time. Either clearing or counting can be easily selected regardless of the number of game medals. Also, clearing is performed when only the game medal number clear button 172 is operated, and counting is performed when the game medal number clear button 172 and another button are operated simultaneously. There is a low possibility of operating incorrectly, and either clearing or counting can be easily selected.

《Sub-control section》
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 (game control unit 302) via an input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control command, and the basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, and data for controlling the backlight lighting pattern and various displays.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a sound source IC 418, which is provided with speakers 272, 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272, 277 in response to commands from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which sound data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and sound data acquired from this ROM is amplified by the amplifier and output from the speakers 272, 277. These speakers 272, 277 correspond to an example of a performance means.

The first sub-controller 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, to which various lamps 420 (upper lamps, lower lamps, side lamps 144, title panel lamps, bet button lamps, reel backlights, etc.) are connected via an input/output interface. The various lamps 420 correspond to an example of a presentation means.

The first sub-controller 400 also includes a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is connected to the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a sensor circuit 426, to which a shutter sensor 428 is connected via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 at each interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the performance device 160, including display control of the performance image display device 157. The second sub-control unit 500 may be configured with multiple control units, such as a control unit that controls the display of the performance image display device 157 and a control unit that controls various performance drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163).

The second sub-control unit 500 has a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands sent by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on these control commands. This basic circuit 502 is equipped with a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling the input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The second sub-control unit 500 is also provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), which is connected to a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the performance image display device 157.

Next, we will explain examples of connections between each board, such as the power supply control board, main control board, and first sub-control board, and each unit, such as the reel unit and the performance movable body unit.

Figure 3 shows an example of the connections between each board and each unit.

In FIG. 3, the power supply control board 252B, the main control board 300B, the first sub-control board 400B, the reel unit 109, and the performance movable body unit 160U are shown. The performance movable body unit 160U is a unit that moves the shutter 163, which is incorporated into the performance device 160 shown in FIG. 1. The shutter 163 is an example of a movable body.

The power supply control board 252B, the main control board 300B and the first sub-control board 400B each have multiple connectors PC1-PC4, MC2-MC6 and SC1-SC4. The reel unit 109 and the performance movable body unit 160U each also have one or more connectors RC1-RC3 and DC1.

The island equipment installed in the gaming machine store steps down the 100V AC power supply to a voltage of 24V, and the 24V AC current is supplied to the pachinko machine 100 through the power cord 265 connected to the connector PC1. The 24V AC current is converted to a 24V DC voltage, a 12V DC voltage, and a 5V DC voltage in the power supply control board 252B. Note that it may be converted to other DC voltages, but the explanation here will be about a 24V DC voltage and a 5V DC voltage.

The power supply control board 252B shown in FIG. 3 shows a 24V power supply line and a 5V power supply line, as well as a power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and a power supply control 24V capacitor 24PC connected to the 24V power supply line, and a power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and a power supply control 5V capacitor 5PC connected to the 5V power supply line. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL is an LED lamp for power supply monitoring that lights up or flashes while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL is an LED lamp for power supply monitoring that lights up or flashes while a 5V DC current is flowing. Also shown is a power switch 244.

A 24V power line and a 5V power line are connected to connector PC2 of the power supply control board 252B. This connector PC2 and connector MC5 of the main control board 300B are connected by a harness PM, and 24V DC current and 5V DC current are supplied to the main control board 300B through this harness PM.

A 24V power line is connected to connector PC3 of the power supply control board 252B. This connector PC3 and connector SC1 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS1, and 24V DC is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through this harness PS1. A 5V power line is connected to connector PC4 of the power supply control board 252B. This connector PC4 and connector SC2 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness PS2, and 5V DC is supplied to the first sub-control board 400B through this harness PS2.

The main control board 300B may be supplied with 24V and 5V through separate harnesses, just like the first sub-control board 400B. The first sub-control board 400B may be supplied with 24V and 5V through a common harness, just like the main control board 300B.

The main control board 300B shown in FIG. 3 also shows a 24V power line and a 5V power line. A 24V DC current supplied through the harness PM flows through the 24V power line of the main control board 300B, and a 5V DC current supplied through the harness PM flows through the 5V power line of the main control board 300B. The main control board 300B shown in FIG. 3 also shows a main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and a main control 24V capacitor 24MC connected to the 24V power line, and a main control 5V monitor LED 5ML connected to the 5V power line. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML is an LED lamp for power supply monitoring that lights up or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML is an LED lamp for power supply monitoring that lights up or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. Note that no capacitor is provided on the 5V power line.

The main control board 300B also has a reel motor driving IC 322i mounted thereon. The reel motor driving IC 322i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the driving circuit 322 shown in FIG. 2. The reel motor driving IC 322i is also supplied with 24V DC and 5V DC. Although not shown, the main control board 300B also has the game control unit 302 and medal count control unit 350 shown in FIG. 2 mounted thereon, and also has integrated circuits that constitute the other driving circuits 324, 326, etc. mounted thereon.

In addition, the connector MC2 to which the reel motor driving IC 322i of the main control board 300B is connected is connected to the connector RC1 of the reel unit 109 by a harness MR1, the connector MC3 to which the reel motor driving IC 322i is connected is connected to the connector RC2 of the reel unit 109 by a harness MR2, and the connector MC4 to which the reel motor driving IC 322i is connected is connected to the connector RC3 of the reel unit 109 by a harness MR3. The 24V DC current and the 5V DC current supplied to the reel motor driving IC 322i are supplied to the reel unit 109 through each of these harnesses MR1-3, respectively, enabling each of the motors 110m-112m provided for each reel to be driven. In addition, the control signals (commands) that control each of the motors 110m-112m are sent from the main control board 300B through each of these harnesses MR1-3. Although a harness is connected to each motor, the connectors RC1 to RC3 on the reel unit 109 side can be combined into one connector, and the connectors MC2 to MC4 on the main control board 300B side can also be combined into one connector, and connected with one common harness. However, even though it is called one common harness, it is actually a collection of three harnesses MR1 to MR3.

Furthermore, the connector MC6 of the main control board 300B and the connector SC4 of the first sub-control board 400B are connected by a harness MS. This harness MS is a harness for control signals (for sending commands) and is not used to supply current.

The first sub-controller board 400B shown in FIG. 3 also shows a 24V power line and a 5V power line. A 24V DC current supplied through the harness PS1 flows through the 24V power line of the first sub-controller board 400B, and a 5V DC current supplied through the harness PS2 flows through the 5V power line of the first sub-controller board 400B. The first sub-controller board 400B shown in FIG. 3 also shows a sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and a sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC connected to the 24V power line, and a sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL connected to the 5V power line. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL is an LED lamp for power supply monitoring that lights up or blinks while a 24V DC current is flowing, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL is an LED lamp for power supply monitoring that lights up or blinks while a 5V DC current is flowing. Furthermore, the first sub-control board 400B also does not have a capacitor on the 5V power line.

The first sub-control board 400B also has a movable body motor driving IC 424i mounted thereon. This movable body motor driving IC 424i is an integrated circuit that constitutes the driving circuit 424 shown in FIG. 2. A direct current of 24 V and a direct current of 5 V are both supplied to the movable body motor driving IC 424i. Although not shown here, the first sub-control board 400B also has the basic circuit 402 shown in FIG. 2 mounted thereon, and also has integrated circuits that constitute the other driving circuits 424, 426, etc. mounted thereon.

The connector SC3 of the first sub-control board 400B, to which the movable body motor drive IC 424i is connected, and the connector DC1 of the performance movable body unit 160U are connected by a harness SD. The 24V DC current and 5V DC current supplied to the movable body motor drive IC 424i are supplied to the performance movable body unit 160U through this harness SD, enabling the motor 163m provided in the performance movable body unit 160U to be driven. In addition, a control signal (command) that controls the motor 163m is sent from the first sub-control board 400B through this harness SD.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 also includes a second sub-control unit 500 as shown in FIG. 2, and although not shown in FIG. 3, the second sub-control board is also supplied with 24V DC and 5V DC from the power supply control board 252B through a harness not shown. The second sub-control board is also connected to the first sub-control board 400B by a harness for control signals (command transmission). Furthermore, the second sub-control board is also connected to the performance device (performance image display device 157) in the same way as the first sub-control board 400B.

As explained above, the main control board 300B and the reel unit 109 are electrically connected by harnesses MR1-3. In addition, the first sub-control board 400B and the performance movable body unit 160U are electrically connected by a harness SD.

Here, based on the above configuration, the operation when the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 in the power-off state is opened and the left reel 110 is manually spun will be described. The power-off state may be a state in which the power switch 244 is off, a state in which the power switch 244 is on but the power cord 265 is not connected to the outlet, or a state in which no power is being supplied from the island equipment (the same applies below). If no power is being supplied from the island equipment, the power is off even if the power cord 265 is connected to the outlet and the power switch 244 is on. Even in such a power-off state, each reel 110 to 112 can be manually spun forward or backward.

All of the monitor LEDs shown in Figure 3 (power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL, power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL, main control 24V monitor LED 24ML, main control 5V monitor LED 5ML, sub control 24V monitor LED 24SL, and sub control 5V monitor LED 5SL) that are lit when power is applied are turned off when power is cut off.

However, when the left reel 110 is manually rotated, a current (induced current) due to the back electromotive force is generated in the motor 110m (see FIG. 3) that rotates the left reel 110. Continuing the explanation with reference to FIG. 3, the induced current generated in the motor 110m flows through the harness MR1 into the main control board 300B, and is supplied to the 24V power line and the 5V power line from the reel drive IC 322i. A main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR is provided between the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and ground, and a main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR is provided between the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML and ground. The main control 24V monitor LED 24ML is lit by the induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the main control 24V adjustment resistor 24MR, and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML is lit by the induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the main control 5V adjustment resistor 5MR. Furthermore, even if manual rotation is stopped, the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML continues to light for a while because the 24V power line is provided with the main control 24V capacitor 24MC. On the other hand, the 5V power line does not have a capacitor, so the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML goes out immediately when manual rotation is stopped. In other words, when manual rotation is stopped, the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML goes out before the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML. Note that a capacitor with a lower capacity than the main control 24V capacitor 24MC may also be provided on the 5V power line.

The induced current that flowed into the main control board 300B then flows through the harness PM into the power supply control board 252B, and is supplied to the 24V power line and the 5V power line from the connector PC2. A power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR is provided between the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL and ground, and a power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR is provided between the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL and ground. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL is lit by the induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, and the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL is lit by the induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Here, the LEDs of multiple boards, such as the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, are emitting light. Even if you stop rotating the motor manually, the 24V power supply line has a power supply control 24V capacitor 24PC, so the power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL will continue to light for a while. Also, the 5V power supply line has a power supply control 5V capacitor 5PC, so the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL will also continue to light for a while.

The induced current that flows into the power supply control board 252B further flows into the first sub-control board 400B through the harness PS1 and is supplied to the 24V power line from the connector SC1. A sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR is provided between the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and ground. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and ground. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL is lit by the induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR. The induced current that flows into the power supply control board 252B also flows into the first sub-control board 400B through the harness PS2 and is supplied to the 5V power line from the connector SC2. A sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR is provided between the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL and ground. The sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL is lit by the induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR. Here, the LEDs of multiple boards, such as the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B, the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, and the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B, are lit. Even if manual rotation is stopped, the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL will continue to light for a while because the sub-control 24V capacitor 24SC is provided on the 24V power line. On the other hand, since there is no capacitor on the 5V power line, the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL will immediately go out when manual rotation is stopped.

The above explanation explains the phenomenon that occurs when each harness MR1, PM, PS1, PS2 is properly connected to the connector and not broken. On the other hand, if the harness MR1 is broken or not properly connected to the connector RC1 and/or connector MC2 (disconnected or not fully inserted), none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 3 will light up no matter how much you manually spin the left reel 110, and the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and main control 5V monitor LED 5ML will remain off. As a result, if none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 3 or the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and main control 5V monitor LED 5ML do not light up even when you manually spin the left reel 110, you can suspect an abnormality in the harness MR1 or a poor connection with the connectors RC1 and MC2.

In addition, if the harness PM is broken or not properly connected to the connector MC5 and/or the connector PC2, when the left reel 110 is manually spun, the main control 24V monitor LED24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED5ML will light up, but the sub control 24V monitor LED24SL, the sub control 5V monitor LED5SL, the power control 24V monitor LED24PL and the power control 5V monitor LED5PL will not light up. As a result, if the main control 24V monitor LED24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED5ML are lit up when the left reel 110 is manually spun, but the sub control 24V monitor LED24SL, the sub control 5V monitor LED5SL, the power control 24V monitor LED24PL and the power control 5V monitor LED5PL are not lit up, an abnormality in the harness PM or a poor connection with the connectors MC5 and PC2 can be suspected.

In addition, even if the main control board 300B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) on the main control board 300B can be lit by manually spinning the left reel 110.

In addition, if the harness PS1 is broken or not properly connected to the connector PC3 and/or the connector SC1, when the left reel 110 is manually spun, only the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 3 will not light up. As a result, if the left reel 110 is manually spun and only the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 3 does not light up, an abnormality in the harness PS1 or a poor connection with the connectors PC3 and SC1 can be suspected. Furthermore, if the harness PS2 is broken or not properly connected to the connector PC4 and/or the connector SC2, when the left reel 110 is manually spun, only the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 3 will not light up. As a result, if the left reel 110 is manually spun and only the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 3 does not light up, an abnormality in the harness PS2 or a poor connection with the connectors PC4 and SC2 can be suspected.

Here, we have explained the case where the left reel 110 is manually spun in a power outage state, but the same applies when the middle reel 111 is manually spun in a power outage state, and when the right reel 112 is manually spun in a power outage state. Also, as the number of reels spun manually increases, the monitor LED will light up brighter. For example, when the left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112 are spun manually at the same time, the monitor LED will light up brighter than when only the left reel 110 is spun manually.

In addition, even if the LEDs used for purposes other than the monitor LEDs, such as the main control 24V monitor LED24ML, main control 5V monitor LED5ML, sub control 24V monitor LED24SL, sub control 5V monitor LED5SL, power supply control 24V monitor LED24PL, and power supply control 5V monitor LED5PL (for example, error monitoring LEDs that light up when an error occurs, or signal monitoring LEDs) are installed with an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line or 5V power line, they will light up if there is no electrical connection problem when the left reel 110 is manually spun in a power-off state. Therefore, even if the LEDs are used for purposes other than the monitor LEDs, it is possible to check for electrical connection problems.

Even if the power is cut off, the shutter 163 shown in Figure 1 can be opened and closed manually.

When the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, a current (induced current) is generated by the back electromotive force in the motor 163m (see FIG. 3) that opens and closes the shutter 163. Continuing the explanation with reference to FIG. 3, the induced current generated in the motor 163m flows through the harness SD into the first sub-control board 400B and is supplied to the 24V power line and the 5V power line from the movable body motor driving IC 424i. The sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL is lit by the induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the sub-control 24V adjustment resistor 24SR, and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL is also lit by the induced current because its resistance value is adjusted by the sub-control 5V adjustment resistor 5SR.

The induced current that flowed into the first sub-control board 400B then flows through the harness PS1 into the power supply control board 252B and is supplied to the 24V power line from the connector PC3. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL is lit by the induced current because its resistance is adjusted by the power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR. The induced current that flowed into the first sub-control board 400B also flows through the harness PS2 into the power supply control board 252B and is supplied to the 5V power line from the connector PC4. The power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL is also lit by the induced current because its resistance is adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Here, the LEDs of multiple boards, such as the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B and the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, are emitting light.

The induced current that flows into the power supply control board 252B further flows through the harness PM into the main control board 300B and is supplied from the connector MC5 to the 24V power line and the 5V power line. The power supply control 24V monitor LED 24PL is lit by the induced current because its resistance is adjusted by the power supply control 24V adjustment resistor 24PR, and the power supply control 5V monitor LED 5PL is lit by the induced current because its resistance is adjusted by the power supply control 5V adjustment resistor 5PR. Here, the LEDs of multiple boards, such as the LEDs (24PL, 5PL) of the power supply control board 252B, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B, and the LEDs (24ML, 5ML) of the main control board 300B, are emitting light.

The above explanation is of the phenomenon that occurs when each harness SD, PS1, PS2, and PM is connected to the connector normally and is not broken. On the other hand, if the harness SD is broken or not connected normally to the connector DC1 and/or connector SC3, none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 3 will light up, and the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL will remain off, no matter how many times the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed. As a result, if none of the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 3 or the sub-control 24V monitor LED 24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED 5SL do not light up even when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, an abnormality in the harness SD or a poor connection with the connectors DC1 and SC3 can be suspected.

Furthermore, if the harness PS1 is broken or not properly connected to the connector SC1 and/or connector PC3, the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL will light up when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, but the power supply control 24V monitor LED24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED24ML will not light up. As a result, if the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL are lit up when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, but the power supply control 24V monitor LED24PL and the main control 24V monitor LED24ML are not lit, an abnormality in the harness PS1 or a poor connection with the connectors SC1 and PC3 can be suspected. Furthermore, if the harness PS2 is broken or not properly connected to the connector SC2 and/or the connector PC4, when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL will light up, but the power supply control 5V monitor LED5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED5ML will not light up. As a result, if the sub-control 24V monitor LED24SL and the sub-control 5V monitor LED5SL are lit up when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, but the power supply control 5V monitor LED5PL and the main control 5V monitor LED5ML are not lit up, an abnormality in the harness PS2 or a poor connection with the connectors SC2 and PC4 can be suspected.

In addition, even when the first sub-control board 400B is not connected to the power supply control board 252B during cleaning, maintenance, or manufacturing, the LEDs (24SL, 5SL) of the first sub-control board 400B can be turned on by manually opening and closing the shutter 163.

In addition, if the harness PM is broken or not properly connected to the connector PC2 and/or connector MC5, then when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, only the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 3 will not light up. As a result, if only the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML among the monitor LEDs shown in FIG. 3 will not light up even when the shutter 163 is manually opened and closed, then an abnormality in the harness PM or a poor connection with the connectors PC2 and MC5 can be suspected.

Figure 4 shows an example in which a relay board is provided between the main control board 300B shown in Figure 3 and the reel unit 109 also shown in Figure 3. Below, the following will focus on the differences from the connection example described using Figure 3, and duplicated explanations may be omitted.

In this FIG. 4, the connectors MC5 and MC6 provided on the main control unit board 300B are omitted. A reel relay board 902B is shown between the main control unit board 300B and the reel unit 109 shown in FIG. 4.

The reel relay board 902B is provided with a connector RRM1 to which the harness MR11 connected to the connector MC2 of the main control board 300B connects, and a connector RRR1 to which the harness MR12 connected to the connector RC1 of the reel unit 109 connects. Also provided are a connector RRM2 to which the harness MR21 connected to the connector MC3 of the main control board 300B connects, and a connector RRR2 to which the harness MR22 connected to the connector RC2 of the reel unit 109 connects. Furthermore, also provided are a connector RRM3 to which the harness MR31 connected to the connector MC4 of the main control board 300B connects, and a connector RRR3 to which the harness MR32 connected to the connector RC3 of the reel unit 109 connects.

Even in the connection example in Figure 4, if the reels 110-112 are manually spun in a power outage state, monitor LEDs such as the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML will light up if everything is normal. However, if the multiple harnesses MR11, MR12, MR21, MR22, MR21, and MR32 between the main control board 300B and the reel unit 109 are broken or not connected properly, monitor LEDs such as the main control 24V monitor LED 24ML and the main control 5V monitor LED 5ML will not light up.

In the connection example in FIG. 4, the provision of the reel relay board 902B increases the number of harnesses and connectors compared to the connection example shown in FIG. 3, increasing the possibility of electrical connection failure. However, an induced current can be generated by manual operation in a power-off state, and electrical connection failure can be easily confirmed from the lit state of the monitor LED.

The reel relay board 902B may also be provided with a 24V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 24V power line, and a 5V monitor LED and an adjustment resistor on the 5V power line. By manually operating the reel in a power outage state to generate an induced current, and turning on these monitor LEDs if normal, it is possible to check for poor electrical connections.

In the explanation here, the left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112, and shutter 163 are given as examples of movable bodies, but they are not limited to these and any movable body driven by a motor can be used.

Furthermore, instead of an LED lamp that is lit by an induced current in a power failure state, a light-emitting means such as a seven-segment (SEG) display may be used. For example, it may be a seven-segment display that displays settings (e.g., setting 1 to setting 6) that indicate different degrees of advantage to the player. The requirement for the light-emitting means is that it must be visible. Note that these light-emitting means do not move even when the motor is driven. This is because the light-emitting means is not provided on a movable body that is driven and moved by the motor, but on a fixed substrate.

In the above explanation, adjustable resistors (24MR, 5MR, 24PR, 5PR, 24SR, 5SR) were used to light up the monitor LED with induced current in the power-off state, but any means capable of adjusting impedance will do, and is not limited to adjustable resistors. However, since problems can occur if a large amount of induced current flows even in the power-on state, it is necessary to adjust the impedance not only to facilitate the flow of induced current in the power-off state, but also to consider the state when electricity is flowing.

The above-described configuration is as follows:
A light emitting means;
A game machine including a movable body unit having a movable body that can be operated by driving a motor,
the motor is electrically connected to the light emitting means via a harness,
The light emitting means may emit light when the movable body is manually operated in a power interruption state to drive the motor and a current flows in due to a back electromotive force generated by the motor,
This is an example of a gaming machine characterized in that the light emitting means does not move even when the motor is driven.

Figure 5 is a configuration diagram of a gaming system including the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 shown in Figure 1.

As shown in FIG. 5, the gaming system S has the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the loaner machine 700, hall computer 600, hall management terminal 800, intermediate management terminal 810, and management server 820 also shown in FIG. 1. The loaner machine 700, hall computer 600, and hall management terminal 800 are collectively referred to as an external processing device. One of the features of this external processing device is that it is equipped with a memory means.

The hall management terminal 800 is a computer separate from the hall computer 600, and is installed in each amusement hall (hall) H1, H2, etc., and is connected to the lending machine 700. The lending machine 700 is connected to the slot machine 100, and therefore the hall management terminal 800 is connected to the slot machine 100 via the lending machine 700. Information on the number of medals exchanged between the lending machine 700 and the slot machine 100 (counting information and lending information), as well as information on the operating status of the slot machine 100, are input to the hall management terminal 800. The hall management terminal 800 records and manages this input information.

The management server 820 is provided for the overall management of the gaming system 1, and stores and manages information relating to the slot machines 100 and the rental machines 700, such as information identifying the slot machines 100 and information identifying the rental machines 700 (gaming machine installation information). The management server 820 is also connected to the hall management terminals 800 of many stores via the intermediate management terminals 810, and manages information obtained by communicating with the hall management terminals 800, such as information relating to the number of medals and information relating to the operating status of the slot machines 100.

<Communication sequence and communication content>
Commands are transmitted and received between the game control unit 302 and the medal count control unit 350. The game control unit 302 transmits game control unit commands (game control status command, game control priority command) to the medal count control unit 350 every 2.98 ms. Meanwhile, the medal count control unit 350 transmits medal count control commands (medal count control status command, response command) to the game control unit 302 every 5.96 ms. Note that the game control unit 302 transmits the game control priority command in preference to the game control status command. Also, the medal count control unit 350 transmits the response command corresponding to the game control priority command in preference to the medal count control status command.

In the communication between the gaming control unit 302 and the medal count control unit 350, and in the communication between the medal count control unit 350 and the lending machine 700, gaming machine status information, gaming machine performance information, and gaming machine installation information are sent and received.

Figure 6 is a table summarizing gaming machine status information, gaming machine performance information, and gaming machine installation information.

The gaming machine status information shown in FIG. 6(a) includes three types of status information: advantageous status information, setting status information, and front door status information. The advantageous status information is composed of information indicating whether or not the bonus equivalent to RB is in operation (RB information), information indicating whether or not the bonus equivalent to BB is in operation (BB information), and information indicating whether or not the bonus equivalent to AT (assist time) is in operation (AT information). The setting status information is composed of information indicating whether or not the setting is changed by operating the setting button 175 shown in FIG. 2 (setting change in progress information) and information indicating whether or not the setting is being confirmed (setting confirmation in progress information). The front door status information is information indicating whether or not the front door 102 is in an open state (door open information). The AT state is a gaming state in which auxiliary functions are activated to allow the player to obtain advantageous results, such as notification of the stop operation sequence of the stop buttons 137 to 139 and notification of the target pattern to be stopped.

The gaming machine performance information shown in FIG. 6(b) includes total number of coins inserted, total number of coins paid out, MY counter value information, total number of coins paid out from the game, total number of coins paid out from consecutive games, number of games played, and number of coins ratio monitor information. The total number of coins inserted is information that indicates the number of coins inserted that has accumulated since the power was turned on. Note that this does not include the number of coins for replay. The total number of coins paid out is information that indicates the number of coins paid out that has accumulated since the power was turned on. Note that this does not include the number of coins for replay. The MY counter value information is information that indicates the maximum value of the MY counter calculated after the power was turned on. The slot machine 100 has a state in which a notification of the stop operation sequence for an internally won role is executed, and the MY counter is a counter that counts the net increase in the number of coins since the transition to this state. The total number of coins paid out from the game is information that indicates the number of coins paid out due to the operation of the game that has accumulated since the power was turned on. The continuous feature total payout number information is information that indicates the number of medals paid out due to the operation of the RB accumulated since the power was turned on. The number of times played information is information that indicates the number of times played accumulated since the power was turned on. The feature ratio monitor information is information that indicates various ratios (feature ratio, continuous feature ratio, advantageous zone ratio, feature ratio with instructions, feature etc. state ratio) for evaluating the degree of gambling nature of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine installation information shown in FIG. 6(c) includes two pieces of information: gaming control unit information and medal count control unit information. The gaming control unit information is composed of the ID number information of the IC chip of the gaming control unit 302, the manufacturer code of that IC chip, and the product code of that IC chip. The medal count control unit information is composed of the ID number information of the IC chip of the medal count control unit 350, the manufacturer code of that IC chip, and the product code of that IC chip.

Figure 7 shows the communication sequence when a game control status command is sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350.

Figure 7 shows, from the left, the first sub-control unit 400, the game control unit 302, the medal count control unit 350, and the lending machine 700.

First, before explaining the game control state command, we will explain the communication between the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700. A medal count control unit 350 is connected to the lending machine 700, and communication between the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 is carried out between the medal count control unit 350 and the lending machine 700. Communication between the medal count control unit 350 and the lending machine 700 is carried out at intervals of 300 ms.

As shown in FIG. 7, the medal count control unit 350 transmits a gaming machine information notification and a counting notification to the lending machine 700. In addition, the lending machine 700 transmits a lending notification to the medal count control unit 350, and upon receiving this lending notification, the medal count control unit 350 returns a lending reception result response notification to the lending machine 700.

Figure 8 shows details of the communication between the medal count control unit 350 and the lending machine 700.

Figure 8 (a) shows the data structure of the message exchanged in the communication between the medal count control unit 350 and the lending machine 700. This message is composed of five types of items: message length, command, serial number, data section, and checksum. The message length stores the length of the entire message. The command stores a command code for identifying the type of gaming machine information notification, counting notification, lending notification, and lending reception result response notification. The serial number stores the serial number for gaming machine information notification, the counting serial number for counting notification, and the lending serial number for lending notification and lending reception result response notification. The range of each serial number is 0 to 255. When the power is turned on, the serial number becomes 0, and when it reaches 255, it returns to 1 and then repeats from 1 to 255. The data section stores various data, and the checksum stores the lowest 1 byte of the total obtained by adding up the data from the message length to the data section.

Figure 8 (b) is a diagram showing the specific contents of the data section of the gaming machine information notification. The data section of the gaming machine information notification stores a code representing the type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko gaming machine, a reel gaming machine, or an arrange ball gaming machine. In the case of this embodiment, a code representing a reel gaming machine is stored. The gaming machine information type includes hall control and fraud monitoring information in addition to the gaming machine performance information and gaming machine installation information described using Figure 6. The gaming machine information type stores a code for identifying which of these three types of information the information is.

Figure 9 (a) shows details of hole control and fraud monitoring information.

The game medal count information is information that represents the current game medal count stored in the RAM 358 of the medal count control unit 350.

The medal count information is information on the change in the number of medals inserted (-3 to 3 medals) since the previous gaming machine information notification, depending on the number of medals inserted and the number of medals returned if there are any returned medals when the settlement button 134 (see Figure 1) is operated. In other words, this information is based on the information on the number of medals inserted and the number of medals settled, which are included in the gaming control priority commands (insertion command, settlement command) sent from the gaming control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350.

The medal payout count information is information that indicates the number of medals paid out. This medal payout count information is based on the medal payout count information included in the game control priority command (payout command) sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350.

The advantageous state information is the advantageous state information shown in FIG. 6 (a) that was explained using FIG. 6. In addition, information that indicates the state of the gaming machine may be included.

Gaming machine error status information is information represented by an error code.

Figure 9 (b) is a list of error codes. The various errors shown in Figure 9 (b) are also handled by medal count control status commands, various processing commands sent from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400, and game control priority commands (error occurrence commands), which will be described later.

Only errors that require special explanation will be explained below. A medal count control disconnection is an error that occurs when the game control unit 302 detects a disconnection of the medal count control unit 350, and a game control disconnection is an error that occurs when the medal count control unit 350 detects a disconnection of the game control unit 302. A game sequence abnormality is an error in which the game progress order in the game control unit 302 is abnormal. A game control command serial number abnormality is an error in which the serial number of the command from the game control unit 302 is a value other than the previous value plus 1. A payout number abnormality is an error in which the payout number included in the game control status command is a payout number outside the range of 0 to 15. In other words, in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, the maximum number of payouts at one time is 15. A settlement number mismatch is an error in which the settlement number included in the game control priority command (settlement command) is a settlement number equal to or greater than the number of inserted coins. The chip ID number mismatch is an error that occurs when the IC chip number information in the game control unit information shown in FIG. 6(c) is different from the previous information. The medal count control RAM error is an error that indicates a defect in the RAM 358 of the medal count control unit 350. The loaner machine communication abnormality is an error that occurs when the VL signal from the loaner machine 700 is on but a loan notification is not received, as will be described in detail later. When any of the various errors shown in FIG. 9(b) occur, all seven segments of the indication monitor 125 shown in FIG. 1 are lit, and an error notification sound is output from the speaker 272. In addition, an error code for display is displayed on the performance image display device 157.

The gaming machine fraud information includes the setting status information and front door information shown in FIG. 6(a) as explained using FIG. 6, as well as information when fraud is detected, information indicating that the number of gaming medals has been cleared, and a security signal indicating that fraud is being detected.

The game information number information consists of the current bet number information and the payout number information. These two pieces of information are distinguished by type information. When the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted and a start lever acceptance command (game control state command) is sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350, the current bet number becomes the current bet number value included in the start lever acceptance command. When a payout command (game control state command) is sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350, the payout number becomes the payout number value included in the payout command.

Returning to the explanation using FIG. 8(b), the gaming machine information notification sent from the medal count control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 at 300 ms intervals stores gaming machine information of the code specified by the gaming machine information type. That is, when the gaming machine information type value is 0, gaming machine performance information is stored, when the gaming machine information type value is 1, gaming machine installation information is stored, and when the gaming machine information type value is 2, hall control and fraud monitoring information is stored. The gaming machine performance information, gaming machine installation information, and hall control and fraud monitoring information have different notification intervals, and the gaming machine performance information is notified once at the longest first time (e.g., 180 seconds), the gaming machine installation information is notified once at the second time (e.g., 60 seconds), and the hall control and fraud monitoring information is notified every shortest third time (e.g., 300 ms of the notification cycle). When the notification timing of these three pieces of information overlaps, the notification of the gaming machine installation information is given the highest priority, followed by the notification of the gaming machine performance information. The lowest priority is hole control and fraud monitoring information, which is the information that is notified the most frequently.

Figure 8 (c) is a diagram showing the specific contents of the data part of the counting notification transmitted from the medal count control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 at 300 ms intervals. As shown in Figure 7, the counting notification is notified within a range of 90 ms to 100 ms from the start of the gaming machine information notification. This is managed by a counting notification interval timer that is set to 90 ms in step S3303 shown in Figure 32, which will be described later. Also, as will be described in detail later, when the counting button 171 shown in Figure 1 is pressed once, the counting number increases by one medal, and when the counting button 171 is pressed multiple times until the 300 ms cycle arrives, the number of medals for the number of times it is pressed becomes the counting number. On the other hand, when the counting button 171 is pressed for 500 ms or more and the 300 ms cycle arrives, the counting number becomes 50 medals. In other words, the counting number can be set in units of one medal, or 50 medals can be set at once. However, if the counted number exceeds the value of the number of game medals stored in RAM 358, this value of the number of game medals is set as the counted number. The counted medal number information is information that represents the counted number determined by the operation of the count button 171 until the 300 ms cycle arrives. The counted cumulative medal number is information that represents the number of counted medals that has accumulated since the power was turned on.

Figure 8 (d) is a diagram showing the specific contents of the data part of the loan notification transmitted from the loaning machine 700 to the medal count control unit 350 at 300 ms intervals. As shown in Figure 7, the loaning machine 700 notifies the medal count control unit 350 of the loan notification within 170 ms from the start of receiving the count notification. The medal count control unit 350 monitors whether the loan notification is notified within 170 ms by a loan notification interval timer that is set to 170 ms in step S3502 shown in Figure 34 described later. When the loan button 707 of the loaning machine 700 shown in Figure 1 is operated, if the "money balance" of the card is a predetermined amount (e.g., 1000 yen) or more, the number of medals equivalent to the predetermined amount (e.g., 50 medals) becomes the number of loaned medals. On the other hand, if the "money balance" of the card is less than the predetermined amount, the number of medals converted from the current balance at a predetermined rate becomes the number of loaned medals. The information on the number of medals lent out is thus information that indicates the number of medals lent out in response to the operation of the lending button 707. Note that the specified amount or the number of medals equivalent to the specified amount can be set in advance in the lending machine 700.

Figure 8 (e) is a diagram showing the specific contents of the data section of the loan receipt result response sent from the medal count control unit 350 to the loaner machine 700. As will be described in more detail later, the medal count control unit 350 determines whether the number of loaned medals notified by the loan notification is 50 or less, whether the number of game medals stored in RAM 358 is less than the loan threshold (e.g., 15,000), whether counting processing has not been performed, etc., and determines the loaned medal count receipt result as either normal or abnormal. In the loan receipt result response, this receipt result is sent to the loaner machine 700.

Next, we will explain the game control status command that the game control unit 302 shown in Figure 7 sends to the medal count control unit 350 every 2.98 ms.

Figure 10 is a table showing game control state commands.

The game control status command is a 16-bit command, with the most significant bit of the upper byte being used as a strobe signal, the remaining upper 7 bits indicating the command type, and the lower byte indicating the content. Note that Figure 10 also shows the command offset used during transmission.

The gaming control unit 302 sends commands representing advantageous state information (RB information, BB information, AT information), and after 2.98 ms has passed, it sends commands representing setting state information (setting change in progress information, setting confirmation in progress information), and after 2.98 ms has passed, it sends a command representing front door state information (door open information). This completes the transmission of gaming machine state information.

After 2.98 ms, information showing the total number of inserted coins in 3 bytes (total number of inserted coins information) is sent in three byte-by-byte intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, the first byte is sent with a command type of 13H in the upper byte, and after 2.98 ms, the second byte is sent with a command type of 14H in the upper byte, and after 2.98 ms, the third byte is sent with a command type of 15H in the upper byte.

Next, after 2.98 ms, information showing the total number of coins dispensed in 3 bytes (total number of coins dispensed information) is sent in 3 separate byte increments at 2.98 ms intervals. That is, the first byte is sent with a command type of 16H in the upper byte, and after 2.98 ms, the second byte is sent with a command type of 17H in the upper byte, and after 2.98 ms, the third byte is sent with a command type of 18H in the upper byte.

Next, after 2.98 ms has elapsed, information (MY counter value information) expressing the MY counter value in three bytes is sent in three batches of one byte each at 2.98 ms intervals. That is, the first byte is sent with a command type in the upper byte of 19H, and after 2.98 ms the second byte is sent with a command type in the upper byte of 1AH, and after 2.98 ms the third byte is sent with a command type in the upper byte of 1BH.

After 2.98 ms, the total number of coins dispensed from the reels is transmitted in three parts, one byte at a time, at intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, the first byte is transmitted with a command type of 1CH in the upper byte, the second byte is transmitted with a command type of 1DH in the upper byte, and the third byte is transmitted with a command type of 1EH in the upper byte.

After 2.98 ms, the total number of consecutive payouts is expressed as 3 bytes (total number of consecutive payouts information), which is sent in three byte-by-byte increments at 2.98 ms intervals. That is, the first byte is sent with a command type of 1FH in the upper byte, and after 2.98 ms, the second byte is sent with a command type of 20H in the upper byte, and after 2.98 ms, the third byte is sent with a command type of 21H in the upper byte.

Next, after 2.98 ms, information expressing the number of plays in two bytes (number of plays information) is sent in two byte-by-byte intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, the first byte is sent with a command type of 22H in the upper byte, and after 2.98 ms, the second byte is sent with a command type of 23H in the upper byte.

Next, after 2.98 ms has elapsed, the role ratio monitor information is sent over 5 commands at 2.98 ms intervals. That is, the upper byte sends information representing the role ratio with a command type of 24H, the upper byte sends information representing the continuous role ratio with a command type of 25H, the upper byte sends information representing the advantageous zone ratio with a command type of 26H, the upper byte sends information representing the instruction-included role ratio with a command type of 27H, and the upper byte sends information representing the role etc. state ratio with a command type of 28H. This completes the transmission of gaming machine performance information.

After 2.98 ms have elapsed, the gaming control unit information is sent over 15 commands at intervals of 2.98 ms. That is, information expressing the IC chip ID number of the gaming control unit 302 in 4 bytes is sent in 1 byte increments four times at 2.98 ms intervals. Next, information expressing the IC chip manufacturer code of the gaming control unit 302 in 3 bytes is sent in 1 byte increments three times at 2.98 ms intervals. Next, information expressing the IC chip product code of the gaming control unit 302 in 8 bytes is sent in 1 byte increments eight times at 2.98 ms intervals. This completes the transmission of the gaming machine installation information.

Finally, the checksum value is transmitted. Once the transmission of the checksum value is complete, the system returns to transmitting advantageous state information, and thereafter repeats transmitting the game control state commands shown in FIG. 10 one by one in sequence every 2.98 ms. Note that if there is a game control priority command, the transmission of game control state commands is suspended until this command is transmitted.

Next, we will explain the medal count control status command that the medal count control unit 350 shown in Figure 7 sends to the game control unit 302 every 5.96 ms.

Figure 11 is a table showing medal count control state commands.

The medal count control status command is also a 16-bit command, with the most significant bit of the upper byte being used as a strobe signal, the remaining upper 7 bits indicating the command type, and the lower byte indicating the content. Note that Figure 11 also shows the command offset used when transmitting.

The medal count control unit 350 transmits VL signal information indicating whether the VL signal from the lending machine 700 is in the ON state. This VL signal information corresponds to basic information and may include other information.

Next, after 5.96 ms has elapsed, the information stored in RAM 358, which is represented by 2 bytes as the "number of game medals played", is divided into one upper byte and one lower byte, and transmitted at intervals of 5.96 ms. In other words, the lower byte is transmitted with a command type of 02H in the upper byte, and after 5.96 ms has elapsed, the upper byte is transmitted with a command type of 03H in the upper byte.

After 5.96 ms has elapsed, information indicating the counted number (counted number information) is sent, and after 5.96 ms has elapsed, information indicating the number of loaned sheets (loaned number information) is sent.

Finally, the error code described with reference to FIG. 9(b) is transmitted. Once transmission of the error code is complete, the system returns to transmitting the VL signal information, and thereafter repeats transmitting the medal count control status commands shown in FIG. 11 in sequence every 5.96 ms. Note that if there is a response command to the game control priority command, transmission of the medal count control status commands is suspended until this command is transmitted.

Next, we will explain the security commands sent from the game control unit 302 shown in Figure 7 to the first sub-control unit 400 at 100 ms intervals.

The security command includes VL signal information indicating whether the VL signal is on or not, door open information indicating whether the front door 102 is open or not, information indicating the "number of game medals" stored in RAM 358, information indicating the counted number, and information indicating the number of loaned medals. Note that the information indicating the "number of game medals", information indicating the counted number, and information indicating the number of loaned medals are information sent from the medal count control unit 350 by the medal count control status command.

In addition, various processing commands are also sent from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400. Examples of the various processing commands include a normal return command when power is restored, a setting change start command related to a setting value change, a setting change end command including the changed setting value, an error occurrence command and an error release command, a bet command including the number of coins inserted, a settlement button command indicating that the settlement button has been pressed, a performance information command including performance information, a start lever acceptance command indicating that the operation of the start button 135 has been accepted, first to third press commands accompanying the acceptance of the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139, a game information command including game information, and a payout start command indicating the start of payout. In addition to the errors represented by the error codes described using FIG. 9(b), errors in the error occurrence command and error release command include an error indicating that the number of game medals displayed is close to the upper limit, a door open error in which the front door 102 is opened, and a lending machine abnormality error in which the VL signal has been turned off.

Figure 12 shows the communication sequence when a game control priority command is sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350.

The game control priority command is a command that is sent with priority over the game control status command. If the medal control unit 350 requests retransmission after sending the game control priority command, the game control unit 302 will again send the game control priority command to the medal control unit 350.

Figure 13 (a) shows details of the game control priority command.

There are two types of game control priority commands: those that, when sent to the medal count control unit 350, return a response command from the medal count control unit 350, and those that do not return a response command and continue to send the medal count control status command. The former game control priority command is called game control priority command 1, and the latter game control priority command is called game control priority command 2. Figure 12 shows the communication sequence when game control priority command 1 is sent.

Game control priority command 1 includes a payout command, an insert command, and a settlement command. The payout command transmits the number of coins to be paid out (0-15 coins) with a command type in the upper byte of 04H, then transmits a command sequence number with a command type in the upper byte of 05H, and finally transmits a checksum with a command type in the upper byte of 06H. In other words, when sending a payout command, three commands are sent in succession.

The input command transmits the number of sheets to be inserted (0 to 3 sheets) with a command type of 07H in the upper byte, then transmits the command sequence number with a command type of 08H in the upper byte, and finally transmits a checksum with a command type of 09H in the upper byte. In other words, even when sending an input command, three commands are sent in succession.

The settlement command sends the number of coins to be settled (0-3 coins) with a command type whose high-order byte is 0AH, then sends the command sequence number with a command type whose high-order byte is 0BH, and finally sends a checksum with a command type whose high-order byte is 0CH. In other words, when sending a settlement command, three commands are sent in succession.

When the medal count control unit 350 shown in FIG. 12 receives game control priority command 1, it sends a response command.

Figure 13 (b) shows details of the response command sent back from the medal count control unit 350 to the game control unit 302.

Response commands may be sent in response to a payout command (payout response), in response to an insert command (insertion response), or in response to a settlement command (settlement response). Response commands have a value of 00H in the upper byte, which is the command type value. A payout response is a response command that includes one of the following: normal, abnormal, or a request to retry the payout command. Note that normal here corresponds to the completion of payout, and abnormal corresponds to the number of game medals exceeding the payout threshold (for example, 16,383 medals) due to payout.

The input response will be a response command that contains one of the following: normal, abnormal, or a request to retry the input command. Note that normal here corresponds to input completion, and abnormal corresponds to input failure or invalid input.

The settlement response is a response command that includes one of the following: normal, abnormal, or a request to re-request the settlement command. Note that normal here corresponds to settlement completion, and abnormal corresponds to the number of game medals that have been played exceeding the settlement threshold (e.g., 16,383 medals) as a result of settlement. Note that the settlement threshold is the same threshold value as the payout threshold described above.

Figure 14 shows the communication sequence when game control priority command 2 is sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350.

As shown in FIG. 13(a), the game control priority command 2 includes an error occurrence command, a RAM clear command, and a start lever operation command. The error occurrence command is a command type whose upper byte is 01H, and includes various errors shown in FIG. 9(b).

The RAM clear command is a command type with the upper byte set to 02H, and is a command that includes information indicating whether the RAM 308 is normal as determined by the game control unit 302, or whether the RAM 308 is defective as determined by the game control unit 302.

The start lever acceptance command is a command type with the upper byte being 03H. The bet amount is confirmed when the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted, and so this command contains information indicating the confirmed bet amount (current bet amount: 1 to 3).

"Pattern Arrangement"
A predetermined number of different symbols are arranged on each of the reels 110 to 112. In order to enhance the entertainment value of the game, the slot machine 100 in this embodiment is configured to stop the corresponding reel 110 to 112 within the maximum reel-in range from the position where the reel is stopped.

Types of winning roles
The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include a special combination, a replay combination, and a small combination. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and any combination may be adopted.

<<Types of internal winning roles>>
In a game, an internal winning combination is determined by a lottery at the start of the game, and in that game, it is possible to win a combination corresponding to this internal winning combination. Note that, depending on the combination, the result of the internal winning combination may be carried over to the next game.

Types of game states
The slot machine 100 is provided with various states with different degrees of advantage, and the degree of advantage is changed by transitioning between these states, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

<<Processing Overview>>
The following describes, with reference to the drawings, the processing of the game control unit 302, medal count control unit 350, first sub-control unit 400, and second sub-control unit 500. Note that this embodiment employs a so-called medal-less configuration in which actual medals are not used, but information equivalent to the number of real medals (virtual medal count), and in the following description, this information will be referred to as "medal count."

<<Game control unit main processing>>
First, a game control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 will be described with reference to Fig. 15. Note that Fig. 15 is a flow chart showing the flow of the game control unit main process.

As described above, the game control unit 302 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when power is applied. The CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 that receives this start signal is reset and started by a reset interrupt, and executes the game control unit main processing shown in FIG. 15 according to a control program previously stored in the ROM 306.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. These initial settings include setting the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting interrupt prohibition, initial settings of the I/O 310, initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308 (including the MY counter described below), and setting operation permission and initial values for the WDT 314. Note that if any settings are changed, the contents of the RAM 308 are initialized. The contents of the RAM 308 are also initialized if it is determined during the recovery process that there is an abnormality in the backup data of the RAM 308. When this initialization is performed, a RAM clear command including information on whether the initialization was completed normally is sent to the medal count control unit 350.

In step S102, the medal insertion/start lever acceptance process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 17.

In step S103, valid winning lines are determined.

In step S104, the winning role selection table stored in ROM 306 is read out according to the current game state, and an internal lottery (role selection) is performed using this and the random number obtained from the random number generation circuit 316 to determine the internal winning role. If any winning role (including an activated role) is selected as an internal winner as a result of the internal lottery, the flag for that winning role is turned on.

In step S105, reel stop data corresponding to the stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the game control unit 302.

In step S106, on the condition that the play interval timer (which is subtracted in the timer update process described below) is 0, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate, and an initial value is set to the play interval timer. When the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate, preparations are made to send a reel rotation start command to the first sub-control unit 400. After that, when the reels 110 to 112 reach a predetermined rotation speed and the optical sensors provided on each reel detect and grasp the pattern positions of each reel, the stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is enabled. The play interval counter ensures the minimum time required for one play (4.1 seconds in this embodiment), reducing the risk of gambling.

In step S107, a reel stop control process is executed. In this process, when any of the stop buttons 137-139 is pressed after the stop operation is enabled, the reel 110-112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137-139 is stopped. Specifically, each time a stop operation is performed, the stop table of the reel stop data is referenced, and the reel 110-112 corresponding to the stop operation is stopped according to the number of reel-in frames set in the stop table. In addition, for the first stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared, and for the second stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared. In addition, for each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110-112 stop, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third stop commands) to the first sub-control unit 400. When all the reels 110-112 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S108.

In step S108, a winning determination process is performed. Here, if a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination is displayed on an activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. After determining the winning combination, preparations are made to send a winning command to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S109, the medal awarding process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 22.

In step S110, game state control processing is performed. Here, the status regarding the game state is updated based on the results of the game.

This completes one game. After this, the game will proceed by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-mentioned process.

Next, the medal insertion/start lever acceptance process (step S102) in the game control unit main process of FIG. 15 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 16. This figure is a flowchart of the medal insertion/start lever acceptance process (step S102) in FIG. 15.

First, in step S1001, which is executed first, it is determined whether or not there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S1003, and if there is any error status, the process proceeds to step S1002.

In step S1002, an error notification process corresponding to the error status is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1001 again.

In step S1003, one interrupt time waiting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1004.

In step S1004, interrupt processing is prohibited and the process proceeds to step S1005.

In step S1005, it is determined whether or not a setting key operation has been accepted. If a setting key operation has been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1006, and if a setting key operation has not been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1007.

In step S1006, a process is performed to confirm that the setting key operation has been accepted, and the process proceeds to step S1001 again.

In step S1007, it is determined whether the VL signal is on. This VL signal is a signal that is always sent in an on state from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control unit 350. The game control unit 302 knows the state of the VL signal based on the information sent from the medal count control unit 350. If this VL signal is on, the process proceeds to step S1008, and if the VL signal is off, the process proceeds again to step S1001.

In step S1008, it is determined whether or not operation of the start lever 135 has been accepted. If operation of the start lever 135 has been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1009, and if operation of the start lever 135 has not been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1011.

In step S1009, it is determined whether the replay flag is on. This replay flag is set on when a replay role is won and a replay is granted. If the replay flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1010, and if the replay flag is on, the medal insertion/start lever acceptance process ends.

In step S1010, the current number of bets (current bet number) is compared with the number required to start playing (startable number). If the current number of bets is less than the startable number, the process proceeds to step S1011, and if the current number of bets is equal to or greater than the startable number, the process proceeds to step S1012.

In step S1011, medal insertion processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1001 again. Details of medal insertion processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 17.

In step S1012, 03H is set in the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) sent to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1013. Note that the value set here is used to indicate that the command being sent is a start lever acceptance command.

In step S1013, the current bet number is set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) sent to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1014.

In step S1014, a process for sending a priority command to the medal count control unit is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21.

In step S1015, a start lever acceptance command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400, and this medal insertion/start lever acceptance process is terminated.

Next, the details of the medal insertion process (step S1011) in the medal insertion/start lever reception process in FIG. 16 will be described with reference to FIG. 17. This figure is a flowchart of the medal insertion process (step S1011) in FIG. 16.

First, in step S1101, which is executed first, it is determined whether or not operation of the settlement button 134 has been accepted. If operation of the settlement button 134 has been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1102, and if operation of the settlement button 134 has not been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1103.

In step S1102, the settlement button process is executed, and the medal insertion process is terminated. Details of the settlement button process will be described later using FIG. 18.

In step S1103, it is determined whether or not operation of either of the bet buttons 130, 132 has been accepted. If operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 has been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1104, and if operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 has not been accepted, the medal insertion process ends.

In step S1104, it is determined whether the replay flag is on. This replay flag is a flag that is set on when a replay role is won and a replay is awarded. If the replay flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1105, and if the replay flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1114.

In step S1105, the requested number is set to 0, and the process proceeds to step S1106. Note that this requested number is a value used to set the number of medals exchanged with the medal count control unit 350.

In step S1106, the current bet amount is compared with the maximum bet amount (3 in this embodiment). If the current bet amount is not the same as the maximum bet amount, the process proceeds to step S1107, and if the current bet amount is equal to the maximum bet amount, the process proceeds to step S1110.

In step S1107, the maximum bet amount minus the current bet amount is set as the requested amount, and the process proceeds to step S1108.

In step S1108, it is determined whether the bet button 130, 132 determined to have been operated is the one-coin bet button 130. If the bet button 130, 132 determined to have been operated is the one-coin bet button 130, the process proceeds to step S1109; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1110.

In step S1109, the requested number is set to 1, and the process proceeds to step S1110.

In steps S1105 to S1109 above, if the current bet is the maximum bet, the requested number will be 0. Furthermore, if the MAX BET button 132 is operated when the current bet is less than the maximum bet, the requested number will be 3 if the maximum bet is 3 and the current bet is 0, if the current bet is 1 the requested number will be 2, and if the current bet is 2 the requested number will be 1. Furthermore, if the 1 BET button 130 is operated when the current bet is less than the maximum bet, the requested number will be 1.

In step S1110, 07H is set in the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) sent to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1111. Note that the value set here is used to indicate that the command being sent is an input command.

In step S1111, a process for sending change information to the medal count control unit is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1112. Details of the process for sending change information to the medal count control unit will be described later with reference to FIG. 19.

In step S1112, the system waits for a response to the command sent in step S1111, and determines whether the response is "normal." If the response is "normal," the system proceeds to step S1113; if the response is not "normal," the system proceeds to step S1114.

In step S1113, the requested number is added to the current bet number, and the process proceeds to step S1114.

In step S1114, a bet button acceptance command is sent to the first sub-control unit, and this medal insertion process is terminated.

Next, the details of the settlement button process (step S1102) during medal insertion processing in FIG. 17 will be described with reference to FIG. 18. This figure is a flowchart of the settlement button process (step S1102) in FIG. 17.

First, in step S1201, which is executed first, a settlement button acceptance command is sent to the first sub-control unit, and then the process proceeds to step S1202.

In step S1202, it is determined whether the replay flag is on. This replay flag is a flag that is set on when a replay role is won and a replay is awarded. If the replay flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1203, and if the replay flag is on, the settlement button process ends.

In step S1203, the requested number of coins and the current bet number are set, and the process proceeds to step S1204.

In step S1204, 0AH is set in the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) sent to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1205. The value set here is used to indicate that the command being sent is a settlement command.

In step S1205, a process for sending change information to the medal count control unit is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1206. Details of the process for sending change information to the medal count control unit will be described later with reference to FIG. 19.

In step S1206, it is determined whether the response to the command sent in step S1205 was "normal." If the response is "normal," the process proceeds to step S1207; if the response is not "normal," the settlement button process ends.

In step S1207, the current bet amount is set to 0, and the settlement button process ends.

Next, using FIG. 19, the details of the process of sending change information to the medal count control unit in the medal insertion process in FIG. 17 (step S1111), the process of sending change information to the medal count control unit in the settlement button process in FIG. 18 (step S1205), and the process of sending change information to the medal count control unit in the medal awarding process in FIG. 22 (step S1605) will be described. This figure is a flowchart of the process of sending change information to the medal count control unit in FIG. 17, FIG. 18, and FIG. 22 (steps S1111, S1205, and S1605).

First, in step S1301, which is executed first, the remaining number of transmissions is set to an initial value (4 in this embodiment), and the process proceeds to step S1302.

In step S1302, information indicating that the response result is "abnormal" is set, and the process proceeds to step S1303. This response result is overwritten by the response result from the medal count control unit 350, but if it is not overwritten (there is no response), it indicates "abnormal."

In step S1303, it is determined whether or not there is any error status. If there is any error status, the process of sending variable information to the medal count control unit is terminated, and if there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S1304.

In step S1304, the response waiting timer is set to its initial value (a value equivalent to 100 ms in this embodiment), and the process proceeds to step S1305.

In step S1305, the remaining number of transmissions is decremented by one, and the process proceeds to step S1306.

In step S1306, if the remaining number of transmissions is not 0, the process proceeds to step S1307, and if the remaining number of transmissions is 0, the process of sending variable information to the medal count control unit is terminated.

In step S1307, the triple command transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1308. Details of this triple command transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG. 20.

In step S1308, if the value of the response waiting timer is not 0, proceed to step S1309, and if the value of the response waiting timer is 0, proceed again to step S1303.

In step S1309, if a response has been received from the medal count control unit 350, the process proceeds to step S1310; if not, the process proceeds to step S1308 again.

In step S1310, if the response received from the medal count control unit 350 is "request again," proceed again to step S1303; if the response received is anything other than this, proceed to step S1311.

In step S1311, the response received from the medal count control unit 350 is stored as the response result, and the process proceeds to step S1312.

In step S1312, the command serial number is incremented by 1, and the process of sending variable information to the medal count control unit is terminated.

Next, the triple command transmission process (step S1307) in the process of transmitting variable information to the medal count control unit in FIG. 19 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 20. This figure is a flowchart of the triple command transmission process (step S1307) in FIG. 19. Here, a triple command refers to a command consisting of a group of three commands transmitted in succession, and in this embodiment, the deposit command, settlement command, and withdrawal command shown in FIG. 13(a) are each a triple command.

First, in step S1401, which is executed first, the checksum value is set to 0 (initialized), and the process proceeds to step S1402.

In step S1402, the requested number is set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) sent to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1403.

In step S1403, a process for sending a priority command to the medal count control unit is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21.

In step S1404, the checksum value is updated using the transmission contents (lower byte).

In step S1405, the value of the most significant byte of the content (2 bytes) sent to the medal count control unit 350 is incremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1406.

In step S1406, the command sequence number is set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) sent to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1407.

In step S1407, a process for sending a priority command to the medal count control unit is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21.

In step S1408, the checksum value is updated using the transmission contents (lower byte).

In step S1409, the value of the most significant byte of the content (2 bytes) sent to the medal count control unit 350 is incremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S1410.

In step S1410, a checksum is set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) sent to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1411.

In step S1411, a process for sending a priority command to the medal count control unit is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21.

Next, the details of the medal count control unit priority command transmission process (step S1014) in the medal insertion/start lever reception process in FIG. 16 and the medal count control unit priority command transmission process (steps S1403, S1406, step S1409) in the triple command transmission process in FIG. 20 will be described with reference to FIG. 21. This figure is a flowchart of the medal count control unit priority command transmission process (steps S1014, S1403, S1406, step S1409) in FIG. 16 and FIG. 20.

First, in step S1501, which is executed first, it is determined whether the transmission buffer for the medal count control unit is empty. If this transmission buffer is empty, the process proceeds to step S1502, and if the transmission buffer is not empty, step S1501 is repeated.

In step S1502, the transmission contents (2 bytes) are set in the transmission buffer for the medal count control unit, and the process of sending the priority command to the medal count control unit is terminated.

Next, the medal awarding process (step S109) in the game control unit main process of FIG. 15 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 22. This figure is a flowchart of the medal awarding process (step S109) in FIG. 15.

First, in step S1601, which is executed first, it is determined whether or not there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S1602, and if there is any error status, the process proceeds to step S1603.

In step S1602, the value of the number of coins to be dispensed is set as the requested number, and the process proceeds to step S1604.

In step S1603, an error notification process corresponding to the error status is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1601 again.

In step S1604, 04H is set in the upper byte of the content (2 bytes) sent to the medal count control unit 350, and the process proceeds to step S1605. Note that the value set here is used to indicate that the command being sent is a payout command.

In step S1605, the process of sending variable information to the medal count control unit (Figure 19) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1606.

In step S1606, it is determined whether the response result to the command sent in step S1605 is "normal." If the response result is "normal," the process proceeds to step S1607; if the response result is not "normal," the process proceeds to step S1608.

In step S1607, a payout command is sent to the first sub-control unit, and the medal awarding process is terminated.

In step S1608, if there is no error request, a command indicating that the number of game medals is in an overflow state (cannot be added by payout) is sent to the first sub-control unit, and the process proceeds to step S1601.

<Game control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, a game control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the game control unit 302 will be described with reference to Fig. 23. Note that Fig. 23 is a flow chart showing the flow of the game control unit timer interrupt process.

The game control unit 302 is equipped with a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 1.49 ms), and this timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger to start the game control unit timer interrupt process at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. This timer interrupt start process includes processes such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to a stack area.

In step S202, WDT314 is periodically restarted (in this embodiment, once every 1.49 ms, which is the period of the game control unit timer interrupt) so that the count value of WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (600 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that a processing abnormality is not detected).

When power is interrupted, the evacuation process is executed in step S214 (described later) and a WDT interrupt occurs, and when power is restored, the state is restored to when this evacuation process was executed. However, for example, if power is restored early, communication may be resumed before the lending machine 700 detects that the slot machine 100 has been cut off, which may result in a communication error. Taking such a situation into consideration, this embodiment is configured so that once a power interruption occurs, communication is not resumed until the lending machine 700 determines that a power interruption has occurred. The initial value of the count value of WDT314 described above is one example for achieving this configuration.

In step S203, an error monitoring process is executed. Here, processes are performed to respond to various errors, such as abnormalities in communication with the medal count control unit 350 and abnormalities in the open/close state of the door. If there is any error status, an error occurrence command including information on this error status is sent to the medal count control unit 350.

In step S204, an input port status update process is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input ports of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the presence or absence of the detection signals is stored in signal status storage areas partitioned for each of the various sensors 318 in the RAM 308. The status of the optical sensors is confirmed in this process.

In step S205, various game processes are executed, and processing according to the interrupt status is executed.

In step S206, the medal count control command reception process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

In step S207, the game control command transmission process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26.

In step S208, a presentation command transmission process is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission by the main process or timer interrupt process of the game control unit 302 are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In this embodiment, the output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, with bit 15 being strobe information (when on, indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 being command types (e.g., basic command, bet command, start lever acceptance command, internal winning command, reel rotation start command accompanying the start of rotation of the reels 110 to 112, first to third press commands accompanying acceptance of the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139, first to third stop commands accompanying the stopping of the reels 110 to 112, winning command, payout number command and payout completion command accompanying medal payout process, game status update command, etc.), and bits 0 to 10 being command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

The first sub-control unit 400 is able to determine the presentation control in response to changes in game control in the game control unit 302 based on the command type contained in the received output schedule information, and is also able to determine the content of the presentation control based on the command data information contained in the output schedule information.

In step S209, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring processing, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area in step S204 are first read out to monitor for errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal payout abnormalities, etc., and if an error is detected (not shown), error processing is executed. Furthermore, the various lamps 336 and various seven-segment (SEG) displays are set according to the current game state.

In step S210, a security command transmission process is executed. Specifically, a security command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 at intervals of 100 ms. This security command includes VL signal information indicating whether the VL signal is on or not, door open information indicating whether the front door 102 is open or not, information indicating the "number of game medals" stored in RAM 308, information indicating the counted number, and information indicating the number of loaned medals.

In step S211, a timer update process is performed. For example, a process is executed to update various timers according to their respective time units, such as subtracting from the game interval timer.

In step S212, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low voltage signal is received (if a power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S214, and if a low voltage signal is not received (if a power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S213.

In step S213, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set back to the original registers, and other processes are performed. After that, the process returns to the game control unit main process shown in FIG. 15.

On the other hand, in step S214, information that needs to be saved (return data), such as specific variables and stack pointers to restore the state at the time of power outage when power is restored, is saved in a specified area of RAM 308, a checksum value for the specified area that includes at least the used area of RAM 308 is derived and stored in RAM 308, and the power status is set to "normal."

Next, the details of the disconnection determination process, which is one of the error monitoring processes (step S203) in the game control unit timer interrupt process in FIG. 23, will be described using FIG. 24. This figure is a flowchart of the disconnection determination process, which is one of the error monitoring processes (step S203) in FIG. 23.

First, in step S2001, which is executed first, if the value of the timer for determining disconnection is not 0, the process proceeds to step S2002, and if the value of the timer for determining disconnection is 0, the process proceeds to step S2003.

In step S2002, if the strobe signal sent from the medal count control unit 350 is on, the process proceeds to step S2004, and if the strobe signal is off, the process proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2003, the timer for determining disconnection is set to an initial value (a value equivalent to 20 ms in this embodiment), and the process proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2004, the timer for determining disconnection is set to an initial value (a value equivalent to 20 ms in this embodiment), and the process proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2005, if the value of the timer for determining disconnection is 1, the process proceeds to step S2006, and if the value of the timer for determining disconnection is not 1, the disconnection determination process ends.

In step S2006, it is determined whether or not there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S2007, and if there is any error status, the disconnection determination process ends.

In step S2007, information indicating a disconnection error with the medal count control unit 350 is set as the error status, and the disconnection determination process is terminated.

Next, the medal count control command reception process (step S206) in the game control unit timer interrupt process in FIG. 23 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 25. This figure is a flowchart of the medal count control command reception process (step S206) in FIG. 23.

First, in step S2101, which is executed first, if the strobe signal sent from the medal count control unit 350 is on, the process proceeds to step S2102, and if the strobe signal is off, the medal count control command reception process ends.

In step S2102, the information in RAM 308 is updated based on the command received from the medal count control unit 350. These commands include six types of medal count control status commands (Figure 11) and a response command (Figure 13(b)), and the type of command can be identified by the upper byte. In other words, the type of command is identified by referring to the upper byte of the received command, and the contents of RAM 308 are updated based on the contents.

In step S2103, it is determined whether or not there is any error status. If there is no error status, the process proceeds to step S2104, and if there is any error status, the medal count control command reception process ends.

In step S2104, if the received command contains an error code (an error code in the medal count control unit 350), the error code is set as the error status. If there is no error in the medal count control unit 350, an error code indicating normality is set as the error status, but in this case, there is no error status.

Next, the details of the game control command transmission process (step S207) in the game control unit timer interrupt process in FIG. 23 will be described with reference to FIG. 26. This figure is a flowchart of the game control command transmission process (step S207) in FIG. 23.

First, in step S2201, which is executed first, it is determined whether the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350 is empty. If this transmission buffer is empty, the process proceeds to step S2202, and if this transmission buffer is not empty, the process proceeds to step S2207.

In step S2202, the command offset (see FIG. 10) is repeatedly incremented and updated by 1 within the range of 1 to 41 (41 is followed by 1). As described with reference to FIG. 10, this embodiment employs a configuration in which 41 types of commands are repeatedly sent in sequence from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350. The command offset is used to sequentially switch the type of command to be sent.

In step S2203, the command corresponding to the command offset and the information that is the target of this command are read to generate the transmission content, and this transmission content is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350.

In step S2204, it is determined whether the command offset is 41 or not. Of the 41 types of commands sent from the game control means to the medal count control unit 350, the last command (the 41st command sent) is a checksum generated based on the contents of the commands sent up to that point. That is, for command offsets 1 to 40, the checksum is updated (step S2205), and when the command offset becomes 41, the checksum updated up to that point is sent to the medal count control unit 350 (steps S2203, S2207), and the checksum value is initialized to generate a new checksum (step S2206). After the above processing, proceed to step S2207.

In step S2207, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350 are output to the medal count control unit 350 (the I/O output port is updated). The information output here is received by the medal count control unit 350 when the strobe signal is set to ON in step S2209, which will be described later.

In step S2208, it is determined whether the strobe signal for the medal count control unit 350 is off. If the strobe signal for the medal count control unit 350 is off, the process proceeds to step S2209, and if the strobe signal for the medal count control unit 350 is on, the process proceeds to step S2210.

In step S2209, the strobe signal for the medal count control unit 350 is set to ON, and the game control state command transmission process is terminated.

In step S2210, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350 are cleared, and the process proceeds to step S2211.

In step S2211, the strobe signal for the medal count control unit 350 is set to off, and the game control state command transmission process is terminated.

<<Medal count control unit main processing>>
Next, a medal count control unit main process executed by the CPU 354 of the medal count control unit 350 will be described with reference to Fig. 27. Note that Fig. 27 is a flow chart showing the flow of the medal count control unit main process.

As described above, the medal count control unit 350 is provided with a start-up signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) that outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when power is applied. The CPU 354 of the medal count control unit 350 that receives this start-up signal is reset and started by a reset interrupt, and executes the medal count control unit main process shown in FIG. 27 according to a control program previously stored in the ROM 356.

When the power is turned on, first, the power-on process is performed in step S301. Here, the WDT is initialized and restarted until the power supply voltage reaches a predetermined voltage (9V) or higher, and when the power supply voltage reaches the predetermined voltage, access to RAM 358 is permitted and the interrupt period is set. In addition, settings such as communication circuits are also performed.

In step S302, RAM abnormality determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S303. Details of this RAM abnormality determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 28.

In step S303, a preparation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S304. Details of this preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 31.

In step S304, the process of transmitting the gaming machine information notification is executed, and the process proceeds to step S305. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 32.

In step S305, the count notification transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S306. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

In step S306, a process for confirming receipt of the loan notification is executed, and the process proceeds to step S307. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35.

In step S307, if the loan notification receipt flag is on, proceed to step S308; if the flag is off, proceed to step S304 again.

In step S308, the process of sending a loan acceptance result response is executed, and the process proceeds to step S304 again. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

Next, the RAM abnormality determination process (step S302) in the medal count control unit main process in FIG. 27 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 28. This figure is a flowchart of the RAM abnormality determination process (step S302) in FIG. 27.

First, in step S3001, if the power supply status is "normal", the process proceeds to step S3002, and if the power supply status is other than "normal", the process proceeds to step S3005.

In step S3002, a checksum value is derived based on the data in RAM 358, and the process proceeds to step S3003.

In step S3003, the checksum value derived in step S3002 is compared with the checksum value derived at the time of power outage. If these values are the same, the checksum value is determined to be normal and the process proceeds to step S3004. If these values are different, the checksum value is determined to be abnormal and the process proceeds to step S3005.

In step S3004, a normal RAM clear process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3008. In this embodiment, there are four types of RAM clear processes, and as shown in FIG. 29, the normal RAM clear process has the fewest targets to be cleared. In addition to an area for storing information during gameplay, RAM 358 also has an area for storing hardware information such as a chip ID, an area for storing information regarding the state of the gaming machine such as the ratio of advantageous zones, and a buffer for temporarily storing information received from the game control unit 302, but the normal RAM clear process mainly clears the area for storing information during gameplay.

In step S3005, the full RAM clear process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3006. Of the four types of RAM clear process, the full RAM clear process clears the largest number of areas, and clears the entire area as shown in FIG. 29.

In step S3006, information indicating "RAM failure" is stored as RAM failure information, and the process proceeds to step S3007.

In step S3007, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S3008.

In step S3008, if the game medal count clear button 172 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S3009, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3011.

In step S3009, the number of game medals is set to 0, and the process proceeds to step S3010.

In step S3010, information indicating "detection has occurred" is set as the game medal count clear detection information, and the process proceeds to step S3011.

In step S3011, the power-on flag is set to on.

In step S3012, execution of the interrupt process is permitted.

In step S3013, this determination process is repeated until a strobe signal ON from the game control unit 302 is detected, and when a strobe signal ON is detected, the process proceeds to step S3014.

In step S3014, execution of the interrupt process is prohibited.

In step S3015, the power-on flag is set to off.

In step S3016, it is determined whether or not a game control unit RAM clear command, one of the game control priority commands shown in FIG. 13(a), has been received. If this command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3017; if not, the process proceeds to step S3020.

In step S3017, if the information contained in the game control unit RAM clear command indicates that the clear was "normal," proceed to step S3018; if the information does not indicate that the clear was "normal," proceed to step S3019.

In step S3018, the limited (2) RAM clear process is executed. In this process, the area other than the chip information, the role ratio monitor information, etc. is cleared, as shown in FIG. 29.

In step S3019, the limited (1) RAM clear process is executed. In this process, the area other than the chip information, etc. is cleared, as shown in FIG. 29.

In step S3020, if information indicating "RAM failure" is stored as the RAM failure information, the process proceeds to step S3021, and if information indicating "RAM failure" is not stored as the RAM failure information, the RAM abnormality determination process ends.

In step S3021, information indicating "RAM failure" (error code E8) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S3022, an error request setting process is executed. Details of this error request setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 30.

Next, the details of the error request setting process (step S3022) in the RAM abnormality determination process etc. in FIG. 28 will be described with reference to FIG. 30. This figure is a flowchart of the error request setting process (step S3022) in FIG. 28 etc.

First, in step S3101, which is executed first, if no error code has been set in the error request, the process proceeds to step S3102, and if an error code has already been set, the error request setting process ends.

In step S3102, the value of the error request setting value (error code) is set as the error request.

In step S3103, if the error request is "E9" shown in FIG. 9(b), the process proceeds to step S3104; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3105.

In step S3104, the rental device communication abnormality error setting flag is set to on, and the process proceeds to step S3105.

In step S3105, if the error request is "E7" as shown in FIG. 9(b), the process proceeds to step S3106; otherwise, the error request setting process ends.

In step S3106, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to ON, and this error request setting process ends.

Next, the details of the preparation process (step S303) in the medal count control unit main process in FIG. 27 will be described with reference to FIG. 31. This figure is a flowchart of the preparation process (step S303) in FIG. 27.

First, in step S3201, which is executed first, the rental device communication anomaly counter is set to an initial value (5 in this embodiment).

In step S3202, the chip information (ID, manufacturer code, product code) of the medal count control unit 350 is updated. This information is stored in the ROM of the medal control unit.

In step S3203, interrupt processing is permitted.

In step S3204, this process is repeated while the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is on, and when the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to off, the process proceeds to step S3205.

In step S3205, the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer is set to an initial value (a value equivalent to 60.196 seconds in this embodiment).

In step S3206, the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer is set to an initial value (a value equivalent to 180.588 seconds in this embodiment).

Next, the details of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S304) in the medal count control unit main process in FIG. 27 will be described with reference to FIG. 32. This figure is a flowchart of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S304) in FIG. 27.

First, in step S3301, which is executed first, this process is repeated until the value of the gaming machine information notification interval timer reaches 0, and when the timer reaches 0, the process proceeds to step S3320.

In step S3302, the gaming machine information notification interval timer is set to an initial value (a value equivalent to 300.98 ms in this embodiment).

In step S3303, the count notification interval timer is set to a value equivalent to 90 ms.

In step S3304, the number of game medals is set as the number of game medals for counting determination.

In step S3305, the gaming machine information type acquisition process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 33.

In step S3306, preparations are made to transmit various types of gaming machine information according to the gaming machine information type. Specifically, if the gaming machine information type value is 0, preparations are made to transmit gaming machine performance information, if the gaming machine information type value is 1, preparations are made to transmit gaming machine installation information, and if the gaming machine information type value is 2, preparations are made to transmit hall control and fraud monitoring information.

In step S3307, if the value of the gaming machine information type is 2, proceed to step S3308, and if the value of the gaming machine information type is other than 2, proceed to step S3311.

In step S3308, the number of inserted medals is set to 0.

In step S3309, the number of medals paid out is set to 0.

In step S3310, the game information count value is set to 0.

In steps S3311 to S3317, various pieces of gaming machine information (message length, command type, gaming machine information serial number, gaming machine type, gaming machine information type, gaming machine information, checksum) (see Figures 8(a) and 8(b)) corresponding to the gaming machine information type prepared for transmission in step S3306 are sequentially transmitted. Note that the checksum is a value updated based on the contents transmitted up to that point.

In step S3318, the gaming machine information serial number is updated by one within the range of 1 to 255. Note that the value of the gaming machine information serial number is 0 only when the power is turned on.

Next, the details of the gaming machine information type acquisition process (step S3305) in the gaming machine information notification transmission process in FIG. 32 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. This figure is a flowchart of the gaming machine information type acquisition process (step S3305) in FIG. 32.

First, in step S3401, which is executed first, if the value of the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S3402, and if the value of the timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3404.

In step S3402, the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer is set to an initial value (a value equivalent to 60.196 seconds in this embodiment).

In step S3403, the gaming machine information type is set to 1, and the gaming machine information type acquisition process is terminated.

In step S3404, the gaming machine information type is set to 2, and the process proceeds to step S3405.

In step S3405, if the value of the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S3406, and if the timer value is not 0, the gaming machine information type acquisition process ends.

In step S3406, the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer is set to an initial value (a value equivalent to 180.588 seconds in this embodiment).

In step S3407, the gaming machine information type is set to 0, and the gaming machine information type acquisition process is terminated.

Next, the details of the counting notification sending process (step S305) in the medal count control unit main process in FIG. 27 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. This figure is a flowchart of the counting notification sending process (step S305) in FIG. 27.

First, in step S3501, which is executed first, this process is repeated until the count notification interval timer value reaches 0, at which point the process proceeds to step S3502.

In step S3502, the loan notification interval timer is set to an initial value (a value equivalent to 170 ms in this embodiment).

In steps S3503 to S3505, the message length, command type, and counting number are sent sequentially to the rental device 700.

In step S3506, the count value is set to 0.

In step S3507, if the VL signal is on, the process proceeds to step S3508, and if the VL signal is off, the process proceeds to step S3513. This VL signal is normally transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control unit 350 in an on state at all times.

In step S3508, if the number of sheets to be counted is not 0, proceed to step S3509, and if the number of sheets to be counted is 0, proceed to step S3513.

In step S3509, the input prohibition flag is set to on.

In step S3510, if the number of medals to be counted is equal to or greater than the number of medals for counting determination, the process proceeds to step S3511, and if the number of medals to be counted is less than the number of medals for counting determination, the process proceeds to step S3512.

In step S3511, the count number is set to the value of the number of game medals for counting determination.

In step S3512, the count number is set to the value of the planned count number.

In step S3513, the counted number is sent to the rental machine 700.

In step S3514, the counted number is subtracted from the number of game medals.

In step S3515, the planned number to be counted is set to 0.

In step S3516, the input prohibition flag is set to off.

In step S3517, the counted number of medals is added to the cumulative counted number of medals.

In step S3518, the total number of medals counted is sent to the lending machine 700.

In step S3519, a checksum is sent to the rental device 700. Note that the checksum value sent here is an updated value based on the data sent to the rental device 700 in this counting notification sending process.

In step S3520, the counting serial number is updated by 1 in the range of 1 to 255. Note that the value of the counting serial number is 0 only when the power is turned on.

Next, the details of the loan notification reception confirmation process (step S306) in the medal count control unit main process in FIG. 27 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. This figure is a flowchart of the loan notification reception confirmation process (step S306) in FIG. 27.

First, in step S3601, which is executed first, if the loan notification receipt flag is off, the process proceeds to step S3602, and if the flag is on, the loan notification receipt confirmation process ends.

In step S3602, if the value of the loan notification interval timer is 0, proceed to step S3603, and if the value is not 0, return to step S3601.

In step S3603, if the VL signal is on, the process proceeds to step S3604, and if the signal is off, the lending notification reception confirmation process is terminated. This VL signal is a signal that is always sent in the on state from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control unit 350.

In step S3604, the value of the rental device communication error counter is decremented by 1, and the rental notification reception confirmation process is terminated.

Next, the loan receipt result response transmission process (step S308) in the medal count control unit main process in FIG. 27 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 36. This figure is a flowchart of the loan receipt result response transmission process (step S308) in FIG. 27.

First, in step S3701, which is executed first, an initial value (5 in this embodiment) is set in the rental device communication error counter.

In step S3702, the rental machine communication abnormality error setting flag is set to off.

In step S3703, if the loan quantity receipt result is "normal", proceed to step S3704, and if it is other than "normal", proceed to step S3707.

In step S3704, the value of the loan serial number is set to the normal loan serial number.

In step S3705, the value of the loan serial number is set to the confirmation loan serial number. The confirmation loan serial number is a value used for comparison with the next loan serial number (step S4104 in FIG. 39), and step S3705 is provided in preparation for this comparison.

In step S3706, the confirmation lending serial number is updated by 1 in the range of 1 to 255. Note that the value of the confirmation lending serial number is 0 only when the power is turned on.

In steps S3707 to S3711, the following information is sent to the rental device 700 in sequence: message length, command type, normal rental serial number, rental quantity receipt result, and checksum. Note that the checksum is a value updated based on the previously sent content.

In step S3712, if the loan quantity receipt result is "normal", proceed to step S3712, and if it is other than "normal", end the loan receipt result response sending process.

In step S3713, a wait process is performed until the transmissions in steps S3707 to S3711 are completed.

In step S3714, the number of loaned medals is added to the number of game medals, and the loan receipt result response sending process is terminated.

<Medal count control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, a medal count control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the medal count control unit 350 will be described with reference to Fig. 37. Note that Fig. 37 is a flow chart showing the flow of the medal count control unit timer interrupt process.

The medal count control unit 350 is equipped with a counter timer that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 0.745 ms), and this timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger to start medal count control unit timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S401, a timer interrupt start process is performed. This timer interrupt start process includes processes such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU to a stack area.

In step S402, the WDT is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every 0.745 ms, which is the period of the medal count control unit timer interrupt) to prevent the WDT count value from exceeding the initial setting value and causing a WDT interrupt (to prevent the detection of a processing abnormality).

In step S403, an input port status update process (port read) is performed. In this input port status update process, the input contents for the I/O input port are stored in the signal status storage area in RAM 358.

In step S404, the loan notification reception process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38.

In step S405, the process of updating the number of sheets to be counted is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.

In step S406, the game control unit executes a command reception process. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41.

In step S407, error monitoring processing is performed. Details of this processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 52.

In step S408, a process for sending a medal count control command to the game control unit is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 53.

In step S409, the display unit display process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 54.

In step S410, a timer update process is performed to update various timers according to their respective time units.

In step S411, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If a low voltage signal is received (if a power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S413, and if a low voltage signal is not received (if a power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S412.

In step S412, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S401 are set back to the original registers, and other processing is performed. After that, the process returns to the medal count control unit main processing shown in FIG. 27.

Meanwhile, in step S413, information that needs to be saved (return data), such as specific variables and stack pointers to return to the state at the time of power outage when power is restored, is saved in a specified area of RAM 358, a checksum value for a specified area that includes at least the used area of RAM 358 is derived and stored in RAM 358, and the power status is set to "normal." Note that the game control unit 302 also executes a similar process (step S214 in FIG. 23) when it detects a power outage, but if the process ends before the process on the game control unit 302 side ends, it will not be possible to receive commands from the game control unit 302. To prevent such problems from occurring, this embodiment employs a circuit configuration in which the process ends after the process on the game control unit 302 side ends.

Next, the details of the loan notification reception process (step S404) in the medal count control unit timer interrupt process in FIG. 37 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. This figure is a flowchart of the loan notification reception process (step S404) in FIG. 37.

First, in step S4001, which is executed first, the loan notification receipt flag is set to off.

In step S4002, if a loan notification is received from the loaner device 700, the process proceeds to step S4003; if not, the loan notification reception process is terminated.

In step S4003, the information in RAM 358 is updated based on the received loan notification. That is, the data included in the loan notification is stored in RAM 358.

In step S4004, the loan quantity determination process is executed. Details of this process will be described later using FIG. 39.

In step S4005, the result of the determination in step S4004 is set as the number of loaned sheets received.

In step S4006, the loan notification receipt flag is set to on, and the loan notification receipt process is terminated.

Next, the details of the loaned number determination process (step S4004) in the loan notification reception process of FIG. 38 will be described with reference to FIG. 39. This figure is a flowchart of the loaned number determination process (step S4004) in FIG. 38.

First, in step S4101, which is executed first, the judgment result is set to "abnormal."

In step S4102, a checksum is calculated from the received loan notification data.

In step S4103, the checksum value included in the received loan notification is compared with the value calculated in step S4102, and if the two are equal, the system determines that the notification is normal and proceeds to step S4104; if the two are different, the loan count determination process ends.

In step S4104, the value of the loan serial number contained in the received loan notification is compared with the value of the confirmation loan serial number stored in RAM 358. If the two are equal, the process proceeds to step S4105. If the two are different, the loan quantity determination process ends. Note that if the previous loan notification was received normally, the confirmation loan serial number here will be the value set in steps S3705 and S3706 in FIG. 36 (the updated loan serial number from the previous time).

In step S4105, if the message length and command type information of the received loan notification correspond to the loan notification, it is determined to be normal and the process proceeds to step S4106; otherwise, the loan quantity determination process is terminated.

In step S4106, if the value of the number of loaned sheets included in the received loan notification is 0, the process proceeds to step S4111, and if the value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4107.

In step S4107, if the number of game medals is less than 15,000, the process proceeds to step S4108, and if the number is 15,000 or more, the lending number determination process ends.

In step S4108, it is determined whether the gaming machine information type value of the previously sent gaming machine information notification was 2, i.e., whether the gaming machine information notification was about hall control/fraud monitoring information. If the gaming machine information type value is 2, the process proceeds to step S4109, and if the value is not 2, the lending number determination process is terminated.

In step S4109, if the count value in the previously sent count notification is 0, proceed to step S4110, and if the value is not 0, end this loan count determination process.

In step S4110, if the value of the loan quantity included in the received loan notification is 50 or less, the process proceeds to step S4111, and if the value is greater than 50, the loan quantity determination process is terminated.

In step S4111, the judgment result is set to "normal" and the loan quantity judgment process is terminated.

Next, the details of the planned count number update process (step S405) in the medal count control unit timer interrupt process in FIG. 37 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. This figure is a flowchart of the planned count number update process (step S405) in FIG. 37.

First, in step S4201, which is executed first, if the power-on flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4202, and if the flag is off, the process ends the update process for the number of sheets to be counted.

In step S4202, if the VL signal is on, the process proceeds to step S4203, and if the VL signal is off, the process proceeds to step S4213. Note that this VL signal is normally transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control unit 350 in an on state at all times.

In step S4203, if the count button 171 is being operated, proceed to step S4204, and if the button is not being operated, proceed to step S4210.

In step S4204, if the count long press flag is off, proceed to step S4205, and if the flag is on, proceed to step S4208.

In step S4205, if the value of the count long press timer is 0, proceed to step S4206, and if the value is not 0, proceed to step S4207.

In step S4206, the count long press timer is set to its initial value (a value equivalent to 500 ms in this embodiment), and the process proceeds to step S4207.

In step S4207, if the value of the count long press timer is 1, proceed to step S4208, and if the value is not 1, proceed to step S4210.

In step S4208, the count long press flag is set to on.

In step S4209, the value of the planned count number is set to 50, and the planned count number update process is terminated.

In step S4210, if the count button 171 was previously operated (if the count button 171 was released), the process proceeds to step S4211; otherwise, the process ends the process of updating the planned count number.

In step S4211, if the count long press flag is off, proceed to step S4212, and if the flag is on, proceed to step S4213.

In step S4212, 1 is added to the value of the planned count number, and the planned count number update process is terminated.

In step S4213, the count long press flag is set to off.

In step S4214, the count long press timer value is set to 0.

In step S4215, the value of the planned count is cleared (set to 0), and the planned count update process is terminated.

Next, the details of the game control unit command reception process (step S406) in the medal count control unit timer interrupt process in FIG. 37 will be described with reference to FIG. 41. This figure is a flowchart of the game control unit command reception process (step S406) in FIG. 37.

First, in step S4301, which is executed first, if a change in the strobe signal from the game control unit 302 from off to on is detected, the process proceeds to step S4302; otherwise, the game control unit command reception process ends.

In step S4302, the game control command disconnection timer is set to an initial value (a value equivalent to 190 ms in this embodiment).

In step S4303, if the received command is a game control status command, the process proceeds to step S4304, and if the received command is not a game control status command (it is a game control priority command), the process proceeds to step S4305.

In step S4304, a game control state command reception process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

In step S4305, the game control priority command reception process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

Next, the details of the game control state command reception process (step S4304) in the game control unit command reception process in FIG. 41 will be described using FIG. 42. This figure is a flowchart of the game control state command reception process (step S4304) in FIG. 41.

First, in step S4401, which is executed first, if the received command is a command to transmit a checksum, the process proceeds to step S4404, and if it is any other command, the process proceeds to step S4402. In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which 41 types of commands are repeatedly transmitted from the game control means to the medal count control unit 350, and the final command is a command to transmit a checksum calculated from the contents of the previous 40 types of commands. In other words, for the first through 40th commands, the process proceeds to step S4402, and for the 41st command, the process proceeds to step S4404.

In step S4402, the contents of the command reception buffer are updated according to the contents of the received command.

In step S4403, the checksum is updated based on the contents of the received command, and the game control status command reception process is terminated.

In step S4404, the checksum value updated in step S4403 based on the contents of the 1st to 40th commands is compared with the checksum value included in the command received from the game control unit 302, and if the two are equal, it is determined to be normal and the process proceeds to step S4405, and if the two are different, the game control status command reception process is terminated.

In step S4405, the checksum value updated in step S4403 is cleared.

In step S4406, the value of the gaming machine status information buffer (the value of the gaming machine status information shown in FIG. 6(a)) from the contents of the command receiving buffer is set in RAM 358.

In step S4407, if the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4408, and if the flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4410.

In step S4408, the acquired chip ID is obtained based on the information in the gaming machine installation information buffer from the contents of the command receiving buffer.

In step S4409, if the chip ID stored in RAM 358 matches the acquired chip ID acquired in step S4408, the process proceeds to step S4410, and if they do not match, the process proceeds to step S4414.

In step S4410, the value of the gaming machine installation information buffer (the value of the gaming machine installation information shown in FIG. 6(c)) from the contents of the command receiving buffer is set in RAM 358.

In step S4411, the value of the role ratio monitor information buffer from the contents of the command reception buffer is set in RAM 358.

In step S4412, the value of the gaming machine performance information buffer from the contents of the command receiving buffer is set in RAM 358. Steps S4411 and S4412 set the value of the gaming machine performance information shown in FIG. 6(b) in RAM 358.

In step S4413, the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is set to off, and this game control status command reception process is terminated.

In step S4414, information indicating "chip ID number mismatch" (error code E7) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4415, the error request setting process in FIG. 30 is executed, and this game control status command receiving process is terminated.

Next, the details of the game control priority command reception process (step S4305) in the game control unit command reception process in FIG. 41 will be described using FIG. 43 and FIG. 44. These figures are flowcharts of the game control priority command reception process (step S4305) in FIG. 41.

First, in step S4501, which is executed first, if a triple command is received, the process proceeds to step S4502, and if a command other than a triple command is received, the process proceeds to step S4514 in FIG. 44. As described above, a triple command is a command consisting of a group of three commands sent in succession, and in this embodiment, the input command, settlement command, and payout command shown in FIG. 13(a) are each triple commands. In other words, if the above triple command is received among the game control priority commands, the process proceeds to step S4502, and if an error occurrence command, RAM clear command, or start lever acceptance command other than these commands is received, the process proceeds to step S4514 in FIG. 44.

In step S4502, if the last command of the triplet command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4504, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4503. In this embodiment, the last command of the triplet command is a checksum, and the value of this checksum is calculated based on the contents of the commands excluding the last command. In other words, for commands excluding the last command, the process proceeds to step S4503, where their contents are stored in the receive buffer, and when the last command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4504.

In step S4504, information indicating "request again" is set in the response command.

In step S4505, a checksum is calculated based on the contents of the receive buffer updated in step S4503.

In step S4506, the checksum value calculated in step S4505 is compared with the checksum value included in the last command of the triplet command, and if the two are equal, the process is determined to be normal and proceeds to step S4507, but if the two are different, the game control priority command reception process is terminated.

In step S4507, if the game control command serial number update flag described below is on, the process proceeds to step S4508, and if the flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4510.

In step S4508, the serial number value of the triplet command stored in the receive buffer is set to the game control command serial number value.

In step S4509, the game control command serial number update flag is set to off.

Note that steps S4507 to S4509 are provided to initialize the command sequence number for determination.

In step S4510, if the value of the serial number of the triplet command stored in the receive buffer is equal to the value of the game control command serial number (the game control command serial number (command serial number for determination) updated in the previous S4511), proceed to step S4511, and if they are different, proceed to step S4512.

In step S4511, the game control command serial number is incremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S4514 in FIG. 44.

In step S4512, information indicating "game control command serial number abnormality" (error code E3) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4513, the error request setting process in FIG. 30 is executed, and this game control priority command receiving process is terminated.

In step S4514 of FIG. 44, if the received command is a RAM clear command, proceed to step S4515; otherwise, proceed to step S4516.

In step S4515, the RAM clear command is received. Note that in this embodiment, nothing is executed here.

In step S4516, if the received command is an input command, proceed to step S4517; otherwise, proceed to step S4518.

In step S4517, the command submission reception process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 45.

In step S4518, if the received command is a settlement command, proceed to step S4519; otherwise, proceed to step S4520.

In step S4519, the settlement command reception process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 46.

In step S4520, if the received command is a start lever reception command, proceed to step S4521; otherwise, proceed to step S4522.

In step S4521, the start lever reception command reception process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

In step S4522, if the received command is a payout command, proceed to step S4523; otherwise, proceed to step S4524.

In step S4523, the payout command reception process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 49.

In step S4523, an error occurrence command reception process is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51.

Next, the details of the input command reception process (step S4517) in the game control priority command reception process in FIG. 43 and FIG. 44 will be described with reference to FIG. 45. This figure is a flowchart of the input command reception process (step S4517) in FIG. 44.

First, in step S4601, which is executed first, information indicating "request again" is set in the response command.

In step S4602, if the input prohibition flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4603, and if the flag is on, the input command reception process ends.

In step S4603, information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command.

In step S4604, if the number of game medals is equal to or greater than the value contained in the received command (the value contained in the first command of the triple command), the process proceeds to step S4605; otherwise, the input command reception process ends.

In step S4605, the value contained in the received command (the value contained in the first command of the triple command) is added to the number of inserted medals.

In step S4606, the value contained in the received command (the value contained in the first command of the triple command) is added to the current bet value.

In step S4607, the value contained in the received command (the value contained in the first command of the triple command) is subtracted from the number of game medals.

In step S4608, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and the input command reception process ends.

Next, the details of the settlement command reception process (step S4519) in the game control priority command reception process in FIG. 43 and FIG. 44 will be described with reference to FIG. 46. This figure is a flowchart of the settlement command reception process (step S4519) in FIG. 44.

First, in step S4701, which is executed first, the value contained in the received command (the value contained in the first command of the triple command) is subtracted from the value of the current bet.

In step S4702, if the current bet value is 0, proceed to step S4703, and if the value is not 0, proceed to step S4706.

In step S4703, the value contained in the received command (the value contained in the first command of the triple command) is subtracted from the number of inserted medals.

In step S4704, the value contained in the received command (the value contained in the first command of the triple command) is added to the number of game medals.

In step S4705, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and the settlement command reception process is terminated.

In step S4706, information indicating "settlement quantity mismatch" (error code E6) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4707, the error request setting process in FIG. 30 is executed, and this settlement command reception process is terminated.

Next, the details of the start lever reception command reception process (step S4521) in the game control priority command reception process in FIG. 43 and FIG. 44 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. This figure is a flowchart of the start lever reception command reception process (step S4521) in FIG. 44.

First, in step S4801, which is executed first, the payout command acquisition flag is set to on.

In step S4802, if the game interval abnormality timer is 0, the process proceeds to step S4803, and if the timer is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4807.

In step S4803, the game interval abnormality timer is set to its initial value (a value equivalent to 4.1 seconds in this embodiment).

In step S4804, the type information setting value is set to 11H (see FIG. 9(a)), and in the following step S4805, the value of the received command (the current number of bets in the gaming control unit 302) is set to the count information setting value. The information set here is later included in the gaming machine information and transmitted to the lending machine 700.

In step S4806, the game information setting process is executed, and the start lever reception command reception process is terminated. Details of the game information setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 48.

In step S4807, information indicating "game interval abnormality" (error code E5) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4808, the error request setting process in FIG. 30 is executed, and this start lever acceptance command reception process is terminated.

Next, the game information setting process (step S4806) in the start lever reception command reception process in FIG. 47 and the game information setting process (step S4A19) in the payout command reception process in FIG. 49 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 48. This figure is a flowchart of the game information setting process (steps S4806, S4A19) in FIG. 47 and FIG. 49.

First, in step S4901, which is executed first, the number of game play information items is incremented by 1.

In step S4902, if the number of pieces of game information is 1, proceed to step S4903, and if the number of pieces of game information is not 1 (is 2), proceed to step S4905.

In step S4903, the type information setting value (the value set in step S4804 in FIG. 47 or step S4A14 in FIG. 49) is set as type information 1.

In step S4904, the count information setting value is set as count information 1, and this game information setting process is terminated. Note that here, if the value set in step S4804 of FIG. 47 is set as type information 1, the value set in step S4805 is set, and if the value set in step S4A14 of FIG. 49 is set as type information 1, the value set in step S4A16 or step S4A18 is set.

In step S4905, the type information setting value (the value set in step S4804 in FIG. 47) is set as type information 2.

In step S4906, the count information setting value (the value set in step S4805 in FIG. 47) is set as count information 2, and this game information setting process is terminated.

Note that type information 2 and count information 2 are provided to transmit information about both when play begins quickly after payout (within the transmission period to the rental machine 700). In other words, when payout information (such as step S4A14 in FIG. 49) is set in type information 1 and count information 1, information on the current number of bets (such as step S4804 in FIG. 47) may be set in type information 2 and count information 2. Note that the reels spin and stop between the start of play and payout, and even if there is type information or count information during that time, it is transmitted (cleared) to the rental machine 700, so payout information is not set in type information 2 and count information 2.

Next, the details of the payout command reception process (step S4523) in the game control priority command reception process in FIG. 43 and FIG. 44 will be described with reference to FIG. 49. This figure is a flowchart of the payout command reception process (step S4523) in FIG. 44.

First, in step S4A01, which is executed first, the game medal count clear detection information is cleared.

In step S4A02, if the payout command acquisition flag is on, proceed to step S4A03, and if the flag is off, proceed to step S4A09.

In step S4A03, if the replay has been won, proceed to step S4A04, and if the replay has not been won, proceed to step S4A05.

In step S4A04, the game medal count addition value is set to 0.

In step S4A05, information indicating "abnormal number of dispensed coins" (error code E4) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4A06, if the value of the received command (the value contained in the first command of the triplet command) is 15 or less, proceed to step S4A07, and if the value is greater than 15, proceed to step S4A10.

In step S4A07, the number of medals to be paid out is set to the value contained in the received command (the value contained in the first command of the triple command).

In step S4A08, the game medal count addition value is set to the value contained in the received command (the value contained in the first command of the triple command).

In step S4A09, information indicating "game sequence abnormality" (error code E2) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4A10, the error request setting process in FIG. 30 is executed, and this payout command receiving process is terminated.

In step S4A11, a process to check whether the number of game medals has overflowed is executed. Details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. 50.

In step S4A12, if the response command information indicates "normal," proceed to step S4A13; otherwise, end this payout command reception process.

In step S4A13, the payout command acquisition flag is set to off.

In step S4A14, the type information setting value is set to 21H (see Figure 9 (a)).

In step S4A15, if a replay win occurs, proceed to step S4A18; otherwise, proceed to step S4A16.

In step S4A16, the value of the received command (the value included in the first command of the triplet command) is set as the count information setting value. Note that the first command of the payout commands here includes the number of coins to be paid out by the gaming control unit 302, and this number of coins to be paid out is set as the count information setting value. The information set here is included in the gaming machine information together with the type information setting value and is sent to the lending machine 700.

In step S4A17, the current bet is set to 0.

In step S4A18, the current number of bets is set as the count information setting value. The information set here is included in the gaming machine information together with the type information setting value and is sent to the lending machine 700.

In step S4A19, the game information setting process of FIG. 48 is executed, and this payout command receiving process is terminated.

Next, the details of the medal count overflow confirmation process (step S4A11) in the payout command reception process in FIG. 49 will be described with reference to FIG. 50. This figure is a flowchart of the medal count overflow confirmation process (step S4A11) in FIG. 49.

First, in step S4B01, which is executed first, information indicating "abnormality" is set in the response command.

In step S4B02, the sum of the number of game medals and the game medal number addition value is set as the addition result.

In step S4B03, if the value of the sum is less than or equal to 16,383, the process proceeds to step S4B04, and if the value of the sum is greater than 16,383, the game medal count overflow confirmation process ends.

In step S4B04, the number of game medals is set to the value of the addition result.

In step S4B05, information indicating "normal" is set in the response command, and this medal count overflow confirmation process is terminated.

Next, the details of the error occurrence command reception process (step S4524) in the game control priority command reception process of FIG. 43 and FIG. 44 will be described with reference to FIG. 51. This figure is a flowchart of the error occurrence command reception process (step S4524) in FIG. 44.

First, in step S4C01, which is executed first, the error request is cleared. If an error occurrence command is received from the game control unit 302, the error on the medal count control unit 350 side is cleared by the processing here, so the error on the game control unit 302 is processed with priority.

In step S4C02, if the received command contains information indicating a "game control disconnection" (error code E1), the process proceeds to step S4C08; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4C03.

In step S4C03, if the received command contains information indicating an "abnormal game sequence" (error code E2), the process proceeds to step S4C08; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S4C04.

In step S4C04, if the received command contains information indicating "game control command serial number abnormality" (error code E3), proceed to step S4C08; otherwise, proceed to step S4C05.

In step S4C05, if the received command contains information indicating a "medal count control RAM error" (error code E8), proceed to step S4C08; otherwise, proceed to step S4C06.

In step S4C06, if the received command contains information indicating a "medal count control disconnection" (error code E0), proceed to step S4C08; otherwise, proceed to step S4C07.

In step S4C07, if the received command contains information indicating a "game control RAM failure" (error code rE), the process proceeds to step S4C08; otherwise, the error command reception process ends.

In step S4C08, the game control command serial number update flag is set to ON, and this error occurrence command reception process is terminated. By setting this flag to ON, the command serial number for judgment is initialized (step S4508 in FIG. 43).

Next, the error monitoring process (step S407) in the medal count control unit timer interrupt process in FIG. 37 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 52. This figure is a flowchart of the error monitoring process (step S407) in FIG. 37.

First, in step S4D01, which is executed first, if the value of the game control command disconnection timer is 1, the process proceeds to step S4D02, and if the value is not 1, the process proceeds to step S4D04.

In step S4D02, information indicating "game control disconnection" (error code E1) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4D03, the error request setting process in FIG. 30 is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S4D04.

In step S4D04, if the value of the rental device communication error counter is 1, proceed to step S4D05, and if the value is not 1, end this error monitoring process.

In step S4D05, if the rental device communication abnormality error setting flag is off, proceed to step S4D06, and if the flag is on, end this error monitoring process.

In step S4D06, information indicating "rental machine communication abnormality" (error code E9) is set as the error request setting value.

In step S4D07, the error request setting process in FIG. 30 is executed, and this error monitoring process is terminated.

Next, the details of the medal count control command transmission process (step S408) to the game control unit in the medal count control unit timer interrupt process in FIG. 37 will be described with reference to FIG. 53. This figure is a flowchart of the medal count control command transmission process (step S408) to the game control unit in FIG. 37.

First, in step S4E01, which is executed first, the VL signal information is updated.

In step S4E02, if the power-on flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4E03, and if the flag is on, the process of sending the medal count control command to the game control unit is terminated.

In step S4E03, if the value of the strobe counter is 0, proceed to step S4E04, and if the value is not 0, proceed to step S4E09.

In step S4E04, if no response command to be sent to the game control unit 302 (a response command set in either the insert command receiving process in FIG. 45, the settlement command receiving process in FIG. 46, or the payout command receiving process in FIG. 49) has been set, the process proceeds to step S4E05, and if a response command has been set, the process proceeds to step S4E07.

In step S4E05, the command offset is repeatedly updated by incrementing by 1 within the range of 1 to 6 (after 6, the next command is 1). In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the medal count control unit 350 repeatedly transmits medal count control state commands (six types of commands) described using FIG. 11 to the game control unit 302 in sequence. The command offset is used to sequentially switch the type of command to be transmitted.

In step S4E06, the command corresponding to the command offset and the information targeted by this command are read to generate the transmission content, and this transmission content is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302. When transmitting the information on the number of game medals, this value is divided into upper and lower bytes and transmitted using two of the six types of commands, and the value used in this case is the number of game medals obtained when the earlier of the two commands was transmitted.

In step S4E07, the response command set in either the insert command receiving process in FIG. 45, the settlement command receiving process in FIG. 46, or the payout command receiving process in FIG. 49 is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302.

In step S4E08, the response command set in either the deposit command reception process in FIG. 45, the settlement command reception process in FIG. 46, or the withdrawal command reception process in FIG. 49 is cleared.

In step S4E09, if the value of the strobe counter is less than or equal to 3, proceed to step S4E10, and if the value is greater than 3, proceed to step S4E11.

In step S4E10, the strobe signal addressed to the game control unit 302 is set to ON.

In step S4E11, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302 are cleared.

In step S4E12, the strobe signal addressed to the game control unit 302 is set to off, and the process proceeds to step S4E13.

In step S4E13, the value of the strobe counter is incremented by 1. Note that this value is repeatedly updated within the range of 0 to 7 (7 is followed by 0).

In step S4E14, the contents of the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302 are output to the game control unit 302, and the process of sending medal count control commands addressed to the game control unit is terminated. The information output here is received by the game control unit 302 when the strobe signal addressed to the game control unit 302 is set to on.

Next, the details of the display display process (step S409) in the medal count control unit timer interrupt process in FIG. 37 will be described with reference to FIG. 54. This figure is a flowchart of the display display process (step S409) in FIG. 37.

First, in step S4F01, which is executed first, if the value of the number of game medals played is different from the value of the number of game medals displayed, the process proceeds to step S4F02, and if the two values are the same, the process proceeds to step S4F07.

In step S4F02, if the value of the discrete timer is 0, proceed to step S4F03, and if the value is not 0, proceed to step S4F07.

In step S4F03, if the value of the number of game medals is greater than the value of the number of game medals for display, the process proceeds to step S4F04, and if the value of the number of game medals is less than the value of the number of game medals for display, the process proceeds to step S4F05.

In step S4F04, the value of the number of game medals to be displayed is incremented by 1.

In step S4F05, the displayed number of game medals is decremented by one.

In step S4F06, the discrete timer value is set to a value equivalent to 4 ms.

In step S4F07, the number of display medals is displayed, and the display display process ends.

<<Variation 1>>
Here, a modified example of the medal insertion process (hereinafter, modified example 1) will be described with reference to Figures 55 to 57. Figure 55 is a modified example of the medal insertion process of Figure 17, Figure 56 is a modified example of the triple command transmission process of Figure 20, and Figure 57 is a modified example of the insertion command reception process of Figure 45.

First, in the modified example shown in FIG. 55, step S1121 is provided between step S1107 and step S1108 of the process shown in FIG. 17, and step S1122 is provided between step S1109 and step S1110. Also, steps S1112 and S1113 in FIG. 17 have been deleted and step S1123 has been provided. These processes will be described below.

In step S1121, the input quantity limit flag is set to on.

In step S1122, the input quantity limit flag is set to off.

In step S1123, the value of the response content is added to the value of the current bet.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 56, step S1402 is deleted from the process shown in FIG. 20, and step S1421 is added. This process is described below.

In step S1421, the requested number and the input number limit flag are set in the lower byte of the content (2 bytes) sent to the medal count control unit 350.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 57, step S4603 has been deleted from the process shown in FIG. 45. In addition, steps S4621, S4622, and S4623 have been newly provided at the end of the route where the determination in step S4604 is No, and further, step S4608 has been deleted and step S4624 has been provided. These processes are described below.

In step S4621, the input quantity limit flag information contained in the received command (the first of the three commands) is referenced, and if the flag is off, the process proceeds to step S4622, and if the flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4623.

In step S4622, the value of the requested number of medals contained in the received command (the first command of the triple command) is set as the number of medals to be played, and the process proceeds to step S4605.

In step S4623, the received command value that stores the requested number of copies included in the received command (the first command of the triple command) is set to 0, and the process proceeds to step S4624.

In step S4624, the received command value is set in the response command, and the input command reception process is terminated.

<<Variation 2>>
Here, a modified example of the scheduled count number update process (hereinafter, referred to as Modification 2) will be described with reference to Fig. 58. Fig. 58 shows a modified example of the scheduled count number update process of Fig. 40.

First, in the modified example shown in FIG. 58, step S4204 is deleted from the process shown in FIG. 40. Step S4206 is deleted and step S4221 is added, and step S4209 is deleted and step S4222 is added. These processes are described below.

In step S4221, the value of the long press timer is set according to the time that the count button 171 is pressed.

In step S4222, the planned number of sheets to be counted is set according to the time that the count button 171 is pressed.

<<Variation 3>>
Here, a modified example of the scheduled count number update process (hereinafter, referred to as Modification 3) will be described with reference to Fig. 59. Fig. 59 shows a modified example of the scheduled count number update process of Fig. 40.

First, in the modified example shown in FIG. 59, steps S4231 and S4232 are provided before step S4207 in the process shown in FIG. 40. In addition, new steps S4233 and S4234 are provided at the end of the route where the determination in step S4207 is No, and further steps S4235 and S4236 are provided before step S4210. In addition, step S4237 is provided after step S4215. These processes are described below.

In step S4231, if the value of the automatic count timer is 0, proceed to step S4232, and if the value is not 0, proceed to step S4207.

In step S4232, the automatic count timer is set to a value equivalent to 2.0 seconds, and the process proceeds to step S4207.

In step S4233, if the value of the automatic count timer is 1, proceed to step S4234, and if the value is not 1, proceed to step S4235.

In step S4234, the automatic counting flag is set to on and the process proceeds to step S4208.

In step S4235, if the automatic counting flag is off, proceed to step S4210; if the flag is on, proceed to step S4236.

In step S4236, if the number of game medals is 0, the process proceeds to step S4213, and if the value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S4208.

In step S4237, the automatic count flag is set to off, and the process of updating the planned count number is terminated.

<<Processing of the first sub-control unit 400>>
Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using Figure 60. Note that Figure 60 (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. Figure 60 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400. Figure 60 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, in step S501, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S501. This initialization process includes initial settings for the input/output ports and initialization of the storage area in RAM 408. In this process, an area for storing internal win information, which is information that indicates the result of an internal win, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information that indicates the game status, are provided in RAM 408.

In step S503, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S505.

In step S505, the timer variable is assigned the value 0.

In step S507, command processing is executed, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the game control unit 302. Details of this command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 60(d).

In step S509, a performance control process is performed. Here, the performance is prepared according to the performance reservation information in the performance reservation area provided in RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, processing such as reading the performance data from ROM 406, and updating the performance data if it is necessary to update the performance data.

In step S511, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if the performance data read in step S509 includes a command to the sound source IC 418, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S513, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if the performance data read in step S509 includes commands for the various lamps 420, these commands are output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S515, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if the performance data read in step S509 contains a shutter control command, shutter control corresponding to this command is performed.

In step S517, an information output process is performed to set up sending a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S509. For example, if the performance data read in step S509 contains a control command to be sent to the second sub-control unit 500, settings are made to output this control command, and the process returns to step S503.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using Figure 60 (b). This command reception interrupt processing is processing that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the game control unit 302. In step S521 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the game control unit 302 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in RAM 408.

Next, using FIG. 60(c), we will explain the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt is used as a trigger to execute the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined period.

In step S531, the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S503 in the first sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 60(a) is incremented by 1 and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S503, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10).

In step S533, the device data set in step S515 is sent to the second sub-control unit 500, and the random number values for performance are updated.

Next, the command processing (step S507) in the first sub-control unit main processing in FIG. 60(a) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 60(d). This figure is a flowchart of the command processing (step S507) in FIG. 60(a).

First, in step S541, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed command. If this condition is met, the process proceeds to step S543; if not, the process ends.

In step S543, command processing is executed, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the game control unit 302.

<<Processing of the second sub-control unit 500>>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using Figure 61. Figure 61 (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. Figure 61 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500. Figure 61 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500. Figure 61 (d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S601 in FIG. 61(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S601. In this initialization process, the input/output port initial settings and the memory area in the RAM 508 are initialized, etc.

In step S603, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S605.

In step S605, the timer variable is assigned the value 0.

In step S607, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S609, performance control processing is performed. Specifically, if a new command is received in step S607, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, processing is executed to read performance data for image control related to the background image from ROM 506. In addition, processing is executed to read other performance data from ROM 506, and if the performance data needs to be updated, processing to update the performance data is executed.

In step S611, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S609. For example, if the performance data read out in step S609 contains an image control command, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control related to the display image (notification image, background image) is executed. This image control processing will be described later with reference to Figure 61 (d). When this image control processing is completed, the process returns to step S603.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 61(b). This command reception interrupt processing is processing that is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S615 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in RAM 508.

Next, using FIG. 61(c), we will explain the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and executes the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined period in response to this timer interrupt.

In step S617, the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S603 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 61(a) is incremented by 1 and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S603, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10).

In step S619, the random number values for the effects are updated, etc.

Next, the image control processing of step S611 in the main processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 61(d). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control processing.

In step S621, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of display area A and display area B of the VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of image stored in a display area not designated as a drawing area is displayed on the performance image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the destination address of the VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then sets a command to start transferring image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. The VDP 516 then outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S623, it is determined whether a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from VDP516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S625; if not, the process waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S625, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table and attribute data, etc. Here, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 on information about the image data that constitutes the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, VRAM coordinates (layout coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) in order to form a display image in display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S621. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the command stored in the attribute register.

In step S627, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing the image in the frame buffer in accordance with the instruction from the CPU 504.

In step S629, it is determined whether a generation end interrupt signal has been input from VDP516 based on the end of image drawing. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S631; if not, the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S631, the scene display counter, which is set in a specified area of RAM 508 and counts how many scene images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<<Operation Description>>
The operation of the above-described slot machine 100 will now be described.

[Power-on operation]
In the medal count control unit 350, the contents of the RAM are backed up when the power is turned off. Then, if it is determined that there is no abnormality in the RAM when the power is turned on, the RAM is cleared normally and the state when the power was turned off is restored (Yes in step S3003 in FIG. 28). Note that the initial state is restored when the power is turned on for the first time.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM is abnormal when the power is turned on, all RAM is cleared (No in step S3003 in FIG. 28). Furthermore, by storing information indicating "RAM failure" in the RAM failure information, information indicating "RAM failure" (error code E8) is set in the error request (Yes in step S3006 and step S3020 in FIG. 28, and step S3102 in FIG. 30). This error information is sent to the game control unit 302 (FIG. 53), and an error notification based on this information is executed (step S1002 in FIG. 25 and FIG. 16). Note that the game control unit 302 does not clear the contents of the RAM even if it receives an error from the medal count control unit 350. Furthermore, by setting the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag to ON in the medal count control unit 350, various information is updated (initialized) when the game control unit status command is received (Yes in step S3007 in FIG. 28 and step S4407 in FIG. 42).

In addition, when the power is turned on, a RAM clear command may be sent from the game control unit 302 (step S101 in FIG. 15). The medal count control unit 350 that receives this RAM clear command is configured to clear the RAM in response to the RAM clear command from the game control unit 302 (determined as Yes in step S3016 in FIG. 28). In this case, the medal count control unit 350 allows interrupt processing once, and then prohibits interrupt processing when it receives a command from the game control unit 302 and performs subsequent processing, so that it is possible to reliably receive the RAM clear command and perform the processing when it is received (steps S3012 to S3014 in FIG. 28). In addition, by setting the power-on flag to OFF while interrupts are permitted, counting processing by operating the count button 171 is not performed (steps S3011 and S3015 in FIG. 28).

In addition, in the medal count control unit 350, the medal count can be initialized by operating the medal count clear button 172 when the power is turned on (Yes judgment in step S3008 of FIG. 28). At this time, information indicating "detected" is set in the medal count clear detection information, and while this information is set, information regarding this clear is included in the gaming machine information notification and sent to the lending machine 700 (FIG. 32). Note that the medal count clear detection information is cleared when a payout command is received from the gaming control unit 302 (step S4A01 of FIG. 49).

[Game control state command transmission (periodically transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350)]
In the slot machine 100, 41 types of game control status commands (see FIG. 10) are transmitted to the medal count control unit 350. Specifically, in the game control command transmission process (step S207 in FIG. 23, FIG. 26) of the game control unit timer interrupt process of the game control unit 302, the game control status commands are set one by one in the transmission buffer for the medal count control unit (determination of Yes in step S2201 in FIG. 26). However, if the game control priority command has been set in the transmission buffer for the medal count control unit 350 first, the game control status command is not set in the transmission buffer (determination of No in step S2201 in FIG. 26).

After the game control status command or game control priority command is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350, the contents of this transmission buffer are output and the strobe signal is set to ON (Yes judgment in step S2208 in FIG. 26). By setting this strobe signal to ON, the medal count control unit 350 receives the command. The strobe signal is set to OFF in the next interrupt process and the contents of the transmission buffer are cleared (No judgment in step S2208 in FIG. 26), but the output from the I/O port is maintained as it is. This makes it possible to more stabilize the reception of commands on the medal count control unit 350 side. Then, when the contents of the transmission buffer are cleared, the contents of the transmission buffer are updated in the next interrupt process to send a new command (Yes judgment in step S2201 in FIG. 26). That is, in the game control unit 302, one command is sent during the execution of two interrupt processes, and the transmission state and the transmission stop state are switched each time an interrupt process is performed. Furthermore, while the transmission state lasts for 1.49 ms (however, the command output itself lasts for 2.98 ms), the game control unit 302 has two reception timings (two 0.745 ms interrupt processes), which prevents commands from being missed.

[Game control priority command transmission (interrupt transmission from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350)]
In the game control unit 302, a game control state command is sent to the medal count control unit 350 in the timer interrupt process, but a game control priority command is sent to the medal count control unit 350 in priority according to the game situation in the game control unit main process. More specifically, when the transmission buffer becomes empty in the game control command transmission process (FIG. 26), the game control priority command is set in the transmission buffer in the game control unit main process before the game control command transmission process in the next timer interrupt process is executed (the next game control state command is set in the transmission buffer), and this game control priority command is sent to the medal count control unit 350 in priority to the game control state command. The game control priority commands include an insertion command associated with an insertion operation of a game medal, a settlement command associated with a settlement operation of the game medals currently set to the bet number, a start lever acceptance command associated with acceptance of a start lever operation, a payout command associated with the payout of a game medal, an error occurrence command associated with an error occurrence, and a RAM clear command associated with a RAM clear (FIG. 13(a)).

Of the game control priority commands, the insert command, settlement command, and payout command each consist of three commands. The first of these commands contains information about the number of target game medals, the second command contains the communication number (command serial number) of the game control priority command, and the third command contains a checksum based on the contents of the first two commands. These commands are sometimes called triple commands because they are sent consecutively without being interrupted by other commands. Furthermore, the value of the upper byte of a triple command is a consecutive value.

If a response command is not received from the medal count control unit 350, or if the response command from the medal count control unit 350 contains information indicating a "request again," the command will be resent (No judgment in step S1308 of FIG. 19, No judgment in step S1310), but if the upper limit on the number of resends is exceeded, information indicating "abnormal" will be set as the response result from the medal count control unit 350 (No judgment in step S1302, step S1306).

In addition, if the response command from the medal count control unit 350 contains information other than "request again," this information is set as the response result from the medal control unit, and the command serial number is incremented by 1 (steps S1311 and S1312 in FIG. 19).

[Operation of the gaming control unit 302 by insert operation (transmission of insert command, etc.)]
When a medal insertion operation is performed, the number of medals required by this operation (required number) is determined (steps S1105 to S1109 in FIG. 17). In this embodiment, insertion operation can be performed using two types of bet buttons: the 1-bet button and the MAX-bet button. When the MAX-bet button is operated, the number of medals required to set the maximum number of bets is set as the requested number (step S1107 in FIG. 17), and when the 1-bet button is operated, the requested number is set to 1 (step S1109 in FIG. 17). However, if the current number of bets is the maximum number of bets, the requested number is set to 0 by the insertion operation (determined as No in step S1106 in FIG. 17).

Next, a command consisting of upper byte data indicating that it is an input command and lower byte data indicating the requested number of coins (the first of the commands constituting the input command) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350 (steps S1110 and S1111 in FIG. 17, steps S1402 and S1403 in FIG. 20, FIG. 21). When the game control command transmission process of the game control unit timer interrupt process (step S207 in FIG. 23, FIG. 26) is executed in this state, the game control status command is not set in the transmission buffer, and the command previously set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the medal count control unit 350 (No determination in step S2201 in FIG. 26).

Then, when the transmission buffer is cleared in the game control command transmission process of the next game control unit timer interrupt processing (No judgment at step S2208 in Figure 26), the checksum is updated, and further, the upper byte data is incremented by 1 to update it to a value indicating the second command, and a command consisting of the lower byte data indicating the command sequence number (the second of the commands constituting the input command) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350 (steps S1404 to S1407 in Figure 20, Figure 21). Then, in the game control command transmission process of the next game control unit timer interruption process (step S207 in FIG. 23, FIG. 26), the command in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the medal count control unit 350, and when the transmission buffer is cleared in the game control command transmission process of the next game control unit timer interruption process (determined as No in step S2208 in FIG. 26), the checksum is updated, and the data in the upper byte is updated by adding 1 to the value indicating the third command, and a command consisting of the data in the lower byte indicating the checksum (the third of the commands constituting the input command) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350 (steps S1408 to S1411 in FIG. 20, FIG. 21). Then, in the game control command transmission process of the next game control unit timer interruption process (step S207 in FIG. 23, FIG. 26), the command in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the medal count control unit 350.

The insertion command is sent to the medal count control unit 350 in the above manner, and if the response command to this command contains information indicating "normal", the requested number of medals is added to the current bet value (Yes in step S1112 of FIG. 17).

Note that if a replay role is won and a replay is awarded (the replay flag is on), the input command is not processed (No is determined in step S1104 of FIG. 17).

In addition, between sending the insertion command and receiving a response command from the medal count control unit 350, the insertion command will not be sent even if the bet button is operated (step S1112 in FIG. 17 waits until the response command is received).

In addition, when the bet button is operated, a command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1114 in FIG. 17), regardless of whether a response command to the insertion command is received or the content of the response command from the medal count control unit 350. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this command, it can execute a presentation corresponding to the operation of the bet button.

[Operation of the gaming control unit 302 in response to a settlement operation (transmission of a settlement command, etc.)]
When the insertion operation is performed, the current bet amount is increased accordingly, and by operating the settlement button 134 (settling operation), the game medals set to the current bet amount can be settled.

When the settlement operation is performed, the current bet value is set as the number of game medals (requested number) requested in the settlement operation (No in step S1101 of FIG. 17, step S1203 of FIG. 18).

Next, a command consisting of upper byte data indicating that it is a settlement command and lower byte data indicating the requested number of coins (the first of the commands constituting the settlement command) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350 (steps S1204 and S1205 in FIG. 18, steps S1402 and S1403 in FIG. 20, and FIG. 21). When the game control command transmission process of the game control unit timer interrupt process (step S207 in FIG. 23, and FIG. 26) is executed in this state, the game control status command is not set in the transmission buffer, and the command previously set in the transmission buffer is sent to the medal count control unit 350 (No is determined in step S2201 in FIG. 26).

Next, the second and third commands that make up the settlement command are sent, but the process for these is the same as for the input command, so a description will be omitted.

The settlement command is sent to the medal count control unit 350 in the above manner, but if the response command to this command contains information indicating "normal," the current bet value is set to 0 (Yes in step S1206 of FIG. 18).

In the above example, the value of the current bet becomes 0 after the response command is received (if a response command indicating "normal" is received, the value of the current bet is subtracted), and the value of the current bet is not subtracted before the response command is received. On the other hand, the medal count control unit 350 that received the settlement command adds the number of game medals, so at this point, the number of game medals owned by the player is temporarily increased. If a response command indicating "normal" is not received, the value of the current bet is not subtracted and an error occurs (No judgment in step S1206 of FIG. 18). However, if this error is avoided by some means, the value of the current bet is not subtracted, so that the number of medals increases by the amount of the medal count control unit 350 that added the number of game medals, and game medals are acquired illegally by the settlement operation. For this reason, the value of the current bet may be set to 0 before and after the settlement command is sent, and a configuration may be adopted in which the response command to the settlement command is not waited for (response command is not used). Note that this configuration that does not use response commands may result in the risk of not being able to detect errors in the communication state, but by configuring it to use response commands for input commands, errors in the communication state can be detected, and communication quality can be prevented from deteriorating. Note that command indexes can be managed between the game control unit 302 and the medal count control unit 350, and an error can be generated if the number of mismatches reaches a predetermined number (e.g., five times). This configuration makes it possible to prevent operations based on fraudulent information from being performed.

If the medal count control unit 350 receives a settlement command that includes information about the number of medals that exceeds the number of medals inserted, it may not accept the settlement and may display an error. This configuration can prevent game medals from being acquired fraudulently.

If the medal count control unit 350 receives a settlement command that includes information on the number of medals exceeding 16, it may not accept the settlement and may result in an error. This configuration can prevent game medals from being acquired fraudulently.

If the medal count control unit 350 receives a settlement command that includes information on the number of medals exceeding 16,384, it may not accept the settlement and may result in an error. This configuration can prevent game medals from being acquired fraudulently.

Note that if a replay role is won and a replay is awarded (the replay flag is on), the settlement command processing described above is not executed (No is determined in step S1202 of FIG. 18).

In addition, when the settlement button 134 is operated, a command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 regardless of whether a settlement command is sent or the contents of the response command from the medal count control unit 350 (step S1201 in FIG. 18). When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this command, it can execute a performance corresponding to the operation of the settlement button 134.

[Operation of the game control unit 302 by operating the start lever (transmission of start lever reception command, etc.)]
When the start lever is operated while the current bet value is equal to or greater than the startable number, a command (start lever acceptance command) consisting of upper byte data indicating the start lever acceptance command and lower byte data indicating the current bet value is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350 (steps S1012 to S1014 in FIG. 16). Furthermore, the start lever acceptance command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1014 in FIG. 16). The first sub-control unit 400 that receives this command can execute a performance corresponding to the operation of the start lever.

[Operation of the gaming control unit 302 due to payout (transmission of payout command, etc.)]
When the game ends and a winning combination with a payout is won, the value of this payout number is set to the number of game medals requested for payout (requested number) (step S1602 in FIG. 22). Next, a command consisting of upper byte data indicating a payout command and lower byte data indicating the value of the requested number (the first of the commands constituting the payout command) is set in the transmission buffer addressed to the medal count control unit 350 (steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22, steps S1402 and S1403 in FIG. 20, FIG. 21). In this state, when the game control command transmission process (step S207 in FIG. 23, FIG. 26) of the game control unit timer interrupt process is executed, the game control status command is not set in the transmission buffer, and the command previously set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the medal count control unit 350 (No judgment in step S2201 in FIG. 26).

Next, the second and third commands that make up the payout command are sent, but the process is the same as for the input command, so a detailed explanation is omitted.

The payout command is sent to the medal count control unit 350 in the above manner, and if the response command to this command contains information indicating "normal", a command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1607 in FIG. 22). The first sub-control unit 400 that receives this command can execute a performance corresponding to the payout.

On the other hand, if the response command is "abnormal" and nothing is set in the error request, the number of game medals has overflowed and payout cannot be accepted, so a command indicating this state is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1608 in FIG. 22). The first sub-control unit 400 that receives this command can execute an effect corresponding to the overflow. If the overflow state is not resolved, the payout command will be repeatedly resent, and the game will not be able to proceed. In this case, the overflow state can be resolved by operating the counting button 171. If the overflow state is resolved, an effect corresponding to the payout will be executed and the game will be able to proceed. In other words, if the game cannot proceed due to an overflow, the player can deal with it themselves without having to call a store clerk.

[Operation when medal count control command is received]
When the game control unit 302 receives a command from the medal count control unit 350 (detected by switching of the strobe signal, step S2101 in Figure 25), it identifies the type of command (game control status command (Figure 11) or response command (Figure 13 (b)) and updates the contents of RAM 308 according to the type of command (step S2102 in Figure 25). Note that the response commands to the deposit command, settlement command, and payout command refer to the contents updated here. Also, if the command received here includes an error code, then this error code is set as the error status of the game control unit 302, provided that an error status has not been set in the game control unit 302 (step S2104 in Figure 25).

[Medal count control command transmission (from medal count control unit 350 to game control unit 302)]
In the slot machine 100, six types of medal count control status commands (see FIG. 11) are transmitted to the game control unit 302. Specifically, the medal count control status commands are sequentially set one by one in the transmission buffer for the game control unit by the medal count control unit timer interrupt process of the medal count control unit 350 (step S408 in FIG. 37, FIG. 53). However, if a response command has already been set in the transmission buffer for the game control unit 302, the medal count control status command is not set in the transmission buffer (step S4E04 in FIG. 53 is determined to be No).

The medal count control state command and the response command set in the transmission buffer addressed to the game control unit 302 are then output to the game control unit 302 (step S4E14 in FIG. 53). In this state, if the strobe signal is set to on (step S4E10 in FIG. 53), the game control unit 302 will receive the command. In addition, to manage the on/off of the strobe signal, a strobe counter is used that is incremented by one for each interrupt in the range of 0 to 7, and is set to on when the strobe counter is between 0 and 3, and is set to off when the strobe counter is between 4 and 7 (steps S4E09 and S4E13 in FIG. 53). In addition, the transmission buffer is updated when the strobe counter is 0 (step S4E03 in FIG. 53). In other words, in the medal count control unit 350, one command is sent every time eight interrupt processes are executed, and the transmission state and the transmission stop state are switched every four interrupt processes. Furthermore, while the transmission state lasts for 2.98 ms (0.745 ms x 4), the game control unit 302 has two reception timings (two 1.49 ms interrupt processes), which prevents commands from being missed.

[Operation when game control status command is received]
When the medal count control unit 350 receives a command from the game control unit 302 (detected by switching of the strobe signal, step S4301 in Figure 41), if the command is a game control state command, it executes a game control state command receiving process (step S4304 in Figure 41, Figure 42).

Forty-one types of game control status commands (Fig. 10) are sent in sequence, of which the 1st to 40th commands are temporarily stored in a buffer and the checksum is updated (No in step S4401 in Fig. 42). When the 41st command (checksum) is received, if the contents are normal, the checksum is cleared and the RAM is updated based on the information temporarily stored in the buffer (steps S4406, S4410 to S4413 in Fig. 42). However, when updating the gaming machine installation information buffer, the role ratio monitor information buffer, and the gaming machine performance information buffer, this is executed only if the chip ID stored in the RAM matches the chip ID in the gaming machine installation information buffer (Yes in step S4409 in Fig. 42). If the IDs do not match, an error code E7 is set as an error request (No in step S4409 in Fig. 42). Also, if an all-RAM clear is executed in the medal count control unit 350, the chip ID stored in the RAM is cleared, so in this case, as an exception, the update process is executed without checking the chip ID as described above (the game control unit chip ID acquisition flag is on in FIG. 28, and the determination in step S4407 in FIG. 42 is No).

[Operation when game control priority command is received]
When the medal count control unit 350 receives a command from the game control unit 302 (detected by switching of the strobe signal, step S4301 in Figure 41), if the command is a game control priority command, it executes a game control priority command receiving process (step S4305 in Figure 41, Figures 43 and 44).

First, if the game control priority command is not a triple command (RAM clear command, start lever acceptance command, error occurrence command), the process corresponding to each command is executed (Figure 44).

On the other hand, if the game control priority command is a triple command (insertion command, settlement command, and payout command), the first and second commands are temporarily stored in a buffer (step S4503 in FIG. 43), and if it is the third command, the checksum value contained in this command is compared with the checksum calculated from the contents previously stored in the buffer, and if there is an abnormality, information indicating a "request again" is sent as a response command (steps S4504 to S4606 in FIG. 43).

Next, if the game control command serial number update flag is on, the game control command serial number is updated to the value of the command serial number stored in the receive buffer, and the game control command serial number update flag is set to off (Yes in step S4507 of FIG. 43). Note that the game control command serial number update flag is a flag that is set on to prevent a situation in which a separate command serial number error occurs after the error is resolved (FIG. 51).

Next, it is determined whether the game control command serial number matches the command serial number stored in the receiving buffer (step S4510 in FIG. 43). Since the game control unit 302 and the medal count control unit 350 both add 1 to the command serial number (step S1312 in FIG. 19, step S4511 in FIG. 43), these values will match if there are no abnormalities. If these values do not match, error code E3 is set to an error request (No determination in step S4510 in FIG. 43).

After the above processing, the processing corresponding to each command is executed (Figure 44).

[Operation when receiving a submission command]
If the received game control priority command is an insertion command, an insertion command reception process is executed (step S4517 in FIG. 44, FIG. 45). In this process, if the value included in the insertion command (hereinafter, the requested number of insertions) is within the number of game medals, the requested number of insertions is added to the number of insertion medals, the requested number of insertions is added to the current bet number, the requested number of insertions is subtracted from the number of game medals, and then information indicating "normal" is set in the response command (Yes in step S4604 in FIG. 45). If the requested number of insertions is greater than the number of game medals, information indicating "abnormal" is set in the response command (No in steps S4603 and S4604 in FIG. 45). The value of the number of insertions is a value used in the game machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time the game machine information is transmitted (step S3308 in FIG. 32).

Note that while the count notification transmission process is being executed, the input prohibition flag is set to ON (step S3509 in FIG. 34), and if this flag is ON, information indicating "request again" is set in the response command (No in steps S4601 and S4602 in FIG. 45).

[Operation when settlement command is received]
If the received game control priority command is a settlement command, a settlement command reception process is executed (step S4519 in FIG. 44, FIG. 46). In this process, the value included in the settlement command (hereinafter, the settlement request number) is subtracted from the current bet number (step S4701 in FIG. 46). Then, if the value of the current bet number is 0, the settlement request number is subtracted from the number of inserted medals, the settlement request number is added to the number of game medals, and information indicating "normal" is set in the response command (Yes in step S4702 in FIG. 46). The value of the inserted medal number is a value used in the gaming machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time the gaming machine information is transmitted (step S3308 in FIG. 32). If the current bet number is not 0, an error code E6 is set as an error request (No in step S4702 in FIG. 46).

[Operation when start lever reception command is received]
If the received game control priority command is a start lever reception command, the payout command acquisition flag is set to ON (step S4801 in FIG. 47). If this flag is not set to ON, an error occurs in the subsequent payout command reception process, and fraud prevention may be discovered. Next, if the value of the game interval abnormality timer is 0 (determination of Yes in step S4802 in FIG. 47), an initial value is set to the game interval abnormality timer (step S4803 in FIG. 47), and further, a process for setting game information is executed (steps S4804 to S4806 in FIG. 47). Here, 11H is set as the type information setting value, which is a value indicating the reception of the start lever. In addition, the current bet number is set as the count information setting value. That is, in these processes, information on the number of game medals used by the reception of the start lever is stored as game information. Incidentally, the game information is information used for the game machine information transmitted to the lending machine 700, and the number of this information is initialized each time the game machine information is transmitted (step S3310 in FIG. 32). If the game interval abnormality timer is not 0, an error code E5 is set as an error request (determined as No in step S4802 in FIG. 47). This game interval abnormality timer is a timer similar to the game interval counter in the game control unit 302 (step S106 in FIG. 15), but this timer is also used in the medal count control unit 350 separately from the game control unit 302 to prevent fraud.

[Operation when a payout command is received]
When the received game control priority command is a payout command, first, the game medal count clear detection information is cleared. This information is set by operating the game medal count clear button 172 when the power is turned on, and is configured to be transmitted to the lending machine 700 until it is cleared when the payout command is received.

Next, if the payout command acquisition flag is not on, error code E2 is set as an error request (determined as No in step S4A02 in FIG. 49). This flag is set on when a start lever reception command is received, so if this flag is off, it means that a payout command has been received even though a start lever reception command has not been received, and so is used to prevent fraud.

Next, if a replay has been won, the game medal number addition value is set to 0 (step S4A04 in FIG. 49). In cases other than a replay win, if the value included in the payout command (hereinafter, the payout number) is 15 or less, the payout medal number and game medal number addition value are set to the payout medal number (steps S4A07 and S4A08 in FIG. 49). The payout medal number value is a value used in the gaming machine information sent to the rental machine 700, and is initialized to 0 each time the gaming machine information is sent (step S3309 in FIG. 32). If the payout number is greater than 15, error code E4 is set as an error request (No is determined in steps S4A05 and S4A06 in FIG. 49).

Next, a medal count overflow confirmation process is executed (step S4A11 in FIG. 49, FIG. 50). Here, if the sum of the medal count and medal count addition value is equal to or less than 16,383, which is the upper limit of the medal count for payout, this sum is set as the medal count, and information indicating "normal" is set in the response command (Yes in step S4B03 in FIG. 50). On the other hand, if the sum is greater than the upper limit of the medal count, the medal count is maintained as it is, and information indicating "abnormal" is set in the response command (No in step S4B03 in FIG. 50). As for the determination of the number of game medals here, as described below (see [Lending notification (periodically transmitted from lending machine 700 to medal count control unit 350)]), in actual operation, if the number of game medals exceeds the actual threshold, they cannot be increased by payout (response command "abnormal"), and if it does not exceed the actual threshold, they can be increased by payout (response command "normal"). It is sufficient that there is a value that is the actual threshold, and any process can be used for the determination process and the determination value (16383 in this embodiment), and for example, the actual threshold does not have to be the same as the determination value in the process.

If information indicating "abnormal" is set in the response command during the game medal count overflow confirmation process, the payout command reception process ends and this response command is sent to the game control unit 302.

On the other hand, if the response command is set to information indicating "normal", the payout command acquisition flag is set to OFF (step S4A13 in FIG. 49). Furthermore, a process for setting game information is executed (steps S4A14 to S4A19 in FIG. 49). Here, 21H is set as the type information setting value, which indicates that a payout has been made. The number of medals paid out (the current number of medals bet in the case of a replay win) is set as the count information setting value. That is, in these processes, information on the number of medals obtained by the payout is stored as game information. The game information is used in the game machine information sent to the lending machine 700, and the number of pieces of information is initialized each time the game machine information is sent (step S3310 in FIG. 32).

[Gaming Machine Information Notification (Periodic Transmission from the Medal Count Control Unit 350 to the Rental Machine 700)]
In the medal count control unit 350, a gaming machine information notification is transmitted in the medal count control unit main process (step S304 in FIG. 27, FIG. 32). This gaming machine information notification is configured to be executed at intervals of about 300 ms by a gaming machine information notification interval timer (steps S3301, S3302 in FIG. 32). In addition, a count notification interval timer for adjusting the time until the count notification executed after the transmission of this gaming machine information notification is set to 90 ms (step S3303 in FIG. 32).

Next, the current number of game medals is set as the number of game medals for counting determination. In the slot machine 100, since the number of game medals may change when performing the counting process (transfer of the number of game medals from the medal count control unit 350 to the lending machine 700), the value for the counting process is temporarily set as the number of game medals for counting determination (step S3304 in FIG. 32).

Next, the gaming machine information type is obtained (step S3305 in FIG. 32, FIG. 33). The gaming machine information notification includes gaming machine information, and one of three types of gaming machine information is selected as this gaming machine information: gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, and hall control/fraud monitoring information (FIG. 8(b)). Specifically, when the gaming machine information type is 0, gaming machine performance information is selected, when it is 1, gaming machine installation information is selected, and when it is 2, hall control/fraud monitoring information is selected. Here, using the gaming machine installation information transmission interval timer and the gaming machine performance information transmission interval timer, 0, 1, or 2 is set as the gaming machine information type (FIG. 33). In this embodiment, 1 is set as the gaming machine information type at approximately 60 second intervals, 0 is set as the gaming machine information type at approximately 180 second intervals, and 2 is set as the gaming machine information type otherwise. That is, in the gaming machine information notification with a cycle of about 300 ms, the gaming machine information mainly includes hall control and fraud monitoring information, but the gaming machine information includes gaming machine installation information at intervals of about 60 seconds, and the gaming machine information includes gaming machine performance information at intervals of about 180 seconds. The data that is the subject of the gaming machine information notification (FIGS. 8(a)(b)), including the gaming machine information according to the gaming machine information type, is set in the transmission buffer for the loaned machine (step S3306 in FIG. 32) and transmitted sequentially (steps S3311 to S3317 in FIG. 32). Note that the gaming machine information serial number is updated during this transmission (step S3318 in FIG. 32).

The hall control/fraud monitoring information corresponding to the gaming machine information type 2 includes gaming information according to the number of inserted medals, the number of paid out medals, and the number of gaming information items, but after this information is set in the transmission buffer for the loaned machine, it is initialized in preparation for the next transmission (Yes is determined in step S3307 in FIG. 32).

[Counting notification (periodically transmitted from the medal count control unit 350 to the lending machine 700)]
In the medal count control unit 350, a counting notification is transmitted in the medal count control unit main process (step S305 in FIG. 27, FIG. 34). This counting notification transmission process is configured to be executed 90 ms or more after the start of the gaming machine information notification transmission process (step S3303 in FIG. 32, step S3501 in FIG. 34).

In the counting notification transmission process, the data that is the subject of the counting notification (FIG. 8 (a) (c)) is set in the transmission buffer for the rental machine and transmitted sequentially (steps S3503 to S3505, S3513, S3518, and S3519 in FIG. 34). Note that the counting serial number is updated during this transmission (step S3520 in FIG. 34).

This counting notification includes information on the number of coins to be counted, but if the number of coins to be counted is 0, 0 is sent as the number of coins to be counted (No in step S3508 of FIG. 34, step S3513). In this case, the number of medals played does not change (step S3514 of FIG. 34). On the other hand, if a value other than 0 is set for the number of coins to be counted, the number of coins to be counted is set based on this value (steps S3511 and S3512 of FIG. 34), and the number of medals played is further subtracted (step S3514 of FIG. 34). Note that the setting of the number of coins to be counted and the subtraction of the number of medals played are performed in a state in which the insertion operation is prohibited (steps S3509 and S3516 of FIG. 34). Note that the number of coins to be counted is set in the process of updating the number of coins to be counted in the medal count control unit timer interrupt process (steps S405 of FIG. 37, FIG. 40).

[Setting the planned number of medals to be counted (medal count control unit 350)]
In the medal count control unit 350, a process for updating the planned number of medals to be counted is executed by the medal count control unit timer interrupt process (step S405 in FIG. 37, FIG. 40). The number of medals to be counted is determined based on the planned number of medals to be counted set in this process, and a counting notification including this information is sent to the lending machine 700.

First, we will explain what happens when the count button 171 is pressed for less than 500 ms. In this case, the count long press timer is set to an initial value (step S4206 in FIG. 40), but because the count button 171 is released before the timer value reaches 1 (500 ms have elapsed since it was pressed), the count long press flag is not set to ON (no Yes determination is made in step S4207 in FIG. 40). When the count button 171 is released in this state, 1 is added to the planned number of coins to be counted (Yes determination in step S4210 in FIG. 40, step S4212).

Next, a case where the count button 171 has been pressed for 500 ms or more will be described. In this case, the count long press timer is set to an initial value (step S4206 in FIG. 40), and when the value of the timer reaches 1 (500 ms has elapsed since pressing), the count long press flag is set to ON and the planned count number is set to 50 (Yes in step S4207 in FIG. 40). Thereafter, while the count button 171 is being pressed with the count long press flag on, the process of setting the planned count number to 50 is repeated, and the count number based on this planned count number is set each time a count notification is sent. On the other hand, when the count button 171 is released with the count long press flag on, the count long press flag is set to OFF, the count long press timer is set to 0, and the value of the planned count number is cleared (Yes in step S4210 in FIG. 40, No in step S4211).

[Lending notification (periodically transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control unit 350)]
When the medal count control unit 350 receives a loan notification from the loaner machine 700, the contents of the RAM are updated based on the contents of the loan notification (step S4003 in FIG. 38). Then, it is determined whether the checksum calculated from the loan notification matches the checksum included in the loan notification (steps S4102 and S4103 in FIG. 39). Next, it is determined whether the confirmation loan serial number of the medal count control unit 350 matches the loan serial number included in the loan notification (step S4104 in FIG. 39). The confirmation loan serial number holds a value obtained by adding 1 to the loan serial number included in the previously received loan notification (step S3706 in FIG. 36), and is configured to match these if the communication is normal. Furthermore, it is determined whether the message length and command data are normal. If an abnormality is determined in these determinations, the determination result is set to "abnormal".

Following the above judgment, if the number of loaned sheets included in the loan notification is 0, the judgment result is set to "normal" (Yes judgment in step S4106 of FIG. 39). On the other hand, if the number of loaned sheets is not 0, the following judgment is further executed (No judgment in step S4106 of FIG. 39).

First, if the number of game medals is 15,000 or more, the judgment result is set to "abnormal" (No judgment in step S4107 of FIG. 39). In this embodiment, it is configured so that if the number of game medals is 15,000 or more, it cannot be increased by lending. In this configuration, if the number of game medals exceeds 14,999, it cannot be increased by lending, and if it does not exceed 14,999 (if it is 14,999 or less), it can be increased by lending. In order to realize this operation, for example, even if a process is adopted in which an increase by lending is restricted if the number is 15,000 or more, and an increase by lending is possible if the number is 14,999 or less, the operation will be the same as in this embodiment. In addition, even if an increase by lending is possible if the number is 14,999 or less, and an increase by lending is restricted in other cases, the operation will be the same as in this embodiment. As described above, in actual operation, if the number of game medals exceeds the actual threshold (14,999 in the above case), the number cannot be increased by lending, but if it does not exceed the actual threshold, the number can be increased by lending. As long as there is a value that is the actual threshold, any process can be used for the judgment process and judgment value (15,000 in this embodiment), and for example, the actual threshold does not have to be the same as the judgment value in the process.

The above determination may also be made based on the number of game medals that would result if added, rather than the current number of game medals. However, this configuration can also be said to be a configuration in which there is a real threshold value that includes the number of game medals to be added to the current number of game medals. In other words, this configuration can also be said to be a configuration in which, in actual operation, if the number of game medals exceeds the real threshold value, the number cannot be increased by lending, but if the number does not exceed the real threshold, the number can be increased by lending.

Next, if the gaming machine information type is not 2, the judgment result is set to "abnormal" (No judgment in step S4108 of FIG. 39). In this embodiment, the system is configured to accept lending when the gaming machine information type is set to 2.

Next, if the counted number is not 0, the judgment result is set to "abnormal" (No judgment in step S4109 in FIG. 39). If the counted number is not 0, the number of game medals is subtracted, and if the number of loaned medals is not 0, the number of game medals is added, so this embodiment is configured so that these processes are not mixed.

Finally, if the number of sheets lent is greater than 50, the judgment result is set to "abnormal" (No judgment in step S4110 of FIG. 39). In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of sheets lent at one time is set to 50.

If the above judgment does not result in an abnormality, the judgment result is set to "normal" (Yes judgment in steps S4107 to S4110 in Figure 39).

The result of the above process is set as the loan quantity receipt result, and the loan notification receipt flag is set to ON (steps S4005 and S4006 in FIG. 38).

In addition to the above-mentioned loan notification reception process, the medal count control unit 350 executes a loan notification reception confirmation process in the medal count control unit main process (step S306 in FIG. 27, FIG. 35). This loan notification reception confirmation process checks whether the loan notification reception flag is on for 170 ms from the start of the count notification transmission process (step S3502 in FIG. 34, steps S3601 and S3602 in FIG. 35). This loan notification reception flag is set in the loan notification reception process of the medal count control unit timer interrupt process (step S404 in FIG. 37, FIG. 38).

If the rental notification receipt flag is not turned on within 170 ms from the start of the counting notification transmission process even though the VL signal is on, the value of the rental device communication error counter is decremented by 1 (step S3604 in FIG. 35). The value of this rental device communication error counter is initialized when the rental device receipt result response transmission is executed (step S3701 in FIG. 36), but if the value of the rental device communication error counter becomes 1, an error occurs (steps S4D06 and S4D07 in FIG. 52).

[Lending receipt result response (periodically transmitted from medal count control unit 350 to lending machine 700)]
In the medal count control unit 350, after the loan notification reception confirmation process, if the loan notification reception flag is set to ON, the medal count control unit main process executes the loan reception result response sending process (step S308 in FIG. 27, FIG. 36).

In this rental receipt result response sending process, parameters related to rental device communication abnormalities are initialized (steps S3701 and S3702 in Figure 36).

Next, if the loan quantity receipt result is set to "normal", the value of the loan serial number included in the received loan notification is set to the normal loan serial number (step S3704 in FIG. 36). In addition, after the value of the loan serial number included in the received loan notification is set to the confirmation loan serial number, the value of this confirmation loan serial number is incremented by 1 (steps S3705 and S3706 in FIG. 36). In other words, the value of the confirmation loan serial number here is the same as the value of the loan serial number scheduled to be included in the next loan notification.

Furthermore, the data that is the subject of the loan receipt result response (Figures (a) and (e)) is set in the transmission buffer to the loaning machine and transmitted sequentially (steps S3707 to S37011 in Figure 36). Through the above process, if the loan number reception result is "normal", the loan serial number received this time is transmitted, and if the loan number reception result is "abnormal", the loan serial number received last time is transmitted. Note that if the loan number reception result is "normal", the value of the loan number is added to the number of game medals after this transmission is completed (Yes is determined in step S3712 in Figure 36).

[Operation for Errors (Game Control Unit 302)]
The game control unit 302 judges various errors (step S203 in FIG. 23). For example, if the strobe signal at the time of command transmission from the medal count control unit 350 is not detected for a certain period of time, a medal count control disconnection error is set in the error status (FIG. 24). In a state where the error status is not set in the game control unit 302, the error status is set based on the error code of the medal count control unit 350. When the error status is set, a process of notifying that an error has occurred is executed (step S1002 in FIG. 16, step S1603 in FIG. 22). For this reason, an error on the game control unit 302 side is processed with priority over an error on the medal count control unit 350 side, and for example, if there is no error on the game control unit 302 side, an error on the medal count control unit 350 side is notified. In addition, the error status is transmitted to the medal count control unit 350 by an error occurrence command (step S203 in FIG. 23).

[Operation for Errors (Medal Count Control Unit 350)]
When the medal count control unit 350 determines that an error has occurred, an error code is set in the error request (step S3021 in FIG. 28, step S4414 in FIG. 42, step S4512 in FIG. 43, step S4706 in FIG. 46, step S4807 in FIG. 47, step S4A05 in FIG. 49, step S4A09 in FIG. 49, step S4D02 in FIG. 52, step S4D06 in FIG. 52, FIG. 30). This error code information is sent to the game control unit 302 by a medal count control state command. When an error occurrence command is received from the game control unit 302, the error request is cleared (step S4C01 in FIG. 51). This is configured so that errors on the game control unit 302 side are processed with priority over errors on the medal count control unit 350 side.

[Modifications to the Insertion Operation]
Fig. 55 is a modified example of the medal insertion process of Fig. 17, Fig. 56 is a modified example of the triple command transmission process of Fig. 20, and Fig. 57 is a modified example of the insertion command reception process of Fig. 45. The operations of these processes will be described below.

In the medal insertion process of FIG. 17, the requested number of medals is determined according to the operated bet button 130, 132 and the current bet amount, and an insertion command including this information is sent to the medal count control unit 350 (FIG. 20). In contrast, in FIG. 55, when the MAX BET button (bet button 132) is operated, the insertion number limit flag is set to ON (step S1121 in FIG. 55), and when the 1 coin bet button (bet button 130) is operated, the insertion number limit flag is set to OFF (step S1122 in FIG. 55). Then, an insertion command including information on this insertion number limit flag is sent to the medal count control unit 350 (FIG. 56).

In the insert command reception process of FIG. 57, if the number of game medals is equal to or greater than the requested number, the requested number is added to the number of inserted medals and the current bet amount, the requested number is subtracted from the number of game medals, and the value of the requested number is returned to the game control unit 302 by a response command (Yes in step S4604 of FIG. 57). The game control unit 302, which has received this response command, adds the value returned by this response command to the current bet amount (step S1123 of FIG. 55).

In the input command reception process in FIG. 57, if the number of game medals available is less than or equal to the requested number, the input number limit flag is referenced (determined as No in step S4604 in FIG. 57). If the input number limit flag is on, no processing is performed for the requested number, and 0 is returned to the game control unit 302 as a response command (determined as No in step S4621 in FIG. 57). When the game control unit 302 receives this response command, it adds the value returned in this response command, 0, to the current bet (step S1123 in FIG. 55), so the current bet remains unchanged.

In the insert command reception process in FIG. 57, if the number of game medals remaining is less than or equal to the requested number and the input number limit flag is off, the operation is the same as when the current number of game medals is set to the requested number (Yes is determined in step S4621 in FIG. 57, and the number of game medals is set as the value of the received command in S4622). That is, the value of the current number of game medals is added to the number of inserted medals and the current bet number, and the number of game medals is subtracted to 0. The value of the number of game medals before the subtraction (the value set in the received command) is then returned to the game control unit 302 by a response command. Upon receiving this response command, the game control unit 302 adds the value returned by this response command to the current bet number (step S1123 in FIG. 55).

In the above modified example, when the number of game medals available to correspond to the requested number in the input command is insufficient, if the input limit flag is on, 0 is returned for the requested number, and if the input limit flag is off, the maximum number currently available is returned for the requested number. With this configuration, when the medal count control unit 350 cannot accommodate the requested number from the game control unit 302, it selectively chooses between not accommodating and accommodating as much as possible, and transmits information for this distinction (input limit flag) along with the requested number. With this configuration, for example, in a configuration in which the degree of advantage changes depending on the current number of bets, it may be possible to prevent the current number of bets from unintentionally becoming an unfavorable value.

In this embodiment, when the MAX BET button 132 is operated, the required number of coins is set to a value required to set the maximum number of coins to bet. However, the required number may be set to a fixed value such as the maximum number of coins to bet or another value.

For example, in a configuration in which the maximum bet number is set as the requested number, if the 1 bet button 130 has been operated first and the current bet number is 1, then operating the MAX bet button 132 to send an input command with the maximum bet number as the requested number will not be accepted by the medal count control unit 350 (exceeding the maximum bet number). This also occurs when the medal count control unit 350 cannot accommodate the requested number from the game control unit 302. In such cases, by sending the requested number together with information for distinguishing between them, it is possible to distinguish between an operation that does not accommodate the requested number (for example, returning 0 as a response command) and an operation that accommodates it as much as possible (for example, returning the maximum bet number as a response command).

[About the complete function]
The slot machine 100 of this embodiment has a complete function. The complete function is a function that sets the time when the winning difference (the cumulative total of the number of coins paid out minus the number of bets) is the smallest as a reference, and when the winning difference based on the reference reaches a predetermined upper limit (19,000 in this example), the slot machine 100 is put into a stop state. In this embodiment, this function is activated by setting the complete function activation flag to ON when this condition is met. Specifically, if the complete function activation flag is set to ON at the end of the game, a notification indicating a stop state is executed in the complete function activation process, and the game is stopped. Note that, during the operation of the complete function, processing based on the operation of the count button 171 or the lending button 707 can be executed, but processing based on other operation means can also be executed (for example, display of various information (such as a two-dimensional code according to the game progress) by a menu operation button). Also, various processes based on some operations may not be executed while the complete function is in operation, such as not executing a process for determining whether or not a setting key switch operation for setting confirmation, a bet operation, a lever operation, a settlement operation, an operation for various performance settings (such as a volume setting by a volume adjustment switch), etc. In other words, while the complete function is in operation, there may be processes that can be executed by an operation, and there may also be processes that are not executed even if an operation is performed.

When the complete function is activated, it is possible to disable it by changing the settings, but it cannot be disabled by simply turning the power off and on or performing a reset.

Example of operation
An example of the operation of the slot machine 100 described above will now be described.

[Example of counting process]
Fig. 62 is a diagram showing a first example in which the count button 171 is operated. Fig. 62(a) is a timing chart of the first example, and Fig. 62(b) is a diagram showing the display mode of the game medal count display device 170, which is a 5-digit 7-segment display.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 62(a), time progresses from left to right. This also applies to the timing charts shown in the following figures.

At the top of the timing chart shown in FIG. 62(a), there are arrows with symbols corresponding to (i) to (v) shown in FIG. 62(b). These arrows represent the display periods of the gaming medal count display device 170.

At the bottom of the timing chart shown in FIG. 62(a), the timing at which a counting notification is sent from the medal count control unit 350 to the lending machine 700 is indicated as "counting timing." This counting timing occurs at a cycle of 0.3 seconds (300 ms). The counted number (the number of gaming values sent to the lending machine 700) at this counting timing is shown. Also, below the "counted number," the value of the "number of gaming medals" stored in RAM 358 is shown. Further below that, the operation mode of the counting button 171 is shown.

In the first example shown in FIG. 62, the operation of the count button 171 is started when the "game medal count" is 250. As shown in FIG. 62(b) (i), the number "250" is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

Even when the first counting timing arrives after the operation of the count button 171 is started, the count button 171 remains operated. Eventually, 0.5 seconds (500 ms) have passed since the operation of the count button 171 was started. Even after 0.5 seconds have passed, the count button 171 is still operated, and a long press operation is performed, and the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set to 50 sheets (step S4209 of the count number update process shown in FIG. 40). In the following explanation, the operation of the count button 171 for 0.5 seconds or more is referred to as a long press, and the operation of the count button 171 for less than 0.5 seconds is referred to as a short press. The count number update process shown in FIG. 40 is executed at 0.7 ms intervals, and while the count button 171 continues to be operated for more than 0.5 seconds, the value of the number of sheets to be counted continues to be overwritten to a value of 50 sheets at 0.7 ms intervals. After 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of operation of the count button 171, when the first count timing arrives while the count button 171 is still being operated, the count number is set based on the value of the number of medals to be counted (50 in this example), and a count notification of 50 medals is sent from the medal count control unit 350 to the lending machine 700. The "game medal number" is reduced by 50 medals to 200 medals. As shown in (ii) of FIG. 62(b), the game medal number display device 170 displays a change display in which "1" is subtracted from the number "250". This change display is displayed by the display display process shown in FIG. 54, with the number being reduced by "1" at intervals of approximately 4 ms. If the display on the medal count display device 170 suddenly changes from "250" to "200," the player may not notice the change in the display, so here a change display is used to show how the numerical value is changing (a display that is performed until the number of medals remaining after 50 medals have been subtracted is displayed, allowing the player to recognize that the number of medals is changing). Then, after approximately 200 ms has passed, the number "200" is displayed on the medal count display device 170, as shown in (iii) of FIG. 62(b).

When the count button 171 is pressed and held and the next counting timing arrives, the count number is again set based on the value of the number of medals to be counted (50 in this example), and a count notification of 50 medals is again sent from the medal count control unit 350 to the lending machine 700. The "game medal count" is reduced by 50 medals to 150 medals. As shown in (iv) of FIG. 62(b), the game medal count display device 170 displays a change display in which the number "200" is subtracted by "1" at approximately 4 ms intervals. Then, after approximately 200 ms has passed, the game medal count display device 170 displays the number "150" as shown in (v) of FIG. 62(b).

Furthermore, when the third counting timing arrives while the counting button 171 is still pressed, a counting notification of 50 medals is sent from the medal count control unit 350 to the lending machine 700, and the "game medal count" decreases by 50 medals to 100 medals. Then, assume that the counting button 171 is released before the fourth counting timing arrives. In other words, the long press of the counting button 171 ends. In this case, the value of the number of medals to be counted (here, 50 medals) is cleared in step S4215 shown in FIG. 40, so that even when the fourth counting timing arrives, a counting notification of 50 medals is not sent, and the value of the "counting medal count" becomes 0 medals. Therefore, the "game medal count" also remains at 100 medals. In addition, the change display is performed in a time (approximately 200 ms) that is shorter than the counting timing of 300 ms, so if the player wants to keep that number of game medals after visually checking the number after 50 medals have been subtracted, they can do so by ending the operation of the counting button 171.

In addition, if the count button 171 is released before the first counting timing arrives after operation of the count button 171 is started (if the hand is released at the timing of arrow A shown in FIG. 62(a)), one coin is added to the value of the number of coins to be counted (step S4212 shown in FIG. 40), and when the counting timing arrives, that one coin is sent as a counting notification. The "number of game medals" decreases by one to 249 coins, and the number "249" is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

In addition, if the count button 171 is operated multiple times after the first operation of the count button 171 is started and before the first count timing arrives, that is, if the button is short-pressed multiple times before the count timing arrives, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is incremented by one each time the button is short-pressed. When the count timing arrives, the number to be counted is set based on the value of the number of sheets to be counted (equivalent to the number of single presses in this case), and the value of the number of short presses performed up to that point is sent as a count notification.

On the other hand, if the count button 171 is released 0.5 seconds after the start of operation and before the first count timing arrives (if the hand is released at the timing of arrow B shown in FIG. 62(a)), even if the value of the number of medals to be counted is set to 50, this is cleared in step S4215 shown in FIG. 40, so that a count notification of 50 medals is not sent and the "count" value becomes 0 medals (a count notification with the number of medals counted being 0 is sent). Similarly, if the count button 171 is released before the next count timing arrives after the display on the game medal count display device 170 changes from 250 medals to 200 medals over a period of about 200 ms (if the hand is released at the timing of arrow C shown in FIG. 62(a)), a count notification of 50 medals is not sent and the "count" value becomes 0 medals (a count notification with the number of medals counted being 0 is sent).

Figure 63 is a timing chart showing a first example of a presentation when counting is taking place.

Figure 63 shows the performance image display device 157 and the speaker 272. As described above, the security command sent from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 at 100 ms intervals contains information indicating the number of counted coins.

When the count button 171 is pressed briefly to count one coin, the effect image display device 157 does not display any indication that counting is taking place, and if, for example, a game background display is displayed, that display continues. Also, no counting sound is output from the speaker 272. For example, if an effect sound corresponding to the game background display is being output, that output continues. If a counting sound is output for a small number, it may mix with other effect sounds, and may give the player a sense of expectation different from the sense of expectation that the other effect sounds were intended to express, so in the first example, no counting sound is output. If a counting sound is output for a large number, the output time is longer, and there is little risk of it mixing with other effect sounds, and there is little impact on other effect sounds. Note that, even if a small number such as two coins is counted, the counting sound may not be output in the same way as when one coin is counted.

On the other hand, when the count button 171 is pressed and held down and 50 coins are counted, a display notifying the user that counting is taking place is displayed on the performance image display device 157, and a counting sound is output from the speaker 272. That is, as described above, the security command sent from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 at 100 ms intervals contains information indicating the number of coins being counted. When information indicating 50 coins is sent as the number of coins being counted, the first sub-control unit 400 outputs a counting sound. Also, when information indicating 50 coins is sent as the number of coins being counted via the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500 displays a counting notification.

Furthermore, while the long press continues and 50 coins are counted every 0.3 seconds, the text display "Continuous counting in progress" is displayed on the effect image display device 157 as shown in FIG. 63. This text display is displayed so as to overlap with the game background display. In addition, a counting sound (for example, a "beep beep...") having a length of 0.3 seconds or more is output from the speaker 272. When the length of the counting sound output each time is 0.3 seconds or more, it connects with the counting sound output at the timing of counting the next 50 coins, and sounds like it is being output continuously. If the counting sound is, for example, 0.5 seconds or longer, it overlaps with the counting sound output at the timing of counting the next 50 coins, maintaining more continuity and allowing the counting sound to continue without interruption during the consecutive counting periods. The text display "Continuous counting in progress" and the continuous counting sound allow the player to recognize that continuous counting is being performed.

A counting sound may be output when the number of counted medals exceeds a predetermined number (e.g., 10 medals) that is equal to or greater than 2 and less than 50 medals. In this case, a counting sound different from the counting sound during the long press may be output. In this way, for example, when short presses are repeated, the player can be made aware that multiple medals have been counted. Alternatively, when the long press is performed when the "game medal count" stored in the medal count control unit 350 has less than 50 medals remaining (e.g., 10 medals remaining), 10 medals will be counted instead of 50 medals, and the change in the sound effect will make the player aware that only a few medals are remaining.

Figure 64 is a timing chart showing an example in which a bet operation was performed before the count button 171 was operated and the bet amount was not 0. In this embodiment, the value of the current bet amount does not change even if the count button 171 is operated, but in this Figure 64, if the current bet amount is not 0 when the count button 171 is operated, a settlement process (the current bet amount is set to 0 and the reduced amount is added to the number of game medals) is performed before the counting process is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 64, when the bet buttons 130, 132 are operated and the count button 171 is operated before the start lever 135 is operated, settlement is performed (the number of bets is returned to the "number of game medals").

In Figure 64, the "current bet number" is shown, and below that, the value of the "number of game medals" stored in the RAM 358 is shown. Further below that, the value of the counted number is shown, and at the very bottom, the operation mode of the count button 171 is shown.

In this example, the MAX BET button 132 is operated, and the "current bet number" is 3 coins. The "game medal number" stored in the RAM 358 is deducted by 3 coins in response to this bet operation, decreasing it from 68 coins to 65 coins. Eventually, the count button 171 is operated instead of the start lever 135. When the count button 171 is operated, the rising edge of the signal indicating the on/off state of the count button 171 is detected, and based on this rising edge detection, the number of coins bet is first returned to the "game medal number". As a result, the "current bet number" becomes 0, and the "game medal number" increases by 3 coins to 68. In other words, the state before the bet operation is returned to, and the previous bet operation is canceled. After this cancellation, the counting process is performed. The count button 171 is pressed and held, and when the counting timing arrives while the count button 171 is held, 50 coins are counted, and the "game medal number" decreases by 50 coins to 18 coins.

In this example, the current bet number can be returned to the "game medal number" by operating the counting button 171 without operating the settlement button 134 shown in FIG. 1, but the number of game medals will change due to further counting processing. In this configuration, if you want to change only the current bet number, you can operate the settlement button 134. For example, if you want to change to a bet of 1 coin after betting 3 coins, you can operate the settlement button 134 to temporarily return the bet of 3 coins to the "game medal number", and then operate the bet button 130 for betting 1 coin again to set the current bet number to 1 coin. Note that since the settlement process can be performed by operating the counting button 171 without operating the settlement button 134, the settlement button 134 may not be provided.

Figure 65 is a timing chart showing an example of the counting end presentation.

As described above, information indicating the number of coins counted is sent from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 in a security command. The first sub-control unit 400 accumulates the number of coins counted sent in the security command until the number of coins counted reaches 0, and executes the count end effect when the number reaches 0 (when counting ends). The count end effect here is an effect that corresponds to the number of coins counted at one time.

Figure 65 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a counting end effect that is performed when the cumulative count number is less than a predetermined number (e.g., 1000). During counting, the effect image display device 157 performs a counting effect (e.g., displaying the text "Continuous counting in progress" and outputting a counting sound as described using Figure 63), and when counting ends, counting end effect 1 is performed in which the text "Counting ended" is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

On the other hand, FIG. 65(b) shows an example of a counting end effect that is performed when the cumulative count number is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (e.g., 1000 coins). When counting of the predetermined number or more is completed, counting end effect 2 is performed, and in addition to the text display of "Counting Ended," the effect image display device 157 also displays a warning message saying "Be careful not to save up too much."

As described above, in this embodiment, the RAM 358 of the medal count control unit 350 can store a maximum of 16,383 "game medal counts". However, in the slot machine 100, there is a possibility that the "game medal counts" will disappear. Therefore, it is desirable to have the slot machine 100 not continue to store too many "game medal counts". Therefore, it is preferable to provide a notification to increase the frequency of operation of the counting button 171. The attention display described using FIG. 65(b) is an example of a notification to increase the frequency of operation of the counting button 171, and encourages the lending machine 700 to move the game value appropriately. The counting performance may also be changed according to the cumulative count number. For example, if the cumulative count number is less than a predetermined number (e.g., 1,000), counting performance A is performed, and if the cumulative count number becomes equal to or greater than the predetermined number (e.g., 1,000), counting performance B is performed. Furthermore, counting effect A is an effect that gives the impression that the game is in an appropriate state, while counting effect B is an effect that gives the impression that the game is in an inappropriate state. A large cumulative count can give the player an undesirable impression.

Here, we will explain the operation of the slot machine 100 when the settlement button 134 is operated.

Figure 66 is a timing chart showing an example of when the settlement button 134 is operated.

In conventional slot machines, real medals are loaned to players, and credits are secured by inserting the real medals, and the bet amount is set using the credits. In such conventional slot machines, the settlement process for real medals includes not only the medals that have been bet, but also the medals that have been stored (for example, the settlement process is performed for 53 medals, which is the total of the maximum number of medals bet (3) and the maximum number of medals that can be stored (50)). When this settlement process is completed, a demo command is output to the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 may execute a process to display a demo screen on the performance image display device 157. In other words, there is a certain amount of time while the settlement process, which may involve the ejection of physical medals, is being performed. A settlement button command indicating that the settlement button 134 has been pressed is output to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 performs a performance related to the settlement based on this settlement button command, and when the settlement is completed, the process transitions to a demo performance based on the demo command.

On the other hand, in the slot machine 100 of this embodiment, which does not require actual medals, the object of settlement is the medals that have been bet (current bet, maximum 3 medals), and since no physical medals are ejected, the processing time related to settlement is very short. For this reason, after the settlement button 134 is pressed, there is only a very short processing time related to settlement, and the demo command is output without delay to the first sub-control unit 400. Therefore, if a performance is executed based on the settlement process being executed, this performance will only be executed for a short time before the demo performance, which may actually make the player feel uncomfortable.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 66, a settlement button command indicating that the settlement button 134 has been pressed is output to the first sub-control unit 400, but the first sub-control unit 400 does not execute any effect based on this settlement button command (such as outputting a settlement sound).

As shown in FIG. 66, when a bet operation is performed and the "current bet number" becomes 3, the settlement button 134 is operated to perform a settlement operation. With this settlement operation, the number of bets (3 coins) is added to the "number of game medals", increasing the number from 65 coins to 68 coins.

Figure 66 shows the speaker 272 and the performance image display device 157. Even when a settlement operation is performed, no settlement sound is output from the speaker 272. In addition, the game background display continues to be displayed on the performance image display device 157, and the settlement display is not displayed. The performance image display device 157 shown in Figure 66 immediately switches to a demo display. That is, the first sub-control unit 400 starts a demo performance based on receiving a settlement button command (or a demo command immediately after the settlement button command). In this example, only the demo performance is executed at the start of the demo, making the start of the demo more clear.

The specification may also be such that a settlement effect is executed (for example, for two seconds). While this settlement effect is being executed, even if a demo effect has started, the settlement effect will continue, and both effects will be executed at the same time. Although the frequency with which settlement operations are performed is expected to be lower than in conventional slot machines, there is still a possibility that settlement operations may be performed as a result of fraudulent behavior (so-called cheating), so the fact that a settlement process has occurred is made known to those in the vicinity.

Next, we will explain an example in which the number of sheets counted changes depending on the length of time the count button 171 is operated.

Figure 67 shows an example in which the number of counted coins increases as the operation time of the count button 171 increases. Note that in this example, the planned count number update process shown in Figure 58 is used instead of the planned count number update process shown in Figure 40.

Figure 67 (a) is a table showing the specific values of the count long press timer set in step S4221 in the flowchart of the planned count number update process shown in Figure 58. In this table, the value of the count long press timer is set for each long press stage value. That is, between the long press stage value of 1 and 4, when the long press stage value increases, the value of the count long press timer decreases by a predetermined time (300 ms in this case). In other words, the value of the count long press timer is shortened in stages. And when the long press stage value is 4 or more, the value of the count long press timer becomes a constant value (300 ms in this case).

Figure 67 (b) is a table showing the specific values of the number of sheets to be counted used in step S4222 in the flowchart of the process of updating the number of sheets to be counted shown in Figure 58. In this table, the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set for each long press stage value. In other words, when the long press stage value increases between 1 and 4, the value of the number of sheets to be counted increases. As a result, the number of sheets to be counted increases in stages according to the operation time of the count button 171. Note that even if the same value is set multiple times, the number of sheets to be counted will ultimately increase in stages. For example, even if the value of the number of sheets to be counted is set as follows: 10 → 10 → 20 → 20 → 20 → 30 → 30 → 30 → 30 ..., the result is a stepwise increase. And when the value of the long press stage value is 4 or more, the value of the number of sheets to be counted becomes a constant value (here, 50 sheets).

Figure 67 (c) is a timing chart showing counting using the count long press timer shown in Figure 67 (a) and the planned number of coins to be counted shown in Figure 67 (b).

At the bottom of the timing chart shown in Figure 67 (c), the timing at which the medal count control unit 350 sends a counting notification to the lending machine 700 is written as "counting timing." This counting timing has a cycle of 0.3 seconds (300 ms). Meanwhile, at the top of the timing chart, a timing chart is shown in which the state in which the counting button 171 is operated is represented as the ON state.

When the count button 171 is turned on from the OFF state, a count long press timer (value for 1.2 seconds) with a long press step value of 1 is set (step S4221 shown in FIG. 58). If the count button 171 is kept operated until the timer value becomes "1", 10 sheets are set as the planned number of sheets to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). Then, when the count button 171 is kept on and the timer value becomes "0", a count long press timer with a long press step value of 2 (value for 0.9 seconds) is set (step S4221 shown in FIG. 58). If the count button 171 is kept operated until the 0.9 seconds set in the count long press timer have elapsed, the 10 sheets set as the planned number of sheets to be counted will be counted every time the count timing arrives at 0.3 second intervals.

Eventually, when the count long press timer value reaches "1" while the count button 171 is still operated, the planned number of sheets to be counted is set to 20 (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). Next, when the timer value reaches "0" while the count button 171 is still ON, the count long press timer with a long press step value of 3 (a value for 0.6 seconds) is set (step S4221 shown in FIG. 58). If the count button 171 is kept operated until the 0.6 seconds set in the count long press timer has elapsed, the planned number of sheets to be counted, 20, will be counted each time the count timing arrives, which is every 0.3 seconds.

When the count long press timer value reaches "1" again while the count button 171 is still operated, 30 sheets are set as the planned number to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). Furthermore, when the timer value reaches "0" while the count button 171 is still ON, the count long press timer with a long press step value of 4 (a value for 0.3 seconds) is set (step S4221 shown in FIG. 58). If the count button 171 is kept operated until the 0.3 seconds set in the count long press timer has elapsed, the number of sheets set as the planned number to be counted, 30, will be counted when the counting timing arrives.

When the count long press timer reaches "1" while the count button 171 is still operated, the planned count number is set to 50 (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). Thereafter, a value of 0.3 seconds is repeatedly set to the count long press timer (step S4221 shown in FIG. 58), and the planned count number is repeatedly set to 50 (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). As a result, if the count button 171 remains operated, 50 will be counted each time the counting timing arrives.

In the example described here, the longer the operation time of the count button 171, the shorter the value of the count long press timer becomes, and the value of the number of sheets to be counted increases; however, the longer the operation time of the count button 171, the longer the value of the count long press timer may become, and the value of the number of sheets to be counted may increase, or the longer the value of the count long press timer may become, and the value of the number of sheets to be counted may decrease, or the shorter the value of the count long press timer may become, and the value of the number of sheets to be counted may decrease.

In addition, the value set in the count long press timer may be gradually shortened and the value of the number of medals to be counted may be gradually increased until the value of the "number of game medals" stored in RAM 358 becomes 0.

Figure 68 (a) is a timing chart showing an example of a continuation of the example shown in Figure 67 (c).

In the example shown in FIG. 67(c), after the long press stage value reaches 4, the value of the count long press timer becomes constant at the shortest 0.3 seconds, and the number of medals to be counted becomes constant at the maximum 50 medals. This state may be continued until the value of the "number of medals played" stored in RAM 358 becomes 0, but if the number of medals played falls below a certain value (e.g., 300 medals), end-game processing may be executed. The end-game processing referred to here is processing in which the value of the count long press timer is increased and the value of the number of medals to be counted is decreased as the number of medals played decreases.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 68(a) displays the value of the "game medal count" stored in RAM 358. At the left end of this timing chart, when the count long press timer is set to a value for 0.3 seconds and the planned number of medals to be counted is set to 50, the "game medal count" becomes 299 medals, meaning that the "game medal count" falls below a certain value (300 medals).

When the count long press timer value reaches "1" while the count button 171 is still operated, the planned count number is set to 50 again (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). Note that the number set at this time may be a number less than 50 (e.g., 30). Furthermore, when the timer value reaches "0" while the count button 171 is still ON, the count long press timer value is set to a value of 0.6 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 58), which is longer.

When the count long press timer reaches "1" while the count button 171 is still being operated, the planned number of sheets to be counted is now set to 30 (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). Furthermore, when the timer reaches "0" while the count button 171 is still in the ON state, the count long press timer is set to a value of 0.9 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 58), and is lengthened again.

When the count long press timer value reaches "1" again while the count button 171 is still being operated, the planned number of sheets to be counted is set to 20 (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). Furthermore, when the timer value reaches "0" while the count button 171 is still in the ON state, the count long press timer value is set to a value of 1.2 seconds (step S4221 shown in FIG. 58), which is even longer.

Then, when the count long press timer value becomes "1" while the count button 171 is being operated, the planned count number is set to 20 again (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). Note that the planned count number may be set to a number less than 20 (for example, 10). Furthermore, when the timer value becomes "0" while the count button 171 is in the ON state, the count long press timer value is set to a value for 1.2 seconds again (step S4221 shown in FIG. 58). Note that the count long press timer value may be set to a value greater than 1.2 seconds (for example, a value for 1.5 seconds). In the example shown in FIG. 68(a), after the "game medal number" becomes 9, the hand is released from the count button 171, and the count button 171 is turned OFF. As a result, the counting ends when the "game medal number" becomes 9.

In the final process described above, the number of medals being counted decreases stepwise, and the value of the count long press timer increases, reducing the chance of the "game medal count" becoming 0 unintentionally due to a delay in releasing the count button 171. If you wish to set the "game medal count" to 0, you can continue to operate the count button 171 until the display on the game medal count display device 170 becomes "0."

Figure 68 (b) is a timing chart showing an example of a case in which a power outage occurs when the planned counting number is set to 30 in the example shown in Figure 67 (c), and then power is restored.

In the example shown in FIG. 68(b), the count button 171 remains operated even after the power is interrupted and before it is restored. For example, in the case of a momentary power interruption, power may be restored before the player releases the count button 171. Alternatively, some players may not release the count button 171 even after they know that the power has been interrupted. However, this is only to take into consideration the case where the count button 171 remains operated between the time the power is interrupted and the time it is restored, and it is not possible to know whether the count button 171 remains operated until the power is restored. If the count button 171 remains operated and power is restored, an ON signal is detected after the power is restored without detecting the up edge of the signal indicating the ON/OFF state of the count button 171. In this case, if an ON signal is detected even after 0.5 seconds, which is the judgment time for a long press operation, the medal count control unit 350 sets the maximum number (50 in this example) as the number of medals to be counted (step S4222 shown in FIG. 58). Even if control is temporarily interrupted due to a power outage, the fact that the count button 171 has been operated for a long period of time can be reflected after power is restored.

After power is restored, the number may be set to a number slightly less than the maximum number (e.g., 30). Alternatively, the number of sheets to be counted at the time of power outage may be reset.

Although the explanation here has been about the number of medals to be counted, the same applies to the value of the count long press timer. In other words, if power is restored while the count button 171 is still operated, the medal count control unit 350 sets the value of the count long press timer to the shortest time (300 ms in this example) (step S4221 shown in FIG. 58).

Figure 69 is a timing chart showing an example of adopting the planned count number update process of Figure 59.

Operation of the counting button 171 begins at timing A, and when 0.5 seconds have passed while the button is still ON (timing B), it becomes a long press operation, and 50 coins are counted. If a further 1.5 seconds have passed while the button is still ON (a cumulative total of 2.0 seconds from the start of operation: timing C), automatic counting will continue even if the counting button 171 is released, and 50 coins will be counted each time the 0.3 second counting timing arrives. This automatic counting will continue until the "number of game medals" value stored in RAM 358 reaches 0. Therefore, the number of game medals can be quickly reduced to 0 with a hassle-free operation.

When automatic counting is started, the change display on the game medal count display device 170 described with reference to FIG. 62(b) is not performed, and the displayed number on the game medal count display device 170 decreases in units of 50 medals. In the seven-segment display that is the game medal count display device 170, the change display in which one medal is subtracted at approximately 4 ms intervals may appear as if all seven segments are lit and some segments are slightly flashing due to afterimages. Furthermore, if the change display continues until the number of game medals in the "game medal count" becomes 0, it may actually make the current displayed number difficult to understand. Furthermore, players who select automatic counting often want the number of game medals in the "game medal count" to be 0, and there are cases where there is little need to display the change display to show the number being subtracted by one.

Since there is no player operation during the period when automatic counting is being performed, it is preferable to notify the player that automatic counting is being performed with a lamp or the like. Furthermore, if any payout is made based on the game result during automatic counting, the payout amount is also included in the automatic counting. In other words, the number of medals paid out during automatic counting is added to the "game medal count" stored in RAM 358, and will be included in the counting from the next time onwards.

Figure 70 (a) is a timing chart showing an example in which automatic counting ends when the "number of game medals" value stored in RAM 358 reaches a certain value.

Automatic counting starts when 2.0 seconds have elapsed since the start of the counting button 171 operation, and 50 medals are counted each time the counting timing of 0.3 seconds arrives. In FIG. 70(a), the value of the "game medal number" stored in the RAM 358 is also written under the "counted medal number". In this example, the counting button 171 is released when the "game medal number" is around 147 medals, but the "game medal number" continues to decrease due to automatic counting. Eventually, when the "game medal number" falls below a certain value (for example, the value counted at one counting timing, here 50 medals), the automatic counting ends automatically, and the "game medal number" will not decrease unless the counting button 171 is operated. Here, the remaining 47 medals remain without being automatically counted. If you want to continue playing after automatic counting, you can start playing promptly because there is a remaining number. There are also cases where you want to count the number of all game medals. To start counting again, operate the counting button 171 again. For example, if a long press operation for 0.5 seconds is performed, the "number of game medals" becomes 0. Note that, although the certain value is set to 50, the certain value may be set by the player. For example, the player may be able to select from 0, 20, and 50. After counting, the player can leave a desired number of game medals. Note that, a certain value may be set according to the game state. For example, in a normal game state, a certain value is set to 0, and in a bonus game state such as during AT play, a certain value is set to 50. In a bonus game state, since the possibility of ending the game is low, a certain amount of game medals can be left to start playing promptly. Note that, a certain value may be set according to the number of game medals counted automatically. For example, if the number of game medals counted is less than 100, a certain value is set to 0, and if the number of game medals counted is 100 or more, a certain value is set to 20. If a small number of game medals are counted, the purpose may be to exchange the counted number of game medals for prizes such as drinks, and game play may continue after the automatic counting. By leaving a certain number of game medals, game play can be started promptly. The opposite is also possible. If a large number of game medals are counted, the purpose may be to count them once a notification or the like is executed to encourage counting, and game play may be continued after the automatic counting. By leaving a certain number of game medals, game play can be started promptly.

Figure 70 (b) is a timing chart showing an example of when power is interrupted during automatic counting and then restored.

In the example shown in FIG. 70(b), automatic counting is started and the hand is released from the count button 171. When 50 medals are counted by automatic counting every time the counting timing of 0.3 seconds arrives, a power outage occurs. After that, power is restored, and if the count button 171 is operated again at this timing of power restoration, or if the count button 171 is started to be operated during the power outage and power is restored while it is still operated, an ON signal indicating that the count button 171 is ON is detected after power restoration. If this ON signal is detected when power is restored, automatic counting starts even if the 2 seconds that are the determination time for starting automatic counting have not elapsed. In other words, 50 medals are counted at the time the first counting timing arrives after power restoration. Therefore, even if the hand is released from the count button 171 before 2 seconds have elapsed after power restoration, automatic counting starts.

Figure 71 shows an example of a display indicating that automatic counting is in progress.

Figure 71 shows the performance image display device 157, which is a liquid crystal display, and the game medal count display device 170, which is a five-digit seven-segment display.

The upper part of Figure 71 shows the state during counting before automatic counting begins. In other words, this is the state in which the number of coins to be counted is determined by the manner in which the count button 171 is operated (long press or one or more short presses). In this state, the text display "Counting" is displayed on the performance image display device 157, which is displaying the game background. In other words, the text display "Counting" is displayed so as to overlap the game background display.

Also, on the game medal count display device 170 shown at the top, the segment representing 97 is lit.

On the other hand, the lower part of FIG. 71 shows a state in which automatic counting is being performed. When the medal count control unit 350 starts automatic counting, it sends a command to the game control unit 302, including automatic counting information indicating that the counting is performed automatically in the counting medal count control state command. The game control unit 302 sends a security command to the first sub-control unit 400, including the automatic counting information in addition to the information indicating the counting medal count. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the automatic counting information via the first sub-control unit 400, and causes the performance image display device 157 to display the text display "Counting automatically" and the message 157m. When automatic counting is being performed, an automatic counting state is notified. Note that when automatic counting is being performed, a notification may be made by sound or a lamp. In FIG. 71, the text display "Counting automatically" is displayed on the performance image display device 157 in which the game background display is being performed. Below that, an explanation is given on how to handle the count button 171 during automatic counting, such as "Counting will continue even if you release your hand from the button." When the automatic counting state notification is being made, a notification that no button operation is required is made. Furthermore, an explanation is given that "You can play." When the automatic counting state notification is being made, a notification that game progress is possible is made. Even during automatic counting, it is notified that game progress is possible, such as by operating the start lever 135 and the stop buttons 137 to 139. Note that during counting processing, operation of the bet buttons 130 and 132 is not accepted. Note that since it is expected that there will be cases where automatic counting is to be manually ended after the start of automatic counting, automatic counting may be ended by operating the count button 171 again after the start of automatic counting. In other words, when the medal count control unit 350 detects an up edge of a signal indicating the on/off state of the count button 171 during automatic counting, the medal count control unit 350 ends automatic counting. When the automatic counting ends, the automatic counting state notification is ended.

Figure 72 shows an example of a sound output indicating that automatic counting is in progress.

The operation of the counting button 171 is started at timing A, and when 0.5 seconds have passed while the button is in the ON state (timing B), it becomes a long press operation, and 50 coins are counted. When a further 1.5 seconds have passed while the button is in the ON state (a cumulative total of 2.0 seconds from the start of operation: timing C), automatic counting continues even if the counting button 171 is released. In this example, when the first counting timing arrives after 2.0 seconds has passed, a counting sound indicating that automatic counting has started is output from the speaker 272. Note that the counting sound may also be output after 2.0 seconds have passed.

The volume of the counting sound increases at a predetermined time interval. The predetermined time here is 1.2 seconds, but it may be 3 seconds or 0.3 seconds. By increasing the volume as time passes, it is possible to easily recognize that the cumulative counting amount is increasing. The first counting sound output first and the second counting sound output next are output continuously, the second counting sound and the third counting sound output next are also output continuously, and the third counting sound and the fourth counting sound output next are also output continuously. In addition to the volume, the rhythm, pitch, tone, etc. may be changed. That is, the counting sound may change in stages. For example, the n+1th counting sound may be a counting sound with a faster rhythm or a higher pitch than the nth counting sound. In addition, the volume may not increase at a predetermined time interval, and only the tone may change at a predetermined time interval. For example, the first counting sound may be a sound consisting of only instrument sound A, the second counting sound may be a sound consisting of multiple sounds consisting of instrument sound A plus instrument sound B, and the third counting sound may be a sound consisting of multiple sounds consisting of instrument sound A, instrument sound B, and instrument sound C. It is possible to easily recognize that the cumulative count is increasing.

On the other hand, if the counting sound continues to be output during counting, it may cause discomfort to the player. For example, it takes nearly 50 seconds to count 5,000 coins won through playing in one go. If the counting sound continues to be output during this time, it may be unpleasant to the ear and may also be annoyed by the player next to you. To address these cases, the volume of the counting sound may be set to decrease as time passes, or the counting sound may be output for a predetermined time and then become silent (volume 0). Note that the volume of the counting sound may be set to decrease as time passes, and the counting sound may be output for a predetermined time and then become a constant sound (volume 1).

Furthermore, in the case of slot machines that are equipped with a function that allows players to customize the machine in various ways, players may be able to select the type of counting sound, its volume, and the way in which it changes (for example, whether the volume increases or decreases). This can also increase the interest when counting.

In addition to sound, a lamp may be illuminated or an image may be output, and the lamp's illumination or image may be changed in stages.

Figure 73 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a power interruption occurs before the 0.5 second threshold for determining a long press operation has elapsed after the count button 171 has been operated.

In the example shown in FIG. 73(a), the operation of the counting button 171 is started, and a power outage occurs before the counting long press flag described with reference to FIG. 40 (or FIG. 58, FIG. 59) is set to ON, and the counting button 171 remains operated until power is restored. For example, in the case of a momentary power outage, power may be restored before the player releases the counting button 171. Alternatively, some players may not release the counting button 171 even after realizing that power has been cut off. However, this is merely to take into consideration the case where the counting button 171 remains operated between the time the power outage occurs and the time it is restored, and it is not possible to know whether the counting button 171 remains operated until power is restored. If power is restored while the counting button 171 remains operated, an ON signal is detected after power is restored without detecting the rising edge of the signal representing the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171. If an ON signal is detected without detecting an up edge after power is restored, the medal count control unit 350 determines that the count button 171 has continued to be operated, and again determines whether the count button 171 remains operated until 0.5 seconds have elapsed since power was restored. If the count button 171 remains operated, the count long press flag is set to ON, and if the count button 171 continues to be operated, 50 medals are counted at the counting timing.

If the button is pressed and held for a long time after power is restored, a notification that the button is being pressed and held may be issued. The notification that the button is being pressed and held will start from the point at which the first counting timing arrives 0.5 seconds after power is restored, if the button is still being pressed and held. This is because if the counting button 171 is released before 0.5 seconds have elapsed, it will not be considered a long press, and if the counting button 171 is released before the first counting timing arrives after 0.5 seconds have elapsed, not a single coin will be counted. Therefore, the notification that the button is being pressed and held will start on the condition that the button is still being pressed and held when the first counting timing arrives after 0.5 seconds have elapsed.

If the count button 171 is released before 0.5 seconds have elapsed after power is restored, one sheet will be counted, but this may be an operation error. For this reason, if the operation of the count button 171 is stopped within 0.5 seconds immediately after power is turned on, it may be possible to treat this as an operation error and not count even one sheet.

Note that FIG. 73(b) shows an example in which the start of operation of the count button 171 is determined by detecting only the rising edge of the signal indicating the on/off state of the count button 171.

In the example shown in FIG. 73(b), the counting button 171 remains operated during the power outage, so after power is restored, the rising edge of the signal indicating the on/off state of the counting button 171 is not detected, and no matter how long the counting button 171 is operated, a long press determination is not made and no counting is performed. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 73(a), the long press determination is made based on whether 0.5 seconds have passed since the on signal of the counting button 171 was detected, so the long press determination is performed even if the rising edge is not detected.

Figure 74 is a timing chart showing a modified example of the example shown in Figure 73.

In the first modified example shown in FIG. 74(a), power is interrupted when X seconds, which is shorter than the 0.5 seconds that is the determination time for a long press operation, has elapsed since the start of operation of the counting button 171, and then power is restored.

After power is restored, if an ON signal is detected without detecting the rising edge of the signal indicating the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171, the X seconds that had elapsed before the power outage are subtracted from the 0.5 seconds that is the determination time for the long press operation, and if the operation of the counting button 171 continues for the remaining time ((0.5-X) seconds), it is determined that the counting button 171 has remained in an operated state for 0.5 seconds, and the counting long press flag is set to ON.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 74(b), power is interrupted when X seconds, which is shorter than the 0.5 seconds that is the determination time for a long press operation, has elapsed since the start of operation of the counting button 171, and then power is restored.

In the second modified example shown in FIG. 74(b), a standby process is provided for a certain period (2 seconds in this example) when power is restored (when power is turned on). That is, since the processing load increases immediately after power is turned on, the process waits until it is an appropriate timing for performing the counting process before performing the process related to the counting button 171. After the standby time has elapsed, the process related to the counting button 171 is performed as in FIG. 74(a). That is, if an ON signal is detected without detecting a rising edge of a signal indicating the ON/OFF state of the counting button 171, the X seconds that have elapsed before the power failure are subtracted from 0.5 seconds, which is the judgment time for the long press operation, and if the operation of the counting button 171 continues for the remaining time ((0.5-X) seconds) after the standby time has elapsed, it is determined that the counting button 171 has been operated for 0.5 seconds, and the counting long press flag is set to ON.

Figure 75 is a timing chart showing another variation of the example shown in Figure 73.

In the third modified example shown in FIG. 75(a), power is interrupted before the 0.5 second threshold for determining whether the count button 171 is pressed and held has elapsed after the count button 171 is pressed, and then power is restored.

After power is restored (powered on), if an on signal is detected without detecting the rising edge of the signal representing the on/off state of the count button 171, the medal count control unit 350 determines that the count button 171 has been operated, and starts a timer dedicated to power-on. This timer measures a time (e.g., 2 seconds) longer than the normal long press operation determination time (0.5 seconds). Specifically, the count long press timer, which is set to an initial value of 500 ms in step S4206 in FIG. 40, is set to an initial value of 2000 ms dedicated to power-on. In this way, for a long press operation immediately after powering on, the count long press flag is set to on if a long operation is performed, and if the count timing arrives while the count button 171 is still being operated, 50 medals will be counted.

In the fourth modified example shown in FIG. 75(b), after the operation of the counting button 171 is started, a power interruption occurs before 0.5 seconds, which is the judgment time for a long press operation, has elapsed, and then the power is restored. In this example, the counting button 171 is released during the power interruption, and the operation ends. Therefore, when the power is restored (power is turned on), the ON signal indicating the ON state of the counting button 171 is not detected. In this fourth modified example, a timer dedicated to power-on is started in conjunction with the power-on. This timer times a time longer (e.g., 3 seconds) than the normal long press operation judgment time (0.5 seconds). In addition, the timer setting value dedicated to power-on in this example is longer than the timer setting value dedicated to power-on in the third modified example (e.g., 2 seconds). If the operation of the counting button 171 is started while the timer dedicated to power-on is timing, and the operation of the counting button 171 is still continuing after 3 seconds has elapsed, the counting long press flag is set to ON. That is, while the timer is counting, at least one of the rising edge of the signal indicating the on/off state of the count button 171 and the on signal is detected, and if the on signal is still detected after three seconds have passed, the count long press flag is set to on. Then, when the count timing arrives while the count button 171 is still being operated, 50 coins will be counted.

Next, we will provide a detailed explanation once again of the display mode of the game medal count display device 170, which is a 5-digit 7-segment display, as explained using Figure 62 (b).

Figure 76 (a) shows an example of a change display (subtraction) on the gaming medal count display device 170.

As shown at the top of FIG. 76(a), the number "100" is displayed on the game medal count display device 170. When the change display starts, the game medal count display device 170 displays a number that is decremented by "1" at approximately 4 ms intervals in the display display process shown in FIG. 54. FIG. 76(a) shows how "1" is decremented by "99" → "98" → "97" → "96" → "95" → "94".

When 50 sheets are counted by pressing and holding the count button 171, the time required for the change display to change by "1" at approximately 4 ms intervals is approximately 4 ms x 50 = 200 ms. Since the counting timing has a 300 ms cycle, the display time for the subtraction change display is shorter than the cycle of the counting timing, making it possible to display a change that subtracts 50 sheets.

Figure 76 (b) shows an example of a change display (addition) on the gaming medal count display device 170.

The number "100" is also displayed on the game medal count display device 170 shown at the top of Figure 76 (b). When the change display starts, this game medal count display device 170 displays numbers that are incremented by "1" at intervals of about 4 ms, the same as the change display when subtracting. Figure 76 (b) shows how "1" is added at a time, from "101" → "102" → "103" → "104" → "105" → "106".

When the loan button 707 is operated to loan out 50 coins, and 15 coins (the maximum number allowed by the rules) are paid out as a result of playing, the time required for the change display to change (add or subtract) by "1" at intervals of about 4 ms will be about 4 ms x 65 = about 260 ms. Since the counting timing has a cycle of 300 ms, the display time for the change display to add is shorter than the cycle of the counting timing, and it is also possible to display a change display that adds 65 coins.

Figure 77 shows another example of change display in the game medal count display device 170. Since the player may not notice a change in the display content of the game medal count display device 170, this is an example of notifying the player that there has been a change in the display content.

The number "100" is also displayed on the game medal count display device 170 shown in FIG. 77(a). In this example, the change display is performed using all digits, making it easy to recognize that the number is changing. In changing from the number "100" to the number "85", in this example, the display alternates between a display in which all segments of all five digits are lit (displaying "88888") and a display in which all segments of all five digits are turned off (displaying "00000") every 8 ms. Eventually, after 250 ms has elapsed in this example, the number "85" is displayed on the game medal count display device 170. Since the change display is performed using all digits, it can be confirmed whether or not a malfunction that causes the display to stop can occur in any of the segments of the game medal count display device 170. If it can be recognized that no malfunction has occurred, it can be recognized that there is no error in the number displayed after the change display.

Note that while all digits are used to display the changes here, it is also possible to use only some of the digits in order to reduce the processing load and data volume. For example, a one-digit display including the rightmost digit, a two-digit display, or a three-digit display may be used. If the rightmost digit is not included when not using all digits, it may give the impression that the rightmost digit segment is faulty, so it is better to include the rightmost digit to show that there is no fault.

The number "100" is also displayed on the game medal count display device 170 shown in FIG. 77(b). In this example, the number changes from "100" to "85". In other words, it changes from a three-digit number to a two-digit number. Therefore, a change display is performed using three-digit segments. The change display here changes the position of the lit segment for each digit, making it appear as if the segments are rotating. This change display gives the impression that the change is starting from "100". Then, in this example, when 250 ms has elapsed since the change display began, the number "85" is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

If you use two-digit segments instead of three-digit segments to show the change, it will give the impression that the change ends at "85."

The display may change stepwise by a predetermined number (e.g., 20) toward the target value, sandwiched between the two types of change displays described above using FIG. 77. Specifically, when changing from "100" to a final value of "60" (target value), the display will read "100" → change display → "80" → change display → "60." Furthermore, when a full-color 7-segment LED display is used as the game medal count display device 170, the luminous color of the segments may be changed when the segments are lit during the change display.

Figure 78 shows an example in which the "game medal count" stored in RAM 358 is displayed not only on the game medal count display device 170 but also on the performance image display device 157.

The medal count control unit 350 sends a command including information representing the "game medal count" (the number of game medals displayed as shown in FIG. 11) to the game control unit 302 as a medal count control state command. The game control unit 302 includes information representing the "game medal count" in the security command and sends the security command to the first sub-control unit 400. The security command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 at 100 ms intervals. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the information representing the "game medal count" via the first sub-control unit 400, and causes the performance image display device 157 to display the "game medal count". In this example, the "game medal count" is always displayed in the bottom right of the display screen of the performance image display device 157.

In this example, the display of the "game medal count" on the performance image display device 157 displays the number as is according to the information representing the "game medal count" contained in the security command transmitted at 100 ms intervals. The performance image display device 157 shown on the left side of FIG. 78 displays the number "100" according to the previous security command. The number "100" is also displayed on the game medal count display device 170 displayed at the far left. In this state, the count button 171 is pressed and held, and 50 medals are counted. The medal count control unit 350 starts executing the display display process shown in FIG. 54, and the game medal count display device 170 starts a change display that subtracts "1" at approximately 4 ms intervals. Note that in FIG. 78, the display during the change display is shown as if all 7 segments are lit and some segments are slightly blinking due to an afterimage. The game medal count display device 170 takes about 200 ms to display a change in which the medal count is subtracted by "1", and the number "50" is displayed about 200 ms after 50 medals have been counted.

On the other hand, on the first sub-control unit 400 side, when 50 coins are counted, a security command including information indicating that the "game medal count" is 50 coins is received during the security command transmission period (100 ms). In the example shown in FIG. 78, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the security command about 20 ms after 50 coins are counted, and the display process is executed. The display process here is a frame replacement process that replaces an image displaying "100" with an image displaying "50", and is completed in a short time. As a result, the number "50" is displayed on the performance image display device 157 before the change display on the game medal count display device 170 is completed.

In the example shown in FIG. 78 described above, the sub-controllers (400, 500) that receive the "game medal count" information do not display any changes, but the main control unit 300 that issues the information does. In this way, the final number "50" displayed by the game medal count display device 170 can be ascertained from the display on the performance image display device 157, and it can be recognized that the change display has been completed when "50" is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

Figure 79 shows a modified example of the example shown in Figure 78.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 79, the "game medal count" display on the effect image display device 157 also changes by subtracting "1" at a time. Moreover, the change display takes longer than the change display on the game medal count display device 170. Specifically, the change display on the effect image display device 157 takes 280 ms. This 280 ms is longer than the time (approximately 4 ms x 65 = approximately 260 ms) required for the game medal count display device 170 to display an incremental change when 50 medals are lent by operating the lending button 707 and 15 medals (corresponding to the maximum number of medals that can be paid out) are paid out as a result of playing, and is less than 300 ms, which is the cycle of the counting timing.

Usually, the player often looks at the effect image display device 157, and does not look at the game medal number display device 170 frequently. As described above, it is desired that the slot machine 100 does not continue to store too many "game medal numbers", and it is desired to increase the frequency of operation of the count button 171. To achieve this, it is necessary for the player to pay attention to the "game medal number". The reason why the "game medal number" is also displayed on the effect image display device 157 is to make the player pay attention to the "game medal number" as much as possible. However, since the effect image display device 157 displays attractive effect displays such as game background displays, even if the "game medal number" is displayed, the player tends to be distracted by the attractive effect displays. Therefore, as in this modified example, if the display of the "game medal number" on the effect image display device 157 is made to take longer than the display on the game medal number display device 170, it is expected that the player will also pay attention to the game medal number display device 170, which displays quickly. If you look at the game medal count display device 170, you will see that it does not display any special effects, allowing the player to clearly recognize the "game medal count." As a result, it becomes easier for players to notice that the number of game medals is accumulating, and it is expected that the frequency of operating the count button 171 will increase.

The change display on the performance image display device 157 not only displays changing text, but also displays an animation indicating that a change is occurring, which draws attention to the "game medal count," and it is expected that the frequency of operation of the count button 171 will also increase. By displaying the change display on the performance image display device 157 in a different manner from the change display on the game medal count display device 170, it is possible to display the change display in a manner appropriate to the period of the change display. The change display on the performance image display device 157 may also be displayed in the same manner as the change display on the game medal count display device 170. This makes it easy to recognize that a change display is occurring.

Figure 80 shows another example that is completely different from the example shown in Figure 78.

In this alternative example shown in FIG. 80, the game medal count display device 170 does not display any changes, but only displays the "game medal count" on the performance image display device 157. That is, in this alternative example, the display device display process shown in FIG. 54 is not executed, and when 50 medals are counted, the number "50" is immediately displayed on the game medal count display device 170. On the other hand, even if the performance image display device 157 receives a security command, it does not immediately display the "game medal count" according to the information contained in the security command that represents the security command, but instead displays a change that subtracts "1" at a time.

In this example, just like the modified example shown in FIG. 79, it takes longer for the "game medal count" to be displayed on the performance image display device 157 than on the game medal count display device 170, so it is expected that the player will also pay attention to the game medal count display device 170, which displays quickly. By looking at the game medal count display device 170, the player will be able to clearly recognize the "game medal count." As a result, it becomes easier for the player to notice that the number of game medals is accumulating, and it is expected that the frequency of operating the count button 171 will increase. In addition, in the medal count control unit 350, the amount of data for displaying changes is reduced, and the processing load is also reduced.

Figure 81 (a) is a timing chart showing what happens when a payout is about to be made beyond the payout threshold.

Figure 81 (a) shows the value of the "game medal count" stored in RAM 358. Below that, the number of medals to be paid out that will be added to the "game medal count" is shown.

The RAM 358 of the medal count control unit 350 can store a maximum of 16,383 "game medal count." In other words, the maximum number of medals that can be stored in the RAM 358 is 16,383. The payout threshold is set to this maximum number of medals that can be stored.

When the "number of game medals" is stored up to 16,373, a further 15 medals (corresponding to the maximum number of medals allowed by the rules) are paid out, which corresponds to the maximum number of medals to be paid out. The number of medals to be paid out, which is 15 medals, is included in the game control state command 1 (payout command) and is sent from the game control unit 302 to the medal count control unit 350. If the number of medals to be paid out is added, the "number of game medals" exceeds the maximum number of medals stored, and exceeds the payout threshold value in step S4B03 of FIG. 50. For this reason, the payout response command includes "abnormality" and is sent from the medal count control unit 350 to the game control unit 302. If the payout response command includes "abnormality," the game control unit 302 sends a command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that the number of game medals is in an overflow state (addition by payout is not possible) (step S1608 shown in FIG. 22). Based on this command, the sub-control unit (400, 500) issues an over-the-limit error notification. In the example shown in FIG. 81(a), on the performance image display device 157 where the game background display is displayed, a text display indicating that the payout threshold has been exceeded and encouraging the user to operate the count button 171 is displayed so as to overlap with the game background display as an over-the-limit error notification. In other words, the over-the-limit error notification is executed even during play.

To notify the user of the upper limit exceeding error, an error sound may be output from the speaker 272 or a lamp may be turned on.

Figure 81 (b) shows another example of an upper limit exceeded error notification.

The upper limit exceeding error notification may be displayed by blinking on the effect image display device 157. In the example shown in FIG. 81(b), the text display of the upper limit exceeding error notification is displayed every second so as to overlap with the gaming background display. Because the upper limit exceeding error notification is displayed during play and so as to overlap with the gaming background display, it becomes difficult to see the gaming background display. Therefore, to avoid causing any disadvantage to the player, a blinking display is used to ensure a period during which the gaming background display is easily visible.

When the game control unit 302 receives a payout response command including "normal" from the medal count control unit 350, it sends a payout command to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S1607 shown in FIG. 22). When the sub-control unit (400, 500) receives a payout command while an upper limit exceeding error notification is being executed, it ends the execution of the upper limit exceeding error notification. Note that if the counting button 171 is operated, the upper limit exceeding error notification may be ended regardless of the number of game medals. After the counting button 171 is operated, the upper limit exceeding error notification can be ended early even if the counting process takes time.

In addition, information representing the "game medal count" stored in the RAM 358 is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in the form of a security command. If the information representing the "game medal count" sent is the number of medals at the payout threshold (16,383 medals), the sub-control unit (400, 500) may issue an upper limit reaching error notification. For example, the performance image display device 157 may display a text display saying "The upper limit has been reached. Please operate the counting button." This upper limit reaching error notification ends when the information representing the "game medal count" sent is a number less than the payout threshold (16,383 medals). Note that if the counting button 171 is operated, the upper limit reaching error notification may be terminated regardless of the number of medals. After the counting button 171 is operated, the upper limit reaching error notification can be terminated early even if the counting process takes time.

In addition, other cases in which the "game medal count" is added include when settlement is made and when a medal is loaned from the loaning machine 700. In this embodiment, the settlement is not judged to have reached the upper limit, but it may be judged to have reached the upper limit in the same way as when a medal is paid out. For example, the settlement threshold is set to the maximum number of medals stored, and even if the settlement threshold is exceeded by settlement, the settlement response command includes "abnormality" and is sent from the medal count control unit 350 to the game control unit 302. And even if the settlement response command includes "abnormality", the game control unit 302 sends an error occurrence command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that an error has occurred in exceeding the upper limit of the number of game medals displayed, and the sub-control units (400, 500) issue an error notification of the upper limit exceeded. On the other hand, the lending threshold is set to a number smaller than the maximum number of stored medals (for example, 15,000 medals), and if the "game medal count" exceeds the lending threshold due to lending, an upper limit lending error occurs, the lending is not accepted (if the judgment in step S3712 in FIG. 36 is No), and the "game medal count" is not added. A notice of the upper limit lending error is displayed on the information display 703 of the lending machine 700. However, by transmitting the occurrence of the upper limit lending error from the medal count control unit 350 to the game control unit 302, and then from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400, it becomes possible to notify the slot machine 100 side, such as the performance image display device 157, speaker 272, or lamp.

Figure 82 (a) is a timing chart showing what happens when a payout is about to be made when the second payout threshold is exceeded.

In this Figure 82 (a), the value of the "number of game medals" stored in RAM 358 is also shown, and below that, the number of medals to be paid out that will be added to the "number of game medals" is shown.

The game control unit 302 receives a command including the game medal count display number (game medal count) as a medal count control state command from the medal count control unit 350. The game control unit 302 is set with a payout second threshold (for example, 15,000 medals) that is less than the maximum storage number of 16,383 medals (payout threshold) of the RAM 358. If the game medal count display number sent as a command is equal to or greater than this payout second threshold, the game control unit 302 transmits an error occurrence command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that an error has occurred in which the game medal display number is close to the upper limit. The sub-control unit (400, 500) performs a notification that the upper limit is close based on this error occurrence command. In the example shown in FIG. 82(a), a character display prompting the operation of the count button 171 is displayed as a notification that the upper limit is close, so as to overlap with the game background display, on the performance image display device 157 on which the game background display is displayed. That is, in this example, the upper limit approaching notification is executed during play. Figure 81(a) above shows the effect image display device 157 switching from displaying the upper limit approaching notification to displaying an upper limit exceeded error notification.

As the notification that the upper limit is approaching, a notification sound may be output from the speaker 272, or a lamp may be turned on. Although the notification that the upper limit is approaching continues from when the notification that the upper limit is approaching is started until the notification that the upper limit is exceeded is started, the notification that the upper limit is approaching may be implemented only for a part of a game, taking into consideration the game up to the upper limit of the number of game medals. For example, the notification may be implemented within one second after the start lever 135 is operated. On the other hand, the notification that the upper limit is exceeded is implemented during a game. For example, if it is known that there is only a short time left in the special period for AT play or the like even after the notification that the upper limit is approaching is started, it is possible to easily prioritize the remaining AT play, etc. Furthermore, when the notification is switched from the notification that the upper limit is approaching to the notification that the upper limit is exceeded, the player can easily recognize that the notification has been changed.

Figure 82 (b) shows another example of an upper limit approach notification.

The notification of approaching the upper limit may also be displayed in a flashing manner on the performance image display device 157. In the example shown in FIG. 82(b), the text display of the notification of approaching the upper limit is displayed every second so as to overlap with the gaming background display. The notification of approaching the upper limit is also displayed during play so as to overlap with the gaming background display, making it difficult to see the gaming background display. Therefore, to avoid causing any disadvantage to the player, a flashing display is used to ensure a period during which the gaming background display is easily visible.

When the game control unit 302 receives a command from the medal count control unit 350 that includes a medal count display number that is less than the second payout threshold, it sends an error release command to the first sub-control unit 400, indicating that the medal count display number is close to being released error has been released. The sub-control units (400, 500) end the execution of the upper limit approaching notification based on this error release command.

A second payout threshold may also be set in the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, if the information representing the "number of game medals" transmitted in the security command is equal to or greater than this second payout threshold, the sub-control unit (400, 500) may issue the above-mentioned notification that the upper limit is approaching. This notification ends when the transmitted information representing the "number of game medals" becomes a number less than the second payout threshold.

Furthermore, a second payout threshold may be set in the medal count control unit 350. In this case, the medal count control unit 350 determines whether the "game medal count" is equal to or greater than the second payout threshold, and if it is equal to or greater than the second payout threshold, it transmits a notification command to the game control unit 302, and the game control unit 302 transmits a notification command to the sub-control unit (400, 500) based on the command information. This also allows the sub-control unit (400, 500) to execute the upper limit approach notification. Then, when it falls below the second payout threshold, it transmits a notification end command via the medal count control unit 350 → game control unit 302 → sub-control unit (400, 500) route. Note that the blinking period of the blinking display of the upper limit approach notification should be longer than the blinking period of the blinking display of the upper limit exceeding error notification. If the blinking cycle is short when the notification switches from the approaching upper limit to the upper limit exceeded error notification, the urgency of the notification can be easily recognized. Note that if the notification about the approaching upper limit is a blinking display, the upper limit exceeded error notification can be a constant display. This makes it easy to recognize the urgency of the notification.

Figure 83 shows an example of a case where a notification prompting a count overlaps with a highly urgent error notification.

The effect image display device 157 shown on the left side of FIG. 83(a) displays the upper limit approaching notification display overlapping the game background display. The upper limit approaching notification display may be a constant display, but is a flashing display that is displayed every second. The front door 102 is opened while the upper limit approaching notification is being performed. When the front door 102 is opened, the game control unit 302 transmits an error occurrence command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that a door opening error has occurred. The sub-control unit (400, 500) issues an error notification based on this error occurrence command. Since the possibility of fraudulent acts (so-called cheating) increases when the front door 102 is open, it is necessary to have the front door 102 closed as soon as possible. Therefore, the error notification of the door opening error is a more urgent notification than a notification that prompts counting. Even when the front door 102 is open, the operation of the counting button 171 is accepted. The effect image display device 157 shown on the right side of FIG. 83(a) displays an error notification display for a door open error, overlapping the game background display. The error notification display for a door open error (hereinafter referred to as the door open error display) displays the text "Door is open" and is constantly displayed. This door open error display is displayed on the same layer as the upper limit approaching notification display, but it may be displayed on a layer in front of the upper limit approaching notification display so as to overlap the upper limit approaching notification display. Alternatively, since the door open error display is constantly displayed, it may be displayed on a layer behind the upper limit approaching notification which is displayed flashing, so that the constantly displayed door open error display is overlapped by the flashing upper limit approaching notification display.

Figure 83(b) shows that the text display of the upper limit approaching warning is displayed every second in addition to the door open error display, which is always displayed. The right side of Figure 83(b) shows how the text display of the upper limit approaching warning disappears by blinking, leaving the door open error display, which is always displayed. In the state shown on the right, the door open error display, which is of high urgency, is easy to see. Also, a sound such as "The door is open" is output from speaker 272 as an error notification of the door open error, but the warning sound of the upper limit approaching warning is not output.

Although this is not an error with as high an urgency as a door open error, a message such as "Please stop the reels that are spinning" or "A communication error has occurred," which may indicate a loose wire, a broken wire, or a power outage in the rental machine 700, may be displayed to request improvement, and a notification urging counting may also be displayed along with these messages.

Figure 84 (a) shows an example in which the notification prompting counting continues even after switching to the demonstration display.

In the slot machine 100, if no bet operation is performed within a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) from when all reels 110-112 have stopped if no payout has been made, or from when the payout has been completed if a payout has been made, the slot machine 100 will transition to a demonstration state (demonstration in progress). The slot machine will also transition to demonstration in progress if the settlement button 134 is operated.

In the example shown in FIG. 84(a), during play (during betting, while reels 110 to 112 are spinning, or while a payout is being made), text display of the notification of approaching the upper limit starts, and the game moves to a demo without the operation of the counting button 171. The performance image display device 157 displays the game background display during play, but switches to a demo display when the game moves to a demo. The demo display is a display that introduces the story and characters. Even when the game moves to a demo, the text display of the notification of approaching the upper limit continues to be displayed unless the "number of game medals" falls below the second payout threshold. When the game moves to a demo, the player is more likely to leave his/her seat. By encouraging the operation of the counting button 171 even during the demo, it may be possible to prevent the player from leaving the game medals in the slot machine 100 and taking out only the cards from the lending machine 700 and leaving the seat. The blinking display of the upper limit approaching notification may be continued to ensure visibility of the demo display, or the blinking display of the upper limit approaching notification may be displayed at all times to ensure visibility of the upper limit approaching notification.

Figure 84 (b) shows an example of a notification after the count button 171 is operated during a demo.

In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 84(b), a demo display is displayed. The notification urging the player to count is displayed largest so as to overlap with the demo display. Here, the notification urging the player to count is displayed largest because the player is requested to operate the count button 171 with priority. Furthermore, below that, a warning display is displayed saying "Be careful not to forget to take your card or have it stolen" to prevent theft of cards while the player is away from the table. In this example, the "number of game medals" is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen of the effect image display device 157, and "15300", which exceeds the second payout threshold, is displayed. Note that the payout threshold "16383" may also be displayed. The display of the "number of game medals" in the effect image display device 157 may be displayed constantly, may be displayed temporarily, or may not be displayed as in the example shown in FIG. 84(a).

Eventually, the count button 171 is operated, and the "number of game medals" is reduced to a number below the second payout threshold. Then, the notification prompting the player to count disappears (is hidden), and the above-mentioned warning message is now displayed largest and most conspicuous. The "number of game medals" displayed in the bottom right of the performance image display device 157 has been reduced to "14,950."

Figure 85 (a) shows an example of a notification when the "number of game medals" exceeds a certain specified number, such as a payout threshold or a second payout threshold, and then falls below that specified number.

In FIG. 85(a), the value of the "game medal count" stored in the RAM 358 is displayed as X medals. This X medals corresponds to a certain prescribed number such as a payout threshold or a second payout threshold. In the performance image display device 157, a notification is displayed urging the player to count because the "game medal count" has exceeded the prescribed number. When this notification is displayed, the player starts to operate the count button 171, and the "game medal count" immediately falls below the prescribed number. Here, the count button 171 is being held down for a long time. In this example, the notification urging the player to count continues even if the "game medal count" falls below the prescribed number. In other words, the notification urging the player to count continues until the "game medal count" falls below the prescribed number by a further prescribed number (for example, 100, which is 50 times 2 times). The arrow of the notification period in the figure indicates the period during which a notification urging the player to count, such as "Please operate the count button," is being issued.

If the notification were to start when a set number is reached and immediately end when the set number falls below that, there is a high possibility that only a small number will be counted, so in this example, the notification continues until the number falls below the set number at which the notification starts. This makes it possible to reduce the number of repetitions of notifications and counting operations. Note that the notification encouraging counting may be made to always occur for a fixed period of time (for example, 10 seconds) regardless of the number of game medals played. This makes it possible to encourage the player to count a larger number.

The above-mentioned specified number may be a settlement threshold, a loan threshold, or some other threshold.

In addition, if the "number of game medals" falls below a specified number due to a betting operation, the number of medals will only decrease by a maximum of three, but the notification encouraging the player to count may continue regardless of the value of the "number of game medals" that decreases by the above-mentioned specified number.

Figure 85 (b) shows an example of a notification that prompts the player to count when the "number of game medals" exceeds the second payout threshold over multiple games.

When the "game medal count" in a certain game exceeds the second payout threshold (15,000 in this example), a notification is started to prompt the player to count. The notification is displayed on the effect image display device 157 on which the game background display is displayed. Even if the notification is started, the player does not operate the count button 171 and continues playing. As a result, the game continues without the "game medal count" falling below the second payout threshold. Here, when the "game medal count" exceeds the second payout threshold, a notification is made once every several games (four games in this example). Therefore, no notification is made for three games after the notification is made. During the three games during which no notification is made, the effect display such as the game background display displayed on the effect image display device 157 becomes easier to see, which may increase the interest in the game. Note that when the "game medal count" falls below the second payout threshold, the notification is no longer made to prompt the player to count. Therefore, if the "number of game medals" falls below the second payout threshold during the three games during which no notification prompting counting has been made, no notification prompting counting will be made until the number of game medals next exceeds the second payout threshold. On the other hand, if the "number of game medals" falls below the second payout threshold during a game during which a notification prompting counting has been made, the notification prompting counting that had been made up until that point will disappear (become hidden).

Next, we will explain more about counting notifications.

Figure 86 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a notification that prompts the player to count each time the "game medal count" increases by a predetermined number. Each diagram ((a) to (c)) in Figure 86 shows the value of the "game medal count" stored in RAM 358.

In the example shown in FIG. 86(a), a notification is issued every time the "game medal count" increases by 1000 medals, encouraging the player to count. First, when the "game medal count" exceeds 1000 medals, a display indicating that the number of medals has exceeded 1000 medals and encouraging the player to count is displayed on the performance image display device 157. These displays are displayed for a predetermined period of time, or until the next change in the "game medal count" (same below). Thus, they are displayed even during gameplay. Next, when the "game medal count" exceeds 2000 medals, a display indicating that the number of medals has exceeded 2000 medals and encouraging the player to count is displayed on the performance image display device 157. Furthermore, when the "game medal count" exceeds 3000 medals, a display indicating that the number of medals has exceeded 3000 medals and encouraging the player to count is displayed on the performance image display device 157. These notifications are then repeated until the number of medals exceeds 14000 medals. Then, when the "game medal number" reaches 15,000, which is the second payout threshold, the display prompting the user to count will continue to be displayed as shown in FIG. 82(a) unless the "game medal number" falls below 15,000. When the number of game medals reaches 15,000, the display prompting the user to count may continue to be displayed together with the text display "15,000 or more" or, when the "game medal number" is equal to or greater than the second payout threshold and equal to or less than the payout threshold, the actual value of the "game medal number" stored in the RAM 358 may be displayed (for example, "15,015" may be displayed). Since the number of game medals is displayed periodically, the user can roughly grasp the number of game medals even without looking at the game medal number display device 170. In the unlikely event that a problem occurs with the game machine and the "game medal number" is lost, the user can easily grasp the extent of the lost number. The display prompting the user to count may be displayed according to the time elapsed since the start of a special game such as an AT game. For example, after starting a special game such as an AT game, a display prompting the player to count is displayed when 10 minutes have passed, when 20 minutes have passed, and when 30 minutes have passed. The display can be displayed periodically regardless of the number of medals played.

Figure 86 (b) shows an example of when the count button 171 is operated in a situation advantageous to the player.

Here, the AT state is defined as a state advantageous to the player. During the AT state, the "game medal count" is likely to increase through payouts. During play in this AT state, a display (AT game display) suggesting or indicating that the current state is the AT state is displayed on the effect image display device 157. When the "game medal count" exceeds 1000 medals during the AT state, a display is displayed indicating that the number of medals has been exceeded and encouraging the player to count, as shown on the effect image display device 157 on the left side of Figure 86 (b). In this example, the count button 171 is pressed and held down for a long time, causing the "game medal count" to decrease to a certain value (in this example, "100").

The state advantageous to the player here means a state in which the "number of game medals" is easily increased by payout. Therefore, it is not limited to the AT state, but may be a state in which a bonus (RB, BB) is in operation, or an ART state. If the player is in an advantageous state, the "number of game medals" is expected to increase further, and it can be said that the player can count (output to the lending machine 700) all of the number of game medals. However, if the number of game medals is counted, the number of medals inserted for the next game (for example, three medals) will also be counted, and the next game cannot be played unless the medals are lent from the lending machine 700. Even if the player is in an advantageous state, there are cases in which the consumption of the "number of game medals" happens to be greater than the payout. Therefore, even if the player is in an advantageous state, a notification is given that it is better to leave some "number of game medals" in reserve. The effect image display device 157 shown on the right side of FIG. 86(b) is in a state where the "number of game medals" has decreased to 100 due to counting in the AT state, and this effect image display device 157 issues a notification (counting end guidance notification) such as "Please stop counting and continue playing" to advise that it is advisable to save a small number of "game medals". In other words, the counting end guidance notification is issued before the counting of all game medals is completed. Note that instead of the counting end guidance notification shown here, a notification such as "It is advisable to save some game value" or "If you count them all, you will no longer be able to play" may be used. In other words, a notification of the drawbacks of counting all game medals may be issued before the counting of all game medals is completed.

In the slot machine 100 in the example of FIG. 86(b), the automatic counting described above is not performed, and counting ends when the player releases the count button 171. In this example, the player sees the notification that it is a good idea to leave a small number of "game medals", so he releases the count button 171 and counting ends when 50 "game medals" are left.

Figure 86 (c) shows an example in which the count button 171 is operated in a situation that is disadvantageous to the player.

The state that is unfavorable to the player here refers to a state in which the "number of game medals" is likely to decrease if the player continues to play without lending out medals. For example, the normal state is an example. The effect image display device 157 shown in Figure 86 (c) displays a display (normal game display) that suggests or indicates that the normal state is being displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 86(c), the counting button 171 is pressed and held continuously when the "game medal count" is 1000, causing the "game medal count" to decrease beyond a certain value (in this example, "100"). If the situation is unfavorable to the player, it is unlikely that the player will continue playing after counting is completed, so no notification is given to the player that it is a good idea to leave some "game medal count" remaining. In this example, the counting button 171 is pressed and held continuously until the "game medal count" reaches 0. When the "game medal count" reaches 0, the text display 157 displays the message "Please stop counting."

Figure 87(a) is a diagram showing a modified example of the example shown in Figure 86(b). The following explanation focuses on the differences from the example shown in Figure 86(b).

In the example shown in FIG. 87(a), when the counting operation continues in a state advantageous to the player (for example, AT state) and the "game medal number" decreases to a predetermined value ("50" in this example), the counting operation is temporarily invalidated even if the counting operation continues. In other words, even if the counting button 171 is pressed and held down, counting is temporarily stopped. As a result, the decrease in the "game medal number" temporarily stops. FIG. 87(a) shows the performance image display device 157 when the "game medal number" has decreased to 50, and the display screen shows a message saying "Counting has been temporarily stopped." To restart the counting that was forcibly stopped once, a new operation of the counting button 171 is required.

Figure 87 (b) shows an example in which counting that was forcibly terminated is restarted.

The example shown in FIG. 87(b) is a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 87(a), where the counting operation continues in a state advantageous to the player (for example, AT state), and the "game medal number" decreases to a predetermined value ("50" in this example), so the counting is forcibly terminated. In this example, the player has a reason to stop playing even in an advantageous state, and the player operates the counting button 171 again. That is, the player presses the counting button 171 again. In this modified example, when the "game medal number" falls below the predetermined value, the counting of "50" by the long press of the counting button 171 is not effective, and even if the long press is performed, only "1" is counted. That is, the "game medal number" decreases by "1" each time the counting timing (300 ms) arrives. This is for the same reason as mentioned above, if all of the game medals were counted, the number of medals inserted for the next game (for example, three medals) would also be counted, and the next game would not be possible unless medals were loaned out from the loaning machine 700. Therefore, to prevent the number of game medals from reaching 0, the number is only counted in increments of "1".

When the number of game medals reaches 0, the text "Counting has ended" will be displayed on the performance image display device 157.

If the player presses and holds the count button 171 again, counting may start in increments of "50". In this example, since the number of game medals has been reduced to "50", it immediately becomes "0", and output of the "game medal number" to the lending machine 700 is quickly completed.

The example shown in Figure 87(c) is an example of the modified example described using Figures (a) and (b) when the player is in an unfavorable state (for example, the normal state). In the modified example, if the player is in an unfavorable state, pressing and holding the counting button 171 until the "game medal count" becomes 0 is effective, just like the example shown in Figure 86(c), and when the "game medal count" becomes 0, the text display 157 displays "Please stop counting."

However, even if the player is in an unfavorable state (for example, the normal state), in order to motivate the player to continue playing, the same processing as when the player is in an advantageous state (the processing shown in Figures 87(a) and 87(b) or the processing shown in Figure 86(b)) may be performed.

[Example of operation when the VL signal from the lending device 700 is turned off]
Next, an example will be described in which the VL signal from the rental device 700 is turned off.

Figure 88 is a timing chart showing an example of when the VL signal from the rental device 700 is turned off.

The VL signal is always sent from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control unit 350 in the ON state. If this VL signal is OFF, it is suspected that the lending machine 700 is not powered on, and there is a risk that lending or counting will not be possible. It is also possible that the communication line connecting the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 is disconnected.

The medal count control unit 350 transmits VL signal information indicating that the VL signal is off to the game control unit 302 by a medal count control state command shown in FIG. 11 in which the upper byte is 01H. When the game control unit 302 receives VL signal information indicating that the VL signal is off, the judgment result in step S1007 shown in FIG. 16 becomes No, and the process cannot proceed to the next step until the VL signal is turned on. Therefore, even if the start lever 135 is operated, the operation is not considered to be a valid operation, and even if the bet buttons 130 and 132 are operated, the operation is not considered to be a valid operation. In other words, some of the multiple types of game progress operations are invalidated. In this embodiment, the operations performed in the first half of a game are targeted as some of the operations. Therefore, if the game is started (the reels start spinning) by the operation in the first half, when the VL signal is turned off, the operation in the second half (the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop operation)) is valid. Therefore, the game can proceed, although in a limited manner. If the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 becomes invalid when the timing of the operation is being waited for, the operation becomes valid and the timing must be waited for from scratch, which may give a bothersome impression, but this can be reduced. Furthermore, if the operation up to the determination of the internal win by lottery among the game progress operations is made valid even when counting is not possible, for example, if a result favorable to the player is obtained and a grand performance suddenly starts, the player may feel more eager to continue the game. As a result, there is a possibility that a delay may occur in the countermeasure when the VL signal is turned off, but this possibility of delay can be reduced. However, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 may be made invalid. The fact that the VL signal is turned off can be quickly notified to the player. Note that even if the VL signal is turned off, it is not treated as an error on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) side, and no notification regarding this is executed. Also, if it is treated as an error, an error reset operation is required, but since the VL signal being off suggests that there is an abnormality on the lending machine 700 side, no error reset operation is required for the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100). Note that, as in the following example, a configuration may be adopted in which an error is notified when the VL signal is off.

Figure 88(a) shows whether the operation (insertion) of the bet buttons 130, 132 and the operation (insertion/lever operation) of the start lever 135 (lever) are treated as valid or invalid. Also shown below that is the value of the "number of game medals" stored in RAM 358. Also shown below that is the state of the VL signal.

As shown in FIG. 88(a), when the VL signal is on, the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are treated as valid operations. In addition, no error notification, which will be described later, is performed.

When the VL signal is in the OFF state, the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are treated as invalid operations. In addition, an error notification is displayed on the performance image display device 157. The performance image display device 157 shown in FIG. 88(a) displays text such as "Communication with the lending machine not established." Note that the error notification may also be a notification that the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 or the operation of the start lever 135 is invalid. For example, a text display such as "Bet operation/lever operation is invalid" or a text display such as "Bet operation/lever operation is invalid because communication with the lending machine has not been established" may be displayed.

Next, a modified example of this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, regardless of the value of the "game medal number" stored in the RAM 358, when the VL signal is turned off, both the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are treated as invalid operations. However, in the modified examples described below, the response differs depending on the value of the "game medal number". That is, in the first modified example, both the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are treated as invalid operations when the VL signal is turned off in a state where the "game medal number" is less than a certain threshold (in this example, 15,000, which is the second threshold for payout) (for example, a state where 980 medals are left as shown in FIG. 88(a)). Since a small "game medal number" means that the player may end the game at any time, the player is made to realize early that communication with the lending machine 700 has not been established, and the store clerk is encouraged to repair it early. On the other hand, even if the VL signal is turned off in a state where the "game medal number" is equal to or greater than the certain threshold, the operation is treated as valid.

Figure 88 (b) shows a first modified example in which the "number of game medals" is 15,550 medals, which is greater than or equal to the second payout threshold of 15,000.

When the "number of game medals" reaches the payout threshold, all of the various game progression operations are invalidated. In other words, the operation to insert the next game (operation of the bet buttons 130, 132) is invalidated, and there is no opportunity to operate the start lever 135 or the stop buttons 137 to 139.

In the first modified example shown in FIG. 88(b), when the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than the second payout threshold, the "number of game medals" will eventually reach the payout threshold and the player will no longer be able to play the next game, so the game is not stopped until that point, allowing the player to continue enjoying the game. Also, continuing to play even when the "number of game medals" exceeds the second payout threshold often means that the player is in an advantageous state (such as an AT state), and stopping the game in this state is likely to significantly reduce the player's interest in the game, which is undesirable, so the game is not stopped.

In the first modified example in FIG. 88(b), the game does not stop even if the VL signal is turned off, but even in this modified example, an error notification is displayed on the performance image display device 157 when the VL signal is turned off.

Figure 89 shows a second variant in which the operation differs depending on whether the "number of game medals" is below a certain threshold.

The state shown in Figure 89 (a) is a state in which the number of game medals is 14,000, which is less than a certain threshold (15,000, which is the second payout threshold in this example). In the second modified example, even if the VL signal turns off in this state, all of the multiple types of game progress operations are treated as valid operations. Therefore, the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 are both valid. However, even in the second modified example, when the VL signal turns off, an error notification is displayed on the performance image display device 157.

The state shown in Figure 89 (b) is a state in which the number of game medals is 15,550, which is equal to or greater than a certain threshold (second payout threshold). In the second modified example, when the VL signal is turned off in this state, some of the multiple types of game progression operations are invalidated. In other words, the operation of the bet buttons 130, 132 and the operation of the start lever 135 performed in the first half of a game are invalidated. In addition, an error notification is displayed on the performance image display device 157.

The second modified example shown in FIG. 89 is the opposite of the first modified example, but a small number of "game medals" may mean that the game has just started, and the aim is not to hinder the progress of the game that has just started. In addition, in the slot machine 100, even if any trouble occurs, it is not impossible that the "game medals" will disappear, so if the "game medals" disappear when the "game medals" are large, the disadvantage will be large. Therefore, when the "game medals" are equal to or greater than a certain threshold (second payout threshold), the game progress is stopped and the store clerk is encouraged to repair it as soon as possible. In addition, a large number of "game medals" can be interpreted as a state in which the player may perform a counting operation at any time, so the aim is to make the player realize early that communication with the rental machine 700 has not been established and to encourage the store clerk to repair it as soon as possible.

As explained above, the way to respond when the VL signal is turned off will depend on the value of the "game medal count" and whether the state is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. Note that an advantageous state for the player here refers to a state in which the "game medal count" can be easily increased by payouts (for example, AT state, ART state, BB state, BR state, etc.), and an unfavorable state refers to a state in which the "game medal count" is likely to decrease as play continues (for example, the normal state, etc.).

If the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value and the player is in an unfavorable state, when the VL signal is turned off, at least some of the multiple types of game progress operations are invalidated, as shown in FIG. 88(a). On the other hand, if the "number of game medals" is greater than or equal to a certain threshold value and the player is in an advantageous state, even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the multiple types of game progress operations are treated as valid operations, as shown in FIG. 88(b).

Alternatively, when the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value and the player is in an unfavorable state, all of the multiple types of game progress operations may be treated as valid operations, as shown in FIG. 89(a), even if the VL signal is turned off. On the other hand, when the "number of game medals" is greater than or equal to a certain threshold value and the player is in an advantageous state, at least some of the multiple types of game progress operations may be invalidated, as shown in FIG. 89(b), when the VL signal is turned off.

When the "number of game medals" is equal to or greater than a certain threshold value and the player is in an unfavorable state, it is not unusual for the player to end the game at any time. Therefore, when the VL signal is turned off, at least some of the multiple types of game progress operations are invalidated to let the player realize early on that communication with the lending machine 700 has not been established and to encourage early repairs by a store employee. On the other hand, when the "number of game medals" is less than a certain threshold value and the player is in an advantageous state, it is possible that the player has just entered an advantageous state. Therefore, even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the multiple types of game progress operations are treated as valid operations so as not to impede the progress of the game.

Alternatively, if the "game medal count" is greater than or equal to a certain threshold value in an unfavorable state for the player, counting may not be necessary. Therefore, even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the multiple types of game progress operations may be treated as valid operations so as not to impede game progress. On the other hand, if the "game medal count" is less than a certain threshold value in an advantageous state for the player, at least some of the multiple types of game progress operations may be invalidated when the VL signal is turned off in order to make the player aware of this early on before the "game medal count" reaches or exceeds the certain threshold value and encourage early repairs by a store employee.

Figure 90 is a timing chart showing another example of when the VL signal from the rental device 700 is turned off.

In the above description, even if the VL signal is turned off, it is not treated as an error on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) side, and no error reset operation is requested to the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100). However, in the example shown in FIG. 90(a), it is treated as an error on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) side, and an error reset operation is also requested to the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100). As explained above, the reason why the VL signal is turned off is most likely that the power of the lending machine 700 is not turned on, or that the communication line connecting the slot machine 100 and the lending machine 700 is broken. Therefore, even if the error reset operation is performed on the main control unit 300 (slot machine 100) side, there is a high possibility that an error will occur again. However, by making it an error, a store clerk can be called, and if the store clerk can turn on the power of the lending machine 700.

The example shown in Figure 90(b) is an example in which the game can continue until the count button 171 is operated, even if the VL signal is turned off.

In the example shown in FIG. 90(b), even if the VL signal is turned off, all of the multiple types of game progress operations are treated as valid operations. When the VL signal is turned off, it means that communication with the lending machine 700 has not been established, and the lending machine 700 can also determine that there is an abnormality and issue an error notification. If the lending machine 700 issues an error notification immediately after the VL signal is turned off, a store clerk can be called without the slot machine 100 issuing an alert immediately. Also, since communication with the lending machine 700 has not been established, there are cases where a counting notification is not sent to the lending machine 700 even if the counting button 171 is operated. Therefore, in this example, the slot machine 100 issues an alert at the timing when the counting button 171 is operated. In this way, the slot machine 100 can issue an alert with the minimum opportunity, and excessive alerts can be suppressed, allowing the player to play comfortably.

After detecting the operation of the count button 171, the notification on the slot machine 100 side continues until the VL signal returns to ON.

[Configuration regarding the difference between dispensing and counting processing]
When the increase in the number of game medals per unit of play in a game state advantageous to the player, such as an AT state or a bonus state, is greater than the decrease in the number of game medals per unit of play due to the counting process, it becomes difficult to end the counting process in a state advantageous to the player. For example, if the increase in the number of game medals per game (net increase) is 10 medals, and it is possible to count less than 10 medals in the shortest time required for one game, 4.1 seconds, if counting is performed while the AT game is proceeding, the number of game medals will continue to increase during the AT game. Therefore, if a performance associated with counting is performed while the AT game is proceeding, the execution period of this performance will be long, and it will be difficult to perform a performance with an end scene in anticipation of the end of counting, for example. In addition, when a counting performance (FIG. 63, etc.) is performed in relation to the counting process, this counting performance will interfere with other performances, and the interest in the game will decrease. On the other hand, by designing the increase in the number of game medals per unit of play in an advantageous game state to be smaller than the decrease in the number of game medals per unit of play due to the counting process, such problems can be made less likely to occur. For example, if the increase in the number of game medals per game (net increase) is 10 medals, and if it is possible to count more than 10 medals in the shortest time required for one game, 4.1 seconds, if the counting is performed while the AT game is proceeding, the number of game medals will continue to decrease during the AT game. For example, if it is possible to count 50 medals every 300 ms when the counting button 171 is pressed continuously, a decrease of about 700 medals can be expected in 4.1 seconds. Therefore, if a performance associated with counting is performed while the AT game is proceeding, the end of the execution period of this performance can be estimated. In addition, for example, a setting suggestion performance may be executed (or the execution probability may be increased) according to the execution time of the counting process.

The counting performance is not limited to a configuration in which the counting performance ends in accordance with the counting process, but may end even while the counting process is continuing. The execution time of the counting process for transferring the number of game medals to the lending machine 700 increases as the number of game medals increases. For this reason, if the counting performance is executed uniformly in accordance with the execution period of the counting process, there is a risk of problems such as a decrease in interest in the game due to the counting performance being executed for a long time, or the counting performance interfering with other performances. Such problems may be prevented by ending the counting performance even while the counting process is continuing. Examples of such a configuration include a configuration in which the counting performance ends depending on the game situation or the passage of time, or the counting performance ends when the content defined as the counting performance is executed. If the counting process ends before the end condition of the counting performance is satisfied, the counting performance may end or may continue.

The contents of the counting performance may change depending on the amount of the game medals counted. In this case, the performance contents may be set based on the amount of the game medals in the counting process, or based on the cumulative amount of the game medals in the counting process in an advantageous state. For example, when the amount of the game medals counted exceeds a predetermined value, a setting suggestion performance may be executed (or the execution probability may increase). The player will perform the counting process after acquiring a large number of game medals, and can choose how to play the game. Note that, with regard to the counting performance according to the amount of the game medals, if the counting process and the counting performance end midway due to reasons such as unintentionally releasing the count button 171, there is a risk that the interest in the game will decrease. For this reason, even if the counting performance ends midway, if a new counting process is started within a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) from the end of the counting performance, the previous counting performance (the counting performance that ended midway) may be resumed from the middle. Furthermore, the counting effect may be set to continue for a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) after the counting process is completed, and if a new counting process is started while this counting effect is ongoing, the currently running counting effect may be set to continue as is. This configuration can prevent the counting effect from disappearing due to the counting process being terminated due to an unintended operation. The above-mentioned predetermined time may be set to the same as the determination time for a long press of the counting button 171, for example.

Also, for example, when operating the counting button 171 while performing a game progress operation, it is difficult to further operate a button for the effect. If an effect requiring an operation of such an operating means is executed during the execution of the counting effect, there is a risk of inducing an erroneous operation. For this reason, during the execution of the counting effect, an effect requiring an operation of some operating means may not be executed (or the execution probability may be reduced). Also, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect that is significantly difficult to recognize when executed simultaneously with the counting effect is similarly restricted. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect that is restricted during the execution of the counting effect is provided. Note that the effect does not have to require the operation of the operating means, and for example, an effect accompanied by a freeze that stops the game from progressing, or an effect that takes a long time to execute and the result is not known until it is completed, may not be executed.

For example, if the counting process is started while the side lamp is on, which is an advantageous effect, the side lamp effect may change to a counting effect, and the advantageous effect may be replaced with a counting effect. Also, if a certain effect is started while a counting effect is being executed, the counting effect may be replaced with the effect that will be executed later.

In addition, the content of the counting presentation may change depending on the degree of progress in the game while the counting process is being executed, such as causing the character to change (for example, grow) if the game progresses while the counting process is being executed.

In addition, when the number of game medals reaches 0 and the counting process and counting performance ends, by continuing to press the count button 171, if new game medals are acquired and the counting process starts, the counting performance that was previously ended can be resumed from where it left off.

In addition, at least some of the game progress operations may be restricted while the counting process is being performed, such as preventing the start operation of the next game while the counting process is being performed.

[Configuration for dispensing and settling operations during counting processing]
In the embodiment described above, by pressing and holding the counting button 171, the number of game medals can be transferred to the lending machine 700 by up to 50 medals at a time. Fig. 91(a) shows the change in the number of game medals when the counting button 171 is pressed and held from a state in which there are 120 game medals. Specifically, the flow is shown in which 50 of the 120 game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700, then 50 of the remaining 70 game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700, and further all of the remaining 20 game medals are transferred to the lending machine 700, until the number of game medals becomes 0.

In the counting process, the current medal count is temporarily set as the medal count for counting (step S3304 in FIG. 32), and the counting process is performed based on this medal count for counting (FIG. 34). At this time, if the medal count increases (by disbursement or settlement operation) after the medal count for counting is set, the content is reflected in the medal count for counting. FIG. 91(b) shows the change in the medal count when 8 medals are disbursed while 70 medals are being transferred to the lending machine 700 in the flow of FIG. 91(a). In this example, 50 medals out of the remaining 70 medals are transferred to the lending machine 700, leaving 20 medals, and the amount of the 8 medals disbursed is added to the medal count of 28 medals. After that, all of the remaining medals are transferred to the lending machine 700, and the medal count becomes 0.

In the embodiment described above, as in the example of FIG. 91(b), the increase in the number of game medals (payout or settlement operation) while the counting process is continuing is reflected by this continuing counting process, and the number of game medals at the time the counting process started (120 medals in FIG. 91(b)) and the number of game medals transferred by the counting process (128 medals in FIG. 91(b)) do not match, which may result in a workload when the counting process data is checked later. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 91(c), the increase in the number of game medals (payout or settlement operation) while the counting process is continuing may not be reflected immediately, but may be reflected after the number of game medals becomes 0 or the counting process that was continuing is terminated by releasing the count button 171 before the number of game medals becomes 0. For example, if the count button 171 is kept pressed for a long time, the 120 medals stored when the count button 171 was started to be pressed are counted, and then the 8 medals that were added during the long pressing of the count button 171 are counted. For example, if the count button 171 is released midway through the long pressing, 60 medals are counted out of the 120 medals stored when the count button 171 was started to be pressed, and then the 68 medals that were stored when the count button 171 was pressed again are counted. After the restart, since the number of game medals at the start of the counting process was 68, the 68 medals are counted in the order of 50 medals, then 18 medals. FIG. 91(c) shows that 8 medals are paid out while 70 medals are being transferred to the lending machine 700 in the flow of FIG. 91(a), but this increase is not reflected until the medal count becomes 0 (same flow as FIG. 91(a)), and after the medal count becomes 0, this increase is reflected, and the counting process continues until the medal count becomes 0. With this configuration, it is possible to match the medal count at the start of the counting process (120 medals in FIG. 91(c)) with the medal count transferred by the counting process until the medal count becomes 0 (120 medals in FIG. 91(c)).

In FIG. 91(e), 8 game medals are paid out while 70 game medals are being transferred to the lending machine 700 in the flow of FIG. 91(a), but the 8 paid out medals are counted immediately after the 120 medals stored when the count button 171 was pressed and held are counted. With this configuration, the time required for counting can be shortened.

If the number of game medals increases multiple times while the counting process is continuing, the total value of all these increases may be reflected later, or, while the counting process is continuing, each time the number of game medals reaches 0, it may be reflected one by one.

In addition, the display of the game medal count display device 170 in the case where the above configuration is adopted may be displayed according to the change in the game medal count. In addition, the increase in the game medal count (payout or settlement operation) during the counting process may be reflected immediately on the display (reflected in the display of the decrease in the game medal count). However, the amount of change in the value due to the counting process in this case is the same for the actual game medal count and the displayed game medal count (a state in which a discrepancy in the increase occurs). Figure 91 (d) shows a flow in the case where a configuration is adopted in which the increase in the game medal count (payout or settlement operation) is reflected immediately on the display, in contrast to the flow in Figure 91 (c). In this configuration, the actual game medal count value and the displayed game medal count value are in a state in which a discrepancy in the increase occurs, but they match at the end of the counting process. Even if you release the count button 171 and end the counting process before the number of game medals reaches 0, the increase will be reflected in the number of game medals at that point, so the actual number of game medals will match the displayed number of game medals.

The timing for reflecting the increase in the number of game medals while the counting process is continuing is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, the timing when the counting button 171 is released. In this case, the reflected increase can be transferred to the lending machine 700 by operating the counting button 171 again. Alternatively, it may be the timing when the number of game medals becomes 0 while the counting process is continuing, and further in this case, it may be possible to transfer the reflected increase to the lending machine 700 without operating the counting button 171 again (the counting process continues, FIG. 91 (e)).

Incidentally, increases in the number of game medals can be made by payouts or settlement operations, and either one of these may be the subject of the configuration described in FIG. 91(c), or both may be the subject.

[About setting the bet reduction by bet button operation]
In the embodiment described above, if the player wishes to change the number of game medals from three medals bet to one medal, the player can operate the settlement button 134 to return the bet of three medals to the "number of game medals" and then operate the bet button 130 for one medal bet again to change the current bet to one medal. In this case, the operation of the settlement button 134 and the operation of the bet button 130 are required, but the configuration may be such that these operations can be performed by one operation of the bet button 130. As an example of such a configuration, when the bet button 130 is operated while the current bet number is at the maximum value, a settlement button process (FIG. 18) is executed and then a process for the bet button operation is executed. In addition, when the bet button 130 is operated while the current bet number is at the maximum value, a settlement command (FIG. 13) is sent with the change in the bet number from the maximum value to the minimum value (the difference of 2 in the above example) as the settlement number, and the value of the current bet number may be set to the minimum value. In this configuration, a part of the bet number is settled by the operation of the bet button 130, and a separate insertion process or insertion command is not required. These configurations correspond to examples of a configuration in which the current bet amount is set to the minimum value based on the operation of an operating means capable of setting the minimum value of the bet amount when the current bet amount is at the maximum value.

When the above configuration is adopted, the current bet number can be changed from 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 → 2... by repeatedly operating the bet button 130, and the current bet number can be changed by simply operating the bet button 130.

When there is a settlement sound that can be output in response to the operation of the settlement button 134 and a deposit sound that can be output in response to the operation of the bet button 130, the settlement sound and the deposit sound may be output consecutively in response to the operation of the bet button 130 when the current bet number changes from the maximum value to the minimum value. However, since there is a risk of the player being confused if two types of sounds are output for one operation, the deposit sound may be output without the settlement sound in response to the operation of the bet button 130 when the current bet number changes from the maximum value to the minimum value. In addition, in response to the operation of the settlement button 134, characters or the like indicating that settlement has been made may be displayed on the screen of the performance image display device 157, and in response to the operation of the bet button 130 when the current bet number changes from the maximum value to the minimum value, characters or the like indicating that settlement has been made may not be displayed on the screen of the performance image display device 157. In this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking that the settlement button 134 has been operated instead of the bet button 130.

[About the effects according to the number of medals played]
A configuration for executing different effects depending on the number of game medals will be described below with reference to Fig. 92. Fig. 92 is a diagram showing an example of effects executed depending on the number of game medals.

In the above embodiment, information on the number of game medals stored in the RAM 358 of the medal count control unit 350 is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 via the game control unit 302 (medal count control state command and security command). The following example is an example of an operation for executing different effects depending on the value of this game medal count. In this example, in the AT state, a normal effect is executed until the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number (3000 in this example), and a special effect is executed when the predetermined number is reached.

First, Fig. 92 (a1) shows the state at the start of the AT state (number of game medals at the start = 500), Fig. 92 (a2) shows the state of play in the AT state, Fig. 92 (a3) shows the state when medals are acquired in the AT state, and Fig. 92 (a4) shows the state at the end of the AT state. Note that in the AT state, the value of the number of game medals is displayed as the "owned" value in the upper left of the screen, and the number of medals acquired since entering the AT state is displayed in the "...GET" section in the upper right of the screen.

In the flow of Figure 92 (a1) to (a4), since the number of game medals in the AT state does not exceed 3000, the special effect is not executed and the normal effect (Figure 92 (a2)) is executed.

Next, Fig. 92 (b1) to (b3) show an example of a case where a special effect is executed when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number (3000). In this example, the state where a normal effect is executed because the number of game medals has not yet reached the predetermined number (Fig. 92 (b1)) changes to a state where medals are acquired and the number of game medals reaches the predetermined number (Fig. 92 (b2)), and then the state where a special effect is executed (Fig. 92 (b3)). In this special effect, the background, the color of the operation navigation, and the background music are different from the normal effect. In other words, the effect changes when many game medals have been acquired, which can increase the excitement of the game.

The different effects are not limited to the above-mentioned special effects, and various effects can be used. The different effects are not limited to configurations in which different effects are used, but may be, for example, a different effect inserted into a part of a base effect while it is being executed, resulting in a different effect overall. For example, the number of game medals played and the number of medals acquired may be displayed in different colors or sizes, such as changing the color of each digit to make it rainbow, or changing the color of each digit periodically. The state in which the effects are different is not limited to the AT state, and it is sufficient if the effects are different when the player is in a favorable state.

In addition, the configuration is not limited to switching the presentation immediately after the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, as long as the presentation executed differs depending on whether the number of game medals reaches the predetermined number. For example, the presentation may be switched when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number and some other condition is met (for example, a certain number of games played, or a switching lottery is won), or the ending may differ depending on whether the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number.

Furthermore, when the number of game medals has reached a predetermined number, a display suggesting a set value may be executed. In the example of FIG. 92(c1), when the number of game medals has reached a predetermined number, a display suggesting a set value (in this example, a family crest) is executed at the time of the ending.

In addition, the configuration is not limited to one in which a different effect or display is always executed when the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, but may be one in which a different effect or display is more likely to be executed compared to when the number of game medals does not reach the predetermined number.

Also, for example, the above-mentioned special effect may be executed when the number of game medals reaches 3000, and a display suggesting a set value may be executed at the ending when the number of game medals reaches 2000. The number of game medals that act as a trigger for different types of effects and displays may be set separately.

In the above example, the number of medals played is used as the determination target for whether or not to execute a different effect or display. However, the same effect may be achieved if the number of medals held stored on the card inserted in the lending machine 700 or in the upper server is used as the determination target, or if the total value of the number of medals played and the number of medals held is used as the determination target. In addition, the value used at this time is not limited to the total number of medals held, and a part of it (for example, 1000 of the 5000 medals held) may be used. When adopting such a configuration, information on the number of medals held may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that, when the credit balance is handled by the card inserted in the lending machine 700 or the upper server, the value of this credit balance or the value obtained by converting the credit balance into the number of medals played may be used in a similar configuration to the above-mentioned configuration using the number of medals held. In this way, the information on the game value managed by the card inserted in the lending machine 700 or in the upper server may be used as the determination target for whether or not to execute a different effect or display.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which multiple types of judgment targets are used and the results are combined, for example, a different presentation is executed when the number of game medals is 2000 or more and the number of held medals is 5000 or more, that is, a different presentation is executed when the number of game medals and the number of held medals (or either one of them) satisfy certain conditions. Note that the above judgment targets may be configured not to display their values, but when the values to be judged are displayed as in the above example, the relationship between the judgment targets and the presentation becomes easier to understand, which is expected to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In the above example, the number of game medals or the number of medals held is used as the determination target for whether or not to execute a different effect or display, but the number of medals acquired in the AT state may be used as the determination target. Figures 93 (d1) to (d7) show an example of a case where a special effect is executed when the number of medals acquired reaches a predetermined number (3000). In this flow, Figures 93 (d2) to (d4) show a case where the number of game medals reaches 3000, as in the case described using Figures 92 (b1) to (b3). However, in this example, the possibility of executing a special effect is determined based on the number of medals acquired, so unlike Figures 92 (b1) to (b3), the special effect is not executed at this point. After that, the number of medals acquired reaches a predetermined number (3000 in this case) (Figure 93 (d5)), and then the special effect is executed (Figure 93 (d6)). In this example, the effect changes when the number of medals acquired increases, which can improve the interest of the game. This example also shows that the number of medals won has reached 2000, and setting suggestions similar to those in Figure 92 (c1) are displayed.

In the above example, a configuration was described in which different effects or displays are executed when the number of game medals, the number of held medals, or the number of earned medals reaches a predetermined number. However, a configuration in which the number of game medals is used to execute a certain part of an effect, and the number of earned medals is used to execute a different part of an effect, for example, may be used. Also, a configuration in which the effects described above can be executed in parallel, for example, an effect using the number of held medals and an effect using the number of earned medals are executed in parallel, may be used. In these configurations, for example, if the counting process is not executed in a state advantageous to the player, the number of earned medals may exceed the number of held medals, and when this situation occurs, a different effect may be executed. A configuration in which multiple types of judgment targets are used and the results are combined may be used.

[Operation when multiple errors occur]
Operations related to errors will be described below with reference to Figures 94 to 96. Figure 94 is a diagram showing an example of operations when an overflow of the number of game medals occurs. Figure 95 is a diagram showing an example of operations when a medal count control wire break error (error code E0) occurs. Figure 96 is a diagram showing an example of operations when an error of exceeding the upper limit of the number of game medals and a medal count control wire break error (error code E0) occur simultaneously.

In the above embodiment, the number of game medals stored in the slot machine 100 (RAM 358 of the medal count control unit 350) can be transferred to the lending machine 700 by operating the count button 171 (counting process). Figures 94 (a1) to (a3) show a series of flows from a state in which there is a game medal count of 1,336 (Figure 94 (a1)), to when the count button 171 is operated (Figure 94 (a2)), all game medal counts are transmitted to the lending machine 700, and the value of the game medal count display device 170 (the number of game medals stored in the slot machine 100) becomes 0 (Figure 94 (a3)).

In the above embodiment, the upper limit for the number of game medals is set to 16,383, and when a certain combination is won, if the sum of the payout and the number of game medals exceeds the upper limit, an overflow state occurs (the response command becomes "abnormal" in FIG. 50). In this overflow state, the addition process due to the payout is not executed, and the game waits for the overflow state to be resolved, which can be considered a type of error. This overflow state can be resolved by operating the counting button 171 to move the number of game medals to the lending machine 700. 94(b1)-(b4) show a series of flows from a state where the number of game medals is at the upper limit (FIG. 94(b1)), to an overflow state (FIG. 94(b2)) due to winning a combination with a payout, to the end of the overflow state (FIG. 94(b4)) by pressing and holding the counting button 171 (FIG. 94(b3), 50 is moved to the lending machine 700 as the number of game medals, and the value of the game medal number display device 170 is decreased by 1 each time). Note that the message "Error has been cleared" in FIG. 94(b4) indicates the end of the overflow state, and is displayed for a few seconds and then erased. Also, when the overflow state is cleared, the payout amount is added to the number of game medals. Note that in this example, the counting button 171 is pressed and held, but if the counting button 171 is not pressed and held, 1 is moved to the lending machine 700 as the number of game medals. In this case, the overflow state can be released by repeatedly pressing the count button 171 until the number of game medals falls below the upper limit. In either case, the overflow state can be released by operating the count button 171.

In the above embodiment, the game control unit 302 is configured to detect various errors that hinder the progress of the game (for example, the error in FIG. 9(b)). Since these errors require the store's response, the game is prevented from progressing and the errors are notified. 95(c1)-(c3) show a series of flows from a state where no error has occurred (FIG. 95(c1)) to a state where a medal count control unit disconnection error has occurred (FIG. 95(c2)), and then the store takes action and the reset button R is operated to resolve the error (FIG. 95(c3)). The message "Error E0 has been resolved" in FIG. 95(c3) indicates that the error that has occurred (in this example, the medal count control unit disconnection error) has been resolved, and is displayed for a few seconds and then erased. The reset button R is a button for sending a reset signal to each control unit, and is provided inside the gaming machine so that the player cannot operate it.

As described above, in the slot machine 100 of the above embodiment, there are errors related to the game control unit 302 that need to be cleared by the store's operation (for example, the abnormal game sequence error and the chip ID number mismatch in FIG. 9(b), hereinafter referred to as game control error, etc.), and errors related to the medal count control unit 350 that can be cleared by the player's operation (for example, overflow state, hereinafter referred to as medal count control error). Compared to game control errors, medal count control errors are errors that do not have a serious impact on game progress. For this reason, if these errors occur at the same time, it is considered that the game control error with the highest importance is prioritized and cleared. An example of the operation when such a configuration is adopted will be described below. Note that in the following explanation, examples of medal count control unit disconnection error and overflow state will be explained, but errors related to the game control unit 302 and medal count control unit 350 are not limited to these errors, and can be applied to errors that employ a similar clearing method.

Figure 96 (d1) shows a state where the number of game medals is at the upper limit, and a role with a payout is won from there, resulting in an overflow state. Figure 96 (d2) shows a state where a message is displayed to prompt the player to operate the counting button 171 to release the overflow state. The overflow state can be released by operating the counting button 171, but here it is assumed that a medal count control unit disconnection error occurs before this operation is performed (a game control error and a medal count control error overlap). Figure 96 (d3) shows a state where the message shown in Figure 96 (d2) is cleared and a message indicating that a medal count control unit disconnection error has occurred is displayed. Note that in the above example, the message indicating that an overflow state exists (Figure 96 (d2)) is cleared when a medal count control unit disconnection error occurs, but for example, a message indicating that a medal count control unit disconnection error has occurred may be displayed superimposed on a message indicating that an overflow state exists, or a message indicating that an overflow state exists may be displayed in a position that does not interfere with the message indicating that a medal count control unit disconnection error has occurred. Additionally, when displaying messages regarding both types of errors, the display may be different from the display that is displayed when only one error occurs.

When a game control error and a medal count control error overlap, the overflow state is not released because the counting process is not executed even if the count button 171 is operated. At this time, a message is displayed indicating that the operation of the count button 171 is invalid. Figure 96 (d4) shows a state in which, as a result of operating the count button 171, in addition to the message shown in Figure 96 (d3), a message is displayed indicating that the operation of the count button 171 is invalid and urging the user to resolve the medal count control unit disconnection error first. With this configuration, the medal count control unit disconnection error can be given priority for processing.

Then, the store takes action and the reset button R is operated, and the error is resolved, and the state returns to one in which an overflow state has occurred (resolving overlap between the game control error and the medal count control error). FIG. 96 (d5) shows a state in which a message is displayed indicating that the medal count control unit disconnection error has been resolved. FIG. 96 (d6) shows that after this message is cleared, a message similar to that shown in FIG. 96 (d2) is displayed. After that, as explained in FIG. 94, the counting process can be performed by operating the counting button 171, and the overflow state can be released. FIG. 96 (d7) (d8) shows that the overflow state has been resolved by pressing and holding the counting button 171, as in FIG. 94 (b3) (b4). In this case, the payout amount is added to the number of game medals after the overflow state is resolved.

In order to achieve the above operation, it is also possible to prevent the process corresponding to the operation of the operating means used to resolve the medal count control error (in the above example, the count button 171) from being executed while a game control error is occurring. Figures 97(e1)-(e3) show that the state goes from one in which no error has occurred (Figure 97(e1)) to one in which a medal count control unit disconnection error has occurred (Figure 97(e2)), and that although the count button 171 (the operating means for releasing the overflow state) has been operated while this error is occurring, a message indicating that the operation is invalid (counting process is not executed) is displayed (Figure 97(e3)).

In the above example, a configuration was described in which the operation means for clearing the game control error and the operation means for clearing the medal count control error are different. Here, for example, the error clearing operation means for clearing the game control error and the medal count control error may be the same, such that both errors can be cleared by the reset button R. In addition, the error clearing operation means in this case may be operable by the player, or may not be operable (for example, an operation means installed inside the gaming machine). In this configuration, when a game control error occurs while a medal count control error is occurring, the game control error is cleared by operating the error clearing operation means (the medal count control error is not cleared, and the game control error is cleared preferentially), so that the game control error with the highest importance can be resolved preferentially.

[Regarding notification of counting process (1)]
In a state advantageous to the player, a performance to liven up the game may be executed, but the configuration described below provides a case where the volume of this performance is lowered (or muted) while the counting button 171 is being operated (counting process). In this configuration, the change in the volume of the performance allows the player to understand that the counting process is being executed, and allows the player to concentrate on the counting process. This change in volume corresponds to an example of a counting notification. Note that, below, this counting notification due to the change in the volume of the performance is referred to as counting notification A. Note that, although the configuration in which the volume of the performance is changed by the counting process is mainly described here, a configuration in which the performance in a state advantageous to the player is changed by the counting process (for example, a change in volume, a change in sound quality, a change in part of the display, a change in the color or lighting state of the lamp) may also be used.

In some cases, the so-called demo effect is not executed when the player is in an advantageous state (e.g., AT state, bonus state), but is executed when the player is in an unfavorable state (e.g., normal state), but in this configuration, the effect in the advantageous state for the player will continue to be executed. The counting notification A above allows the player to know that the counting process is being executed even in this configuration.

While the counting notification A has the above-mentioned effects, there is a problem that depending on the timing of execution, it may make it difficult to understand the performance of important scenes. Here, the state in which all reels have stopped spinning corresponds to the period between games, and the performance to be executed is less important, so the counting notification A may be configured to be executed when all reels have stopped spinning. Furthermore, since a performance of winning a winning combination may be executed after the last stop operation on the reels is performed, the counting notification A may be configured to be executed on the condition that a predetermined period has passed since the last stop operation on the reels and all reels have stopped spinning. In addition, the counting notification A may be configured to be executed on the condition that all reels have stopped spinning after the performance resulting from the last stop operation on the reels has been executed (for example, when it is switched to a demo performance). In addition, if a configuration is adopted in which the presentation volume is reduced (or muted) over time since the last stop operation on the reels is performed regardless of whether or not counting processing is performed (for example, a configuration aimed at reducing power consumption), the degree of each volume reduction may be made different so that it can be distinguished from the reduction in presentation volume due to counting notification A. Also, if the reduction in presentation volume over time and the execution of counting notification A overlap, the reduction in volume due to counting notification A may be prioritized.

On the other hand, when any of the reels are spinning, the game is in progress, and the effects that are executed are of higher importance. For this reason, the configuration may be such that counting notification A is not executed when any of the reels are spinning.

In addition, depending on the operation during play, an effect may be executed in response to this. For example, as described above, when all reels have stopped spinning, the operation of the bet button 132 or the start lever 135 may be triggered to execute an effect for the next game, and an effect to increase the interest of the game may be executed in response to the operation of an operation means for the effect. For this reason, the counting notification A that is being executed may be terminated (for example, the volume that has been changed may be returned) in response to an operation of any operation means.

In the above description, the presence or absence of the counting sound output is determined according to the number of coins counted (for example, FIG. 63), and the counting sound is changed according to the operation time of the counting button 171 (for example, FIG. 63). However, when the counting notification A is executed, the counting sound corresponding to the counting process may be output. For example, the counting notification A may be executed only when all reels are stopped, while the counting sound may be output at any time for the counting process. In this way, the counting sound may be output separately from the counting notification A. Note that the counting sound may be added while changing its volume according to the situation, for example, by setting the volume to 50% when the reels are rotating and to 100% when the reels are stopped. In addition, the counting sound may be combined with various effects corresponding to the counting process (for example, the output of the counting sound, the counting display related to the counting process, and a combination of these) in addition to the counting sound. Examples of various effects for such counting processes include outputting a counting sound in conjunction with the execution of the counting process, and allowing the counting display to be displayed after the game has ended (after the third stop operation, after all reels have stopped) (only outputting the counting sound while the reels are spinning). Another example is outputting a counting sound in conjunction with the execution of the counting process, and allowing the counting display to be displayed a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) after the game has ended (after the third stop operation, after all reels have stopped) (only outputting the counting sound while the reels are spinning).

[Regarding notification of counting process (2)]
In the above explanation, we have mentioned a configuration for outputting a counting sound according to the counting process, such as determining whether or not to output a counting sound depending on the number of sheets counted (e.g., Figure 63), or varying the counting sound depending on the operation time of the counting button 171 (e.g., Figure 63).

When the player is in an advantageous state, a special effect may be executed to liven up the game, but the configuration described below allows the counting sound to be output while the counting button 171 is being operated (counting process), and provides for cases in which the sound effect for the advantageous state is maintained. With this configuration, the sound effect for the advantageous state may be maintained even during the counting process, so that interest in the game does not decrease. The counting sound also allows the player to know that the counting process is being performed. This counting sound is an example of a counting notification. In the following, the counting notification using this counting sound will be referred to as counting notification B.

While the counting notification B has the above-mentioned effects, there is a problem that depending on the timing of execution, it may make important scenes difficult to understand. Here, since the state in which all reels have stopped spinning corresponds to the period between games and the effects to be executed are less important, the counting notification B may be configured to be executed when all reels have stopped spinning. Furthermore, since there are cases in which an effect indicating a winning combination is executed after the final stop operation on the reels, the counting notification B may be configured to be executed on the condition that a predetermined period has passed since the final stop operation on the reels and all reels have stopped spinning. Furthermore, the counting notification B may be configured to be executed on the condition that all reels have stopped spinning after all the effects resulting from the final stop operation on the reels have been executed (for example, when switching to a demo effect).

On the other hand, when any of the reels are spinning, the game is in progress, and the effects that are executed are of higher importance. For this reason, the configuration may be such that counting notification B is not executed when any of the reels are spinning.

In addition, depending on the operation during play, an effect may be executed in response to this. For example, as described above, when all reels have stopped spinning, the operation of the bet button 132 or the start lever 135 may be triggered to execute an effect for the next game, and the operation of an operating means for the effect may be triggered to execute an effect that enhances the interest of the game. For this reason, the configuration may be such that counting notification B is not executed after any operation of an operating means has been performed.

In the above explanation, the cases where counting notification B is executed and where it is not executed are described. However, for example, in cases where there are a first type of counting sound and a second type of counting sound (e.g., different melodies, tones, number of sounds, volume, etc.), this may be replaced with a configuration. In other words, the case where counting notification B is executed may be interpreted as the case where the first type of counting sound is output, and the case where counting notification B is not executed may be interpreted as the case where the second type of counting sound is output. Since there are various types of sounds, for example, if the second type of counting sound is a type of sound that does not significantly interfere with the presentation of an advantageous state, the player can be made to understand that the counting process is being executed without losing interest in the game.

Furthermore, for example, the output of the counting sound of the first mode may be interpreted as the execution of the counting performance of the first mode, and the output of the counting sound of the second mode may be interpreted as the execution of the counting performance of the second mode. Since there are various types of performances, not limited to sounds, if the counting performance of the second mode is a type that does not significantly interfere with the performance of an advantageous state, for example, the player can be made to understand that the counting process is being executed without losing interest in the game.

[Example of counting process notification]
Specific examples of the configuration of the counting notifications (counting notification A, counting notification B) described above will be described below with reference to Figs. 98 to 100. Fig. 98 is a diagram showing an example of operation when a period during which the counting sound is allowed to be output for the counting process is set. Fig. 99 is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of Fig. 98(a), and Fig. 100 is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the operation of Fig. 98(b).

Figures 98(a) and 98(b) are both examples of operation in a configuration in which the output of a counting sound is permitted when a predetermined time has passed since the third stop operation in the AT state, and the counting sound stops when a bet operation is performed. Figures 98(a) and 98(b) show the period during which the counting sound is permitted, and the output period of the counting sound in response to the operation of the counting button 171 within this period. Note that in the AT state, except when the counting sound is output, the AT performance sound corresponding to the AT state is continuously output.

In the example of Figure 98(a), the timing (a1) when the AT state starts is shown, and Figure 99(a1) shows what happens at this time. In this AT state, operation navigation may be executed during play. As an example of what happens in this case, Figure 99(a2) shows an example in which operation navigation is displayed at timing (a2) after the start operation. Also, as shown in Figures 99(a2) to (a7), in this example, the current number of game medals is displayed as the "owned" value in the upper left box, and the cumulative number of game medals acquired in the AT state is displayed in the upper right box.

Next, suppose that the counting button 171 is pressed and held during the period from after the third stop operation until before the bet button for the next game is operated. Figure 98(a) shows the operation period of this counting button 171. Below, the timings (a3) to (a7) shown in Figure 98(a) will be explained in order.

First, timing (a3) is the timing after the third stop operation and before the operation of the count button 171. Figure 99 (a3) shows how the performance that occurs when a winning combination (here, 8 game medals are won) is being executed at this timing (a3).

The next timing (a4) is when the counting button 171 is operated after the third stop operation. At this timing (a4), the counting sound is not permitted, and the display of FIG. 99(a3) continues as shown in FIG. 99(a4), and the AT sound also continues. Then, as a result of the counting button 171 being operated, the words "Counting" are displayed in a box in the upper left corner of the screen, indicating that the counting process is being carried out, and it is shown that the number of game medals has begun to decrease as the counting process has begun.

The next timing (a5) is when the counting sound is permitted while the counting button 171 continues to be pressed and held. At this timing (a5), as shown in FIG. 99(a5), the display of FIG. 99(a3) continues, but the AT sound is not being output, and the counting sound is being output. And, as the counting button 171 is being operated, the words "Counting" continue to be displayed in the box at the top left of the screen, indicating that the number of game medals is decreasing.

The next timing (a6) is when the counting button 171 is released. At this timing (a6), the display in FIG. 99(a3) continues as shown in FIG. 99(a6). Also, because the counting button 171 has not been operated, the counting sound is not output, and the output of the AT performance sound has resumed. Note that the words "Counting" in the box in the upper left corner of the screen have been erased.

The next timing (a7) is when the bet button 132 is operated. At this timing (a7), the background display of FIG. 99(a3) continues as shown in FIG. 99(a7). In addition, the AT performance sound is being output.

In the above example, the operation at timing (a5) corresponds to an example of counting notification A. This operation shows a configuration of counting notification A in which the AT performance sound is no longer output during the counting process. Furthermore, the operation at timings (a4) and (a5) corresponds to an example of counting notification B. This operation shows a configuration of counting notification B in which the AT performance sound is sometimes maintained during the counting process and the counting sound is sometimes output.

Next, in the example of FIG. 98(b), the timing (b1) when the AT state starts is shown, and FIG. 100(b1) shows the state at this time. In this AT state, operation navigation may be executed during play. As an example of what happens in this case, FIG. 100(b2) shows an example in which operation navigation is displayed at the timing (b2) after the first stop operation. Also, as shown in FIG. 100(b2) to (b8), in this example, the current number of game medals is displayed as the "owned" value in the upper left box, and the cumulative number of game medals acquired in the AT state is displayed in the upper right box.

Next, assume that the counting button 171 is pressed and held during the period from after the first stop operation is performed until immediately after the start operation of the next game. Figure 98(b) shows the operation period of this counting button 171. Below, the timings (b3) to (b8) shown in Figure 98(b) will be explained in order.

First, timing (b3) is when the counting button 171 is operated after the first stop operation. At this timing (b3), the counting sound is not permitted, and the effects of FIG. 100(b2) (including the AT effect sound) continue, as shown in FIG. 100(b3). Then, as a result of the counting button 171 being operated, the words "Counting" are displayed in a box in the upper left corner of the screen, indicating that the counting process is being carried out, and the start of the counting process indicates that the number of game medals has begun to decrease.

The next timing (b4) is after the third stop operation and while the counting button 171 continues to be pressed and held. Figure 100 (b4) shows how, at this timing (b4), the performance that occurs when a winning combination is achieved (here, 8 game medals are won) is being executed. Note that, at this timing (b4), the counting sound is not permitted and the AT performance sound is being output. And, as the counting button 171 is being operated, the words "Counting" continue to be displayed in the box at the top left of the screen, indicating that the number of game medals is decreasing.

The next timing (b5) is when the counting sound is permitted while the counting button 171 is being pressed and held. At this timing (b5), as shown in FIG. 100(b5), the display in FIG. 100(b4) continues, but the AT sound is not being output, and the counting sound is being output. And, as the counting button 171 is being operated, the words "Counting" are displayed in a box in the upper left corner of the screen, indicating that the number of game medals is decreasing.

At the next timing (b6), the bet button 132 is operated while the counting button 171 is being pressed and held. At this timing (b6), the display of FIG. 100(b4) continues, as shown in FIG. 100(b6). In addition, the operation of the bet button 132 ends the permitted period for the counting sound, and the output of the AT sound effect is resumed. Note that, as the counting button 171 is being operated, the words "Counting" are displayed in a box in the upper left corner of the screen, indicating that the number of game medals is decreasing.

The next timing (b7) is the timing after the start lever 135 is operated. At this timing (b7), the operation navigation is displayed as shown in FIG. 100 (b7), and the AT performance sound is being output. Note that, as the count button 171 is being operated, the words "Counting" are displayed in a box in the upper left corner of the screen, indicating that the number of game medals is decreasing.

The next timing (b8) is when the counting button 171 is released. At this timing (b8), the display in FIG. 100(b7) continues as shown in FIG. 100(b8). Also, because the counting button 171 has not been operated, the counting sound is not output, and the AT performance sound is output. Note that the words "Counting" in the box at the top left of the screen have been erased.

In the above example, the operation at timing (b5) corresponds to an example of counting notification A. This operation shows a configuration of counting notification A in which the AT performance sound is no longer output during the counting process. Furthermore, the operation at timings (b3) to (b5) corresponds to an example of counting notification B. This operation shows a configuration of counting notification B in which the AT performance sound is sometimes maintained during the counting process and the counting sound is sometimes output.

[Display and effects based on information from the medal count control unit]
In this embodiment, the medal count control status command (see Figs. 7 and 11) transmitted periodically (every 5.9 ms or 8 ms in Fig. 7) from the medal count control unit 350 allows the game control unit 302 to grasp information such as the number of game medals (Fig. 25). Some of this information is then transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 by a security command (Fig. 7) transmitted periodically (every 100 ms in Fig. 7) from the game control unit 302. The first sub-control unit 400 can perform various displays and performance controls based on this information. Furthermore, the player can grasp this information through these displays and performances.

In the above configuration, if the time it takes for communication to be established between the medal count control unit 350 and the game control unit 302 when the power is turned on is longer than the time it takes for communication to be established between the game control unit 302 and the first sub-control unit 400 when the power is turned on, a security command will be sent from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 even though the medal count control status command from the medal count control unit 350 has not yet arrived at the game control unit 302. Since the security command sent at this time does not reflect the information of the medal count control unit 350, if various displays and presentation controls are performed based on the information contained in this security command, the player will be given information that differs from the actual status.

To prevent such a situation from occurring, a security command may be sent from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 after communication is established between the game control unit 302 and the medal count control unit 350. For example, the game control unit 302 may send the first security command after powering on after receiving the medal count control state command. Also, the security command may be sent after a sufficient waiting time has been set.

In addition, until communication is established between the game control unit 302 and the medal count control unit 350, the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured not to execute processing based on a security command even if it receives the command. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to ignore security commands received several times after power-on, or to ignore security commands received until a certain waiting time has elapsed.

In addition, information indicating the communication status between the game control unit 302 and the medal count control unit 350 may be included in the security command, and when the game control unit 302 receives a medal count control status command (communication between the medal count control unit 350 and the game control unit 302 is established), information indicating normal communication may be included in the security command and sent, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be allowed to execute various displays and presentation controls on the condition that this information is included. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being given information that differs from the actual status.

Here, we will provide additional explanation of the operations that occur from when the above security command is sent until the next security command is sent. For example, if there is a change in information such as the number of game medals played between security commands, and this information is not updated until the next security command is received, the latest information will not be reflected in the various displays and presentation controls. In the game control unit 302, various processing commands are sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in conjunction with game control (Figure 7), and by including the latest information in these various processing commands and using this information to perform various displays and presentation controls, it is possible to ensure that the latest information is reflected.

[Regarding the timing of transmitting and receiving operation information and the corresponding processing (1)]
In the following, based on the above-described configuration of the slot machine 100, modified examples of the transmission and reception timing of operation information and the corresponding processing will be described with reference to Figures 101 to 104. Note that in the following description, the configurations described in Figures 1 to 100 will be referred to as appropriate, and for any contradictory configurations, the words and symbols of this example will take precedence.

In the slot machine 100 described above, information is sent and received between each control unit in response to the operation of the operating means. Information is sent and received between each control unit according to a predetermined cycle. An example of the communication cycle between each control unit is described below with reference to FIG. 101.

Figure 101 shows the communication period (time required for timer interrupt) of signals between the game control unit 302, medal count control unit 350, and lending machine 700, and various devices connected to them. Note that signals sent and received regardless of operation are omitted from this figure.

For example, when the bet buttons 130 and 132 are operated, the game control unit 302 that receives this operation executes the corresponding process and transmits a coin insertion command to the medal count control unit 350 (see [Operation of the game control unit 302 by insert operation (transmission of insert command, etc.)]), the medal count control unit 350 that receives this insert command executes the corresponding process and transmits a response command to the game control unit 302 (see [Operation when game control priority command is received], [Operation when insert command is received], [Transmission of medal count control command (from medal count control unit 350 to game control unit 302)]), and the game control unit 302 that receives this response command executes the corresponding process (see [Operation when medal count control command is received]). In FIG. 101, signals are transmitted and received in the order of arrow A → arrow B → arrow C. In addition, between arrow B and arrow C, an update process (transmission of arrow F) of the game medal count display device 170 is executed. In addition, after arrow C, a process (transmission of arrow D) related to effects such as insert sound is executed. In the above example, the game control unit 302 executes the processing related to effects such as the insertion sound after receiving the response command, but the configuration may be such that the processing related to effects such as the insertion sound is executed without waiting for this response command.

For example, when the settlement button 134 is operated, the game control unit 302 that accepts this operation executes the corresponding process and transmits a settlement command to the medal count control unit 350 (see [Operation of the game control unit 302 by settlement operation (transmission of settlement command, etc.)]), the medal count control unit 350 that accepts this settlement command executes the corresponding process and transmits a response command to the game control unit 302 (see [Operation when game control priority command is received], [Operation when settlement command is received], [Transmission of medal count control command (from medal count control unit 350 to game control unit 302)]), and the game control unit 302 that accepts this response command executes the corresponding process (see [Operation when medal count control command is received]). In FIG. 101, signals are transmitted and received in the order of arrow A → arrow B → arrow C. Note that between arrow B and arrow C, an update process of the game medal count display device 170 (transmission of arrow F) is executed, and after arrow C, a process related to the effects such as the insertion sound (transmission of arrow D) is executed. In addition, in the case of a configuration that does not use response commands, in FIG. 101, signals are sent and received in the order of arrow A → arrow B. Also, after arrow B, an update process for the game medal count display device 170 (transmission of arrow F) is executed, and after arrow A, a process related to effects such as a settlement sound (transmission of arrow D) is executed.

For example, when the count button 171 is operated, the medal count control unit 350, which has received this operation, executes a process to determine the planned count number and the counted number, and sends a counting notification to the lending machine 700 (see [Setting the planned count number (medal count control unit 350)] and [Counting notification (periodic transmission from medal count control unit 350 to lending machine 700)]). After this counting notification is sent, the number of game medals is subtracted and the planned count number is cleared. The medal count display device 170 displays this updated value of the game medal count. The count number and the updated value of the game medal count are also sent to the game control unit 302. Note that the configuration may also be such that only the counted number is sent to the game control unit 302 without sending the updated value of the game medal count. In FIG. 101, signals are sent and received in the order of arrow E → arrow G → arrow C. Note that between arrow G and arrow C, an update process (arrow F) for the game medal count display device 170 is executed, and after arrow C, a process related to the counting effect (transmission of arrow H) is executed. Note that a security command with a 100 ms cycle is used to transmit information related to counting from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 (arrow H instead of arrow D). Also, the first sub-control unit 400 takes a processing time (for example, 16.667 ms) from reception to sound output.

As explained above, information is sent and received between the operation of the operating means and the execution of the corresponding operation, but there are various timings for this sending and receiving. For example, the counting notification for the counting operation is performed in a communication cycle of 300 ms between the medal count control unit 350 and the lending machine 700, so the waiting time until the corresponding operation is performed is longer than for other operations. For this reason, depending on the situation, it may be better to cancel the process corresponding to the counting operation, or to execute the corresponding process in an order different from the order of the operations. Also, there are cases where the results of not only one counting operation but multiple counting operations are collectively treated as one piece of information, and it may be preferable to perform an operation according to the results of multiple counting operations, not limited to an operation corresponding to each counting operation. Below, an example of such a process is explained, and then an example of an operation based on this process is explained.

Figure 102 shows an example of the count notification sending process (step S305) in the medal count control unit main process of Figure 27, and is a modified example of the flowchart of Figure 34. Note that this flowchart describes characteristic processes, and omits processes unrelated to the subsequent operation examples.

First, in step S3A01, which is executed first, if it is time for counting processing (the value of the counting notification interval timer is 0), proceed to step S3A02, otherwise end this processing.

In step S3A02, if the number of sheets to be counted is not 0, proceed to step S3A03; otherwise, end this process.

In step S3A03, the number of medals to be counted is compared with the number of medals played, and the smaller value is set as the number of medals to be counted, and the process proceeds to step S3A04.

In step S3A04, if the count is less than 50, proceed to step S3A05, otherwise proceed to step S3A07.

In step S3A05, the count number set in step S3A03 is sent to the rental machine 700.

In step S3A06, the counted number is subtracted from the number of game medals.

In step S3A07, the count number "50" is sent to the rental machine 700.

In step S3A08, the value "50" transmitted as the counted number is subtracted from the number of game medals.

In step S3A09, the planned number of coins to be counted is set to 0, and the process ends.

Of the above processes, steps S3A04, S3A07, and S3A08 are processes when the upper limit of the number of counted sheets is set to 50, and it is also possible to proceed from step S3A03 to step S3A05 without using these processes.

Figure 103 is a flowchart showing an example of sound control processing (step S511) in the main processing of the first sub-control unit 400 in Figure 60 (a).

First, in step S5A01, which is executed first, if a security command is received, the process proceeds to step S5A02, otherwise the process proceeds to step S5A03.

In step S5A02, the count number information is obtained from the security command, and that value is added to the remaining count value before proceeding to step S5A03.

In step S5A03, if the remaining count is not 0, proceed to step S5A04; otherwise, end this process.

In step S5A04, if the remaining count is 5 or less, proceed to step S5A05; otherwise, proceed to step S5A08.

In step S5A05, if the number of game medals obtained from the security command is 0, proceed to step S5A06, otherwise proceed to step S5A07.

In step S5A06, the output of counting sound B and counting completion sound is set, and the process proceeds to step S5A11.

In step S5A07, the counting sound A is set to be output, and the process proceeds to step S5A11.

In step S5A08, if the number of game medals obtained from the security command is 0, proceed to step S5A09, otherwise proceed to step S5A10.

In step S5A09, the counting sound C and the counting completion sound are set to be output, and the process proceeds to step S5A11.

In step S5A10, the counting sound D is set to be output, and the process proceeds to step S5A11.

In step S5A11, the remaining count is updated to 0 and the process ends.

Here, an example of the counting sound set by the process in Figure 103 is explained using Figure 104.

The counting process is performed based on the operation of the count button 171, which can be a short press (operation time less than 500 ms) or a long press (operation time 500 ms or more). Of these, a short press adds 1 to the planned count number, while a long press sets the planned count number to 50. Furthermore, if the long press continues for a predetermined time (2 seconds or more in the example of Figure 59), automatic counting will be performed (the planned count number will continue to be set to 50 even if the count button 171 is released). The time for determining whether to press it short, long, or automatic count is one example, and other values may be used. For example, a counter value set to an initial value (192) may be subtracted at regular intervals (decrementing by 1 for every 28 0.745 ms timer interrupts), and depending on the counter value, a short press (158 or more, operation time less than approximately 730 ms), a long press (157 or less, operation time between approximately 730 ms and less than 4000 ms), or automatic counting (0, operation time greater than approximately 4000 ms) may be determined. Note that the following examples will be described assuming that these operation times are used.

In the above example, the count notification is sent at 300 ms intervals, but it is physically difficult to short-press the count button 171 three or more times during this period. The above process is based on the assumption that even if three or more short presses are performed, the limit is five times, and is configured to output count sound A or count sound B if the number of counted sheets is five or less, and output count sound C or count sound D if the number of counted sheets is six or more. If the number of counted sheets is six or more (in this example, count sound C or count sound D is output), it is assumed that the count button 171 has been pressed and held for a long time, and since there is a high possibility that counting is being performed continuously, a configuration is adopted in which the volume of the main control related to the insertion sound (stop sound, etc.) is reduced in this case. Note that the threshold value for determining whether the operation is a short press or a long press is one example, and may be 0 or any value equal to or greater than six. It may also be configured to determine a long press or an automatic count state and reduce the insertion sound.

In the process of FIG. 103, if the counted number is 5 or less and the number of game medals after counting is not 0, counting sound A is set. Here, the case where the counted number is 5 or less corresponds to the case where 5 or fewer short presses are performed. FIG. 104(a) shows that counting sound A is output when the number of game medals goes from 50 to 49 with one short press. It also shows that counting sound A is output when the number of game medals goes from 50 to 48 with two short presses. In this example, counting sound A is a "pick" sound that is output once regardless of the number of counted medals. Note that in this example, the length (output time) of counting sound A is 250 ms.

In the process of FIG. 103, if the number of counted medals is 5 or less and the number of game medals after counting is 0, counting sound B is set. The case where the number of counted medals is 5 or less corresponds to the case where the short press is performed 5 times or less and the case where the long press is performed when the number of game medals is 5 or less. In FIG. 104(a), it is shown that counting sound B is output when the number of game medals becomes 1 to 0 by one short press. It is also shown that counting sound B is output when the number of game medals becomes 2 to 0 by two short presses. It is also shown that counting sound B is output when the number of game medals becomes 0 from a state of 5 or less by one long press. In this example, a sound (counting completion sound) that notifies the completion of counting is output after counting sound B of "ding-dong" regardless of the number of counted medals. In this example, this counting completion sound is a character's voice that notifies the completion of counting, and is also output after counting sound C described later (the counting completion sound is common). In this example, the length (output time) of counting sound B is 500 ms. Additionally, the length of the count completion sound is 3000 ms (and so on).

In the process of FIG. 103, if the number of counted medals is 6 or more and the number of game medals after counting is 0, counting sound C is set. The case where the number of counted medals is 6 or more corresponds to a case where the number of game medals is 6 or more and the button is pressed for a long time. In theory, it is possible to make the number of counted medals 6 or more when the button is pressed for a short time 6 or more times, but this is not practical because it requires the operation of the counting button 171 within 300 ms. FIG. 104(a) shows that the counting sound C is output when the number of game medals becomes 0 from 6 or more by a single long press. In this example, the counting sound C is output, which is composed of a melody shorter than the melody used in the counting sound D (a melody in which the counting sound D ends midway) and a "ding-dong" sound, and then a counting completion sound that notifies the completion of counting is output in sequence. In this example, the length (output time) of the counting sound C is 750 ms.

In the process of FIG. 103, if the number of counted coins is 6 or more and the number of game medals after counting is not 0, counting sound D is set. The case where the number of counted coins is 6 or more corresponds to a case where the number of game medals is 6 or more and the button is pressed for a long time. Note that it is theoretically possible to make the number of counted coins 6 or more when the button is pressed for a short time 6 or more times, but this is not practical because it requires the operation of the counting button 171 within 300 ms. FIG. 104(a) shows that the counting sound D is output when the number of game medals goes from 100 to 50 with one long press. In this example, the counting sound D is output, which is composed of a melody longer than the melody used in the counting sound C and a "ding-dong" sound. Note that in this example, the length (output time) of the counting sound D is 1000 ms.

The length of the melody for the counting sound C may be varied depending on the number of coins counted. Figure 104(b) shows an example of five types of counting sound C (counting sound C1 to counting sound C5) corresponding to the number of coins counted. This configuration makes it easier for the player to grasp the number of coins counted.

Counting sound C is a shortened sound obtained by deleting the latter part of the first half of the melody of counting sound D, but it may also be a shortened sound obtained by deleting the former part of the melody. In this case, the connection between the first half (the melody in this example) and the latter half (the "ding-dong" in this example) can be made the same for counting sound C and counting sound D.

Although an example has been described in which the same counting completion sound is used, different counting completion sounds may be used, such as using different counting completion sounds to match the counting sound. The counting completion sound may also be a voice based on a model motif, such as a character used in the model. Also, while a common voice was used in the above example, the voices of different characters may also be used. For example, it may be possible to recognize the count value by outputting counting completion sounds in the voices of different characters depending on the count value.

In the above example, a counting sound is output for each game medal number (counted number) counted (sent to the lending machine 700 in different counting notifications) in different counting cycles (mainly consecutive counting cycles), so multiple counting sounds may overlap depending on the timing (for example, FIG. 130 described later). However, this configuration is not limited, and for example, a configuration in which a subsequent counting sound is not output until the previously output counting sound ends may be used. In this case, a configuration in which a counting sound based on counting is started to be output for the counting process (counting notification) after the output of the counting sound ends, or a condition such as the passage of time after the output of the counting sound ends may be used, or such a condition may be combined with another condition (for example, a condition related to the number of counted medals).

In the process of FIG. 103, the number of game medals and the number of counted medals are used as the criteria for judgment, and the operation of the count button 171 when setting this counted number (short press, long press, automatic count) is not used in the judgment. For example, when automatic counting is being performed, the counting sound is set according to the conditions in FIG. 103, so that counting sound D may be followed by counting sound B or counting sound C, or only counting sound B or counting sound C may be output. With this configuration, it may be possible to make the counting sound correspond to the number of medals counted.

The operation of the count button 171 (short press, long press, automatic count) may be used to determine the count sound. For example, the automatic count sound G may be output when automatic counting is in progress. In this case, the automatic count sound G may be a sound whose melody length changes depending on the number of sheets counted and the counting time (for example, when the number of sheets counted is 51 or more, the sound is longer than the count completion sound).

The determination of which counting sound to output is not limited to the number of game medals and the number of counted medals, but may also use, for example, the number of game medals before and after counting as a determination criterion. Furthermore, the automatic counting sound G may be configured to initially output counting sound D (melody + ding-dong), and then add a notification sound that notifies the player that automatic counting has started after 4000 ms has elapsed, or to add a sound that notifies the player that automatic counting is in progress after the counting button 171 is turned off.

In addition, if the counting sound and the betting sound overlap, the volume of the betting sound is lowered so as not to interfere with the counting sound. Note that the volume of not only the betting sound but also sounds related to the progress of the game (for example, start operation sounds, stop sounds, payout sounds, settlement sounds) may be lowered. In addition to lowering the volume, the volume may be set to 0 or some sounds may not be output.

In the above example, a configuration was described in which the count is notified by sound, but the configuration may also be such that notification by a predetermined light emission from a lamp or the like, notification by a display means, or notification by one or more notification means including a lamp and a display means is performed in combination with the count sound. Furthermore, the display means may include a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display means that performs a special display) separate from the medal count display means.

When multiple notification means are combined, the notification content may be different for each notification means, such as outputting a sound according to the number of counting operations or the number of game medals, while another notification means (e.g., a lamp) changes its light emission mode for each different counting operation. In addition, another notification means such as a lamp may be configured to issue a count notification only when a certain condition is met. Examples of such a configuration include a configuration that issues a notification only when the number of game medals becomes 0, a configuration that issues a notification when a predetermined number (e.g., 1000) or more of game value is counted by a single long press operation or automatic counting, and a configuration that issues a notification when successive short press operations are performed (an alert notification indicating that counting is possible with a single long press).

In addition to the above example, there is also a configuration in which the number of counts increases (the counting process accelerates) according to the operation time of the counting button 171, for example, automatic counting is performed when 4000 ms have elapsed since the counting button 171 was operated, and the number of game medals is counted all at once when another 2000 ms of operation (6000 ms of operation of the counting button 171) has elapsed since then. An example of such a configuration in which the counting process is accelerated is shown in FIG. 67. Also, as in the example of FIG. 68, there is a configuration in which the counting process is decelerated when the number of game medals falls below a certain number. Even with such a configuration, the above-mentioned counting sound configuration can be applied.

In addition, the update speed of the count (mainly the display of the game value display means) may be slowed down when the number of game medals after counting becomes zero during automatic counting or long press counting, or near the end of counting.

It may also be equipped with a countable notification lamp that indicates that counting is possible, or a lamp that notifies according to the counting state, such as counting in progress or automatic counting, or the counting state may be notified by the notification color of the countable notification lamp.

In addition, in this embodiment, the counting sound is output based on the information of the security command transmitted from the game control unit 302 to the first sub-control unit 400 at 100 ms intervals, and the counting sound is output after the timing when the update of the game medal count display device 170 starts. If the counting sound were output before the update of the game medal count display device 170 starts, there is a possibility that this sound would be mistaken for another sound (for example, an error sound or a warning sound); however, by outputting the counting sound after the update of the game medal count display device 170 starts, such a problem may be prevented.

In the above example, a counting sound is output according to the number of counted coins or the number of game values (e.g., the number of game medals), but there are also pachinko machines that handle counting operations and game value numbers electronically, and the present invention can also be applied to such gaming machines.

Below, examples of operations based on the contents explained in Figures 101 to 104 will be explained using Figures 105 to 130.

In the example of FIG. 105, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 50, and the same value is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

Then, from this state, the count button 171 is pressed briefly, and the planned number to be counted is set to 1. A count notification based on this planned number to be counted is performed after a communication cycle has elapsed. Therefore, no count notification is performed at this point. Figure 105 shows that the number of game medals and its display are not updated immediately after the count button 171 is operated.

Next, assume that the MAX BET button 132 is operated after the planned count number has been set but before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). Figure 105 shows that the number of game medals is updated (50 minus 3 to become 47) based on the operation of the MAX BET button 132 before the game information notification is sent, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is executed according to the number of medals to be counted, the counted number (based on the number of medals to be counted) is sent to the lending machine 700, the number of game medals is updated (47 minus 1 to become 46), the number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is sent, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound A) is output.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) between processes for the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval between executions of the counting process. For this reason, in the above example, when updating the game medal count display device 170, the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, which was operated after the operation of the counting button 171, is performed first.

In the example of FIG. 106, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 50, and the same value is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

Then, from this state, the count button 171 is pressed briefly, and the planned count number is set to 1. A count notification based on this planned count number is executed after waiting for the communication cycle. Therefore, no count notification is performed at this point (similar to FIG. 105).

Next, assume that the MAX BET button 132 is operated after the planned count number has been set but before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). Figure 106 shows that the number of game medals is updated (50 minus 3 to become 47) based on the operation of the MAX BET button 132 after the game information notification is sent but before the counting notification is sent, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is executed according to the number of medals to be counted, the counted number (based on the number of medals to be counted) is sent to the lending machine 700, the number of game medals is updated (47 minus 1 to become 46), the number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is sent, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound A) is output.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) between processes for the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval between executions of the counting process. For this reason, in the above example, when updating the game medal count display device 170, the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, which is operated later than the operation of the counting button 171, is performed first. Note that compared to the example of FIG. 105, this is different in that the operation of the MAX BET button 132 is performed after the game information notification is sent, but even in this example, the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, which is operated later than the operation of the counting button 171, is performed first.

In the example of FIG. 107, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 50, and the same value is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

Then, from this state, the count button 171 is pressed briefly, and the planned count number is set to 1. A count notification based on this planned count number is executed after a communication cycle. Therefore, no count notification is made at this point. Furthermore, in this example, following the first operation of the count button 171, the count button 171 is pressed briefly a second time, and the planned count number is incremented by 1 to set it to 2. At this point, the timing for sending and receiving the count notification has not yet arrived, so no count notification is made. Figure 107 shows that the number of game medals and its display are not updated immediately after these operations of the count button 171.

Next, assume that the MAX BET button 132 is operated after the planned count number has been set but before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). Figure 107 shows that the number of game medals is updated (50 minus 3 to become 47) based on the operation of the MAX BET button 132 before the game information notification is sent, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is executed according to the number of medals to be counted, the counted number (based on the number of medals to be counted) is sent to the lending machine 700, the number of medals is updated (47 minus 2 to become 45), the number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is sent, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound A) is output.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) between processes for the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval between executions of the counting process. For this reason, in the above example, when updating the game medal count display device 170, the game value is subtracted first in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, which is operated after the operation of the counting button 171. Note that although the number of times the counting button 171 is operated is different from the example in FIG. 105, in this example too, the game value is subtracted first in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, which is operated after the operation of the counting button 171.

In the example of FIG. 108, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 50, and the same value is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

Then, from this state, the count button 171 is pressed briefly, and the number of sheets to be counted is set to 1. A count notification based on this number of sheets to be counted is executed after waiting for the communication cycle. Therefore, no count notification is performed at this point.

In addition, in this example, after the first operation of the count button 171 and after the game information notification is sent, the count button 171 is pressed a second time, adding 1 to the planned count number, setting it to 2. At this point, the timing for sending and receiving the count notification has not yet arrived, so no count notification is made. Figure 108 shows that the number of game medals and its display are not updated immediately after these operations of the count button 171.

Next, assume that the MAX BET button 132 is operated after the planned count number has been set but before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). Figure 108 shows that the number of game medals is updated (50 minus 3 to become 47) based on the operation of the MAX BET button 132 after the game information notification is sent but before the counting notification is sent, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is executed according to the number of medals to be counted, the counted number (based on the number of medals to be counted) is sent to the lending machine 700, the number of medals is updated (47 minus 2 to become 45), the number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is sent, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound A) is output.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) of processing for the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval for executing the counting process. For this reason, in the above example, when updating the game medal count display device 170, the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, which is operated later than the operation of the counting button 171, is performed first. Note that compared to the example in FIG. 105, it is different in that the second operation of the counting button 171 is performed after the game information notification, and that the operation of the MAX BET button 132 is performed after the game information notification is sent, but even in this example, the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, which is operated later than the operation of the counting button 171, is performed first.

In the example of FIG. 109, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 50, and the same value is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

Then, from this state, the count button 171 is pressed briefly, and the planned count number is set to 1. A count notification based on this planned count number is executed after waiting for the communication cycle. Therefore, no count notification is performed at this point.

Following the operation of the counting button 171 described above, let us assume that the MAX BET button 132 is operated before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). Figure 109 shows that the number of game medals is updated (50 minus 3 to become 47) based on the operation of the MAX BET button 132 before the game information notification is sent, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction.

Furthermore, suppose that following the operation of the MAX BET button 132, a second short press of the counting button 171 is performed. Figure 109 shows that this second operation of the counting button 171 is performed before the game information notification is sent, and that the number of coins to be counted is increased by 1, setting it to 2. At this point, the timing for sending and receiving the counting notification has not yet arrived, so the counting notification is not sent.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is executed according to the number of medals to be counted, the counted number (based on the number of medals to be counted) is sent to the lending machine 700, the number of medals is updated (47 minus 2 to become 45), the number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is sent, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound A) is output.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) between processes for the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval between executions of the counting process. For this reason, in the above example, when updating the game medal count display device 170, the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, which is operated after the operation of the counting button 171, is performed first. Note that compared to the example in FIG. 105, it is different in that the counting button 171 is operated a second time after the operation of the MAX BET button 132, but even in this example, the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, which is operated after the operation of the counting button 171, is performed first.

In the example of FIG. 110, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 70, and the same value is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

From this state, it is shown that a long press of the count button 171 has been detected, and the planned count number has been set to 50. A count notification based on this planned count number is executed after waiting for the communication cycle. Therefore, no count notification is performed at this point. Figure 110 shows that the number of game medals and its display are not updated when this planned count number is set.

Next, assume that the MAX BET button 132 is operated after the planned count number has been set but before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). Figure 110 shows that the number of game medals is updated (70 minus 3 to become 67) based on the operation of the MAX BET button 132 before the game information notification is sent, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is performed according to the number of medals to be counted, the counted number (based on the number of medals to be counted) is sent to the lending machine 700, the number of game medals is updated (67 minus 50 to become 17), the number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is sent, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound D) is output.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) between processes for the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval between executions of the counting process. For this reason, in the above example, when updating the game medal count display device 170, the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, which is operated after the operation of the counting button 171, is performed first. Note that compared to the example in FIG. 105, this is different in that the operation of the counting button 171 is a long press instead of a short press, but even in this example, the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, which is operated after the operation of the counting button 171, is performed first.

In the example of FIG. 111, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 70, and the same value is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

From this state, it is shown that a long press of the count button 171 has been detected, and the planned count number has been set to 50. A count notification based on this planned count number is executed after waiting for the communication cycle. Therefore, no count notification is performed at this point. Figure 111 shows that the number of game medals and its display are not updated when this planned count number is set.

Next, assume that the MAX BET button 132 is operated after the planned count number has been set but before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). Figure 111 shows that the number of game medals is updated (70 minus 3 to become 67) based on the operation of the MAX BET button 132 before the game information notification is sent, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction.

Next, assume that the count button 171 is pressed briefly before the game information notification is sent. In this case, the number of coins to be counted is already set to the upper limit of 50, so the number of coins to be counted does not change.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is performed according to the number of medals to be counted, the counted number (based on the number of medals to be counted) is sent to the lending machine 700, the number of game medals is updated (67 minus 50 to become 17), the number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is sent, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound D) is output.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) of processing for the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval for executing the counting process. For this reason, in the above example, when updating the game medal count display device 170, the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, which is operated after the operation of the counting button 171, is performed first. Note that compared to the example in FIG. 105, it is different in that the operation of the counting button 171 is a long press instead of a short press, and that the counting button 171 is pressed briefly after the operation of the MAX BET button 132, but even in this example, the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, which is operated after the operation of the counting button 171, is performed first.

In the example of FIG. 112, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 50, and the same value is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

Then, from this state, the count button 171 is pressed briefly, and the planned number to be counted is set to 1. A count notification based on this planned number to be counted is performed after a communication cycle has elapsed. Therefore, no count notification is performed at this point. Figure 112 shows that the number of game medals and its display are not updated immediately after the count button 171 is operated.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is executed according to the number of medals to be counted, the counted number (based on the number of medals to be counted) is sent to the lending machine 700, the number of game medals is updated (50 minus 1 to become 49), the number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is sent, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound A) is output.

Next, assume that the MAX BET button 132 is operated after the counting notification is sent but before the loan notification is sent. Figure 112 shows that the number of game medals is updated (49 is subtracted by 3 to become 46) based on the operation of the MAX BET button 132, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) between processing the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval between executions of the counting process, but depending on the timing, as in the above example, after the game medal count display device 170 is updated by operating the counting button 171, the game value may be subtracted in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132. Note that compared to the example in Figure 105, the difference is that the operation of the MAX BET button 132 occurs after the counting notification has been sent.

In the example of FIG. 113, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 3, and the same value is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

Then, from this state, the count button 171 is pressed briefly, and the planned number to be counted is set to 1. A count notification based on this planned number to be counted is performed after a communication cycle has elapsed. Therefore, no count notification is performed at this point. Figure 113 shows that the number of game medals and its display are not updated immediately after the count button 171 is operated.

Next, assume that the MAX BET button 132 is operated after the planned count number has been set but before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). Figure 113 shows that the number of game medals is updated (3 is subtracted from 3 to become 0) based on the operation of the MAX BET button 132 before the game information notification is sent, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is executed according to the planned count number, but in this example, the number of game medals is less than the planned count number of 1. In this case, the lesser of the planned count number or the number of game medals is set as the count number (step S3A03 in FIG. 102), but because the number of game medals is 0, the count number becomes 0, and counting is not executed. In other words, the number of game medals remains 0, and the planned count number is cleared to 0. Note that, because counting is not executed, no counting sound is output.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) between processes for the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval between executions of the counting process. For this reason, in the above example, when updating the game medal count display device 170, the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, which was operated after the operation of the counting button 171, is performed first. Furthermore, in the above example, the number of game medals becomes 0 due to this subtraction, so the counting process is not executed even though the counting button 171 is operated. Note that compared to the example in FIG. 105, the difference is that the value of the game medal count at the start of the operation example is less (3), and that the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132 has been performed, so the counting process is not executed.

In the example of FIG. 114, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 2, and the same value is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

Then, from this state, the count button 171 is pressed briefly, and the planned number to be counted is set to 1. A count notification based on this planned number to be counted is performed after a communication cycle has elapsed. Therefore, no count notification is performed at this point. Figure 114 shows that the number of game medals and its display are not updated immediately after the count button 171 is operated.

Next, suppose that the MAX BET button 132 is operated after the number of medals to be counted has been set but before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). However, since the number of medals required for a MAX BET (3) is not available, the MAX BET operation is invalid. Figure 114 shows that although the MAX BET button 132 is operated before the game information notification is sent, neither the number of medals nor the value on the game medal count display device 170 has changed.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is performed according to the number of medals to be counted, the counted number (based on the number of medals to be counted) is sent to the lending machine 700, the number of game medals is updated (2 minus 1 to become 1), the number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is sent, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound A) is output.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) of processing for the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval of execution of the counting process. For this reason, in the above example, when updating the game medal count display device 170, the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, which was operated after the operation of the counting button 171, is performed first. However, in the above example, the value of the game medal count is insufficient to subtract the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, so the operation of the MAX BET button 132 is invalid. For this reason, only the update of the game medal count display device 170 by the operation of the counting button 171 is performed. Note that compared to the example in FIG. 105, the difference is that the value of the game medal count at the start of the operation example is less (2) and that the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132 is not performed.

In the example of FIG. 115, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 3, and the same value is displayed on the game medal number display device 170.

Then, from this state, the count button 171 is pressed briefly, and the planned count number is set to 1. A count notification based on this planned count number is executed after a communication cycle. Therefore, no count notification is made at this point. Furthermore, in this example, following the first operation of the count button 171, the count button 171 is pressed briefly a second time, and the planned count number is incremented by 1, setting it to 2. At this point, the timing for sending and receiving the count notification has not yet arrived, so no count notification is made. Figure 115 shows that the number of game medals and its display are not updated immediately after these operations of the count button 171.

Next, assume that the MAX BET button 132 is operated after the planned number of medals to be counted has been set but before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). Figure 115 shows that the number of medals is updated (3 is subtracted from 3 to become 0) based on the operation of the MAX BET button 132 before the game information notification is sent, and the value on the medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is executed according to the planned count number, but in this example, the planned count number, 2, is smaller than the number of game medals, 0. In this case, the smaller of the planned count number or the number of game medals is set as the count number (step S3A03 in FIG. 102), but because the number of game medals is 0, the count number becomes 0, and counting is not executed. In other words, the number of game medals remains 0, and the planned count number is cleared to 0. Note that, because counting is not executed, no counting sound is output.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) of processing for the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval for executing the counting process. For this reason, in the above example, when updating the game medal count display device 170, the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, which was operated after the operation of the counting button 171, is performed first. Furthermore, in the above example, the game medal count becomes 0 due to this subtraction, so the counting process is not executed even though the counting button 171 is operated. Note that compared to the example in FIG. 105, the differences are that the value of the game medal count at the start of the operation example is less (3), the counting button 171 is operated twice, and the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132 is performed, so the counting process is not executed.

In the example of FIG. 116, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 4, and the same value is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

Then, from this state, the count button 171 is pressed briefly, and the planned count number is set to 1. A count notification based on this planned count number is executed after a communication cycle. Therefore, no count notification is made at this point. Furthermore, in this example, following the first operation of the count button 171, the count button 171 is pressed briefly a second time, and the planned count number is incremented by 1 to set it to 2. At this point, the timing for sending and receiving the count notification has not yet arrived, so no count notification is made. Figure 116 shows that the number of game medals and its display are not updated immediately after these operations of the count button 171.

Next, assume that the MAX BET button 132 is operated after the planned count number has been set but before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). Figure 116 shows that the number of game medals is updated (3 is subtracted from 4 to become 1) based on the operation of the MAX BET button 132 before the game information notification is sent, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is executed according to the planned count number, but in this example, the planned count number of 2 is smaller than the planned count number of 1, which is the number of game medals. In this case, the smaller of the planned count number or the number of game medals is set as the count number (step S3A03 in FIG. 102). In this example, the count number is set to 1, which is the number of game medals, and the counting process is executed for this, updating the number of game medals (subtracting 1 from 1 to 0), the planned count number is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is sent, a corresponding counting sound (counting sound B in this case) is output.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) between processing the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval between execution of the counting process. For this reason, in the above example, when updating the game medal count display device 170, the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, which was operated after the operation of the count button 171, is performed first. Furthermore, in the above example, because the number of game medals falls below the planned count number due to this subtraction, a value (game medal number) different from the planned count number becomes the target of the counting process. Note that compared to the example in FIG. 105, the differences are that the value of the game medal number at the start of the operation example is lower (4), that the count button 171 has been operated twice, and that the counting process is performed with a value different from the planned count number.

In the example of FIG. 117, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 4, and the same value is displayed on the game medal number display device 170.

Then, from this state, the count button 171 is pressed briefly, and the number of sheets to be counted is set to 1. A count notification based on this number of sheets to be counted is executed after waiting for the communication cycle. Therefore, no count notification is performed at this point.

Following the operation of the counting button 171 described above, let us assume that the MAX BET button 132 is operated before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). Figure 117 shows that the number of game medals is updated (3 is subtracted from 4 to become 1) based on the operation of the MAX BET button 132 before the game information notification is sent, and the value on the game medal number display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction.

Furthermore, suppose that following the operation of the MAX BET button 132, the counting button 171 is pressed a second time. Figure 117 shows that this second operation of the counting button 171 is performed before the game information notification is sent, and that the number of coins to be counted is increased by 1, setting it to 2. At this point, the timing for sending and receiving the counting notification has not yet arrived, so the counting notification is not sent.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is executed according to the planned count number, but in this example, the planned count number of 2 is smaller than the planned count number of 1, which is the number of game medals. In this case, the smaller of the planned count number or the number of game medals is set as the count number (step S3A03 in FIG. 102). In this example, the count number is set to 1, which is the number of game medals, and the counting process is executed for this, updating the number of game medals (subtracting 1 from 1 to 0), the planned count number is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is sent, a corresponding counting sound (counting sound B in this case) is output.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) of processing for the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval for executing the counting process. For this reason, in the above example, when updating the game medal count display device 170, the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, which was operated after the operation of the counting button 171, is performed first. Furthermore, in the above example, the number of game medals falls below the number of game medals to be counted because the number of medals to be counted is added after this subtraction, and a value (number of game medals) different from the number of medals to be counted becomes the target of the counting process. Note that, compared to the example in FIG. 105, the difference is that the value of the number of game medals at the start of the operation example is less (4), the counting button 171 is operated once each before and after the operation of the MAX BET button 132, and the counting process is executed with a value different from the number of medals to be counted.

In the example of FIG. 118, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 50, and the same value is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

From this state, it is shown that a long press of the count button 171 has been determined, and the planned count number has been set to 50. A count notification based on this planned count number is executed after a communication cycle has elapsed. Therefore, no count notification is made at this point. Furthermore, in this example, after the planned count number is set to 50 by a long press, a short press of the count button 171 is made, but since the planned count number is already set to the upper limit of 50, the planned count number does not change. Note that even at this point, the timing for sending and receiving the count notification has not yet arrived, so no count notification is made. Figure 118 shows that the number of game medals and its display are not updated immediately after these operations of the count button 171.

Next, assume that the MAX BET button 132 is operated after the planned number of medals to be counted has been set but before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). Figure 118 shows that the number of medals is updated (50 minus 3 to become 47) based on the operation of the MAX BET button 132 before the game information notification is sent, and the value on the medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is executed according to the planned count number, but in this example, the planned count number of 50 is less than the planned count number of 47, which is the number of game medals. In this case, the smaller of the planned count number or the number of game medals is set as the count number (step S3A03 in FIG. 102). In this example, the count number is set to 47, which is the number of game medals, and the counting process is executed for this, updating the number of game medals (47 is subtracted from 47 to become 0), the planned count number is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is transmitted, a corresponding counting sound (counting sound C in this case) is output.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) between processes for the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval between executions of the counting process. For this reason, in the above example, when updating the game medal count display device 170, the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, which was operated after the operation of the counting button 171, is performed first. Furthermore, in the above example, this subtraction causes the number of game medals to fall below the planned counting number, so a value (number of game medals) different from the planned counting number becomes the target of the counting process. Note that compared to the example in FIG. 105, it differs in that the counting button 171 is operated in two ways, a long press and a short press, in succession, and that the counting process is performed with a value different from the planned counting number.

In the example of FIG. 119, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 4, and the same value is displayed on the game medal number display device 170.

From this state, it is shown that a long press of the count button 171 has been detected, and the planned count number has been set to 50. A count notification based on this planned count number is executed after a communication cycle. Therefore, no count notification is made at this point. FIG. 119 shows that when this planned count number is set, the number of game medals and its display are not updated. Note that in this example, it is possible to set a planned count number that exceeds the number of game medals, but if an attempt is made to set a planned count number that exceeds the current number of game medals, the current number of game medals may be set as the planned count number (4 is set in this example).

Next, assume that the MAX BET button 132 is operated after the planned number of medals to be counted has been set but before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). Figure 119 shows that the number of medals is updated (3 is subtracted from 4 to become 1) based on the operation of the MAX BET button 132 before the game information notification is sent, and the value on the medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is executed according to the planned count number, but in this example, the planned count number of 50 is less than the planned count number of 1, which is the number of game medals. In this case, the smaller of the planned count number or the number of game medals is set as the count number (step S3A03 in FIG. 102). In this example, the count number is set to 1, which is the number of game medals, and the counting process is executed for this, updating the number of game medals (subtracting 1 from 1 to 0), clearing the planned count number to 0, and updating the value on the game medal count display device 170 to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is sent, a corresponding counting sound (counting sound B in this case) is output.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) of processing for the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval of execution of the counting process. For this reason, in the above example, when updating the game medal count display device 170, the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, which is operated after the operation of the counting button 171, is performed first. Note that in the above example, the number of game medals is lower than the number of game medals to be counted from the time when the counting button 171 is pressed and held (before the operation of the MAX BET button 132), but the number of game medals is further reduced by the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, and the subsequent counting process targets a value (number of game medals) different from the number of game medals to be counted. Note that, compared to the example in FIG. 105, the difference is that the value of the number of game medals at the start of the operation example is lower (4), the operation of the counting button 171 is a long press instead of a short press, and the counting process is performed with a value different from the number of game medals to be counted.

In the example of FIG. 120, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 5, and the same value is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

From this state, it is shown that the count button 171 has been pressed and held for a long time, and the planned count number has been set to 50. A count notification based on this planned count number is executed after a communication cycle. Therefore, no count notification is made at this point. Furthermore, in this example, the count button 171 is pressed briefly after the planned count number is set to 50 by a long press, but since the planned count number has already been set to the upper limit of 50, the planned count number is not changed. Note that even at this point, the timing for sending and receiving the count notification has not yet arrived, so no count notification is made. FIG. 120 shows that the number of game medals and its display are not updated immediately after these operations of the count button 171. Note that in this example, it is possible to set a planned count number that exceeds the number of game medals, but if an attempt is made to set a planned count number that exceeds the current number of game medals, the current number of game medals may be set as the planned count number.

Next, assume that the MAX BET button 132 is operated after the planned number of medals to be counted has been set but before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). Figure 120 shows that the number of medals is updated (5 minus 3 to become 2) based on the operation of the MAX BET button 132 before the game information notification is sent, and the value on the medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is executed according to the planned count number, but in this example, the number of game medals, 2, is smaller than the planned count number of 50. In this case, the smaller of the planned count number or the number of game medals is set as the count number (step S3A03 in FIG. 102). In this example, the number of game medals, 2, is set as the count number, and the counting process for this is executed to update the number of game medals (subtract 2 from 2 to become 0), the planned count number is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is transmitted, a corresponding counting sound (counting sound B in this case) is output.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) of processing for the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval of execution of the counting process. For this reason, in the above example, when updating the game medal count display device 170, the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, which is operated after the operation of the counting button 171, is performed first. Note that in the above example, the number of game medals is lower than the number of game medals to be counted from the time of the long press operation of the counting button 171 (before the operation of the MAX BET button 132), but the number of game medals is further reduced by the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, and the subsequent counting process targets a value (number of game medals) different from the number of game medals to be counted. Note that, compared to the example in FIG. 105, the difference is that the value of the number of game medals at the start of the operation example is lower (5), the operation of the counting button 171 is performed in two consecutive types, a long press and a short press, and the counting process is performed with a value different from the number of game medals to be counted.

In the example of FIG. 121, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 3, and the same value is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

Then, from this state, the count button 171 is pressed briefly, and the planned number to be counted is set to 1. A count notification based on this planned number to be counted is performed after a communication cycle has elapsed. Therefore, no count notification is performed at this point. Figure 121 shows that the number of game medals and its display are not updated immediately after the count button 171 is operated.

Next, assume that the MAX BET button 132 is operated after the planned count number has been set but before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). Figure 121 shows that the number of game medals is updated (3 is subtracted to 0) based on the operation of the MAX BET button 132 before the game information notification is sent, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction.

Furthermore, suppose that following the operation of the MAX BET button 132, the counting button 171 is pressed a second time. FIG. 121 shows that this second operation of the counting button 171 is performed before the game information notification is sent, but because the number of game medals is 0, the number to be counted is not updated and remains at 1. Note that in this example, the number to be counted is not updated (added) when the number of game medals is 0, but the number to be counted may be updated regardless of the number of game medals. At this point, the timing for sending and receiving the counting notification has not yet arrived, so no counting notification is sent.

Next, assume that the settlement button 134 is operated before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). Figure 121 shows that the number of game medals is updated (3 is added from 0 to 3) based on the operation of the settlement button 134 after the game information notification is sent but before the counting notification is sent, and the value on the game medal number display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is performed according to the number of medals to be counted, the counted number (based on the number of medals to be counted) is sent to the lending machine 700, the number of game medals is updated (3 minus 1 to become 2), the number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is sent, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound A) is output.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) of processing for the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval of execution of the counting process. For this reason, in the above example, the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, which is operated after the operation of the counting button 171, is performed first in updating the game medal count display device 170. Then, because the game medal count becomes 0 due to this subtraction, the subsequent short press operation of the counting button 171 is not reflected in the planned counting number. Furthermore, in the above example, the game medal count is increased to 3 by the operation of the settlement button 134, and the counting process is executed according to the planned counting number. Compared to the example of FIG. 105, the difference is that the value of the game medal count at the start of the operation example is less (3), and although the counting process cannot be executed once due to the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, the counting process is executed by adding the game value in response to the operation of the settlement button 134 after that. In this example, too, the subtraction of the gaming value for the operation of the MAX BET button 132 and the addition of the gaming value for the operation of the settlement button 134 are performed first, since they are performed after the operation of the counting button 171.

In the example of FIG. 122, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 4, and the same value is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

Then, from this state, the count button 171 is pressed briefly, and the planned number to be counted is set to 1. A count notification based on this planned number to be counted is performed after a communication cycle has elapsed. Therefore, no count notification is performed at this point. Figure 122 shows that the number of game medals and its display are not updated immediately after the count button 171 is operated.

Next, assume that the MAX BET button 132 is operated after the planned number of medals to be counted has been set but before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). Figure 122 shows that the number of medals is updated (3 is subtracted from 4 to become 1) based on the operation of the MAX BET button 132 before the game information notification is sent, and the value on the medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction.

Furthermore, suppose that following the operation of the MAX BET button 132, a second short press of the counting button 171 is performed. Figure 122 shows that this second operation of the counting button 171 is performed before the game information notification is sent, and that the number of coins to be counted is increased by 1, setting it to 2. At this point, the timing for sending and receiving the counting notification has not yet arrived, so the counting notification is not sent.

Next, assume that the settlement button 134 is operated before the counting notification is sent (the counting process is executed). Figure 122 shows that the number of game medals is updated (3 is added from 1 to 4) based on the operation of the settlement button 134 after the game information notification is sent but before the counting notification is sent, and the value on the game medal number display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is performed according to the number of medals to be counted, the counted number (based on the number of medals to be counted) is sent to the lending machine 700, the number of game medals is updated (2 is subtracted from 4 to become 2), the number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is sent, a corresponding counting sound (counting sound A in this case) is output.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) of processing for the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval for executing the counting process. For this reason, in the above example, when updating the game medal count display device 170, the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, which was operated after the operation of the count button 171, is performed first. Then, when the number of game medals becomes the same value (1) as the number of game medals to be counted due to this subtraction, the count button 171 is pressed again for a short time, but this operation is reflected because the number of game medals is not 0 in this state. Furthermore, in the above example, the operation of the settlement button 134 adds 3 to the number of game medals, causing the number of game medals to exceed the number of game medals to be counted, and as a result, the counting process is performed according to the number of game medals to be counted. 105, the difference is that the number of game medals at the start of the operation example is less (4), and that although the game value is subtracted in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, the game value is added in response to the subsequent operation of the settlement button 134. Note that even in this example, the subtraction of the game value in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, which was operated after the operation of the counting button 171, and the addition of the game value in response to the operation of the settlement button 134 are performed first.

In the example of FIG. 123, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 50, and the same value is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

Then, from this state, the count button 171 is pressed briefly, and the planned number to be counted is set to 1. A count notification based on this planned number to be counted is performed after a communication cycle has elapsed. Therefore, no count notification is performed at this point. Figure 123 shows that the number of game medals and its display are not updated immediately after the count button 171 is operated.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is executed according to the number of medals to be counted, the counted number (based on the number of medals to be counted) is sent to the lending machine 700, the number of game medals is updated (50 minus 1 to become 49), the number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is sent, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound A) is output.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) of processing for the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the execution interval of the counting process, but if the MAX BET button 132 or the settlement button 134 is not operated as in this example, the counting process will be performed in response to the operation of the counting button 171. Note that compared to the example in Figure 105, it is different in that the MAX BET button 132 is not operated.

In the example of FIG. 124, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 50, and the same value is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

Then, from this state, the count button 171 is pressed briefly, and the planned count number is set to 1. A count notification based on this planned count number is executed after a communication cycle. Therefore, no count notification is made at this point. Furthermore, in this example, following the first operation of the count button 171, the count button 171 is pressed briefly a second time, and the planned count number is incremented by 1, becoming 2. At this point, the timing for sending and receiving the count notification has not yet arrived, so no count notification is made. Figure 124 shows that the number of game medals and its display are not updated immediately after these operations of the count button 171.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is performed according to the number of medals to be counted, the counted number (based on the number of medals to be counted) is sent to the lending machine 700, the number of game medals is updated (50 minus 2 to become 48), the number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is sent, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound A) is output.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) for processing the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval for executing the counting process, but if the MAX BET button 132 or the settlement button 134 is not operated as in this example, the counting process will be performed in response to the operation of the counting button 171. Note that compared to the example in FIG. 105, it is different in that the counting button 171 is pressed twice instead of once, and that the MAX BET button 132 is not pressed.

In the example of FIG. 125, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 1, and the same value is displayed on the game medal number display device 170.

Then, from this state, the count button 171 is pressed briefly, and the planned number to be counted is set to 1. A count notification based on this planned number to be counted is performed after a communication cycle has elapsed. Therefore, no count notification is performed at this point. Figure 125 shows that the number of game medals and its display are not updated immediately after the count button 171 is operated.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is executed according to the planned number of medals to be counted, the counted number (based on the planned number of medals to be counted) is sent to the lending machine 700, the number of game medals is updated (1 is subtracted to 0), the planned number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is sent, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound B) is output.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) between processing for the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval between execution of the counting process, but if the MAX BET button 132 or the settlement button 134 is not operated as in this example, the counting process will be carried out in response to the operation of the counting button 171. Note that compared to the example in FIG. 105, it differs in that the value of the number of game medals at the start of the operation example is lower (1) and that the MAX BET button 132 has not been operated.

In the example of FIG. 126, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 3, and the same value is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

Then, from this state, the count button 171 is pressed briefly, and the planned count number is set to 1. A count notification based on this planned count number is executed after a communication cycle. Therefore, no count notification is made at this point. Furthermore, in this example, following the first operation of the count button 171, the count button 171 is pressed briefly a second and a third time, and the planned count number is incremented by 1 twice, becoming 3. At this point, the timing for sending and receiving the count notification has not yet arrived, so no count notification is made. Figure 126 shows that the number of game medals and its display are not updated immediately after these operations of the count button 171.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is performed according to the number of medals to be counted, the counted number (based on the number of medals to be counted) is sent to the lending machine 700, the number of game medals is updated (3 is subtracted from 3 to become 0), the number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is sent, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound B) is output.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) for processing the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval for executing the counting process, but if the MAX BET button 132 or the settlement button 134 is not operated as in this example, the counting process will be performed in response to the operation of the counting button 171. Note that compared to the example in FIG. 105, the differences are that the number of game medals at the start of the operation example is lower (3), the counting button 171 is pressed three times instead of once, and the MAX BET button 132 is not pressed.

In the example of FIG. 127, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 4, and the same value is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

From this state, it is shown that a long press of the count button 171 has been detected, and the planned count number has been set to 50. A count notification based on this planned count number is executed after a communication cycle has elapsed. Therefore, no count notification is performed at this point. Figure 127 shows that the number of game medals and its display are not updated when this planned count number is set.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is executed according to the planned count number, but in this example, the planned count number of 50 is less than the planned count number of 4, which is the number of game medals. In this case, the smaller of the planned count number or the number of game medals is set as the count number (step S3A03 in FIG. 102). In this example, the number of game medals, 4, is set as the count number, and the counting process for this is executed, updating the number of game medals (subtracting 4 from 4 to make it 0), the planned count number is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is sent, a corresponding counting sound (counting sound B in this case) is output.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) for processing the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval for executing the counting process, but if the MAX BET button 132 or the settlement button 134 is not operated as in this example, the counting process will be performed in response to the operation of the counting button 171. Note that compared to the example in FIG. 105, it differs in that the value of the number of game medals at the start of the operation example is lower (4), the counting button 171 is pressed for a long time instead of a short time, and the MAX BET button 132 is not pressed.

In the example of FIG. 128, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 30, and the same value is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

From this state, it is shown that a long press of the count button 171 has been detected, and the planned count number has been set to 50. A count notification based on this planned count number is executed after waiting for the communication cycle. Therefore, no count notification is performed at this point. Figure 128 shows that the number of game medals and its display are not updated when this planned count number is set.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is executed according to the planned count number, but in this example, the planned count number of 50 is less than the number of game medals, which is 30. In this case, the smaller of the planned count number or the number of game medals is set as the count number (step S3A03 in FIG. 102). In this example, the number of game medals, 30, is set as the count number, and the counting process for this is executed to update the number of game medals (30 is subtracted from 30 to become 0), the planned count number is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is transmitted, a corresponding counting sound (counting sound C in this case) is output.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) for processing the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval for executing the counting process, but if the MAX BET button 132 or the settlement button 134 is not operated as in this example, the counting process will be performed in response to the operation of the counting button 171. Note that compared to the example in FIG. 105, it differs in that the value of the number of game medals at the start of the operation example is lower (30), the counting button 171 is pressed for a long time instead of a short time, and the MAX BET button 132 is not pressed.

In the example of FIG. 129, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 100, and the same value is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

From this state, it is shown that a long press of the count button 171 has been detected, and the planned count number has been set to 50. A count notification based on this planned count number is executed after waiting for the communication cycle. Therefore, no count notification is performed at this point. Figure 129 shows that the number of game medals and its display are not updated when this planned count number is set.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is performed according to the number of medals to be counted, the counted number (based on the number of medals to be counted) is sent to the lending machine 700, the number of game medals is updated (100 minus 50 to become 50), the number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is sent, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound D) is output.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) for processing the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval for executing the counting process, but if the MAX BET button 132 or the settlement button 134 is not operated as in this example, the counting process will be performed in response to the operation of the counting button 171. Compared to the example in FIG. 105, it differs in that the value of the number of game medals at the start of the operation example is higher (100), the counting button 171 is pressed for a long time instead of a short time, and the MAX BET button 132 is not pressed.

In the example of FIG. 130, after the count notification is sent and received, the number of game medals is 100, and the same value is displayed on the game medal count display device 170.

From this state, it is shown that a long press of the count button 171 has been detected, and the planned count number has been set to 50. A count notification based on this planned count number is executed after waiting for the communication cycle. Therefore, no count notification is performed at this point. Figure 130 shows that the number of game medals and its display are not updated when this planned count number is set.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is performed according to the number of medals to be counted, the counted number (based on the number of medals to be counted) is sent to the lending machine 700, the number of game medals is updated (100 minus 50 to become 50), the number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is sent, a corresponding counting sound (here, counting sound D) is output.

Furthermore, assume that the count button 171 is pressed briefly before the communication cycle for the next count notification. Figure 130 shows that the planned count number is set to 1 by operating the count button 171 before the next game information notification. The count notification based on this planned count number is executed after waiting for the communication cycle. Therefore, no count notification is performed at this point.

After that, when the timing for sending the counting notification arrives, the counting process is executed according to the number of medals to be counted, the counted number (based on the number of medals to be counted) is sent to the lending machine 700, the number of game medals is updated (50 minus 1 to become 49), the number of medals to be counted is cleared to 0, and the value on the game medal count display device 170 is updated to the value after the subtraction. Then, when a security command containing information about this counting process is sent, a corresponding counting sound (counting sound A in this case) is output. Note that in the example of Figure 130, counting sound D output in response to the previous counting process is continuing at this point, indicating that counting sound D and counting sound A overlap.

As mentioned above, the interval (time) for processing the MAX BET button 132 and the settlement button 134 is overwhelmingly shorter than the interval for executing the counting process, but if the MAX BET button 132 or the settlement button 134 is not operated as in this example, the counting process will be performed in response to the operation of the counting button 171. Compared to the example in FIG. 105, the differences are that the value of the number of game medals at the start of the operation example is higher (100), the counting button 171 is pressed for a long time instead of a short time, the counting button 171 is pressed for a short time after the first counting process is completed, and the MAX BET button 132 is not operated throughout these operations.

[Regarding the timing of transmitting and receiving operation information and the corresponding processing (2)]
The following describes the configuration related to the operation example described in [Regarding transmission/reception timing of operation information and corresponding processing (1)].

The medal count control unit 350 is configured to update the display of the medal count display device 170 based on the operation of the count button 171, and to update the display of the medal count display device 170 based on the operation of the MAX bet button 132.

In the above operation example, when the MAX BET button 132 is operated after the count button 171 is operated, the display update of the medal count display device 170 based on the operation of the MAX BET button 132 may be executed before the display update of the medal count display device 170 based on the operation of the count button 171 (for example, Figures 105 to 111).

The operation of the counting button 171 is a counting operation to perform a process (counting) to store the game value (number of game medals) in an external device (for example, a card inserted in the lending machine 700), and is assumed to occur when the player stops playing or when a part of the accumulated game value (number of game medals) is counted. On the other hand, the operation of the MAX BET button 132 is an insertion operation to set the game value required for the game, and is an operation by the player to play the game. If an insertion operation is performed after a counting operation, since the latter insertion operation is an operation for playing the game, the display update of the game value related to the insertion can be performed first to inform the player that the insertion operation was valid. In addition, by performing the display update of the insertion operation first, the player can be made aware of the game value that can be counted (held by the player). Note that even if a person who does not intend to play intentionally performs an insertion operation after a counting operation (misoperation, prank, etc.), the display update based on the insertion operation may be performed first.

In the above example, when a throw-in operation is performed after a counting operation, a longer communication period for the information on the counting operation (counting notification) is used to perform a display update based on the throw-in operation first, but this is not limited to the communication period. For example, when a throw-in operation is performed after a counting operation, if the medal count control unit 350 receives information based on the throw-in operation before transmitting information based on the counting operation to the external device (rental machine 700), the display update of the game value according to the throw-in operation may be performed before the display update of the game value according to the counting operation. Also, for example, the time required from the counting operation to the completion of the counting process may be longer than the time required from the throw-in operation to the completion of the throw-in process, and when a throw-in operation is performed after a counting operation, the display update of the game value according to the throw-in operation may be performed before the display update of the game value according to the counting operation. Also, for example, for a throw-in operation performed within a predetermined time after a counting operation, the display update of the throw-in operation may be performed first. Furthermore, if a configuration is used in which the communication period for information regarding counting operations (counting notifications) is longer than the communication period for information regarding input operations, as in the above example, the input process can be executed smoothly.

In the above example, we have explained the configuration for updating the display in response to the number of counted coins and the insertion operation, but for example, pachinko machines also have configurations that correspond to the above operations, such as counting operations and firing operations, and the present invention can also be applied to such gaming machines.

[Regarding the timing of transmitting and receiving operation information and the corresponding processing (3)]
The following describes the configuration related to the operation example described in [Regarding transmission/reception timing of operation information and corresponding processing (1)].

The medal count control unit 350 is configured to execute counting processing based on the operation of the count button 171, and execute insertion processing based on the operation of the MAX bet button 132.

In the above operation example, when the MAX bet button 132 is operated after the counting button 171 is operated, the input process based on the operation of the MAX bet button 132 is executed before the counting process based on the operation of the counting button 171, and as a result of this input process, the counting process based on the operation of the counting button 171 may not be executed (for example, Figures 113 and 115).

Operation of the counting button 171 is a counting operation to perform a process (counting) to store the game value (number of game medals) in an external device (for example, a card inserted into the lending machine 700), and is expected to occur when the player stops playing or when a portion of the accumulated game value (number of game medals) is to be counted. On the other hand, operation of the MAX BET button 132 is an insertion operation to set the game value required for playing, and is an operation by the player to play. If an insertion operation is performed after a counting operation, the later insertion operation is an operation to play the game, so by providing a case where the insertion process is performed without executing the counting process, it may be possible to prioritize the player's desire to play.

In the above example, when a slotting operation is performed after a counting operation, the counting process is not executed because the number of game medals falls below the planned number to be counted due to the slotting process that is performed before the counting process. However, this is not the only possible configuration for executing the slotting process but not the counting process when a slotting operation is performed after a counting operation. For example, when a slotting operation is performed after a counting operation and the slotting process is performed before the counting process, the counting process may not be executed regardless of the value of the number of game medals.

In the above example, it was explained that when an insert operation is performed after a counting operation, the counting process may not be executed because the insert process is performed before the counting process. As a configuration in which the insert operation is performed after a counting operation and the insert process is performed before the counting process, a configuration in which the communication cycle of the information for the counting operation (counting notification) is longer than the communication cycle of the information for the insert operation is used, but this is not limited to the configuration regarding the communication cycle. For example, when an insert operation is performed after a counting operation, if the medal count control unit 350 receives information based on the insert operation before transmitting information based on the counting operation to the external device (rental machine 700), the insert process may be performed before the counting process. Also, for example, the time required from the counting operation to the completion of the counting process may be longer than the time required from the insert operation to the completion of the insert process, and the insert process may be performed before the counting process when the insert operation is performed after the counting operation. Also, for example, if an input operation is performed within a specified time after a counting operation, the input process corresponding to this input operation may be performed before the counting process, and further, the counting process scheduled at this time may be canceled.

In the above example, a configuration was described in which the counting process is not executed if the number of game values is insufficient at the stage of transmission to the external device. However, if the counting process were executed, the game value would be improperly given to the player. For this reason, by configuring in such a way that the counting process is not executed as in the above example, the game value can be managed appropriately.

The medal count control unit 350 is configured to execute the settlement process based on the operation of the settlement button 134.

In the above operation example, when the MAX BET button 132 is operated after the counting button 171 is operated, the insertion process based on the operation of the MAX BET button 132 is executed before the counting process based on the operation of the counting button 171, and as a result of this insertion process, the counting process based on the operation of the counting button 171 is not executed, or the counting process is executed for fewer gaming media than the number planned to be counted (for example, Figures 113, 115, and 116). Furthermore, a case has been described in which the counting process is executed even in cases where the counting process would not have been executed without the operation of the settlement button 134 due to the settlement operation being executed (Figures 121 and 122).

Operation of the settlement button 134 is a settlement operation that performs a process (settlement) to return the game value set (bet) for use in the game to the stored game value (number of game medals), and is assumed to be a case in which the player stops playing. When performing an insertion operation after a counting operation, even if the counting process is not executed because the number of game medals falls below the planned number of medals due to the insertion process performed before the counting process, the settlement operation from that point is an operation to stop playing, so by executing the settlement process by this settlement operation, the counting process is executed as if the insertion process had not been executed, and the player's intention may be prioritized. Note that if the timing of operation of the settlement button 134 is after the timing of execution of the counting process in response to the operation of the counting button 171, the counting process will not be executed due to the insertion process (or the counting process will be executed for fewer game media than the planned number of medals), and the settlement process by the settlement button 134 will be executed after that.

In the above example, the settlement button 134 processes all of the medals that have been bet, but it may be configured such that, for example, one operation of the settlement button 134 settles one medal that has been bet.

In the above example, we have explained the configuration according to the number of counting coins and the insertion operation, but for example, pachinko machines also have configurations that correspond to the above operations, such as counting operations and firing operations, and the present invention can also be applied to such gaming machines.

[Regarding the timing of transmitting and receiving operation information and the corresponding processing (4)]
The following describes the configuration related to the operation example described in [Regarding transmission/reception timing of operation information and corresponding processing (1)].

When the count button 171 is operated, the medal count control unit 350 executes the counting process, and the first sub-control unit 400 is configured to output a counting sound in response to this.

In the above operation example, the same counting sound may be output even if the counting button 171 is operated differently (Fig. 104, Figs. 123 to 130). In this configuration, the counting sound is standardized, making it easier to know whether or not the counting process is being performed. Note that while the above operation example describes the counting sound, it is also possible to configure the output of a notification means related to counting, such as a display or lamp, that is not limited to sound, to be standardized for different operations.

In the above example, there is a communication cycle for information (counting notification) for the counting operation, and information for multiple counting operations during this cycle may be sent in one counting notification (for example, Figures 124 and 126). However, the configuration for outputting the same counting sound for different counting operations is not limited to the configuration related to the communication cycle. For example, if the medal count control unit 350 receives information based on another counting operation before transmitting information based on the counting operation to the external device (rental machine 700) after a counting operation is performed, the configuration may be such that information corresponding to the previous counting operation and the other counting operation is transmitted to the external device. Also, for example, if the first sub-control unit 400 receives new information for a counting operation while it is outputting a counting sound, the counting sound may not be output for the new counting sound depending on this information.

In the above example, counting sounds A to D (Figure 104) were used as the counting sounds, but the above configuration may include not only these counting sounds but also the counting completion sound. For example, even if the counting button 171 is operated differently, the sound (counting sound + counting completion sound) output at that time may be the same.

[Regarding the timing of transmitting and receiving operation information and the corresponding processing (5)]
The following describes the configuration related to the operation example described in [Regarding transmission/reception timing of operation information and corresponding processing (1)].

When the count button 171 is operated, the medal count control unit 350 executes the counting process, and the first sub-control unit 400 is configured to output a counting sound in response to this.

In the above operation example, even if the operation on the counting button 171 is the same, different counting sounds may be output (Fig. 104, Figs. 123 to 130). In this configuration, it may be possible to output a counting sound that corresponds to the game value after counting or the counted value. Note that while the above operation example describes counting sounds, it is also possible to configure the configuration so that different outputs are provided from the notification means in response to the same counting operation, such as a display or lamp, and is not limited to sounds.

In the above example, a configuration is adopted in which the counting sound is different depending on whether the number of game medals in the medal count control unit 350 is 0 or not (steps S5A05 and S5A08 in FIG. 103). However, the threshold value or reference value for making the counting sound different is not limited to this value. In addition, the value used as the judgment criterion is not limited to the number of game medals, but may be, for example, an advantageous period (number of games remaining in the AT), or may be different based on the game state rather than the value.

In the above example, counting sounds A to D (Figure 104) were used as the counting sounds, but the above configuration may include not only these counting sounds but also the counting completion sound. For example, even if the operation on the counting button 171 is the same, the sounds output at that time (counting sounds + counting completion sound) may be different.

[Display of the number of medals in an advantageous gaming state (1)]
In the following, examples of displays related to the number of medals in an advantageous gaming state will be described with reference to Figures 131 to 134, taking into account the configuration of the slot machine 100 described above. Note that in the following description, the configurations described in Figures 1 to 130 will be referred to as appropriate, and for any contradictory configurations, the words and symbols in this example will take precedence. Note that in the following example, the operation in the AT gaming state will be described as an example of an advantageous gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to the AT gaming state and can be applied to any state that is advantageous to the player, such as a bonus state.

Figures 131 to 134 show the operation of the MAX BET button 132, start lever 135, and stop buttons 137 to 139, and the changes in operation of the reels 110 to 112, effect image display device 157, game medal count display device 170, and speakers 272 and 277. Also shown at the bottom of the drawings are examples of the operation of the effect image display device 157, game medal count display device 170, and speakers 272 and 277 according to the timing during operation. In the AT game state, the number of payouts (the number of game medals won in the current game), the number of acquisitions (the number of game medals acquired in the advantageous game state (here, the AT game state)), the number of game medals (a value taking into consideration all of the following: the number of game medals currently possessed, the number of game values lent by the player by operating the loan button, the number of game values increased or decreased in sections other than advantageous sections such as the AT, and the number of game values increased or decreased in advantageous sections such as the AT), and the number of remaining Gs (the number of games remaining in the AT game state). The number of game medals is also displayed on the game medal number display device 170. In addition, the number of acquisitions may be the number of acquisitions carried over from the advantageous game state before the end when the advantageous game state is ended but the advantageous game state is returned to within a certain period (for example, within a relatively short number of games such as within 10 games or the period until the end of the presentation state set immediately after the end of the advantageous game state).

In this example, the number of coins paid out, the number of coins won, and the number of game medals played are displayed at the bottom of the display area of the effect image display device 157. The reason for this will be explained below. Some gaming machines have a eaves-like member placed above the display area of the effect image display device 157. When spectators in the hall's corridor look at the effect image display device 157, this eaves-like member makes it difficult to see the upper part of the display area of the effect image display device 157. Information such as payouts is important when choosing a gaming machine, and in order to make this information easy to see, this example is configured to display it at the bottom.

When a bet operation is accepted, the payout number is displayed as 0 (clear display), and when a combination with a payout is won during a game, the payout number is displayed after a count-up display. Here, the count-up display is a display that indicates that a payout has been made (or that a value has changed due to a payout), and in this example, a display is used in which the payout number is incremented by one until it reaches the incremented value. Note that the content of this count-up display may be, for example, a display that increments by a predetermined number (for example, by two) instead of a display that increments by one, or a display in which the changing value can be recognized during the count-up display, or a display in which the changing value is not displayed, and furthermore, such a display may be accompanied by an effect, and is not limited to this example. An example of a count-up display accompanied by an effect that makes it look like medals are being added is shown in the lower right of FIG. 133.

When a winning combination that will be paid out is achieved during play, the number of medals won is counted up and the number of medals paid out is added to the displayed value, and when the start lever 135 is operated, the number of medals bet is subtracted from the displayed value.

When a winning combination that will be paid out is achieved during play, the number of game medals is counted up and then the value added to the number of medals paid out is displayed. When a bet operation is accepted, the value subtracted from the number of game medals bet is displayed. When a settlement operation (bet cancellation) is accepted using the settlement button 134, the value added to the number of game medals bet is displayed.

Although not shown in the figure, unless otherwise specified, speakers 272 and 277 are assumed to output background music and sound effects as appropriate.

Figure 131 shows an example of the operation when no bet operation or start lever operation is performed while the count-up display is being executed in the AT gaming state.

In this example, the initial state is the state shown at timing (A1), specifically, the state in which the MAX BET button 132 has been pressed to start playing. At this timing, the LED of the MAX BET button 132 is turned off by the bet operation from a state in which a bet is possible (reels are stopped, a non-bet state, a state in which a game value of a specified value (one or more or three or more) or more is held, and the state in which the stop button has not been pressed since the previous game (a state in which a winning performance is not on hold)), and the payout number display is changed to 0 by this bet operation. The display of the number of medals won indicates that nine medals have been won up to the previous game. The display of the number of medals played indicates that the number of medals currently held is 200 medals. The display of the number of remaining Gs indicates that the number of remaining games in the AT game state is 48.

Next, at timing (A2), the state in which the start lever has been operated is shown. At this timing, the reels 110-112 start to spin due to the start lever operation, and the sequence of pushes to win a winning combination (in this example, left, middle, right) is displayed on the performance image display device 157, and the remaining number of Gs is shown to have been decremented by one. Additionally, the display of the number of coins won shows that the number of game medals bet has been decremented by three due to this lever operation, leaving it at six. Note that the display of the number of coins paid out and the display of the number of game medals remaining do not change at this timing.

Then, the reels are stopped in the order of left, center, and right, resulting in a winning combination and the payment of 11 medals. The timing (A3) shows the state at the time of this winning combination. At this timing, the reels 110 to 112 are all stopped, the effect image display device 157 displays a symbol corresponding to the winning combination (a bell symbol in this example), and the third stop operation (the right stop operation in this example) is released, and the number of medals paid out, the number of medals acquired, and the number of medals displayed are all shown as count-up (CU display in the drawing). Furthermore, the speakers 272 and 277 are shown to be outputting sound effects corresponding to the winning combination. It is also shown that the LED of the MAX BET button 132 is lit because a new bet operation is now possible at this timing.

Timing (A4) shows the state when the count-up display of the number of coins paid out, the number of coins acquired, and the number of game medals has ended. At this timing, it is shown that the number of coins paid out, the number of coins acquired, and the number of game medals have all become values (11 coins, 17 coins, and 211 coins, respectively) in which the number of coins paid out in that game (11 coins) has been added. In addition, it is shown that the sound effects corresponding to winning that were being output from speakers 272 and 277 have ended.

At timing (A5), the MAX BET button 132 is pressed to start the next game. At this timing, the LED of the MAX BET button 132 is turned off due to the betting operation. The number of coins paid out is now 0 due to this betting operation, and the number of medals played is now 208 coins, the value obtained by subtracting the number of coins bet (3 coins). The number of coins won and the number of remaining games do not change at this timing.

Next, at timing (A6), the state in which the start lever has been operated is shown. At this timing, the reels 110-112 start to spin due to the start lever operation, and the sequence of pushes to win a winning combination (in this example, the sequence center, left, right) is displayed on the performance image display device 157, and the display of the remaining number of Gs is shown to have been reduced by 1. Additionally, the display of the number of coins won shows that the number of game medals bet has been reduced by 3 due to this lever operation, leaving a total of 14 coins. Note that the display of the number of coins paid out and the display of the number of game medals remain unchanged at this timing.

Figure 132 shows an example of the operation when a bet operation is performed while the count-up display is being executed in the AT gaming state.

In this example, the operations up to timing (B2) in FIG. 132 are the same as those up to timing (A3) in FIG. 131. Note that timing (B1) in FIG. 132 corresponds to timing (A2) in FIG. 131, and timing (B2) in FIG. 132 corresponds to timing (A3) in FIG. 131. The operations thereafter are described below.

At timing (B3), the MAX BET button 132 is pressed to start the next game while the number of coins paid out, the number of coins won, and the number of game medals are being counted up. At this timing, the LED of the MAX BET button 132 is turned off due to the betting operation. The counting up of the number of coins paid out ends due to this betting operation, and the display becomes 0 coins. Meanwhile, the counting up of the number of coins won and the number of game medals, and the output of sound effects in response to winning by speakers 272, 277 continue as is.

Timing (B4) shows the state when the count-up display of the number of coins won and the number of game medals has ended. At this timing, it is shown that the value of the number of coins won has become a value (17 coins) to which the number of coins paid out in the previous game (11 coins) has been added. In addition, because the MAX BET button 132 has already been pressed to start the next game, it is shown that the value of the number of game medals has become a value (208) that reflects the addition of the number of coins paid out (11 coins) and the subtraction of the number of coins bet (3 coins). In addition, it is shown that the sound effects corresponding to winning that were being output from speakers 272 and 277 have ended.

Next, at timing (B5), the state in which the start lever has been operated is shown. At this timing, the reels 110-112 start to spin due to the start lever operation, and the sequence of pushes to win a winning combination (in this example, the order center, left, right) is displayed on the performance image display device 157, and the remaining number of Gs is shown to have been decremented by one. The display of the number of coins won also shows that the number of game medals bet has been decremented by three due to this lever operation, leaving the number of coins to be decremented to 14. Note that the display of the number of coins paid out and the display of the number of game medals remain unchanged at this timing. This state is the same as timing (A6) in FIG. 131.

Figure 133 shows an example of the operation that occurs when a bet operation and lever operation are performed while the count-up display is being executed in the AT gaming state.

In this example, the operations up to timing (C3) in FIG. 133 are the same as those up to timing (B3) in FIG. 132. Note that timings (C1) to (C3) in FIG. 133 correspond to timings (B1) to (B3) in FIG. 132. The operations thereafter are described below.

At timing (C4), the start lever is operated while the count-up display of the number of coins won and the number of medals played is being executed. At this timing, the start lever is operated, causing the reels 110-112 to start spinning, and the sequence of presses to win a winning combination (in this example, center, left, right) is displayed on the performance image display device 157, and the remaining number of Gs is shown to have been decremented by one. Meanwhile, the count-up display of the number of coins won and the number of medals played is shown to continue as is. It also shows that the sound effects corresponding to winning that were being output from the speakers 272, 277 have ended midway.

At timing (C5), the state when the count-up display of the number of coins won and the number of coins played is completed is shown. At this timing, the start lever has already been operated, so the value of the number of coins won is a value (14 coins) reflecting the addition of the number of coins paid out in the previous game (11 coins) and the subtraction of the number of coins bet (3 coins). Also, since the MAX BET button 132 has already been pressed to start the next game, the value of the number of coins played is a value (208 coins) reflecting the addition of the number of coins paid out (11 coins) and the subtraction of the number of coins bet (3 coins). This state is the same as timing (A6) in FIG. 131 and timing (B5) in FIG. 132.

Note that at timing (C4) in Figure 133, the reels 110 to 112 start spinning immediately after the start lever is operated. However, in reality, if the time required for one game (for example, the minimum game time of 4.1 seconds) has not elapsed, the reels 110 to 112 will not start spinning until this time has elapsed.

Figure 134 shows an example of the operation that occurs when power is interrupted and restored while the count-up display is being executed in the AT game mode.

In this example, the operations up to timing (D1) in FIG. 134 are the same as those up to timing (A3) in FIG. 131. Note that timing (D1) in FIG. 134 corresponds to timing (A3) in FIG. 131. The operations thereafter are described below.

Timing (D2) shows the state when a power outage occurs while the number of coins paid out, the number of coins won, and the number of medals played are being counted up, and while sound effects corresponding to winning are being output. At this timing, it shows that because there is no power being supplied, all displays, sound output, and lamps are not lit.

Timing (D3) shows the state when the power is restored. At this timing, the count-up display that was being performed when the power was cut off is not resumed, and the value after the count-up display is displayed. The LED of the MAX BET button 132 is turned on again. Note that the output of the sound effects corresponding to winning is not resumed. In this case, as with timing (A4) in FIG. 131, it is shown that the number of coins paid out, the number of coins won, and the number of game medals are all values (11 coins, 17 coins, and 211 coins, respectively) to which the number of coins paid out in the game (11 coins) has been added. Note that the output of the sound effects corresponding to winning may be resumed from the middle, or the sound effects may be output again (re-output) from the beginning.

At timing (D4), the MAX BET button 132 is pressed to start the next game. The state at this timing is the same as the state at timing (A5) in FIG. 131.

Then, at timing (D5), the start lever is operated. The state at this timing is the same as the state at timing (A6) in FIG. 131.

It is also possible to configure the device to display a demo display or return screen when power is restored, and to return to play by placing a bet or operating the start lever. For example, if the device is configured to return to play by placing a bet, the demo display or return screen is displayed on the performance image display device 157 after timing (D3), and the device goes to the state of timing (D4) by placing a bet. If the device is configured to return to play by operating the start lever, the demo display or return screen is displayed on the performance image display device 157 after timing (D3) and timing (D4), and the device goes to the state of timing (D5) by operating the start lever.

Although not shown in the figure, if a power interruption occurs after a bet operation is made while the count-up display of the number of paid out coins, number of acquired coins, and number of game medals is being executed and the count-up display is still being executed, and then when the power is restored, the count-up display does not resume, the number of paid out coins is displayed as 0, and the number of game medals is displayed as the value minus the bet amount (resulting in the state of FIG. 134 (D4)). If a power interruption occurs after a bet operation and a start lever operation are made while the count-up display of the number of paid out coins, number of acquired coins, and number of game medals is being executed and the count-up display is still being executed, and then when the power is restored, the count-up display does not resume, the number of paid out coins is displayed as 0, and the number of game medals and number of acquired coins are displayed as the value minus the bet amount (resulting in the state of FIG. 134 (D5)).

Below, we will explain the configurations that can be applied to the operations shown in Figures 131 to 134.

In Fig. 132 and Fig. 133, it was explained that when a bet operation or start lever operation is performed during the count-up display, the value displayed after the count-up display is subtracted by the number of bets (the number of game medals at timing (B4) in Fig. 132, and the number of coins won and the number of game medals at timing (C5) in Fig. 133). The content of the count-up display at this time is not limited to displaying the change from the value before the count-up display until it reaches a value obtained by adding the number of coins paid out, but may also display, for example, the change from the value before the count-up display until it reaches a value obtained by adding the number of coins paid out and subtracting the number of bets (for example, when the number of coins paid out is 11 and the number of bets is 3, the change from the value before the count-up display until it reaches a value increased by 8).

The configuration described above, which displays the change from the value before the count-up display until it reaches the value obtained by adding the number of coins paid out and subtracting the number of coins bet, is a configuration in which the reached value of the count-up display changes according to betting operations, etc. (betting operations and start lever operations in the case of the number of coins won). As an example, a situation will be described in which the number of coins paid out is 11 coins and the number of coins bet is 3 coins. In this case, the reached value of the count-up display is the value with 11 coins added if no betting operation, etc. is performed, and is changed to the value with 8 coins added if a betting operation, etc. is performed. Here, assume that a betting operation, etc. is performed when the count-up display shows a value with 9 coins added without a betting operation, etc. The reached value of the count-up display is changed to 8 coins by this betting operation, but this is problematic because the value already displayed exceeds the reached value after the change. In this case, the value before the change, which is the value with 11 coins added, may be displayed, and then 8 coins, which is the value obtained by subtracting 3 coins for the number of coins bet, may be displayed, or the reached value after the change may be displayed when a betting operation, etc. is performed.

In addition, in the case of a configuration that displays the change from the value before the count-up display to the value obtained by adding the number of coins paid out and subtracting the number of bets, since the increase is reduced by the amount of the subtraction of the number of bets, the time of the count-up display may be shortened by the time corresponding to this.

The count-up display is executed to give the impression of winning, and is not executed if no coins are paid out. Also, the count-down display (update display) is not executed when the displayed number (number of medals played, number of medals won, number of medals paid out, etc.) is subtracted (for example, when a bet is made and the number of medals displayed is subtracted by 3, the amount of the bet, no count-down display is executed, and the value after subtraction is displayed at the time the bet is made). Note that no count-up display is executed when the number of medals paid out is a small number, such as 1, and a count-up display may be executed when the number of medals paid out is a large number, such as 11.

The count-up display is displayed without being affected even if the front door 102 is open. In addition, even if the front door 102 is opened during the count-up display, the count-up display is not interrupted and is displayed as usual. In addition, a winning sound is output at the same time as the count-up display, but this winning sound continues to be output even if a bet operation is performed during the count-up display, and is terminated by operating the start lever during the count-up display. However, this is not limited to this, and the winning sound may be terminated when a bet operation is performed, or the winning sound may be configured to continue regardless of the operation. Note that, since the performance of the next game begins when the start lever is operated, it is possible to end the winning sound so as not to interfere with such a performance. Note that the winning sound (payout sound) may be configured not to be output unless the number of payouts is a certain number or more, for example, not to be output when a one-coin role is won and one coin is paid out. In addition, the sound may be changed according to the number of payouts and the winning role, and the winning sound may be longer when the number of payouts is large.

[Display of the number of medals in an advantageous gaming state (2)]
The operation of the slot machine 100 described above in [Display of the number of medals in an advantageous gaming state (1)] when the complete function is activated will be described below with reference to FIG. 135. Note that the terms described in FIG. 131 to FIG. 134 should be referred to above, and will not be described here. FIG. 135 shows the operation of the MAX BET button 132, the start lever 135, and the stop buttons 137 to 139, as well as the operation changes of the reels 110 to 112, the performance image display device 157, the gaming medal number display device 170, and the speakers 272 and 277, as in FIG. 131 to FIG. 134.

In this example, the reels 110 to 112 are rotated and stopped in the order of left, center, and right, resulting in a winning combination and the payout of 11 medals. The timing (E1) shows the state at the time of this winning combination. At this timing, the reels 110 to 112 are all stopped, the effect image display device 157 displays a symbol corresponding to the winning combination (a bell symbol in this example), and the third stop operation (a right stop operation in this example) is released, and the payout number, the acquired number, and the number of medals are all displayed as a count-up (CU display in the drawing). Furthermore, the speakers 272 and 277 are shown to be outputting sound effects corresponding to the winning combination. It is also shown that the LED of the MAX BET button 132 is lit because a new bet operation is now possible at this timing.

At timing (E2), the MAX BET button 132 is pressed to start the next game while the number of coins paid out, the number of coins won, and the number of game medals are being counted up. At this timing, the LED of the MAX BET button 132 is turned off due to the betting operation. The counting up of the number of coins paid out ends due to this betting operation, and the display becomes 0 coins. Meanwhile, the counting up of the number of coins won and the number of game medals, and the output of sound effects in response to winning by speakers 272, 277 are shown to continue as they are.

At timing (E3), the start lever is operated while the count-up display of the number of coins won and the number of medals played is being performed. At this timing, the start lever is operated, causing the reels 110-112 to start spinning, and the sequence of pushes required to win a winning combination (not shown in this example due to a miss) is displayed on the performance image display device 157, and the remaining number of Gs is shown to have been decremented by one. Meanwhile, the count-up display of the number of coins won and the number of medals played is shown to continue as is. It also shows that the sound effects corresponding to winning that were being output from the speakers 272, 277 have ended midway.

Timing (E4) shows the state when the count-up display of the number of coins won and the number of game medals has finished. At this timing, the start lever has already been operated, so the value of the number of coins won is a value (499 coins) that reflects the addition of the number of coins paid out in the previous game (11 coins) and the subtraction of the number of coins bet (3 coins). In addition, because the MAX BET button 132 has already been pressed to start the next game, the value of the number of game medals is a value (608 coins) that reflects the addition of the number of coins paid out (11 coins) and the subtraction of the number of coins bet (3 coins).

If we look at the change in the number of coins won, it goes from 491 coins to 502 coins (11 coins added by payout) to 499 coins (3 coins subtracted by betting). However, as in the example of FIG. 135, the value when the number of coins won is 502 coins may not be displayed due to betting and start lever operation during the count-up display. For this reason, this embodiment employs a configuration that notifies the player when the number of coins won exceeds 500 coins, regardless of the displayed value. At timing (E4), the words "OVER 500!" are displayed as an example of this notification. With this configuration, even if the number of coins won is displayed as less than 500 coins despite the number of coins temporarily exceeding 500 coins due to betting and start lever operation during the count-up display, the player can know that the number of coins won has exceeded 500 coins.

Unlike the above example, the notification may be made when the number of acquired coins displayed reaches 500. In this configuration, the words "OVER 500!" will not be displayed at timing (E4). Also, while the above example describes the operation at 500 coins, this number is not particularly limited, and the notification may be made when the number exceeds 1000 coins, or the words "OVER xx coins!" may be displayed at specified intervals (for example, every 250 coins).

Then, the AT game state continues, the number of coins won reaches 18994 coins, and a winning combination is achieved, resulting in the payment of 11 coins. The timing (E5) shows the state at the time of this winning combination. At this timing, all of the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and the image display device 157 displays a symbol corresponding to the winning combination (a bell symbol in this example), and the third stop operation (the right stop operation in this example) is released, and the number of coins paid out, the number of coins won, and the number of medals played are all displayed as a count-up (CU display in the drawing). Furthermore, the speakers 272 and 277 are shown to be outputting sound effects corresponding to the winning combination. At this timing, the complete function is activated as described below, making it impossible to perform a new bet operation, and the LED of the MAX BET button 132 remains off.

At timing (E6), it is shown that the complete function has been activated as the number of coins won has exceeded 19,000, resulting in a stalled state (a state in which game progress cannot be made). In this state, even during the count-up display, the displays on the performance image display device 157 (number of coins paid out, number of coins won, number of game medals, number of remaining Gs) are hidden, and a message is displayed indicating that the complete function has been activated. Additionally, the game medal count display device 170 displays the letter "C" indicating that the complete function has been activated.

[About reel performance]
The operation of the reel effect will be described below with reference to Fig. 136. In a slot machine, an effect using the reels may be executed when a game moves to an advantageous state. Fig. 136(a) is a timing chart showing an example of the operation of the reel effect.

In the example of FIG. 136(a), as it is confirmed that a transition to an advantageous state will occur, the reels 110 to 112 are rotated in the reverse direction and a victory effect is executed (from timing (F3) onwards). Specifically, a showdown effect is executed in the game immediately prior to the execution of this victory effect (up to timing (F1)). Then, at timing (F1) when this game ends, a new bet operation becomes possible, and the LED of the MAX BET button 132 turns on.

Furthermore, when the MAX BET button 132 is pressed to start the next game, the LED of the MAX BET button 132 goes out (timing (F2)). When the start lever is then operated, the reverse spin effect of the reels 110-112 and the victory effect by the effect image display device 157 begin (timing (F3)). When the reverse spin effect of the reels 110-112 ends, the normal spin of the reels 110-112 begins (timing (F4)), and it becomes possible to control the progress of the game (stop operation).

Figure 136 (b) shows an example in which the reel reverse spin effect is cancelled by pressing the MAX BET button 132. The operation in Figure 136 (b) is the same as that in Figure 136 (a) until halfway (up to timing (F3)). In this example, pressing the MAX BET button 132 in the middle of the reel reverse spin effect cancels the reverse spin effect and starts normal spinning (timing (F5)). At this time, the LED of the MAX BET button 132 is turned off, so the reverse spin effect is actively prevented from being cancelled, and the player can cancel the reverse spin effect according to his/her preference to ensure smooth game progress. Note that the target of cancellation is not limited to the reel effect, such as the effect by the effect image display device 157. In addition, for example, a part of the effect, such as an effect executed in parallel with the reel effect (a winning effect in this example), may be cancelled, or all of these effects may be cancelled.

[About the lighting of the bet button]
In the following, examples of the lighting state of the bet button will be described with reference to Figures 137 to 145, taking into account the configuration of the slot machine 100 described above. In the following description, the configuration described in Figures 1 to 134 will be referred to as appropriate, and the words and symbols in this example will take precedence over any contradictory configuration. In the following example, the operation when transitioning to a bonus state is described, but it is not limited to the bonus state and can be applied to any state that is advantageous to the player, such as an AT game state.

Figures 137 to 143 show the power supply, the MAX BET button 132, the MAX BET button LED (light emitting means inside the MAX BET button 132), the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112, the current number of game medals, the game status, and changes in the state of the effect image display device 157. Also shown at the bottom of the drawings are the appearance of the effect image display device 157 and the MAX BET button 132 according to the timing during operation.

Figure 137 shows an example of the operations from when an internal bonus is won to when the game transitions to the bonus state.

In this example, the initial state is the state shown at timing T1, and specifically, the state in which the game ends with an internal bonus win (bonus win state) and the number of game medals is 6. At timing T1, the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and neither the MAX BET button 132 nor the start lever 135 has been operated. The effect image display device 157 is executing an effect (bonus confirmation effect) that notifies the player that an internal bonus has been won. In addition, the MAX BET button LED is illuminated.

This MAX BET button LED lights up when the number of game medals is not 0, allowing the player to know that the number of game medals is not 0. It may also light up when a bet is possible (for example, when the number of game medals is 3 or more), allowing the player to know that game play can be started. When the MAX BET button is pressed, if the number of game medals is less than 3 (1 or 2), the maximum number that can be bet is bet (for example, if the number of game medals is 2, 2 medals are bet), and the LED lights up when the number of game medals is not 0, allowing the player to know that a bet is possible.

At the next timing T2, the MAX BET button 132 is operated, the MAX BET button LED goes out, and the number of game medals is reduced (bet) by three. At further timing T3, the start lever 135 is operated.

At timing T4, the start lever 135 is operated and the reels 110 to 112 begin to spin. In addition, the effect image display device 157 executes an effect (aim for 7 effect) that encourages the player to aim for the internally won bonus symbol.

At timing T5, the reels 110 to 112 are stopped by the stop operation. Here, it is assumed that the symbol combination corresponding to the internally won bonus at this timing T5 is displayed. When the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus is displayed, the next game will transition to the bonus state (timing T7), but before that (before the next game starts), the bonus type selection state is entered in which the performance content to be executed in the bonus state is selected with the stop button and is determined by operating the MAX BET button 132 for the next game. In this bonus type selection state, a bonus type selection screen is displayed, and it is displayed that the performance content can be determined by operating the MAX BET button 132. Then, the MAX BET button LED is illuminated to notify that the performance content can be determined by operating the MAX BET button 132.

Note that, although an example is described here in which a bonus is internally won and the bonus type selection state is entered, other situations in which the MAX BET button 132 is operated may also be used, such as the start of a performance when transitioning to an advantageous state (or a state that anticipates an advantageous state) such as an AT gaming state or a CZ (chance zone), or a continuous performance.

In addition, the bonus type selection screen only indicates that the effect can be determined by operating the MAX BET button 132, but it may also indicate that the effect can be selected by operating the STOP buttons 137 to 139.

At timing T6, the bonus type selection screen is displayed on the effect image display device 157 (bonus type selection display), and the MAX BET button LED is illuminated. Note that the illumination of the MAX BET button LED serves to prompt the player to perform an operation to determine the effect content to be executed in the bonus state.

At the next timing T7, the MAX BET button 132 is operated, the MAX BET button LED goes out, and three medals are subtracted (bet). In addition, an operation sound is output in response to this bet operation, and the content of the effect to be executed in the bonus state is determined in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132. The effect image display device 157 executes an effect indicating that the effect to be executed in the bonus state has been determined (bonus type determination). Note that, since this is an effect indicating that the effect has been determined, the display indicating that the effect content can be determined by operating the MAX BET button 132 may be erased. In addition, in this example, two actions are executed in response to one operation of the MAX BET button 132: a bet and the determination of the content of the effect to be executed in the bonus state. However, a configuration in which only the determination of the content of the effect to be executed in the bonus state is executed without executing a bet (a bet is executed by operating the MAX BET button 132 a second time) may also be adopted.

Figure 138 shows an example of the operations from when an internal bonus is won to when the game transitions to the bonus state.

In the example of FIG. 138, the operations performed from timing T1 to timing T6 are the same as those performed from timing T1 to timing T6 in FIG. 137. However, the difference is that the initial number of game medals is 3.

At timing T6 in FIG. 138, the bonus type selection screen is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the MAX BET button LED is illuminated. In this example, the number of game medals to start the next game is insufficient (the number of game medals is 0), so even if the MAX BET button 132 is operated, a bet cannot be made. However, since it is possible to determine the content of the effect to be executed in the bonus state by operating the MAX BET button 132, the MAX BET button LED is illuminated. In other words, the illumination of the MAX BET button LED here serves to prompt the operation to determine the content of the effect to be executed in the bonus state. Note that, although the case where the number of game medals is 3 is described at timing T6 in FIG. 137, even if the number of game medals is held as in FIG. 137, if the number of game medals becomes 0 by operating the counting button 171 or the settlement button (if it is no longer possible to bet even if the MAX BET button 132 is operated), the MAX BET button LED remains illuminated as in timing T6 in FIG. 138.

The illumination state of the MAX BET button 132 during the bonus type selection display may be the same as or different from the illumination state of the MAX BET button 132 during normal play. Also, when the bonus type selection display is on and the number of game medals is 0 (or the number of game medals required to start the next game is insufficient), the illumination state of the MAX BET button 132 may be different.

At the next timing T7, the MAX BET button 132 is operated, the MAX BET button LED goes out, and the content of the effect to be executed in the bonus state is decided, but the number of game medals is not subtracted (bet) because there is an insufficient number of game medals. At this time, the number of game medals is 0, but if the MAX BET button 132 is operated while the MAX BET button LED is lit, an operation sound is output. The effect image display device 157 executes an effect indicating that the effect to be executed in the bonus state has been decided (bonus type decision).

Figure 139 shows an example of the operation when a demo screen is displayed from the bonus type selection display.

In the example of Figure 139, the state of timing T6 in Figure 137 is shown at timing T1. Then, at timing T2, it is shown that after this state has been left (a certain period of time has passed), the demo screen is displayed (demo display). If the demo screen is displayed when the number of game medals is 1 or more (not 0), turning off the MAX BET button LED may lead to the mistaken belief that the number of game medals is 0. For this reason, the example of Figure 139 is configured so that the MAX BET button LED continues to emit light even when the demo screen is displayed.

At the next timing T3, the MAX BET button 132 is operated, the MAX BET button LED goes out, and three game medals are subtracted (bet). In addition, the operation of the MAX BET button 132 determines the content of the effect to be executed in the bonus state. The effect image display device 157 executes an effect indicating that the effect to be executed in the bonus state has been determined (bonus type determination).

Figure 140 shows an example of the operation when a demo screen is displayed from the bonus type selection display.

In the example of FIG. 140, the state of timing T6 in FIG. 138 is shown at timing T1. Then, at timing T2, it is shown that this state has been left (as time has passed) and the demo screen has been displayed (demo display). When the demo screen is displayed, the display indicating that the presentation content can be determined by operating the MAX BET button 132 is erased (it becomes unrecognizable). In other words, if the MAX BET button LED is turned on when the demo screen is displayed with 0 game medals (when the display indicating that the presentation content can be determined by operating the MAX BET button 132 is erased), it may be misleadingly believed that there are still game medals remaining (not 0). For this reason, in the example of FIG. 140, the MAX BET button LED is configured to be turned off when the demo screen is displayed.

At the next timing T3, although the MAX BET button LED is off, the MAX BET button 132 is operated to determine the content of the effect to be executed in the bonus state. Note that the number of game medals is insufficient, so it is not subtracted (betted). The effect image display device 157 executes an effect indicating that the effect to be executed in the bonus state has been determined (bonus type determination).

Figure 141 shows an example of the operation when the bonus type selection display is displayed.

In the example of FIG. 141, timing T1 shows the same state as timing T1 in FIG. 139. At timing T2, it is shown that the counting process is executed in response to the operation of the counting button 171, and the number of game medals has become 0. At this time, although the number of game medals is 0, as with timing T6 in FIG. 138, it is possible to determine the content of the performance to be executed in the bonus state by operating the MAX BET button 132, and therefore the MAX BET button LED is in an illuminated state. Note that in this example, the operation to set the number of game medals to 0 is explained as being the operation of the counting button 171, but it is not limited to the counting button 171, and may be the operation of another operating means such as a settlement button.

At timing T3, the lending process is executed in response to the operation of the lending button 707, and it is shown that the number of game medals has become 3. At this time, the MAX BET button LED continues to emit light.

At timing T4, the MAX BET button LED goes out in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, and three game medals are subtracted (bet). In addition, an operation sound is output in response to this bet operation, and the content of the effect to be executed in the bonus state is determined in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132. The effect image display device 157 executes an effect indicating that the effect to be executed in the bonus state has been determined (bonus type determination). Note that, since this is an effect indicating that the effect has been determined, the display indicating that the content of the effect can be determined by operating the MAX BET button 132 may be erased.

Figure 142 shows an example of the operation when a demo screen is displayed from the bonus type selection display.

In the example of FIG. 142, up to timings T1 and T2, the same flow as timings T1 and T2 in FIG. 139 is shown. Then, at timing T3, the counting process is executed in response to the operation of the counting button 171, and it is shown that the number of game medals has become 0. At this time, similar to timing T2 in FIG. 140, the MAX BET button LED goes out. Note that, although this example has been described as a case where the operation to set the number of game medals to 0 is the operation of the counting button 171, it is not limited to the counting button 171 and may be the operation of another operating means such as a settlement button.

At timing T4, the lending process is executed in response to the operation of the lending button 707, and it is shown that the number of game medals has become 3. At this time, the MAX BET button LED is illuminated.

At timing T5, the counting process is executed in response to the operation of the counting button 171, and it is shown that the number of game medals has become 0. At this time, as at timing T3, the MAX BET button LED is turned off.

The operation thereafter is the same as that from timing T2 onwards in FIG. 140. That is, at timing T6, although the MAX BET button LED is turned off, the content of the effect to be executed in the bonus state is decided in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132. Note that the number of game medals is insufficient, so it is not subtracted (betted). The effect image display device 157 executes an effect indicating that the effect to be executed in the bonus state has been decided (bonus type decision).

In addition, contrary to the example of FIG. 142, if the demo screen is displayed and the number of game medals is 0, and the loan button 707 is pressed, causing the number of game medals to become 1 or more, the MAX bet button LED may be made to emit light at the time when the number of game medals becomes 1 or more.

Figure 143 shows an example of the operation when a menu screen is displayed from the bonus type selection display.

The examples in Figures 137 to 142 explain a display in which the MAX BET button LED is lit regardless of the number of medals played (bonus type selection display), and the operation when this display is switched to a display in which the lighting mode of the MAX BET button LED differs depending on the number of medals played (demo display). Here, the display when the lighting mode of the MAX BET button LED differs depending on the number of medals played is not limited to the display of a demo screen. Figure 143 shows the operation when a menu screen display (menu display) is used as an example of such a display. The menu display is a display that allows the player to make various settings themselves, and is explained here as being operated using the cross button.

In the example of Figure 143, the state at timing T1 in Figure 140 is shown at timing T1. Then, at timing T2, it is shown that the state has changed from this state to the state where the menu screen is displayed (menu display) by operating the cross button. If the MAX BET button LED is turned on when the menu screen is displayed with 0 game medals remaining, this may lead to the player mistaking that there are still game medals remaining (not 0). For this reason, the example of Figure 143 is configured so that the MAX BET button LED is turned off when the menu screen is displayed.

At timing T3, it is shown that the menu screen has been closed by operating the cross button. This state returns to the same state as at timing T1, and the MAX BET button LED is illuminated.

At the next timing T4, the MAX BET button LED turns off in response to the operation of the MAX BET button 132, and the content of the effect to be executed in the bonus state is determined, but the number of game medals is not subtracted (bet) because there is an insufficient number of game medals. Note that the effect image display device 157 executes an effect indicating that the effect to be executed in the bonus state has been determined (bonus type determination).

Figure 144 shows an example of how the MAX BET button LED lights up during simulated play.

The state shown at timing T1 is when normal play has ended and the number of game medals is 6. At this timing T1, the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and neither the MAX BET button 132 nor the start lever 135 has been operated. The effect image display device 157 is executing an effect during play. Also, the MAX BET button LED is illuminated.

This MAX BET button LED lights up when the number of game medals is not 0, allowing the player to know that the number of game medals is not 0. It may also light up when a bet is possible (for example, when the number of game medals is 3 or more), allowing the player to know that game play can be started. When the MAX BET button is pressed, if the number of game medals is less than 3 (1 or 2), the maximum number that can be bet is bet (for example, if the number of game medals is 2, 2 medals are bet), and the LED lights up when the number of game medals is not 0, allowing the player to know that a bet is possible.

At the next timing T2, the MAX BET button 132 is operated, the MAX BET button LED goes out, and the number of game medals is reduced (bet) by 3.

At timing T3, the start lever 135 is operated, and the reels 110 to 112 then start to rotate. At this timing, a pseudo game state is set. In this state, a pseudo game is executed in which a predetermined pattern (in this example, a pattern in which watermelon patterns are aligned in the middle row) is pseudo-stopped by a stop operation as one of the reel effects. In the pseudo game, the pseudo stop caused by the stop operation gives the impression that a normal game is proceeding. Note that the pseudo stop is a state in which the reels do not stop completely and the patterns oscillate, and is different from the reel stop in a normal game. Note that, by operating the start lever 135 after the pseudo stop, the reels start to rotate and the game returns to normal, but the game may be returned to normal after a predetermined time has elapsed even if the start lever 135 is not operated, or the game may be returned to normal by operating the MAX BET button 132 and the start lever 135 (i.e., a normal game start operation).

Then, at timing T4, the reels 110 to 112 are in a pseudo-stop state due to the stop operation. In FIG. 144, it is shown that the reels 110 to 112 are swaying with a watermelon symbol aligned in the middle row due to the pseudo-stop at timing T4. From this pseudo-stop state, normal play can be carried out (return to the actual game state) by performing a start operation, and although no bet operation is required, the MAX BET button LED is illuminated to allow for a bet operation to be performed in the same way as normal game progress.

At timing T5, the counting process is executed in response to the operation of the counting button 171, and it is shown that the number of game medals has become 0. At this time, the number of game medals is 0 and no further betting operation is required (the operation has already been performed at timing T2), but the MAX BET button LED is in an illuminated state in consideration of the fact that a betting operation will be performed in the same manner as in normal game progress. Note that in this example, the operation of the counting button 171 is described as the operation to set the number of game medals to 0, but it is not limited to the counting button 171 and may be the operation of another operating means such as a settlement button.

At timing T6, the MAX BET button 132 is operated and the MAX BET button LED goes out. Note that since a bet operation has already been performed (operated at timing T2), the number of game medals remains at 0. Then, at timing T7, the start operation is performed, causing the reels 110-112 to start spinning, indicating that normal play will proceed (return to the main game state). Note that if the MAX BET button 132 is not operated at timing T6, the start operation at timing T7 will cause the MAX BET button LED to go out.

In this way, by emitting the MAX BET button LED in the pseudo stop state, the pseudo game can be made to look like the real game, allowing the player to play without feeling strange (at a good tempo). Note that there may be pseudo stop states in which the MAX BET button LED does not emit light.

In the examples of Figures 139 to 144, examples of demo display, menu display, and pseudo game display over time were described as displays in which the lighting state of the MAX BET button LED differs depending on the number of game medals. Other examples include the return screen after power recovery, the demo screen after power recovery, the setting screen, and error display. Figures 145 (a1) to (a3) show the operation from the state in which the bonus type selection display is being executed with the number of game medals being 0 (Figure 145 (a1), similar to timing T1 in Figure 140), to the state in which the power is cut off (Figure 145 (a2)), to the state in which the return screen is displayed after power recovery (Figure 145 (a3)). In this example, it is shown that the MAX BET button LED is turned off when the return screen is displayed (Figure 145 (a3)) because the number of game medals is 0. Note that when the return screen is displayed (Figure 145 (a3)), if the number of game medals is not 0, the MAX BET button LED will be in a light-emitting state. In addition, when a specific replay is stopped or when power is restored after a power outage during a simulated game, the MAX BET button LED may be configured to be turned off even if the number of game medals is equal to or greater than the specified number.

In the example of FIG. 145, when the return screen is displayed, operating the MAX BET button 132 determines the content of the presentation in the bonus state. Note that when the number of game medals is 0 (or when the number of game medals is insufficient to start playing), the content of the presentation in the bonus state is not determined even if the MAX BET button 132 is operated, and when the number of game medals is not 0 (or when the number of game medals is sufficient to start playing), the content of the presentation in the bonus state is determined by operating the MAX BET button 132. Also, when the return screen is displayed, operating the MAX BET button 132 may not determine the content of the presentation in the bonus state regardless of the number of game medals.

In the examples of Figures 139 to 143 and Figures 145(a1) to (a3), the case where the bonus type selection screen is switched to another screen (demo screen, menu screen, return screen after power recovery) is described, but for example, another screen may be superimposed on a part of the bonus type selection screen. In other words, at least a part of the display (bonus type selection display) that lights up the MAX BET button LED regardless of the number of game medals played may be made invisible by a display (demo display, etc.) in which the lighting state of the MAX BET button LED differs depending on the number of game medals played, or at least a part of the display that the performance content can be determined by operating the MAX BET button 132 may be made invisible by a display (demo display, etc.) in which the lighting state of the MAX BET button LED differs depending on the number of game medals played.

In addition, instead of the recovery screen, a demo screen may be displayed as the screen after power is restored. Even in this case, it is preferable to turn off the MAX BET button LED if the number of game medals is 0 (or if the number of game medals is insufficient to start playing) while the demo screen is displayed after power is restored.

In the examples of Figures 137 to 142, an example was described in which the bonus type selection screen is displayed as a display that lights up the MAX BET button LED regardless of the number of game medals played. Other examples include a presentation that allows the player to select a character, or a presentation that allows the player to select a mode or stage.

It can also be applied when you win a replay consisting of a specific symbol. This configuration will be explained below.

Figure 145 (b1) (b2) and Figure 145 (c1) (c2) each show an example of a case where a replay is won. The replay in Figure 145 (b2) is a replay in which the constituent symbols are easy for the player to understand, and the MAX BET button LED is not illuminated. In contrast, the replay in Figure 145 (c2) is a replay in which the constituent symbols are difficult for the player to understand, and the player may not realize that the game is possible even if the number of game medals is 0. For this reason, by making the MAX BET button LED illuminated regardless of the number of game medals, it is a replay that can make it look like the MAX BET button 132 for starting the game can be operated. In Figure 145 (c2), the MAX BET button LED is illuminated when the number of game medals is 10, but if this replay is won, the MAX BET button LED will be illuminated even if the number of game medals is 0. On the other hand, if the replay in Figure 145 (b2) is won, the MAX BET button LED will be turned off regardless of the number of game medals. For any replay, the next game (the granted replay) can be started by performing the start operation without placing a bet. If the start operation is performed without placing a bet, the MAX BET button LED, which is currently illuminated, will be turned off.

In Fig. 145(b2) and (c2), a presentation suggesting (informing) that a prize has been won in the replay is displayed. Here, in Fig. 145(c2), as in the examples of Figs. 140 to 143, when at least a part of the presentation suggesting (informing) that a prize has been won in the replay is obscured by a certain display (demo screen, menu screen, return screen, setting screen, error display, etc.), the MAX BET button LED is turned off when the number of game medals is 0 (or the number of game medals is insufficient to start playing) (it is not turned off when the number of game medals is not 0 (or the number of game medals is sufficient to start playing)).

The presentation suggesting (notifying) that a prize has been won (a winning prize) in the replay in FIG. 145(b2) may be different from the presentation suggesting (notifying) that a prize has been won (a winning prize) in the replay in FIG. 145(c2).

The examples described in Figures 137 to 145 are based on the premise that the MAX BET button LED is configured to light up when the number of game medals is not 0 (i.e., the LED lights up if the number of game medals is 1 or more), but it may also be applied to a configuration in which the LED lights up when a bet is possible (e.g., the number of game medals is 3 or more). In this case, for example, if a bet is not possible (e.g., the number of game medals is 2) at timing T2 in Figure 140 or timing T2 in Figure 143, the MAX BET button LED will be turned off.

[About operation when the complete function is activated]
An example of the operation of the complete function of the slot machine 100 will be described below with reference to Figures 146 to 149. In the following description, the configurations described in Figures 1 to 130 will be referred to as appropriate, and the words and symbols of this example will take precedence over any contradictory configurations.

Figure 146 shows the flow from starting a game to transitioning to the AT game state and ending the AT game state.

Figure 146(a) shows the state before the game starts. In this state, a demo effect is being executed on the effect image display device 157. Also, in this example, the player can use the cross button to make various settings related to the game, and the left edge of the screen in Figure 146(a) shows that a menu for these settings can be displayed using the cross button. Furthermore, the bottom right of the screen in Figure 146(a) shows that counting can be performed by operating the count button 171.

Let us assume that the game is started from the state shown in Fig. 146(a). Fig. 146(b) shows an example of the screen during the game. In this example, the number of games played is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen, and the number of coins paid out when a win is made is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen.

Let us assume that a bell has been won in the game of FIG. 146(b). In FIG. 146(c), a bell symbol indicating that a bell has been won is displayed in the center, and furthermore, the bottom left of the screen shows that 15 coins have been paid out. It is also shown that the winning sound (the words "jingling jingling" in the drawing) is being output from speakers 272, 277.

Let us assume that a certain number of games have passed since the game in Figure 146 (c), and the right to transition to the AT game state has been obtained. In Figure 146 (d), a presentation is executed suggesting that the right to transition to the AT game state has been obtained, and further in Figure 146 (e) it is shown that the AT game state will start from the next game. In this example, the number of games remaining in the AT game state is displayed in the upper left of the screen, the cumulative number of coins won, calculated by subtracting the number of coins bet from the number of coins paid out, is displayed in the upper right of the screen, and the number of coins paid out when a prize is won is displayed in the lower left of the screen.

In the next game in Figure 146(e) (49 games remaining), let's say that a bell is won. In Figure 146(f), a bell symbol is displayed on the right side, indicating that a bell has been won, and the bottom left of the screen shows that 15 coins have been paid out. It also shows that the winning sound (the words "jingling jingling" in the figure) is being output from speakers 272, 277.

Let us say that a certain number of games have passed since entering the AT gaming state, and the number of coins won has reached 2000. In this example, one of the conditions for ending the AT gaming state is that the number of coins won has reached 2400. Since interest in the game would decrease if the AT gaming state ended even though there are still games remaining, a configuration has been adopted in which the ending presentation begins on the condition that the number of coins won at the previous stage has been reached (in this example, 2000 coins). Figure 146 (g) shows that this ending presentation has begun. Note that the number of games remaining is not displayed during the ending presentation.

Next, the operation when the number of winning coins reaches 2400 will be described. In FIG. 146(h), the state in which the third stop operation is being pressed to win the bell symbol when the number of winning coins is 2390 is shown. In this state, the bell symbol is displayed on the left side. And in FIG. 146(i), the state when the stop button pressed in the third stop operation is released is shown. At this time, the display of the number of winning coins and the number of coins paid out are changing (indicated by a downward arrow in the drawing), but the payout number of 15 coins has been added to the current number of winning coins, and the result screen shows that the number of winning coins is finally 2405 coins. Also, it is shown that the winning sound (the letters "Jingling Jingling" in the drawing) is being output from the speakers 272 and 277. After that, in FIG. 146(j), it is shown that the number of winning coins and the number of coins paid out that were changing are displayed. Here, the AT game state ends and the game returns to the normal game state.

Suppose that after the AT gaming state has ended, counting has been performed by operating the counting button 171. In Figure 146 (k), an image indicating that counting is in progress is displayed. Also, it is shown that a counting sound (the words "Counting" in the drawing) is being output from speakers 272, 277. Furthermore, when counting of all game medal numbers has been completed, as shown in Figure 146 (l), a message is displayed indicating that counting has been completed and warning not to forget to remove the card that records the game medal number. Also, it is shown that a message is being output from speakers 272, 277 indicating that counting has been completed and warning not to forget to remove the card that records the game medal number.

Next, we will explain the operation when the complete function is activated in the AT game mode. Figure 147 shows the flow of operation when the complete function is activated in the AT game mode.

Figure 147 (a) shows the state when the player is in AT gaming mode (48 games remaining). As in the example of Figure 146, when the player is in AT gaming mode, the number of games remaining in the AT gaming mode is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen, the cumulative number of coins won (the number of coins paid out minus the number of coins bet) is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, and the number of coins paid out when a prize is won is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen.

After that, let's say that after a certain number of games have passed and several AT games have been played, the number of coins won reaches 18,503. An example of the state at this time is shown in Figure 147 (b). In this example, the condition for activating the complete function is that the number of coins won reaches 19,000 coins, and it is shown that when the number of coins won in the previous stage reaches 18,500 coins, the number of coins remaining to be won until the complete function is activated is displayed.

In Fig. 147(c), a bell symbol is displayed on the right side, indicating that the bell has been won, and furthermore, the bottom left of the screen shows that 15 coins have been paid out, meaning that the number of coins that can be won before the complete function is activated has decreased from the state in Fig. 147(b). It is also shown that the winning sound (the words "jingling jingling" are being played in the drawing) is being output from speakers 272, 277.

Next, the operation when the number of winning coins reaches 19,000 coins will be described. In FIG. 147(d), the state in which the third stop operation is being pressed to win the bell pattern when the number of winning coins is 18,995 coins is shown. In this state, the bell pattern is displayed on the right side. And in FIG. 147(e), the state when the stop button pressed in the third stop operation is released is shown. At this time, the display of the number of winning coins, the number of coins paid out, and the number of coins won until the complete function is activated is changing (in the drawing, the display is shown by a downward arrow), and it is shown that the winning sound (the characters "Jaraja..." in the drawing) is being output from the speakers 272 and 277. Then, after a predetermined time (for example, the processing time from the end of the game to the activation of the complete function) has elapsed, the number of winning coins reaches 19,000 coins, and the complete function is activated, and the previous display (including the display during the change of the number of winning coins, etc.) and sound effects are terminated halfway and switched to the display and output sound indicating that the complete function has been activated. In addition, taking into consideration that if the time between the end of a game and the activation of the complete function is too short, the game result cannot be grasped, the above-mentioned predetermined time may be set to a certain extent using a counter or the like. In FIG. 147(f), a message indicating that the complete function has been activated is displayed in the middle section of the performance image display device 157, and the model name (in this example, "L●X●X") is displayed below it. Note that the number of coins won, which was displayed in the upper right corner of the screen before the activation of the complete function, continues to be displayed as the final value (the value to which the number of coins paid out immediately before has been added) even after the activation of the complete function. It is also shown that the activation sound of the complete function is being output from speakers 272 and 277.

When the complete function is activated, it becomes impossible to continue playing the game, but counting using the count button 171 is possible. For this reason, this embodiment employs a configuration in which a message prompting the operation of the count button 171 is displayed after the complete function is activated. Figure 147 (g) shows that a message prompting the operation of the count button 171 is additionally displayed in the bottom right of the screen after a predetermined time has elapsed since the activation of the complete function. Note that this message prompting the operation of the count button 171 is displayed in the same manner as the one displayed during the demo performance in Figure 146 (a), but the message displayed while the complete function is activated and the message displayed while the complete function is not activated may be displayed in different manners.

Let us suppose that, after the game has ended due to the activation of the complete function, counting is performed by operating the counting button 171. In FIG. 146(k), an example was described in which an image and sound indicating that counting is in progress are output by operating the counting button 171, but as shown in FIG. 147(h), while the complete function is in operation, the message indicating that the complete function has been activated remains displayed even during counting, and no counting sound is output from speakers 272, 277, but the sound indicating that the complete function has been activated continues to be output. After that, even if counting is completed, as shown in FIG. 147(i), the image and sound indicating that the complete function has been activated continue to be output, and no counting completion sound is output.

In the above example, a configuration is adopted in which no counting notification or counting completion notification is made while the complete function is operating, but it is also possible to make a counting notification but not a counting completion notification, or not make a counting notification but make a counting completion notification. Furthermore, the notification mode may be one in which both a display and sound output are made, or one in which either a display or sound output is made.

Next, we will explain an example of the operation when the complete function is activated in the AT gaming state, which is different from the operation in Figure 147. Figure 148 is a diagram showing the flow of operation when the complete function is activated in the AT gaming state. Note that explanations of parts that are similar to the configuration explained in Figure 147 will be omitted.

Figure 148 (a) shows the state when the player is in AT gaming mode (48 games remaining). This example differs from the example in Figure 147 in that the number of medals played (the number of medals held) is displayed in the bottom left of the screen instead of the number of medals paid out when a prize is won.

After a certain number of games have passed and several AT games have been played, the number of medals won reaches 14,995, and the number of medals played reaches 15,000. Figure 148(b) shows an example of the state at this time. In this embodiment, if the number of medals exceeds the upper limit (16,383 medals, see Figure 50), an overflow occurs and the game cannot proceed. Therefore, as shown in Figure 148(b), if the number of medals exceeds 15,000, a message is displayed encouraging the player to count to bring the number of medals down to less than 15,000. Note that this message is no longer displayed if the number of medals falls below 15,000 through a counting operation or the like.

Next, the operation when the number of coins won reaches 19,000 will be described. Figure 148(c) shows a state in which the number of coins won is 18,995, the number of game medals played is 16,000, and the third stop operation is being pressed to win the bell symbol. This example differs from Figure 147(d) in that the same counting message as in Figure 148(b) is displayed.

And, in FIG. 148(d), the state when the stop button pressed in the third stop operation is released is shown. In this example, since the number of game medals exceeds 15,000, the message prompting the counting in FIG. 148(c) continues to be displayed. Also, the display of the number of acquired medals, the number of game medals, and the number of acquired medals until the complete function is activated is changing (downward arrow in the drawing), and it is shown that the winning sound (the character "Jaraja..." in the drawing) is being output from the speakers 272, 277. Then, after a predetermined time (for example, the processing time from the end of the game to the activation of the complete function) has elapsed, the number of acquired medals reaches 19,000, and the complete function is activated, and the previous performance, display, and sound are terminated halfway and switched to a display indicating that the complete function has been activated. Meanwhile, as for the sound, in addition to the winning sound being output, an operating sound indicating that the complete function has been activated is output. In addition, in consideration of the fact that if the time between the end of a game and the activation of the complete function is too short, the game result cannot be grasped, the above-mentioned predetermined time may be set to a certain extent using a counter or the like. In FIG. 148(e), a message indicating that the complete function has been activated and a message prompting the player to count are displayed in the middle of the performance image display device 157, and the model name (in this example, "L●X●X") is displayed below. Note that the number of medals won, which was displayed in the upper right corner of the screen before the activation of the complete function, is no longer displayed after the activation of the complete function, while the number of medals played in the lower left corner of the screen continues to be displayed even after the activation of the complete function. In addition, it is shown that the winning sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the activation sound of the complete function is also being output.

Suppose that after the game ends due to the activation of the complete function, the count button 171 is operated to perform counting. In FIG. 146(k), an example was described in which an image and sound indicating that counting is in progress are output by operating the count button 171, but as shown in FIG. 148(f), while the complete function is in operation, even if counting is in progress, a message indicating that the complete function has been activated and encouraging counting is still displayed, and no counting sound is output from the speakers 272 and 277, but an audio indicating that the complete function has been activated continues to be output. After that, when counting is completed, as shown in FIG. 148(g), the message encouraging counting displayed in FIG. 148(f) changes to a message warning the player not to forget to take out the cards. Also, although the count completion sound is not output, as shown in FIG. 148(g), an audio warning the player not to forget to take out the cards is output in addition to an audio indicating that the complete function has been activated.

When a configuration is adopted that allows the player to set various gameplay-related settings by himself, a menu for these settings may be displayed when the complete function is activated. Fig. 149(a) shows that a menu for these settings can be displayed using the cross button on the left side of the screen after a predetermined time has elapsed since the complete function was activated (e.g. Fig. 148(e)). Fig. 149(b) shows the state in which the menu display is being executed by operating the cross button. The items displayed in this example would be selectable if the complete function was not activated. However, in this case, the complete function is activated, so that items that cannot be set (items that are grayed out in the figure) cannot be selected. For example, the "character select" item is not selectable, and the item to "record and end" previous gameplay data is selectable.

In addition, in Fig. 147(b) and Fig. 148(c), a configuration was described in which the remaining number of coins to be acquired until the activation of the complete function is displayed, but the remaining number of coins may be displayed roughly using a certain range. Fig. 149(c) and Fig. 149(d) show an example in which the remaining number of coins to be acquired until the activation of the complete function is displayed using a range of 100 coins. In this example, when the number of coins acquired is 18590 (410 coins until the activation of the complete function), it is displayed as "500 to 401 coins" (Fig. 149(c)), and when the number of coins acquired is 18605 (395 coins until the activation of the complete function), it is displayed as "400 to 301 coins" (Fig. 149(d)). The display of the remaining number of coins to be acquired until the activation of the complete function is negative information for the player, and the above configuration reduces the frequency of updates to this display, making it difficult for the player's interest in the game to decrease.

In the examples of Figures 146 to 149 above, it is assumed that notification during counting in normal times (when the complete function is not activated) is provided by displaying the performance image display device 157 and outputting sound from the speakers 272, 277, but notification during counting may be provided by only displaying the display or by only outputting sound.

In the examples of Figures 146 to 149 above, it is assumed that when counting is completed under normal circumstances (when the complete function is not activated), a display is displayed by the performance image display device 157 and a sound is output by the speakers 272, 277, but the notification during counting may be configured to only display or only output sound. Also, in Figure 146(l), the notification when counting is completed includes a display and sound output to prevent the card from being left behind, but the display and sound output to prevent the card from being left behind may not be executed.

In the above Figures 148 (b) to (d), a configuration has been described in which a message encouraging counting is displayed on the performance image display device 157, but a configuration in which a sound encouraging counting is output from speakers 272, 277 may also be used, or a configuration in which both display and sound output are performed.

The winning sound (payout sound) in the configurations of Figures 146 to 149 above may be configured not to be output unless the number of payouts is a certain number, for example, if a 1-coin role is won and one coin is paid out. The sound may also be changed according to the number of coins paid out or the winning role, and the winning sound may be made longer when a large number of coins are paid out.

In the examples of Figures 146 to 149 above, if the AT state ends due to the fulfillment of the conditions for operating the complete function, a certain presentation (a winning presentation) is terminated midway (in Figure 147(e) the winning sound ends midway), and if the AT game state ends due to the fulfillment of an ending or AT end condition (for example, 0 games remaining, or the upper limit of the number of coins won in one AT game state has been reached), a certain presentation (a winning presentation) is not terminated midway (in Figure 146(i) the winning sound does not end midway). With this configuration, the player can be notified immediately that the complete function has been activated, and the player does not have excessive expectations.

In the examples of Figures 146 to 149 above, there are buttons that can be operated even when the complete function is activated (count button, menu button) and buttons that cannot be operated when the complete function is activated (MAX bet button, 1 bet button, start lever, each stop button, and independently provided volume/light change buttons), and the number of inoperable buttons is greater, and it is configured to be possible to start displaying buttons that can be operated after the complete function is activated (Figure 149 (b)). In this configuration, it is possible to make the player aware of buttons that can be operated after the complete function is activated. Note that, when displaying buttons that can be operated after the complete function is activated, for example, the same display mode may be used for buttons that can be operated before and after the complete function is activated, and different display modes may be used for buttons that cannot be operated, so that it is possible to distinguish whether they can be operated or not, or different display modes may be used for buttons that can be operated before and after the complete function is activated, and the same display mode may be used for buttons that cannot be operated.

<others>
In this embodiment, a slot machine 100 in which medals (coins) are used as a gaming medium is shown as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this and can be applied to slot machines in which gaming balls (e.g., pachinko balls) are used as a gaming medium, pachinko machines, arrange ball gaming machines, janball gaming machines, smart ball gaming machines, etc.

The slot machine may be a slot machine that does not use medals but only exchanges electronic data, such as one that runs on a mobile terminal (smartphone, game machine) or PC using a program that simulates operation based on the above configuration. In this case, the gaming medium includes electronic data equivalent to medals, and inserting the gaming medium includes inputting the electronic data from a specified external device (electronic storage device), and paying out the gaming medium includes outputting the electronic data to the specified external device (electronic storage device).

Although the present embodiment has been described above, it is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiment of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention, and such modifications and changes are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Furthermore, the actions and effects described in the embodiment of the invention are merely a list of the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in the embodiment of the present invention.

Note that the configuration of the display of the number of game medals in FIG. 148 is not limited to this example. For example, in a configuration having a main liquid crystal display and a sub-liquid crystal display, the number of game medals may be displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display, and the number of medals acquired and the number of medals remaining to be acquired until the complete function is activated may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display. In this example, when the complete function is activated, the number of medals acquired on the main liquid crystal display and the number of medals remaining to be acquired until the complete function is activated are erased, and the number of game medals displayed on the sub-liquid crystal display may remain. Alternatively, the number of game medals may be displayed on a specified display device other than the main liquid crystal display and the sub-liquid crystal display, and the display on the specified display device may remain displayed when the complete function is activated.

<<Configuration of the invention and correspondence between embodiments>>
Hereinafter, the configurations of the invention described above will be described with reference to corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (e.g., an input command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the input operation means (e.g., steps S1110 and S1111 of FIG. 17 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the requested number of game values to be inserted based on the reception of the insertion operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the requested number of game values (for example, step S4607 in FIG. 45 );
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 45 );
The gaming control means is a means for not transmitting the input operation information to the gaming value number control means based on an operation performed on the input operation means during the period from when the input operation information is transmitted to the gaming value number control means until the response information is received (for example, step S1112 in FIG. 17 waits until a response command is received; see the description of [Operation of the gaming control unit 302 due to an input operation (transmission of an input command, etc.)]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The input operation means includes a first input operation means (e.g., a 1-coin bet button 130) and a second input operation means (e.g., a MAX bet button 132) different from the first input operation means,
The game control means includes:
transmits, to the game value number control means, first input operation information (e.g., an input command for requesting input of one coin) as the input operation information based on an operation performed on the first input operation means;
a means for transmitting second input operation information (e.g., an input command for requesting the number of input coins to be three) different from the first input operation information as the input operation information to the game value number control means based on an operation being performed on the second input operation means;
The game value control means includes:
Based on the reception of the first insertion operation information, a first game value update process (for example, subtraction of the number of game medals for one requested insertion medal) is performed as the game value update process;
a means for performing a second game value update process (e.g., subtracting the number of game medals from the number of medals required to be inserted, 3 medals) different from the first game value update process as the game value update process based on reception of the second input operation information;
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means may not subtract the game value number stored in the game value number storage means based on the reception of the input operation information (for example, when the current bet number is the maximum bet number or the number of game medals is 0).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means for updating a communication number with the game value number control means based on the reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 of FIG. 19 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The apparatus includes a performance control means (e.g., a first sub-control unit 400) that controls the performance performed by the performance means (e.g., the performance image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, the various lamps 420),
The game control means includes:
Based on the reception of the response information during a predetermined period of time from the transmission of the input operation information, predetermined game information is output to the performance control means (for example, step S1114 in FIG. 17 );
This is a means for outputting the predetermined game information to the performance control means even if the response information is not received during the predetermined period of time after the input operation information is transmitted (for example, in FIG. 17, if a response command is not received, the response command is determined to be abnormal and step S1114 is executed).
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on the reception of the predetermined game information (see the description of [Operation of the game control unit 302 by a throw-in operation (transmission of a throw-in command, etc.)]),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (e.g., an input command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the input operation means (e.g., steps S1110 and S1111 of FIG. 17 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the requested number of game values to be inserted based on the reception of the insertion operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the requested number of game values (for example, step S4607 in FIG. 45 );
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 45 );
The gaming control means is a means for not transmitting the input operation information to the gaming value number control means based on an operation performed on the input operation means during the period from when the input operation information is transmitted to the gaming value number control means until the response information is received (for example, step S1112 in FIG. 17 waits until a response command is received; see the description of [Operation of the gaming control unit 302 due to an input operation (transmission of an input command, etc.)]).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (e.g., an input command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the input operation means (e.g., steps S1110 and S1111 of FIG. 17 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the requested number of game values to be inserted based on the reception of the insertion operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the requested number of game values (for example, step S4607 in FIG. 45 );
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 45 );
The gaming control means is a means that, when an operation is performed on the input operation means between the transmission of the input operation information to the gaming value number control means and the reception of the response information, does not transmit the input operation information to the gaming value number control means based on the operation (for example, step S1112 in FIG. 17 waits until a response command is received, see the description of [Operation of the gaming control unit 302 due to an input operation (transmission of an input command, etc.)]).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (e.g., an input command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the input operation means (e.g., steps S1110 and S1111 of FIG. 17 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the requested number of game values to be inserted based on the reception of the insertion operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the requested number of game values (for example, step S4607 in FIG. 45 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (e.g., steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a higher-level server) and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The game value control means includes:
transmitting first response information (for example, other than a re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is not being performed when the input operation information is received;
a means for transmitting second response information (e.g., a re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is being performed when the input operation information is received (see [Operation when an input command is received]);
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the game value number control means is a means having a transmission buffer for temporarily storing the game value number in order to transmit the game value number to the external processing device;
The game value control means includes:
The game value number to be transmitted to the external processing device in the counting process is stored in the transmission buffer, and the game value update process is performed (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ).
a means for storing the number of game values in the transmission buffer in the counting process and transmitting the second response information to the game control means when the input operation information is received during the game value update process;
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means for storing a part of the game value numbers stored in the game value number storage means in the transmission buffer in one of the counting processes, and for subtracting the part of the game value numbers from the game value numbers (for example, since the maximum number of counted medals in one count is 50 (step S4209 in FIG. 40), the part of the game value numbers may become a part of the game medal number).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting the first response information to the game control means when the input operation information is received during the period from the end of one counting process to the start of the next counting process (for example, since the input prohibition flag is turned off, the response command is other than a re-request);
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means capable of retransmitting the input operation information transmitted immediately before to the game value number control means when the second response information is received (for example, a judgment of No in step S1310 of FIG. 19 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means for not performing the retransmission after the number of retransmissions reaches the upper limit (for example, a judgment of No in step S1306 in FIG. 19) and invalidating the operation performed on the input operation means (for example, the response result is abnormal, so step S1113 in FIG. 17 is not executed),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means may not subtract the game value number stored in the game value number storage means based on the reception of the input operation information (for example, when the current bet number is the maximum bet number or the number of game medals is 0).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means for updating a communication number with the game value number control means based on receipt of the first response information (for example, step S1312 of FIG. 19 );
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (e.g., an input command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the input operation means (e.g., steps S1110 and S1111 of FIG. 17 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the requested number of game values to be inserted based on the reception of the insertion operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the requested number of game values (for example, step S4607 in FIG. 45 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to the game media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The game value control means includes:
transmitting first response information (for example, other than a re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is not being performed when the input operation information is received;
a means for transmitting second response information (e.g., a re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is being performed when the input operation information is received (see [Operation when an input command is received]);
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (e.g., an input command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the input operation means (e.g., steps S1110 and S1111 of FIG. 17 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the requested number of game values to be inserted based on the reception of the insertion operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the requested number of game values (for example, step S4607 in FIG. 45 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The game value control means includes:
transmitting first response information (for example, other than a re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is not being performed when the input operation information is received;
a means for transmitting second response information (e.g., a re-request) to the game control means based on the fact that the counting process is being performed when the input operation information is received (see [Operation when an input command is received]);
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (e.g., an input command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the input operation means (e.g., steps S1110 and S1111 of FIG. 17 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the requested number of game values to be inserted based on the reception of the insertion operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the requested number of game values (for example, step S4607 in FIG. 45 );
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 45 );
The game value control means includes:
When the requested number of inputs derived based on the received input operation information is equal to or less than the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means, the game value update process is executed to subtract the requested number of inputs from the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means, and the response information including information indicating that the requested number of inputs has been subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, in the modified examples of Figures 55 to 57, a Yes is determined in step S4604 of Figure 57, a value equal to the requested number of inputs is subtracted from the number of game medals, and this subtracted amount is returned in a response command).
When the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is greater than the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means, the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means is maintained, and the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained may be transmitted to the game control means (for example, the modified examples of Figures 55 to 57, the judgment of No in both steps S4604 and S4621 in Figure 57, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as the subtraction amount in the response command).
The game control means includes:
When the response information including the information indicating that the requested number of inputs has been subtracted is received, an input process is performed to input the gaming values of the requested number of inputs (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 55 ).
When the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained is received, the input process is not performed (for example, since 0 is added in step S1123 of FIG. 55, the input requested number is not input).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The input operation means includes a maximum number input operation means (e.g., a MAX BET button 132),
the game control means is a means capable of transmitting maximum number insertion operation information (e.g., an insertion command with the maximum bet number as the required number) which is the insertion operation information to the game value number control means based on an operation to the maximum number insertion operation means;
The game value number control means is a means for deriving the maximum number of game values that can be used in one game as the number of game value requests based on the reception of the maximum number input operation information (see [Modification for Input Operation]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The input operation information may include predetermined information (for example, information indicating that the input number limit flag is on).
When the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is greater than the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means and the input operation information includes the predetermined information, the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means is maintained, and the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained is transmitted to the game control means (for example, in the modified examples of Figures 55 to 57, the judgment of No in both steps S4604 and S4621 in Figure 57, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as the subtraction amount in the response command).
When the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is greater than the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means and the input operation information does not include the predetermined information, the input operation information executes the game value update process to set the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means to 0, and may transmit the response information including information indicating the number of game values before it became 0 to the game control means (for example, the modified example of FIG. 55 to FIG. 57, No is determined in step S4604 of FIG. 57, Yes is determined in S4621, the number of game medals is all subtracted (becomes 0), and the number of game medals before subtraction is returned as the subtraction amount in the response command).
The game control means includes:
When the response information including information indicating the number of play values before becoming 0 is received, the processing unit 100 performs an input process of inputting the number of play values (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 55 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The input operation means includes a minimum number input operation means (e.g., a 1 coin bet button 130),
the game control means is a means capable of transmitting the minimum number of insertion operation information (e.g., an insertion command with a required number of coins being 1) which is the insertion operation information to the game value number control means based on an operation being performed on the minimum number of insertion operation means;
the game value number control means is means for deriving a minimum number of game values usable in one game as the requested number of game values to be inserted based on reception of the minimum number insertion operation information;
The minimum number of input operation information does not include the predetermined information (for example, step S1122 of FIG. 55 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means for updating a communication number with the game value number control means based on the reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 of FIG. 19 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (e.g., an input command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the input operation means (e.g., steps S1110 and S1111 of FIG. 17 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the requested number of game values to be inserted based on the reception of the insertion operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the requested number of game values (for example, step S4607 in FIG. 45 );
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 45 );
The game value control means includes:
When the requested number of inputs derived based on the received input operation information is equal to or less than the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means, the game value update process is executed to subtract the requested number of inputs from the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means, and the response information including information indicating that the requested number of inputs has been subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, in the modified examples of Figures 55 to 57, a Yes is determined in step S4604 of Figure 57, a value equal to the requested number of inputs is subtracted from the number of game medals, and this subtracted amount is returned in a response command).
When the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is greater than the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means, the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means is maintained, and the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained may be transmitted to the game control means (for example, the modified examples of Figures 55 to 57, the judgment of No in both steps S4604 and S4621 in Figure 57, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as the subtraction amount in the response command).
The game control means includes:
When the response information including the information indicating that the requested number of inputs has been subtracted is received, an input process is performed to input the gaming values of the requested number of inputs (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 55 ).
When the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained is received, the input process is not performed (for example, since 0 is added in step S1123 of FIG. 55, the input requested number is not input).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting input operation information (e.g., an input command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the input operation means (e.g., steps S1110 and S1111 of FIG. 17 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the requested number of game values to be inserted based on the reception of the insertion operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the requested number of game values (for example, step S4607 in FIG. 45 );
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4608 in FIG. 45 );
The game value control means includes:
When the requested number of inputs derived based on the received input operation information is equal to or less than the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means, the game value update process is executed to subtract the requested number of inputs from the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means, and the response information including information indicating that the requested number of inputs has been subtracted is transmitted to the game control means (for example, in the modified examples of Figures 55 to 57, a Yes is determined in step S4604 of Figure 57, a value equal to the requested number of inputs is subtracted from the number of game medals, and this subtracted amount is returned in a response command).
When the number of input requests derived based on the received input operation information is greater than the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means, the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means is maintained, and the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained may be transmitted to the game control means (for example, the modified examples of Figures 55 to 57, the judgment of No in both steps S4604 and S4621 in Figure 57, the number of game medals is not subtracted (maintained), and 0 (maintained) is returned as the subtraction amount in the response command).
The game control means includes:
When the response information including the information indicating that the requested number of inputs has been subtracted is received, an input process is performed to input the gaming values of the requested number of inputs (for example, step S1123 in FIG. 55 ).
When the response information including information indicating that the number of game values has been maintained is received, the input process is not performed (for example, since 0 is added in step S1123 of FIG. 55, the input requested number is not input).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A settlement operation means (e.g., a settlement button 134);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of a game;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting settlement operation information (e.g., a settlement command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the settlement operation means (e.g., step S1204 and step S1205 in FIG. 18 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving a settlement number of the game value based on the reception of the settlement operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the settlement number (for example, step S4704 in FIG. 46 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (e.g., steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a higher-level server) and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The counting process may be performed in accordance with a communication cycle (e.g., 300 ms) between the game value control means and the external processing device.
The game value number control means is a means for, in a case where a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next or subsequent communication cycle after the first counting process has been executed, and, if the settlement operation information is received during the execution of the first counting process, making the settlement number derived based on the reception of the settlement operation information the target of the second counting process (for example, the number of game medals to be the target of the counting process is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 32 ), and the number of game medals added by a settlement command during the counting process becomes the target of the next or subsequent counting process).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first counting process and the second counting process are executed consecutively in accordance with the communication cycle;
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means may, when receiving the settlement operation information during the execution of the first counting process, sum up the settlement number derived based on the reception of the settlement operation information and the game value number stored in the game value number storage means, and subject the sum to the second counting process.
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means may not add the game value number stored in the game value number storage means based on the receipt of the settlement operation information (for example, when the current bet number is 0);
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4705 in FIG. 46 );
The game control means is a means for updating a communication number with the game value number control means based on the reception of the response information (for example, step S1312 of FIG. 19 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
A settlement operation means (e.g., a settlement button 134);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of a game;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting settlement operation information (e.g., a settlement command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the settlement operation means (e.g., step S1204 and step S1205 in FIG. 18 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving a settlement number of the game value based on the reception of the settlement operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the settlement number (for example, step S4704 in FIG. 46 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to the game media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The counting process may be performed in accordance with a communication cycle (e.g., 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the game media management device.
The game value number control means is a means for, in a case where a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next or subsequent communication cycle after the first counting process has been executed, and, if the settlement operation information is received during the execution of the first counting process, making the settlement number derived based on the reception of the settlement operation information the target of the second counting process (for example, the number of game medals to be the target of the counting process is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 32 ), and the number of game medals added by a settlement command during the counting process becomes the target of the next or subsequent counting process).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
A settlement operation means (e.g., a settlement button 134);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of a game;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting settlement operation information (e.g., a settlement command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the settlement operation means (e.g., step S1204 and step S1205 in FIG. 18 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving a settlement number of the game value based on the reception of the settlement operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the settlement number (for example, step S4704 in FIG. 46 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The counting process may be performed in accordance with a communication cycle (e.g., 300 ms) between the game value control means and the external processing device.
The game value number control means is a means for, in a case where a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next or subsequent communication cycle after the first counting process has been executed, and, if the settlement operation information is received during the execution of the first counting process, making the settlement number derived based on the reception of the settlement operation information the target of the second counting process (for example, the number of game medals to be the target of the counting process is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 32 ), and the number of game medals added by a settlement command during the counting process becomes the target of the next or subsequent counting process).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of a game;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (e.g., a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (e.g., steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, step S4B04 in FIG. 49 and FIG. 50 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (e.g., steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a higher-level server) and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The counting process may be performed in accordance with a communication cycle (e.g., 300 ms) between the game value control means and the external processing device.
The game value number control means is a means for, in a case where a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next or subsequent communication cycle after the first counting process has been executed, if the payout information is received during the execution of the first counting process, making the payout number derived based on the reception of the payout information the subject of the second counting process (for example, the number of game medals to be the subject of the counting process is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 32 ), and the number of game medals added by a payout command during the counting process becomes the subject of the next or subsequent counting process).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first counting process and the second counting process are executed consecutively in accordance with the communication cycle;
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means may, when receiving the payout information during the execution of the first counting process, sum up the payout number derived based on the reception of the payout information and the game value number stored in the game value number storage means, and subject the sum to the second counting process.
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The apparatus includes a performance control means (e.g., a first sub-control unit 400) that controls the performance performed by the performance means (e.g., the performance image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, the various lamps 420),
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game control means based on the game value update process (for example, step S4B05 of FIG. 50 );
The gaming control means outputs predetermined gaming information to the performance control means based on receiving the response information indicating that the gaming value update process based on the reception of the payout information has been normally completed (for example, step S1607 in FIG. 22 ).
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on the reception of the predetermined game information (see Operation of the game control unit 302 due to payout (transmission of a payout command, etc.)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of a game;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (e.g., a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (e.g., steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, step S4B04 in FIG. 49 and FIG. 50 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to the game media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The counting process may be performed in accordance with a communication cycle (e.g., 300 ms) between the game value number control means and the game media management device.
The game value number control means is a means for, in a case where a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next or subsequent communication cycle after the first counting process has been executed, if the payout information is received during the execution of the first counting process, making the payout number derived based on the reception of the payout information the target of the second counting process (for example, the number of game medals to be the target of the counting process is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 32 ), and the number of game medals added by a payout command during the counting process becomes the target of the next or subsequent counting process).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of a game;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (e.g., a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (e.g., steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, step S4B04 in FIG. 49 and FIG. 50 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The counting process may be performed in accordance with a communication cycle (e.g., 300 ms) between the game value control means and the external processing device.
The game value number control means is a means for, in a case where a second counting process, which is the counting process, is executed in the next or subsequent communication cycle after the first counting process has been executed, if the payout information is received during the execution of the first counting process, making the payout number derived based on the reception of the payout information the target of the second counting process (for example, the number of game medals to be the target of the counting process is determined before the counting process (step S3304 in FIG. 32 ), and the number of game medals added by a payout command during the counting process becomes the target of the next or subsequent counting process).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of loaned game values based on receipt of loan information from an external processing device (e.g., a loaner machine 700, a higher-level server) and performing the game value update process based on the number of loaned games (e.g., step S4003 in FIG. 38 and step S3714 in FIG. 36),
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the game value update process of adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means does not exceed a first value (for example, a judgment of Yes in step S4107 of FIG. 39 ),
The game value number control means is a means for maintaining the game value number stored in the game value number storage means when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds the first value (for example, see the judgment of No in step S4107 of FIG. 39, [Lending notification (periodically transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control unit 350)]),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) is provided for controlling the progress of a game,
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (e.g., a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (e.g., steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, step S4B04 in FIG. 49 and FIG. 50 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the game value update process of adding the payout number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means does not exceed a second value (for example, a judgment of Yes in step S4B03 of FIG. 50 ),
The game value number control means is a means for maintaining the game value number stored in the game value number storage means when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds the second value (for example, a judgment of No in step S4B03 of FIG. 50),
The second value is greater than the first value (e.g., step S4B03 in FIG. 50 and step S4107 in FIG. 39 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value control means is a means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the game value update process based on the receipt of the rental information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 35 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the game value control means is a means having a transmission buffer for temporarily storing the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device;
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the game value update process of storing the response information in the transmission buffer when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means does not exceed the first value, and adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means after the transmission buffer is cleared in response to the transmission of the response information to the external processing device (for example, a Yes judgment is made in step S3712 of FIG. 36 );
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means for updating a communication number with the external processing device (e.g., judging Yes in step S3703 of FIG. 36, step S3706) when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means does not exceed the first value, and transmitting the response information including the first information (e.g., the rental serial number received this time) to the external processing device,
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting the response information including the second information (e.g., the previously received lending serial number) to the external processing device without updating the communication number with the external processing device (e.g., No is determined in step S3703 of FIG. 36, and step S3706 is not executed) when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds the first value (see [Lending Receipt Result Response (Periodic Transmission from the Medal Count Control Unit 350 to the Lending Machine 700)]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first information is the latest communication number received from the external processing device,
The second information is a communication number received from the external processing device immediately before the latest communication number.
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of loans of the game value based on receipt of loan information from the game media management device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38 and step S3714 in FIG. 36 ),
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the game value update process of adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means does not exceed a first value (for example, a judgment of Yes in step S4107 of FIG. 39 ),
The game value number control means is a means for maintaining the game value number stored in the game value number storage means when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds the first value (for example, see the judgment of No in step S4107 of FIG. 39, [Lending notification (periodically transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control unit 350)]),
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of loaned game values based on receipt of loan information from the external processing device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loaned game values (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38 and step S3714 in FIG. 36 ),
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the game value update process of adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means does not exceed a first value (for example, a judgment of Yes in step S4107 of FIG. 39 ),
The game value number control means is a means for maintaining the game value number stored in the game value number storage means when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds the first value (for example, see the judgment of No in step S4107 of FIG. 39, [Lending notification (periodically transmitted from the lending machine 700 to the medal count control unit 350)]),
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of loaned game values based on receipt of loan information from an external processing device (e.g., a loaner machine 700, a higher-level server) and performing the game value update process based on the number of loaned games (e.g., step S4003 in FIG. 38 and step S3714 in FIG. 36),
The game value control means is a means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the game value update process based on the receipt of the rental information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 35 );
the game value control means is a means having a first transmission buffer for temporarily storing the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device;
The game value number control means is a means for storing the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the first transmission buffer is cleared in response to the transmission of the response information to the external processing device, executing the game value update process of adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means (for example, a judgment of Yes in step S3712 of FIG. 36 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
the game value number control means is a means having a second transmission buffer for temporarily storing the game value number in order to transmit the game value number to the external processing device;
The game value number control means is a means for storing the game value number to be transmitted to the external processing device in the counting process in the second transmission buffer and performing the game value update process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the game value update process of updating a communication number with the external processing device (e.g., judging Yes in step S4107 of FIG. 39 , step S3706) when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means does not exceed a predetermined value, transmitting the response information including first information (e.g., the currently received rental number) to the external processing device (e.g., step S3714 of FIG. 36 ) and adding the rental number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means,
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting the response information including second information (e.g., the previously received rental serial number) to the external processing device without updating the communication number with the external processing device (e.g., No judgment in step S3703 of FIG. 36, step S3706 is not executed) when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds the predetermined value (e.g., No judgment in step S4107 of FIG. 39), and maintaining the game value number stored in the game value number storage means (e.g., No judgment in step S3712 of FIG. 36, S3714 is not executed).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first information is the latest communication number received from the external processing device,
The second information is a communication number received from the external processing device immediately before the latest communication number.
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of loans of the game value based on receipt of loan information from the game media management device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38 and step S3714 in FIG. 36 ),
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting response information to the game media management device when performing the game value update process based on the receipt of the rental information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 35 );
the game value number control means is a means having a first transmission buffer for temporarily storing the response information in order to transmit the response information to the game media management device;
The game value number control means is a means for storing the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the first transmission buffer is cleared in response to the transmission of the response information to the game media management device, executing the game value update process of adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means (for example, a judgment of Yes in step S3712 of FIG. 36 ).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of loaned game values based on receipt of loan information from the external processing device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loaned game values (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38 and step S3714 in FIG. 36 ),
The game value control means is a means for transmitting response information to the external processing device when performing the game value update process based on the receipt of the rental information (for example, step S3713 in FIG. 35 );
the game value control means is a means having a first transmission buffer for temporarily storing the response information in order to transmit the response information to the external processing device;
The game value number control means is a means for storing the response information in the first transmission buffer, and after the first transmission buffer is cleared in response to the transmission of the response information to the external processing device, executing the game value update process of adding the loan number to the game value number stored in the game value number storage means (for example, a judgment of Yes in step S3712 of FIG. 36 ).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device (e.g., the lending machine 700, a higher-level server) and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (e.g., steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ),
The game value control means includes:
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation means was in a predetermined operation state, a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 40) can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values,
a means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 40 );
the counting promotion state is maintained while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the operation means is no longer in the predetermined operation state,
In the counting promotion state, a second value (e.g., 50, step S4209 in FIG. 40) larger than the first value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device as the gaming value number at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 300 ms).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The device includes a presentation means (e.g., a presentation image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for not performing a predetermined presentation when the first value is transmitted to the external processing device as the gaming value number, and for performing the predetermined presentation when the second value is transmitted to the external processing device as the gaming value number (e.g., FIG. 63),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means capable of setting the counting promotion state when a power outage occurs while the counting promotion state is set and the operation means is in the predetermined operation state after the power is restored (for example, FIG. 68(b)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means for not transmitting the game value number to the external processing device when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is eliminated after the counting promotion state is set (for example, determining No in step S4211 of FIG. 40, clearing the number of coins to be counted),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to the game media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 );
The game value control means includes:
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation means was in a predetermined operation state, a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 40) can be transmitted to the game media management device as the number of game values,
a means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 40 );
the counting promotion state is maintained while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is released,
In the counting promotion state, a second value (e.g., 50, step S4209 in FIG. 40) larger than the first value is repeatedly transmitted to the gaming media management device at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 300 ms) as the gaming value number.
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 );
The game value control means includes:
When the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled before a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation means was in a predetermined operation state, a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 40) can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values,
a means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 40 );
the counting promotion state is maintained while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is released,
In the counting promotion state, a second value (e.g., 50, step S4209 in FIG. 40) larger than the first value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device as the gaming value number at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 300 ms).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device (e.g., the lending machine 700, a higher-level server) and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (e.g., steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ),
The game value control means includes:
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation means was in a predetermined operation state, a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 58) can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values,
a means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 58 );
the counting promotion state is maintained while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the operation means is no longer in the predetermined operation state,
In the counting promotion state, a second value (e.g., 10, step S4222 in FIG. 58) larger than the first value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device as the gaming value number at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 300 ms),
The second value may increase according to the duration of the predetermined operating state (FIG. 67).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The second value may increase in accordance with the duration of the predetermined operating state (FIG. 67).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means capable of setting the counting promotion state and maximizing the degree of increase when a power outage occurs while the counting promotion state is set and the operation means is in the predetermined operation state after the power is restored (FIG. 68(b)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The device includes a presentation means (e.g., a presentation image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for not performing a predetermined presentation when the first value is transmitted to the external processing device as the gaming value number, and for performing the predetermined presentation when the second value is transmitted to the external processing device as the gaming value number (e.g., FIG. 63).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means for decreasing the degree of increase of the second value when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means does not exceed a predetermined value, compared with a case where the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds the predetermined value (FIG. 68(a)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to the game media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 );
The game value control means includes:
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation means was in a predetermined operation state, a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 58) can be transmitted to the game media management device as the number of game values,
a means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 58 );
the counting promotion state is maintained while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is released,
In the counting promotion state, a second value (e.g., 10, step S4222 in FIG. 58) larger than the first value is repeatedly transmitted to the gaming media management device at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 300 ms) as the gaming value number.
The second value may increase according to the duration of the predetermined operating state (FIG. 67).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 );
The game value control means includes:
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation means was in a predetermined operation state, a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 58) can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values,
a means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 58 );
the counting promotion state is maintained while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is released,
In the counting promotion state, a second value (e.g., 10, step S4222 in FIG. 58) larger than the first value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 300 ms) as the gaming value number.
The second value may increase according to the duration of the predetermined operating state (FIG. 67).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device (e.g., the lending machine 700, a higher-level server) and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (e.g., steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ),
The game value control means includes:
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before a first time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the operation means was in a predetermined operation state, a first value (e.g., 1, step S4212 in FIG. 59) can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values,
When the first time period has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, a second value (e.g., 50, step S4209 in FIG. 59) that is greater than the first value can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values;
a means for setting an automatic counting state when a second time (e.g., 2 seconds) longer than the first time has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (e.g., step S4234 in FIG. 59 );
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled, the second value is repeatedly transmitted as the game value number to the external processing device at a predetermined period (e.g., 300 ms) (e.g., Yes is determined in step S4235 of FIG. 59, and step S4209 is repeated, FIG. 69).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the automatic counting state is set, a notification means (e.g., a performance image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) is provided to give a predetermined notification (FIGS. 71 and 72).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The device includes a presentation means (e.g., a presentation image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for not performing a predetermined presentation when the first value is transmitted to the external processing device as the gaming value number, and for performing the predetermined presentation when the second value is transmitted to the external processing device as the gaming value number (e.g., FIG. 63).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means capable of setting the automatic counting state when a power outage occurs while the automatic counting state is set and the operation means is in the predetermined operation state when power is subsequently restored (for example, FIG. 70(b)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means for not setting the automatic counting state when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is smaller than a predetermined value (FIG. 70(a)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to the game media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 );
The game value control means includes:
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before a first time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the operation means entered a predetermined operation state, a first value (e.g., 1, step S4212 in FIG. 59) can be transmitted to the game media management device as the number of game values,
When the first time period has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, a second value (e.g., 50, step S4209 in FIG. 59) that is greater than the first value can be transmitted to the game media management device as the number of game values;
a means for setting an automatic counting state when a second time (e.g., 2 seconds) longer than the first time has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (e.g., step S4234 in FIG. 59 );
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled, the second value is repeatedly transmitted as the game value number to the game media management device at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 300 ms) (e.g., Yes is determined in step S4235 of FIG. 59, and step S4209 is repeated, FIG. 69).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 );
The game value control means includes:
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before a first time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the operation means was in a predetermined operation state, a first value (e.g., 1, step S4212 in FIG. 59) can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values,
When the first time period has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, a second value (e.g., 50, step S4209 in FIG. 59) that is greater than the first value can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values;
a means for setting an automatic counting state when a second time (e.g., 2 seconds) longer than the first time has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (e.g., step S4234 in FIG. 59 );
In the automatic counting state, even if the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled, the second value is repeatedly transmitted as the gaming value number to the external processing device at a predetermined period (e.g., 300 ms) (e.g., Yes is determined in step S4235 of FIG. 59, and step S4209 is repeated, FIG. 69).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device (e.g., the lending machine 700, a higher-level server) and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (e.g., steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ),
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the game value update process by treating the predetermined operation state as a valid operation state when the operation means is in a predetermined operation state when power is restored after a power outage occurs (for example, FIG. 73(a)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value control means includes:
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation means was in the predetermined operation state, a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 40) can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values,
a means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 40 );
the counting promotion state is maintained while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is released,
In the counting promotion state, a second value (e.g., 50, step S4209 in FIG. 40) larger than the first value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device as the gaming value number at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 300 ms),
The game value number control means is a means for determining the game value number to be transmitted to the external processing device based on the time during which the operation means has been in the predetermined operation state after the power is restored, regardless of the time during which the operation means has been in the predetermined operation state before the power is restored, when a power outage occurs and the operation means has been in the predetermined operation state since the power is restored thereafter (FIG. 73(a)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value control means includes:
When the predetermined operation state is canceled before a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation means was in the predetermined operation state, a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 40) can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values,
a means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 40 );
the counting promotion state is maintained while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the operation means is no longer in the predetermined operation state,
In the counting promotion state, a second value (e.g., 50, step S4209 in FIG. 40) larger than the first value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at a predetermined cycle (e.g., 300 ms) as the gaming value number.
The game value number control means is a means capable of setting the counting promotion state when a power outage occurs and the operation means is in the predetermined operation state after the power is restored (FIG. 73(a)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The device includes a presentation means (e.g., a presentation image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420) for not performing a predetermined presentation when the first value is transmitted to the external processing device as the gaming value number, and for performing the predetermined presentation when the second value is transmitted to the external processing device as the gaming value number (e.g., FIG. 63).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to the game media management device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the game value update process by treating the predetermined operation state as a valid operation state when the operation means is in a predetermined operation state when power is restored after a power outage occurs (for example, FIG. 73(a)).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
An operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the operation means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the game value update process by treating the predetermined operation state as a valid operation state when the operation means is in a predetermined operation state when power is restored after a power outage occurs (for example, FIG. 73(a)).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A display means (e.g., a game medal number display device 170, a performance image display device 157) capable of displaying the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The display means is a means capable of performing a change display in which the display value is gradually changed from a value before the update to a value after the update when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is updated (for example, FIG. 76 to FIG. 80 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The counting process is executed at a predetermined cycle (e.g., every 300 ms),
The display means is a means for performing the change display in a time shorter than the predetermined period (FIGS. 76 and 77).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
An operation means (e.g., a counting button 171) is provided,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the counting process based on an operation performed on the operation means,
The game value control means includes:
When the predetermined operation state of the operation means is canceled before a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation means was in a predetermined operation state, a first value (for example, 1, step S4212 in FIG. 40) can be transmitted to the external processing device as the number of game values,
a means for setting a counting promotion state when the predetermined time has elapsed while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state (for example, step S4208 in FIG. 40 );
the counting promotion state is maintained while the operation means is in the predetermined operation state, and is released when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is released,
In the counting promotion state, a second value (e.g., 50, step S4209 in FIG. 40) larger than the first value is repeatedly transmitted to the external processing device at the predetermined period,
The game value number control means is a means for not transmitting the game value number to the external processing device when the predetermined operation state of the operation means is eliminated after the counting promotion state is set (for example, determining No in step S4211 of FIG. 40, clearing the number of coins to be counted),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A display means (e.g., a game medal number display device 170, a performance image display device 157) capable of displaying the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The display means is a means capable of performing a change display in which the display value is gradually changed from a value before the update to a value after the update when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is updated (for example, FIG. 76 to FIG. 80 ).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A display means (e.g., a game medal number display device 170, a performance image display device 157) capable of displaying the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The display means is a means capable of performing a change display in which the display value is gradually changed from a value before the update to a value after the update when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is updated (for example, FIG. 76 to FIG. 80 ).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game control unit (e.g., a game control section 302) having a game information storage unit (e.g., a RAM 308) for storing game information related to the state of the game and controlling the progress of the game;
a game value information control means (e.g., a medal count control unit 350) that has a game value information storage means (e.g., a RAM 358) that stores game value information related to game values used in a game, and updates the game value information stored in the game value information storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, step S101 in FIG. 15 ),
The gaming value information control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means (for example, step S3005 in FIG. 28 );
The gaming control means is a means for not clearing the gaming information storage means when the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means (for example, the gaming control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even when it receives an error from the medal count control unit 350),
The gaming value information control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when the gaming control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means (for example, a determination of Yes in step S3016 of FIG. 28 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
An abnormality in the game control means is reported in priority to an abnormality in the game value information control means (see [Operation for Errors (Game Control Unit 302)]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The gaming value information control means is a means for transmitting information to the gaming control means at a predetermined cycle (for example, one command transmission at eight interrupts (0.745 ms x 8)),
The game control means is a means for determining a communication abnormality with the game value information control means based on the transmission status of information from the game value information control means (for example, see FIG. 24, [Operation for Error (Game Control Unit 302)]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The abnormality of the game control means is reported in priority to the communication abnormality (see [Operation for Errors (Game Control Unit 302)]),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means, the gaming value information control means may execute a process corresponding to the abnormality in the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means (for example, determining No in step S3007 of FIG. 28 or step S4407 of FIG. 42, or initializing chip information).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
A game control unit (e.g., a game control section 302) having a game information storage unit (e.g., a RAM 308) for storing game information related to the state of the game and controlling the progress of the game;
a game value information control means (e.g., a medal count control unit 350) that has a game value information storage means (e.g., a RAM 358) that stores game value information related to game values used in a game, and updates the game value information stored in the game value information storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, step S101 in FIG. 15 ),
The gaming value information control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means (for example, step S3005 in FIG. 28 );
The gaming control means is a means for not clearing the gaming information storage means when the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means (for example, the gaming control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even when it receives an error from the medal count control unit 350),
The gaming value information control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when the gaming control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means (for example, a determination of Yes in step S3016 of FIG. 28 ).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
A game control unit (e.g., a game control section 302) having a game information storage unit (e.g., a RAM 308) for storing game information related to the state of the game and controlling the progress of the game;
a game value information control means (e.g., a medal count control unit 350) that has a game value information storage means (e.g., a RAM 358) that stores game value information related to game values used in a game, and updates the game value information stored in the game value information storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the game information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, step S101 in FIG. 15 ),
The gaming value information control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means (for example, step S3005 in FIG. 28 );
The gaming control means is a means for not clearing the gaming information storage means when the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means (for example, the gaming control unit 302 does not clear the RAM 308 even when it receives an error from the medal count control unit 350),
The gaming value information control means is a means for clearing at least a part of the gaming value information storage means when the gaming control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means (for example, a determination of Yes in step S3016 of FIG. 28 ).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game control unit (e.g., a game control section 302) having a game information storage unit (e.g., a RAM 308) for storing game information related to the state of the game and controlling the progress of the game;
a game value information control means (e.g., a medal count control unit 350) that has a game value information storage means (e.g., a RAM 358) that stores game value information related to game values used in a game, and updates the game value information stored in the game value information storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The gaming control means is a means for executing a process for an abnormality when the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means (see [Operation for Errors (Gaming Control Unit 302)]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
An abnormality in the game control means is reported in priority to an abnormality in the game value information control means (see [Operation for Errors (Game Control Unit 302)]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means for determining whether a communication abnormality with the game value information control means exists based on a transmission status of information from the game value information control means (for example, FIG. 24 );
The abnormality of the game control means is reported in priority to the communication abnormality (see [Operation for Errors (Game Control Unit 302)]),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means, the gaming value information control means may execute a process corresponding to the abnormality in the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means (for example, determining No in step S3007 of FIG. 28 or step S4407 of FIG. 42, or initializing chip information).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
A game control unit (e.g., a game control section 302) having a game information storage unit (e.g., a RAM 308) for storing game information related to the state of the game and controlling the progress of the game;
a game value information control means (e.g., a medal count control unit 350) that has a game value information storage means (e.g., a RAM 358) that stores game value information related to game values used in a game, and updates the game value information stored in the game value information storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The gaming control means is a means for executing a process for an abnormality when the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means (see [Operation for Errors (Gaming Control Unit 302)]).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
A game control unit (e.g., a game control section 302) having a game information storage unit (e.g., a RAM 308) for storing game information related to the state of the game and controlling the progress of the game;
a game value information control means (e.g., a medal count control unit 350) that has a game value information storage means (e.g., a RAM 358) that stores game value information related to game values used in a game, and updates the game value information stored in the game value information storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The gaming control means is a means for executing a process for an abnormality when the gaming value information control means determines that there is an abnormality in the gaming value information stored in the gaming value information storage means (see [Operation for Errors (Gaming Control Unit 302)]).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of a game;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process to update the game value number stored in the game value number storage means by communicating bidirectionally with the game control means;
A performance control means (e.g., a first sub-control unit 400) that is in one-way communication with the game control means and controls the performance performed by the performance means (e.g., the performance image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420);
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (e.g., a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (e.g., steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, step S4B04 in FIG. 49 and FIG. 50 );
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting predetermined information to the game control means when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds a predetermined value upon receiving the payout information (for example, the determination in step S4B03 of FIG. 50 is No, and the response command is set to “abnormal”).
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 22 ),
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, see FIG. 81, [Operation of the game control unit 302 due to payout (transmission of a payout command, etc.)]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means capable of making the game unable to proceed when the predetermined information is received (for example, the determination in step S1606 of FIG. 22 is No and the process is repeated [operation of the game control unit 302 due to payout (transmission of a payout command, etc.)]),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A counting operation means (e.g., a counting button 171) is provided,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to an external processing device (e.g., the lending machine 700, a higher-level server) and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the counting operation means (e.g., steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ),
the presentation control means is means for causing the presentation means to perform background display,
The predetermined effect is an effect of flashing a display prompting the user to operate the counting operation means,
The display prompting the user to operate the counting operation means is displayed in front of the background display (e.g., FIG. 81(b) ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of a game;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process to update the game value number stored in the game value number storage means by communicating bidirectionally with the game control means;
A performance control means (e.g., a first sub-control unit 400) that is in one-way communication with the game control means and controls the performance performed by the performance means (e.g., the performance image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420);
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (e.g., a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (e.g., steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, step S4B04 in FIG. 49 and FIG. 50 );
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting predetermined information to the game control means when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds a predetermined value upon receiving the payout information (for example, the determination in step S4B03 of FIG. 50 is No, and the response command is set to “abnormal”).
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 22 ),
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, see FIG. 81, [Operation of the game control unit 302 due to payout (transmission of a payout command, etc.)]).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of a game;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process to update the game value number stored in the game value number storage means by communicating bidirectionally with the game control means;
A performance control means (e.g., a first sub-control unit 400) that is in one-way communication with the game control means and controls the performance performed by the performance means (e.g., the performance image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420);
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (e.g., a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (e.g., steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, step S4B04 in FIG. 49 and FIG. 50 );
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting predetermined information to the game control means when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds a predetermined value upon receiving the payout information (for example, the determination in step S4B03 of FIG. 50 is No, and the response command is set to “abnormal”).
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information (for example, step S1608 in FIG. 22 ),
The performance control means is a means for causing the performance means to perform a predetermined performance based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, see FIG. 81, [Operation of the game control unit 302 due to payout (transmission of a payout command, etc.)]).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of a game;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process to update the game value number stored in the game value number storage means by two-way communication with an external processing device (e.g., a rental machine 700, a higher-level server),
A presentation control means (e.g., a first sub-control unit 400) that is in one-way communication with the game control means and controls the presentation performed by the presentation means (e.g., the presentation image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, and various lamps 420);
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of loaned game values based on receipt of loan information from the external processing device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loaned game values (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38 and step S3714 in FIG. 36 ),
the game value number control means is means for transmitting predetermined information to the game control means when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds a predetermined value upon receiving the rental information;
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information,
The presentation control means is a means for causing the presentation means to perform a predetermined presentation based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in the modified example of FIG. 81, when the “number of game medals” exceeds the lending threshold due to lending, an upper limit exceeding lending error occurs).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The presentation control means is a means for causing the presentation means to perform a demo presentation when a game is not being played,
The predetermined effect is an effect that is performed even when the demo effect is being performed (for example, FIG. 84(a)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A counting operation means (e.g., a counting button 171) is provided,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the counting operation means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 );
the presentation control means is means for causing the presentation means to perform background display,
The predetermined effect is an effect of flashing a display prompting the operation of the counting operation means,
The display prompting the user to operate the counting operation means is displayed in front of the background display (e.g., FIG. 81(b) ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming medium management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of a game;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means by performing two-way communication with the game media management device;
A presentation control means (e.g., a first sub-control unit 400) that is in one-way communication with the game control means and controls the presentation performed by the presentation means (e.g., the presentation image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, and various lamps 420);
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of loans of the game value based on receipt of loan information from the game media management device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38 and step S3714 in FIG. 36 ),
the game value number control means is means for transmitting predetermined information to the game control means when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds a predetermined value upon receiving the rental information;
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information,
The presentation control means is a means for causing the presentation means to perform a predetermined presentation based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in the modified example of FIG. 81, when the “number of game medals” exceeds the lending threshold due to lending, an upper limit exceeding lending error occurs).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for controlling the progress of a game;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means by performing two-way communication with the external processing device;
A presentation control means (e.g., a first sub-control unit 400) that is in one-way communication with the game control means and controls the presentation performed by the presentation means (e.g., the presentation image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, and various lamps 420);
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the number of loaned game values based on receipt of loan information from the external processing device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loaned game values (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38 and step S3714 in FIG. 36 ),
the game value number control means is means for transmitting predetermined information to the game control means when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means exceeds a predetermined value upon receiving the rental information;
The game control means outputs predetermined game information to the performance control means based on receiving the predetermined information,
The presentation control means is a means for causing the presentation means to perform a predetermined presentation based on the reception of the predetermined game information (for example, in the modified example of FIG. 81, when the “number of game medals” exceeds the lending threshold due to lending, an upper limit exceeding lending error occurs).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) that performs two-way communication with an external processing device (e.g., a rental machine 700, a host server) and progresses a game,
The main control means is a means for performing a game value update process for updating the number of game values related to the game value used in the game (for example, updating the number of game medals),
The main control means is a means capable of deriving the number of loans of the gaming value based on receipt of loan information from the external processing device, and performing the gaming value update process based on the number of loans (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38 and step S3714 in FIG. 36 ),
The main control means is a means for determining whether a communication abnormality occurs with the external processing device based on a state of a predetermined signal (e.g., a VL signal) transmitted from the external processing device,
The main control means is a means capable of making it impossible to proceed with the game when it is determined that the communication abnormality has occurred (for example, a determination of No in step S1007 of FIG. 16 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A performance control means (e.g., a first sub-control unit 400) is provided that is in one-way communication with the main control means and controls the performance performed by the performance means (e.g., the performance image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
The performance control means is a means for not notifying the performance means of the communication abnormality when the communication abnormality is determined (for example, not executing an error notification for a VL signal abnormality),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A performance control means (e.g., a first sub-control unit 400) is provided that is in one-way communication with the main control means and controls the performance performed by the performance means (e.g., the performance image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
A counting operation means (e.g., a counting button 171) is provided,
The main control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting the game value number to the external processing device and a process of updating the game value by subtracting the game value number based on an operation performed on the counting operation means (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 );
the presentation control means is means for causing the presentation means to perform background display,
the performance control means is means for causing the performance means to perform a performance of flashing a display prompting an operation of the counting operation means,
The display prompting the user to operate the counting operation means is displayed in front of the background display (e.g., FIG. 81(b) ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
A gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) connected to a gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100),
The gaming machine includes:
A gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) that performs two-way communication with the gaming medium management device and progresses a game,
The main control means is a means for performing a game value update process for updating the number of game values related to the game value used in the game (for example, updating the number of game medals),
The main control means is a means capable of deriving the number of loans of the game value based on receipt of loan information from the game media management device, and performing the game value update process based on the number of loans (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38 and step S3714 in FIG. 36 ),
The main control means is a means for determining a communication abnormality with the game media management device based on a state of a predetermined signal (e.g., a VL signal) transmitted from the game media management device,
The main control means is a means capable of making it impossible to proceed with the game when it is determined that the communication abnormality has occurred (for example, a determination of No in step S1007 of FIG. 16 ).
The present invention describes a game media management device.

Also,
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 100);
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming system (for example, a gaming system S) including at least
The gaming machine includes:
A gaming machine equipped with a main control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) that performs two-way communication with the external processing device and progresses a game,
The main control means is a means for performing a game value update process for updating the number of game values related to the game value used in the game (for example, updating the number of game medals),
The main control means is a means capable of deriving the number of loans of the gaming value based on receipt of loan information from the external processing device, and performing the gaming value update process based on the number of loans (for example, step S4003 in FIG. 38 and step S3714 in FIG. 36 ),
The main control means is a means for determining whether a communication abnormality occurs with the external processing device based on a state of a predetermined signal (e.g., a VL signal) transmitted from the external processing device,
The main control means is a means capable of making it impossible to proceed with the game when it is determined that the communication abnormality has occurred (for example, a determination of No in step S1007 of FIG. 16 ).
A gaming system is described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A counting operation means (e.g., a counting button 171);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A performance control means (e.g., the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the performance performed by the performance means (e.g., the performance image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, the various lamps 420),
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (e.g., steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number based on an operation of the counting operation means;
The game control means is a means capable of setting a first game state (e.g., an AT state) in which an auxiliary function advantageous to a player can be activated,
the game value number control means is a means capable of executing the counting process based on an operation of the counting operation means even in the first gaming state;
The performance control means is a means capable of executing a counting performance (e.g., FIG. 63) in association with the counting process,
The increase in the number of game values per unit game in the first game state when the game is played according to the activated auxiliary function is smaller than the decrease in the number of game values per unit game due to the counting process (see the configuration in [Regarding the configuration related to the difference between payout and counting process] where the increase in the number of game medals per unit game in an advantageous game state is smaller than the decrease in the number of game medals per unit game due to the counting process).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The counting performance is a performance in which an end condition different from the end of the counting process is set (see the configuration in [Regarding the configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting process], in which the counting performance may end even while the counting process is continuing).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The performance control means is a means capable of executing a specific performance,
The performance control means is a means for not executing the specific performance during execution of the counting performance.
The present invention describes a gaming machine that is characterized by the above (see the configuration that does not execute an effect that requires some kind of operation in the description of [Configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The specific effect is an effect that requires a player's operation.
The present invention describes a gaming machine that is characterized by the above (see the configuration that does not execute an effect that requires some kind of operation in the description of [Configuration regarding the difference between payout and counting processing]).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The counting effect is an effect whose content changes depending on the amount of subtraction of the game value number by the counting process.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description of the configuration relating to the difference between payout and counting processing, in which the content of the counting presentation changes depending on the number of gaming medals counted).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The performance control means is a means for restarting the previous counting performance from the middle when a new counting process is started within a predetermined time after the counting performance is ended midway due to the end of the counting process.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description of the configuration relating to the difference between payout and counting process, in which even after a counting performance ends midway, the previous counting performance (a counting performance that ended midway) is resumed from the midway).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The performance control means is a means for continuing the counting performance for a predetermined time after the counting process is completed, and for continuing to execute the counting performance when a new counting process is started while the counting performance is continuing.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description of the configuration relating to the difference between payout and counting process, in which the counting performance continues even after the counting process is completed, and when a new counting process is started, the ongoing counting performance is maintained as is).

Also,
The present invention also describes a gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) that is connected to the gaming machine described above.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132) used to set the bet amount;
A settlement operation means (e.g., a settlement button 134);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting first information regarding settlement (e.g., a settlement command) to the game value number control means based on an operation being performed on the settlement operation means;
the game value number control means is means for deriving a settlement number of the game value based on reception of the first information, performing the game value update process based on the settlement number, and then not transmitting response information to the first information to the game control means;
The game control means is a means capable of setting the bet amount to 0 based on an operation being performed on the settlement operation means.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see configuration that does not wait for a response command to a settlement command (no response command used)).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the game control means is a means for transmitting second information regarding insertion (e.g., an insertion command) to the game value number control means based on an operation being performed on the insertion operation means;
the game value number control means is means capable of deriving a requested number of game values based on reception of the second information, performing the game value update process based on the requested number of game values, and then transmitting response information to the second information to the game control means;
The game control means is a means capable of setting the bet amount based on reception of response information to the second information.
The present invention describes a gaming machine that is characterized by the above-mentioned (for insert commands, see the configuration using response commands).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The game value number control means is a means for, when there is an increase in the number of game values while the counting process is continuing, transmitting the number of game values excluding the increased number of game values to the external processing device, and then transmitting the increased number of game values to the external processing device (see the configuration for the increase in the number of game medals while the counting process is continuing in the description of [Configuration for payout and settlement operation during counting process]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
The present invention also describes a gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) that is connected to the gaming machine described above.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The game value number control means is a means for, when there is an increase in the number of game values while the counting process is continuing, transmitting the number of game values excluding the increased number of game values to the external processing device, and then transmitting the increased number of game values to the external processing device (see the configuration for the increase in the number of game medals while the counting process is continuing in the description of [Configuration for payout and settlement operation during counting process]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means for reflecting the increase in the game value number while the counting process is continuing after the state in which the counting process is continuing ends before the game value number becomes 0 (see the operation when the count button 171 is released before the game medal number becomes 0 in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operation during counting process]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A settlement operation means (e.g., a settlement button 134);
Equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting settlement operation information (e.g., a settlement command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the settlement operation means (e.g., step S1204 and step S1205 in FIG. 18 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving a settlement number of the game value based on the reception of the settlement operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the settlement number (for example, step S4704 in FIG. 46 );
The increase is based on the settlement number (see the configuration for either the payout or the settlement operation as the increase in the number of game medals in the description of [Regarding the configuration for the payout and settlement operation during the counting process]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (e.g., a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (e.g., steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, step S4B04 in FIG. 49 and FIG. 50 );
The increase is based on the number of payouts (see the configuration for either payout or settlement operation as the increase in the number of game medals in the description of [Configuration for payout and settlement operation during counting process]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
The present invention also describes a gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) that is connected to the gaming machine described above.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The game value number control means is a means for, when there is an increase in the number of game values while the counting process is continuing, transmitting the number of game values excluding the increased number of game values to the external processing device, and then transmitting the increased number of game values to the external processing device (see the configuration for the increase in the number of game medals while the counting process is continuing in the description of [Configuration for payout and settlement operation during counting process]).
The game value number control means is a means capable of transmitting the game value number at a fixed number to the external processing device at a periodically occurring transmission timing (for example, the transmission of the game medal number by the counting process (counting notification) is every 300 ms, FIG. 5 );
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting the increased game value number at the next transmission timing of the transmission timings when the transmission of the game value number excluding the increased game value number is completed at the current transmission timing of the transmission timings (in FIG. 91(c)(e), the increased number is transmitted after the transmission of 120 game medals at the time of the counting process is completed first).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means for reflecting the increase in the game value number while the counting process is continuing after the state in which the counting process is continuing ends before the game value number becomes 0 (see the operation when the count button 171 is released before the game medal number becomes 0 in the description of [Regarding the configuration related to the payout and settlement operation during the counting process]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A settlement operation means (e.g., a settlement button 134);
Equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting settlement operation information (e.g., a settlement command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the settlement operation means (e.g., step S1204 and step S1205 in FIG. 18 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving a settlement number of the game value based on the reception of the settlement operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the settlement number (for example, step S4704 in FIG. 46 );
The increase is based on the settlement number (see the configuration for either the payout or the settlement operation as the increase in the number of game medals in the description of [Regarding the configuration for the payout and settlement operation during the counting process]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (e.g., a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (e.g., steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, step S4B04 in FIG. 49 and FIG. 50 );
The increase is based on the number of payouts (see the configuration for either the payout or the settlement operation as the increase in the number of game medals in the description of [Regarding the configuration for the payout and settlement operation during the counting process]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
The present invention also describes a gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) that is connected to the gaming machine described above.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A display means (e.g., a performance image display device 157, a game medal number display device 170) capable of displaying the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The game value number control means is a means for, when there is an increase in the number of game values while the counting process is continuing, transmitting the number of game values excluding the increased number of game values to the external processing device, and then transmitting the increased number of game values to the external processing device (see the configuration for the increase in the number of game medals while the counting process is continuing in the description of [Configuration for payout and settlement operation during counting process]).
the display means is a means capable of executing a subtraction display for subtracting the gaming value number in accordance with the gaming value number subtracted by the counting process,
The display means is a means capable of executing the subtraction display reflecting an increase in the number of game values when the number of game values increases while the counting process is continuing (FIG. 91(d)(f)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means for reflecting the increase in the game value number while the counting process is continuing after the state in which the counting process is continuing ends before the game value number becomes 0 (see the operation when the count button 171 is released before the game medal number becomes 0 in the description of [Configuration regarding payout and settlement operation during counting process]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A settlement operation means (e.g., a settlement button 134);
Equipped with
The game control means is a means for transmitting settlement operation information (e.g., a settlement command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the settlement operation means (e.g., step S1204 and step S1205 in FIG. 18 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving a settlement number of the game value based on the reception of the settlement operation information, and performing the game value update process based on the settlement number (for example, step S4704 in FIG. 46 );
The increase is based on the settlement number (see the configuration for either the payout or the settlement operation as the increase in the number of game medals in the description of [Regarding the configuration for the payout and settlement operation during the counting process]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means for transmitting payout information (e.g., a payout command) to the game value number control means based on the fact that a payout has been made in a game (e.g., steps S1604 and S1605 in FIG. 22 );
The game value number control means is a means capable of deriving the payout number of the game value based on the reception of the payout information and performing the game value update process based on the payout number (for example, step S4B04 in FIG. 49 and FIG. 50 );
The increase is based on the number of payouts (see the configuration for either payout or settlement operation as the increase in the number of game medals in the description of [Configuration for payout and settlement operation during counting process]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
The present invention also describes a gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) that is connected to the gaming machine described above.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132) used to set the bet amount;
A settlement operation means (e.g., a settlement button 134);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The input operation means includes a predetermined input operation means (e.g., a bet button 130) capable of setting the minimum value of the bet amount,
The game control means is a means for transmitting settlement information (e.g., a settlement command) to the game value number control means based on an operation performed on the settlement operation means,
the game control means is a means capable of setting the minimum value to the bet amount based on an operation being performed on the predetermined input operation means in a state in which a value different from the minimum value is set to the bet amount, and capable of transmitting information on a difference between the different value and the minimum value to the game value number control means as the settlement information;
The game value control means is a means capable of performing the game value update process based on the receipt of the settlement information.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description under [Regarding setting of reduction in the number of bets by operating the bet button]).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means for transmitting the settlement information including a value obtained by subtracting the minimum value from the maximum value to the game value number control means, based on an operation being performed on the predetermined input operation means when the bet number is set to the maximum value.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description under [Regarding setting of reduction in the number of bets by operating the bet button]).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
Including audio output means (e.g., speakers 272, 277);
the sound output means is means for outputting a payment sound based on an operation being performed on the payment operation means,
the sound output means is means for outputting a insertion sound based on an operation being performed on the insertion operation means,
The sound output means is a means for outputting the insertion sound based on an operation to the predetermined insertion operation means in a state where the bet amount is set to a maximum value.
The present invention describes a gaming machine (see the description under "Regarding setting to reduce the number of bets by operating the bet button"), which is characterized by the above.

Also,
The present invention also describes a gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) that is connected to the gaming machine described above.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132) used to set the bet amount;
A settlement operation means (e.g., a settlement button 134);
Audio output means (e.g., speakers 272, 277);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The input operation means includes a predetermined input operation means (e.g., a bet button 130) capable of setting the minimum value of the bet amount,
the game control means is a means for transmitting settlement information to the game value number control means based on an operation being performed on the settlement operation means;
the game control means is a means capable of setting the minimum value to the bet amount based on an operation being performed on the predetermined input operation means in a state in which a value different from the minimum value is set to the bet amount, and capable of transmitting information on a difference between the different value and the minimum value to the game value number control means as the settlement information;
The game value control means is a means capable of performing the game value update process based on the receipt of the settlement information,
the sound output means is means for outputting a payment sound based on an operation being performed on the payment operation means,
The sound output means is a means for not outputting the settlement sound when an operation is performed on the predetermined insert operation means in a state where a value different from the minimum value is set for the bet amount.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description under [Regarding setting of reduction in the number of bets by operating the bet button]).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the sound output means is means for outputting a insertion sound based on an operation being performed on the insertion operation means,
The sound output means is a means for outputting the insertion sound based on an operation to the predetermined insertion operation means in a state where the bet amount is set to a maximum value.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description under [Regarding setting of reduction in the number of bets by operating the bet button]).

Also,
The present invention also describes a gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) that is connected to the gaming machine described above.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A performance control means (e.g., the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the performance performed by the performance means (e.g., the performance image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, the various lamps 420),
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of performing a game value update process for updating the game value number based on information received from an external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a higher-level server) (e.g., step S4003 in FIG. 38 and step S3714 in FIG. 36),
the game value number control means is a means capable of transmitting external information on game values managed by the external processing device to the game control means when the external information is received,
The game control means is a means capable of transmitting the external information to the performance control means,
the effect control means is means for executing an effect corresponding to a determination target in a certain game state that is advantageous to a player,
The determination target is the sum of the number included in the external information and the number of game values.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description in "Regarding the presentation according to the number of gaming medals", in which the total value of the number of gaming medals and the number of medals held is the subject of judgment).

Also,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A performance control means (e.g., the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the performance performed by the performance means (e.g., the performance image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, the various lamps 420),
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of performing a game value update process for updating the game value number based on information received from an external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a higher-level server) (e.g., step S4003 in FIG. 38 and step S3714 in FIG. 36),
the game value number control means is a means capable of transmitting external information on game values managed by the external processing device to the game control means when the external information is received,
The game control means is a means capable of transmitting the external information to the performance control means,
the effect control means is means for executing an effect corresponding to a determination target in a certain game state that is advantageous to a player,
The determination target is a number included in the external information.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description of "Performance according to the number of game medals" in which the number of medals held is the subject of judgment).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The number included in the external information is the number of accumulated game values acquired in a game (for example, the number of medals held is the accumulated game values acquired in a game),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The performance control means may execute a first performance when the determination target has not reached a predetermined number, and execute a second performance when the determination target has reached the predetermined number (see the configuration for executing different performances depending on the number of game medals in the description of [Regarding performances according to the number of game medals]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The presentation control means is a means capable of executing display of information regarding the judgment target at least in the certain game state (see the configuration for displaying the value to be judged in the description of [Presentation according to the number of game medals]),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The effect control means is a means capable of executing, in the certain game state, an effect according to the number of game values acquired in the certain game state (see the configuration in which an effect using the number of held medals and an effect using the number of acquired medals are executed in parallel in the description of [Regarding the effect according to the number of game medals]),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In the certain game state, the number of game values acquired in the certain game state may exceed the number included in the external information (see the description in [Regarding the presentation according to the number of game medals] that "if the counting process is not performed in a state advantageous to the player, the number of acquired medals may exceed the number of medals held").
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The presentation control means is a means capable of executing a setting suggestion presentation according to the judgment target (see the description in [About the presentation according to the number of game medals] that "When the number of game medals reaches a predetermined number, a display suggesting a setting value may be executed");
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
The present invention also describes a gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) that is connected to the gaming machine described above.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A performance control means (e.g., the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the performance performed by the performance means (e.g., the performance image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, the various lamps 420),
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of performing a game value update process for updating the game value number based on information received from an external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a higher-level server) (e.g., step S4003 in FIG. 38 and step S3714 in FIG. 36),
The presentation control means is a means capable of displaying the number of game values in a certain game state advantageous to the player (for example, the value of "possession" in FIG. 93),
The effect control means is a means capable of executing, in the certain game state, an effect according to the number of game values acquired in the certain game state.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (in the description of [Regarding the presentation according to the number of game medals], the number of medals won in the AT state is the subject of judgment, see Figure 93).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The presentation control means is a means capable of executing the display of the number of game values acquired in the certain game state (for example, the value of "...GET" in FIG. 93),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The presentation control means is a means for updating and displaying both the display of the acquired number and the display of the number of game values when game values are acquired in the certain game state (for example, FIG. 93 (d2) (d3)),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The performance control means is a means capable of executing a performance according to the number of game values in the certain game state (see the configuration capable of executing performances in parallel in the description of [Performance according to the number of game medals]),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

A gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) is described that is connected to the gaming machine described above.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A first operating means (e.g., a reset button R);
A second operating means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
the first operation means is an operation means capable of canceling a first error related to the game control means,
the second operation means is an operation means capable of canceling a second error relating to the game value number control means,
When the first error occurs while the second error is occurring, the first error becomes resolvable and the second error becomes unresolvable.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description of [Operation when errors are repeated], FIG. 96).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first operating means is a reset button (see FIG. 95 );
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The second error is an error that can be cleared by executing the counting process (see FIG. 94 ).
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation of the second operation means (see FIG. 94 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value control means includes:
If the first error has not occurred, the game value update process is executed based on the operation of the second operation means (see FIG. 94).
a means for not executing the game value update process based on the operation of the second operation means when the first error occurs (see FIG. 96 );
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first operating means is the same operating means as the second operating means.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description of the operation when an error occurs multiple times, in which the error clearing operation means for clearing the game control error and the medal count control error is the same configuration).

Also,
The present invention also describes a gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) that is connected to the gaming machine described above.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A first operating means (e.g., a reset button R);
A second operating means (e.g., a count button 171);
Notification means (e.g., a performance image display device 157);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
the first operation means is an operation means capable of canceling a first error related to the game control means,
the second operation means is an operation means capable of canceling a second error relating to the game value number control means,
When the first error occurs while the second error is occurring, the first error becomes resolvable and the second error becomes an unresolvable first state;
the notification means is means capable of executing a first error notification regarding the first error in the first state;
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description of [Operation when errors are repeated], FIG. 96).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is means capable of executing a notification to prompt the user to cancel the first error based on the operation of the second operating means in the first state (see FIG. 96 (d4)),
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is a means capable of executing a second error notification (see FIG. 96 (d2)) regarding the second error.
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is a means for interrupting the second error notification being executed when executing the first error notification in the first state (see (d2) and (d3) of FIG. 96 ),
The notification means is a means for starting notification of the second error when the first state ends by releasing the first error (see (d4) to (d6) of FIG. 96 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is a means for continuously executing the second error notification when executing the first error notification in the first state (see the configuration for displaying messages regarding both errors in the description of [Regarding the operation when errors overlap]).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
the second error is an error that can be cleared by executing the counting process,
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing the counting process based on the operation of the second operation means.
The document describes a gaming machine (see Figures 94 (b2) to (b4)).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first operating means is a reset button (see FIG. 95 ).
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value control means includes:
If the first error has not occurred, the game value update process is executed based on the operation of the second operation means (see FIG. 94).
a means for not executing the game value update process based on the operation of the second operation means when the first error occurs (see FIG. 96 );
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
The present invention also describes a gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) that is connected to the gaming machine described above.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
Audio output means (e.g., speakers 272, 277);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The game control means is a means capable of setting a first game state (e.g., an AT state) that is advantageous to a player,
The sound output means is a means capable of outputting a first effect sound (for example, an effect sound in an AT state) in the first gaming state,
The sound output means may reduce the volume of the first sound effect when the counting process is being executed in the first gaming state.
The present invention describes a gaming machine (see "Regarding notification of counting process (1)").

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and which are driven to rotate;
A plurality of stop buttons (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) are provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and are used to individually stop the rotation of the reels;
a stop control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button that has been operated to stop the reels based on a result of an internal lottery after the plurality of reels have been rotated;
Equipped with
the sound output means is a means for reducing the volume of the first sound effect when the counting process is being executed in a state in which all of the reels are stopped in the first gaming state;
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the configuration in [Regarding the notification of counting process (1)] in which counting notification A is executed when all reels are stopped).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the sound output means is means for reducing the volume of the first sound effect when the counting process is being executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since all of the stop operations for the reels being rotated have been performed in the first gaming state;
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description of [Regarding the notification of counting process (1)], in which counting notification A is executed on the condition that a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the last stopping operation on the reels and all of the reels have stopped spinning).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the sound output means being capable of outputting a second sound effect (e.g., a counting sound) when the counting process is being executed;
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The device includes a predetermined operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132),
the sound output means is means for returning the volume of the first sound effect to the original volume when the predetermined operation means is operated in a state in which the volume of the first sound effect is reduced;
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized in that (see the description of [Regarding the notification of counting process (1)], the configuration in which the currently executing counting notification A is terminated when some operation is performed on an operating means).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and which are driven to rotate;
A plurality of stop buttons (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) are provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and are used to individually stop the rotation of the reels;
a stop control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button that has been operated to stop the reels based on a result of an internal lottery after the plurality of reels have been rotated;
A performance means including the audio output means (for example, a performance image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, various lamps 420),
Equipped with
the game control means is means for setting a second game state (e.g., a normal state) that is more disadvantageous to a player than the first game state;
The presentation means is a means capable of executing a demonstration presentation,
the effecting means is means for not executing a demo effect when all of the reels are stopped in the first gaming state,
The presentation means is a means capable of executing a demo presentation when all of the reels are stopped in the second gaming state.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description in [Regarding the notification of counting process (1)] that a so-called demo performance is not executed when the player is in an advantageous state, and a demo performance is executed when the player is in an unfavorable state).

Also,
The present invention also describes a gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) that is connected to the gaming machine described above.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
Audio output means (e.g., speakers 272, 277);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
a game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means capable of executing a counting process (for example, steps S3513 and S3514 in FIG. 34 ) including a transmission process of the game value number to an external processing device and a game value update process of subtracting the game value number;
The game control means is a means capable of setting a first game state (e.g., an AT state) that is advantageous to a player,
The sound output means is a means capable of outputting a first effect sound (for example, an effect sound in an AT state) in the first gaming state,
the sound output means is means for outputting a second sound effect (e.g., a counting sound) when the counting process is being executed,
The sound output means may maintain a state in which a first effect sound is output when the counting process is being executed in the first gaming state.
The present invention describes a gaming machine (see [Regarding notification of counting process (2)]) that is characterized by the above.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and which are driven to rotate;
A plurality of stop buttons (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) are provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and are used to individually stop the rotation of the reels;
a stop control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button that has been operated to stop the reels based on a result of an internal lottery after the plurality of reels have been rotated;
Equipped with
the sound output means is means for outputting the second sound effect when the counting process is being executed in a state in which all of the reels in the first gaming state are stopped;
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description of [Regarding the notification of counting process (2)], in which counting notification B is executed when all reels are stopped).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and which are driven to rotate;
A plurality of stop buttons (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) are provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and are used to individually stop the rotation of the reels;
a stop control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button that has been operated to stop the reels based on a result of an internal lottery after the plurality of reels have been rotated;
Equipped with
the sound output means is means for not outputting the second sound effect when any of the plurality of reels is spinning in the first gaming state;
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the description of "Regarding the notification of counting process (2)," in which counting notification B is not executed while any of the reels are spinning).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A predetermined operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
Equipped with
the sound output means is means for not outputting the second sound effect during a period from when the predetermined operation means is operated in the first gaming state until when the plurality of reels start to rotate;
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized in that (see the configuration in [Regarding the notification of counting process (2)], in which counting notification B is not executed after some operation means is performed).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and which are driven to rotate;
A plurality of stop buttons (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) are provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and are used to individually stop the rotation of the reels;
a stop control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button that has been operated to stop the reels based on a result of an internal lottery after the plurality of reels have been rotated;
Equipped with
the sound output means is means for outputting the second sound effect in a first manner when the counting process is being executed in a state in which all of the reels in the first gaming state are stopped;
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the configuration in which, in the description of [Regarding the notification of counting process (2)], the case where counting notification B is executed is read as the case where a counting sound of a first type is output, and the case where counting notification B is not executed is read as the case where a counting sound of a second type is output).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and which are driven to rotate;
A plurality of stop buttons (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) are provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and are used to individually stop the rotation of the reels;
a stop control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button that has been operated to stop the reels based on a result of an internal lottery after the plurality of reels have been rotated;
Equipped with
the sound output means is means for outputting the second sound effect in a second manner when the counting process is being executed in a state in which any one of the plurality of reels is spinning in the first gaming state;
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the configuration in which, in the description of [Regarding the notification of counting process (2)], the case where counting notification B is executed is read as the case where a counting sound of a first type is output, and the case where counting notification B is not executed is read as the case where a counting sound of a second type is output).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A predetermined operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
Equipped with
the sound output means is means for outputting the second sound effect in a second manner when the counting process is being executed during a period from when the predetermined operation means is operated in the first gaming state until when the plurality of reels start to rotate;
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above (see the configuration in which, in the description of [Regarding the notification of counting process (2)], the case where counting notification B is executed is read as the case where a counting sound of a first type is output, and the case where counting notification B is not executed is read as the case where a counting sound of a second type is output).

Also,
The present invention also describes a gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) that is connected to the gaming machine described above.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) that controls the progress of a game based on the operation of the input operation means;
A game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) for storing a game value number related to a game value used in a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) that performs a game value update process for updating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
A performance control means (e.g., the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the performance performed by the performance means (e.g., the performance image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, the various lamps 420),
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting information on the game value number to the game control means,
The game control means is a means for transmitting a command (e.g., a security command) including information on the game value number received from the game value number control means to the performance control means,
The presentation control means is a means for executing a first control regarding the number of game values based on receiving the command.
The present invention describes a gaming machine that features the above-mentioned characteristics (see [Regarding displays and effects based on information from a medal count control unit]).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When power is turned on, communication between the game control means and the performance control means may be established before communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is established,
The performance control means is a means for not executing the first control even if the command is received until communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is established.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above-mentioned characteristics (see [Regarding displays and effects based on information from a medal count control unit]).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When power is turned on, communication between the game control means and the performance control means may be established before communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is established,
The command includes information indicating whether or not communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is normal,
The performance control means is a means for not executing the first control even if the command is received until the performance control means receives information indicating that communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is normal.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above-mentioned characteristics (see [Regarding displays and effects based on information from a medal count control unit]).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The presentation control means is a means for executing the first control based on the fact that communication between the game control means and the game value number control means is normal.
The present invention describes a gaming machine characterized by the above-mentioned characteristics (see [Regarding displays and effects based on information from a medal count control unit]).

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game control means is a means for transmitting the command to the performance control means at a predetermined cycle (for example, a security command is transmitted at a cycle of 100 ms),
The game control means is a means for transmitting various processing commands (for example, various processing commands shown in FIG. 5) including information on the game value number received from the game value number control means to the presentation control means in accordance with the progress of the game;
The performance control means is a means for executing the first control based on receiving the various processing commands.
A gaming machine characterized by the above features is described.

Also,
The present invention also describes a gaming media management device (e.g., a lending machine 700) that is connected to the gaming machine described above.

Also,
The gaming machine described above,
An external processing device (e.g., a lending machine 700, a host server) connected to the gaming machine;
The present invention describes a gaming system (e.g., gaming system S) that is characterized by including at least the above.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first operating means (e.g., a count button 171);
A second operating means (e.g., a MAX BET button 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) capable of executing control regarding the progress of a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) capable of managing the number of game values related to game values used in a game;
a game value number display means (e.g., a game medal number display device 170) capable of displaying the game value number managed by the game value number control means;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number display means is a means capable of updating the display of the game value number in response to an operation of the first operation means (hereinafter referred to as a "first display update");
the game value number display means is a means capable of updating the display of the game value number in response to an operation of the second operation means (hereinafter referred to as "second display update");
When the second operating means is operated after the first operating means, the first display update may be executed after the second display update is executed (see the explanation of "Regarding the timing of transmission and reception of operation information and the corresponding processing (2)").
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the game value number display means is electrically connected to the game value number control means,
the first operation means is a means electrically connected to the game value number control means,
the game value number control means is a means capable of transmitting a game value number to an external device in response to an operation of the first operation means;
the second operation means is a means electrically connected to the game control means,
the game value number control means is a means capable of receiving a game value number transmitted from the game control means in response to an operation of the second operation means;
When the second operation means is operated after the first operation means is operated, if the game value number control means receives the game value number transmitted from the game control means in response to the operation of the second operation means before the game value number is transmitted to the external device in response to the operation of the first operation means, the first display update is executed after the second display update is executed (see the explanation of [Regarding the timing of transmission and reception of operation information and the corresponding processing (2)]),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means for accumulating game value numbers corresponding to a plurality of operations of the first operation means and transmitting the accumulated game value numbers to the external device (see, for example, operation examples of FIGS. 107 and 109 );
the game value number display means is means for executing the first display update when game value numbers corresponding to a plurality of operations of the first operating means are accumulated and transmitted to the external device;
The game value number display means is a means for executing the second display update based on the game value number received when the game value number control means receives the game value number transmitted from the game control means in response to the operation of the second operation means (see the explanation of [Regarding the timing of transmission and reception of operation information and the corresponding processing (2)]);
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the second operation means is operated after the first operation means is operated, the game value number control means transmits a game value number to the external device in response to the operation of the first operation means, and then receives a game value number transmitted from the game control means based on the operation of the second operation means, the game value number display means executes the first display update and then executes the second display update (for example, see the operation example of FIG. 112 );
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
a sound output means (e.g., speakers 272, 277) capable of outputting a first sound (e.g., a counting sound) in response to an operation of the first operating means;
The sound output means is means for outputting the first sound after the first display update starts in response to an operation of the first operating means (for example, see an operation example of FIG. 105 );
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value control means is a means for communicating with the external device at a predetermined timing that periodically occurs,
When the operation state of the first operation means crosses the predetermined timing (for example, when the counting button 171 is pressed and held), and the second operation means is operated between the end of the operation state and the arrival of the next predetermined timing, the first display update is executed after the second display update is executed (for example, see the operation example of FIG. 110 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In the gaming machine described above, even if the first display update takes a long time, the second display update is executed first, so the player will not feel distrustful because the second display update is not executed.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first operating means (e.g., a count button 171);
A second operating means (e.g., a MAX BET button 132);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) capable of executing control regarding the progress of a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) capable of managing the number of game values related to game values used in a game;
A gaming machine equipped with
the game value number control means is a means capable of executing a game value number counting process in response to an operation of the first operation means,
the game value control means is a means capable of executing a game value input process in response to an operation of the second operation means;
When the second operating means is operated after the first operating means is operated, the insertion process corresponding to the operation of the second operating means is executed, and the counting process corresponding to the operation of the first operating means may not be executed (see the explanation of [Regarding the timing of transmission and reception of operation information and the corresponding process (3)]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means having a game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) capable of storing game value numbers,
the first operation means is a means electrically connected to the game value number control means,
the counting process is a process of transmitting a game value number to an external device in response to an operation of the first operating means, and subtracting the transmitted game value number from the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
the second operation means is a means electrically connected to the game control means,
the input process is a process of receiving a number of game values transmitted from the game control means in response to an operation of the second operation means, and subtracting the received number of game values from the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means;
When the second operation means is operated after the first operation means is operated, the insertion process corresponding to the operation of the second operation means is executed before the counting process corresponding to the operation of the first operation means is executed, and if the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means after the insertion process is executed is less than the number of game values to be processed by the counting process, the counting process is not executed (see the explanation of [Regarding the timing of transmission and reception of operation information and the corresponding process (3)]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the game value number control means is means for setting a game value number to be processed by the counting process in response to an operation of the first operation means;
When the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means is less than the number of game values to be processed by the counting process, the number of game values to be processed is cleared and the counting process is not executed (for example, see operation examples of Figures 113 and 115).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
and a third operation means (e.g., a checkout button 134),
the game value number control means is a means capable of executing a settlement process of a game value number in response to an operation of the third operation means,
the third operation means is a means electrically connected to the game control means,
the settlement process is a process of receiving a number of game values transmitted from the game control means in response to an operation of the third operation means, and adding the received number of game values to a number of game values stored in the game value number storage means;
When the first operation means is operated, the second operation means is operated, and then the third operation means is operated, the insertion process corresponding to the operation of the second operation means is executed before the counting process corresponding to the operation of the first operation means is executed, and even if the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means after the insertion process is executed becomes less than the number of game values to be processed by the counting process, the settlement process corresponding to the operation of the third operation means is executed, and the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means becomes equal to or greater than the number of game values to be processed by the counting process, so that the counting process may be executed (see, for example, operation examples in Figures 121 and 122).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The input process in response to the operation of the second operation means is executed before the counting process in response to the operation of the first operation means is executed, and in a state in which the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means after the input process is executed is less than the number of game values to be processed by the counting process, the counting process in response to the operation of the first operation means is not executed,
If the third operation means is operated thereafter, a settlement process for the number of game values may be executed in response to the operation of the third operation means (see the explanation of [Regarding the timing of transmission and reception of operation information and the corresponding process (3)]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
and a game value number display means (e.g., a game medal number display device 170) capable of displaying the game value number managed by the game value number control means.
The game value number display means is a means capable of updating the display of the game value number in response to an operation of the first operation means (hereinafter referred to as a "first display update");
The game value number display means is a means for not executing the first display update in a state in which the insertion process in response to the operation of the second operation means is executed before the counting process in response to the operation of the first operation means is executed, and the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means after the insertion process is executed is less than the number of game values to be processed by the counting process (see, for example, operation examples of Figures 113 and 115 );
The game value number display means is a means for executing the first display update when the insertion process in response to the operation of the second operation means is executed before the counting process in response to the operation of the first operation means is executed, and the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means becomes less than the number of game values to be processed by the counting process after the insertion process is executed, and further, the settlement process in response to the operation of the third operation means is executed and the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means becomes equal to or greater than the number of game values to be processed by the counting process (see, for example, operation examples in Figures 121 and 122).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A predetermined operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) capable of executing control regarding the progress of a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) capable of managing the number of game values related to game values used in a game;
Sound output means (e.g., speakers 272, 277);
A gaming machine equipped with
the game value number control means is a means capable of transmitting a game value number to an external device in response to an operation of the predetermined operation means;
the sound output means is means for outputting a first counting sound when a first operation (e.g., a short press operation) is performed on the predetermined operation means,
The sound output means may output the first counting sound once when a second operation (e.g., a long press operation) different from the first operation is performed on the predetermined operation means (see the explanation of [Regarding the transmission/reception timing of operation information and the corresponding processing (4)]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first operation is to operate the predetermined operation means a first number of times (e.g., once);
the second operation is to operate the predetermined operating means a second number of times (e.g., 2 to 5 times) which is greater than the first number of times,
the sound output means is means for outputting the first counting sound when a number of game values corresponding to the first operation on the predetermined operation means is transmitted to the external device;
The sound output means is a means capable of outputting the first counting sound once when a gaming value number corresponding to the second operation on the predetermined operation means is transmitted to the external device (for example, see FIG. 104(a) );
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When a specific operation means is operated continuously, there is a limit to the game value that can be counted. In the gaming machine described above, the counting sound is not output excessively when a small number of game values are counted, so that the counting sound is not overemphasized.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
and a game value number display means (e.g., a game medal number display device 170) capable of displaying the game value number managed by the game value number control means.
When the number of game values corresponding to the second operation on the predetermined operation means is transmitted to the external device, the output period of the first counting sound is longer than the period required for updating the display of the number of game values (for example, the display update of the game medal count display device 170 is performed at a time corresponding to the transmission interval of 0.745 ms of the medal count control unit 350, while the counting sound is at least 250 ms (in the case of counting sound A)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When outputting the counting sound, if the first counting sound is output for each operation of the specified operating means, the first counting sound will be output the same number of times as the number of times the specified operating means is operated, and depending on the length of the first counting sound, it may occur that the counting sound continues to be output even after the display update of the gaming value number display means has finished. The above gaming machine is configured to not cause the above problem by outputting one first counting sound even when the specified operating means is operated a second number of times, which is greater than the first number of times, and furthermore, by lengthening the output period of the first counting sound, it is possible to make it easier to understand the execution of the counting process.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the predetermined operation means is a means electrically connected to the game value number control means,
a communication cycle between the game value control means and the external device is a first cycle (e.g., 300 ms);
The game value number control means is a means for transmitting the game value number set in accordance with the operation of the predetermined operation means during the period from the end of communication with the external device to the next communication to the external device during the next communication.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In the gaming machine described above, the gaming value number set in response to the operation of the specified operating means is transmitted in a lump sum for each first cycle. In this configuration, the number of transmissions is smaller than the number of operations of the specified operating means, and the counting sound can be prevented from being output excessively.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The game value number control means is a means having a game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) capable of storing game value numbers,
the game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of subtracting the game value number transmitted to the external device in response to an operation of the predetermined operation means from the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
the first operation is an operation (e.g., a short press operation) in which an operation time of the predetermined operation means is shorter than a first time,
the second operation is an operation (e.g., a long press operation) in which an operation time of the predetermined operation means is longer than the first time,
the sound output means is a means capable of outputting a second counting sound (e.g., counting sound B) when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means becomes a certain value (e.g., 0) by the first operation on the predetermined operation means;
the sound output means is means for outputting the second counting sound when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means becomes the certain value by the second operation on the predetermined operation means;
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In the above gaming machine, even if the game value transmitted to the external device is different, the same sound is output according to the game value number after transmission, so the game value number may be known by sound.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the game value number control means is means capable of transmitting 1 as a game value number to the external device in response to the first operation;
The game value number control means is a means capable of transmitting a predetermined value greater than 1 as a game value number to the external device in response to the second operation.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the sound output means is means for outputting a third counting sound (e.g., counting sound D) when the predetermined value is transmitted to the external device in response to the second operation,
After the predetermined value is transmitted to the external device in response to the second operation, the first counting sound in response to the first operation may be output in a state in which the third counting sound is being output (for example, see FIG. 130 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In the above gaming machine, the first counting sound is output without waiting for the end of the output of the third counting sound, which prevents the first counting sound from being output with a significant delay from the first operation, and allows for an appropriate time between the operation of a specified operating means and the output of the counting sound.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the sound output means is means capable of outputting a counting sound (e.g., counting sounds B, C, D) including at least a certain part (e.g., the “ding-dong” sound in FIG. 104( a)) in response to the second operation,
the second counting sound is a sound including the certain portion,
the game value number control means is means for transmitting all of the game value numbers stored in the game value number storage means to the external device in response to the second operation when the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is equal to or less than the predetermined value;
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

The above gaming machine is configured to assume that the first operation will be performed when the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means is small. For example, if one counting sound is output for multiple first operations, it is difficult to determine whether all of the game value numbers stored in the game value number storage means have been transmitted to the external device. In the above gaming machine, by using a portion (a certain part) of the sound output for the second operation, it is possible to easily grasp that all of the game value numbers have been transmitted to the external device.

Also, in the above explanation,
A predetermined operation means (e.g., a count button 171);
A game control means (e.g., a game control unit 302) capable of executing control regarding the progress of a game;
A game value number control means (e.g., a medal number control unit 350) capable of managing the number of game values related to game values used in a game;
Sound output means (e.g., speakers 272, 277);
A gaming machine equipped with
The game value number control means is a means having a game value number storage means (e.g., RAM 358) capable of storing game value numbers,
the game value number control means is a means capable of executing a process of transmitting a game value number to an external device in response to an operation of the predetermined operation means, and subtracting the transmitted game value number from the game value number stored in the game value number storage means;
the sound output means is means capable of outputting a counting sound in response to an operation of the predetermined operation means,
The sound output means outputs different counting sounds when a certain operation is performed on the predetermined operation means and the game value number stored in the game value number storage means becomes a certain value (e.g., 0) (hereinafter referred to as a "first case") and when a certain operation is performed on the predetermined operation means and the game value number stored in the game value number storage means does not become the certain value (hereinafter referred to as a "second case") (see the explanation of [Regarding the timing of transmission and reception of operation information and the corresponding processing (5)]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the certain operation includes a first operation (e.g., a short press operation) in which an operation time of the predetermined operation means is shorter than a first time, and a second operation (e.g., a long press operation) in which an operation time of the predetermined operation means is longer than the first time,
the sound output means is means for outputting a first counting sound (e.g., counting sound B) or a second counting sound (e.g., counting sound C) in the first case when the certain operation is the second operation,
the sound output means is means for outputting a third counting sound (e.g., counting sound D) in the second case when the certain operation is the second operation,
the first counting sound, the second counting sound, and the third counting sound are sounds including a first portion (e.g., a "ding-dong"sound);
The third counting sound is a sound that ends with the first portion.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In the gaming machine described above, the counting sound for the second operation has a common first part, making it easier to know that the counting by the second operation has ended.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the game value number control means is means capable of transmitting a maximum value (e.g., 50) of the game value number that can be transmitted based on the second operation to an external device;
the sound output means is a means for outputting the first counting sound when, in the first case when the certain operation is the second operation, the number of game values transmitted to the external device in response to the second operation is equal to or less than a predetermined value (e.g., 5 or less);
the sound output means is a means for outputting the second counting sound when, in the first case when the certain operation is the second operation, the number of game values transmitted to the external device in response to the second operation is greater than the predetermined value;
the second counting sound and the third counting sound are sounds including a second portion (e.g., a common melody);
The first counting sound is a sound that does not include the second portion.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In the gaming machine described above, in the first case where the second operation is performed, if the number of game values transmitted to the external device is equal to or less than a predetermined value, a first counting sound is output. Furthermore, in the first case where the second operation is performed, if the number of game values transmitted to the external device is greater than a predetermined value, a second counting sound is output, and in the second case where the second operation is performed, a third counting sound is output. Since the first counting sound does not include the second portion, and the second and third counting sounds include the second portion, the situation can be understood from the difference in the counting sounds.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
a time period of the first counting sound is shorter than a time period of the second counting sound;
The duration of the second counting sound is shorter than the duration of the third counting sound.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In the above gaming machine, the difference in the time of the counting sound output when the second operation is performed makes it easier to grasp the game value number stored in the game value number storage means and the game value number transmitted to the external device.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the game value number control means is means capable of transmitting 1 as a game value number to an external device in response to the first operation;
The sound output means is a means for outputting the first counting sound when the certain operation is the first operation and the number of game values transmitted to the external device in response to the first operation is 1 (for example, see FIG. 104(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In the gaming machine described above, in a first case where a first operation is performed, if the number of play values transmitted to the external device is 1, a first counting sound is output. And in a first case where a second operation is performed, if the number of play values transmitted to the external device is equal to or less than a predetermined value, a first counting sound is output. With these configurations, it is possible to make the player understand that the number of play values transmitted to the external device is small when the first counting sound is output.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The sound output means is a means for outputting the first counting sound in the first case where the certain operation is the first operation performed multiple times, and the number of game values transmitted to the external device in response to the first operation performed multiple times is the value of the multiple times (for example, see FIG. 104(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In the gaming machine described above, in a first case where a first operation has been performed multiple times, if the number of play values transmitted to the external device is the value of the multiple times, a first counting sound is output. With this configuration, when the first counting sound is output, it is possible to let the player know that the number of play values transmitted to the external device is small. In addition, by standardizing the counting sound, the number of types of counting sounds can be reduced.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The sound output means is a means for outputting a fourth counting sound (e.g., counting sound A) different from the first counting sound when the certain operation is the first operation in the second case and the number of game values transmitted to the external device in response to the first operation is 1.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In the above gaming machine, the difference in the counting sound makes it easier to understand the gaming value number stored in the gaming value number storage means and the gaming value number transmitted to the external device.

Also, in the above explanation,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and which are driven to rotate;
bet operation means (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132) capable of executing a bet operation for betting a gaming value;
a start operation means (e.g., a start lever 135) capable of executing a start operation for instructing the start of rotation of the plurality of reels;
A plurality of stop operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) capable of executing a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels;
A winning determination means (e.g., the main control unit 300) that performs a winning determination based on the display state of the plurality of reels;
A game value providing means (e.g., a main control unit 300) capable of providing a game value in accordance with the winning determination;
A gaming machine equipped with a display means (for example, a performance image display device 157, a game medal number display device 170),
The display means is capable of displaying a first display showing a value related to a game value (for example, the display of the number of payouts, the number of winnings, and the number of game medals shown in FIG. 131 to FIG. 134 );
the display means is a means capable of displaying, when a game value is awarded by the game value awarding means, an update display indicating that the game value has been awarded (for example, the CU display (count-up display) of FIG. 131 to FIG. 134) and then displaying the first display to which the awarded game value has been added,
The betting operation can be executed even during the display of the update display (for example, see FIG. 132 and FIG. 133 ).
We have described a gaming machine that features the above feature (see the explanation in [Regarding the display of the number of medals in an advantageous gaming state]).

The above gaming machine is able to give the feeling of winning balls by displaying updates, and since bet operations can be performed even while the update display is being displayed, the tempo of the game can be maintained.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The start operation can be executed even during the display of the update display (see, for example, FIG. 133 );
The display means is a means capable of displaying, when the betting operation and the starting operation are executed during the display of the update display, the first display (for example, the display of the number of acquired coins and the number of game medals in FIG. 133 ) obtained by adding a game value obtained by subtracting the amount bet by the betting operation from the granted game value after the display of the update display ends.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, if a bet operation and a start operation are performed while the update display is being displayed, the update display will end at a value that takes into account the bet amount, preventing any sense of discomfort.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first display is a display (e.g., the number of winnings) showing the game value won in a specific section (e.g., an AT game state),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first display is a display displayed in the lower half of the display area of the display means (for example, see the display of the performance image display device 157 in Figures 131 to 134).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

By displaying the first display in the lower half of the display area of this gaming machine, other players walking down the aisle to choose a gaming machine can also see the first display (giving them a sense of winning), and can choose this gaming machine.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., a MAX BET button 132) for inputting a gaming value for use in a game from the accumulated gaming value;
A light emitting means (e.g., a MAX BET button LED) for illuminating the insert operation means;
A gaming machine equipped with
the light emitting means is means for causing the input operation means to emit light when the accumulated game value is equal to or greater than a predetermined number,
The light emitting means does not emit light to the insert operation means when the accumulated game value is less than the predetermined number, but in a certain state (e.g., a state in which a bonus type selection screen is being displayed), the light emitting means can emit light to the insert operation means even if the accumulated game value is less than the predetermined number (e.g., see FIG. 138).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine allows the player to recognize that the input operation means can be operated even if the gaming value is less than the specified number.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The certain state is a state in which a performance using the insert operation means is being executed (for example, a state in which a bonus type selection screen is being displayed, see FIG. 138 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The certain state is a state in which a predetermined replay role has been won (for example, see FIG. 145 (C2)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A display means (for example, a performance image display device 157) is provided,
The light emitting means is turned off when a certain display (for example, a demo screen, see FIG. 140) is being displayed on the display means even if the accumulated game value is less than the predetermined number and the certain state is being reached.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The certain display is a display in which at least a part of the display in the certain state cannot be seen (for example, a description that another screen may be superimposed on a part of the bonus type selection screen),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and which are driven to rotate;
A bet operation means (e.g., a MAX bet button 132);
a start operation means (e.g., a start lever 135) capable of executing a start operation for instructing the start of rotation of the plurality of reels;
A plurality of stop operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) capable of executing a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels;
A winning determination means (e.g., the main control unit 300) that performs a winning determination based on the display state of the plurality of reels;
A game value providing means (e.g., a main control unit 300) capable of providing a game value in accordance with the winning determination;
A game machine equipped with a display means (for example, a performance image display device 157),
The display means is capable of displaying a first display (e.g., a display of the number of winning coins) showing a number corresponding to a game value won in a specific section (hereinafter referred to as the "winning number");
When the game value is awarded by the game value awarding means, an update display (e.g., a count-up display) indicating an update of the first display is displayed, and then the first display indicating the acquired number obtained by adding the awarded game value to the acquired number before the game value was awarded can be displayed;
Even during the display of the update display, a bet process of a gaming value based on the operation of the bet operation means can be executed (for example, FIG. 133 );
The start operation can be executed even during the display of the update display (for example, FIG. 133 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and which are driven to rotate;
A bet operation means (e.g., a MAX bet button 132);
a start operation means (e.g., a start lever 135) capable of executing a start operation for instructing the start of rotation of the plurality of reels;
A plurality of stop operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) capable of executing a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels;
A winning determination means (e.g., the main control unit 300) that performs a winning determination based on the display state of the plurality of reels;
A game value granting means (e.g., a main control unit 300) capable of granting a game value in accordance with the winning determination;
A display means (e.g., a performance image display device 157);
A game machine having a sound output means,
The display means is capable of displaying a first display (e.g., a display of the number of winning coins) showing a number corresponding to a game value won in a specific section (hereinafter referred to as the "winning number");
When the game value is awarded by the game value awarding means, an update display (e.g., a count-up display) indicating an update of the first display is displayed, and then the first display indicating the acquired number obtained by adding the awarded game value to the acquired number before the game value was awarded can be displayed;
Even during the display of the update display, a bet process of a gaming value based on the operation of the bet operation means can be executed (for example, FIG. 132 and FIG. 133 ).
The sound output means is a means capable of outputting a first sound based on a winning combination (for example, a sound effect corresponding to a winning combination),
The sound output means is means for continuing output of the first sound when the bet process is executed while the first sound is being output and the update display is being displayed (for example, FIG. 132 and FIG. 133 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and which are driven to rotate;
A bet operation means (e.g., a MAX bet button 132) having a light emitting means (e.g., a bet button LED);
a start operation means (e.g., a start lever 135) capable of executing a start operation for instructing the start of rotation of the plurality of reels;
A plurality of stop operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) capable of executing a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels;
A winning determination means (e.g., the main control unit 300) that performs a winning determination based on the display state of the plurality of reels;
A game value providing means (e.g., a main control unit 300) capable of providing a game value in accordance with the winning determination;
A game control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) that controls game progress;
A game machine equipped with a display means (for example, a performance image display device 157),
The display means is capable of displaying a first display (e.g., a display of the number of winning coins) showing a number corresponding to a game value won in a specific section (hereinafter referred to as the "winning number");
When the game value is awarded by the game value awarding means, an update display (e.g., a count-up display) indicating an update of the first display is displayed, and then the first display indicating the acquired number obtained by adding the awarded game value to the acquired number before the game value was awarded can be displayed;
Even during the display of the update display, a bet process of a gaming value based on the operation of the bet operation means can be executed (for example, FIG. 132 and FIG. 133 ).
the light emitting means emits light at least when the betting process is executable,
The game control means is a means capable of bringing a game into a game stop state (for example, a state in which a complete function is activated) in which the game cannot proceed based on a number corresponding to the game value granted by the game value granting means,
The display means is a means capable of executing a game stop notification (for example, see timing (E6) of FIG. 135) that notifies the player that the game is stopped,
The display means may display the update display between the stop operation immediately before the game stop notification and the execution of the game stop notification (for example, see timing (E5) (E6) of FIG. 135),
The light emitting means is a means that does not emit light during the display of the update display immediately before the game stop notification (for example, see timing (E5) (E6) of FIG. 135),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and which are driven to rotate;
A bet operation means (e.g., a MAX bet button 132);
a start operation means (e.g., a start lever 135) capable of executing a start operation for instructing the start of rotation of the plurality of reels;
A plurality of stop operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) capable of executing a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels;
A winning determination means (e.g., the main control unit 300) that performs a winning determination based on the display state of the plurality of reels;
A game value providing means (e.g., a main control unit 300) capable of providing a game value in accordance with the winning determination;
A game machine equipped with a display means (for example, a performance image display device 157),
The display means is capable of displaying a first display (e.g., a display of the number of winning coins) showing a number corresponding to a game value won in a specific section (hereinafter referred to as the "winning number");
When the game value is awarded by the game value awarding means, an update display (e.g., a count-up display) indicating an update of the first display is displayed, and then the first display indicating the acquired number obtained by adding the awarded game value to the acquired number before the game value was awarded can be displayed;
Even during the display of the update display, a bet process of a gaming value based on the operation of the bet operation means can be executed (for example, FIG. 133 );
The start operation can be executed even during the display of the update display (for example, FIG. 133 );
When the betting process and the start operation are executed during the display of the update display when the game value is awarded by the game value awarding means, after the display of the update display ends, the first display showing the acquired number obtained by adding the awarded game value to the acquired number before the game value was awarded and further subtracting the amount bet by the betting process can be displayed (for example, at timing (C5) of FIG. 133 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and which are driven to rotate;
A bet operation means (e.g., a MAX bet button 132);
a start operation means (e.g., a start lever 135) capable of executing a start operation for instructing the start of rotation of the plurality of reels;
A plurality of stop operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) capable of executing a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels;
A winning determination means (e.g., the main control unit 300) that performs a winning determination based on the display state of the plurality of reels;
A game value granting means (e.g., a main control unit 300) capable of granting a game value in accordance with the winning determination;
A game machine equipped with a display means (for example, a performance image display device 157),
The display means is capable of displaying a first display (e.g., a display of the number of winning coins) showing a number corresponding to a game value won in a specific section (hereinafter referred to as the "winning number");
When the game value is awarded by the game value awarding means, an update display (e.g., a count-up display) indicating an update of the first display is displayed, and then the first display indicating the acquired number obtained by adding the awarded game value to the acquired number before the game value was awarded can be displayed;
When the game value is awarded by the game value awarding means, if the value obtained by adding the awarded game value to the number of winnings before the game value is awarded reaches a specified value, a second display (for example, "500 coins OVER!" at timing (E4) of FIG. 135) can be displayed,
Even during the display of the update display, a bet process of a gaming value based on the operation of the bet operation means can be executed (for example, FIG. 135 ).
The start operation can be executed even during the display of the update display (for example, FIG. 135 );
When the betting process and the start operation are executed during the display of the update display when the game value is awarded by the game value awarding means, after the display of the update display ends, it is possible to display the first display showing the acquired number obtained by adding the awarded game value to the acquired number before the game value was awarded and further subtracting the amount bet by the betting process (for example, at the timing (E4) of FIG. 135 ),
When the betting process and the start operation are executed during the display of the update display when the specified value is reached, even if the first display displayed as a result of the betting process and the start operation being executed has not reached the specified value, the second display can be displayed (for example, at the timing (E4) of FIG. 135 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and which are driven to rotate;
An input operation means (e.g., a MAX BET button 132) for inputting a gaming value for use in a game from the accumulated gaming value;
a start operation means (e.g., a start lever 135) capable of executing a start operation for instructing the start of rotation of the plurality of reels;
A plurality of stop operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) capable of executing a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels;
A winning determination means (e.g., the main control unit 300) that performs a winning determination based on the display state of the plurality of reels;
A game value providing means (e.g., a main control unit 300) capable of providing a game value in accordance with the winning determination;
A light emitting means (e.g., a bet button LED) for illuminating the insert operation means;
A game machine equipped with a display means (for example, a performance image display device 157),
the light emitting means is means for causing the input operation means to emit light when the accumulated game value is equal to or greater than a predetermined number,
The light emitting means is a means that does not emit light to the insert operation means when the accumulated game value is less than the predetermined number, but can emit light to the insert operation means when a predetermined re-play role is won, even if the accumulated game value is less than the predetermined number (for example, FIG. 145 (c2)),
The display means is capable of displaying a first display (e.g., a display of the number of winning coins) showing a number corresponding to a game value won in a specific section (hereinafter referred to as the "winning number");
When the game value is awarded by the game value awarding means, an update display (e.g., a count-up display) indicating an update of the first display is displayed, and then the first display indicating the acquired number obtained by adding the awarded game value to the acquired number before the game value is awarded is displayed,
Even during the display of the update display, a process of inserting a gaming value based on the operation of the insert operation means can be executed (for example, FIG. 132 and FIG. 133).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., a MAX BET button 132) for inputting a gaming value for use in a game from the accumulated gaming value;
A light emitting means (e.g., a bet button LED) for illuminating the insert operation means;
A gaming machine equipped with
the light emitting means is means for causing the input operation means to emit light when the accumulated game value is equal to or greater than a predetermined number;
The light emitting means does not emit light when the accumulated game value is less than the predetermined number, but when the first re-play role is won, the light emitting means can emit light even if the accumulated game value is less than the predetermined number (for example, FIG. 145(c2)).
The light emitting means is a means for not emitting light to the insert operation means when the second re-play role is won (for example, FIG. 145(b2)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and which are driven to rotate;
An input operation means (e.g., a MAX BET button 132) for inputting a gaming value for use in a game from the accumulated gaming value;
a start operation means (e.g., a start lever 135) capable of executing a start operation for instructing the start of rotation of the plurality of reels;
A plurality of stop operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) capable of executing a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels;
A winning determination means (e.g., the main control unit 300) that performs a winning determination based on the display state of the plurality of reels;
A game value providing means (e.g., a main control unit 300) capable of providing a game value in accordance with the winning determination;
A light emitting means (e.g., a bet button LED) for illuminating the insert operation means;
A game machine equipped with a display means (for example, a performance image display device 157),
the light emitting means is means for causing the input operation means to emit light when the accumulated game value is equal to or greater than a predetermined number,
The light emitting means does not emit light when the accumulated game value is less than the predetermined number, but when the first re-play role is won, the light emitting means can emit light even when the accumulated game value is less than the predetermined number (for example, FIG. 145(c2)).
The light emitting means is a means for not emitting light to the insert operation means when the second re-play role is won (for example, FIG. 145(b2)),
The display means is capable of displaying a first display (e.g., a display of the number of winning coins) showing a number corresponding to a game value won in a specific section (hereinafter referred to as the "winning number");
When the game value is awarded by the game value awarding means, an update display (e.g., a count-up display) indicating an update of the first display is displayed, and then the first display indicating the acquired number obtained by adding the awarded game value to the acquired number before the game value is awarded is displayed,
Even during the display of the update display, a process of inserting a gaming value based on the operation of the insert operation means can be executed (for example, FIG. 132 and FIG. 133).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., a MAX BET button 132) for inputting a gaming value for use in a game from the accumulated gaming value;
A light emitting means (e.g., a bet button LED) for illuminating the insert operation means;
A gaming machine equipped with
the light emitting means is means for causing the input operation means to emit light when the accumulated game value is equal to or greater than a predetermined number;
The light emitting means does not emit light to the input operation means when the accumulated game value is less than the predetermined number, but can emit light to the input operation means when an effect using the input operation means (e.g., an effect that prompts an operation to determine the content of the effect to be executed in a bonus state) is being executed even if the accumulated game value is less than the predetermined number (e.g., timing T6 in FIG. 138 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and which are driven to rotate;
An input operation means (e.g., a MAX BET button 132) for inputting a gaming value for use in a game from the accumulated gaming value;
a start operation means (e.g., a start lever 135) capable of executing a start operation for instructing the start of rotation of the plurality of reels;
A plurality of stop operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) capable of executing a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels;
A winning determination means (e.g., the main control unit 300) that performs a winning determination based on the display state of the plurality of reels;
A game value providing means (e.g., a main control unit 300) capable of providing a game value in accordance with the winning determination;
A light emitting means (e.g., a bet button LED) for illuminating the insert operation means;
A game machine equipped with a display means (for example, a performance image display device 157),
the light emitting means is means for causing the input operation means to emit light when the accumulated game value is equal to or greater than a predetermined number,
The light emitting means does not emit light to the input operation means when the accumulated game value is less than the predetermined number, but can emit light to the input operation means when an effect using the input operation means (for example, an effect that prompts an operation to determine the content of the effect to be executed in a bonus state) is being executed even if the accumulated game value is less than the predetermined number (for example, at timing T6 in FIG. 138 ),
The display means is capable of displaying a first display (e.g., a display of the number of winning coins) showing a number corresponding to a game value won in a specific section (hereinafter referred to as the "winning number");
When the game value is awarded by the game value awarding means, an update display (e.g., a count-up display) indicating an update of the first display is displayed, and then the first display indicating the acquired number obtained by adding the awarded game value to the acquired number before the game value is awarded is displayed,
Even during the display of the update display, a process of inserting a gaming value based on the operation of the insert operation means can be executed (for example, FIG. 132 and FIG. 133).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., a MAX BET button 132) for inputting a gaming value for use in a game from the accumulated gaming value;
A light emitting means (e.g., a bet button LED) for illuminating the insert operation means;
A counting operation means (e.g., a counting button 171);
A gaming machine equipped with
the light emitting means is means for causing the input operation means to emit light when the accumulated game value is equal to or greater than a predetermined number;
The light emitting means is a means capable of illuminating the insert operation means even if the game value accumulated by the operation of the counting operation means becomes less than the predetermined number in a certain state (for example, during the bonus type selection display in FIG. 141) (for example, at timing T2 in FIG. 141),
The light emitting means is a means for not emitting light to the insert operation means when the game value accumulated by operating the counting operation means falls below the predetermined number in a state different from the certain state (for example, during the display of the demo screen in FIG. 142) (for example, timing T3 in FIG. 142),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and which are driven to rotate;
An input operation means (e.g., a MAX BET button 132) for inputting a gaming value for use in a game from the accumulated gaming value;
a start operation means (e.g., a start lever 135) capable of executing a start operation for instructing the start of rotation of the plurality of reels;
A plurality of stop operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) capable of executing a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels;
A winning determination means (e.g., the main control unit 300) that performs a winning determination based on the display state of the plurality of reels;
A game value granting means (e.g., a main control unit 300) capable of granting a game value in accordance with the winning determination;
A light emitting means (e.g., a bet button LED) for illuminating the insert operation means;
A counting operation means (e.g., a counting button 171);
A game machine equipped with a display means (for example, a performance image display device 157),
the light emitting means is means for causing the input operation means to emit light when the accumulated game value is equal to or greater than a predetermined number;
The light emitting means is a means capable of illuminating the insert operation means even if the game value accumulated by the operation of the counting operation means becomes less than the predetermined number in a certain state (for example, during the bonus type selection display in FIG. 141) (for example, at timing T2 in FIG. 141),
The light emitting means is a means for not emitting light to the insert operation means when the game value stored by operating the counting operation means falls below the predetermined number in a state other than the certain state (for example, during the display of the demo screen in FIG. 142) (for example, timing T3 in FIG. 142),
The display means is capable of displaying a first display (e.g., a display of the number of winning coins) showing a number corresponding to a game value won in a specific section (hereinafter referred to as the "winning number");
When the game value is awarded by the game value awarding means, an update display (e.g., a count-up display) indicating an update of the first display is displayed, and then the first display indicating the acquired number obtained by adding the awarded game value to the acquired number before the game value is awarded is displayed,
Even during the display of the update display, a process of inserting a gaming value based on the operation of the insert operation means can be executed (for example, FIG. 132 and FIG. 133).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
An input operation means (e.g., a MAX BET button 132) for inputting a gaming value for use in a game from the accumulated gaming value;
A light emitting means (e.g., a bet button LED) for illuminating the insert operation means;
A display means (e.g., a performance image display device 157);
A gaming machine equipped with
the light emitting means is means for causing the input operation means to emit light when the accumulated game value is equal to or greater than a predetermined number;
the light emitting means is a means for not illuminating the insert operation means when the accumulated game value is less than the predetermined number, but for being able to illuminate the insert operation means in a certain state (e.g., a state in which a bonus type selection screen is being displayed) even if the accumulated game value is less than the predetermined number;
The light emitting means is turned off when a certain display (for example, a demo screen, see FIG. 140) is being displayed on the display means even if the accumulated game value is less than the predetermined number and in the certain state.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and which are driven to rotate;
An input operation means (e.g., a MAX BET button 132) for inputting a gaming value for use in a game from the accumulated gaming value;
a start operation means (e.g., a start lever 135) capable of executing a start operation for instructing the start of rotation of the plurality of reels;
A plurality of stop operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) capable of executing a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels;
A winning determination means (e.g., the main control unit 300) that performs a winning determination based on the display state of the plurality of reels;
A game value providing means (e.g., a main control unit 300) capable of providing a game value in accordance with the winning determination;
A light emitting means (e.g., a bet button LED) for illuminating the insert operation means;
A game machine equipped with a display means (for example, a performance image display device 157),
the light emitting means is means for causing the input operation means to emit light when the accumulated game value is equal to or greater than a predetermined number,
the light emitting means does not emit light to the insert operation means when the accumulated game value is less than the predetermined number, but in a certain state (e.g., a state in which a bonus type selection screen is being displayed), can emit light to the insert operation means even if the accumulated game value is less than the predetermined number;
The light emitting means is turned off when a certain display (for example, a demo screen, see FIG. 140) is being displayed on the display means even if the accumulated game value is less than the predetermined number and in the certain state.
The display means is capable of displaying a first display (e.g., a display of the number of winning coins) showing a number corresponding to a game value won in a specific section (hereinafter referred to as the "winning number");
When the game value is awarded by the game value awarding means, an update display (e.g., a count-up display) indicating an update of the first display is displayed, and then the first display indicating the acquired number obtained by adding the awarded game value to the acquired number before the game value is awarded is displayed,
Even during the display of the update display, a process of inserting a gaming value based on the operation of the insert operation means can be executed (for example, FIG. 132 and FIG. 133).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and which are driven to rotate;
An input operation means (e.g., a MAX BET button 132) for inputting a gaming value for use in a game from the accumulated gaming value;
A light emitting means (e.g., a bet button LED) for illuminating the insert operation means;
A gaming machine equipped with
the light emitting means is means for causing the input operation means to emit light when the accumulated game value is equal to or greater than a predetermined number;
The light emitting means does not emit light to the input operation means when the accumulated game value is less than the predetermined number, but in a certain state in which the reel is pseudo-stopped, the light emitting means can emit light to the input operation means even if the accumulated game value is less than the predetermined number (for example, at timing T5 in FIG. 144 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A counting means (e.g., the main control unit 300) for updating a count value relating to a game value (e.g., the number of coins acquired);
A game control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) that controls game progress;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means capable of bringing the game into a game stop state (for example, a state in which a complete function is activated) in which the game cannot proceed based on the count value reaching a predetermined value,
There is a first display relating to the game value (for example, in FIG. 147, the number of coins to be paid out, the number of coins remaining to be acquired until the completion function is activated, in FIG. 148, the number of coins remaining to be acquired until the completion function is activated, and the number of coins acquired), and a second display relating to the game value (for example, in FIG. 147, the number of coins acquired, and in FIG. 148, the number of game medals),
The first display is updated when a gaming value is acquired,
The second display is updated when a gaming value is acquired,
When the game is stopped while the first display and the second display are being displayed, the display of the first display is terminated even if the display is being updated, but the display of the second display is not terminated (for example, FIG. 147(e)(f), FIG. 148(d)(e)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first display displays a gaming value paid out in one game (e.g., the number of paid out coins),
The second display displays a gaming value (e.g., the number of winning coins) acquired in a certain section (e.g., an AT gaming state),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A counting means (e.g., the main control unit 300) for updating a count value relating to a game value (e.g., the number of coins acquired);
A game control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) that controls game progress;
A counting operation means (e.g., a counting button 171);
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means capable of bringing the game into a game stop state (for example, a state in which a complete function is activated) in which the game cannot proceed based on the count value reaching a predetermined value,
There is a first display relating to the game value (for example, in FIG. 147, the number of coins to be paid out, the number of coins remaining to be acquired until the completion function is activated, in FIG. 148, the number of coins remaining to be acquired until the completion function is activated, and the number of coins acquired), and a second display relating to the game value (for example, in FIG. 147, the number of coins acquired, and in FIG. 148, the number of game medals),
The first display is updated when a gaming value is acquired,
The second display is updated when a gaming value is acquired,
When the game is stopped while the first display and the second display are being displayed, the display of the first display is terminated even if the display is being updated, but the display of the second display is not terminated (for example, FIG. 147(e)(f), FIG. 148(d)(e)),
A first notification (e.g., a counting completion notification) can be executed after the counting process based on the operation of the counting operation means is completed,
In the game stop state, the first notification is not executed after the counting process based on the operation of the counting operation means is completed (for example, FIG. 147(i), FIG. 148(g)),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first display displays a gaming value paid out in one game (e.g., the number of paid out coins),
The second display displays a gaming value (e.g., the number of winning coins) acquired in a certain section (e.g., an AT gaming state),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A counting means (e.g., the main control unit 300) for updating a count value relating to a game value (e.g., the number of coins acquired);
A game control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) that controls game progress;
A counting operation means (e.g., a counting button 171);
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means capable of bringing the game into a game stop state (for example, a state in which a complete function is activated) in which the game cannot proceed based on the count value reaching a predetermined value,
There is a first display relating to the game value (for example, in FIG. 147, the number of coins to be paid out, the number of coins remaining to be acquired until the completion function is activated, in FIG. 148, the number of coins remaining to be acquired until the completion function is activated, and the number of coins acquired), and a second display relating to the game value (for example, in FIG. 147, the number of coins acquired, and in FIG. 148, the number of game medals),
The first display is updated when a gaming value is acquired,
The second display is updated when a gaming value is acquired,
When the game is stopped while the first display and the second display are being displayed, the display of the first display is terminated even if the display is being updated, but the display of the second display is not terminated (for example, FIG. 147(e)(f), FIG. 148(d)(e)),
When the accumulated game value exceeds a first number, a counting operation promotion notification (for example, a message encouraging counting as shown in FIG. 148(b)) can be executed to promote the operation of the counting operation means;
When the game is stopped during the execution of the counting operation prompt notification, the counting operation prompt notification is terminated (for example, FIG. 148 (d) (e)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first display displays a gaming value paid out in one game (e.g., the number of paid out coins),
The second display displays a gaming value (e.g., the number of winning coins) acquired in a certain section (e.g., an AT gaming state),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and which are driven to rotate;
A winning determination means (e.g., the main control unit 300) that performs a winning determination based on the display state of the plurality of reels;
A counting means (e.g., the main control unit 300) for updating a count value relating to a game value (e.g., the number of coins acquired);
A game control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) that controls game progress;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means capable of bringing the game into a game stop state (for example, a state in which a complete function is activated) in which the game cannot proceed based on the count value reaching a predetermined value,
There is a first display relating to the game value (for example, in FIG. 147, the number of coins to be paid out, the number of coins remaining to be acquired until the completion function is activated, in FIG. 148, the number of coins remaining to be acquired until the completion function is activated, and the number of coins acquired), and a second display relating to the game value (for example, in FIG. 147, the number of coins acquired, and in FIG. 148, the number of game medals),
The first display is updated when a gaming value is acquired,
The second display is updated when a gaming value is acquired,
When the game is stopped while the first display and the second display are being displayed, the display of the first display is terminated even if the display is being updated, but the display of the second display is not terminated (for example, FIG. 147(e)(f), FIG. 148(d)(e)),
A first sound (e.g., a winning sound, a payout sound) based on a winning combination can be output.
Even if the game is stopped during output of the first sound, the output of the first sound is continued (for example, FIG. 148(d)(e)),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first display displays a gaming value paid out in one game (e.g., the number of paid out coins),
The second display displays a gaming value (e.g., the number of winning coins) acquired in a certain section (e.g., an AT gaming state),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and which are driven to rotate;
A winning determination means (e.g., the main control unit 300) that performs a winning determination based on the display state of the plurality of reels;
A counting means (e.g., the main control unit 300) for updating a count value relating to a game value (e.g., the number of coins acquired);
A game control means (e.g., a main control unit 300) that controls game progress;
A gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is a means capable of bringing the game into a game stop state (for example, a state in which a complete function is activated) in which the game cannot proceed based on the count value reaching a predetermined value,
There is a first display relating to the game value (for example, in FIG. 147, the number of coins to be paid out, the number of coins remaining to be acquired until the completion function is activated, in FIG. 148, the number of coins remaining to be acquired until the completion function is activated, and the number of coins acquired), and a second display relating to the game value (for example, in FIG. 147, the number of coins acquired, and in FIG. 148, the number of game medals),
The first display is updated when a gaming value is acquired,
The second display is updated when a gaming value is acquired,
When the game is stopped while the first display and the second display are being displayed, the display of the first display is terminated even if the display is being updated, but the display of the second display is not terminated (for example, FIG. 147(e)(f), FIG. 148(d)(e)),
A first sound (e.g., a winning sound, a payout sound) based on a winning combination can be output.
When the game is stopped during output of the first sound, the output of the first sound is terminated (for example, FIG. 147(e)(f)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first display displays a gaming value paid out in one game (e.g., the number of paid out coins),
The second display displays a gaming value (e.g., the number of winning coins) acquired in a certain section (e.g., an AT gaming state),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

<<Embodiment 2>>
Hereinafter, a gaming machine (slot machine) according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to Figure 150. Figure 150 is a perspective view of the exterior of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 150 corresponds to an example of a gaming machine of the present invention, and comprises a main body 101 and a front door 102 (door body) that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed relative to the main body 101. The front door 102 (door body) will be described later with reference to FIG. 151.

Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) with multiple types of symbols arranged on their outer periphery are housed inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are configured to rotate inside the slot machine 100. These reels 110 to 112 are rotated by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, each symbol is printed at equal intervals on a strip-shaped member in appropriate numbers, and the strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to form each reel 110-112 (see FIG. 153(a)). When viewed by the player, the symbols on the reels 110-112 are displayed vertically in roughly threes through symbol display windows 113 provided in front of each reel 110-112, making a total of nine symbols visible.

By spinning each of the reels 110-112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110-112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of multiple types of symbols. Note that, in addition to reels, electronic image display devices such as liquid crystal display devices can also be used as such display devices. Also, in this embodiment, three reels are provided inside and at the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and their installation positions are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is provided on the back of each of the reels 110 to 112 to illuminate the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113. It is preferable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that each symbol can be illuminated evenly. Inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (also called an index sensor, not shown) consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112, and a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of this optical sensor. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The notification lamp 123 is a lamp that notifies the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination) has been internally won in an internal lottery described below, or that a bonus game is in progress (special game state). The medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp that notifies the player that a game medal can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 is a lamp that notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no medal insertion is required) if a replay combination, which is one of the winning combinations, was won in the previous game. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for presentation purposes.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, each time the bet button (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "1-coin bet button") 130 is pressed, one medal is inserted up to a maximum of three medals, when the bet button (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "2-coin bet button") 131 is pressed, two medals are inserted, and when the bet button (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "MAX bet button") 132 is pressed, three medals are inserted. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as the MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up the number of lamps corresponding to the number of medals inserted, and when the specified number of medals have been inserted, the game start lamp 121 lights up to indicate that the game can be started.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot through which the player inserts medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) through the medal insertion slot 141; the term "insertion" includes both.

To the left of the medal slot 141 are a cross key 193a (first operating means, consisting of four buttons: up, down, right, and left. Hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the "volume buttons"), which are operating means for selecting menus and adjusting volume on the administrator screen SD, etc., which will be described later, an OK button 193b (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as the "cross key 193" or "menu button"), and an effect button (first operating means) 156 that accepts player operations in various effects.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (e.g., the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) in numerical form. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to a player as a result of winning some kind of winning combination, and is also used as an instruction monitor for performing push order effects. In this example, the stored number display 125, game information display 126, and payout number display 127 are configured as 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate. The operation of the start lever 135 is called the start operation of the game.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have begun to spin by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each of the reels 110 to 112. Note that light-emitting elements may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light-emitting elements can be lit to notify the player.

Hereinafter, the operations performed on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are referred to as stop operations, with the first stop operation being referred to as the first stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as the "first stop" or "first stop"), the next stop operation being referred to as the second stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as the "second stop" or "second stop"), and the final stop operation being referred to as the third stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as the "third stop" or "third stop").

The reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are called the first stop reel, the second stop reel, and the third stop reel, respectively. Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated to stop all of the reels 110 to 112 that are spinning is called the operation order (or push order).

If the left stop button 137 is represented as "left or R", the middle stop button 138 as "middle or C", and the right stop button 139 as "right or R", there are six types of operation sequences (pressing order) for the stop buttons 137 to 139: (1) left → middle → right operation sequence (left-right → middle or LCR), (2) left → right → middle operation sequence (left-right → middle or LRC), (3) middle → left → right operation sequence (middle left-right or CLR), (4) middle → right → left operation sequence (middle right left or CRL), (5) right → left → middle operation sequence (right left middle or RLC), and (6) right → middle → left operation sequence (right middle left or RCL).

The medal return button 133 is a button that can be pressed to remove medals that have been inserted and become stuck. The settlement button 134 is a button that can be used to settle medals that have been electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals that have been bet, and to dispense them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key can be inserted to unlock the front door 102 of the slot machine 100.

In this example, the settlement button 134 is arranged so as to protrude forward (towards the player, in the direction in which the front door 102 is opened) from the vertical surface 102b of the front door 102 (the outer surface of the slot machine 100 that is approximately perpendicular to the player and faces the player; see FIG. 175(a)). However, like the performance button 156, it may be arranged so as to protrude upward from the horizontal surface 102a of the front door 102 (in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the front door 102 is opened).

Below the stop button unit 136 is a title panel 162 on which the model name is displayed and various certificate stamps are attached. Below the title panel 162 are a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161. A sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Side lamps 144 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for livening up the game. A performance device 160 is provided above the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided above the performance device 160.

This performance device 160 is equipped with a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two shutters, a right shutter 163a and a left shutter 163b, which can be opened and closed horizontally, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (display means, hereafter also referred to as the "performance image display device") disposed behind this shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 appears on the front (player side) of the slot machine 100.

The display means does not have to be a liquid crystal display device, but may be a display device capable of displaying various performance images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. The display screen is rectangular and configured so that the player can see it in its entirety. In this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but it may also be square. Also, decorations (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, so that part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decorations, making the display screen appear irregular. In this embodiment, the display screen is flat, but it may also be curved.

<Internal structure>
Next, the internal structure of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to Figure 151(a). Figure 151(a) is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open.

The main body 101 is a box surrounded by a top panel 261, a left side panel 260, a right side panel 260, a bottom panel 264, and a back panel 242, and is open at the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that stores a main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation hole 249 provided at the top of the back panel 242, and three reels 110 to 112 are arranged below this main control board storage case 210.

The main control board housed in the main control board storage case 210 is provided with a main board display (light emitting means) 190 capable of displaying various game information. Details will be described later using FIG. 151(b), but this main board display 190 cannot be seen unless the front door 102 is opened, and is provided in a position that is difficult to see from the outside of the slot machine (game table) 100 (a position inside the slot machine 100 that is difficult to see from the player).

In this example, the main board display (light emitting means) 190 is located in a position that is difficult to see from the outside of the slot machine (game table) 100. By making the main board display (light emitting means) 190 invisible to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly believing that the light emitted by the main board display (light emitting means) 190 is part of the performance, and no disadvantage is caused to the player.

Also, near the main board display 190 (in this example, the left side panel 260 inside the main body 101 to which the hinge device 276 that is the rotation center of the front door 102 is attached), an LED-compatible sticker (first display unit) 192 is arranged, which indicates which operation means each of the multiple LEDs (light-emitting units) equipped on the main board display 190 corresponds to. Details of the LED-compatible sticker (first display unit) 192 will be described later using Figure 151 (c).

According to this example, even a manager who is not familiar with this gaming machine can check the LED-compatible sticker 192 provided on the gaming machine and determine which LED (light-emitting element) on the main board display 190 corresponds to which operating means, without having to check an instruction manual, etc., thereby improving convenience for gaming store staff, etc.

In particular, because the LED-compatible sticker 192 is disposed near the main board display 190, the correspondence between the LEDs on the main board display 190 and the operating means is easy to see and confirm, improving convenience for game store staff and others.

In addition, since the LED-compatible sticker 192 is disposed on the side panel 260 to which the hinge device 276, which is the center of rotation of the front door 102, is attached, the LED-compatible sticker 192 is easily visible when the front door 102 is opened, and the display of the LED-compatible sticker 192 is easy to confirm, improving the workability of game store staff, etc.

To the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, i.e., on the left side panel 260, is disposed a sub-control board storage case 220 that houses a sub-control board inside. In addition, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached to the right side panel 260, which is connected to the main control board and outputs information from the slot machine 100 to an external device.

In addition, inside the main body 101, there is provided a setting key switch (operation means; hereinafter also referred to as "setting key SW"; not shown) that can be switched between on (second operating state; hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ON") and off (first operating state; hereinafter sometimes referred to as "OFF") by a rotational operation. This setting key SW is an operation means for starting to change or check the settings of the setting values (in this example, settings 1 to 6) described below.

In addition, inside the main body 101, there is provided a reset switch (hereinafter also referred to as a "reset SW" or "reset button") 243 that can be pressed to change settings (setting value change operation). This reset SW 243 is an operating means that also functions as an error release switch that can be operated to resolve various errors (error resolution operation) described below.

These setting key SW and reset SW 243 are operating means that are located in a position that allows them to be operated only when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state, and are difficult or impossible to operate when the front door 102 (door body) is in the closed state. In other words, they are operating means that can only be operated by the manager of the gaming establishment (store clerk, etc.) and cannot be operated by players.

Inside the main body 101, there is also provided a setting value display device 101a (see FIG. 166(b)) capable of displaying the setting value. In this example, the setting value display device 101a is configured as a 7-segment display. Details will be described later, but when a setting change operation is performed, the setting value display device 101a displays the setting value (one of settings 1 to 6), and when the setting value is confirmed by operating the start lever 135, the setting value becomes hidden. On the other hand, when a setting confirmation operation is performed, a number indicating the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 101a.

On the lower panel 264, a medal payout device 180 (a device that pays out medals accumulated in a bucket) is disposed, and above this medal payout device 180, i.e., below the reels 110 to 112, a power supply device (power supply means) 252 having a power board is disposed, and a power switch (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "power SW") 244 is disposed on the front side of the power supply device 252. The power supply device (power supply means) 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit and each device such as the main control unit 300, sub control units 400, 500, etc., which will be described later. In addition, it is equipped with a storage circuit (e.g. a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined part (e.g. the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (e.g. 10 days) even after the power from the outside is cut off.

The medal auxiliary storage 240 is disposed to the right of the medal payout device 180, with an overflow terminal disposed behind it (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connector for connecting a power cord 264, which is connected to the power cord 264 and extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 provided in the back panel 242 of the main body 101.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side panel 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276 and is a door that can be opened and closed relative to the main body 101.

In this example, the front door 102, which is locked in a closed state, can be opened by inserting a key held by the manager of the gaming facility into the door key hole 140 (see FIG. 150). Therefore, the manager can unlock the front door 102 (change it from a closed state to an open state), but anyone other than the manager (e.g., a player) cannot unlock the front door 102.

An optical sensor (detection means; hereafter also referred to as the "open/close sensor"; not shown) consisting of a light-projecting section and a light-receiving section is provided on the right side panel 260 of the main body 101, and is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the front door 102 passes between the light-projecting section and the light-receiving section of this open/close sensor.

The main control unit 300 monitors the states of various sensors 318, including this open/close sensor, during device monitoring processing of the main control timer interrupt processing described below. When the front door 102 is closed and the light-shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where it blocks light from the light-emitting part of the open/close sensor of the main body 101, the open/close sensor outputs a signal (e.g., a low-level signal) indicating that it is in a closed detection state to the main control unit 300.

On the other hand, when the front door 102 is opened and the light-shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where it does not block the light from the light-emitting part of the opening/closing sensor of the main body 101, the opening/closing sensor outputs a signal (e.g., a high-level signal) indicating that it is in the open detection state to the main control unit 300.

In other words, the open/close sensor is a detection means capable of detecting the open/closed state of the front door (door body) 102, and when the front door 102 is in a closed state (closed state), the detection state becomes a closed detection state, and when the front door 102 is in an open state (open state), the detection state becomes an open detection state.

The "detection means" according to the present invention is not limited to optical sensors, but may be, for example, magnetic sensors, proximity switches, micro switches, Hall elements, etc. Also, it is not limited to sensors that always switch between an open detection state and a closed detection state when the door is opened or closed, but may be capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state even when the door is open, or conversely, may be capable of changing the detection state to an open detection state even when the door is closed.

The open/close sensor in this example is configured so that, when a predetermined operation is performed, the detection state becomes a closed detection state even when the front door (door body) 102 is in an open state. Specifically, when the front door 102 is in an open state, a light-shielding piece of a certain length is inserted between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 and fixed with tape or the like to block the light from the light-emitting section of the open/close sensor of the main body 101, thereby forcibly changing the detection state of the open/close sensor to a closed detection state even when the front door 102 is in an open state.

The "predetermined operation" according to the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, a DIP switch may be provided to set the open/close sensor to a closed detection state, and the predetermined operation may be to operate this DIP switch. Also, if the detection means is configured with a magnetic sensor, the detection state of the open/close sensor may be set to a closed detection state by bringing a magnet close to the sensor.

Above the pattern display window 113, there are provided the performance device 160, a performance control board (not shown) that controls this performance device 160, and a speaker 272. Below the pattern display window 113, there are provided a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, and a passage 266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals, etc. into the medal tray 161. Furthermore, a speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 181.

<Main board display, LED compatible sticker>
Next, the main board display 190 and the LED compatible sticker 192 will be described with reference to Figures 151(b) and 151(c). Figure 151(b) is a front view showing an example of the main board display 190, and Figure 151(c) is a front view showing an example of the LED compatible sticker 192.

The main board display (light emitting means) 190 is a display consisting of multiple (eight in this example) LEDs (light emitting sections), and predetermined game information can be notified by lighting one, multiple, or all of the eight LEDs a-h. Note that the "light emitting means" according to the present invention is not limited to a display consisting of LEDs, and lamps, seven-segment displays, liquid crystal displays, etc. may also be applied. It goes without saying that the game information that can be notified by the "light emitting means" according to the present invention is not limited to eight types.

The LEDa on the main board display 190 is an LED that is lit when the MAX bet button 132 is being operated (in this example, when the detection signal state of the bet button 132 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on).

As shown in FIG. 151(b), below LEDa on the main board display 190 (within the range where the light from LEDa reaches), identification information for identifying LEDa (in this example, the string "LED1") is printed, and as shown in FIG. 151(c), at the position corresponding to LEDa on the LED-compatible sticker 192, a number (in this example, 1) corresponding to the identification information for LEDa (the string "LED1") and identification information for identifying the operating means corresponding to LEDa (in this example, the string "MAX bet button") are printed.

The LEDb on the main board display 190 is an LED that is lit when the 1-coin bet button 130 is being operated (in this example, when the detection signal state of the 1-coin bet button 130 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on).

As shown in FIG. 151(b), below LEDb on the main board display 190 (within the range where the light from LEDb reaches), identification information for identifying LEDb (in this example, the string "LED2") is printed, and as shown in FIG. 151(c), at the position corresponding to LEDb on the LED-compatible sticker 192, a number (in this example, 2) corresponding to the identification information for LEDb (the string "LED2") and identification information for identifying the operating means corresponding to LEDb (in this example, the string "1-coin bet button") are printed.

The LEDc on the main board display 190 is an LED that is lit when the checkout button 134 is being operated (in this example, when the detection signal state of the checkout button 134 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on).

As shown in FIG. 151(b), below LEDc on the main board display 190 (within the range where the light from LEDc reaches), identification information for identifying LEDc (in this example, the string "LED3") is printed, and as shown in FIG. 151(c), at the position corresponding to LEDc on the LED-compatible sticker 192, a number (in this example, 3) corresponding to the identification information for LEDc (the string "LED3") and identification information for identifying the operating means corresponding to LEDc (in this example, the string "checkout button") are printed.

The LEDd on the main board display 190 is an LED that is lit when the start lever 135 is being operated (in this example, when the detection signal state of the start lever 135 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on).

As shown in FIG. 151(b), below LEDd on the main board display 190 (within the range where the light from LEDd reaches), identification information for identifying LEDd (in this example, the string "LED4") is printed, and as shown in FIG. 151(c), at the position corresponding to LEDd on the LED-compatible sticker 192, a number (in this example, 4) corresponding to the identification information for LEDd (the string "LED4") and identification information for identifying the operating means corresponding to LEDd (in this example, the string "start lever") are printed.

The LEDe of the main board display 190 is an LED that is lit when the left stop button 137 is being operated (in this example, when the detection signal state of the stop button 137 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on).

As shown in FIG. 151(b), below the LEDe of the main board display 190 (within the range where the light from the LEDe reaches), identification information for identifying the LEDe (in this example, the string "LED5") is printed, and as shown in FIG. 151(c), at the position corresponding to the LEDe on the LED-compatible sticker 192, a number (in this example, 5) corresponding to the identification information for the LEDe (the string "LED5") and identification information for identifying the operating means corresponding to the LEDe (in this example, the string "left stop button") are printed.

The LEDf on the main board display 190 is an LED that is lit when the stop button 138 is being operated (in this example, when the detection signal state of the stop button 138 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on).

As shown in FIG. 151(b), below the LEDf of the main board display 190 (within the range where the light from the LEDf reaches), identification information for identifying the LEDf (in this example, the string "LED6") is printed, and as shown in FIG. 151(c), at the position corresponding to the LEDf on the LED-compatible sticker 192, a number (in this example, 6) corresponding to the identification information for the LEDf (the string "LED6") and identification information for identifying the operating means corresponding to the LEDf (in this example, the string "middle stop button") are printed.

The LEDg of the main board display 190 is an LED that is lit when the right stop button 139 is being operated (in this example, when the detection signal state of the stop button 139 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on).

As shown in FIG. 151(b), below the LEDg of the main board display 190 (within the range where the light from the LEDg reaches), identification information for identifying the LEDg (in this example, the string "LED7") is printed, and as shown in FIG. 151(c), at the position corresponding to the LEDg on the LED-compatible sticker 192, a number (in this example, 7) corresponding to the identification information of the LEDg (the string "LED7") and identification information for identifying the operating means corresponding to the LEDg (in this example, the string "Right stop button") are printed.

The LEDh of the main board display 190 is an LED that is lit when the reset button 243 is being operated (in this example, when the detection signal of the reset SW243 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on).

As shown in FIG. 151(b), below the LEDh of the main board display 190 (within the range where the light from LEDh reaches), identification information for identifying the LEDh (in this example, the string "LED8") is printed, and as shown in FIG. 151(c), at the position corresponding to the LEDh on the LED-compatible sticker 192, a number (in this example, 8) corresponding to the identification information of the LEDh (the string "LED8") and identification information for identifying the operating means corresponding to the LEDg (in this example, the string "reset button") are printed.

According to this example, even a manager who is not familiar with this gaming machine can check the LED-compatible sticker 192 provided on the gaming machine and determine which LED (light-emitting element) on the main board display 190 corresponds to which operating means, without having to check an instruction manual, etc., thereby improving convenience for gaming store staff, etc.

In addition, identification information for identifying the LED is provided below the LED on the main board display 190 (within the range of the light from the light-emitting part), making it easy to identify the LED that is emitting light. In addition, by illuminating the identification information with the LED, the visibility of the identification information can be improved, improving the workability of game store staff, etc.

The notification mode of each LEDa-h is not limited to lighting the LED, but may be such that the LED blinks or goes off to notify the respective state. The main board display 190 may be capable of notifying information related to the game, and may notify the operation status of operation means other than the exemplified operation means, various errors, and information other than the exemplified operation information (for example, game status, winning combination, winning combination). The arrangement and number of LEDs, and the names of the identification information for identifying the LEDs and operation means are not limited to this example.

In addition, in this example, the main board display (light emitting means) 190 is disposed on the main control board, but the "light emitting means" according to the present invention may be disposed on another board (for example, a sub-control board or a power supply board).

<Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to Figure 152. Note that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 is broadly composed of a main control unit (main control means) 300 that controls the progress of the game, a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the main presentation in response to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as "commands") sent by the main control unit 300, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands sent by the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and this basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control program data, lottery data used during internal lottery of winning combinations, and reel stop positions, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input and output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, and a WDT (watchdog timer) 314. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later.

The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 determines an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time for interrupts is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 is equipped with a random number generation circuit 316 (which has two random number generation circuits built in) that derives a number in the range of 0 to 65535 each time it receives a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start-up signal output circuit 338 that outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When a start-up signal is input from this start-up signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 starts game control (starts the main control unit main processing described below).

The random number generation circuit 316 generates random numbers to be used in the basic circuit 302. There are two main methods for generating random numbers in the random number generation circuit 316: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a number that counts up (down) at a predetermined time interval is obtained and the number is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode uses a seed of a random number to perform a calculation using a predetermined function (e.g., a modulus function) and derives the result of this calculation as a random number. The second method reads a number from a random number table in which numbers in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derives the read number as a random number. The random number generation circuit 316 obtains irregular values by using white noise superimposed on the signals input from the various sensors 318 to the sensor circuit 320. The random number generation circuit 316 uses the value thus obtained as the initial value for a counter that counts up (down) in counter mode, as a seed for a random number, or when determining the start position for reading the random number table.

The main control unit 300 is also provided with a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 monitors the status of various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal acceptance sensor for medals inserted from medal insertion slot 141, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, optical sensor of reel 110, optical sensor of reel 111, optical sensor of reel 112, open/close sensor, setting key SW sensor, reset SW 243 sensor, etc.) at each interrupt time.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316. The random number generation circuit 316 receives this signal, latches the value at that timing, and stores it in a register that stores random numbers to be used in the lottery.

Two medal acceptance sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion port 141, and detect whether a medal has passed through. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135, and detect the start operation by the player. The stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, and stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, and bet button 132 sensor are provided on each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and detect the insertion operation when medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into a game. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the medals electronically stored are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact sensor or a contact sensor.

The optical sensors of reel 110, reel 111, and reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of each of reels 110 to 112, and go to L level every time a light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes by. When CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

As described above, the open/close sensor is a sensor capable of detecting the open/close state of the front door (door body) 102. When the front door 102 is closed, the open/close sensor outputs a signal (e.g., a low-level signal) indicating that the front door 102 is in a closed state to the CPU 304. On the other hand, when the front door 102 is open, the open/close sensor outputs a signal (e.g., a high-level signal) indicating that the front door 102 is in an open state to the CPU 304.

The setting key SW sensor and reset 243 SW sensor are installed on each SW and detect the operation of the SW by the arcade staff, etc.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 that selects the inserted medals, a drive circuit 326 that drives the motor provided in the medal payout device 180, and a drive circuit 328 that drives various lamps 336 (winning line indicator lamp 120, notification lamp 123, medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, number of stored medals indicator 125, game information indicator 126, number of paid out medals indicator 127, main board indicator 190).

The basic circuit 302 is also connected to an information output circuit 334 (external centralized terminal board 248), and the main control unit 300 outputs game information (e.g., game status) of the slot machine 100 to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from the power supply unit (power supply means) 252 (see FIG. 151). The voltage monitoring circuit 330 outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped when the voltage value of the power supply is below a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment).

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for sending commands to the first sub-control unit 400, enabling communication with the first sub-control unit 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be sent from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control section>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands sent by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control commands. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, data for controlling the backlight lighting pattern and various displays, etc.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a sound source IC 418, which is connected to speakers 272, 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272, 277 in response to commands from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which sound data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and sound data acquired from this ROM is amplified by the amplifier and output from the speakers 272, 277.

The first sub-controller 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, to which various lamps 420 (upper lamps, lower lamps, side lamps 144, title panel 162 lamps, etc.) are connected via an input/output interface.

The first sub-controller 400 also includes a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is connected to the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a sensor circuit 426, which is connected via the input interface to various sensors 428 (cross button 193 sensor, effect button 156 sensor) capable of detecting the pressing of the cross button 193 (cross key (volume button) 193a, OK button 193b) and the effect button 156. The CPU 404 monitors the status of the cross button 193 (cross key (volume button) 193a, OK button 193b) and the effect button 156 sensor at each interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the performance device 160, including display control of the liquid crystal display device 157. The second sub-control unit 500 may be configured with multiple control units, such as a control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 157 and a control unit that controls various performance drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163).

The second sub-control unit 500 has a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands sent by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on these control commands. This basic circuit 502 is equipped with a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling the input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The second sub-control unit 500 is also provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), to which a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the performance image display device 157.

The second sub-control unit 500 is also provided with a sensor circuit 532, to which a shutter sensor 538 capable of detecting the position of the shutter 163 is connected via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 538 at each interrupt time.

<Pattern arrangement>
The symbol arrangement on each of the reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to Figure 153(a). Note that Figure 153(a) shows the symbol arrangement on each of the reels (left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112) in a two-dimensional view.

On each of the reels 110 to 112, multiple types of symbols (eight types in this embodiment) as shown on the right side of the figure are arranged on a predetermined number of frames (21 frames numbered 0 to 20 in this embodiment). The numbers 0 to 20 shown on the left side of the figure are numbers that indicate the arrangement position of the symbols on each of the reels 110 to 112. For example, in this embodiment, the "replay" symbol is arranged on the number 1 frame of the left reel 110, the "bell" symbol is arranged on the number 0 frame of the middle reel 111, and the "watermelon" symbol is arranged on the number 2 frame of the right reel 112.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to Figure 153 (b). Note that Figure 153 (b) shows the types of winning combinations (including activated combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the activation or payout of each winning combination.

Of the winning roles in this embodiment, the big bonus (BB1, BB2) and regular bonus (RB) are roles that transition to bonus play, and replay is a role that allows replay without inserting new medals; they are sometimes called "operating roles" to be distinguished from the winning roles, but "winning roles" in this embodiment include the operating roles of big bonus, regular bonus, and replay. Also, "winning" in this embodiment includes the case where a symbol combination of an operating role that does not involve a medal payout (does not involve the payment of medals) is displayed on an active line, and includes, for example, winning the big bonus, regular bonus, and replay.

The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include big bonuses (BB1, BB2), regular bonuses (RB), small combinations (cherry, watermelon, bell), and replay combinations. It goes without saying that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these and can be selected at will.

"Big Bonus (BB1, BB2)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "BB") is a special role (operating role) that starts a special game, Big Bonus Game (BB Game), when it wins. The corresponding symbol combinations are "White 7-White 7-White 7" for BB1 and "Blue 7-Blue 7-Blue 7" for BB2. Also, flags are carried over for BB1 and BB2. That is, when BB1 and BB2 are internally won, a flag indicating this is set (stored in a specified area of RAM 308 of main control unit 300), but even if BB1 and BB2 are not won in that game, the flag indicating the internal win is maintained in the set state until they are won, and BB1 and BB2 are internally won even in the next game and thereafter, and the symbol combination corresponding to BB1, "White 7-White 7-White 7", and the symbol combination corresponding to BB2, "Blue 7-Blue 7-Blue 7", are both in a state to win.

"Regular bonus (RB)" is a special role (operating role) that starts a regular bonus game (RB game) when it is won. The corresponding symbol combination is "bonus-bonus-bonus". Note that for RB, the flag is carried over in the same way as for BB described above. However, (details will be described later) in big bonus game (BB game), the start condition is not necessarily an internal win in regular bonus game (RB game) or a symbol combination being displayed on the winning line, but rather the regular bonus game starts after the big bonus game starts, and when one regular bonus game ends, the next regular bonus game starts immediately, so that the regular bonus game starts automatically.

"Small prizes (cherry, watermelon, bell)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "cherry", "watermelon" and "bell") are winning prizes that result in a specified number of medals being paid out, and the corresponding symbol combinations are "cherry-ANY-ANY" for cherry, "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" for watermelon, and "bell-bell-bell" for bell. The corresponding number of medals paid out is as shown in the figure. In the case of "cherry-ANY-ANY", the symbol on the left reel 110 needs to be "cherry", and the symbols on the center reel 111 and right reel 112 can be any symbol.

"Replay" is a winning combination (operating combination) that allows you to play the next time without inserting medals (game media), and no medals are paid out. The corresponding symbol combination is "Replay-Replay-Replay."

<Types of RT game states>
Next, the types and transitions of the RT game states in the slot machine 100 will be described.

<Low probability of replay (RT1)>
The low replay probability state (RT1) is the default RT-type gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as the "normal gaming state") that is initially set immediately after the slot machine 100 is turned on, and is a gaming state that is relatively more disadvantageous to the player than other gaming states.

In this example, in this low replay probability state (RT1), if replay role 2 (promotion replay 1) or replay role 3 (promotion replay 2) is won, the state transitions to a high replay probability state (RT2) described below. Also, in this low replay probability state (RT1), if a special role is internally won, the state transitions to a special role internal win state (RT3) described below.

<High replay probability state (RT2)>
The high replay probability state is a game state in which the internal winning probability of replay is higher than that of the low replay probability state (RT1).

In this example, if a special role is internally won in this high replay probability state (RT2), the game will transition to a special role internal win state (RT3), which will be described later.

<Special role internal winning state (RT3)>
The special role internal winning state (RT3) is a state in which an internal winning flag corresponding to a special role is set to ON, and a game state in which a player can display a symbol combination corresponding to the special role corresponding to this flag by performing a stop operation at a specified timing.

In this example, if a special role is won in this special role internal winning state (RT3), the game will transition to the special game state (RT4) described below.

<Special game state (RT4)>
The special gaming state (RT4) is the most advantageous gaming state for the player among all gaming states. In this example, when a specified number of coins (e.g., 200 coins) is paid out in the special gaming state (RT4), the state transitions to the low replay probability state (RT1).

In this example, the conditions for ending the special game state (RT4) are not particularly limited, and may be, for example, when a predetermined combination is internally won, when a predetermined number of wins (e.g., eight wins) are made, or when a predetermined number of games (e.g., six games) have been played.

<Main processing of main control unit>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 154. Note that Fig. 154 is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit main processing.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when power is applied. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that receives this startup signal is reset and started by a reset interrupt, and executes the main control unit main processing according to a control program previously stored in the ROM 306.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial setting processes are performed in step S101. Details will be described later, but this initial setting process involves processes related to initial settings, setting changes, recovery processes, etc.

In step S102, a medal insertion/start operation acceptance process is executed. Here, the sensor circuit 320 detects whether an electronic medal insertion operation using the bet buttons 130-132 or a direct medal insertion operation from the medal insertion slot 141 has been performed, and if an insertion operation has been performed, the winning line indicator lamp 120 is turned on according to the number of medals inserted. In addition, preparations are made to send a medal insertion command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that medals have been inserted. Note that if a replay role was won in the previous game, a process is performed to insert the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game, eliminating the need for the player to insert medals.

In addition, a check is made as to whether the start lever 135 has been operated based on detection by the sensor circuit 320, and if it is determined that the start lever has been operated, the number of medals inserted is confirmed and preparations are made to send a start lever acceptance command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated.

In step S103, the number of inserted medals is determined, and a winning line determination process is performed to determine the valid winning lines.

In step S104, a random number acquisition process is performed to acquire a random number generated by the random number generating circuit 316, and in the next step S105, a winning role internal lottery process is performed. In this winning role internal lottery process, a winning role lottery table stored in ROM 306 is read out according to the current game state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the acquired random number value, and preparations are made to send an internal lottery command indicating the result of this internal lottery to the first sub-control unit 400. If any winning role (including an activated role) is internally won as a result of the internal lottery, the flag for that winning role is turned on.

In step S106, a reel stop data selection process is performed to select reel stop data based on the internal lottery results of the winning combination internal lottery process. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In step S106, preparations are also made to send a reel stop data command including information about the selected reel stop data to the first sub-control unit 400. In step S107, a reel rotation start process is executed to start the rotation of all reels 110 to 112.

In step S108, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control processing, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any of the stop buttons is pressed, the stop table of the reel stop data is referenced to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button, and one of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of pull-in frames set in the stop table. When all of the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S109.

In addition, in this step S108, for each stop operation, preparations are made to send to the first sub-control unit 400 a stop button acceptance command related to the stop button 137-139 that was operated to stop (more specifically, for the first stop operation, a stop button acceptance 1 command, for the second stop operation, a stop button acceptance 2 command, and for the third stop operation, a stop button acceptance 3 command), and for each reel stop, preparations are made to send to the first sub-control unit 400 a reel stop command related to the reel stop position (more specifically, for the first stopped reel, a reel stop 1 command, for the second stop operation, a reel stop 2 command, and for the third stop operation, a reel stop 3 command).

In step S109, a winning determination process is performed to determine whether a winning combination has been achieved. In this winning determination process, if a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been achieved. For example, if "Bell-Bell-Bell" is lined up on the activated winning line, it is determined that a minor combination (Bell) has been achieved. In addition, in this step S109, preparations are made to send a winning determination command indicating the result of the winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S110, a medal payout process is performed. In the medal payout process, if a winning combination that has a payout is achieved, the number of medals corresponding to that winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S111, a game state control process is performed. In this game state control process, processing related to the transition of each game state of the RT system is performed, and the game state is transitioned when the start condition or end condition is met. In addition, preparations are made to send a game state command that includes information indicating the current game state of the RT system.

This completes one game. After this, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-mentioned process. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting and transmission process (step S206) of the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Initial setting process>
Next, the initial setting process (step S101) in the main process of the main control unit described with reference to Fig. 154 will be described with reference to Fig. 155. Note that Fig. 155 is a flow chart showing the flow of the initial setting process.

In step S201, startup initial settings are performed. In these startup initial settings, a stack initial value is set (provisional setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupt prohibition is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and operation permission and initial values are set to the WDT 314.

In step S202, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in RAM 308. If there is an abnormality, the process proceeds to step S207 to execute initialization processing, and if there is no abnormality, the process proceeds to step S203.

In step S203, it is determined whether the front door 102 is open (door open) or not, and if the door is open, the process proceeds to step S204, and if the door is not open, the process proceeds to step S205 to execute the reset process. Also, in step S204, it is determined whether the setting key SW is ON or OFF, and if it is ON, the process proceeds to step S206 to execute the setting change process, and if it is OFF, the process proceeds to step S205 to execute the reset process.

In the recovery process of step S205, a process is performed to recover the slot machine 100 to the state before the power failure (e.g., recovery of the recovery data saved in RAM 308 in the power failure process of step S411 of the main control unit timer interrupt process), and then the initial setting process is terminated.

In step S206, the setting change process is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S207. As will be described in detail later, this setting change process involves processing related to the setting change.

In step S207, an initialization process is performed. In this initialization process, a process for initializing the data in RAM 308 (RAM clear) is performed, and then the initial setting process is terminated.

<Settings change process>
Next, the setting change process (step S206) in the initial setting process described with reference to Fig. 155 will be described with reference to Fig. 156. Note that Fig. 156 is a flow chart showing the flow of the setting change process.

The slot machine 100 can transition to a state (setting change mode) in which the setting value can be changed (setting change) when the power is turned on with the front door (door body) 102 open and the setting key SW provided inside the main body 101 turned on (second operating state) (or when the setting key SW is turned on before a predetermined time has elapsed after the power is turned on (before the main control unit 300 checks the on/off state of the setting key SW)).

In step S301, a process is performed to initialize the data in RAM 308 (RAM clear), and in the next step S302, preparations are made to send a setting change start command to the first sub-control unit 400, indicating that a setting change is to be started. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting change start command from the main control unit 300, it executes a process to start displaying the administrator screen.

In step S303, the interrupt status is set to "setting change in progress." This causes various game processes in step S404 of the main control unit timer interrupt process described below to be executed according to the setting change in progress.

In step S304, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a. For example, if the current setting value is setting 6, the number 6 indicating setting 6 is displayed. In step S305, it is determined whether the reset SW243 has been operated. If it has been operated, the current setting value is changed. If it has not been operated, the process of step S305 is repeated until operation of the start lever 135 is accepted in step S307.

More specifically, in the processing of steps S305 to S307, each time an operation of the reset SW 243 is detected, the currently set value 1 to 6 is updated by incrementing it by 1, and when the set value exceeds 6, it is reset back to 1, and this is repeatedly executed to change the set value. Also, if it is determined in step S307 that the start lever 135 has been operated, the operation of changing the set value by the reset SW 243 is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S308.

Note that if the start lever 135 is operated without pressing the reset SW 243, or if the setting value goes through one cycle (e.g., setting 5 → setting 6 → setting 1 → ... → setting 5) by repeatedly pressing the reset SW 243, the setting will be the same as the previous setting.

In step S308, the setting value displayed on the setting value display device 101a is stored in the RAM 308 as a new setting value (the setting value is confirmed), and in the next step S309, the display on the setting value display device 101a is erased, and the setting value is hidden.

In this example, the setting value is confirmed when the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted, but a process of determining whether the front door 102 is open or not may be added, and the setting value may be confirmed only when the front door 102 is open. In this case, if the front door 102 is closed, the setting value cannot be confirmed, but the display of the administrator screen may continue.

In step S310, it is determined whether the setting key SW is OFF or ON. If it is ON, the process of step S310 is repeated. If it is OFF, the process proceeds to step S311 to end the setting change. In step S311, preparations are made to send a setting change end command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that the setting change is to be ended. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting change end command from the main control unit 300, it executes a process to end the display of the administrator screen.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 157. Note that Fig. 157 is a flow chart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 is equipped with a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger to start main control unit timer interrupt processing at the predetermined cycle.

In step S401, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, the values of each register of CPU 304 are temporarily saved to a stack area, among other processes. In step S402, WDT 314 is periodically restarted (in this embodiment, once every approximately 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt) to prevent the count value of WDT 314 from exceeding the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and causing a WDT interrupt (to prevent detection of a processing abnormality).

In step S403, an input port status update process is performed. In this input port status update process, detection signals from the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input ports of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of detection signals, and the presence or absence of detection signals is stored in signal status storage areas partitioned for each of the various sensors 318 in the RAM 308. In step S404, various game processes are performed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed. In step S405, a timer update process is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step S406, a command setting and transmission process is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type contained in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine presentation control in response to changes in game control in the main control unit 300, and it becomes possible to determine the content of presentation control based on the command data information contained in the output schedule information.

In step S407, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to an information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S408, device monitoring processing is performed. Details will be described later, but this device monitoring processing includes setting value confirmation processing, door opening monitoring processing, settlement processing, etc.

In step S409, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on or not. If the low voltage signal is on (if a power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S411, and if the low voltage signal is off (if a power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S410.

In step S410, various processes are performed to end the timer interrupt end process. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S401 are set back to the original registers, and the process returns to the main process of the main control unit. Meanwhile, in step S411, specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power outage when power is restored are saved as return data in a specified area of RAM 308, power outage processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed, and the process returns to the main process of the main control unit.

<Device monitoring process>
Next, the device monitoring process (step S408) in the main control unit timer interrupt process explained with reference to Fig. 157 will be explained with reference to Fig. 158. Note that Fig. 158 is a flow chart showing the flow of the device monitoring process.

In step S501, the setting value confirmation process is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S502. In this setting value confirmation process, processing related to the setting confirmation is performed.

When the front door (door body) 102 of the slot machine 100 is opened and the power is turned on, and the setting key SW provided inside the main body 101 is turned on (second operating state), the slot machine 100 can transition to a state (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting values can be confirmed (setting confirmation).

Here, checking the setting refers to checking the setting value of the gaming machine. In this example, by pressing the operating means (setting switch), the initially set value (for example, setting 1) or the setting value set by changing the setting (any of settings 1 to 6) is displayed on the payout number display 127, making it possible to check the setting value.

In addition, in the setting confirmation mode, when the setting key SW is turned off (first operating state) (or the setting key SW is removed after the setting key SW is turned off) and the front door 102 is closed, the state in which the setting values can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode) ends and the machine transitions to a playable state (normal game state) in which game play can proceed.

In step S502, a door open monitoring process is performed. In the door open monitoring process (determination means), the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the open/close sensor, and when it detects a signal indicating a closed detection state, it stores in RAM 308 closed detection information indicating that the front door 102 has been detected as closed (closed state), and prepares to send a door closed detection command indicating that the front door 102 has been detected as closed to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this door closed detection command from the main control unit 300, it stores the closed detection information indicating that the front door 102 has been detected as closed (in this example, information indicating "closed" and the date and time of closure) in RAM 408 in chronological order as history information.

Meanwhile, in the door open monitoring process, the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the open/close sensor, and when it detects a signal indicating an open detection state, it stores open detection information indicating that the front door 102 has been detected as open (open state) in RAM 308, and prepares to send a door open detection command indicating that the front door 102 has been detected as open to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this door open detection command from the main control unit 300, it stores the open detection information indicating that the front door 102 has been detected as open (in this example, information indicating "open" and the date and time of opening) in RAM 408 in chronological order as history information, and issues a door open notification.

The door open notification will be described later, but in this example, when the front door 102 is in the door body open state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode, and an opening sound (e.g., a voice saying "Door is open") is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277). Note that the mode of the door open notification is not particularly limited, and for example, the character string "Door is open" may be displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

In step S503, the settlement process is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S504. In this settlement process, the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the settlement button 134 sensor during the valid period of the settlement button 134 (for example, the period from when play can be started until operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), and when it detects a signal indicating that the settlement button 134 has been operated, it performs a process to settle the medals that have been electronically stored, and also makes preparations to send a settlement command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that the process to settle the medals has been performed.

In step S504, other device monitoring processing is performed, and then the device monitoring processing is terminated. In other device monitoring processing, error notification start processing, error notification end processing, etc. are performed.

Errors that may occur in the slot machine 100 according to this embodiment include a door open error, a hopper empty error, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error), medal insertion error 2-4, medal payout error 1-3, overflow error, RAM failure, winning error, etc.

A door open error is an error that notifies the user that the door of the gaming machine is open. It occurs when the front door 102 is opened (an error is detected) and is resolved when the front door 102 is closed (an error is not detected).

As described above, in the door open monitoring process, the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the open/close sensor, and when it detects a signal indicating a closed detection state, it sends a door closed detection command to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 stores the closed detection information (in this example, information indicating "closed" and the date and time of closing) in chronological order in RAM 408 as history information, while when it detects a signal indicating an open detection state, it sends a door open detection command to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 stores the open detection information (in this example, information indicating "open" and the date and time of opening) in chronological order in RAM 408 as history information and issues a door open notification.

The hopper empty error is a payout error related to the payout of medals, and occurs when the number of medals stored in the hopper contained inside the main body 101 falls below a specified number (an error is detected), and is resolved by refilling the hopper with more medals than the specified number (an error is not detected).

Medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error) occurs when an inserted medal gets stuck in the medal selector, etc. (error detection state occurs), and is resolved when the cause of the error is removed and the error release switch (reset SW243 in this example) is operated (error non-detection state occurs). Medal insertion error 2 occurs when the number of medals inserted is equal to or exceeds the specified number (error detection state occurs), and is resolved by changing the setting value or clearing the RAM (error non-detection state occurs).

Medal insertion error 3 occurs when either insertion sensor 1 or insertion sensor 2 is turned on other than during the medal insertion process (an error detection state occurs), and medal insertion error 4 occurs when the inserted medal does not pass through insertion sensor 1 and insertion sensor 2 properly (an error detection state occurs), and is resolved (an error non-detection state occurs) when the cause of the error is removed and the error release switch (in this example, reset SW243) is operated.

Medal payout error 1 occurs when no medals are paid out for a certain period of time while the medal payout device is operating (an error detection state occurs), medal payout error 2 occurs when medals are stuck while the medal payout device is operating (an error detection state occurs), and medal payout error 3 occurs when either payout sensor 1 or payout sensor 2 turns on except when a medal payout process is in progress (an error detection state occurs), and both are resolved (an error non-detection state occurs) when the cause of the error is removed and the error release switch (in this example, reset SW243) is operated.

An overflow abnormality occurs when the overflow terminal of the auxiliary medal storage is turned on (error detection state occurs), and is resolved (error non-detection state occurs) when the error release switch (reset SW243 in this example) is operated after the cause of the error is removed. A RAM failure occurs when an abnormality is detected by checking the RAM (error detection state occurs), and is resolved (error non-detection state occurs) when the error release switch (reset SW243 in this example) is operated. A winning abnormality occurs when a winning symbol different from the winning symbol determined by internal lottery is won after the reels 110-112 have stopped (error detection state occurs), and is resolved (error non-detection state occurs) when the error release switch (reset SW243 in this example) is operated.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to slot machines, but can also be applied to pachinko machines. Errors that can occur in pachinko machines include, for example, a lower tray full error, a payout device error, an overpayout error, an illegal payout error, a main control unit communication error, a magnetic anomaly error, a magnetic field anomaly error, a frame open error, a RAM clear error, and an impact sensor error. These errors are also cleared when the error reset switch is operated after the cause of the error has been removed.

When the main control unit 300 detects any error, it sets the interrupt status to an error detection state, displays an error code corresponding to the error on the dispensed coin count display 127, and prepares to send an error command corresponding to the detected error to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this error command from the main control unit 300, it executes processing to start an error notification.

For example, when a selector error occurs, the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) displays the text "Selector error occurred!!" and the text "Please call a gaming store attendant.", the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an error light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) outputs an error sound (such as "An error has occurred. Please call a gaming store attendant."). The manner in which the error is notified is not particularly limited, and for example, the error may be notified by the movement of the movable means (reels 110-112).

Furthermore, when the error notification termination condition is met (for example, when an operation to release the error (in this example, an operation to turn on the reset SW 243) is received), the main control unit 300 erases the error detection state stored in the interrupt status and then executes an error notification termination process. In this error notification termination process, the main control unit 300 erases the error code displayed on the dispensed number display 127 and prepares to send an error resolution command corresponding to the resolved error to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this error resolution command from the main control unit 300, it executes a process to terminate the ongoing error notification.

<Power recovery with button pressed>
Next, the restoration of power when the button is pressed will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 159 (a) shows the control status of each button when the power is turned on, (b) shows the control status of each button when the power is turned on (error detection state), and (c) shows the control status of each button when the power is turned on with a setting change.

In the slot machine 100, even if a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device is cut off while the first operating means is not being operated, and the power is restored while the first operating means is being operated and the operation of the first operating means is enabled, control over the operation of the first operating means is not executed. However, when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device is cut off while the second operating means is not being operated, and the power is restored while the second operating means is being operated and the operation of the second operating means is enabled, control over the operation of the second operating means is executed.

In the following, "not executing control over the operation of the first operating means" may be referred to as "invalid" and the "first operating means" may be referred to as the "invalid button." Furthermore, "executing control over the operation of the second operating means" may be referred to as "valid." The "second operating means" may be referred to as the "valid button."

<Power recovery when button is pressed/MAX BET button>
The MAX BET button 132 described using Figure 150 is one of the valid buttons (second operating means) whose operation becomes valid (control is executed for the operation) when the operation is performed when power is restored after a power outage, as shown in Figure 159 (a), and in this example, it is controlled by the main control unit 300.

In this example, when a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) is not being operated, and when the power is restored while the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) is being operated and the operation of the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) is enabled (in this example, the state of the detection signal of the bet button 132 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on, and the interrupt status is neither an error detection state nor a state in which settings are being changed), the main control unit 300 executes control over the operation of the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) (in this example, a process of inserting three medals (credits) that are electronically stored).

On the other hand, when the state of the detection signal of the bet button 132 sensor is on and the interrupt status corresponds to the error detection state, the main control unit 300 determines that the operation of the MAX bet button 132 is invalid according to the control state of each button at power-on (error detection state) shown in FIG. 159(b) and does not execute control over the operation. Also, when the state of the detection signal of the bet button 132 sensor is on and the interrupt status corresponds to the setting change in progress (when power-on is performed with a setting change), the main control unit 300 determines that the operation of the MAX bet button 132 is invalid according to the control state of each button at power-on with a setting change shown in FIG. 159(c) and does not execute control over the operation.

When the MAX BET button 132 is operated in a state where betting of game value is possible (for example, a non-playing state where no bets of game value have been made), a bet of game value of three medals is executed, but when the settlement button 134 is subsequently operated, all game value, including the bet of game value of three medals, is settled (if it is medals, all medals are discharged), and it is possible to return to the state immediately before the MAX BET button 132 was operated, where betting of game value was possible.

In other words, even if control is exercised over the operation of the MAX BET button 132 (operation means) (for example, a process for betting the gaming value of three medals), a certain operation (for example, an operation using the settlement button 134) can be used to return to the state before the control was exercised (a state in which gaming value can be bet).

<Power recovery when button is pressed/1 coin bet button>
The 1-coin bet button 130 described using Figure 150 is one of the valid buttons (second operating means) whose operation becomes valid (control is executed for that operation) if the operation is performed when power is restored after a power outage, as shown in Figure 159 (a), and in this example, it is controlled by the main control unit 300.

In this example, when a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the 1-coin bet button 130 (second operating means) is not being operated, and when the power is restored while the 1-coin bet button 130 (second operating means) is being operated and the operation of the 1-coin bet button 130 (second operating means) is enabled (in this example, the state of the detection signal of the bet button 130 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on, and the interrupt status is neither an error detection state nor a state in which settings are being changed), the main control unit 300 executes control over the operation of the 1-coin bet button 130 (second operating means) (in this example, a process of inserting one medal (credit) that is electronically stored).

On the other hand, when the state of the detection signal of the bet button 130 sensor is on and the interrupt status corresponds to an error detection state, the main control unit 300 determines that the operation of the 1 bet button 130 is invalid according to the control state of each button at power-on (error detection state) shown in FIG. 159(b) and does not execute control over the operation. Also, when the state of the detection signal of the bet button 130 sensor is on and the interrupt status corresponds to a setting change in progress (when power-on is performed with a setting change), the main control unit 300 determines that the operation of the 1 bet button 130 is invalid according to the control state of each button at power-on with a setting change shown in FIG. 159(c) and does not execute control over the operation.

When the bet 1 button 130 is operated in a state where betting of game value is possible (for example, a non-playing state where no bets of game value have been made), a bet of the game value of one medal is executed, but when the settlement button 134 is subsequently operated, all game value, including the bet of the game value of one medal, is settled (in the case of medals, all medals are discharged), and it is possible to return to the state immediately before the bet 1 button 130 was operated, where betting of game value was possible.

In other words, even if control over the operation of the 1 coin bet button 130 (operation means) (e.g., a process for betting the gaming value of one medal) is executed, it is possible to return to the state before the control was executed (a state in which gaming value can be bet) by a certain operation (e.g., an operation using the settlement button 134).

<Power recovery when button is pressed/2 coin bet button>
In this example, of the three types of bet buttons 130 to 132, the MAX bet button 132 and the 1-coin bet button 130 are set as valid buttons (second operating means), but the 2-coin bet button 131 may also be added as a valid button (second operating means).

In this case, a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the 2-coin bet button 131 (second operating means) is not being operated, and when the power is restored while the 2-coin bet button 131 (second operating means) is being operated and the operation of the 2-coin bet button 131 (second operating means) is enabled (in this example, the state of the detection signal of the bet button 131 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on, and the interrupt status is neither an error detection state nor a state in which settings are being changed), the main control unit 300 executes control over the operation of the 2-coin bet button 131 (second operating means) (in this example, a process of inserting two medals (credits) that are electronically stored).

On the other hand, if the state of the detection signal of the bet button 131 sensor is on and the interrupt status corresponds to an error detection state, or if the state of the detection signal of the bet button 131 sensor is on and the interrupt status corresponds to a setting change in progress (when the power is turned on with a setting change), the main control unit 300 determines that the operation of the 2 bet button 131 is invalid and does not execute control over that operation.

In addition, at least one of the MAX BET button 132, the 1 BET button 130, and the 2 BET button 131 may be an invalid button (first operating means).

When the 2-coin bet button 131 is operated in a state where betting of game value is possible (for example, a non-playing state where no bet of game value has been made), a bet of the game value of two medals is executed, but when the settlement button 134 is subsequently operated, all game value, including the bet of the game value of two medals, is settled (in the case of medals, all medals are discharged), and it is possible to return to the state immediately before the 2-coin bet button 131 was operated, where betting of game value was possible.

In other words, even if control is exercised over the operation of the 2-coin bet button 131 (operation means) (for example, a process for betting the game value of two medals), it is possible to return to the state before the control was exercised (a state in which game value can be bet) by a certain operation (for example, an operation using the settlement button 134).

<Power recovery/settlement button when button is pressed>
The settlement button 134 described using Figure 150 is one of the valid buttons (second operating means) that makes the operation valid (control is executed for the operation) when the operation is performed when power is restored after a power outage, as shown in Figure 159 (a), and in this example, is controlled by the main control unit 300.

In this example, when a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the settlement button 134 (second operating means) is not being operated, and when the power is restored while the settlement button 134 (second operating means) is being operated and the operation of the settlement button 134 (second operating means) is enabled (in this example, the state of the detection signal of the settlement button 134 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on and the interrupt status is neither an error detection state nor a state in which settings are being changed), the main control unit 300 executes control over the operation of the settlement button 134 (second operating means) (in this example, a process of settling (paying out) the medals (credits) that are electronically stored).

On the other hand, when the detection signal of the settlement button 134 sensor is on and the interrupt status corresponds to an error detection state, the main control unit 300 determines that the operation of the settlement button 134 is invalid in accordance with the control state of each button at power-on (error detection state) shown in FIG. 159(b) and does not execute control over the operation. Also, when the detection signal of the settlement button 134 sensor is on and the interrupt status corresponds to setting change in progress (when power-on with setting change is performed), the main control unit 300 determines that the operation of the settlement button 134 is invalid in accordance with the control state of each button at power-on with setting change shown in FIG. 159(c) and does not execute control over the operation.

When the settlement button 134 is operated while game value has been bet, all game value is settled (in the case of medals, all medals are discharged) and the game is returned to a state where no game value has been bet. However, when a bet button (1 coin bet button 130, 2 coin bet button 131, or MAX bet button 132) is subsequently operated, it is possible to return to the state where game value has been bet, just before the settlement button 134 was operated.

In other words, even if control over the operation of the settlement button 134 (operation means) (for example, a process to settle (pay out) the gaming value that has been bet) is executed, it is possible to return to the state before the control was executed (a state in which the gaming value has been bet) by a certain operation (for example, an operation using the 1-coin bet button 130, the 2-coin bet button 131, or the MAX bet button 132).

When the settlement button 134 is operated, all game value is settled (in the case of medals, all medals are dispensed (for example, if the maximum number of bets, 50 medals, has been bet, all 50 medals are dispensed)), so in order to return to the state in which the game value was bet immediately before the settlement button 134 was operated, it is necessary to re-bet the settled amount of game value by inserting the dispensed medals, which means it will take some time to return to the state.

In addition, even if the settlement button 134 is a button that resets the bet game value to an unbet state when the settlement button 134 is operated, if the one coin bet button 130 or two coin bet button 131 is operated to return to a bet state again, it will take two or more operations to return to the bet state.

In contrast, even if a bet button (1 coin bet button 130, 2 coin bet button 131, or MAX bet button 132) is operated, by subsequently operating the settlement button 134 once, it is possible to return to the state immediately before the bet button was operated, in which it was possible to bet the game value.

In other words, it is easier to return to the state before control was executed when control is executed over the operation of a bet button (1 coin bet button 130, 2 coin bet button 131, or MAX bet button 132) (for example, a process to bet a predetermined number of coins of gaming value) than when control is executed over the operation of the settlement button 134 (operation means) (for example, a process to settle (pay out) the gaming value that has been bet).

<Power recovery with button pressed/start lever>
The start lever 135 described using Figure 150 is one of the invalid buttons (first operating means) that invalidates the operation (no control is executed for the operation) if the operation is performed when power is restored after a power outage, as shown in Figures 159(a) to 159(c), and in this example, is controlled by the main control unit 300.

In this example, even if a power outage occurs in which the power supply to the power supply device 252 is cut off while the start lever 135 (first operating means) is not being operated, and the power is restored while the start lever 135 (first operating means) is being operated, and the operation of the start lever 135 (first operating means) is enabled (in this example, the detection signal of the start lever 135 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), the main control unit 300 does not execute control over the operation of the start lever 135 (first operating means) (in this example, a reel rotation start process that starts the rotation of all reels 110 to 112).

When the start lever 135 is operated in a state in which a game can be started (for example, a state in which all reels 110 to 112 are stopped and a specified number of medals have been inserted), all reels 110 to 112 will start spinning, but in this game, it is basically impossible to return to the state in which a game can be started immediately before the start lever 135 was operated (to cancel a game that has started).

In addition, when the start lever 135 is operated in a state in which a game can be started (for example, when all reels 110 to 112 are stopped and a specified number of medals have been inserted) and all reels 110 to 112 have spun, for example, if the reset button 243 is operated, even if the game is designed to return to the state in which a game can be started immediately before the start lever 135 is operated (to cancel a game that has been started), it is difficult to return to the state in which a game can be started immediately before the start lever 135 is operated because the player cannot operate the reset button 243.

In other words, when control over the operation of the start lever 135 (operation means) (for example, a reel rotation start process that starts the rotation of all reels 110 to 112) is executed, it is difficult or impossible to return to the state before the control was executed (the state in which the game can be started immediately before the start lever 135 is operated in that game).

Note that it is possible to transition to a state in which the game can be started by playing the next game after control over the operation of the start lever 135 (reel rotation start process that starts the rotation of all reels 110-112). However, since the game does not return to the state in which the game can be started immediately before the start lever 135 is operated, it cannot be said that "the game has returned to a state in which the game can be started in a game in which control over the operation of the start lever 135 has been executed."

<Power recovery/stop button when pressed>
The stop buttons 137 to 139 described using Figure 150 are one of the enable/disable buttons (first operating means or second operating means) that, depending on the situation, can become an enable button (second operating means) that enables the operation (control is executed for the operation) when operated when power is restored after a power outage, or an disable button (first operating means) that disables the operation (control is not executed for the operation) when operated when power is restored after a power outage, as shown in Figure 159 (a) to (b), and in this example, are controlled by the main control unit 300.

In this example, the reels 110-112 are stopped in a first stop mode by operating the multiple stop buttons (stop operation means) 137-139, and a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the last-operated stop button (stop operation means) of the multiple stop buttons (stop operation means) 137-139 is being operated. Even if the power is restored from the power outage while the operation of the last-operated stop button (stop operation means) is still ongoing, the presentation means does not execute a winning presentation according to the first stop mode. However, when the last-operated stop button (stop operation means) is no longer operated, the stop buttons 137-139 function as valid buttons (second operation means) and the presentation means executes a winning presentation according to the first stop mode.

On the other hand, even if a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while at least one of the reels 110-112 is spinning and none of the stop buttons (stop operation means) 137-139 are operated, and the power is restored while the stop buttons (stop operation means) 137-139 are operated and the operation of the stop operation means is enabled, the stop buttons (stop operation means) 137-139 function as invalid buttons (first operation means) and do not execute control over the operation of the stop buttons 137-139 (first operation means) (in this example, a reel stop control process that stops the reel 110-112 corresponding to the operated stop button 137-139).

In this example, the control over the operation of the stop operation means can be changed depending on the operation status of the stop operation means, and reel stop control that may cause a player to suffer a disadvantage due to an incorrect operation is disabled when power is restored, thereby preventing the player from suffering a disadvantage due to an incorrect operation. On the other hand, by enabling the hold control for the winning effect when power is restored and not executing the winning effect while the operation of the last operated stop operation means is continuing, it is possible to prevent the winning effect from being missed and increase the satisfaction of the player.

When any of the reels 110-112 are spinning, if any of the stop buttons 137-139 corresponding to the spinning reel 110-112 is operated, the reel 110-112 corresponding to the operated stop button 137-139 will come to a stop, but in this game, it is basically impossible for the stopped reels 110-112 to return to the spinning state they were in immediately before the stop button 137-139 was operated.

In addition, when one of the stop buttons 137-139 corresponding to the reels 110-112 that are spinning is operated and one of the reels 110-112 corresponding to the operated stop button 137-139 stops, for example, if the reset button 243 is operated, even if the specifications allow the stopped reels 110-112 to return to the state they were in just before the stop buttons 137-139 were operated in that game, it is difficult for the stopped reels 110-112 to return to the state they were in just before the stop buttons 137-139 were operated because the player cannot operate the reset button 243.

In other words, when control over the operation of the stop buttons 137-139 (operation means) (for example, a reel stop control process that stops the reels 110-112 that correspond to the operated stop button 137-139) is executed, it is difficult or impossible to return to the state before the control was executed (the state in which the stopped reels 110-112 were spinning immediately before the stop buttons 137-139 were operated).

It is possible for all reels 110-112 to transition to a spun state when a game is played after control over the operation of the stop buttons 137-139 (reel stop control process that stops the reels 110-112 corresponding to the operated stop buttons 137-139). However, since the reels that are stopped in a game are not returned to a spun state again in that game, it cannot be said that "all reels 110-112 have returned to a spun state in a game in which control over the operation of the stop buttons 137-139 has been executed."

<Power recovery/reset button when pressed>
The reset button (reset SW) 243 described using FIG. 151 is one of the enable/disable buttons (first operating means or second operating means) which, depending on the situation, can become an enable button (second operating means) that enables the operation (control is executed for the operation) when the operation is performed when power is restored after a power outage, or an disable button (first operating means) that disables the operation (control is not executed for the operation) when the operation is performed when power is restored after a power outage, and in this example, is controlled by the main control unit 300.

In this example, even if a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the reset button 243 is not operated, and the power is restored while the reset button 243 is operated, and the operation of the reset button 243 is enabled (in this example, the power is restored by power-on with a setting change, and the detection signal of the reset SW 243 sensor is turned on), the reset button 243 functions as an inactive button (first operating means), and the main control unit 300 does not execute control over the operation of the reset button 243 (first operating means) (in this example, processing corresponding to a setting value change operation or an error resolution operation).

On the other hand, when a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the reset button 243 is not operated, and the power is restored while the reset button 243 is operated and the operation of the reset button 243 is enabled (in this example, the power is restored in an error detection state and the detection signal of the reset SW 243 sensor is turned on), the reset button 243 functions as an enabled button (second operating means), and the main control unit 300 executes control over the operation of the reset button 243 (second operating means) (in this example, processing corresponding to the error resolution operation).

In this example, the control for the reset button operation can be changed depending on the status of the operation. For example, when changing a setting value, if the setting value is changed when power is restored, there is a risk that the previously set setting value will become unknown, so control based on the setting value change operation is not performed. On the other hand, when clearing an error, since an error cannot be cleared unless the cause of the error has been resolved, if the cause of the error has been resolved when power is restored, control based on the error resolution operation is performed, thereby improving convenience for game store staff, etc.

When the reset button 243 is operated in a certain state (for example, an error detection state), the error is resolved, but it is essentially impossible to return to the error detection state that existed immediately before the reset button 243 was operated.

In addition, when the reset button 243 is operated in a certain state (for example, an error detection state) and the error is resolved, even if it were possible for the player to intentionally cause an error and return to the error detection state immediately before the reset button 243 was operated, it is difficult to return to the error detection state immediately before the reset button 243 was operated because it is impossible for the player to cause all errors at will.

In other words, when control (processing corresponding to an error resolution operation) is executed in response to the operation of the reset button 243 (operation means), it is difficult or impossible to return to the state before the control was executed (the error detection state immediately before the reset button 243 was operated).

<Power recovery when button is pressed/effect button>
The performance button 156 described using Figure 150 is one of the invalid buttons (first operating means) that invalidates the operation (no control is executed for the operation) if the operation is performed when power is restored after a power outage, as shown in Figures 159 (a) to 159 (c), and in this example, is controlled by the first sub-control unit 400.

In this example, even if a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the effect button 156 (first operating means) is not being operated, and the power is restored while the effect button 156 (first operating means) is being operated and the operation of the effect button 156 (first operating means) is enabled (in this example, the detection signal of the effect button 156 sensor of the first sub-control unit 400 is on), the first sub-control unit 400 does not execute control over the operation of the effect button 156 (first operating means) (in this example, processing to perform effects in response to the player's operation in various effects).

When the effect button 156 is operated in a certain state (for example, a state in which a menu can be displayed), a menu display is displayed based on the operation of the effect button 156, but in this example, if the effect button 156 is operated within a specified time, the menu display is canceled (erased), and it is possible to return to the state immediately before the effect button 156 was operated in which a menu can be displayed.

In other words, even if control (e.g., a process for displaying a menu) is executed in response to the operation of the effect button 156 (operation means), it is possible to return to the state before the control was executed (a state in which a menu can be displayed) by a certain operation (e.g., an operation using the effect button 156).

In addition, in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, it is assumed that the menu operations in that state can be performed using the effect button 156, the cross key 193a, etc. In other words, when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is entered, the operation of the effect button 156 and the cross key 193a becomes valid.

<Power recovery when button is pressed/volume button>
The volume button (directional pad) 193a described using Figure 150 is one of the invalid buttons (first operating means) which, if operated when power is restored after a power outage, renders the operation invalid (no control is executed for the operation), as shown in Figures 159(a) to 159(c), and in this example, is controlled by the first sub-control unit 400.

In this example, even if a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the volume button 193a (first operating means) is not being operated, and the power is restored while the volume button 193a (first operating means) is being operated, resulting in a state in which operation of the volume button 193a (first operating means) is enabled (in this example, the detection signal state of the cross button 193 sensor of the first sub-controller 400 is on), the first sub-controller 400 does not execute control over the operation of the volume button 193a (first operating means) (in this example, a process for adjusting the volume).

When the volume button 193a (right) is operated in a certain state (for example, when the volume is set to a certain volume), the volume increases by one step based on the operation of the volume button 193a (right), but when the volume adjustment button 193a (left) is subsequently operated, the volume decreases by one step, and it is possible to return to the state in which the volume was set to a certain volume immediately before the volume button 193a (right) was operated.

In other words, even if a control (e.g., a process to increase a certain volume by one level) is executed on the operation of button 193a (right) (operation means), it is possible to return to the state before the control was executed (a state in which the volume was set to a certain volume) by a certain operation (e.g., an operation using volume adjustment button 193a (left)).

In this example, even if a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the reset button 243 is not being operated, and the power is restored while the reset button 243 is being operated and the operation of the reset button 243 is enabled, control over the operation of the reset button 243 (processing corresponding to a setting value change operation or an error resolution operation) is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this example, and may be configured to execute (or be able to execute) control over the operation of the reset button 243 (processing corresponding to a setting value change operation or an error resolution operation) when a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the reset button 243 is not being operated, and the power is restored while the reset button 243 is being operated and the operation of the reset button 243 is enabled.

In other words, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 150) is a gaming machine equipped with a power supply device (for example, the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 151) that supplies power, a first operating means (for example, the start lever 135 shown in FIG. 150), a second operating means (for example, the MAX BET button 132 and the 1-coin BET button 130 shown in FIG. 150), and a third operating means (for example, the reset button 243), and even if a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off when the first operating means is not operated, and a control state is entered in which the power interruption is restored when the first operating means is operated and the operation of the first operating means is enabled, control over the operation of the first operating means (for example, a reel rotation start process that starts the rotation of all reels 110 to 112) is not executed, and a control in which a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device is cut off when the second operating means is not operated, and a control in which the power interruption is restored when the second operating means is operated and the operation of the second operating means is enabled When the third operating means is in a control state, the second operating means executes control over the operation (for example, a process for inserting medals (credits) stored electronically), and when the third operating means is not being operated, a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device is cut off, and when the third operating means is being operated, the power interruption is restored and the operation of the third operating means is enabled, and the third operating means executes control over the operation (for example, a process corresponding to a setting value change operation or an error resolution operation), and when control over the operation of the first operating means is executed, it is difficult or impossible to return to the state before the control was executed, and even if control over the operation of the second operating means is executed, it is possible to return to the state before the control was executed, and when control over the operation of the third operating means is executed, it is difficult or impossible to return to the state before the control was executed, and the third operating means is an operating means provided in a position that is difficult for a player to operate (for example, inside the main body 101).

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, for operation means that are difficult or impossible to restore (first operation means, third operation means), control of operation is not performed even if they are in a state of being operated when power is restored, taking into consideration the case of erroneous operation. Furthermore, for operation means that are reversible (second operation means), since restoration is possible even in the case of erroneous operation, control of operation is performed if they are in a state of being operated when power is restored. Furthermore, even if an operation means is difficult or impossible to restore, if the button is located in a position that is difficult for a player to operate, there is a high possibility that the administrator has deliberately operated it, so control of operation is performed if they are in a state of being operated when power is restored. In this way, it is possible to provide a highly convenient gaming machine that allows players to quickly return to playing while taking into consideration erroneous operation, etc.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 150) is a gaming machine equipped with a power supply device (for example, the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 151) that supplies power, a first operating means (for example, the start lever 135 shown in FIG. 150), a second operating means (for example, the MAX BET button 132 and the 1-coin BET button 130 shown in FIG. 150), a third operating means (for example, the reset button 243), and a fourth operating means (for example, the settlement button 134 shown in FIG. 150). Even if a power outage occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off when the first operating means is not being operated, and the power outage is restored when the first operating means is being operated and a control state is entered in which the operation of the first operating means is enabled, the control over the operation of the first operating means (for example, starting the rotation of all reels 110 to 112) is not performed. When the second operation means is not operated, a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off, and when the second operation means is operated, a control state is established in which the operation of the second operation means is validated by recovering from the power interruption, and control is performed for the operation of the second operation means (for example, a process for inserting medals (credits) that are electronically stored). When the third operation means is not operated, a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off, and when the third operation means is operated, a control state is established in which the operation of the third operation means is validated by recovering from the power interruption, and control is performed for the operation of the third operation means (for example, a process for changing a setting value or resolving an error). When the fourth operation means is not operated, a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off, and when the fourth operation means is ... When the power interruption is restored while the operation means is being operated and a control state is entered in which the operation of the fourth operation means is enabled, control over the operation of the fourth operation means is executed, and when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device is cut off while the second operation means and the fourth operation means are not being operated, and when the power interruption is restored while the second operation means and the fourth operation means are being operated and a control state is entered in which the operation of the second operation means and the fourth operation means is enabled, control over the operation of the second operation means (for example, a process of inserting medals (credits) that are electronically stored) is executed, while control over the operation of the fourth operation means (for example, a process of settling (paying out) medals (credits) that are electronically stored) is not executed (for example, see FIG. 161(a)). When control over the operation of the first operation means is executed, the control a game machine in which it is difficult or impossible for the player to return to the state before the control is executed, and even if control over the operation of the second operation means is executed, the player can return to the state before the control is executed, and when control over the operation of the third operation means is executed, it is difficult or impossible for the player to return to the state before the control is executed, and when control over the operation of the fourth operation means is executed, the player can return to the state before the control is executed, the third operation means is an operation means provided in a position that is difficult for the player to operate (for example, inside the main body 101), the second operation means is a means by which game value can be bet, and when control over the operation of the fourth operation means is executed, it is possible to change from a control state in which game value is bet to a control state in which no bet is placed.

Also, a fourth operating means (for example, the settlement button 134 shown in FIG. 150) is provided, and when the fourth operating means is not operated, a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off, and when the fourth operating means is operated, the power interruption is restored and a control state is reached in which the operation of the fourth operating means is enabled, and control is executed for the operation of the fourth operating means, and when the second operating means and the fourth operating means are not operated, a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off, and when the second operating means and the fourth operating means are operated, the power interruption is restored and the operation of the second operating means and the fourth operating means is enabled. When this state is reached, control of the operation of the second operation means (for example, a process for inserting electronically stored medals (credits)) is executed, while control of the operation of the fourth operation means (for example, a process for settling (paying out) electronically stored medals (credits)) is not executed (for example, see FIG. 161(a)). When control of the operation of the fourth operation means is executed, it is possible to return to the state before the control was executed, and the second operation means may be a means for betting game value, and the fourth operation means may be an operation means for changing from a bet control state to a no-bet control state.

With this configuration, when the power is restored from a power outage while the second operating means (means for betting game value) and the fourth operating means (means for changing a bet state to a no-bet state) are being operated and the operation of the second operating means and the fourth operating means are enabled, control is executed over the operation of the second operating means, but control is not executed over the operation of the fourth operating means, so that the control corresponding to the second operating means (control for betting game value) can be executed with priority over the control corresponding to the fourth operating means (control for changing a bet state to a no-bet state).

For example, when the second operating means (means capable of betting game value) is operated and game value is bet, the fourth operating means (means capable of changing the state from a bet state to a no-bet state) can be operated to return to the state before game value was bet (the state before the second operating means was operated). On the other hand, when the fourth operating means (means capable of changing the state from a bet state to a no-bet state) is operated and the state changes from a bet state to a no-bet state, an action of betting the number of game value bet (an action of inserting three medals if three medals have been bet) is required to return to the state before the no-bet state (the state before the fourth operating means was operated). In other words, when the fourth operating means is operated by mistake, it takes more effort and time to return to the state before the erroneous operation than when the second operating means is operated by mistake. Therefore, in the present invention, when the second operating means and the fourth operating means are operated simultaneously and power is restored from a power outage, and the operation of the second operating means and the fourth operating means are enabled, the control corresponding to the second operating means is executed with priority over the control corresponding to the fourth operating means, thereby preventing a decrease in convenience for the player.

In addition, if the system is configured to prioritize execution of control corresponding to the fourth operating means (control to change from a bet state to a no-bet state) over control corresponding to the second operating means (control to bet game value), game value will not be bet even though the second operating means has been operated, which may cause anxiety to the player, and the player will need to perform an operation to bet game value again, which may require extra effort and time and significantly reduce player convenience. However, according to the present invention, priority is given to execution of control corresponding to the second operating means (control to bet game value), so the player does not feel uneasy and it is possible to prevent a decrease in player convenience.

<Control status of each button when the setting change state ends>
Next, the control status of each button when the setting change state is ended will be described with reference to Fig. 160(a), which is a diagram showing an example of the control status of each button when the setting change state is ended.

As explained using FIG. 156 etc., when the power is turned on with the front door (door body) 102 open and the setting key SW provided inside the main body 101 turned on (or when the setting key SW is turned on before a predetermined time has elapsed after the power is turned on (before the main control unit 300 checks the on/off state of the setting key SW)), the slot machine 100 can transition to a setting change state (setting change mode) in which one setting value can be set from among multiple setting values.

In addition, even if the slot machine 100 is in a setting change state and the second operating means is operated, and the slot machine transitions from the setting change state to a playable state in which game play can proceed and the operation of the second operating means is enabled, the slot machine 100 is configured not to execute control over the operation of the second operating means.

For example, even if the main control unit 300 is in the setting change mode (setting change state) and the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) is operated and the game transitions from the setting change state to a playable state in which game play can proceed and the operation of the MAX BET button (second operating means) 132 is enabled (in this example, the state of the detection signal from the bet button 132 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on and the state does not fall into any of the error detection state, setting confirmation state, and setting change state), the main control unit 300 determines that the operation of the MAX BET button 132 is invalid according to the control status of each button at the end of the setting change state shown in FIG. 160(a), and does not execute control over the operation of the MAX BET button 132 (in this example, the process of inserting three medals (credits) that are electronically stored).

In addition, even if the main control unit 300 is in the setting change mode (setting change state) and the 1 coin bet button 130 (second operating means) is operated, and the game transitions from the setting change state to a playable state in which game play can proceed and the operation of the 1 coin bet button 130 is enabled (in this example, the state of the detection signal from the bet button 130 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on and the state does not fall into any of the error detection state, setting confirmation state, and setting change state), the main control unit 300 determines that the operation of the 1 coin bet button 130 is invalid according to the control status of each button at the end of the setting change state shown in FIG. 160(a), and does not execute control over the operation of the 1 coin bet button 130 (in this example, the process of inserting one medal (credit) that is electronically stored).

In addition, even if the main control unit 300 is in the setting change mode (setting change state) and the settlement button 134 (second operating means) is operated, and the setting change state transitions to a playable state in which game play can proceed and operation of the settlement button 134 is enabled (in this example, the state of the detection signal from the settlement button 134 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on and the state does not fall into any of the error detection state, setting confirmation state, and setting change state), the main control unit 300 determines that operation of the settlement button 134 is invalid according to the control status of each button at the end of the setting change state shown in FIG. 160(a), and does not execute control over operation of the settlement button 134 (in this example, the process of settling (paying out) the medals (credits) electronically stored).

In addition, even if the first sub-control unit 400 is set to the setting change mode (setting change state) and the effect button 156 (second operating means) is operated, and the setting change state transitions to a playable state in which game play can proceed and operation of the effect button 156 is enabled (in this example, the state of the detection signal of the effect button 156 sensor of the first sub-control unit 400 is on and the state does not fall into any of the error detection state, setting confirmation state, and setting change state), the first sub-control unit 400 determines that operation of the effect button 156 is invalid according to the control status of each button at the end of the setting change state shown in FIG. 160(a), and does not execute control over the operation of the effect button 156 (in this example, processing to perform effects in response to player operation in various effects).

In addition, even if the first sub-control unit 400 is set to the setting change mode (setting change state) and the volume button 193a (second operating means) is operated, and the setting change state transitions to a playable state in which game play can proceed and operation of the volume button 193a is enabled (in this example, the state of the detection signal of the cross button 193 sensor of the first sub-control unit 400 is on and the state does not fall into any of the error detection state, setting confirmation state, and setting change state), the first sub-control unit 400 determines that operation of the volume button 193a is invalid according to the control status of each button at the end of the setting change state shown in FIG. 160(a), and does not execute control over the operation of the volume button 193a (in this example, processing to adjust the volume).

Note that the start lever 135, stop buttons 137-139, and reset button 243 do not enter a state in which operation is enabled (there is no operation acceptance time set) simply by transitioning from the setting change mode (setting change state) to a playable state in which gameplay can proceed. Therefore, even if any of the buttons are operated when transitioning from the setting change mode (setting change state) to the playable state, the operation is not accepted and is invalid, and no control is exercised over the operation of that button.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 150) is a gaming machine equipped with a power supply device (e.g., the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 151) that supplies power, a first operating means (e.g., the start lever 135 shown in FIG. 150), a second operating means (e.g., the MAX BET button 132, the 1-coin BET button 130, and the settlement button 134 shown in FIG. 150), and a main control means (e.g., the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 152) that controls the game based on one of a plurality of set values, and the main control means is a playable unit that allows the game to proceed. a setting confirmation state (e.g., a setting confirmation mode) in which a currently set setting value can be confirmed, and a setting change state (e.g., a setting change mode) in which one of the plurality of setting values can be set; and even if a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off when the first operating means is not being operated, and the power is restored when the first operating means is being operated, and a control state in which the operation of the first operating means is enabled is entered, the power interruption does not occur, and the control state in which the operation of the first operating means is enabled is entered, This gaming machine does not execute control over the operation of the means (for example, a reel rotation start process that starts the rotation of all reels 110 to 112), but when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device is cut off when the second operating means is not being operated, and when the second operating means is being operated and the power interruption is restored and a control state is entered in which the operation of the second operating means is enabled, it executes control over the operation of the second operating means (for example, a process for inserting medals (credits) that are stored electronically, a process for settling (paying out) medals (credits) that are stored electronically), and when control over the operation of the first operating means is executed, it is difficult or impossible to return to the state before the control was executed, and even if control over the operation of the second operating means is executed and the game is set to the setting change state and the game transitions from the setting change state to the playable state when the second operating means is operated and a control state is entered in which the operation of the second operating means is enabled, it does not execute control over the operation of the second operating means (for example, see FIG. 160(a)).

According to the gaming machine according to this embodiment, for an operation means (first operation means) for which recovery is difficult or impossible, control of the operation is not performed even if the operation is in a state in which it is being operated when power is restored, in consideration of the case of erroneous operation. In addition, for an operation means (second operation means) for which recovery is possible, since recovery is possible even in the case of erroneous operation, control of the operation is performed if the operation is in a state in which it is being operated when power is restored. In this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with high convenience that allows the user to quickly return to play while taking into consideration erroneous operation, etc. In addition, the setting change state is, in principle, a state to which the user transitions by the operation of the administrator, and recovery from the setting change state is also performed by the administrator, and since this is a situation in which it is not necessary to quickly return to play, control of the operation is not performed in consideration of only erroneous operation. In addition, in the setting change state, the administrator is focused on changing the settings, and there is a risk that the administrator will not notice the erroneous operation, and for example, the settings such as the volume may remain at a setting that the administrator did not intend, so control of the operation is not performed when returning from the setting change state.

<Control status of each button when the setting confirmation state ends>
Next, the control status of each button when the setting confirmation state ends will be described with reference to Fig. 160(b), which is a diagram showing an example of the control status of each button when the setting confirmation state ends.

As explained using FIG. 158 etc., when the front door (door body) 102 of the slot machine 100 is opened, the power is turned on, and then the setting key SW provided inside the main body 101 is turned on (second operating state), the slot machine 100 can transition to a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the currently set setting value can be confirmed.

In addition, even if the slot machine 100 is in a setting confirmation state and the second operating means is operated, and the slot machine transitions from the setting confirmation state to a playable state in which game play can proceed and the operation of the second operating means is enabled, the slot machine 100 is configured not to execute control over the operation of the second operating means.

For example, even if the main control unit 300 is in the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) and the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) is operated and the state transitions from the setting confirmation state to a playable state in which game play can proceed and the operation of the MAX BET button (second operating means) 132 is enabled (in this example, the state of the detection signal of the bet button 132 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on and the state does not correspond to any of the error detection state, the setting confirmation state, and the setting change state), the main control unit 300 determines that the operation of the MAX BET button 132 is invalid according to the control status of each button at the end of the setting confirmation state shown in FIG. 160(b), and does not execute control over the operation of the MAX BET button 132 (in this example, the process of inserting three medals (credits) that are electronically stored).

In addition, even if the main control unit 300 is in the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) and the 1 bet button 130 (second operating means) is operated, and the game transitions from the setting confirmation state to a playable state in which the game can proceed and the operation of the 1 bet button 130 is enabled (in this example, the state of the detection signal from the bet button 130 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on and the state does not fall into any of the error detection state, setting confirmation state, and setting change state), the main control unit 300 determines that the operation of the 1 bet button 130 is invalid according to the control status of each button at the end of the setting confirmation state shown in FIG. 160(b), and does not execute control over the operation of the 1 bet button 130 (in this example, the process of inserting one medal (credit) that is electronically stored).

In addition, even if the main control unit 300 is in the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) and the settlement button 134 (second operating means) is operated, and the game transitions from the setting confirmation state to a playable state in which game play can proceed and operation of the settlement button 134 is enabled (in this example, the state of the detection signal from the settlement button 134 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on and the state does not fall into any of the error detection state, setting confirmation state, and setting change state), the main control unit 300 determines that operation of the settlement button 134 is invalid according to the control status of each button at the end of the setting confirmation state shown in FIG. 160(b), and does not execute control over operation of the settlement button 134 (in this example, the process of settling (paying out) the medals (credits) electronically stored).

In addition, even if the first sub-control unit 400 is set to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) and the effect button 156 (second operating means) is operated, and the state transitions from the setting confirmation state to a playable state in which game play can proceed and operation of the effect button 156 is enabled (in this example, the state of the detection signal of the effect button 156 sensor of the first sub-control unit 400 is on and the state does not fall into any of the error detection state, setting confirmation state, and setting change state), the first sub-control unit 400 determines that operation of the effect button 156 is invalid according to the control status of each button at the end of the setting confirmation state shown in FIG. 160(b), and does not execute control over the operation of the effect button 156 (in this example, processing to perform effects in response to player operation in various effects).

In addition, even if the first sub-control unit 400 is set to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) and the volume button 193a (second operating means) is operated, and the setting confirmation state transitions to a playable state in which game play can proceed and operation of the volume button 193a is enabled (in this example, the state of the detection signal of the cross button 193 sensor of the first sub-control unit 400 is on and the state does not fall into any of the error detection state, setting confirmation state, and setting change state), the first sub-control unit 400 determines that operation of the volume button 193a is invalid according to the control status of each button at the end of the setting confirmation state shown in FIG. 160(b), and does not execute control over the operation of the volume button 193a (in this example, processing to adjust the volume).

Note that the start lever 135, stop buttons 137-139, and reset button 243 do not enter a state in which operation is enabled (there is no operation acceptance time) simply by transitioning from the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) to a playable state in which game play can proceed. Therefore, even if any of the buttons are operated when transitioning from the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) to the playable state, the operation is not accepted and is invalid, and no control is exercised over the operation of that button.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 150) is a gaming machine equipped with a power supply device (e.g., the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 151) that supplies power, a first operating means (e.g., the start lever 135 shown in FIG. 150), a second operating means (e.g., the MAX BET button 132, the 1-coin BET button 130, and the settlement button 134 shown in FIG. 150), and a main control means (e.g., the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 152) that controls the game based on one of a plurality of setting values, and the main control means is capable of setting one of a plurality of states including at least a playable state (e.g., a normal game state) in which the game can proceed, a setting confirmation state (e.g., a setting confirmation mode) in which the currently set setting value can be confirmed, and a setting change state (e.g., a setting change mode) in which one of the plurality of setting values can be set, and a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device is cut off when the first operating means is not operated, and a power interruption occurs when the first operating means is operated. This gaming machine is characterized in that, even if the power supply is restored from a power outage and the control state is set to enable the operation of the first operating means, it does not execute control over the operation of the first operating means (for example, a reel rotation start process that starts the rotation of all reels 110 to 112), but when a power outage occurs in which the power supply device is cut off while the second operating means is not being operated, and the power supply is restored from a power outage and the control state is set to enable the operation of the second operating means while the second operating means is being operated, it executes control over the operation of the second operating means (for example, a process for inserting medals (credits) that are electronically stored, a process for settling (paying out) medals (credits) that are electronically stored), and even if the setting value is being confirmed in the setting confirmation state and the second operating means is being operated, the state transitions from the setting confirmation state to the playable state and the control state is set to enable the operation of the second operating means, it does not execute control over the operation of the second operating means (for example, see FIG. 160(b)).

According to the gaming machine according to this embodiment, for an operation means (first operation means) for which recovery is difficult or impossible, control of the operation is not performed even if the operation is in a state in which it is being operated when power is restored, in consideration of the case of erroneous operation. In addition, for an operation means (second operation means) for which recovery is possible, since recovery is possible even in the case of erroneous operation, control of the operation is performed if the operation is in a state in which it is being operated when power is restored. In this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with high convenience that allows the user to quickly return to play while taking into consideration erroneous operation, etc. In addition, the setting confirmation state is, in principle, a state to which the user transitions by the operation of the administrator, and recovery from the setting confirmation state is also performed by the administrator, and since it is a situation in which it is not necessary to quickly return to play, control of the operation is not performed in consideration of only erroneous operation. In addition, in the setting confirmation state, the administrator is focused on checking the settings, and there is a risk that the administrator will not notice the erroneous operation, and for example, the settings such as the volume may remain at a setting that the administrator did not intend, so control of the operation is not performed when returning from the setting confirmation state.

<Simultaneous operation of valid buttons (second operating means) when power is turned on>
Next, the simultaneous operation of valid buttons (second operating means) when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 161(a).

Figure 161 (a) shows an example of control when the valid button (second operating means) is operated simultaneously when the power is turned on.

As described above, the slot machine 100 has at least the MAX BET button 132, the 1-coin BET button 130, and the settlement button 134 as valid buttons (second operating means).

In this example, when a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) and the 1 BET button 130 (second operating means) are not being operated, and the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) and the 1 BET button 130 (second operating means) are simultaneously operated (pressed simultaneously), the power outage is restored and the operation of the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) and the 1 BET button 130 (second operating means) is enabled (in this example, the detection signal state of the BET button 132 sensor and the BET button 130 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on, and the interrupt status is neither an error detection state nor a setting change state), the main control unit 300 prioritizes control over the operation of the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) (in this example, a process of inserting three medals (credits) stored electronically) and does not execute control over the 1 BET button 130 (MAX BET button priority).

In addition, when a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) and the settlement button 134 (second operating means) are not being operated, and the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) and the settlement button 134 (second operating means) are simultaneously operated (pressed simultaneously), the power outage is restored and the operation of the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) and the settlement button 134 (second operating means) is enabled (in this example, the detection signal state of the bet button 132 sensor and the settlement button 134 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on, and the interrupt status is neither an error detection state nor a state in which settings are being changed), the main control unit 300 prioritizes control over the operation of the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) (in this example, a process of inserting three medals (credits) that are electronically stored) and does not execute control over the settlement button 134 (MAX BET button priority).

In addition, when a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the 1-coin bet button 130 (second operating means) and the settlement button 134 (second operating means) are not being operated, and the 1-coin bet button 130 (second operating means) and the settlement button 134 (second operating means) are simultaneously operated (pressed simultaneously), the power outage is restored and the operation of the 1-coin bet button 130 (second operating means) and the settlement button 134 (second operating means) is enabled (in this example, the detection signal state of the bet button 130 sensor and the settlement button 134 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on, and the interrupt status is neither an error detection state nor a setting change in progress), the main control unit 300 prioritizes control over the operation of the 1-coin bet button 130 (second operating means) (in this example, the process of inserting one medal (credit) that is electronically stored) and does not execute control over the settlement button 134 (1-coin bet button priority).

<Simultaneous operation of valid buttons (second operating means) when power is turned on (error detection state)>
Next, simultaneous operation of valid buttons (second operating means) when the power is turned on (error detection state) will be described with reference to FIG. 161(b).

Figure 161 (b) shows an example of control when valid buttons (second operating means) are operated simultaneously when the power is turned on (error detection state).

As described above, the slot machine 100 has at least the MAX BET button 132, the 1 BET button 130, and the settlement button 134 as valid buttons (second operating means), and at least the RESET button (RESET SW) 243 as an invalid button (first operating means).

In this example, a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) and the 1 BET button 130 (second operating means) are not being operated, and the power is restored while the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) and the 1 BET button 130 (second operating means) are being operated simultaneously (pressed simultaneously), but if the interrupt status is in an error detection state, the main control unit 300 determines that both the operation of the MAX BET button 132 and the operation of the 1 BET button 130 are invalid, and does not execute control over the operations.

In addition, if a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) and the settlement button 134 (second operating means) are not operated, and the power is restored while the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) and the settlement button 134 (second operating means) are simultaneously operated (pressed simultaneously), but the interrupt status is in an error detection state, the main control unit 300 determines that both the operation of the MAX BET button 132 and the operation of the settlement button 134 are invalid, and does not execute control over the operation.

On the other hand, if a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) and the reset button 243 (first operating means) are not operated, and the power is restored while the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) and the reset button 243 (first operating means) are simultaneously operated (pressed simultaneously), but the interrupt status indicates an error detection state, control over the operation of the reset button 243 (first operating means) (in this example, processing corresponding to the error resolution operation) is executed as a priority, and control over the MAX BET button 132 is not executed (reset button priority).

In addition, if a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the 1-coin bet button 130 (second operating means) and the settlement button 134 (second operating means) are not operated, and the power is restored while the 1-coin bet button 130 (second operating means) and the settlement button 134 (second operating means) are simultaneously operated (pressed simultaneously), but the interrupt status is in an error detection state, the main control unit 300 determines that both the operation of the 1-coin bet button 130 (second operating means) and the operation of the settlement button 134 (second operating means) are invalid, and does not execute control over the operation.

On the other hand, if a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the 1-coin bet button 130 (second operating means) and the reset button 243 (first operating means) are not operated, and the power is restored while the 1-coin bet button 130 (second operating means) and the reset button 243 (first operating means) are simultaneously operated (pressed simultaneously), but the interrupt status is in an error detection state, priority is given to control over the operation of the reset button 243 (first operating means) (in this example, processing corresponding to the error resolution operation), and control over the 1-coin bet button 130 (second operating means) is not executed (reset button priority).

In addition, a power outage occurs in which the power supply to the power supply device 252 is cut off while the settlement button 134 (second operating means) and the reset button 243 (first operating means) are not operated, and the power is restored while the settlement button 134 (second operating means) and the reset button 243 (first operating means) are operated simultaneously (pressed simultaneously), but if the interrupt status indicates an error detection state, control over the operation of the reset button 243 (first operating means) (in this example, processing corresponding to the error resolution operation) is executed with priority, and control over the settlement button 134 (second operating means) is not executed (reset button priority).

<Operation of each button in the operation state of a certain operation means>
Next, the operation of each button in the operating state of a certain operating means will be described with reference to FIG.

<Operation of each button when the MAX BET button is in operation state>
FIG. 162(a) is a diagram showing an example of the control state of each button when the MAX BET button 132 is operated.

In this example, when the operation of the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) (in this example, the state of the detection signal of the BET button 132 sensor of the main control unit 300 is ON) is detected as the operation of the 1 BET button 130 (second operating means), the settlement button 134 (second operating means), or the STOP buttons 137-139 (first operating means or second operating means) (in this example, when the state of the detection signal of the corresponding sensor is ON), the operation is determined to be invalid, and no control is executed for the operation.

On the other hand, when the operation of the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) is detected (in this example, when the detection signal of the BET button 132 sensor of the main control unit 300 is ON) and the operation of any of the start lever 135 (first operating means), reset button 243 (first operating means), performance button 156 (first operating means), or volume button 193a (first operating means) is detected (in this example, when the detection signal of the corresponding sensor is ON), the operation is determined to be valid and control for the operation is executed.

<Operation of each button when the 1 coin bet button is in operation state>
FIG. 162(b) is a diagram showing an example of the control state of each button when the 1-coin bet button 130 is operated.

In this example, when the operation of the 1 coin bet button 130 (second operation means) is detected (in this example, when the detection signal of the bet button 130 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on) and the operation of either the settlement button 134 (second operation means) or the stop buttons 137-139 (first operation means or second operation means) is detected (in this example, when the detection signal of the corresponding sensor is on), the operation is determined to be invalid and no control is performed for the operation.

On the other hand, when the operation of the 1 coin bet button 130 (second operating means) (in this example, the state of the detection signal of the bet button 130 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on) is detected as the operation of any of the MAX bet button 132 (second operating means), start lever 135 (first operating means), reset button 243 (first operating means), performance button 156 (first operating means), or volume button 193a (first operating means) (in this example, when the state of the detection signal of the corresponding sensor is on), the operation is determined to be valid and control for that operation is executed.

<Operation of each button when the checkout button is in operation state>
FIG. 162(c) is a diagram showing an example of the control state of each button when the settlement button 134 is operated.

In this example, when the operation of the settlement button 134 (second operating means) (in this example, the state of the detection signal of the bet button 130 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on) is detected as the operation of the MAX bet button 132 (second operating means), 1 bet button 130 (second operating means), start lever 135 (first operating means), or stop buttons 137-139 (first operating means or second operating means) (in this example, when the state of the detection signal of the corresponding sensor is on), the operation is determined to be invalid, and no control is executed for the operation.

On the other hand, when the operation of the reset button 243 (first operation means), the performance button 156 (first operation means), or the volume button 193a (first operation means) is detected (in this example, when the detection signal of the corresponding sensor is turned on) in the operation state of the settlement button 134 (second operation means) (in this example, when the detection signal of the corresponding sensor is turned on), the operation is determined to be valid and control for the operation is executed.

<Operation of each button when the start lever is in operation>
FIG. 162(d) is a diagram showing an example of the control state of each button when the start lever 135 is operated.

In this example, when operation of any of the stop buttons 137-139 (first operating means or second operating means) is detected (in this example, when the detection signal of the corresponding sensor is turned on) in the operating state of the start lever 135 (first operating means) (in this example, when the detection signal of the start lever 135 sensor of the main control unit 300 is turned on), the operation is determined to be invalid, and no control is performed for that operation.

On the other hand, when the operation of the start lever 135 (first operating means) is detected (in this example, when the detection signal of the start lever 135 of the main control unit 300 is on) and the operation of any of the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means), 1 BET button 130 (second operating means), settlement button 134 (second operating means), reset button 243 (first operating means), performance button 156 (first operating means), or volume button 193a (first operating means) is detected (in this example, when the detection signal of the corresponding sensor is on), the operation is determined to be valid and control for the operation is executed.

<Operation of each button when the stop button is operated>
FIG. 162(e) is a diagram showing an example of the control state of each of the stop buttons 137 to 139 when they are operated.

In this example, when the operation of either the settlement button 134 (second operating means) or the start lever 135 (first operating means) is detected (in this example, when the detection signal of the corresponding sensor is turned on) in the operating state of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (first operating means or second operating means) (in this example, the detection signal of the stop button 137 sensor, the stop button 138 sensor, or the stop button 139 sensor of the main control unit 300 is turned on), the operation is determined to be invalid, and no control is performed for the operation.

On the other hand, when the operation of any of the MAX BET button 132 (second operation means), 1 BET button 130 (second operation means), RESET button 243 (first operation means), performance button 156 (first operation means), or VOLUME button 193a (first operation means) is detected (in this example, when the detection signal of the corresponding sensor is ON) in the operation state of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (first operation means or second operation means) (in this example, when the detection signal of the corresponding sensor is ON), the operation is determined to be valid and control for that operation is executed.

<Operation of each button when the reset button, performance button, and volume button are in operation>
Figure 162 (f) is a diagram showing an example of the control state of each button when the reset button 243, the performance button 156, and the volume button 193a are operated.

In this example, when the operation of the reset button 243 (first operating means), the effect button 156 (first operating means), or the volume button 193a (first operating means) is detected (in this example, the detection signal state of the reset SW243 sensor of the main control unit 300, the effect button 156 sensor of the first sub-control unit 400, or the cross button 193 sensor is on), if the operation of any of the MAX bet button 132 (second operating means), 1 coin bet button 130 (second operating means), start lever 135 (first operating means), stop buttons 137-139 (first operating means or second operating means), the effect button 156 (first operating means), or the volume button 193a (first operating means) is detected (in this example, the detection signal state of the corresponding sensor is on), the operation is determined to be valid and control for the operation is executed.

<Example of power recovery when the button is pressed>
Next, using Figures 163 to 166, we will explain a specific example of power restoration when the button is pressed, but before that, we will again explain the function of the main board display 190 explained using Figure 151.

The main board display 190 shown in Figures 163 to 166 is a display consisting of multiple LEDs (eight in this example), and predetermined game information can be notified by lighting one, several, or all of the eight LEDs a to h.

In this example, LEDa of the main board display 190 is lit when the MAX BET button 132 is being operated (in this example, when the detection signal state of the BET button 132 sensor of the main control unit 300 is ON), LEDb is lit when the 1 BET button 130 is being operated (in this example, when the detection signal state of the 1 BET button 130 sensor of the main control unit 300 is ON), LEDc is lit when the settlement button 134 is being operated (in this example, when the detection signal state of the settlement button 134 sensor of the main control unit 300 is ON), and LEDd is lit when the start lever 135 is being operated (in this example, when the detection signal state of the start lever 135 sensor of the main control unit 300 is ON).

LEDe is lit when the left stop button 137 is being operated (in this example, when the detection signal state of the stop button 137 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), LEDf is lit when the middle stop button 138 is being operated (in this example, when the detection signal state of the stop button 138 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), LEDg is lit when the right stop button 139 is being operated (in this example, when the detection signal state of the stop button 139 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), and LEDh is lit when the reset button 243 is being operated (in this example, when the detection signal state of the reset SW243 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on).

According to this example, if the operating means is operated when power is restored, the LED can be illuminated even for operating means that do not perform control based on the operation, so it is possible to visually determine at a glance whether control based on the operation is not performed because the control is disabled or because there is a malfunction.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 150) is a gaming machine equipped with a power supply device (e.g., the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 151) that supplies power, a first operating means (e.g., the start lever 135 shown in FIG. 150), a second operating means (e.g., the volume button 193a shown in FIG. 150), and a light-emitting means (e.g., the main board display 190 shown in FIG. 151(b) or FIG. 163). Even if a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off when the first operating means is not operated, and the power interruption is restored when the first operating means is operated and a control state is entered in which the operation of the first operating means is enabled, control over the operation of the first operating means (e.g., a reel rotation start process that starts the rotation of all reels 110 to 112) is not executed. However, when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off when the second operating means is not operated, and when the second operating means is operated, When the control state is reached after recovery from a power outage and the operation of the second operating means is enabled, control of the operation of the second operating means (e.g., processing to adjust the volume) is executed, and when control of the operation of the first operating means is executed, it is difficult or impossible to return to the state before the control was executed, and even if control of the operation of the second operating means is executed, it is possible to return to the state before the control was executed, and the light-emitting means is equipped with a first light-emitting unit (e.g., LEDd of the main board display 190 shown in FIG. 151(b) and FIG. 163) that emits light in response to the operation of the first operating means, but does not have a light-emitting unit that emits light in response to the operation of the second operating means, and the first light-emitting unit emits light even when a power outage occurs in which the power supply device is cut off when the first operating means is not operated, and when the power outage is restored when the first operating means is operated.

In the gaming machine according to this embodiment, for the operation means (first operation means) for which control over operation is disabled, a light-emitting unit that emits light when operated is provided, making it easy to check whether or not there is a malfunction. Furthermore, for the operation means (second operation means) for which control over operation is not disabled, it is possible to know of a malfunction by the fact that control over operation is not being executed, even without providing a light-emitting unit, so by not providing a light-emitting unit, it is possible to reduce costs.

In addition, the operating surface of the first operating means (e.g., the start lever 135 shown in FIG. 150 or FIG. 175(a)) may protrude further from the outer surface of the gaming machine than the operating surface of the second operating means (e.g., the volume button 193a shown in FIG. 150).

With this configuration, the first operating means is more likely to be operated erroneously than the second operating means, but the first operating means is an operating means for which control over operation is disabled, so overall it is possible to reduce the adverse effects of erroneous operation.

<Example of power recovery when a button is pressed/MAX BET button>
Next, the restoration of power when the MAX BET button 132 is pressed will be described with reference to FIG. 163(a).

Figure 163 (a) is a diagram showing the timeline of the process from when a power outage occurs until power is restored when the MAX BET button 132 is pressed.

The state indicated by the symbol T1 in FIG. 163(a) is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the MAX BET button 132 is not operated (not pressed), there are 10 credits, and the bet status is 0.

In this state, as shown in FIG. 163(a-1), since there are 10 credits, the segment corresponding to the number 10 is lit in the reserved coin count indicator 125, and since the MAX BET button 132, the 2-coin BET button 131, and the 1-coin BET button 130 are all not operated (not pressed), and the bet status is 0 coins, the game coin insertion lamp 129 is turned off. Also, since the MAX BET button 132 is not operated (not pressed) (in this example, the detection signal state of the bet button 132 sensor of the main control unit 300 is off), the LEDa of the main board indicator 190 is turned off.

The next state indicated by the symbol T2 is a state in which the MAX BET button 132 is not operated (not pressed), there are 10 credits, the bet status is 0, and the power supply device 252 has changed from ON to OFF.

In this state, when the MAX BET button 132 is not being operated (not pressed), a power outage occurs in which the power supply unit 252 is cut off, and the power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, is stopped, so the displays of the number of medals stored indicator 125, medal insertion lamp 129, main board indicator 190, etc. are not displayed.

The next state indicated by the symbol T3 is when the power supply device 252 is OFF, there are 10 credits, the bet status is 0, and the MAX BET button 132 is operated (pressed).

In this state, the MAX BET button 132 is operated (pressed), but because the power supply to each control unit, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, and each device, is stopped, operation of the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) is not enabled, and the displays of the number of medals stored indicator 125, medal insertion lamp 129, main board indicator 190, etc. are not displayed, as shown in FIG. 163 (a-2).

The next state indicated by symbol T4 is a state in which the power supply device 252 has changed from OFF to ON when the number of credits is 10, the bet status is 0, and the MAX BET button 132 has been operated (pressed).

In this state, the power is restored from a power outage while the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) is being operated (pressed), and the operation of the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) is enabled (in this example, the state of the detection signal from the bet button 132 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on, and the interrupt status is neither an error detection state nor a state in which settings are being changed), so the main control unit 300 executes control over the operation of the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) (in this example, a process of inserting three medals (credits) that are electronically stored).

In this state, by executing control over the operation of the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) (in this example, a process to insert three medals (credits) that are electronically stored), as shown in FIG. 163(a-3), the number of credits has decreased from 10 to 7, so the segment corresponding to the number 7 is lit in the stored medal count indicator 125, and the MAX BET button 132 has been operated (pressed) and the bet situation has become three medals, so the LED corresponding to a bet of three medals is lit in the game medal insertion lamp 129. Also, since the MAX BET button 132 is being operated (in this example, when the detection signal state of the bet button 132 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), the LEDa of the main board indicator 190 is lit.

The next state indicated by the symbol T5 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, there are 7 credits, and the bet status is 3, the pressing of the MAX BET button 132 is released, and the MAX BET button 132 is no longer being pressed (is not pressed).

In this state, the MAX BET button 132 is not being operated (not pressed), so although this is not shown in the figure, the LEDa on the main board display 190 is turned off and the medal insertion lamp 129 remains lit.

<Example of power recovery when button is pressed/start lever>
Next, the restoration of power when the start lever 135 is pressed down will be described with reference to FIG. 163(b).

Figure 163 (b) is a diagram showing the timeline of the process from when a power outage occurs until power is restored when the start lever 135 is pressed down.

The state indicated by the symbol T1 in FIG. 163(b) is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the bet status is 3 coins, the start lever 135 is not operated (not pressed), and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped.

In this state, as shown in FIG. 163(b-1), the bet status is 3 coins, and the start lever 135 is not operated (not pressed), so all reels 110 to 112 are stopped. Also, since the start lever 135 is not operated (not pressed) (in this example, the detection signal of the start lever 135 sensor of the main control unit 300 is off), the LEDd of the main board display 190 is turned off.

The next state, indicated by the symbol T2, is when the bet status is 3 coins, the start lever 135 is not being operated (not pressed), the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and the power supply device 252 has changed from ON to OFF.

In this state, when the start lever 135 is not being operated (not pressed), a power outage occurs in which the power supply unit 252 is cut off, and the power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped, so the display on the main board display 190, etc. is not displayed.

The next state indicated by the symbol T3 is when the power supply device 252 is OFF, the bet status is 3 coins, the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and the start lever 135 is operated (pressed).

In this state, the start lever 135 is operated (pressed), but because the power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped, the operation of the start lever 135 (first operating means) is not enabled, and the display of the main board display 190, etc. is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 163 (b-2).

The next state, indicated by symbol T4, is when the bet status is 3 coins, the start lever 135 is operated (depressed), the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and the power supply device 252 has changed from OFF to ON.

In this state, the power is restored from a power outage while the start lever 135 (first operating means) is being operated (pressed), and the operation of the start lever 135 (first operating means) is enabled (in this example, the state of the detection signal of the start lever 135 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on, and the interrupt status is neither an error detection state nor a setting change in progress), but the main control unit 300 does not execute control over the operation of the start lever 135 (first operating means) (in this example, a reel rotation start process that starts the rotation of all reels 110 to 112).

In this state, control over the operation of the start lever 135 (first operating means) (in this example, the reel rotation start process that starts the rotation of all reels 110 to 112) is not executed, so that the reels 110 to 112 do not rotate and remain stopped, as shown in FIG. 163 (b-3). Note that although control over the operation of the start lever 135 (first operating means) (in this example, the reel rotation start process that starts the rotation of all reels 110 to 112) is not executed, the start lever 135 is being operated (in this example, the state of the detection signal of the start lever 135 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), so the LEDd of the main board display 190 is lit.

According to this example, if the operating means is operated when power is restored, the LED can be illuminated even for operating means that do not perform control based on the operation, so it is possible to visually determine at a glance whether control based on the operation is not performed because the control is disabled or because there is a malfunction.

The next state indicated by the symbol T5 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the bet status is 3, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and the start lever 135 is released from the depression operation, changing to a state in which the start lever 135 is not being operated (not depressed).

In this state, the start lever 135 is not being operated (not pressed), and therefore LEDa of the main board display 190 is turned off (not shown).

The next state indicated by the symbol T6 is when the power supply device 252 is ON, the bet status is 3 coins, the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and the start lever 135 is operated (pressed).

In this state, the start lever 135 is operated (pressed) (in this example, the state of the detection signal of the start lever 135 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), so the main control unit 300 executes control over the operation of the start lever 135 (first operating means) (in this example, a reel rotation start process that starts the rotation of all reels 110 to 112), and spins all reels 110 to 112, as shown in FIG. 163 (b-4). Also, because the start lever 135 is being operated (in this example, when the state of the detection signal of the start lever 135 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), the LEDd of the main board display 190 is lit.

<Example of door opening with button pressed/Door opening with stop button in third stop operation state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 164(a), the door opening when the setting key SW is ON, the front door 102 is closed, and the stop buttons 137 to 139 are in the third stop operation state will be described.

Figure 164 (a) is a diagram showing the time sequence of the flow from when the setting key SW is ON, when the front door 102 is closed, and when the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is performed, until the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is no longer performed after the front door 102 is opened.

The state indicated by the symbol T1 in FIG. 164(a) is when the power supply unit 252 is ON, the setting key SW is ON, the front door 102 is closed, the stop button 139 is not operated (not pressed), the reels 110 to 111 are stopped, and the reel 112 is spinning.

In this state, as shown in FIG. 164(a-1), reels 110-111 are stopped, and the stop button 139 corresponding to reel 112 is not operated (not pressed), so only reel 112 is spinning. Also, because stop buttons 137-139 are not operated (not pressed) (in this example, the detection signals of the stop button 137-139 sensors of the main control unit 300 are off), LEDe, LEDf, and LEDg of the main board display 190 are turned off.

In addition, in this state, part of the symbol combination (in this example, "bell-bell-bell") corresponding to a small win (bell) is aligned on the pay line of reels 110 and 111, and the small win (bell) is in a reach state.

The next state indicated by the symbol T2 is when the power supply unit 252 is ON, the setting key SW is ON, the front door 102 is closed, the reels 110-111 are stopped, the reel 112 is spinning, and the stop button 139 is operated (pressed).

In this state, since the stop button 139 has been operated (pressed) (in this example, the state of the detection signal of the stop button 139 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), the main control unit 300 executes control over the operation of the stop button 139 (first operating means) (in this example, a reel stop control process that stops the reel 112 corresponding to the operated stop button 139), and stops the reel 112 as shown in FIG. 164 (a-2). Also, since the stop button 139 is being operated (in this example, when the state of the detection signal of the stop button 139 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), the LEDg of the main board display 190 is lit.

In addition, in this state, the symbol combination corresponding to the small win (bell) (in this example, "bell-bell-bell") is lined up on the pay line of reels 110 to 112, and the small win (bell) has been won, but the winning performance corresponding to the small win (bell) has not been executed.

The next state indicated by the symbol T3 is a state in which the front door 102 has changed from a closed state to an open state while the setting key SW is ON, the front door 102 is closed, the stop button 139 has been operated (pressed), the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and the winning performance corresponding to the small role (bell) is not being executed.

In this state, the front door 102 is opened with the setting key SW ON, but the state does not transition to the setting confirmation state, and although the symbol combination (in this example, "bell-bell-bell") corresponding to the minor win (bell) is lined up on the pay line of the reels 110 to 112, the winning performance corresponding to the minor win (bell) is not executed and is left on hold.

In this state, the winning effect corresponding to the minor prize (bell) is not executed, but since the stop button 139 is being operated (in this example, the state of the detection signal of the stop button 139 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), the LEDg of the main board display 190 is lit. Also, since the front door 102 has changed from a closed state to an open state, a door open notification (in this example, a notification outputting a voice message saying "The door is open" from the speakers 272, 277) is started to notify that the front door 102 is open.

The state indicated by the next symbol T4 is when the power supply unit 252 is ON, the setting key SW is ON, the front door 102 is open, the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the stop button 139 is operated (pressed), and the winning performance corresponding to the minor role (bell) is not being executed. Then, the pressing of the stop button 139 is released, changing the state to one in which the stop button 139 is not being operated (not pressed).

In this state, the pressing of the stop button 139 has been released, and so the winning effect corresponding to the minor prize (bell) has begun (in this example, the backlights of the reels 110 to 112 are turned on, and a winning sound is output from the speakers 272, 277). Also, because the stop button 139 has not been pressed (is not pressed), the LEDg of the main board display 190 is turned off.

Note that at this point, the stop button 139 is not operated (not pressed), and even after the winning performance is executed, the game will not transition to the setting confirmation state.

<Example of power restoration when the button is pressed/power restoration when the stop button is in the third stop operation state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 164(b), power restoration when the setting key SW is ON, the front door 102 is closed, and the stop buttons 137 to 139 are in the third stop operation state will be described.

Figure 164 (b) is a diagram showing the timeline of the flow from when the setting key SW is ON, the front door 102 is closed, and the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is performed, until power is restored in the third stop operation state after the front door 102 is opened.

The state indicated by the symbol T1 in FIG. 164(b) is a state in which the power supply unit 252 is ON, the setting key SW is ON, the front door 102 is closed, the stop button 139 is not operated (not pressed), the reels 110 to 111 are stopped, and the reel 112 is spinning.

The state indicated by the next symbol T2 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the setting key SW is ON, the front door 102 is closed, the stop button 139 is operated (pressed), the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and the winning performance corresponding to the small role (bell) is not being executed, and the front door 102 has changed from the closed state to the open state.

In this state, the front door 102 is opened with the setting key SW ON, but the state does not transition to a setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed, and although the symbol combination (in this example, "bell-bell-bell") corresponding to the minor win (bell) is lined up on the pay line of reels 110 to 112, the winning performance corresponding to the minor win (bell) is not executed and is reserved.

Although the winning effect corresponding to the minor prize (bell) is not executed, the LEDg of the main board display 190 is lit as shown in FIG. 164(b-1) since the stop button 139 is being operated (in this example, the state of the detection signal of the stop button 139 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on). Also, since the front door 102 has changed from a closed state to an open state, as shown in FIG. 164(b-1), a door open notification (in this example, a notification in which a voice saying "The door is open" is output from the speakers 272, 277) is started to notify that the front door 102 has been opened.

The next state indicated by the symbol T3 is a state in which the power supply device 252 has changed from ON to OFF while the power supply device 252 is ON, the setting key SW is ON, the front door 102 is open, the stop button 139 has been operated (pressed), the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and the winning effect corresponding to the small role (bell) is not being executed.

In this state, a power outage occurs, cutting off the power supply to the power supply unit 252, and power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped, so the display on the main board display 190, etc. is not displayed, as shown in Figure 164 (b-2).

The next state indicated by the symbol T4 is a state in which the power supply device 252 has changed from OFF to ON while the power supply device 252 is OFF, the setting key SW is ON, the front door 102 is open, the stop button 139 has been operated (pressed), the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and the winning effect corresponding to the small role (bell) is not being executed.

In this state, the setting key SW is ON, the front door 102 is open, and the power is turned from OFF to ON, so the state transitions to a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed, and although the symbol combination (in this example, "bell-bell-bell") corresponding to the small win (bell) is lined up on the pay line of reels 110 to 112, the winning performance corresponding to the small win (bell) has not been executed.

In this state, the winning effect corresponding to the minor prize (bell) is not executed, but since the stop button 139 is being operated (in this example, the state of the detection signal of the stop button 139 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), the LEDg of the main board display 190 is lit as shown in FIG. 164(b-3). Also, since the state has been changed to the setting change state, a setting change notification is started to inform the player that the setting can be changed as shown in FIG. 164(b-3) (in this example, a notification in which a sound "setting change in progress" is output from the speakers 272, 277).

The state indicated by the next symbol T4 is when the power supply unit 252 is ON, the setting key SW is ON, the front door 102 is open, the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the stop button 139 is operated (pressed), and the winning performance corresponding to the minor role (bell) is not being executed. Then, the pressing of the stop button 139 is released, changing the state to one in which the stop button 139 is not being operated (not pressed).

In this state, the pressing of the stop button 139 is released, but since the setting change state is maintained, the setting change notification (in this example, a notification in which a sound "Settings are being changed" is output from the speakers 272, 277) continues as shown in FIG. 164 (b-4), and the winning effect is not executed.

Note that even if the setting change state ends after the state indicated by symbol T5 (even if the setting change state ends and the game transitions to a playable state), the winning effect will not be executed.

<Example of power recovery when a button is pressed/Stop button functioning as a disable button>
Next, the restoration of power when the stop buttons 137 to 139 functioning as invalid buttons are pressed will be described with reference to FIG. 165(a).

Figure 165 (a) is a diagram showing the timeline of the process from when a power outage occurs while the reel 112 is spinning to when power is restored when the stop button 139 is pressed.

The state indicated by the symbol T1 in FIG. 165(a) is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the stop button 139 is not operated (not pressed), the reels 110 to 111 are stopped, and the reel 112 is spinning.

In this state, as shown in FIG. 165(a-1), the reels 110-111 are stopped, and the stop button 139 corresponding to the reel 112 is not operated (not pressed), so only the reel 112 is spinning. Also, the stop buttons 137-139 are not operated (not pressed) (in this example, the detection signals of the stop button 137-139 sensors of the main control unit 300 are off), so the LEDg of the main board display 190 is turned off.

The next state, indicated by the symbol T2, is a state in which the stop button 139 is not operated (not pressed), the reels 110-111 are stopped, and the reel 112 is spinning, and the power supply device 252 has changed from ON to OFF.

In this state, when the stop button 139 is not operated (not pressed), a power outage occurs in which the power supply unit 252 is cut off, and power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped, so the reel 112 that is spinning is stopped and the display of the main board display 190, etc. is hidden.

The next state indicated by the symbol T3 is when the power supply device 252 is OFF, the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and the stop button 139 is operated (pressed).

In this state, the stop button 139 is operated (pressed), but because the power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped, the operation of the stop button 139 (first operating means) is not enabled, and the display of the main board display 190, etc. is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 165 (a-2).

The next state, indicated by the symbol T4, is when the stop button 139 is operated (pressed), the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and the power supply device 252 changes from OFF to ON.

In this state, the power is restored from a power outage while the stop button 139 (first operating means) is being operated (pressed), and the operation of the stop button 139 (first operating means) is enabled (in this example, the state of the detection signal of the stop button 137-139 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on, and the interrupt status is neither an error detection state nor a setting change in progress), but the main control unit 300 does not execute control over the operation of the stop button 139 (first operating means) (in this example, a reel stop control process that stops the reel 112 corresponding to the operated stop button 139).

In this state, control over the operation of the stop button 139 (first operating means) (in this example, a reel stop control process that stops the reel 112 corresponding to the operated stop button 139) is not executed, and as shown in FIG. 165 (a-3), the reel 112 corresponding to the stop button 139 is not stopped and continues to spin. Note that although control over the operation of the stop button 139 (first operating means) (in this example, a reel stop control process that stops the reel 112 corresponding to the operated stop button 139) is not executed, the LEDg of the main board display 190 is lit because the stop button 139 is being operated (in this example, the state of the detection signal of the stop button 139 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on).

According to this example, if the operating means is operated when power is restored, the LED can be illuminated even for operating means that do not perform control based on the operation, so it is possible to visually determine at a glance whether control based on the operation is not performed because the control is disabled or because there is a malfunction.

The next state indicated by reference symbol T5 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the reels 110-111 are stopped, and the reel 112 is spinning, and the stop button 139 is released from the depression, changing to a state in which the stop button 139 is not being operated (not pressed).

In this state, the stop button 139 is not operated (not pressed), and therefore the LEDg of the main board display 190 is turned off (not shown).

The next state indicated by reference symbol T6 is when the power supply device 252 is ON, the reels 110-111 are stopped, the reel 112 is spinning, and the stop button 139 is operated (pressed).

In this state, since the stop button 139 has been operated (pressed) (in this example, the state of the detection signal of the stop button 139 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), the main control unit 300 executes control over the operation of the stop button 139 (first operating means) (in this example, a reel stop control process that stops the reel 112 corresponding to the operated stop button 139), and stops the reel 112 as shown in FIG. 165 (a-4). Also, since the stop button 139 is being operated (in this example, when the state of the detection signal of the stop button 139 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), the LEDg of the main board display 190 is lit.

<Example of power recovery when a button is pressed/Stop button functioning as an active button>
Next, the restoration of power when any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 functioning as valid buttons is pressed will be described with reference to FIG. 165(b).

Figure 165 (b) is a diagram showing the timeline of the process from when a power outage occurs while the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the first stop mode until power is restored when the stop button 139 is pressed.

The state indicated by the symbol T1 in FIG. 165(b) is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the stop button 139 is not operated (not pressed), the reels 110 to 111 are stopped, and the reel 112 is spinning.

In this state, as shown in FIG. 165(b-1), the reels 110-111 are stopped, and the stop button 139 corresponding to the reel 112 is not operated (not pressed), so only the reel 112 is spinning. Also, the stop buttons 137-139 are not operated (not pressed) (in this example, the detection signals of the stop button 137-139 sensors of the main control unit 300 are off), so the LEDg of the main board display 190 is turned off.

In addition, in this state, part of the symbol combination (in this example, "bell-bell-bell") corresponding to a small win (bell) is aligned on the pay line of reels 110 and 111, and the small win (bell) is in a reach state.

The next state indicated by the symbol T2 is when the power supply device 252 is ON, the reels 110-111 are stopped, the reel 112 is spinning, and the stop button 139 is operated (pressed).

In this state, since the stop button 139 is operated (pressed) (in this example, the state of the detection signal of the stop button 139 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), the main control unit 300 executes control over the operation of the stop button 139 (first operating means) (in this example, a reel stop control process that stops the reel 112 corresponding to the operated stop button 139), and stops the reel 112 as shown in FIG. 165 (b-2). Also, since the stop button 139 is being operated (in this example, when the state of the detection signal of the stop button 139 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), the LEDg of the main board display 190 is lit.

In addition, in this state, the symbol combination corresponding to the small win (bell) (in this example, "bell-bell-bell") is lined up on the pay line of reels 110 to 112, and the small win (bell) has been won, but the winning performance corresponding to the small win (bell) has not been executed.

The next state indicated by the symbol T3 is when the power supply device 252 has changed from ON to OFF while the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the stop button 139 has been operated (pressed), and the winning effect corresponding to the minor role (bell) is not being executed.

In this state, when the stop button 139 is operated (pressed), a power outage occurs in which the power supply unit 252 is cut off, and the power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped, and therefore the display of the main board display 190 and the like is hidden, although not shown in the figure.

The next state indicated by the symbol T4 is a state in which the power supply device 252 has changed from OFF to ON while the stop button 139 has been operated (pressed), the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and the winning effect corresponding to the minor role (bell) is not being executed.

In this state, the symbol combination (in this example, "bell-bell-bell") corresponding to the minor win (bell) is lined up on the pay line of the reels 110 to 112, and the power is restored while the stop button 139 (first operating means) is operated (pressed), but the winning performance corresponding to the minor win (bell) is not executed and is on hold. Note that although the winning performance corresponding to the minor win (bell) is not executed, the LEDg of the main board display 190 is lit because the stop button 139 is being operated (in this example, the detection signal state of the stop button 139 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on).

The next state indicated by the symbol T5 is when the power supply device 252 is ON, the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the stop button 139 is operated (pressed), and the winning effect corresponding to the minor role (bell) is not being executed. Then, the pressing of the stop button 139 is released, changing the state to one in which the stop button 139 is not being operated (not pressed).

In this state, the pressing of the stop button 139 has been released, and so the winning effect corresponding to the minor prize (bell) has begun (in this example, the backlights of the reels 110 to 112 are turned on, and a winning sound is output from the speakers 272, 277). Also, because the stop button 139 has not been pressed (is not pressed), the LEDg of the main board display 190 is turned off.

As explained using Figures 165(a) and (b), in this example, the control over the operation of the stop operation means can be changed depending on the status of the operation, and reel stop control that may cause a player to suffer a disadvantage due to an incorrect operation is disabled when power is restored, thereby preventing the player from suffering a disadvantage due to an incorrect operation. On the other hand, by enabling the hold control for the winning effect when power is restored and not executing the winning effect while the operation of the last operated stop operation means is continuing, it is possible to prevent the winning effect from being missed and increase the satisfaction of the player.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 150) is a gaming machine equipped with a power supply device (e.g., the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 151) that supplies power, a plurality of reels that are driven to rotate (e.g., the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 150), a first operating means (e.g., the start lever 135 shown in FIG. 150), a second operating means (e.g., the volume button 193a shown in FIG. 150), a third operating means (e.g., the stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 150), and a light-emitting means (e.g., the main board display 190 shown in FIG. 151(b) or FIG. 163), and when the first operating means is not operated, a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device is cut off, and when the first operating means is operated, the power is restored and the operation of the first operating means is enabled. However, when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device is cut off while the second operating means is not being operated, and the control state is established in which the operation of the second operating means is enabled after the power interruption is restored while the second operating means is being operated, control is executed for the operation of the second operating means (for example, a process for adjusting the volume). Even if a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device is cut off while the third operating means is not being operated while the reels are rotating, and the control state is established in which the operation of the third operating means is enabled after the power interruption is restored while the third operating means is being operated, In the above embodiment, the power supply device does not execute control over the operation of the third operating means (for example, a process for stopping a reel that is spinning), but when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device is cut off while the operation of the third operating means is still continuing in a state in which the third operating means is operated and the reel is stopped, and when the power interruption is restored while the third operating means is being operated, control over the operation of the third operating means may be executed. The light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting unit that emits light in response to the operation of the first operating means (for example, LEDd of the main board display 190 shown in FIG. 151(b) or FIG. 165) and a second light-emitting unit that emits light in response to the operation of the third operating means (for example, LEDe, LEDf, LEDg), but does not have a light-emitting unit that emits light in response to the second operating means being operated, the first light-emitting unit emits light even when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device is cut off when the first operating means is not being operated and the power is restored when the first operating means is being operated, the second light-emitting unit emits light even when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device is cut off when the third operating means is not being operated and the power is restored when the third operating means is being operated, and the second light-emitting unit emits light even when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device is cut off when the third operating means is not being operated and the power is restored when the third operating means is being operated, and the light-emitting unit is provided in a position that is difficult to see from the outside of the gaming machine (for example, inside the front door 102).

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, for the operating means (first operating means) for which control over operation is disabled, a light-emitting unit that emits light when operated is provided, making it easy to check whether or not there is a malfunction. Furthermore, for the operating means (second operating means) for which control over operation is not disabled, it is possible to know of a malfunction by the fact that control over operation is not executed even without providing a light-emitting unit, so by not providing a light-emitting unit, it is possible to reduce costs. Furthermore, since the light-emitting means is provided in a position that is difficult to see from the outside of the gaming machine, by making the light-emitting means invisible to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly thinking that the light emitted by the light-emitting means is part of the presentation, and no disadvantage is caused to the player.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 150) is a gaming machine equipped with a power supply device (for example, the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 151) that supplies power, a plurality of reels that are driven to rotate (for example, the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 150), a first operating means (for example, the start lever 135 shown in FIG. 150), a second operating means (for example, the volume button 193a shown in FIG. 150), a plurality of stop operating means for stopping the reels that are driven to rotate (for example, the stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 150), a light emitting means (for example, the main board display 190 shown in FIG. 151(b) or FIG. 163), and a presentation means, and even if a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device is cut off when the first operating means is not being operated, and the power interruption is restored when the first operating means is being operated, and a control state is entered in which the operation of the first operating means is enabled, the control of the operation of the first operating means is not performed. The power supply device is configured to control the operation of the second operation means (for example, a process for adjusting a volume) when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off while the second operation means is not being operated, and when the second operation means is being operated and the power interruption is restored to a control state in which the operation of the second operation means is enabled, and to control the operation of the second operation means (for example, a process for adjusting a volume), and to stop the multiple reels in a first stop mode by operating the multiple stop operation means, and when the multiple stop operation means are not operated, to execute a winning performance according to the first stop mode by the performance means; and when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off while the multiple stop operation means are not being operated while the reels are rotating, and when the power interruption is restored while the stop operation means is being operated, the reels that are spinning are not stopped, but In a state where the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode by the operation of a plurality of stop operation means, a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off when the last operated stop operation means of the plurality of stop operation means is operated, and when the power interruption is restored while the last operated stop operation means is being operated, the performance means does not execute the winning performance according to the first stop mode while the operation of the last operated stop operation means continues, and thereafter, when the stop operation means is no longer operated, the winning performance is executed. The light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting section (e.g., LEDd of the main board display 190 shown in FIG. 151(b) or FIG. 165) corresponding to the first operation means and a second light-emitting section (e.g., LEDe, LEDf, LEDg of the main board display 190 shown in FIG. 151(b) or FIG. 165) corresponding to the second operation means. The gaming machine does not have a light-emitting unit corresponding to the operation means, the first light-emitting unit emits light in response to the first operation means being operated and goes out in response to the first operation means being not operated, and also emits light when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device is cut off when the first operation means is not being operated and is restored from the power interruption when the first operation means is being operated, the second light-emitting unit emits light in response to the stop operation means being operated and goes out in response to the stop operation means being not operated, and also emits light in case a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device is cut off when the stop operation means is not being operated and is restored from the power interruption when the stop operation means is being operated, and the light-emitting unit is provided in a position that is difficult to see from the outside of the gaming machine (for example, inside the front door 102).

The device may also include a first display unit (e.g., an LED-compatible sticker 192 shown in FIG. 151(c)), the first display unit being a display unit indicating that the first light-emitting unit corresponds to the first operating means, and a display unit indicating that the second light-emitting unit corresponds to the third operating means.

With this configuration, even a manager who is not familiar with the gaming machine can check the first display unit provided on the gaming machine to understand which light-emitting unit corresponds to which operating means without having to check an instruction manual, etc., thereby improving convenience for gaming store staff, etc.

In addition, if the first display unit is disposed near the light-emitting means, the correspondence between the light-emitting unit and the operating means can be easily seen and confirmed, thereby improving convenience for game store staff, etc.

In addition, by arranging the first display unit at the center of rotation of the door of the gaming machine (for example, the side panel 260 to which the hinge device 276 is attached), the first display unit is easily visible when the door is opened, and the display on the first display unit is easy to check, thereby improving the workability of the gaming store's staff, etc.

In addition, the operating surface of the first operating means (e.g., the start lever 135 shown in FIG. 150 or FIG. 175(a)) may protrude further from the outer surface of the gaming machine than the operating surface of the second operating means (e.g., the volume button 193a shown in FIG. 150).

With this configuration, the first operating means is more likely to be operated erroneously than the second operating means, but the first operating means is an operating means for which control over operation is disabled, so overall it is possible to reduce the adverse effects of erroneous operation.

<Example of power recovery when a button is pressed/Reset button when an error is detected>
Next, the restoration of power when the reset button 243 is pressed while an error is detected will be described with reference to FIG. 166(a).

Figure 166 (a) is a diagram showing the timeline of the process from when a power outage occurs during error detection to when power is restored by pressing the reset button 243.

The state indicated by the symbol T1 in FIG. 166(a) is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, an error has been detected, and the reset button 243 has not been operated (not pressed).

In this state, as shown in FIG. 166(a-1), an error (in this example, a selector error) has occurred, and so the liquid crystal display device 157 issues an error notification (in this example, a display including the text string "Selector error") to notify of the error (in this example, a selector error). Also, since the reset button 243 is not being operated (not pressed) (in this example, the detection signal from the reset SW243 sensor of the main control unit 300 is off), the LEDh of the main board display 190 is turned off.

The next state indicated by the symbol T2 is a state in which an error has been detected and the power supply of the power supply device 252 has changed from ON to OFF when the reset button 243 has not been operated (not pressed).

In this state, when the reset button 243 is not operated (not pressed), a power interruption occurs in which the power supply unit 252 is cut off, and the power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped, so the displays on the liquid crystal display unit 157, main board display 190, etc. are hidden.

The next state indicated by reference symbol T3 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is OFF, an error is detected, and the reset button 243 is operated (pressed).

In this state, the reset button 243 is operated (pressed), but because the power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped, the operation of the reset button 243 is not enabled, and the displays of the liquid crystal display device 157, main board display 190, etc. are not displayed, as shown in FIG. 166 (a-2).

The next state indicated by the symbol T4 is a state in which the reset button 243 is operated (pressed) and an error is detected, and the power supply of the power supply device 252 changes from OFF to ON.

In this state, the reset button 243 is operated (pressed) and the power is restored, enabling the operation of the reset button 243 (in this example, the power is restored from an error detection state and the detection signal from the reset SW 243 sensor is turned on), so the reset button 243 functions as an enabled button (second operating means), and the main control unit 300 executes control over the operation of the reset button 243 (second operating means) (in this example, processing corresponding to the error resolution operation).

In this state, by executing control over the operation of the reset button 243 (second operating means) (in this example, processing corresponding to the error resolution operation), the selector error is resolved as shown in FIG. 166 (a-3), and an error notification (in this example, a display including the text string "Door is open") is executed on the liquid crystal display device 157 to notify of another error (in this example, a door open error). Also, because the reset button 243 is being operated (in this example, when the state of the detection signal from the reset SW243 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), the LEDh of the main board display 190 is lit.

The next state indicated by reference symbol T5 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, no error is detected, the reset button 243 is released from the depression, and the reset button 243 is no longer being operated (not depressed).

In this state, the reset button 243 is not operated (not pressed), so the LEDh on the main board display 190 is turned off (not shown).

<Example of power recovery when a button is pressed/Reset button in a state where settings can be changed>
Next, the restoration of power when the reset button 243 is pressed in the setting changeable state will be described with reference to FIG. 166(b).

Figure 166 (b) is a diagram showing the timeline of the process of powering on the device while the reset button 243 is pressed, which transitions to a state in which settings can be changed.

The state indicated by the symbol T1 in FIG. 166(b) is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the settings can be changed, and the reset button 243 is not being operated (not pressed).

In this state, as shown in FIG. 166(b-1), since this is the setting confirmation state, the setting value display device 101a displays a number (2 in this example) indicating the current setting value. Also, since the reset button 243 is not being operated (not pressed) (in this example, the detection signal of the reset SW243 sensor of the main control unit 300 is off), the LEDh of the main board display 190 is turned off.

The next state indicated by the symbol T2 is a setting confirmation state in which the reset button 243 is not being operated (not pressed) and the setting key SW has changed from ON to OFF.

In this state, since the setting key SW is turned OFF, the display on the setting value display device 101a is erased and the setting confirmation state is terminated, as shown in FIG. 166 (b-2).

The next state indicated by the symbol T3 is a state in which the power supply device 252 has changed from ON to OFF while the setting key SW is OFF and the reset button 243 is not being operated (not pressed).

In this state, when the reset button 243 is not operated (not pressed), a power outage occurs in which the power supply unit 252 is cut off, and the power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped, so the display on the setting value display unit 101a, main board display unit 190, etc. is hidden.

The next state indicated by reference symbol T4 is a state in which, with the power supply device 252 and the setting key SW in an OFF state, the setting key SW changes from OFF to ON and the reset button 243 is operated (pressed).

In this state, the reset button 243 is operated (pressed), but because the power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped, the operation of the reset button 243 is not enabled, and the display of the setting value display device 101a, main board display 190, etc. is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 166 (b-3).

The next state indicated by the symbol T5 is a state in which the power supply of the power supply device 252 has changed from OFF to ON when the setting key SW is ON and the reset button 243 is operated (pressed).

In this state, the setting key SW is ON when power is restored, making it possible to change the settings, and the reset button 243 is operated when power is restored, making operation of the reset button 243 valid (in this example, the detection signal from the reset SW sensor is ON and the interrupt status does not correspond to an error detection state), but the reset button 243 functions as an inactive button (first operating means), and the main control unit 300 does not execute control over operation of the reset button 243 (first operating means) (in this example, processing corresponding to the setting value change operation).

In this state, control over the operation of the reset button 243 (first operating means) (in this example, processing corresponding to the setting value change operation) is not executed, so the setting value is not changed (in this example, changing from setting 2 to setting 3), and as shown in FIG. 166 (b-4), a number indicating the current setting value (in this example, 2) is displayed on the setting value display device 101a. Also, because the reset button 243 is being operated (in this example, when the detection signal state of the reset SW243 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), the LEDh of the main board display 190 is lit.

The next state indicated by reference symbol T6 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the settings can be changed, the reset button 243 is released from the depression, and the reset button 243 is no longer being operated (not depressed).

In this state, the reset button 243 is not operated (not pressed), so the LEDh on the main board display 190 is turned off (not shown).

The next state indicated by reference symbol T7 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the settings can be changed, and the reset button 243 is operated (pressed).

In this state, the reset button 243 is operated (pressed) when the power is not on, and control over the operation of the reset button 243 (in this example, processing corresponding to a setting change operation) is executed, so that after the setting value is changed (in this example, from setting 2 to setting 3), a number indicating the current setting value (in this example, 3) is displayed on the setting value display device 101a, as shown in FIG. 166 (b-5).

As explained above, the main board display 190 is a display in which an LED lights up when each button is operated. Even if the operation is invalid, if a button is operated, the LED of this main board display 190 will light up.

According to this example, if the operating means is operated when power is restored, even if the operating means does not perform control based on the operation, the LED of the main board display 190 can be illuminated, so it is possible to visually determine at a glance whether control based on the operation is not performed because the control is disabled or because there is a malfunction.

<Power recovery when button is pressed (variation example)>
Next, power restoration when the button is pressed (variation) will be described with reference to Fig. 167. In order to avoid redundant explanation, only the contents different from those described with reference to Fig. 159 will be described here.

<Power recovery with button pressed (variation)/When power is turned on>
FIG. 167(a) is a diagram showing the control state (modified example) of each button when the power is turned on, and corresponds to FIG. 159(a).

In the example described using FIG. 159(a), the MAX BET button 132, the 1 BET button 130, and the settlement button 134 are valid buttons (second operating means) that enable the operation (control is executed for the operation) if the operation is being performed when power is restored after a power outage, but they may also be invalid buttons (first operating means) that disable the operation (control is not executed for the operation) if the operation is being performed when power is restored after a power outage.

In the example described using FIG. 159(a), the performance button 156 and the volume button 193a are invalid buttons (first operating means) that invalidate the operation (no control is executed for the operation) if the operation is performed when power is restored after a power outage, but they may be valid buttons (second operating means) that validate the operation (control is executed for the operation) if the operation is performed when power is restored after a power outage.

In this example, the operation means that are controlled by the main control unit 300 and have a relatively high level of importance (e.g., the MAX BET button 132, the 1-coin BET button 130, the settlement button 134, the start lever 135, and the stop buttons 137 to 139) are not controlled based on the operation when power is restored, thereby preventing serious operational errors.

On the other hand, the operation means that are controlled by the first sub-control unit 400 and have a relatively low level of importance (e.g., the performance button 156, the volume button 193b) can be controlled based on the operation when power is restored, thereby improving convenience.

In addition, by unifying (commonizing) the control content for each main control board (main control unit 300) and sub-control board (first sub-control unit 400), control does not become complicated and the control burden can be reduced.

In this example, even if a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the reset button 243 is not being operated, and the power is restored while the reset button 243 is being operated and the operation of the reset button 243 is enabled, the control over the operation of the reset button 243 (processing corresponding to the setting value change operation or the error resolution operation) is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this example, and the control over the operation of the reset button 243 (processing corresponding to the setting value change operation or the error resolution operation) may be executed (or may be executable) when a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the reset button 243 is not being operated, and the power is restored while the reset button 243 is being operated and the operation of the reset button 243 is enabled.

In other words, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 150) is a gaming machine equipped with a power supply device (for example, the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 151) that supplies power, a first operating means (for example, the start lever 135 shown in FIG. 150), a second operating means (for example, the performance button 156 and the volume button 193a shown in FIG. 150), and a third operating means (for example, the reset button 243), and even if a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off when the first operating means is not operated, and a control state is entered in which the power interruption is restored when the first operating means is operated and the operation of the first operating means is enabled, control over the operation of the first operating means (for example, a reel rotation start process that starts the rotation of all reels 110 to 112) is not executed, and a control in which a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device is cut off when the second operating means is not operated, and a control in which the power interruption is restored when the second operating means is operated and the operation of the second operating means is enabled When the third operating means is in a control state, control is performed for the operation of the second operating means (for example, a process for performing various effects in response to the player's operation, a process for adjusting the volume), and when the third operating means is not operated, a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device is cut off, and when the third operating means is operated, a control state is entered in which the operation of the third operating means is enabled by recovering from the power interruption, and control is performed for the operation of the third operating means (for example, a process corresponding to a setting value change operation or an error resolution operation), and when control for the operation of the first operating means is executed, it is difficult or impossible to return to the state before the control was executed, and even if control for the operation of the second operating means is executed, it is possible to return to the state before the control was executed, and when control for the operation of the third operating means is executed, it is difficult or impossible to return to the state before the control was executed, and the third operating means is an operating means provided in a position that is difficult for a player to operate.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, for operation means that are difficult or impossible to restore (first operation means, third operation means), control of operation is not performed even if they are in a state of being operated when power is restored, taking into consideration the case of erroneous operation. Furthermore, for operation means that are reversible (second operation means), since restoration is possible even in the case of erroneous operation, control of operation is performed if they are in a state of being operated when power is restored. Furthermore, even if an operation means is difficult or impossible to restore, if the button is located in a position that is difficult for a player to operate, there is a high possibility that the administrator has deliberately operated it, so control of operation is performed if they are in a state of being operated when power is restored. In this way, it is possible to provide a highly convenient gaming machine that allows players to quickly return to playing while taking into consideration erroneous operation, etc.

<Power recovery when button is pressed (variation example) / When power is turned on (error detection state)>
FIG. 167(b) is a diagram showing the control state (variation) of each button when the power is turned on (error detection state), and corresponds to FIG. 159(b).

In the example described using FIG. 159(b), the reset button 243 functions as an enabled button (second operating means) when power is restored from an error detection state and the detection signal of the reset SW sensor is turned on. However, it may also function as an disabled button (first operating means) and not execute control over the operation of the reset button 243 (in this example, processing corresponding to the error resolution operation).

<Power recovery with button pressed (variation)/Power on with setting change>
FIG. 167(c) is a diagram showing the control state (modified example) of each button when the power is turned on with a setting change, and corresponds to FIG. 159(c).

In the example described using FIG. 159(c), the reset button 243 functions as a disable button (first operating means) when power is turned on with a setting change, and the power is restored from a power outage, causing the detection signal from the reset SW sensor to be turned on. However, the reset button 243 may function as an enable button (second operating means) and execute control over the operation of the reset button 243 (in this example, processing corresponding to the setting value change operation).

<Control status of each button when the setting change state ends>
FIG. 168(a) is a diagram showing an example of the control state of each button when the setting change state is ended, and corresponds to FIG. 160(a).

Figure 168 (a) is the same as Figure 160 (a), so a detailed description will be omitted, but in the example shown in Figure 167 (a), if the effect button 156 is operated when power is restored after a power outage, the operation becomes effective and control over the operation (in this example, processing to perform effects in response to player operation in various effects) is executed, whereas as shown in Figure 168 (a), when the setting change mode (setting change state) is set and the effect button 156 (second operating means) is operated, even if the setting change state transitions to a playable state in which game play can proceed and operation of the effect button 156 becomes effective, control over the operation of the effect button 156 (in this example, processing to perform effects in response to player operation in various effects) is not executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 167(a), if the volume button 193a is operated when power is restored after a power outage, the operation becomes valid and control over the operation (in this example, processing to adjust the volume) is executed, whereas as shown in FIG. 168(a), even if the setting change mode (setting change state) is set and the volume button 193a (second operating means) is operated and the setting change state transitions to a playable state in which game play can proceed and operation of the volume button 193a becomes valid, control over operation of the volume button 193a (in this example, processing to adjust the volume) is not executed.

A gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., a slot machine as shown in FIG. 150) is a gaming machine equipped with a power supply device (e.g., a power supply device 252 as shown in FIG. 151) that supplies power, a first operating means (e.g., a start lever 135 as shown in FIG. 150), a second operating means (e.g., a performance button 156 and a volume button 193a as shown in FIG. 150), and a main control means (e.g., a main control unit 300 as shown in FIG. 152) that controls a game based on one of a plurality of setting values, and the main control means is capable of setting one of a plurality of states including at least a playable state (e.g., a normal game state) in which a game can proceed, a setting confirmation state (e.g., a setting confirmation mode) in which a currently set setting value can be confirmed, and a setting change state (e.g., a setting change mode) in which one of the plurality of setting values can be set, and it is assumed that a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device is cut off while the first operating means is not being operated, and the power is restored while the first operating means is being operated, resulting in a state in which operation of the first operating means is enabled. However, when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device is cut off while the second operating means is not being operated, and the power interruption is restored while the second operating means is being operated and the operation of the second operating means is enabled, control over the operation of the second operating means (for example, a process for performing various effects in response to the player's operation, a process for adjusting the volume) is executed, and when control over the operation of the first operating means is executed, it is difficult or impossible to return to the state before the control was executed, and even if control over the operation of the second operating means is executed, it is possible to return to the state before the control was executed, and even if the setting is changed and the second operating means is operated and the game transitions from the setting change state to the playable state and the operation of the second operating means is enabled, control over the operation of the second operating means is not executed (for example, see FIG. 168(a)).

According to the gaming machine according to this embodiment, for an operation means (first operation means) for which recovery is difficult or impossible, control of the operation is not performed even if the operation is in a state in which it is being operated when power is restored, in consideration of the case of erroneous operation. In addition, for an operation means (second operation means) for which recovery is possible, since recovery is possible even in the case of erroneous operation, control of the operation is performed if the operation is in a state in which it is being operated when power is restored. In this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with high convenience that allows the user to quickly return to play while taking into consideration erroneous operation, etc. In addition, the setting change state is, in principle, a state to which the user transitions by the operation of the administrator, and recovery from the setting change state is also performed by the administrator, and since this is a situation in which it is not necessary to quickly return to play, control of the operation is not performed in consideration of only erroneous operation. In addition, in the setting change state, the administrator is focused on changing the settings, and there is a risk that the administrator will not notice the erroneous operation, and for example, the settings such as the volume may remain at a setting that the administrator did not intend, so control of the operation is not performed when returning from the setting change state.

<Control status of each button when the setting confirmation state ends>
FIG. 168(b) is a diagram showing an example of the control status of each button when the setting confirmation state ends, and corresponds to FIG. 160(b).

Figure 168 (b) is the same as Figure 160 (b), so a detailed description will be omitted, but in the example shown in Figure 167 (a), if the effect button 156 is operated when power is restored after a power outage, the operation becomes effective and control over the operation (in this example, processing to produce effects in response to player operation in various effects) is executed, whereas as shown in Figure 168 (b), when the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) is set and the effect button 156 (second operating means) is operated, even if the setting confirmation state transitions to a playable state in which game play can proceed and operation of the effect button 156 becomes effective, control over the operation of the effect button 156 (in this example, processing to produce effects in response to player operation in various effects) is not executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 167(a), if the volume button 193a is operated when power is restored after a power outage, the operation becomes valid and control over the operation (in this example, processing to adjust the volume) is executed, whereas as shown in FIG. 168(b), even if the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) is set and the volume button 193a (second operating means) is operated and the setting confirmation state transitions to a playable state in which game play can proceed and operation of the volume button 193a becomes valid, control over operation of the volume button 193a (in this example, processing to adjust the volume) is not executed.

A gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., a slot machine as shown in FIG. 150) is a gaming machine equipped with a power supply device (e.g., a power supply device 252 as shown in FIG. 151) that supplies power, a first operating means (e.g., a start lever 135 as shown in FIG. 150), a second operating means (e.g., a performance button 156 and a volume button 193a as shown in FIG. 150), and a main control means (e.g., a main control unit 300 as shown in FIG. 152) that controls a game based on one of a plurality of setting values, and the main control means is capable of setting one of a plurality of states including at least a playable state (e.g., a normal game state) in which a game can proceed, a setting confirmation state (e.g., a setting confirmation mode) in which a currently set setting value can be confirmed, and a setting change state (e.g., a setting change mode) in which one of the plurality of setting values can be set, and it is assumed that a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device is cut off while the first operating means is not being operated, and the power is restored while the first operating means is being operated, resulting in a state in which operation of the first operating means is enabled. However, when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device is cut off while the second operating means is not being operated, and the power interruption is restored while the second operating means is being operated and the operation of the second operating means is enabled, control over the operation of the second operating means (for example, a process for performing various effects in response to the player's operation, a process for adjusting the volume) is executed, and when control over the operation of the first operating means is executed, it is difficult or impossible to return to the state before the control was executed, and even if control over the operation of the second operating means is executed, it is possible to return to the state before the control was executed, and even if the setting confirmation state is set and the second operating means is operated, and the game moves from the setting confirmation state to the playable state and the operation of the second operating means is enabled, control over the operation of the second operating means is not executed (for example, see FIG. 168(b)).

According to the gaming machine according to this embodiment, for an operation means (first operation means) for which recovery is difficult or impossible, control of the operation is not performed even if the operation is in a state in which it is being operated when power is restored, in consideration of the case of erroneous operation. In addition, for an operation means (second operation means) for which recovery is possible, since recovery is possible even in the case of erroneous operation, control of the operation is performed if the operation is in a state in which it is being operated when power is restored. In this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with high convenience that allows the user to quickly return to play while taking into consideration erroneous operation, etc. In addition, the setting confirmation state is, in principle, a state to which the user transitions by the operation of the administrator, and recovery from the setting confirmation state is also performed by the administrator, and since it is a situation in which it is not necessary to quickly return to play, control of the operation is not performed in consideration of only erroneous operation. In addition, in the setting confirmation state, the administrator is focused on checking the settings, and there is a risk that the administrator will not notice the erroneous operation, and for example, the settings such as the volume may remain at a setting that the administrator did not intend, so control of the operation is not performed when returning from the setting confirmation state.

<Simultaneous operation of valid buttons when powering on>
Next, the simultaneous operation of valid buttons when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. 169(a).

Figure 169 (a) shows another example of control when valid buttons are operated simultaneously when the power is turned on.

As explained using FIG. 167(a), the slot machine in this example has the effect button 156 and the volume button 193a as valid buttons that enable operations (control is executed for the operations) when operations are performed when power is restored after a power outage, and has the stop buttons 137 to 139 as valid buttons that may be enabled.

In this example, when a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the effect button 156 and the volume button 193a (volume button 193a (right) or volume button 193a (left)) are not being operated, and when the power outage is restored while the effect button 156 and the volume button 193a are being operated simultaneously (pressed simultaneously) and the operation of the effect button 156 and the volume button 193a becomes enabled, the main control unit 300 determines that both the operation of the effect button 156 and the operation of the volume button 193a are enabled, and first executes control over the operation of the effect button 156 (for example, a process to display a menu), and then executes control over the volume button 193a (for example, a process to move the cursor on the menu display).

It is also possible to determine that both the operation of the effect button 156 and the operation of the volume button 193a are invalid, or to configure the device to execute only one of the control over the operation of the effect button 156 (e.g., a process for displaying a menu) and the control over the volume button 193a (e.g., a process for moving the cursor on the menu display).

In addition, when a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the volume button 193a (right) and the volume button 193a (left) are not being operated, and the volume button 193a (right) and the volume button 193a (left) are being operated simultaneously (pressed simultaneously), the power outage is restored and the operation of the volume button 193a (right) and the volume button 193a (left) becomes enabled, the main control unit 300 determines that the operation of both the volume button 193a (right) and the volume button 193a (left) is enabled, and first executes control over the operation of the volume button 193a (right) (for example, a process to increase the volume), and then executes control over the volume button 193a (left) (for example, a process to decrease the volume).

It is possible to first execute control over the operation of the volume button 193a (left) (e.g., a process to decrease the volume), and then execute control over the volume button 193a (right) (e.g., a process to increase the volume), or it may be determined that the operations of both the volume button 193a (right) and the volume button 193a (left) are invalid, or it may be configured to execute only one of the control over the operation of the volume button 193a (right) (e.g., a process to increase the volume) and the control over the volume button 193a (left) (e.g., a process to decrease the volume).

In addition, when a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while any of the stop buttons 137-139 and the volume button 193a (volume button 193a (right) or volume button 193a (left)) are not being operated, and when the power is restored while any of the stop buttons 137-139 and the volume button 193a are being operated simultaneously (pressed simultaneously), the main control unit 300 determines that the operation of any of the stop buttons 137-139 and the volume button 193a is both valid if the stop buttons 137-139 function as valid buttons when power is restored, and first controls the operation of any of the stop buttons 137-139 (for example, a process to stop the corresponding reel), and then controls the volume button 193a (for example, a process to adjust the volume).

On the other hand, if the stop buttons 137-139 do not function as valid buttons when power is restored, the main control unit 300 determines that the operation of any of the stop buttons 137-139 is invalid, and does not execute control over the operation of any of the stop buttons 137-139 (for example, a process to stop the corresponding reel), but executes only control over the volume button 193a (for example, a process to adjust the volume).

It may be determined that both the operation of any of the stop buttons 137-139 and the operation of the volume button 193a are invalid, or, if the stop buttons 137-139 function as valid buttons when power is restored, control over the volume button 193a (for example, a process to adjust the volume) is not performed, and only control over the operation of any of the stop buttons 137-139 (for example, a process to stop the corresponding reel) is performed.

Although not shown in the figure, if a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the performance button 156 and any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 are not operated, and the power is restored while the performance button 156 and any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 are simultaneously operated (pressed simultaneously), and the operation of the performance button 156 and any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 becomes enabled, the main control unit 300 determines that the operation of the performance button 156 and any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 are both invalid.

<Simultaneous operation of valid buttons when powering on (error detection state)>
Next, simultaneous operation of valid buttons when the power is turned on (error detection state) will be described using FIG. 169(b).

Figure 169 (b) shows another example of control when valid buttons are operated simultaneously when the power is turned on (error detection state).

As explained using FIG. 167(a), the slot machine of this example has effect button 156 and volume button 193a as valid buttons whose operation is valid (control is executed for that operation) if the operation is being performed when power is restored after a power outage, stop buttons 137-139 as valid buttons that may be valid, and reset button (reset switch) 243 as an invalid button whose operation is invalid (control is not executed for that operation) if the operation is being performed when power is restored after a power outage.

In this example, a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the performance button 156 and the volume button 193a (volume button 193a (right) or volume button 193a (left)) are not being operated, and the power is restored while the performance button 156 and the volume button 193a are being operated simultaneously (pressed simultaneously). However, if an error is detected, the main control unit 300 determines that the operation of both the performance button 156 and the volume button 193a is invalid and does not execute control over said operation. Note that even in an error detection state, the configuration may be such that the operation of both the performance button 156 and the volume button 193a is valid and control over said operation is executed.

In addition, if a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the volume button 193a (right) and the volume button 193a (left) are not being operated, and the power is restored while the volume button 193a (right) and the volume button 193a (left) are being operated simultaneously (pressed simultaneously), but an error is detected, the main control unit 300 determines that the operations of the volume button 193a (right) and the volume button 193a (left) are both invalid, and does not execute control over those operations. Note that even in an error detection state, the configuration may be such that the operations of the volume button 193a (right) and the volume button 193a (left) are both valid, and control over those operations is executed.

In addition, if a power outage occurs in which the power supply to the power supply device 252 is cut off while none of the stop buttons 137-139 and the volume button 193a (volume button 193a (right) or volume button 193a (left)) are operated, and the power is restored while none of the stop buttons 137-139 and the volume button 193a are simultaneously operated (pressed simultaneously), but an error is detected, if the stop buttons 137-139 function as valid buttons when power is restored, the main control unit 300 will prioritize control over the operation of any of the stop buttons 137-139 (for example, processing corresponding to an error resolution operation) and will not execute control over the volume button 193a (stop button priority).

On the other hand, if the stop buttons 137-139 do not function as valid buttons when power is restored, the main control unit 300 determines that the operation of any of the stop buttons 137-139 is invalid, and does not execute control over the operation of any of the stop buttons 137-139 (for example, a process to stop the corresponding reel), but executes only control over the volume button 193a (for example, a process to adjust the volume).

In addition, if a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the performance button 156 and the reset button 243 are not being operated, and the power is restored while the performance button 156 and the reset button 243 are being operated simultaneously (pressed simultaneously), but an error is detected, the main control unit 300 prioritizes control over the operation of the reset button 243 (for example, processing corresponding to an error resolution operation) and does not execute control over the performance button 156 (reset button priority).

In addition, if a power outage occurs in which the power supply to the power supply device 252 is cut off while the volume button 193a (volume button 193a (right) or volume button 193a (left)) and the reset button 243 are not being operated, and the power is restored while the volume button 193a and the reset button 243 are being operated simultaneously (pressed simultaneously), but an error is detected, the main control unit 300 prioritizes control over the operation of the reset button 243 (for example, processing corresponding to an error resolution operation) and does not execute control over the volume button 193a (reset button priority).

In addition, if a power outage occurs in which the power supply to the power supply device 252 is cut off while none of the stop buttons 137-139 and the reset button 243 are operated, and the power is restored while none of the stop buttons 137-139 and the reset button 243 are operated (pressed simultaneously) simultaneously, but an error is detected, the main control unit 300 determines that the operation of either of the stop buttons 137-139 and the reset button 243 is both valid, and executes control over the operation of either of the stop buttons 137-139 (for example, a process to stop the corresponding reel) and control over the operation of the reset button 243 (for example, a process corresponding to an error resolution operation).

Note that if it is determined that the operation of any one of the stop buttons 137-139 and the reset button 243 are both valid, control over the operation of the reset button 243 (for example, processing corresponding to an error resolution operation) may be executed only when control over the operation of any one of the stop buttons 137-139 (for example, processing to stop the corresponding reel) is executed.

On the other hand, if the stop buttons 137-139 do not function as valid buttons when power is restored, the main control unit 300 determines that the operation of any of the stop buttons 137-139 is invalid, and does not execute control over the operation of any of the stop buttons 137-139 (for example, processing to stop the corresponding reel), but only executes control over the operation of the reset button 243 (for example, processing corresponding to an error resolution operation).

<Operation of each button in the operation state of a certain operation means (modified example)>
Next, the operation (variation) of each button in the operation state of a certain operation means will be described with reference to Fig. 170. In order to avoid redundant explanation, only the contents different from those described with reference to Fig. 162 will be described here.

<Operation of each button in the operation state of a certain operation means (variation example)/MAX bet button>
FIG. 170(a) is a diagram showing a modified example of the control state of each button when the MAX BET button 132 is operated, and corresponds to FIG. 162(a).

In the example described using FIG. 162(a), when the operation of the 1-coin bet button 130 (second operation means) is detected in the operation state of the MAX bet button 132 (second operation means) (the state of the detection signal of the bet button 132 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), the operation is determined to be invalid and control for the operation is not executed, but the operation may be determined to be valid and control for the operation is executed.

In the example described using FIG. 162(a), when the operation of the start lever 135 (first operating means) is detected in the operating state of the MAX bet button 132 (second operating means) (the state of the detection signal of the bet button 132 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), the operation is determined to be valid and control for the operation is executed, but the operation may also be determined to be invalid and control for the operation is not executed.

<Operation of each button in the operation state of a certain operation means (variation example)/1 coin bet button>
FIG. 170(b) is a diagram showing a modified example of the control state of each button when the 1-coin bet button 130 is operated, and corresponds to FIG. 162(b).

In the example described using FIG. 162(b), when the operation of the settlement button 134 (second operation means) is detected in the operation state of the 1 coin bet button 130 (second operation means) (the state of the detection signal of the bet button 130 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), the operation is determined to be invalid and control for the operation is not executed, but it may be configured to determine the operation as valid and control for the operation is executed.

In the example described using FIG. 162(b), when the operation of the start lever 135 (first operation means) is detected in the operation state of the 1 coin bet button 130 (second operation means) (the state of the detection signal of the bet button 130 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), the operation is determined to be valid and control for the operation is executed, but the operation may also be determined to be invalid and control for the operation is not executed.

<Operation of each button in the operating state of a certain operating means (variation example)/start lever>
FIG. 170(d) is a diagram showing a modified example of the control state of each button when the start lever is operated, and corresponds to FIG. 162(d).

In the example described using FIG. 162(d), when the operation of the MAX BET button 132 (second operating means) or the 1 BET button 130 (second operating means) is detected in the operating state of the start lever 135 (second operating means) (the state of the detection signal of the start lever 135 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), the operation is determined to be valid and control for the operation is executed, but the operation may also be determined to be invalid and control for the operation is not executed.

<Operation of each button in the operation state of a certain operation means (variation example)/stop button>
FIG. 170( e ) is a diagram showing a modified example of the control state of each button when the stop button is operated, and corresponds to FIG. 162( e ).

In the example described using FIG. 162(e), when the operation of the MAX BET button 132 (second operation means) or the 1 BET button 130 (second operation means) is detected in the operation state of the stop buttons 137-139 (second operation means) (the state of the detection signal of the stop button 137-139 sensor of the main control unit 300 is ON), the operation is determined to be valid and control for the operation is executed, but the operation may also be determined to be invalid and control for the operation is not executed.

<Specific examples of control over performance button operations and volume button operations>
Next, a specific example of control over the operation of the performance button 157 and the volume button 193a will be described with reference to FIG.

<Specific example 1 of control over performance button operation and volume button operation>
FIG. 171(a) is a diagram showing an example of control over the performance button 156 and control over the volume button 193a in chronological order.

The state indicated by the symbol T1 in FIG. 171(a) is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON and the performance button 156 and the volume button 193a are not operated (not pressed).

As shown in FIG. 171(a-1), this state is a state in which the liquid crystal display device 157 is executing a presentation (e.g., a normal presentation) that corresponds to the current game state (e.g., normal game), and the menu display is not displayed.

The next state indicated by the symbol T2 is when the power supply device 252 is ON, the volume button 193a is not operated (not pressed), and the menu display is not displayed, and the performance button 156 is pressed.

In this state, when the menu display is not being displayed, the effect button 156 is pressed, and as a result of the control of the effect button 156, the top screen display of the menu display is started on the liquid crystal display device 157, as shown in FIG. 171 (a-2).

The contents of the top screen display of the menu display are not particularly limited, but in this example, a display indicating that it is a menu display (in this example, the character string "Menu" is displayed), a display of the menus (items) that can be displayed or set in the menu display (in this example, the character strings "Volume setting", "Light setting", and "Game instructions" are displayed), and a cursor pointing to the provisionally selected menu (item) is displayed.

The next state indicated by the symbol T3 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the performance button 156 is not operated (not pressed), the top screen display of the menu display is displayed (state 1), and the volume button 193a (down) is pressed.

In this state, when the top screen display of the menu display is displayed (state 1), "Volume setting" is tentatively selected with the cursor and the volume button 193a (down) is pressed, so that the cursor is moved downward from the "Volume setting" position to the "Light setting" position as shown in FIG. 171 (a-3) in order to control the volume button 193a (down).

The next state indicated by the symbol T4 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the performance button 156 is not operated (not pressed), the top screen display of the menu display is displayed (state 1), and the volume button 193a (up) is pressed.

In this state, when the top screen display of the menu display is displayed (state 1), the volume button 193a (up) is pressed with "Light setting" tentatively selected by the cursor, and as a control for the volume button 193a (up), the cursor is moved from the "Light setting" position to the "Volume setting" position upward, as shown in FIG. 171 (a-4).

The next state indicated by the symbol T5 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the volume button 193a is not operated (not pressed), the top screen display of the menu display is displayed (state 1), and the performance button 156 is pressed.

In this state, when the top screen display of the menu display is displayed (state 1), and the effect button 156 is pressed while "volume setting" is tentatively selected by the cursor, the effect button 156 is controlled to switch the top screen display of the menu display to the next hierarchical volume setting display on the liquid crystal display device 157, as shown in FIG. 171 (a-5), and transition to a state in which the volume setting display is displayed (state 2).

The contents of the volume setting display are not particularly limited, but in this example, a display indicating that it is a volume setting display (in this example, the character string "Volume Setting" is displayed), a volume level display indicating the current volume, and an image imitating the appearance of the volume button 193a, indicating that the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume button 193a (right) and the volume button 193a (left), are displayed.

<Specific example 2 of control over performance button operation and volume button operation>
Figure 171 (b) is a diagram showing another example of control over the performance button 156 and control over the volume button 193a in chronological order.

Note that the states indicated by symbols T1 and T2 in Figure 171(b) are the same as the states indicated by symbols T1 and T2 in Figure 171(a), so their description will be omitted and the following description will begin with the state indicated by symbol T3 in Figure 171(b).

The state indicated by the symbol T3 in FIG. 171(b) is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the performance button 156 is not operated (not pressed), and the top screen display of the menu display is displayed (state 1).

In the state shown by reference symbol T2, when the effect button 156 is pressed while the menu display is not being displayed, the control of the effect button 156 starts displaying the top screen of the menu display on the liquid crystal display device 157 as shown in FIG. 171 (b-2), but in the state shown by reference symbol T3, the state in which the top screen of the menu display is displayed (state 1) is maintained.

The state indicated by the symbol T4 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the effect button 156 and the volume button 193a are not being operated (not pressed), and the top screen display of the menu display is being displayed (state 1), and the power supply device 252 has changed from ON to OFF.The state indicated by the symbol T5 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is OFF, the volume button 193a is not being operated (not pressed), and the effect button 156 is pressed.

In the states indicated by symbols T4 and T5, a power outage occurs in which the power supply unit 252 is cut off, and power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped, and the display on the liquid crystal display device 157 becomes non-display, as shown in FIG. 171 (b-4).

The next state indicated by the symbol T6 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is turned off, the volume button 193a is not operated (not pressed), and the performance button 156 is pressed, and the power supply device 252 has changed from OFF to ON.

In this state, power is restored with the effect button 156 pressed, and as a result of control over the effect button 156, as shown in FIG. 171 (b-5), the liquid crystal display device 157 starts displaying the top screen of the menu display, and transitions to a state (state 1) in which the top screen of the menu display is displayed.

In the example described using FIG. 171(b), when the effect button 156 is pressed while the menu display is not being displayed, the state transitions to a state (state 1) where the top screen display of the menu display is displayed, as shown in FIG. 171(b-2). While this top screen display of the menu display is being displayed (state 1), a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off, and power is restored with the effect button 156 pressed. However, instead of transitioning to a state (state 2) where the volume setting display of the next hierarchical level is being displayed, the state starts from a state (state 1) where the top screen display of the menu display is the same as before the power outage and restoration of power.

According to this example, even if the player mistakenly operates the effect button 156 when power is restored, the player can start the operation from the state (state 1) where the top screen display with the same menu display as before the power outage/restoration is displayed. This does not confuse the player, and the player can immediately perform the operation that he or she intended to perform before the power outage/restoration, thereby improving convenience for the player.

In this example, the effect button 156 is pressed when the menu display is not displayed, and a power interruption occurs in the state where the top screen display of the menu display is displayed (state 1), but even if a power interruption occurs in the state where the power supply device 252 is cut off when the menu display is not displayed (for example, the state shown by symbol T1 in FIG. 171(b)), the configuration may be such that the state transitions to the state where the top screen display of the menu display is displayed (state 1) without transitioning to the state where the volume setting display is displayed (state 2).

In addition, an example has been given in which a power interruption occurs to cut off the power supply device 252 when the top screen display of the menu display is displayed (state 1), but if a power interruption occurs to cut off the power supply device 252 when the volume button 193a is pressed and the volume (or light intensity) is displayed in the volume setting display (or light intensity setting display), the display may be configured to transition to a state in which the volume (or light intensity) is displayed in the volume setting display (or light intensity setting display) without increasing (or decreasing) the volume (or light intensity) (without enabling the operation of the volume button 193a).

<Game machine (variant example)>
Next, the basic configuration of the slot machine 1100 according to the modified example and the basic configuration of the lending machine 1700 will be described with reference to Fig. 172. Fig. 172 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1100 and the lending machine 1700 according to the modified example as viewed from the front side (player side).

In order to avoid repetitive explanations, we will only explain the configuration that differs from the slot machine 100 described using Figure 150.

The game medal count display device 1170 is a 5-digit 7-segment (SEG) display that displays the game medal count recorded in the medal count control unit 1350 shown in FIG. 173.

The count button 1171 is an operating means for transmitting information on the number of game medals recorded in the medal count control unit 1350 shown in FIG. 173 to the lending machine 1700.

The lending machine 1700 shown in FIG. 172 is sometimes called a card unit and corresponds to an example of the gaming media management device of the present invention. This lending machine 1700 is installed in a one-to-one relationship with the slot machine 1100.

The lending machine 1700 accepts cards. There are two types of "cards" referred to here. One is a visitor card (also called a general card) with a prepaid function, which is a storage medium for gaming issued to general players who are not registered as members. The other is a member card, which is a storage medium for gaming issued to member players who are registered as members at the gaming center. An IC card is used as the card.

The card stores a value. The value stored on the card includes the "number of medals held" and the "money balance", which is the remaining amount of prepaid money. The lending machine 1700 that accepts the card has the function of converting the "number of medals held" stored on the card into the "number of game medals (number of credits)".

The "number of gaming medals (number of credits)" is data that can be used to set the bet amount and can be converted into the "number of possessed medals." The "number of gaming medals" is obtained by debiting the card's "money balance" or "number of possessed medals." The "number of gaming medals" also includes the number of medals won by winning. This "number of gaming medals" is managed by the medal count control unit 1350 shown in FIG. 173, and is the number of electronic medals electromagnetically stored (amount of electronic gaming value). The "number of gaming medals" is decremented by inserting medals using the bet buttons 130, 132.

The "number of medals possessed" is a value obtained by converting the "number of game medals (number of credits)" into a count. This "number of medals possessed" is stored in a manner that allows it to be specified by the player's card. In other words, by operating the count button 1171, the "number of game medals" is converted into the "number of medals possessed" and can be stored on the card. The "number of medals possessed" may be managed by a management device for managing the number of medals possessed that is installed in the gaming facility.

The front side of the loaning machine 1700 is provided with a bill insertion slot 1701 at the top for inserting bills, and a card insertion slot 1702 at the bottom for inserting cards. A membership card or visitor card inserted into this card insertion slot 1702 is accepted by a card reader/writer, and the information stored on the card is read. The authenticity and type of bill inserted into the bill insertion slot 1701 are identified, and the face value of the bill is stored as the "money balance" on the card inserted into the card insertion slot 1702.

An information display 1703 is provided below the bill insertion slot 1701. This information display 1703 is a display that provides operation guidance for the lending machine 1700 and the status of the slot machine 1100 through text and images. The surface may be configured as a touch panel, allowing various operations to be input by touching the various displayed display items with a finger.

Below the information display 1703, a money balance display 1705 and a medal count balance display 1706 are arranged in two rows, one above the other. The money balance display 1705 displays the "money balance" stored in the card inserted in the card insertion slot 1702 as an amount. Meanwhile, the medal count balance display 1706 displays the "number of medals held" stored in the card inserted in the card insertion slot 1702 as the number of medals.

A loan button 1707 and a card return button 1708 are provided in the vertical center of the loaner 1700. The loan button 1707 is an operating means for withdrawing the "money balance" stored in the card inserted in the card insertion slot 1702 to obtain the "number of game medals." Specifically, if there is a "money balance" on the card inserted in the card insertion slot 1702, an LED lamp built into the loan button 1707 lights up in a manner indicating that withdrawal is possible. By operating the loan button 1707 in this state, the "number of game medals" is increased according to the money withdrawn.

For example, a "number of game medals" equivalent to 1000 yen is added as a predetermined amount. Also, if the "money balance" of the card is less than the predetermined amount (for example, less than 1000 yen), only the "number of game medals" converted from the current balance at a predetermined rate is added. Note that even if the "money balance" of the card is less than the predetermined amount, the "number of medals held" stored on the card may be replenished to add the "number of game medals" equivalent to the predetermined amount.

The card return button 1708 is operated when the player ends the game, and is an operation means for storing the "number of possessed medals" determined at the end of the game in the card inserted in the card insertion slot 1702 and discharging it. The "number of possessed medals" determined at the end of the game is the number of medals obtained by subtracting the number of medals converted to the "number of game medals" from the "number of possessed medals" stored in the card inserted in the card insertion slot 1702, and adding the number of game medals counted by the counting operation.

The data of "money balance", "number of medals held", and "number of game medals" explained above are converted in the following order: "money balance" and "number of medals held" → "number of game medals" → "number of medals held". In this way, the "number of medals held" specified by the card is converted into the "number of game medals", and in the slot machine 1100 of this example, the "number of game medals" can be used to set the number of bets, so that it is possible to provide a new slot machine (managed game machine) that does not use real medals for play, without confusing players who are accustomed to conventional slot machines in which real medals are loaned out, credits are secured by inserting the real medals, and the number of bets is set using the credits.

Although the "number of medals saved" is not mentioned in this specification, this "number of medals saved" is not stored on the card, but is the number of medals deposited in the arcade. In the arcade, the number of medals a player has won in a game may be managed as "points" during the day by the hall management terminal or other management computer, and managed as "number of medals saved" from the day after the medals were won. When both the "number of medals saved" and the "number of medals saved" are stored, priority is given to deducting from the "number of medals saved". In addition, both the "number of medals saved" and the "number of medals saved" may be stored in a higher-level server in association with the card number. In the case of a visitor card, the "number of medals saved" is stored directly on the visitor card, but the "number of medals saved" may be stored in a higher-level server in association with the card number.

When storing the card number in the upper server, data that can identify the time when the card number was stored in the upper server may be written to the card (member card, visitor card) and discharged. The "money balance" is written directly to the card (member card, visitor card) and discharged. The "number of medals held" is stored in the card (member card, visitor card) or the upper server when, for example, the counting button 1171 is operated and counting processing is performed. However, instead of this, the number of medals held may be stored all at once when the card is returned. Furthermore, when the player finishes playing and returns the card from the lending machine 1700, the "number of medals held" stored in the lending machine 1700 is temporarily stored as saved medals, and when the card is inserted into the hall management terminal or another lending machine 1700, only the "number of medals held" for that day that was temporarily stored as saved medals is stored again in the lending machine 700, and the "number of medals played" may be added within the range of the "number of medals held" so that the player can play.

<Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 1100 according to the modified example will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 173. Fig. 173 shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit of the slot machine 1100 according to the modified example.

In order to avoid repetitive explanations, we will only explain the configuration that differs from the control unit of the slot machine 100 described using Figure 152 (mainly the configuration belonging to the rectangular area indicated by symbol A in Figure 173).

The main control unit 300 has a game control unit 302 that controls the progress of the game, and a medal count control unit 1350 that controls the number of game medals owned by the player. The game control unit 302 corresponds to an example of a game control means, and the medal count control unit 1350 corresponds to an example of a game value number control means.

Like the game control unit 302, the medal count control unit 1350 is equipped with a CPU 1354, a ROM 1356, a RAM 1358, an I/O 1360 for controlling the input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 1362 for measuring time, number of times, etc.

The basic circuit of the medal count control unit 1350 is connected to a game medal count display device 1170 consisting of a 5-digit 7-segment (SEG) display, a count button 1171, and a game medal count clear button 1172.

The medal count control unit 1350's basic circuit is also connected to the lending machine 1700 via the lending machine connection terminal board 1790. The medal count control unit 1350 communicates bidirectionally with the lending machine 1700.

The medal count control unit 1350 transmits various commands to the game control unit 302. The game control unit 302 also transmits various commands to the medal count control unit 1350. In other words, communication between the medal count control unit 1350 and the game control unit 302 is also two-way communication.

The medal count control unit 1350 also stores the "game medal count" in a specified area of the RAM 1358. Specifically, the "game medal count" is stored in a credit counter. The medal count control unit 350 updates the "game medal count" stored in a specified area of the RAM 1358 by addition or subtraction. Examples of addition include processing based on a payout command sent from the game control unit 302, processing based on a settlement command sent from the game control unit 302, and processing based on a loan notification sent from the loaner 1700. On the other hand, examples of subtraction processing include counting processing based on the operation of the count button 1171, and processing based on an input command sent from the game control unit 302.

The medal count clear button 1172 shown in FIG. 173 is located in a position that cannot be operated by the player (for example, a position that cannot be operated unless the front door 102 is opened), and is an operating means for clearing the "medal count" stored in a specified area of the RAM 1358.

For example, if a player leaves the game with "2" remaining in the number of game medals, it becomes difficult to determine whether the player who left "2" intends to continue playing or not, and another player cannot start playing. However, if the number of game medals can be cleared by the operation of a store clerk, another player can be welcomed sooner. Note that the "number of game medals" does not necessarily have to be cleared when the number of game medals is two or less, and if the number of game medals is three or more, counting may be performed in the same way as when the counting button 1171 is operated. If the counting button 1171 malfunctions and is unable to recognize that it has been operated, the "number of game medals" cannot be converted to the "number of medals held," which could cause a disadvantage to the player. However, if counting can be performed by the operation of a store clerk, the player will not be disadvantaged.

Furthermore, there is no need to provide a new counting button for store clerks, so there is no increase in costs. Note that instead of distinguishing between clearing and counting by determining the number of game medals played, clearing and counting may be distinguished by the method of operating the game medal count clear button 1172. For example, clearing occurs when the button is pressed for a short time, and counting occurs when the button is pressed for a long time. Either clearing or counting can be easily selected regardless of the number of game medals played. Also, clearing occurs when only the game medal count clear button 1172 is operated, and counting occurs when the game medal count clear button 1172 and another button are operated simultaneously. There is a low possibility of operating incorrectly, and either clearing or counting can be easily selected.

<Power recovery when the button is pressed/Count button, medal count clear button>
Next, using Figure 174 (a), we will explain how power is restored when the count button 1171 and the game medal number clear button 1172 are pressed.

Figure 174 (a) shows the control state of the count button and the medal count clear button when the power is turned on.

<Power recovery when button is pressed/count button>
The counting button 1171 described using Figure 172 is one of the valid buttons (second operating means) whose operation becomes valid (control is executed for the operation) when the operation is performed when power is restored after a power outage, as shown in Figure 174 (a), and in this example, it is controlled by the medal count control unit 1350.

In this example, a power outage occurs in which the power supply to the power supply device 252 is cut off while the count button 1171 (second operating means) is not being operated, and when the power is restored while the count button 1171 (second operating means) is being operated and the operation of the count button 1171 (second operating means) is enabled (in this example, the detection signal of the count button 1171 sensor of the medal count control unit 1350 is on), the medal count control unit 1350 executes control over the operation of the count button 1171 (second operating means) (in this example, counting processing based on the operation of the count button 1171).

When the counting button 1171 is operated in a certain state (for example, when there are remaining game medals (number of credits)), a counting process is executed to transmit the "number of game medals (game value)" to the external lending machine 1700 (counting process to convert the "number of game medals" to the "number of possessed medals"); however, if the lending machine 1700 then performs an operation to convert the "number of possessed medals" stored on the card to the "number of game medals (number of credits)", it is possible to return to the state in which there were remaining game medals (number of credits) immediately before the counting button 1171 was operated.

In other words, even if control over the operation of the counting button 1171 (operation means) (for example, a counting process that converts the "number of game medals" to the "number of possessed medals") is executed, it is possible to return to the state before the control was executed (a state in which the number of game medals (number of credits) remains) by a certain operation (for example, an operation that converts the "number of possessed medals" stored on the card by the lending machine 1700 to the "number of game medals (number of credits)").

In addition, in the case where the count button 1171 (second operating means) is operated during an error detection state and the power is turned on to recover from a power outage, and in the case where the count button 1171 (second operating means) is operated and the power is turned on with a setting change to recover from a power outage, the medal count control unit 1350 similarly executes control over the operation of the count button 1171 (second operating means) (in this example, counting processing based on the operation of the count button 1171).

<Power recovery when button is pressed/game medal count clear button>
The game medal count clear button 1172 described using Figure 173 is one of the valid buttons (second operating means) whose operation becomes valid (control is executed for that operation) if the operation is performed when power is restored after a power outage, as shown in Figure 174 (a), and in this example, it is controlled by the medal count control unit 1350.

In this example, when a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the medal count clear button 1172 (second operating means) is not being operated, and when the medal count clear button 1172 (second operating means) is being operated and the power outage is restored and the operation of the medal count clear button 1172 (second operating means) is enabled (in this example, the state of the detection signal of the medal count clear button 1172 sensor of the medal count control unit 1350 is on), the medal count control unit 1350 executes control over the operation of the medal count clear button 1172 (second operating means) (in this example, a process of clearing the "medal count" stored in a specified area of the RAM 1358).

When the medal count clear button 1172 is operated in a certain state (for example, when there are remaining medals (credits)), a process is executed to clear the "medal count" stored in a specified area of the RAM 1358. However, since the medal count clear button 1172 is located in a position that cannot be operated by the player (a position that cannot be operated unless the front door 102 is opened), it is basically impossible for the player to operate the button to return to a state in which there are remaining medals (credits).

In addition, when the medal count clear button 1172 is operated in a certain state (for example, a state in which there are remaining medals (credits)) and a process is executed to clear the "medal count" stored in a specified area of the RAM 1358, even if it were possible for a game store employee to restore the state in which there are remaining medals (credits), because the player cannot operate the medal count clear button 1172, it is difficult to restore the state in which there are medals (credits) immediately before the medal count clear button 1172 is operated.

In other words, when control over the operation of the medal count clear button 1172 (operation means) (for example, a process to clear the "medal count" stored in a specified area of the RAM 1358) is executed, it is difficult or impossible to return to the state before the control was executed (a state in which the medal count (credit count) remains).

In addition, in the case where the power is turned on while the game medal count clear button 1172 (second operating means) is operated in an error detection state and power is restored from a power outage, and in the case where the power is turned on with a setting change while the game medal count clear button 1172 (second operating means) is operated and power is restored from a power outage, the medal count control unit 1350 similarly executes control over the operation of the game medal count clear button 1172 (second operating means) (in this example, a process to clear the "game medal count" stored in a specified area of RAM 1358).

<Counting button when setting change is completed, and medal count clear button>
Next, using Figure 174 (b), we will explain the count button 1171 and the game medal number clear button 1172 when the setting change state is completed.

Figure 174 (b) shows the control state of the count button and the medal count clear button when the setting change state is completed.

In this example, when the setting change mode (setting change state) is set and the counting button 1171 (operation means) is operated, if the setting change state transitions to a playable state in which game play can proceed and operation of the counting button 1171 is enabled, control over operation of the counting button 1171 (in this example, counting processing based on operation of the counting button 1171) is executed.

In addition, when the setting change mode (setting change state) is set and the game medal count clear button 1172 (operation means) is operated, if the setting change state transitions to a playable state in which game play can proceed and operation of the game medal count clear button 1172 is enabled, control is executed over the operation of the game medal count clear button 1172 (in this example, a process of clearing the "game medal count" stored in a specified area of RAM 1358).

<Counting button when the setting confirmation state is completed, and clear medal count button>
Next, using Figure 174 (c), we will explain the counting button 1171 and the game medal number clear button 1172 when the setting confirmation state is completed.

Figure 174 (c) shows the control state of the count button and the medal count clear button when the setting confirmation state is completed.

In this example, when the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) is set and the counting button 1171 (operation means) is operated, if the setting confirmation state transitions to a playable state in which game progress is possible and operation of the counting button 1171 is enabled, control over operation of the counting button 1171 (in this example, counting processing based on operation of the counting button 1171) is executed.

In addition, when the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) is set and the game medal count clear button 1172 (operation means) is operated, if the setting confirmation state transitions to a playable state in which game play can proceed and operation of the game medal count clear button 1172 is enabled, control is executed over the operation of the game medal count clear button 1172 (in this example, a process of clearing the "game medal count" stored in a specified area of RAM 1358).

<Simultaneous operation of the count button and the medal count clear button>
Next, using Figure 174 (d), the simultaneous operation of the count button and the game medal number clear button will be explained.

Figure 174 (d) shows an example of control when the count button and the game medal count clear button are operated simultaneously.

In this example, when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the count button 1171 (second operating means) and the medal count clear button 1172 (second operating means) are not being operated, and the count button 1171 (second operating means) and the medal count clear button 1172 (second operating means) are being operated simultaneously (pressed simultaneously), the power interruption is restored and the operation of the count button 1171 (second operating means) and the medal count clear button 1172 (second operating means) is enabled (in this example, the detection signals of the count button 1171 sensor and the medal count clear button 1172 sensor of the medal count control unit 1350 are on), the medal count control unit 1350 prioritizes control over the operation of the count button 1171 (second operating means) (in this example, counting processing based on the operation of the count button 1171) and does not execute control over the medal count clear button 1172 (count button priority).

In this example, when the count button and the medal count clear button are operated simultaneously, the count button takes priority, so the medal count will not be cleared by mistake, and the player can be prevented from suffering any disadvantage.

<Operation of the medal count clear button while the count button is being operated>
Next, the operation of the medal count clear button in the operation state of the count button will be described with reference to Fig. 174(e). Fig. 174(e) is a diagram showing an example of the control state of the medal count clear button in the operation state of the count button.

In this example, when operation of the game medal count clear button 1172 is detected while the count button 1171 (second operating means) is in an operating state (in this example, the state of the detection signal of the count button 1171 sensor of the medal count control unit 1350 is on), the operation is determined to be invalid, and control over the operation of the game medal count clear button 1172 (in this example, the process of clearing the "game medal count" stored in a specified area of the RAM 1358) is not executed.

In this example, when the medal count clear button is operated while the count button is in operation, no processing is executed in response to the operation of the medal count clear button, so the medal count will not be cleared by mistake, and the player can be prevented from suffering any disadvantage.

<Operation of the count button when the gaming medal count clear button is operated>
Next, the operation of the count button in the operation state of the game medal number clear button will be described with reference to Fig. 174(f). Fig. 174(f) is a diagram showing an example of the control state of the count button in the operation state of the game medal number clear button.

In this example, when operation of the counting button 1171 is detected in the operation state of the game medal count clear button 1172 (second operating means) (in this example, the state of the detection signal of the game medal count clear button 1172 sensor of the medal count control unit 1350 is on), the operation is determined to be invalid, and control over the operation of the counting button 1171 (in this example, counting processing based on the operation of the counting button 1171) is not executed.

In this example, when the counting button is operated while the medal count clear button is in operation, no processing is executed in response to the operation of the medal count clear button, so the medal count will not be cleared by mistake, and the player can be prevented from suffering any disadvantage.

<Maximum protruding height of each button operation surface>
Next, the maximum protruding height of the operation surface of each button will be described with reference to Fig. 175(a). Fig. 175(a) is a diagram showing the maximum protruding height of the operation surface of each button, with each button extracted from a front view of the slot machine 100.

The 1-coin bet button 130 is arranged to protrude upward (perpendicular to the direction in which the front door 102 is opened) from the horizontal surface 102a of the front door 102 (the outer surface of the slot machine 100 that is approximately horizontal to the player and does not face the player), and the 1-coin bet button 130 can be operated (depressed) by pressing the operation surface of the 1-coin bet button 130 downward toward the horizontal surface 102a.

The height indicated by the symbol h1 in FIG. 175(a) is the maximum distance from the horizontal surface 102a of the front door 102 to the apex of the operation surface of the 1-coin bet button 130 (the maximum protruding height of the 1-coin bet button 130 when not operated).

The MAX BET button 132 is arranged to protrude upward (perpendicular to the direction in which the front door 102 is opened) from the horizontal surface 102a of the front door 102, and the MAX BET button 132 can be operated (depressed) by pressing the operation surface of the MAX BET button 132 downward toward the horizontal surface 102a.

The height indicated by the symbol h2 in FIG. 175(a) is the maximum distance from the horizontal surface 102a of the front door 102 to the apex of the operation surface of the MAX BET button 132 (the maximum protruding height of the MAX BET button 132 when not operated).

The start lever 135 is arranged to protrude forward (towards the player, in the direction in which the front door 102 is opened) from the vertical surface 102b of the front door 102 (the outer surface of the slot machine 100 that is approximately perpendicular to the player and faces the player), and the start lever 135 can be operated (pushed down) by pressing the operating surface of the start lever 135 downward.

The height indicated by the symbol h3 in FIG. 175(a) is the maximum distance from the vertical surface 102b of the front door 102 to the apex of the operating surface of the start lever 135 (the maximum protruding height when the start lever 135 is not operated).

The stop buttons 137 to 139 are arranged to protrude forward (towards the player, in the direction in which the front door 102 is opened) from the vertical surface 102b of the front door 102, and the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated (depressed) by pressing the operation surfaces of the stop buttons 137 to 139 backward toward the vertical surface 102b.

The height indicated by the symbol h4 in FIG. 175(a) is the maximum distance from the vertical surface 102b of the front door 102 to the apex of the operation surface of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (the maximum protruding height when the stop buttons 137 to 139 are not operated).

The performance button 156 is arranged to protrude upward (perpendicular to the direction in which the front door 102 is opened) from the horizontal surface 102a of the front door 102, and the performance button 156 can be operated (depressed) by pressing the operation surface of the performance button 156 downward toward the horizontal surface 102a.

The height indicated by the symbol h5 in FIG. 175(a) is the maximum distance from the horizontal surface 102a of the front door 102 to the apex of the operation surface of the performance button 156 (the maximum protruding height of the performance button 156 when not operated).

The settlement button 134 is positioned so that it protrudes forward (towards the player, in the direction in which the front door 102 is opened) from the vertical surface 102b of the front door 102, and the settlement button 134 can be operated (depressed) by pressing the operation surface of the settlement button 134 backward toward the vertical surface 102b.

The height indicated by the symbol h6 in FIG. 175(a) is the maximum distance from the vertical surface 102b of the front door 102 to the apex of the operation surface of the checkout button 134 (the maximum protruding height when the checkout button 134 is not operated).

In this example, the maximum protruding height h1 when the 1-coin bet button 130 is not operated and the maximum protruding height h6 when the settlement button 134 is not operated are approximately the same height (h1 ≒ h6), and the maximum protruding height h2 when the MAX bet button 132 is not operated and the maximum protruding height h4 when the stop buttons 137 to 139 are not operated are approximately the same height (h2 ≒ h4).

In addition, the maximum protruding height h2 of the MAX BET button 132 when not operated and the maximum protruding height h4 of the STOP buttons 137-139 when not operated are higher than the maximum protruding height h1 of the 1-coin BET button 130 when not operated and the maximum protruding height h6 of the settlement button 134 when not operated (h1 ≒ h6 < h2 ≒ h4), the maximum protruding height h5 of the performance button 156 when not operated is higher than these buttons (h1 ≒ h6 < h2 ≒ h4 < h5), and the maximum protruding height h3 of the start lever 135 when not operated is higher than this button (h1 ≒ h6 < h2 ≒ h4 < h5 < h3).

In this example, since an operating means (e.g., start lever 135) with a relatively high protruding height of the operating surface is likely to be hit by the player or other components and may be operated at an unexpected timing, even if the operating means is in a state where it is being operated when power is restored, by not controlling the operation, it is possible to prevent erroneous operation and the increase in control burden that accompanies erroneous operation.

On the other hand, operation means with a relatively low protruding height of the operation surface (e.g., the MAX BET button 132, the 1 BET button 130, the settlement button 134) are less likely to be operated at an unexpected timing, so if they are being operated when power is restored, controlling the operation allows the game to continue as soon as possible after power is restored, thereby increasing convenience and satisfaction for the player.

In addition, since there is a possibility that operating means (e.g., start lever 135, stop buttons 137-139) that are installed in a position facing the player or whose operating surface faces the direction in which the front door 102 is opened may be operated at an unexpected time, by not controlling such operations even if they are being operated when power is restored, it is possible to prevent erroneous operations and the associated increased control burden.

On the other hand, operation means (e.g., the MAX BET button 132, the 1 BET button 130, the settlement button 134) that are installed in a position that does not face the player or whose operation surface does not face the direction in which the front door 102 is opened are unlikely to be operated at an unexpected time, so if they are being operated when power is restored, controlling the operation allows the game to continue as quickly as possible after power is restored, thereby increasing convenience and satisfaction for the player.

Although not shown in the figure, the maximum protruding height of the counting button 1171 of the slot machine 1100 is approximately the same as the maximum protruding height h1 when the 1-coin bet button 130 is not operated and the maximum protruding height h6 when the settlement button 134 is not operated.

In this example, since an operating means (e.g., counting button 1171) that protrudes relatively low from the operating surface is unlikely to be operated at an unexpected timing, if it is being operated when power is restored, the operation can be controlled to allow the game to continue as soon as possible after power is restored, thereby increasing convenience and satisfaction for the player.

The MAX BET button 132, 1 BET button 130, and settlement button 134 are operation means that can be restored to the state before they were operated (the operation can be canceled), but the start lever 135 and stop buttons 137 to 139 are operation means that cannot be restored to the state before they were operated (the operation cannot be canceled).

For example, even if the MAX BET button 132 or the 1 BET button 130 is operated and medals are bet, it is possible to cancel the bet by operating the settlement button 134, and it can be said that the state before the MAX BET button 132 or the 1 BET button 130 was operated can be restored. Also, even if the settlement button 134 is operated and medals are returned, the state before the settlement button 134 was operated can be restored by inserting medals again.

According to this example, operation means that can return to the state before the operation (operation can be canceled) can improve convenience by performing control based on the operation when power is restored, and operation means that cannot return to the state before the operation (operation cannot be canceled) can prevent serious erroneous operation by not performing control based on the operation when power is restored.

In addition, in terms of distance from the player, the operation surface of the 1-coin bet button 130, the operation surface of the MAX bet button 132, the operation surface of the performance button 156, the operation surface of the settlement button 134, the operation surfaces of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the operation surface of the start lever 135 are arranged in the following order, with the maximum distance from the player being shortest, and they are positioned closer to the player.

In this example, since there is a possibility that the operation means (e.g., start lever 135, stop buttons 137-139) that are relatively close to the player from the operating surface may be operated at an unexpected timing, even if they are being operated when power is restored, by not controlling the operation, it is possible to prevent erroneous operation and the associated increase in the control burden.

On the other hand, operation means that are relatively far from the player from the operating surface (e.g., the MAX BET button 132, the 1 BET button 130) are less likely to be operated at an unexpected time, so if they are being operated when power is restored, controlling the operation allows the game to continue as quickly as possible after power is restored, thereby increasing convenience and satisfaction for the player.

<Area of operation surface for each button>
Next, the area of the operation surface of each button will be described with reference to Figure 175(b). Figure 175(b) is a diagram showing the area of the operation surface of each button, with each button extracted from a front view of the slot machine 100.

In FIG. 175(b), the area indicated by the reference character s1 is the operation surface for the 1-coin bet button 130, and the area indicated by the reference character s2 is the operation surface for the MAX bet button 132. In addition, the area indicated by the reference character s3 is the operation surface for the start lever 135, and the area indicated by the reference character s4 is the operation surface for the stop buttons 137 to 139.

In addition, the area indicated by the reference symbol s5 in FIG. 175(b) is the operation surface of the performance button 156, and the area indicated by the reference symbol s6 in the same figure is the operation surface of the settlement button 134. In addition, the area indicated by the reference symbol s7 in the same figure is the operation surface of the volume button 193b, and the area indicated by the reference symbol s8 in the same figure is the operation surface of the reset button 243.

In this example, the area s1 of the operation surface of the 1-coin bet button 130, the area s6 of the operation surface of the settlement button 134, the area s7 of the operation surface of the volume button 193b, and the area s8 of the operation surface of the reset button 243 are approximately the same size (s1 ≒ s6 ≒ s7 ≒ s8), and the area s2 of the operation surface of the MAX bet button 132 and the area s4 of the operation surfaces of the stop buttons 137 to 139 are approximately the same size (s2 ≒ s4).
In addition, the area s2 of the operation surface of the MAX bet button 132 and the area s4 of the operation surface of the stop buttons 137 to 139 are larger than the area s1 of the operation surface of the 1-coin bet button 130, the area s6 of the operation surface of the settlement button 134, the area s7 of the operation surface of the volume button 193b, and the area s8 of the operation surface of the reset button 243 (s1 ≒ s6 ≒ s7 ≒ s8 < s2 ≒ s4), the area s5 of the operation surface of the performance button 156 is larger than these buttons (s1 ≒ s6 ≒ s7 ≒ s8 < s2 ≒ s4 < s5), and the area s3 of the operation surface of the start lever 135 is larger than this button (s1 ≒ s6 ≒ s7 ≒ s8 < s2 ≒ s4 < s5 < s3).

In this example, since an operating means with a relatively large operating surface area (e.g., the effect button 156) is likely to be hit by the player or other components and may be operated at an unexpected time, even if the operating means is in a state where it is being operated when power is restored, by not controlling the operation, it is possible to prevent erroneous operation and the increase in the control burden that accompanies erroneous operation.

On the other hand, operation means with a relatively small operating surface area (e.g., the 1-coin bet button 130, the settlement button 134) are less likely to be operated at an unexpected time, so if they are being operated when power is restored, controlling the operation allows the game to continue as quickly as possible after power is restored, thereby increasing convenience and satisfaction for the player.

Although not shown in the figure, the area of the operation surface of the count button 1171 and the game medal count clear button 1172 of the slot machine 1100 is the same size as the area s1 of the operation surface of the 1 coin bet button 130, etc.

In this example, since an operating means with a relatively small operating surface area (e.g., counting button 1171) is unlikely to be operated at an unexpected timing, if it is being operated when power is restored, the operation can be controlled to allow the game to continue as soon as possible after power is restored, thereby increasing convenience and satisfaction for the player.

<Power recovery with button pressed/Summary>
As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 150) is a gaming machine equipped with a power supply device (for example, the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 151) that supplies power, a first operating means (for example, the start lever 135 and the performance button 156 shown in FIG. 150), and a second operating means (for example, the MAX BET button 132, the 1-coin BET button 130, and the settlement button 134 shown in FIG. 150), and when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off when the first operating means is not operated, and when the first operating means is operated, This gaming machine is characterized in that even if a power outage occurs and the operation of the first operating means is enabled when the power is restored from a power outage in a state in which the second operating means is in a powered-on state, control is not executed over the operation of the first operating means, but when a power outage occurs in which the power supply to the power supply device is cut off while the second operating means is not being operated, and when a power outage is restored and the operation of the second operating means is enabled when the second operating means is being operated, control is executed over the operation of the second operating means, and the operating surface of the first operating means protrudes from the outer surface of the gaming machine further than the operating surface of the second operating means.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, since operation means with a relatively high protruding height of the operation surface are likely to hit the player or other components and may be operated at unexpected times, by not controlling the operation even if the operation is in a state where it is being operated when power is restored, it is possible to prevent erroneous operation and the increase in control burden that accompanies erroneous operation. Furthermore, since operation means with a relatively low protruding height of the operation surface are unlikely to be operated at unexpected times, by controlling the operation if the operation is in a state where it is being operated when power is restored, it is possible to progress with the game as soon as possible after power is restored, thereby increasing convenience and satisfaction for the player.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 150) is a gaming machine equipped with a power supply device (for example, the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 151) that supplies power, a first operating means (for example, the start lever 135, the stop buttons 137 to 139, the performance button 156, the volume button 193a, and the reset button 243 shown in FIG. 150), and a second operating means (for example, the MAX bet button 132, the 1-coin bet button 130, and the settlement button 134 shown in FIG. 150), and when a power outage occurs in which the power supply device is cut off while the first operating means is not being operated, This gaming machine is characterized in that, even if a power outage occurs while the first operating means is being operated and the operation of the first operating means is enabled after the power outage is restored, control over the operation of the first operating means is not executed, but when a power outage occurs in which the power supply device is cut off while the second operating means is not being operated and the power outage is restored while the second operating means is being operated and the operation of the second operating means is enabled, control over the operation of the second operating means is executed, and the operating surface of the first operating means is larger in area than the operating surface of the second operating means.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, since operation means with a relatively large operating surface area are likely to hit the player or other components and may be operated at unexpected times, by not controlling the operation even if the operation is in a state where it is being operated when power is restored, it is possible to prevent erroneous operation and the increase in control burden that accompanies erroneous operation. Furthermore, since operation means with a relatively small operating surface area are unlikely to be operated at unexpected times, by controlling the operation if the operation is in a state where it is being operated when power is restored, it is possible to progress with the game as soon as possible after power is restored, thereby increasing convenience and satisfaction for the player.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 150) is a gaming machine equipped with a power supply device (e.g., power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 151) that supplies power, a plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110-112 shown in FIG. 150) that are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are driven to rotate, a plurality of stop operation means (e.g., stop buttons 137-139 shown in FIG. 150) for stopping the reels that are being driven to rotate, and presentation means (e.g., liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 150, speakers 272, 277 shown in FIG. 151, various lamps), and is configured such that when the plurality of stop operation means are operated to stop the plurality of reels in a first stop mode, and the plurality of stop operation means are no longer operated, the presentation means executes a winning presentation corresponding to the first stop mode, This gaming machine is characterized in that, when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device is cut off while at least one of the reels is spinning and the multiple stop operation means are not operated, and the power interruption is restored while the stop operation means is being operated, the reel that is spinning is not stopped, but when the multiple stop operation means are operated to stop the multiple reels in the first stop mode, and a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device is cut off while the last stop operation means among the multiple stop operation means is being operated, and the power interruption is restored while the operation of the last stop operation means is continuing, the performance means does not execute the winning performance according to the first stop mode while the operation of the last stop operation means is continuing.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, the control over the operation of the stop operation means can be changed depending on the operation status of the stop operation means, and reel stop control that may cause a player to suffer a disadvantage due to an incorrect operation is disabled when power is restored, thereby preventing the player from suffering a disadvantage due to an incorrect operation, while the hold control for the winning effect when power is restored is enabled and the winning effect is not executed while the operation of the last operated stop operation means is continuing, preventing the winning effect from being missed and increasing the satisfaction of the player.

In this example, a light intensity button capable of setting the light intensity of various lamps, LEDs, etc. is not provided, but a light intensity button may be provided. If a light intensity button is provided, the control at power-on and the control of the light intensity button during simultaneous operations described in Figures 159 to 170 may be the same as the volume button described above.

<Power restoration when button is pressed (Modification 2)>
Next, the restoration of power when the button is pressed (variation 2) will be described with reference to FIG. 176.

In order to avoid repetitive explanations, only the differences from <Power restoration when button is pressed (variant example)> explained using FIG. 167 will be explained below. In addition, control situations that do not include a description of the open/closed state of the front door 102 (door closed or door open) in the drawings can be applied regardless of the open/closed state of the front door 102 (door closed or door open).

Before explaining how power is restored when the button is pressed (variation 2), we will now explain the "detection method" items shown in Figures 176 and 177.

The "Detection method" item shows an example of a method for detecting the operation of the various buttons listed in the "Button type" item.

"Optical" is one of the detection methods, and is a method of detecting the operation of an operating means by changes in light. Hereinafter, detection means (first detection means) that optically detects the operation of an operating means may be referred to as an "optical sensor (optical sensor)," and operating means (first operating means) whose operation is detected by an optical sensor may be referred to as an "optical button."

For example, a transmissive optical sensor is an optical sensor in which the light-emitting element and the light-receiving element are spaced apart from each other and face each other so that the light emitted by the light-emitting element directly hits the light-receiving element. When the optical button is pressed, the light from the light-emitting element is blocked, making it possible to detect the operation of the optical button.

Transmissive optical sensors use light for non-contact switching, so there is no deterioration of the contacts due to wear or corrosion. This means that they are less likely to break down even if the button is pressed frequently, but they can be affected by noise, etc. The optical sensor is not limited to the transmissive type, and can be, for example, a reflective type.

"Mechanical" is one of the detection methods, and is a method of mechanically detecting the operation of an operating means. Hereinafter, a detection means (second detection means) that mechanically detects the operation of an operating means may be referred to as a "mechanical switch (mechanical switch)," and an operating means (second operating means) whose operation is detected by a mechanical switch may be referred to as a "mechanical button."

For example, a push switch (mechanical switch) is a mechanical switch that can detect the operation of a button by mechanically connecting contacts when the button is pressed.

While push switches are less susceptible to noise and other factors, they are prone to malfunction if pressed too frequently due to deterioration of the contacts of their mechanical parts caused by wear and corrosion. Note that mechanical switches are not limited to push switches, and may be, for example, toggle switches or slide switches.

In this example, the MAX BET button 132, 1 BET button 130, settlement button 134, start lever 135, and stop buttons 137-139 are optical buttons, while the reset button 243, effect button 156, volume button 193a, OK button 193b, count button 1171, and game medal count clear button 1172 are mechanical buttons.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and some or all of the operating means configured with optical buttons may be configured with mechanical buttons, and some or all of the operating means configured with mechanical buttons may be configured with optical buttons.

<Power restoration when button is pressed (variation 2)/When power is turned on with door closed>
Next, using Figure 176 (a), the control state of each button when the power is turned on with the door closed will be explained.

Figure 176 (a) shows the control state of each button when the power is turned on with the door closed (variation 2), and corresponds to Figure 167 (a).

When the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), as shown in FIG. 176(a), the MAX BET button 132, 1 BET button 130, settlement button 134, start lever 135, and reset button 243 are inactive buttons whose operation is invalid (no control is performed on the operation) if they are operated when power is restored after a power outage.

In other words, in this example, when the first operating means (MAX BET button 132, 1 BET button 130, settlement button 134, start lever 135, reset button 243) is not operated, a power outage occurs in which the power supply to the power supply device is cut off, and even if the power is restored after the power outage while the first operating means is being operated, the first control (control over that operation) is not executed.

On the other hand, when the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), the effect button 156, volume button 193a, OK button 193b, count button 1171, and game medal count clear button 1172 are valid buttons whose operation is valid (control is executed for that operation) if they are operated when power is restored after a power outage.

In other words, in this example, when the second operating means (effect button 156, volume button 193a, OK button 193b, count button 1171, game medal count clear button 1172) is not operated, a power outage occurs in which the power supply to the power supply device is cut off, and when the second operating means is operated and the power is restored from the power outage, the second control (control for that operation) may be executed.

In other words, the optical buttons (MAX BET button 132, 1 BET button 130, settlement button 134, start lever 135, reset button 243) will be invalid (control will not be exercised over the operation) if they are being operated when power is restored after a power outage, whereas the mechanical buttons (effect button 156, volume button 193a, OK button 193b, counting button 1171, clear number of game medals button 1172) will be valid (control will be exercised over the operation) if they are being operated when power is restored after a power outage.

In this example, the operating means that becomes invalid after power is restored (first operating means) has a period during which it is invalid, which may increase the number of times the operating means is operated, so by not using mechanical buttons (mechanical switches) which are prone to failure, it is possible to prevent players and others from being disadvantaged. Also, because optical buttons (optical sensors) can be affected by noise, etc., by not using them for the operating means that becomes valid after power is restored (second operating means), it is possible to prevent malfunctions.

In addition, when the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), the stop buttons 137 to 139 are enable/disable buttons that, depending on the situation, may disable the operation (no control is performed for the operation) if the operation is being performed when power is restored after a power outage, or may disable the operation (no control is performed for the operation).

In this example, the stop buttons 137 to 139 are optical buttons, but depending on the situation, the enable/disable buttons may be either optical or mechanical buttons, which may invalidate an operation (no control is performed for that operation) if that operation is being performed when power is restored after a power outage, or may invalidate that operation (no control is performed for that operation).

In addition, in this example, the operation means that is disabled after power is restored (first operation means) is an optical button, and the operation means that is enabled after power is restored (second operation means) is a mechanical button, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an operation means that is used relatively frequently (e.g., performance button 156) may be an optical button, and an operation means that is used relatively infrequently (e.g., volume button 193a) may be a mechanical button.

In addition, operation means related to the player's profit, such as winning or losing a performance (e.g., the performance button 156) may be optical buttons since the player often operates them with force, while other operation means may be mechanical buttons. In addition, certain operation means (e.g., the volume button 193a and the OK button 193b) may be mechanical buttons regardless of how often they are used or whether they are related to the player's profit.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 150) is a gaming machine equipped with a power supply device (e.g., the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 151) that supplies power, a first operating means (e.g., the MAX bet button 132, the start lever 135), a second operating means (e.g., the volume button 193a, the OK button 193b), a first detection means that detects the operation of the first operating means, a second detection means that detects the operation of the second operating means, and a main control means (e.g., the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 152) that controls the game based on one of a plurality of setting values, and the main control means detects a playable state in which the game can proceed, a currently set setting, and a currently set setting. a setting confirmation state (e.g., a setting confirmation mode) in which a set value can be confirmed, and a setting change state (e.g., a setting change mode) in which one of the plurality of setting values can be set; a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off when the first operation means is not being operated, and when the first operation means is operated after the power interruption is restored when the first operation means is not being operated, a first control (e.g., a process of inserting three medals (credits) that are electronically stored, a reel rotation start process of starting the rotation of all reels 110 to 112) may be (or is) executed; a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off when the first operating means is not operated, and when the second operating means is operated after recovery from the power interruption when the second operating means is not operated, a second control (e.g., a process for adjusting the volume, a process for displaying a menu) may be executed (or may be executed); a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off when the first operating means is not operated, and even when recovery from the power interruption is performed while the first operating means is operated, the first control is not executed (or may not be executed); The gaming machine is configured so that the second control may (or may not) be executed when the power is restored from a power outage while the stage is being operated, the second control may (or may not) be executed when the second operating means is operated after the setting confirmation state transitions to the playable state, and the second control is not (or may not) be executed when the setting value is being confirmed in the setting confirmation state and the setting confirmation state transitions to the playable state when the second operating means is operated, the first detection means is an optical sensor, and the second detection means is a mechanical switch.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, the operating means that becomes invalid after power is restored (first operating means) has a period of invalidity, which may increase the number of times the operating means is operated, so by not using mechanical buttons (mechanical switches) that are prone to failure, it is possible to prevent players and others from being disadvantaged. In addition, because optical buttons (optical sensors) can be affected by noise, etc., by not using them for the operating means that becomes valid after power is restored (second operating means), it is possible to prevent malfunctions.

In addition, the setting confirmation state is, in principle, a state that is entered by an administrator's operation, and returning from the setting confirmation state is also performed by the administrator, and since this is a situation in which it is not necessary to return to play as quickly as possible, no control over operations is performed, taking into consideration only incorrect operations. Also, in the setting confirmation state, the administrator is concentrating on checking the settings and there is a risk that an incorrect operation will not be noticed, and for example, settings such as volume may remain at settings that the administrator did not intend, so no control over operations is performed when returning from the setting confirmation state.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 150) is a gaming machine equipped with a power supply device (e.g., the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 151) that supplies power, a first operating means (e.g., the MAX bet button 132, the start lever 135), a second operating means (e.g., the volume button 193a, the OK button 193b), a first detection means that detects the operation of the first operating means, a second detection means that detects the operation of the second operating means, and a main control means (e.g., the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 152) that controls the game based on one of a plurality of setting values, and the main control means controls the game based on a game control unit that allows the game to proceed. a setting confirmation state (e.g., a setting confirmation mode) in which a currently set setting value can be confirmed, and a setting change state (e.g., a setting change mode) in which one of the plurality of setting values can be set; and when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off while the first operation means is not being operated, and when the first operation means is operated after the power interruption is restored while the first operation means is not being operated, a first control (e.g., a process of inserting three medals (credits) that are electronically stored, a reel rotation start process of starting the rotation of all reels 110 to 112) is performed. When the second operation means is not operated, a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off, and when the second operation means is not operated and the second operation means is operated after the power interruption is restored, a second control (for example, a process for adjusting a volume, a process for displaying a menu) may be executed. When the first operation means is not operated, a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off, and when the first operation means is operated and the power interruption is restored, the first control is not executed. When the second operation means is not operated, a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off, and when the second operation means is operated and the power interruption is restored, a second control (for example, a process for adjusting a volume, a process for displaying a menu) may be executed. The gaming machine is configured to execute the second control when a power outage occurs and the power is restored while the second operating means is being operated, to execute the second control when the second operating means is operated after the setting change state transitions to the playable state, and to not execute the second control when the setting change state is set and the setting change state transitions to the playable state while the second operating means is being operated, the first detection means being an optical sensor, and the second detection means being a mechanical switch.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, the operating means that becomes invalid after power is restored (first operating means) has a period of invalidity, which may increase the number of times the operating means is operated, so by not using mechanical buttons (mechanical switches) that are prone to failure, it is possible to prevent players and others from being disadvantaged. In addition, because optical buttons (optical sensors) can be affected by noise, etc., by not using them for the operating means that becomes valid after power is restored (second operating means), it is possible to prevent malfunctions.

In addition, the setting change state is, in principle, a state that is entered by the administrator's operation, and returning from the setting change state is also performed by the administrator, and since this is a situation in which it is not necessary to return to play as quickly as possible, no control over operations is performed, taking into consideration only erroneous operations. Also, in the setting change state, the administrator is focused on changing the settings and may not notice an erroneous operation, and for example, settings such as volume may remain at settings that the administrator did not intend, so no control over operations is performed when returning from the setting change state.

<Power restoration when button is pressed (variation 2)/power on when door is open>
Next, using Figure 176 (b), the control state of each button when the power is turned on with the door open will be explained.

Figure 176 (b) shows the control state of each button when the power is turned on with the door open (variation 2), and corresponds to Figure 167 (a).

When the front door 102 is open (door open state), the MAX BET button 132, 1 BET button 130, settlement button 134, start lever 135, and reset button 243 are inactive buttons that will disable the operation (no control will be exercised over the operation) if they are operated when power is restored after a power outage.

In other words, in this example, regardless of whether the front door 102 is open or closed, when the first operating means (MAX BET button 132, 1 BET button 130, settlement button 134, start lever 135, reset button 243) is not operated, a power outage occurs in which the power supply to the power supply device is cut off, and even if the power is restored after the power outage while the first operating means is being operated, the first control (control over that operation) is not executed.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 176 (a) and (b), the performance button 156, the volume button 193a, and the OK button 193b are enable/disable buttons that, depending on the open/closed state (door closed or door open) of the front door 102, may disable the operation (no control is performed for the operation) if the operation is being performed when power is restored after a power outage, or may disable the operation (no control is performed for the operation).

Specifically, as explained using FIG. 176(a), when the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), the performance button 156, the volume button 193a, and the OK button 193b are buttons whose operation becomes effective (control is executed for that operation) if the operation is performed when power is restored after a power outage.

In other words, in this example, when the detection means (door open sensor) capable of detecting the open/closed state of the front door 102 detects the closed state (door closed state) and the second operation means (performance button 156, volume button 193a, OK button 193b) is not operated, a power interruption occurs in which the power supply to the power supply device is cut off, and when the detection means detects the closed state (door closed state) and the second operation means is operated, after the power interruption is restored, the second state (a certain state) is reached, and the second control (control for that operation) is executed.

On the other hand, when the front door 102 is open (door open state), the effects button 156, volume button 193a, and OK button 193b are buttons whose operation is invalid (no control is executed for the operation) if they are operated when power is restored after a power outage.

In other words, in this example, when the detection means (door open sensor) capable of detecting the open/closed state of the front door 102 detects the open state (door open state) and the second operation means (performance button 156, volume button 193a, OK button 193b) is not operated, a power interruption occurs in which the power supply to the power supply device is cut off, and when the detection means detects the open state (door open state) and the second operation means is operated, the second control (control over the operation) is not executed even if the second state (a certain state) is reached after recovery from the power interruption.

According to this example, when power is restored with the door open and the button in operation, control over the operation is disabled in consideration of erroneous operation, and when power is restored with the door closed and the button in operation, the operation is enabled as a normal operation in consideration of a power outage during play. This makes it possible to switch between enabling and disabling the operation depending on the state of the door body, and provides a gaming machine that can be appropriately controlled depending on the state of the door body.

The operation means that enables control over operations when power is restored with the door closed and the buttons operated, and disables control over operations when power is restored with the door open and the buttons operated, may be operation means other than the performance button 156, the volume button 193a, and the OK button 193b.

The device may also be provided with an operation means (e.g., a volume button) that enables control over operations when power is restored with the door closed and the button being operated, and disables control over operations when power is restored with the door open and the button being operated, and an operation means (e.g., an OK button) that disables control over operations when power is restored with the door closed and the button being operated, and enables control over operations when power is restored with the door open and the button being operated.

The count button 1171 and the game medal count clear button 1172 are valid buttons that enable the operation (control is executed for the operation) if the operation is performed when power is restored after a power outage, regardless of whether the front door 102 is open or closed.

The stop buttons 137 to 139 are enable/disable buttons that, depending on the situation, disable the operation (no control is performed for the operation) if the operation is being performed when power is restored after a power outage, or disable the operation (no control is performed for the operation), regardless of whether the front door 102 is open or closed.

<Power recovery with button pressed (variation 2)/When power is turned on (error detection state)>
FIG. 176(c) is a diagram showing the control state of each button when the power is turned on (error detection state) (variation example 2), and corresponds to FIG. 167(b).

The control state of each button when the power is turned on (error detection state) is the same as the control state of each button when the power is turned on with the door open as described using Figure 176 (b).

The control state of each button when power is turned on (error detection state) is not limited to this example, and may be the same as the control state of each button when power is turned on with the door closed as described using FIG. 176(a), or, since this is an error detection state, the count button 1171 and the game medal count clear button 1172 may be invalid buttons that invalidate the operation (no control is executed for the operation) if the operation is performed when power is restored from the power outage in the error detection state.

<Power recovery with button pressed (variation 2)/Power on with setting change>
FIG. 177(a) is a diagram showing the control state of each button when the power is turned on with a setting change (variation 2), and corresponds to FIG. 167(c).

The control states of the MAX BET button 132, 1 BET button 130, settlement button 134, start lever 135, stop buttons 137-139, reset button 243, effect button 156, and volume button 193a are the same as the control states of each button when the power is turned on with a setting change as described using Figure 167 (c).

The OK button 193b is a button that invalidates an operation (no control is executed for that operation) if the operation is being performed when power is restored after a power outage caused by power-on involving a setting change.

On the other hand, the count button 1171 and the game medal count clear button 1172 are valid buttons that enable the operation (control is executed for the operation) if the operation is performed when power is restored after a power outage caused by a power-on that involves a setting change.

<Control status of each button when the setting change state ends (Modification 2)>
FIG. 177(b) is a diagram showing the control status of each button when the setting change state is ended (variation example 2), and corresponds to FIG. 168(a).

The control states of the MAX BET button 132, 1 BET button 130, settlement button 134, start lever 135, stop buttons 137-139, reset button 243, effect button 156, and volume button 193a are the same as the control state of each button at the end of the setting change state described using FIG. 168(a), and are invalid buttons that invalidate the operation (no control is executed for the operation) even if the operation is enabled when the setting change mode (setting change state) is set and the operation is being performed and the game transitions from the setting change state to a playable state in which game progress is possible.

Similarly, the OK button 193b is a button that disables the operation (no control is executed for the operation) even if the operation is enabled when the setting change mode (setting change state) is set and the operation is being performed and the game transitions from the setting change state to a playable state in which game progress is possible.

In other words, in this example, when the setting change state (setting change mode) is set and the second operation means (MAX BET button 132, 1 BET button 130, settlement button 134, start lever 135, stop buttons 137-139, reset button 243, effect button 156, volume button 193a, OK button 193b) are operated, even if the game transitions from the setting change state to a playable state, the second control (control over the operation) is not executed.

The setting change state is, in principle, a state that is entered by the administrator's operation, and returning from the setting change state is also performed by the administrator, and since this is a situation in which it is not necessary to return to play as quickly as possible, no control over operations is performed, taking into consideration only incorrect operations. Also, in the setting change state, the administrator is focused on changing the settings and may not notice an incorrect operation, and for example, settings such as volume may remain at settings that the administrator did not intend, so no control over operations is performed when returning from the setting change state.

On the other hand, the count button 1171 and the game medal count clear button 1172 are enable buttons that enable the operation (execute control over the operation) when the setting change mode (setting change state) is set and the operation is being performed, and the setting change state transitions to a playable state in which game play can proceed and the operation is enabled.

In this example, the count button 1171 and the game medal count clear button 1172 are valid buttons that enable the operation (control is executed for the operation) even if the operation is enabled when the setting change mode (setting change state) is set and the operation is being performed and the game transitions from the setting change state to a playable state in which game play can proceed, regardless of whether the front door 102 is open or closed. However, the count button 1171 and the game medal count clear button 1172 may be valid buttons that enable the operation (control is executed for the operation) only when the front door 102 is open (door open state) (or only when the front door 102 is closed (door closed state)), even if the operation is enabled when the setting change mode (setting change state) is set and the operation is being performed and the game transitions from the setting change state to a playable state in which game play can proceed, and the operation is enabled.

In addition, the volume buttons (left/right/up/down buttons) and OK button may be enabled while changing or checking settings (for example, to operate management or menus that can be displayed while changing or checking settings). In this case, if the volume buttons (left/right/up/down buttons) or OK button are operated while changing or checking settings, and the setting key is turned OFF while still operating the buttons to transition to a playable state, the operation will be invalid.

<Control status of each button when the setting confirmation state ends (Modification 2)>
FIG. 177(c) is a diagram showing the control status of each button when the setting confirmation state ends (variation example 2), and corresponds to FIG. 168(b).

The control states of the MAX BET button 132, 1 BET button 130, settlement button 134, start lever 135, stop buttons 137-139, reset button 243, effect button 156, and volume button 193a are the same as the control state of each button at the end of the setting confirmation state described using FIG. 168(b), and even if the setting value is being confirmed in the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) and the operation is being performed, and the state transitions from the setting confirmation state to a playable state in which game progress is possible and the operation is enabled, the operation is invalid (control is not executed for the operation).

Similarly, the OK button 193b is a button that disables the operation (no control is executed for the operation) even if the operation is being performed while checking the setting value in the setting check mode (setting check state) and the operation is being performed and the state transitions from the setting check state to a playable state in which game progress is possible, thereby enabling the operation.

In other words, in this example, when the setting value is being confirmed in the setting change state (setting change mode) and the second operation means (MAX BET button 132, 1 BET button 130, settlement button 134, start lever 135, stop buttons 137-139, reset button 243, effect button 156, volume button 193a, OK button 193b) is operated, even if the game transitions from the setting confirmation state to a playable state, the second control (control over the operation) is not executed.

In principle, the setting confirmation state is entered by an administrator's operation, and returning from the setting confirmation state is also performed by the administrator, and since this is a situation where it is not necessary to return to play as quickly as possible, no control over operations is performed, taking into consideration only incorrect operations. Also, in the setting confirmation state, the administrator is concentrating on checking the settings and there is a risk that an incorrect operation will not be noticed, and for example, settings such as volume may remain at settings that the administrator did not intend, so no control over operations is performed when returning from the setting confirmation state.

In this example, the MAX BET button 132, the 1 BET button 130, the settlement button 134, the start lever 135, the stop buttons 137 to 139, the reset button 243, the effect button 156, and the volume button 193a are invalid buttons that invalidate the operation (no control is executed for the operation) even if the operation is performed when the setting is set to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) and the operation is being performed and the game is transitioned from the setting confirmation state to a playable state in which the game can proceed and the operation is enabled, regardless of whether the front door 102 is open or closed. However, the invalid buttons may be invalid (no control is executed for the operation) only when the front door 102 is open (door open state) (or only when the front door 102 is closed (door closed state)) even if the operation is performed when the setting is set to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) and the operation is being performed and the game is transitioned from the setting confirmation state to a playable state in which the game can proceed and the operation is enabled.

On the other hand, the count button 1171 and the game medal count clear button 1172 are enable buttons that enable the operation (execute control over the operation) when the setting value is being checked in the setting check mode (setting check state) and the operation is being performed and the state transitions from the setting check state to a playable state in which game play can proceed, thereby enabling the operation.

In this example, the count button 1171 and the game medal count clear button 1172 are valid buttons that enable the operation (control is executed for the operation) even if the operation is enabled when the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) is set and the operation is being performed and the game transitions from the setting confirmation state to a playable state in which game progress is possible, regardless of whether the front door 102 is open or closed. However, the valid buttons may be set to enable the operation (control is executed for the operation) only when the front door 102 is open (door open state) (or only when the front door 102 is closed (door closed state)) even if the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) is set and the operation is being performed and the game transitions from the setting confirmation state to a playable state in which game progress is possible, and the operation is enabled.

<Simultaneous operation of valid buttons when powering on (Modification 2)>
Next, using Figure 178 (a), simultaneous operation of valid buttons when powering on (variant example 2) will be explained.

Figure 178 (a) shows a modified example of control when valid buttons are operated simultaneously when the power is turned on, and corresponds to Figure 169 (a).

The control when the performance button 156 and the volume button 193a (volume button 193a (right button) or volume button 193a (left button)) are operated simultaneously, and the control when the volume button 193a (right button) and the volume button 193a (left button) are operated simultaneously is the same as the control when the valid buttons are operated simultaneously when the power is turned on, as described using FIG. 169(a).

When a power outage occurs in which the power supply to the power supply device is cut off while any of the stop buttons 137-139 and the volume button 193a (volume button 193a (right button) or volume button 193a (left button)) are not being operated, and when the power is restored while any of the stop buttons 137-139 and the volume button 193a are being operated simultaneously (pressed simultaneously), and the operation of any of the stop buttons 137-139 and the volume button 193a is enabled, control over the operation of any of the stop buttons 137-139 (for example, the process of stopping the corresponding reel) is executed with priority.

On the other hand, if the stop buttons 137-139 do not function as valid buttons when power is restored, the operation of any of the stop buttons 137-139 is determined to be invalid, and control over the operation of any of the stop buttons 137-139 (for example, a process to stop the corresponding reel) is not performed, and only control over the volume button 193a (for example, a process to adjust the volume) is performed.

When a power outage occurs in which the power supply to the power supply device is cut off while the counting button 1171 and the game medal count clear button 1172 are not being operated, and the counting button 1171 and the game medal count clear button 1172 are being operated simultaneously (pressed simultaneously), and the power is restored and the operation of the counting button 1171 and the game medal count clear button 1172 is enabled, control over the operation of the counting button 1171 (for example, counting processing) is executed with priority (counting button priority).

<Simultaneous operation of valid buttons when power is turned on (error detection state) (Modification 2)>
Next, using FIG. 178(b), simultaneous operation of valid buttons when power is turned on (error detection state) (variant example 2) will be described.

Figure 178 (b) shows a modified example of control when valid buttons are operated simultaneously when the power is turned on (error detection state).

The control when the performance button 156 and the volume button 193a (volume button 193a (right button) or volume button 193a (left button)) are operated simultaneously, the control when the volume button 193a (right button) and the volume button 193a (left button) are operated simultaneously, the control when the performance button 156 and the reset button 243 are operated simultaneously, the control when the volume button 193a (volume button 193a (right button) or volume button 193a (left button)) and the reset button 243 are operated simultaneously, and the control when any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 and the reset button 243 are operated simultaneously are the same as the control when valid buttons are operated simultaneously when the power is turned on (error detection state) as described using FIG. 169(b).

When a power outage occurs in which the power supply to the power supply device is cut off while none of the stop buttons 137-139 and the volume button 193a (volume button 193a (right) or volume button 193a (left)) are being operated, and the power is restored while none of the stop buttons 137-139 and the volume button 193a are being operated (pressed simultaneously), but an error is detected, priority is given to control over the operation of one of the stop buttons 137-139 (for example, the process of stopping the corresponding reel).

On the other hand, if the stop buttons 137-139 do not function as valid buttons when power is restored, the operation of any of the stop buttons 137-139 is determined to be invalid, and control over the operation of any of the stop buttons 137-139 (for example, a process to stop the corresponding reel) is not performed, and only control over the volume button 193a (for example, a process to adjust the volume) is performed.

When a power outage occurs in which the power supply to the power supply device is cut off while the counting button 1171 and the game medal count clear button 1172 are not being operated, and the power is restored while the counting button 1171 and the game medal count clear button 1172 are being operated simultaneously (pressed simultaneously), but an error is detected, priority is given to control over the operation of the counting button 1171 (for example, counting processing) (counting button priority).

<Example of power recovery when a button is pressed/OK button>
Next, the restoration of power when the OK button 193b is pressed will be described with reference to FIG.

<Example of power recovery when button is pressed/OK button/door closed>
FIG. 179(a) is a diagram showing the timeline of the flow from when a power outage occurs with the front door 102 closed (door closed state) to when power is restored when the OK button 193b is pressed.

The state indicated by the symbol T1 in FIG. 179(a) is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), and the OK button 193b and the volume button 193a are not operated (not pressed).

As shown in FIG. 179(a-1), this state is one in which the liquid crystal display device 157 is executing a presentation (e.g., a normal presentation) that corresponds to the current game state (e.g., normal gameplay), and the menu display is not displayed.

The state indicated by the symbol T2 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), the OK button 193b and the volume button 193a are not operated (not pressed), and the power supply device 252 has changed from ON to OFF.The state indicated by the symbol T3 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is OFF, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), the volume button 193a is not operated (not pressed), and the OK button 193b is pressed.

In the states indicated by symbols T2 and T3, a power outage occurs in which the power supply unit 252 is cut off, and the power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped, and the display on the liquid crystal display device 157 becomes non-display, as shown in Figures 179 (a-2) and (a-3).

The next state indicated by the symbol T4 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is turned from OFF to ON while the power supply device 252 is turned OFF, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), the volume button 193a is not operated (not pressed), and the OK button 193b is pressed.

In this state, when the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), power is restored with the OK button 193b pressed, and as a result of control over the OK button 193b, the top menu screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, as shown in FIG. 179 (a-4).

The contents of the top screen display of the menu display are not particularly limited, but in this example, a display indicating that it is a menu display (in this example, the character string "Menu" is displayed), a display of the menus (items) that can be displayed or set in the menu display (in this example, the character strings "Volume setting", "Light setting", and "Game instructions" are displayed), and a cursor pointing to the provisionally selected menu (item) is displayed.

In other words, in this example, when the detection means (door open sensor) capable of detecting the open/closed state of the front door 102 detects the closed state (door closed state) and the second operation means (OK button 193b) is not operated, a power interruption occurs in which the power supply to the power supply device is cut off, and when the detection means detects the closed state (door closed state) and the second operation means is operated, after the power interruption is restored, the second control (control over the operation of the OK button 193b) is executed when the second state (a certain state) is reached.

In this example, when power is restored with the OK button 193b pressed, it is determined that the operation of the OK button 193 is valid immediately after power is restored, and a menu is displayed as control for that operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be determined that the operation of the OK button 193 is valid when a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed after power is restored (e.g., the timing indicated by the symbol T5 in FIG. 179(a)), and a menu may be displayed as control for that operation.

<Example of power recovery when button is pressed/OK button/door open>
FIG. 179(b) is a chronological diagram showing the flow from when a power outage occurs with the front door 102 open (door open state) to when power is restored when the OK button 193b is pressed.

The state indicated by the symbol T1 in FIG. 179(b) is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is open (door open state), and the OK button 193b and the volume button 193a are not operated (not pressed).

Since this state is one in which the front door 102 is open (door open state), as shown in FIG. 179 (b-1), a door open notification (in this example, the text "Door is open" is displayed to notify that the front door 102 is open) is executed on the liquid crystal display device 157.

The state indicated by the symbol T2 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is open (door open state), the OK button 193b and the volume button 193a are not operated (not pressed), and the power supply device 252 has changed from ON to OFF.The state indicated by the symbol T3 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is OFF, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is open (door open state), the volume button 193a is not operated (not pressed), and the OK button 193b is pressed.

In the states indicated by symbols T2 and T3, a power outage occurs in which the power supply unit 252 is cut off, and the power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped, and the display on the liquid crystal display device 157 becomes non-display, as shown in Figure 179 (b-2) and (b-3).

The next state indicated by the symbol T4 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is turned from OFF to ON while the power supply device 252 is turned OFF, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is open (door open state), the volume button 193a is not operated (not pressed), and the OK button 193b is pressed.

In this state, when the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is open (door open state), power is restored with the OK button 193b pressed, so the door open notification (display of the text "Door is open") continues without controlling the OK button 193b (displaying a menu).

In other words, in this example, when a detection means (door open sensor) capable of detecting the open/closed state of the front door 102 detects the open state (door open state) and the second operating means (OK button 193b) is not operated, a power interruption occurs in which the power supply to the power supply device is cut off, and even if the second state (a certain state) is reached after recovery from the power interruption when the detection means detects the open state (door open state) and the second operating means is operated, the second control (control over the operation of the OK button 193b) is not executed.

According to this example, when power is restored with the door open and the button in operation, control over the operation is disabled in consideration of erroneous operation, and when power is restored with the door closed and the button in operation, the operation is enabled as a normal operation in consideration of a power outage during play. This makes it possible to switch between enabling and disabling the operation depending on the state of the door body, and provides a gaming machine that can be appropriately controlled depending on the state of the door body.

The next state indicated by the symbol T5 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the volume button 193a is not operated (not pressed), and the OK button 193b is pressed, and the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is open (door open state), and the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state).

In this state, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), and so the state transitions to one in which operation of the OK button 193 is valid. However, in this example, since the operation of the OK button 193b continues after power is restored with the OK button 193b pressed, it is determined that operation of the OK button 193 is invalid, and a presentation (e.g., normal presentation) corresponding to the current game state (e.g., normal game) is executed on the liquid crystal display device 157 without displaying a menu.

In this example, when the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), the state transitions to a state in which the operation of the OK button 193 is valid. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is open (door open state) (before the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state)), the state transitions to a state in which the operation of the OK button 193 is valid.

In addition, even if the operation is continued after power is restored with the OK button 193b pressed, the menu may be displayed if the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state).

In addition, in this example, an example is shown in which the operation of the operating means is invalidated when the door open sensor detects the front door 102 open (door open state) in both the power ON state before the power supply device 252 is turned from ON to OFF, and the power ON state after the power supply device 252 is turned from OFF to ON. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the operation of the operating means may be configured to be invalidated when the door open sensor detects the front door 102 open (door open state) in either the power ON state before the power supply device 252 is turned from ON to OFF, or the power ON state after the power supply device 252 is turned from OFF to ON.

<Example of power recovery when a button is pressed/OK button/Summary>
As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 150) is a gaming machine including a power supply device (for example, the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 151) that supplies power, a door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 151) that is provided on the front of the gaming machine and can be opened and closed, detection means (for example, a door opening/closing sensor) that can detect the open/closed state of the door body, first operation means (for example, the MAX bet button 132, the start lever 135), second operation means (for example, the volume button 193a, the OK button 193b), and main control means (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 152) that controls a game based on one of a plurality of setting values, and the main control means has a playable state in which a game can be progressed, a setting confirmation state (for example, a setting confirmation mode) in which the currently set setting value can be confirmed, and a setting change state (for example, a setting change mode) in which one of the plurality of setting values can be set. The power supply device is configured to be able to set one state from among a plurality of states including at least a power interruption mode (for example, a setting change mode), and when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off while the first operation means is not being operated, and when the first operation means is operated after the power interruption is restored and a certain state (hereinafter referred to as the "first state") is entered while the first operation means is not being operated, a first control (for example, a process of inserting three medals (credits) that are electronically stored, a reel rotation start process of starting the rotation of all reels 110 to 112) is executed, and when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off while the second operation means is not being operated, and when the second operation means is operated after the power interruption is restored and a certain state (hereinafter referred to as the "second state") is entered, a second control (for example, a process of adjusting the volume, a process of displaying a menu) is executed (or when executed, The power supply device is configured to not execute (or may not execute) the first control even if a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off when the first operating means is not operated and the power interruption is restored and the first state is entered when the first operating means is operated; if a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off when the detection means is in a state where the closed state is detected and the second operating means is not operated, and after a power interruption is restored when the detection means is in a state where the closed state is detected and the second operating means is operated, and the second state is entered while the operation of the second operating means is continued, the second control is executed; on the other hand, if a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off when the detection means is in a state where the open state is detected and the second operating means is not operated and the power supply device is in a state where the detection means is in a state where the open state is detected and the second operating means is not operated, the power supply device is configured to not execute (or may not execute) the first control even if a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off and the first state is entered when the first operating means is operated and the power interruption is restored and the first state is entered when the detection means is in a state where the open state is detected and the second operating means is not operated, the power supply device is configured to not execute (or may not execute) the first control; the second control is not executed even if the second state is entered while the operation of the second operation means is continued after recovery from a power outage when the first operation means is operated; when the first control is executed, it is difficult or impossible to return to the state before the first control was executed; even if the second control is executed, it is possible to return to the state before the second control was executed; when the second operation means is operated after the state has transitioned from the setting confirmation state to the playable state and entered the second state, the second control is executed; and when a setting value is being confirmed in the setting confirmation state and the second operation means is being operated, even if the state has transitioned from the setting confirmation state to the playable state and entered the second state while the operation of the second operation means is continued, the second control is not executed (or may not be executed).

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, when power is restored with the door open and the button in operation, control over the operation is disabled in consideration of erroneous operation, and when power is restored with the door closed and the button in operation, the operation is enabled as a normal operation in consideration of a power outage during play. This makes it possible to switch between enabling and disabling operations depending on the state of the door body, and provides a gaming machine that can provide appropriate control depending on the state of the door body.

In addition, the setting confirmation state is, in principle, a state that is entered by an administrator's operation, and returning from the setting confirmation state is also performed by the administrator, and since this is a situation in which it is not necessary to return to play as quickly as possible, no control over operations is performed, taking into consideration only incorrect operations. Also, in the setting confirmation state, the administrator is concentrating on checking the settings and there is a risk that an incorrect operation will not be noticed, and for example, settings such as volume may remain at settings that the administrator did not intend, so no control over operations is performed when returning from the setting confirmation state.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 150) is a gaming machine equipped with a power supply device (e.g., the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 151) that supplies power, a door body (e.g., the front door 102 shown in FIG. 151) that is provided on the front of the gaming machine and can be opened and closed, detection means (e.g., a door opening/closing sensor) that can detect the open/closed state of the door body, a first operation means (e.g., the MAX bet button 132, the start lever 135), a second operation means (e.g., the volume button 193a, the OK button 193b), and a main control means (e.g., the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 152) that controls the game based on one of a plurality of setting values, and the main control means is a playable state in which the game can proceed, a setting confirmation state (e.g., a setting confirmation mode) in which the currently set setting value can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation state in which one of the plurality of setting values can be set. One state can be set from a plurality of states including at least a setting change state (e.g., a setting change mode), and when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off while the first operating means is not being operated, and when the first operating means is operated after the power interruption is restored and a certain state (hereinafter referred to as the "first state") is entered while the first operating means is not being operated, a first control (e.g., a process of inserting three medals (credits) that are electronically stored, a reel rotation start process of starting the rotation of all reels 110 to 112) is executed, and when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off while the second operating means is not being operated, and when the second operating means is operated after the power interruption is restored and a certain state (hereinafter referred to as the "second state") is entered, a second control (e.g., a process of adjusting the volume, a menu The power supply device is configured to execute a process of displaying a display of the power supply state of the power supply device when the power interruption occurs when the first operating means is not operated and the power interruption is restored to the first state when the first operating means is operated, and is configured not to execute the first control. The power supply device is configured to execute the second control when a power interruption occurs when the detection means detects a closed state and the second operating means is not operated and the power supply device is restored from the power interruption when the detection means detects a closed state and the second operating means is operated and the power supply device is brought into the second state while the operation of the second operating means is continued. On the other hand, the power supply device is configured to execute the second control when a power interruption occurs when the detection means detects an open state and the second operating means is not operated and the power supply device is brought into the second state when the detection means detects an open state and the second operating means is not operated and the power supply device is brought into the second state when the detection means detects an open state and the second operating means is not operated. The gaming machine is configured to not execute the second control even if the second state is entered while the operation of the second operating means is continued after recovery from a power outage while the second operating means is operated, and when the first control is executed, it is difficult or impossible to return to the state before the first control is executed, and even if the second control is executed, it is possible to return to the state before the second control is executed, and when the second operating means is operated after the setting change state has transitioned to the playable state and the second state has been entered, the gaming machine is configured to not execute the second control when the setting change state is set and the setting change state is being set and the playable state has transitioned to the second state while the operation of the second operating means is continued.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, when power is restored with the door open and the button in operation, control over the operation is disabled in consideration of erroneous operation, and when power is restored with the door closed and the button in operation, the operation is enabled as a normal operation in consideration of a power outage during play. This makes it possible to switch between enabling and disabling operations depending on the state of the door body, and provides a gaming machine that can provide appropriate control depending on the state of the door body.

In addition, the setting change state is, in principle, a state that is entered by the administrator's operation, and returning from the setting change state is also performed by the administrator, and since this is a situation in which it is not necessary to return to play as quickly as possible, no control over operations is performed, taking into consideration only erroneous operations. Also, in the setting change state, the administrator is focused on changing the settings and may not notice an erroneous operation, and for example, settings such as volume may remain at settings that the administrator did not intend, so no control over operations is performed when returning from the setting change state.

<Example of power recovery when buttons are pressed/Stop button and OK button pressed simultaneously>
FIG. 180(a) is a chronological diagram showing the flow from when a power outage occurs while the stop button 139 and the OK button 193b are not operated, to when power is restored while the stop button 139 and the OK button 193b are operated simultaneously (pressed simultaneously).

As explained using FIG. 159(a) etc., the stop buttons 137 to 139 are enable/disable buttons that, depending on the situation, may disable the operation (no control is executed for the operation) if the operation is being performed when power is restored after a power outage, or may disable the operation (no control is executed for the operation).

As a specific example, when the multiple stop buttons (stop operation means) 137-139 are operated to stop the multiple reels 110-112 in a first stop mode, and a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while the last stop button among the multiple stop buttons 137-139 is being operated, and the power is restored while the last stop button is still being operated, the presentation means does not execute a winning presentation according to the first stop mode, but when the last stop button is no longer being operated, the stop buttons 137-139 function as valid buttons, and the presentation means executes a winning presentation according to the first stop mode.

On the other hand, even if a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off while at least one of the reels 110-112 is spinning and none of the stop buttons 137-139 are operated, and the power is restored while the stop buttons 137-139 are operated, resulting in a state in which the operation of the stop operation means is enabled, the stop buttons 137-139 function as invalid buttons and do not execute control over the operation of the stop buttons 137-139 (in this example, a reel stop control process that stops the reel 110-112 corresponding to the operated stop button 137-139).

The OK button 193b is an enable button that enables an operation that is being performed when power is restored after a power outage (control over that operation (e.g., displaying a menu) is executed).

The state indicated by the symbol T1 in FIG. 180 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the stop button 139 and the OK button 193b are not operated (not pressed), the reels 110 to 111 are stopped, and the reel 112 is spinning.

In this state, as shown in FIG. 180(a-1), reels 110-111 are stopped, and the stop button 139 corresponding to reel 112 is not operated (not pressed), so only reel 112 is spinning. Also, because stop buttons 137-139 are not operated (not pressed) (in this example, the detection signals of the stop button 137-139 sensors of the main control unit 300 are off), LEDe, LEDf, and LEDg of the main board display 190 are turned off.

In addition, in this state, part of the symbol combination (in this example, "bell-bell-bell") corresponding to a small win (bell) is aligned on the pay line of reels 110 and 111, and the small win (bell) is in a reach state.

The next state indicated by the symbol T2 is when the power supply device 252 is ON, the OK button 193b is not operated (not pressed), the reels 110-111 are stopped, the reel 112 is spinning, and the stop button 139 is operated (pressed).

In this state, since the stop button 139 has been operated (pressed) (in this example, the state of the detection signal of the stop button 139 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), the main control unit 300 executes control over the operation of the stop button 139 (in this example, a reel stop control process that stops the reel 112 corresponding to the operated stop button 139), and stops the reel 112 as shown in FIG. 180(a-2). Also, since the stop button 139 is being operated (in this example, the state of the detection signal of the stop button 139 sensor of the main control unit 300 is on), the LEDg of the main board display 190 is lit.

In addition, in this state, the symbol combination corresponding to the small win (bell) (in this example, "bell-bell-bell") is lined up on the pay line of reels 110 to 112, and the small win (bell) has been won, but the winning performance corresponding to the small win (bell) has not been executed.

The state indicated by the next symbol T3 is a state in which the power supply device 252 has changed from ON to OFF, and the state indicated by the next symbol T4 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is OFF, the stop button 139 has been operated (pressed), the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the OK button 193b has been operated (not pressed), and the stop button 139 and the OK button 193b have been operated simultaneously (pressed simultaneously).

In the state shown by the symbol T4, a power outage occurs in which the power supply unit 252 is cut off, and the power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped, and the display on the liquid crystal display device 157 is hidden, as shown in Figure 180 (a-3).

The next state indicated by the symbol T5 is a state in which the power supply of the power supply device 252 changes from OFF to ON while the reels 110 to 112 are stopped and the stop button 139 and the OK button 193b are operated (pressed simultaneously).

In this state, power was restored while the stop button 139 and the OK button 193b were being operated simultaneously (pressed at the same time), but in this example, the system is configured so that control over the winning effect and the operation of the OK button 193b is not executed while the operation of the stop button 139 and the OK button 193b continues, so the winning effect corresponding to the small win (bell) is put on hold and control over the operation of the OK button 193b is not executed.

The next state indicated by the symbol T6 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the stop button 139 and the OK button 193b are operated simultaneously (pressed simultaneously), the winning effect corresponding to the minor role (bell) is not being executed, and the pressing of the stop button 139 is released, changing the state to one in which the stop button 139 is not being operated (not pressed).

In this state, the pressing of the stop button 139 has been released, and so the winning effect corresponding to the minor prize (bell) has begun (in this example, the backlights of the reels 110 to 112 are turned on, and a winning sound is output from the speakers 272, 277). Also, because the stop button 139 has not been pressed (is not pressed), the LEDg of the main board display 190 is turned off.

On the other hand, in this state, the pressing operation of the OK button 193b continues, but in this example, even if the operation of the OK button 193b continues, control over the operation of the OK button 193b (e.g., displaying a menu) is not executed because the system is configured not to execute control over the operation of the OK button 193b (e.g., displaying a menu) if the stop button 139 is operated.

That is, in this example, when a plurality of reels (reels 110 to 112) are stopped in a first stop mode (a symbol combination corresponding to a minor role (bell)) by operating a plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 137 to 139), a power outage occurs in which the power supply to the power supply device is cut off when the last-operated stop operation means (stop button 139) among the plurality of stop operation means is operated, and when the power is restored from the power outage when the last-operated stop operation means and the second operation means (OK button 193b) are operated, While the operation of the stop operation means operated in the first place and the operation of the second operation means are continuing, the winning effect (the effect of turning on the backlights of reels 110 to 112 and the effect of outputting a winning sound from speakers 272, 277) according to the first stop mode by the effect means (reel backlights, speakers) and the second control (menu display) are not executed, and then, when the operation of the second operation means continues and the stop operation means is no longer operated, the winning effect is executed but the second control is not executed.

In this example, when the stop operation means (stop buttons 137 to 139) is not operated and the pending winning performance is to be executed, the winning performance is not interrupted by the execution of the second control (menu display), and the player's motivation to play is not diminished.

In this example, the winning effects are the backlights of the reels 110 to 112 that are turned on, and the winning sound is output from the speakers 272 and 277. However, the winning effects are not limited to this example. For example, in addition to (or instead of) these effects, a display effect using the liquid crystal display device 157 or a light-emitting effect using a lamp may be used.

In addition, the "second operating means" according to the present invention is not limited to the OK button 193b, but may be, for example, the volume button 193a. In this case, the "second control" according to the present invention may be configured not to adjust the volume while the winning performance is being executed.

In this example, when the stop operation means (stop buttons 137 to 139) is not operated and the pending winning performance is to be executed, the second control (adjusting the volume) is executed so that the winning performance is not interrupted, and the player's motivation to play is not diminished.

In addition, in this example, a winning effect that can be executed when a small combination (bell) is stopped is given as an example of a reserved effect, but it is not limited to this winning effect. For example, it may be a winning effect that can be executed when a small combination other than a bell (watermelon, cherry, 1-coin combination, etc.) is stopped, or it may be a predetermined effect that can be executed when a losing combination (no payout of game value) is stopped, or it may be a predetermined effect that can be executed when one or two of the three stop buttons 137-139 are operated (when one or two of the three reels are stopped).

Even in the case of a predetermined effect that can be executed when one of the three stop buttons 137-139 is operated (when one or two of the three reels have stopped), if one stop button is operated and the operation is continued, the predetermined effect will be put on hold. Also, even in the case of a predetermined effect that can be executed when one of the three stop buttons 137-139 is operated (when one or two of the three reels have stopped), if the second stop button is operated and the operation is continued, the predetermined effect will be put on hold.

<Example of power recovery when buttons are pressed/Stop button and OK button pressed simultaneously/Summary>
As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 150) includes a power supply device (for example, the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 151) that supplies power, a plurality of reels that are driven to rotate (for example, the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 150), a first operation means (for example, the MAX bet button 132, the start lever 135), a second operation means (for example, the volume button 193a, the OK button 193b), a plurality of stop operation means for stopping the reels that are driven to rotate (for example, the stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 150 and FIG. 180), and a control device for controlling a game based on one of a plurality of setting values. and a presentation means (speakers 272, 277 and a liquid crystal display device 157, a reel backlight, and lamps, as shown in FIG. 180), wherein the main control means can set one of a plurality of states including at least a playable state in which a game can be played, a setting confirmation state (e.g., a setting confirmation mode) in which a currently set setting value can be confirmed, and a setting change state (e.g., a setting change mode) in which one setting value can be set from among the plurality of setting values, and wherein the power supply of the power supply device is cut off when the first operation means is not operated. When a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off, and when the first operation means is not operated and the first operation means is operated after the power interruption is restored, a first control (for example, a process of inserting three medals (credits) stored electronically, a reel rotation start process of starting the rotation of all reels 110 to 112) may be executed, and when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off when the second operation means is not operated and the second operation means is operated after the power interruption is restored when the second operation means is not operated, a second control (for example, a process of adjusting the volume, a process of displaying a menu) may be executed. When the plurality of stop operation means are operated to stop the plurality of reels in a first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a minor role (bell) shown in FIG. 180), and the plurality of stop operation means are not operated, the presentation means executes a certain presentation corresponding to the first stop mode (for example, a presentation in which the backlights of the reels 110 to 112 are turned on and a winning sound is output from the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 180(a-5)). When the first operation means is not operated, a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off, and the first The first control is not executed even when power is restored from a power interruption while the operating means is operated, a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device is cut off when the second operating means is not operated, and the second control may be executed when power is restored from a power interruption while the second operating means is operated, a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device is cut off when the multiple stop operating means are not operated while the reel is rotating, and the reel is not stopped even when power is restored from a power interruption while the multiple stop operating means are operated, When the last operated stop operation means among the plurality of stop operation means is operated while the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode, a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off, and when the power interruption is restored while the last operated stop operation means is being operated, the certain performance according to the first stop mode by the performance means is not executed while the operation of the last operated stop operation means continues, and thereafter, when the stop operation means is no longer operated, the certain performance is executed, and when the first control is executed, the state before the first control was executed is restored. The present invention is configured such that, even if the second control is executed, it is difficult or impossible to return to the state before the second control is executed, and even if the second control is executed, the state can be returned to the state before the second control is executed, and when the second operation means is operated after the state transitions from the setting confirmation state to the playable state, the second control may be executed, and even if the state transitions from the setting confirmation state to the playable state when the second operation means is operated in a case where a setting value is being confirmed in the setting confirmation state, the second control is not executed, and when the multiple reels are stopped in the first stop mode by operating the multiple stop operation means, the multiple stop operation means is operated to stop the multiple stop operations. This gaming machine is characterized in that a power outage occurs in which the power supply to the power supply device is cut off when the last-operated stop operation means among the stop operation means is operated, and when the power outage is restored while the last-operated stop operation means and the second operation means are being operated, the certain presentation and the second control corresponding to the first stop mode by the presentation means are not executed while the operation of the last-operated stop operation means and the operation of the second operation means are continuing, and thereafter, the operation of the second operation means is continued, and when the stop operation means is no longer operated, the certain presentation is executed but the second control is not executed.

In the gaming machine according to this embodiment, when the stop operation means is not operated and a certain performance that has been put on hold is to be executed, the execution of the second control can be prevented from interrupting the certain performance, and the player's motivation to play is not diminished.

In addition, the setting confirmation state is, in principle, a state that is entered by an administrator's operation, and returning from the setting confirmation state is also performed by the administrator, and since this is a situation in which it is not necessary to return to play as quickly as possible, no control over operations is performed, taking into consideration only incorrect operations. Also, in the setting confirmation state, the administrator is concentrating on checking the settings and there is a risk that an incorrect operation will not be noticed, and for example, settings such as volume may remain at settings that the administrator did not intend, so no control over operations is performed when returning from the setting confirmation state.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 150) includes a power supply device (for example, the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 151) that supplies power, a plurality of reels that are driven to rotate (for example, the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 150), a first operating means (for example, the MAX bet button 132, the start lever 135), a second operating means (for example, the volume button 193a, the OK button 193b), a plurality of stop operating means for stopping the reels that are driven to rotate (for example, the stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 150 and FIG. 180), and a main controller that controls the game based on one of a plurality of setting values. a game machine including a main control means (e.g., a main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 152) and a presentation means (speakers 272, 277 and a liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 180, a backlight for a reel, and a lamp), the main control means being capable of setting one of a plurality of states including at least a playable state in which a game can be played, a setting confirmation state (e.g., a setting confirmation mode) in which a currently set setting value can be confirmed, and a setting change state (e.g., a setting change mode) in which one setting value can be set from among the plurality of setting values, and the power supply of the power supply device being cut off when the first operation means is not operated. When a power interruption occurs and the first operating means is not operated, and the first operating means is operated after the power interruption is restored, a first control (for example, a process of inserting three medals (credits) stored electronically, or a reel rotation start process of starting the rotation of all reels 110 to 112) may be executed. When a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off and the second operating means is not operated, and the second operating means is operated after the power interruption is restored, a second control (for example, a process of adjusting the volume, or a process of displaying a menu) may be executed. The reels are stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small role (bell) shown in FIG. 180) by operating the plurality of stop operation means, and when the plurality of stop operation means are not operated, the performance means executes a certain performance corresponding to the first stop mode (for example, a performance of turning on the backlights of the reels 110 to 112 and a performance of outputting a winning sound from the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 180(a-5)). When the first operation means is not operated, a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off, and the first operation means The power supply device is configured not to execute the first control even if the power supply is restored from a power interruption while the second operating means is operated, and the power supply device may be cut off during a power interruption when the second operating means is not operated, and the second control may be executed when the power supply device is restored from a power interruption while the second operating means is operated, and the power supply device is configured not to stop the reel being rotated even if the power supply is restored from a power interruption while the stop operating means is operated, and the power supply device may be configured not to stop the reel being rotated even if the power supply is restored from a power interruption when ... When the last operated stop operation means among the plurality of stop operation means is operated in a state in which the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode by being operated, a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off, and when the power interruption is restored while the last operated stop operation means is being operated, the certain performance corresponding to the first stop mode by the performance means is not executed while the operation of the last operated stop operation means continues, and thereafter, when the stop operation means is no longer operated, the certain performance is executed, and when the first control is executed, the state before the execution of the first control is restored. a state in which it is difficult or impossible to return to the previous state, and even if the second control is executed, it is possible to return to the state before the second control was executed, and when the second operation means is operated after the setting change state has been transitioned to the playable state, the second control may be executed, and even if the setting change state is set and the setting change state is transitioned to the playable state while the second operation means is being operated, the second control is not executed, and when the setting change state is set and the setting change state is transitioned to the playable state while the second operation means is being operated, the multiple stop operation means are operated to stop the multiple stop operation means when the multiple reels are stopped in the first stop mode. This gaming machine is characterized in that, when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off while the last-operated stop operation means among the operation means is being operated, and when the power interruption is restored while the last-operated stop operation means and the second operation means are being operated, the certain performance and the second control according to the first stop mode by the performance means are not executed while the operation of the last-operated stop operation means and the operation of the second operation means are continuing, and then, when the stop operation means is no longer being operated, the certain performance is executed but the second control is not executed.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the stop operation means is not operated and a certain presentation that has been put on hold is to be executed, the execution of the second control can be prevented from interfering with the certain presentation, and the player's motivation to play is not diminished.
Furthermore, the setting change state is a state that is entered in principle by the administrator's operation, and returning from the setting change state is also performed by the administrator's operation, and since this is a situation in which it is not necessary to return to play as quickly as possible, control over operations is not performed with consideration only to erroneous operations. Also, in the setting change state, the administrator is focused on changing the settings and may not notice erroneous operations, and for example, there is a possibility that settings such as volume may remain at settings that the administrator did not intend, so control over operations is not performed when returning from the setting change state.

<Display when medal clearing operation>
Next, using Figure 181, we will explain the display during the medal clearing operation.

The game medal count display device 1170 shown in Figures 181(a) and 181(b) is a 5-digit 7-segment (SEG) display, as explained with reference to Figure 172, and is a device that displays a display (first display) showing the "game medal count" stored in a specified area of RAM 1358 (game value number storage means).

As explained with reference to FIG. 173, the medal count clear button 1172 shown in FIG. 181(a) and FIG. 181(b) is provided in a position where it cannot be operated by the player (for example, in a position where it can be operated when the front door 102 is open), and is an operating means for clearing the "medal count." When a certain operation (medal clearing operation) is performed using the medal count clear button 1172, the "medal count" is cleared to 0.

<Display when medal clearing operation/when door is opened>
Figure 181 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display when the medal clearing operation is performed when the door is opened.

The state indicated by the symbol T1 in FIG. 181(a) is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), and the game medal count clear button 1172 is not operated (not pressed).

In this state, as shown in FIG. 181(a-1), the liquid crystal display device 157 executes an effect (e.g., a normal effect) corresponding to the current game state (e.g., normal game), and displays the current number of game medals (in this example, the character string "200" indicating 200 medals) and the number of medals paid out (in this example, the character string "00" indicating 0 medals). In addition, the game medal count display device 1170 displays the current number of game medals (in this example, the numerical value "00200" indicating 200 medals).

The next state indicated by the symbol T2 is a state in which the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state) and has changed to a state in which the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is open (door open state).

The state indicated by the symbol T3 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is open (door open state), and the medal count clear button 1172 is not being operated (not pressed), and the power supply device 252 has changed from ON to OFF.The state indicated by the symbol T4 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is OFF, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is open (door open state), and the medal count clear button 1172 has been pressed.

In the states indicated by symbols T3 and T4, an electrical interruption occurs in which the power supply to the power supply device 252 is cut off, and the power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped, so that the display on the liquid crystal display device 157 and the game medal count display device 1170 are not displayed, as shown in Figures 181 (a-2) and 181 (a-3).

The next state indicated by the symbol T5 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is OFF, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is open (door open state), and the game medal count clear button 1172 is pressed, and the power supply device 252 has changed from OFF to ON.

In this state, when the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is open (door open state), power is restored with the medal count clear button 1172 pressed, so that the medal count is cleared to 0 as control over the medal count clear button 1172, and the medal count display device 1170 displays the current medal count (in this example, the number "00000" indicating 0 medals) as shown in FIG. 181 (a-4).

In addition, since this state is a state in which the front door 102 is open (door open state), as shown in FIG. 181(a-4), a door open notification (in this example, the text string "Door is open" is displayed to notify that the front door 102 is open) is executed on the liquid crystal display device 157. Note that in this example, only the door open notification is executed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and the number of game medals is not displayed, but the number of game medals may be displayed, in which case the text string "00 medals" indicating 0 medals is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 as the display of the number of game medals.

The state indicated by the next symbol T6 is a state in which the game medal count clear button 1172 has changed from a pressed state to a non-pressed state, and the state indicated by the next symbol T7 is a state in which the door open sensor has changed from a state in which the front door 102 is open (door open state) to a state in which the door open sensor has changed from a state in which the front door 102 is open (door closed state) to a state in which the door open sensor has detected the front door 102 is closed (door closed state).

In the state indicated by the symbol T7, when the medal count clear button 1172 is not pressed, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), and the liquid crystal display device 157 executes an effect (e.g., a normal effect) corresponding to the current game state (e.g., normal game), and displays the current number of medals remaining after being cleared (in this example, the string "00 medals" indicating 0 medals), and the medal count display device 1170 displays the current number of medals remaining after being cleared (in this example, the number "00000" indicating 0 medals).

<Display when medal clearing operation/when door is opened>
Figure 181 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display when the medal clearing operation is performed when the door is opened.

The state indicated by the symbol T1 in FIG. 181(b) is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), and the game medal count clear button 1172 is not operated (not pressed).

In this state, as shown in FIG. 181(b-1), the liquid crystal display device 157 executes an effect (e.g., a normal effect) corresponding to the current game state (e.g., normal game), and displays the current number of game medals (in this example, the character string "200" indicating 200 medals) and the number of medals paid out (in this example, the character string "00" indicating 0 medals). In addition, the game medal count display device 1170 displays the current number of game medals (in this example, the numerical value "00200" indicating 200 medals).

The state indicated by the symbol T2 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), and the medal count clear button 1172 is not being operated (not pressed), and the power supply device 252 has changed from ON to OFF.The state indicated by the symbol T3 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is OFF, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), and the medal count clear button 1172 has been pressed.

In the states indicated by symbols T2 and T3, an electrical interruption occurs in which the power supply to the power supply device 252 is cut off, and the power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped, so that the display on the liquid crystal display device 157 and the game medal count display device 1170 are not displayed, as shown in Figure 181 (b-2) and (b-3).

The next state indicated by the symbol T4 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is turned off, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), and the game medal count clear button 1172 is pressed, and the power supply device 252 has changed from OFF to ON.

In this state, when the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), power is restored with the medal count clear button 1172 pressed, so that the medal count is cleared to 0 as control over the medal count clear button 1172, and as shown in FIG. 181 (b-4), the medal count display device 1170 displays the current medal count (in this example, the number "00000" indicating 0 medals), while the liquid crystal display device 157 displays the number of medals before they were cleared (in this example, the string "200 medals" indicating 200 medals).

The state indicated by the next symbol T5 is the state in which the game medal count clear button 1172 has changed from a pressed state to a non-pressed state, and the state indicated by the next symbol T6 is the state in which a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the game medal count clear button 1172 changed to a non-pressed state.

In the state indicated by the symbol T6, a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has passed since the game medal count clear button 1172 was changed to a non-pressed state, and the liquid crystal display device 157 executes a presentation (e.g., a normal presentation) corresponding to the current game state (e.g., normal game play) and displays the number of game medals remaining after they have been cleared (in this example, the string "00 medals" is displayed, indicating 0 medals).

That is, in this example, when the power supply device is turned on while the detection means (door opening/closing sensor) detects the open state of the front door 102 and the first operation means (game medal number clear button 1172) is operated (first case), the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is cleared, and when the power supply device is turned on while the detection means detects the closed state and the first operation means is operated (second case), the game value number (game medal number) stored in the game value number storage means (RAM 1358) is cleared. In the first case, after the power supply device is turned on, the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) displays a display indicating zero as the first display (as shown in FIG. 181(a-5), displaying the string "00 coins" indicating 0 coins), and in the second case, after the power supply device is turned on, the display means is configured to display a display indicating the number before the gaming value number is cleared (as shown in FIG. 181(b-4), displaying the string "200 coins" indicating 200 coins) before displaying a display indicating zero as the first display (as shown in FIG. 181(b-5), displaying the string "00 coins" indicating 0 coins).

In this example, since a medal clearing operation while the door is closed may be unexpected, by displaying the number of medals before clearing so that the state before clearing can be restored, it is possible to grasp the number of medals before clearing. In the event that an unexpected medal clearing operation is performed, the number of play values can be restored to the number before clearing, and no disadvantage is caused to the player.

<Display when clearing medals/Summary>
As described above, a gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 150) includes a power supply device (for example, the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 151) that supplies power, a door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 151) that is provided on the front of the gaming machine and can be opened and closed, detection means (for example, a door opening/closing sensor) that can detect the open/closed state of the door body, a first operation means (for example, the game medal number clear button 1172 shown in FIG. 173 or FIG. 181), and a game value number (for example, the game medal number) related to the game value used in the game. a game machine including a game value number storage means (e.g., a RAM 1358 shown in FIG. 173) for storing a game value number, and a display means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 181), the display means being capable of displaying a first display indicating the game value number stored in the game value number storage means, and when the power supply device is turned on in a state in which the detection means detects an open state and the first operation means is operated (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is displayed. The gaming machine is configured to clear the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means, and when the power supply device is turned on while the detection means detects a closed state and the first operation means is operated (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"), the game value number stored in the game value number storage means is cleared, and in the first case, after the power supply device is turned on, the display means displays a display indicating zero as the first display (for example, a display of the string "00 coins" indicating 0 coins as shown in FIG. 181 (a-5)), and in the second case, after the power supply device is turned on, the display means displays a display indicating the number before the game value number is cleared (for example, a display of the string "200 coins" indicating 200 coins as shown in FIG. 181 (b-4)) before displaying a display indicating zero as the first display (for example, a display of the string "00 coins" indicating 0 coins as shown in FIG. 181 (b-5)), and the first operation means is an operation means provided at a position that is operable when the door body is in an open state.

In the gaming machine according to this embodiment, since a medal clearing operation with the door closed may be unexpected, the number of medals before clearing is displayed so that the state before clearing can be restored, making it possible to grasp the number of medals before clearing. In the event of an unexpected medal clearing operation, the number of play values can be restored to the number before clearing, preventing any disadvantage to the player.

<Modification of display during medal clearing operation>
Next, a modified example of the display during the medal clearing operation will be described with reference to Fig. 182. In this example, in order to avoid repeated explanations, the contents different from the <display during the medal clearing operation> described with reference to Fig. 181 will be mainly described.

In this example, in addition to the liquid crystal display device 157 and medal count display device 1170 described with reference to FIG. 181, a medal insertion lamp 129 (hereinafter also referred to as a "bet lamp") is added as a display means. As described with reference to FIG. 150, this medal insertion lamp 129 is an indicator for lighting a number of lamps (for example, 1 to 3) according to the number of medals inserted (bet) into the slot machine 100.

In this example, in addition to the medal count clear button 1172 (first operation means), a setting key 1174 (second operation means) is added as an operation means. This setting key 1174 is an operation means for starting to change the setting value (in this example, setting 1 to setting 6) or check the setting. The setting key 1174 is provided in a position where it cannot be operated by the player (for example, a position where it can be operated when the front door 102 is open), and has two operation states: a first operation state (a state where the setting key 1174 is not functioning. For example, a state where the setting key 1174 is simply inserted into the keyhole. Hereinafter, also referred to as "OFF" or "OFF state") and a second operation state (a state where the setting key 1174 is functioning. For example, a state where the setting key 1174 inserted into the keyhole is rotated to a predetermined position. Hereinafter, also referred to as "ON" or "ON state").

In addition, in this example, speakers 272 and 277 described with reference to Figs. 150 and 151 are added as sound output means. These speakers 272 and 277 are sound output means for performing various notifications using sound in addition to various effects. The speakers 272 and 277 are used, for example, to perform a door open notification (e.g., a notification that outputs the sound "The door is open") that notifies that the door body (front door 102) is in an open state, a clear notification (e.g., a notification that outputs the sound "Cleared") that notifies that the number of game medals (number of game values) has been cleared, a setting change notification (e.g., a notification that outputs the sound "Settings being changed") that notifies that the setting is in change setting mode (setting change state), and a setting confirmation notification (e.g., a notification that outputs the sound "Settings being confirmed") that notifies that the setting is in confirmation setting mode (setting confirmation state).

The "alert" according to the present invention is not limited to that provided by the liquid crystal display device 157 and the speakers 272 and 277, but may be, for example, the turning on, turning off, or blinking of various lamps or LEDs, or the rotation, vibration, or stopping of reels or other moving parts.

<Display change when medal clearing operation/when door is opened>
Figure 182 (a) is a diagram showing another example of the display when the medal clearing operation is performed when the door is opened.

The state indicated by the symbol T1 in FIG. 182(a) is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), the game medal count clear button 1172 is not operated (not pressed), and the operation state of the setting key 1174 is the first operation state (OFF state).

The door opening/closing sensor according to this example is configured so that, when a predetermined operation is performed, the detection state becomes a closed state (door closed state) even when the front door (door body) 102 is in an open state. Specifically, when the front door 102 is in an open state, a light-shielding piece of a certain length is inserted between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of the door opening/closing sensor of the main body 101 and fixed with tape or the like to block the light from the light-emitting section of the opening/closing sensor of the main body 101, so that the detection state of the opening/closing sensor can be forcibly changed to the door closed state even when the front door 102 is in an open state.

The "predetermined operation" according to the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, a DIP switch may be provided to set the door open/close sensor to a closed detection state, and the predetermined operation may be the operation of this DIP switch. Also, if the detection means is configured with a magnetic sensor, the detection state of the door open/close sensor may be set to the door closed state by bringing a magnet close.

In the state indicated by the symbol T1, as shown in FIG. 182 (a-1), the liquid crystal display device 157 executes a presentation (e.g., a normal presentation) corresponding to the current game state (e.g., normal game), and also displays the current number of game medals (in this example, the string "200 coins" is displayed, indicating 200 coins) and the number of coins paid out (in this example, the string "00 coins" is displayed, indicating 0 coins).

The game medal count display device 1170 displays the current number of game medals (in this example, the number "00200" is displayed, indicating 200 medals), and the game medal insertion lamps 129 light up a number of lamps (in this example, three) corresponding to the number of medals inserted (bet) for the game.

The next state indicated by the symbol T2 is a state in which the front door 102 is opened and the door open sensor detects the front door 102 in a closed state (door closed state), changing to an open state (door open state).

The state indicated by the symbol T3 next is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is open (door open state), the game medal count clear button 1172 is not operated (not pressed), the operation state of the setting key 1174 is the first operation state (OFF state), and the power supply device 252 has changed from ON to OFF. The state indicated by the symbol T4 next is a state in which the game medal count clear button 1172 has changed from a not pressed state to a pressed state.

In the states indicated by symbols T3 and T4, an electrical interruption occurs in which the power supply to the power supply unit 252 is cut off, and the power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped. As a result, as shown in Figures 182 (a-2) and 182 (a-3), the displays on the liquid crystal display unit 157 and the game medal count display unit 1170 are not displayed (blacked out), and the medal insertion lamp 129 is not lit (turned off).

The next state indicated by the symbol T5 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is OFF, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is open (door open state), and the game medal count clear button 1172 is pressed, and the power supply device 252 has changed from OFF to ON.

In this state, power is restored while the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is open (door open state), the operation state of the setting key 1174 is in the first operation state (OFF state), and the medal count clear button 1172 is pressed. As a result, the medal count is cleared to 0 as control over the medal count clear button 1172, and the medal count display device 1170 displays the current medal count (in this example, the number "00000" indicating 0 medals) as shown in FIG. 182 (a-4).

Note that control over the medal count clear button 1172 does not clear the medals inserted (bet), so the medal insertion lamps 129 light up a number of lamps (three in this example) corresponding to the number of medals inserted (bet).

In addition, since this state is a state in which the front door 102 is open (door open state), a door open notification (in this example, the text "Door is open" is displayed to notify that the front door 102 is open) is executed on the liquid crystal display device 157.

In this state, the speakers 272, 277 are used to start a door open notification (in this example, a notification that outputs the sound "The door is open" to notify that the front door 102 is open), and then the door open notification is temporarily interrupted and a clear notification (first notification, in this example, a notification that outputs the sound "Cleared") is executed to notify that the number of game medals has been cleared to 0. Although not shown in the figure, after the clear notification is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, once), the interrupted door open notification is resumed.

The clear notification (first notification) may be given priority over the door open notification. In this case, after the power is turned on, the clear notification is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., once), and then the door open notification is executed. The clear notification may be continued until the front door 102 is closed (until the door open sensor changes from a state detecting the front door 102 being open (door open state) to a state detecting the front door 102 being closed (door closed state)).

The notification mode of the clear notification (first notification) is not limited to this example, and for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 may execute a clear notification to notify that the number of game medals has been cleared to 0 (for example, displaying the string "Cleared"), or the game medal count display device 1170 may execute a clear notification to notify that the number of game medals has been cleared to 0 (for example, displaying the English letter "C").

This clear notification (e.g., display of the letter "C") may be performed for a longer period of time than the clear notification by the speakers 272, 277, or the clear notification (e.g., display of the letter "C") may be performed for a longer period of time than the display time of the return display on the liquid crystal display device 157 (the display until the return to the display corresponding to the current game state (e.g., normal gameplay), such as a return display or blackout display).

The state indicated by the next symbol T6 is a state in which the game medal count clear button 1172 has changed from a pressed state to a non-pressed state, and the state indicated by the next symbol T7 is a state in which the front door 102 is closed and the door open sensor has changed from a state in which it detects that the front door 102 is open (door open state) to a state in which it detects that it is closed (door closed state).

In the state indicated by the symbol T7, when the medal count clear button 1172 is not pressed, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), and the liquid crystal display device 157 executes an effect (e.g., a normal effect) corresponding to the current game state (e.g., normal game), and displays the current number of medals remaining after being cleared (in this example, the string "00 medals" indicating 0 medals), and the medal count display device 1170 displays the current number of medals remaining after being cleared (in this example, the number "00000" indicating 0 medals).

<Display change when medal clearing operation/when door is closed>
Figure 182 (b) is a diagram showing another example of the display when the medal clearing operation is performed when the door is closed.

The state indicated by the symbol T1 in FIG. 182(b) is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, a predetermined operation is performed with the front door 102 open, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), the game medal count clear button 1172 is not operated (not pressed), and the operation state of the setting key 1174 is the first operation state (OFF state).

In this state, as shown in FIG. 182(b-1), the liquid crystal display device 157 executes an effect (e.g., a normal effect) that corresponds to the current game state (e.g., normal game), and also displays the current number of game medals (in this example, the character string "200 coins" is displayed, indicating 200 coins) and the number of coins paid out (in this example, the character string "00 coins" is displayed, indicating 0 coins).

The game medal count display device 1170 displays the current number of game medals (in this example, the number "00200" is displayed, indicating 200 medals), and the game medal insertion lamps 129 light up a number of lamps (in this example, three) corresponding to the number of medals inserted (bet) for the game.

The state indicated by the symbol T2 next is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), the game medal count clear button 1172 is not operated (not pressed), the operation state of the setting key 1174 is the first operation state (OFF state), and the power supply device 252 has changed from ON to OFF. The state indicated by the symbol T3 next is a state in which the game medal count clear button 1172 has changed from a not pressed state to a pressed state.

In the states indicated by symbols T2 and T3, an electrical interruption occurs in which the power supply unit 252 is cut off, and power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped. As a result, as shown in Figures 182 (b-2) and 182 (b-3), the displays on the liquid crystal display unit 157 and the game medal count display unit 1170 are not displayed (blacked out), and the medal insertion lamp 129 is not lit (turned off).

The next state indicated by the symbol T4 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is turned off, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), and the game medal count clear button 1172 is pressed, and the power supply device 252 has changed from OFF to ON.

In this state, power is restored while the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), the operation state of the setting key 1174 is the first operation state (OFF state), and the medal count clear button 1172 is pressed. As a result, the medal count is cleared to 0 as control over the medal count clear button 1172, and as shown in FIG. 182 (b-4), the medal count display device 1170 does not display the number of medals before they were cleared (in this example, the number "00200" indicating 200 medals) but displays the current number of medals (in this example, the number "00000" indicating 0 medals), while the liquid crystal display device 157 displays the number of medals before they were cleared (in this example, the string "200 medals" indicating 200 medals).

In addition, in the liquid crystal display device 157, processing such as initial settings begins after the power supply device 252 is turned on, and it takes a longer time for the liquid crystal display device 157 to reach a state where it can display information than the game medal count display device 1170, which is composed of a 7-segment display. Therefore, after the power supply device 252 is turned on, the display of the game medal count by the game medal count display device 1170 (in this example, a clear display of the number "00000", indicating 0 medals) begins before the display of the game medal count by the liquid crystal display device 157 (in this example, the display of the string "200 medals", indicating 200 medals).

Therefore, by drawing attention to the display on the game medal count display device 1170 after power is restored, the player can quickly realize that the medals have been cleared, and by drawing attention thereafter to the display on the liquid crystal display device 157, the player can also check the number of game medals before they were cleared.

In this state, the speakers 272, 277 are used to start a door open notification (in this example, a notification that outputs the sound "The door is open" to notify that the front door 102 is open), and then the door open notification is temporarily interrupted and a clear notification (in this example, a notification that outputs the sound "Cleared") is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., once) to notify that the number of game medals has been cleared to 0. Although not shown in the figure, after the clear notification is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., once), the door open notification is resumed.

The clear notification by the speakers 272, 277 starts almost simultaneously with the display of the number of game medals by the game medal count display device 1170 (in this example, a clear display of the number "00000" indicating 0 medals) immediately after the power supply device 252 is turned on. However, in this example, the display of the number of game medals by the game medal count display device 1170 (in this example, a clear display of the number "00000" indicating 0 medals) continues for a longer period of time than the clear notification by the speakers 272, 277.

Therefore, even if the player misses the clear notification from the speakers 272, 277 after power is restored, the player can be sure that the medals have been cleared by drawing attention to the display on the game medal count display device 1170.

In addition, in this example, the number of game medals is cleared to 0 when power is restored while the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), the operation state of the setting key 1174 is in the first operation state (OFF state), and the game medal count clear button 1172 is pressed. However, the number of game medals may be configured not to be cleared to 0 when the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state).

With this configuration, it is possible that the medal clearing operation may be unexpected when the door is closed, but it may be possible to prevent situations where medals are cleared at unexpected times.

The state indicated by the next symbol T5 is the state in which the game medal count clear button 1172 has changed from a pressed state to a non-pressed state, and the state indicated by the next symbol T6 is the state in which a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the game medal count clear button 1172 changed to a non-pressed state.

In the state indicated by the symbol T6, a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the game medal count clear button 1172 was changed to a non-pressed state, and the liquid crystal display device 157 executes a presentation (e.g., a normal presentation) corresponding to the current game state (e.g., normal game play), and displays the number of game medals remaining after they have been cleared (in this example, the string "00 medals" is displayed, indicating 0 medals).

That is, in this example, when the power supply device is turned on while the detection means (door opening/closing sensor) detects the open state of the front door 102 and the first operation means (game medal number clear button 1172) is operated (first case), the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means (RAM 1358) is cleared, and when the power supply device is turned on while the detection means detects the closed state and the first operation means is operated (second case), the number of game values (number of game medals) stored in the game value number storage means (RAM 1358) is cleared. In the first case, after the power supply device is turned on, the first display means (liquid crystal display device 157) displays a display indicating zero as the first display (the character string "00 pieces" indicating 0 pieces as shown in FIG. 182 (a-5)), and in the first case, after the power supply device is turned on, the second display means (game In the second case, after the power supply device is turned on, the first display means (liquid crystal display device 157) displays a display indicating zero (a display of the number "00000" indicating 0, as shown in FIG. 182(a-4) to (a-5)), as the second display, and before displaying a display indicating zero (a display of the string "00" indicating 0, as shown in FIG. 182(b-5)), as the first display, the display means displays a display indicating the number before the game value number is cleared (a display of the string "200" indicating 200, as shown in FIG. 182(b-4)), and in the second case, after the power supply device is turned on, the second display means (game medal number display device 1170) displays a display indicating zero (a display of the number "00000" indicating 0, as shown in FIG. 182(b-4) to (b-5)), without displaying a display indicating the number before the game value number is cleared.

In this example, since a medal clearing operation may be unexpected when the door is closed, the second display means notifies the player that medal clearing has been performed normally, while the first display means displays the number of medals before clearing so that the player can return to the state before clearing. This makes it possible to grasp the number of medals before clearing, and in the event of an unexpected medal clearing operation, the number of play values can be restored to the number before clearing, preventing the player from being disadvantaged.

<Display modification when medal clearing operation/Summary>
As described above, a gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 150) includes a power supply device (for example, the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 151) for supplying power, a door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 151) that is provided on the front of the gaming machine and can be opened and closed, detection means (for example, a door opening and closing sensor) capable of detecting the open/closed state of the door body, a first operation means (for example, a game medal number clear button 1172 shown in FIG. 182), game value number storage means (for example, the RAM 1358 shown in FIG. 173) capable of storing a game value number (for example, the number of game medals) relating to the game value used in a game, a first display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 182) capable of displaying a first display indicating the game value number, and a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 182) capable of displaying a first display indicating the game value number. and a second display means (for example, a game medal number display device 1170 shown in FIG. 182) capable of displaying a second display indicating a number, wherein the first operation means is an operation means provided at a position that allows it to be operated when the door body is in an open state, and is configured to clear (or may clear) the game value number stored in the game value number storage means when the power supply device is turned on in a state in which the detection means detects the open state and the first operation means is operated (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), and to clear (or may clear) the game value number stored in the game value number storage means when the power supply device is turned on in a state in which the detection means detects the closed state and the first operation means is operated (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"). ), and clears (or may clear) the number of game values stored in the game value number storage means, and in the first case, after the power supply device is turned on, the first display means displays (or may display) a display indicating zero as the first display (for example, a display of the character string "00 pieces" indicating 0 pieces as shown in FIG. 182 (a-5)), and in the first case, after the power supply device is turned on, the second display means displays (or may display) a display indicating zero as the second display (for example, a display of the numerical value "00000" indicating 0 pieces as shown in FIG. 182 (a-4) to (a-5)), and in the second case, after the power supply device is turned on, the first display means displays In the second case, after the power supply device is turned on, the second display means displays (or may display) a display indicating zero (the numerical value "0000" indicating 0 as shown in Fig. 182 (b-4)) without displaying a display indicating the number before the game value number is cleared as the second display in the second display means (for example, a display of the string "00 coins" indicating 0 as shown in Fig. 182 (b-5)).

In the gaming machine according to this embodiment, since a medal clearing operation may be unexpected when the door is closed, the second display means notifies the player that medal clearing has been performed normally, while the first display means displays the number of medals before clearing so that the player can return to the state before clearing. This makes it possible to grasp the number of medals before clearing, and in the event of an unexpected medal clearing operation, the number of play values can be restored to the number before clearing, preventing the player from being disadvantaged.

The "first operating means" according to the present invention is not limited to the game medal count clear button 1172, and may be, for example, a reset button. The "display indicating zero" according to the present invention is not limited to a display using the number 0, and may be, for example, a character string such as "zero", "zero", or "ZERO", or a display that indirectly suggests that the game value number has become zero (has been cleared) (for example, a display of character strings such as "CLEAR", "C", or "clear"), or a display using the number 0 and a display that indirectly suggests that the game value number has become zero (has been cleared) may be displayed together (for example, a display such as "C0000").

<Display when setting keys are operated>
Next, the display when the setting key is operated will be described with reference to Fig. 183. In this example, in order to avoid repeated explanations, the contents different from the <display when medal clearing operation> described with reference to Fig. 181 and the <variation of the display when medal clearing operation> described with reference to Fig. 182 will be mainly described.

In this example, in addition to the medal count clear button 1172 (first operating means) and the setting key 1174 (second operating means), a start lever 135 (hereinafter also referred to as the "lever") is added as an operating means. The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112, and is also an operating means used to confirm the setting value in the setting change state.

<Display when setting key is operated/door is open>
FIG. 183(a) shows an example of a display when the setting key is operated while the door is open.

The state indicated by the symbol T1 in FIG. 183(a) is a state in which the power supply unit 252 is ON, the front door 102 is open, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is open (door open state), and the game medal count clear button 1172, the setting key 1174, and the lever 135 are not being operated (not pressed).

In this state, as shown in FIG. 183(a-1), the liquid crystal display device 157 executes an effect (e.g., a normal effect) that corresponds to the current game state (e.g., normal game), and also displays the current number of game medals (in this example, the character string "200 coins" is displayed, indicating 200 coins) and the number of coins paid out (in this example, the character string "00 coins" is displayed, indicating 0 coins).

The medal count display device 1170 displays the current medal count (in this example, the number "00200" is displayed, indicating 200 medals), and the medal insertion lamps 129 light up a number of lamps (in this example, three) corresponding to the number of medals inserted (bet).

The next state indicated by the symbol T2 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is open (door open state), the game medal count clear button 1172 is not being operated (not pressed), the power supply device 252 is changed from ON to OFF, and the setting key 1174 is operated.

In this state, the power supply device 252 is OFF, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is open (door open state), the setting key 1174 is inserted into the keyhole, and the setting key 1174 inserted into the keyhole is rotated to a predetermined position, so that the operation state of the setting key 1174 changes from the OFF state (first operation state) to the ON state (second operation state).

The next state indicated by the symbol T3 is a state in which the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is open (door open state), the game medal count clear button 1172 is not pressed (not pressed), the setting key 1174 is in an ON operation state, and the power supply device 252 has changed from OFF to ON.

In this state, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is open (door open state), the game medal count clear button 1172 is not pressed (not pressed), and the setting key 1174 is in the ON state when power is restored, so the game transitions from a playable state to a setting change state, and the slot machine 100 is set to the setting change state.

In this state, the number of game medals is not cleared to 0, but the current number of game medals (in this example, the number "00200" indicating 200 medals) is displayed on the game medal count display device 1170, the game medals bet (in this example, 3 medals) are cleared, and the game medal insertion lamp 129 is turned off. Note that the number of game medals may not be displayed during the setting change state.

In addition, in this state, since the state of the slot machine 100 has been set to the setting change state, as shown in FIG. 183(a-2), a setting change notification (second notification; in this example, displaying the string "setting change in progress") is executed on the liquid crystal display device 157 to notify that the setting change state is in progress, and a setting change notification (second notification; in this example, outputting the sound "setting change in progress") is executed using the speakers 272, 277 to notify that the setting change state is in progress.

The timing for starting the setting change notification is not limited to this example. For example, when the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is open (door open state), the liquid crystal display device 157 may execute a door open notification (for example, displaying the text string "Door is open" to notify that the front door 102 is open) and the speakers 272, 277 may execute a door open notification (for example, outputting a voice message saying "Door is open" to notify that the front door 102 is open). After that, when the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), the liquid crystal display device 157 and the speakers 272, 277 may start a setting change notification to notify that the setting has been changed.

This configuration can reliably notify the user that the door has been opened before notifying the user that the settings have been changed, improving convenience for game center staff.

The state indicated by the next symbol T4 is a state in which the lever 135 is pressed in the setting change state, and the state indicated by the next symbol T5 is a state in which the lever 135 has changed from a pressed state to a non-operated (non-pressed) state.

In this state, the lever 135 has been operated, and the setting value displayed on the setting value display device 101a (see FIG. 166(b)) is stored as the new setting value.

The next state, indicated by symbol T6, is when the setting key 1174 is released from the setting change state.

In this state, the setting key 1174 inserted in the keyhole is rotated from a predetermined position to its original position (a position where the setting key 1174 can be inserted and removed), and the operation state of the setting key 1174 changes from the ON state (second operation state) to the OFF state (first operation state), transitioning from the setting change state to the playable state, and the state of the slot machine 100 is set to the playable state.

In addition, in this state, the medal count display device 1170 displays the current number of medals (in this example, the number "00200" is displayed, indicating 200 medals), and since the medals inserted (bet) have been cleared due to the transition to the setting change state, the medal insertion lamp 129 is turned off, and the liquid crystal display device 157 displays the current number of medals (in this example, the string "200" is displayed, indicating 200 medals).

In addition, in this state, since the state of the slot machine 100 has been changed from the setting change state to a playable state, as shown in FIG. 183 (a-3), a setting change completion notification is issued using the speakers 272, 277 to notify the user that the setting change state has ended (in this example, a notification that outputs a voice saying "Setting change completed").

The next state indicated by the symbol T7 is a state in which the front door 102 is closed and the door open sensor detects the front door 102 in an open state (door open state), changing to a closed state (door closed state).

In this state, when the game is playable, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), and the liquid crystal display device 157 executes an effect (e.g., a normal effect) corresponding to the current game state (e.g., normal game), displays the current number of game medals (in this example, the character string "200" indicating 200 medals), and the game medal count display device 1170 displays the current number of game medals (in this example, the number "00200" indicating 200 medals).

<Display when setting key is operated/door is closed>
FIG. 183(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display when the setting key is operated while the door is closed.

The state indicated by the symbol T1 in FIG. 183(b) is a state in which the power supply unit 252 is ON, a predetermined operation is performed with the front door 102 open, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), and the game medal count clear button 1172, the setting key 1174, and the lever 135 are not being operated (not pressed).

In this state, as shown in FIG. 183(b-1), the liquid crystal display device 157 executes an effect (e.g., a normal effect) that corresponds to the current game state (e.g., normal game), and also displays the current number of game medals (in this example, the character string "200 coins" is displayed, indicating 200 coins) and the number of coins paid out (in this example, the character string "00 coins" is displayed, indicating 0 coins).

The medal count display device 1170 displays the current medal count (in this example, the number "00200" is displayed, indicating 200 medals), and the medal insertion lamps 129 light up a number of lamps (in this example, three) corresponding to the number of medals inserted (bet).

The next state indicated by the symbol T2 is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), the game medal count clear button 1172 is not operated (not pressed), the power supply device 252 is changed from ON to OFF, and the setting key 1174 is operated.

In this state, the power supply device 252 is OFF, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), the setting key 1174 is inserted into the keyhole, and the setting key 1174 inserted into the keyhole is rotated to a predetermined position, causing the operation state of the setting key 1174 to change from the OFF state (first operation state) to the ON state (second operation state).

The next state indicated by the symbol T3 is a state in which the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), the game medal count clear button 1172 is not pressed (not pressed), the setting key 1174 is in an ON state, and the power supply of the power supply device 252 has changed from OFF to ON.

In this state, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), the game medal count clear button 1172 is not pressed (not pressed), and the setting key 1174 is in the ON state when power is restored, so the slot machine 100 remains in a playable state without transitioning from a playable state to a setting change state.

In addition, in this state, the slot machine 100 is maintained in a playable state without transitioning to a setting change state, so that, as shown in FIG. 183(b-2), the liquid crystal display device 157 executes an effect (e.g., a normal effect) corresponding to the current game state (e.g., normal play), displays the current number of game medals (in this example, the character string "200" indicating 200 medals), and the game medal count display device 1170 displays the current number of game medals (in this example, the numerical value "00200" indicating 200 medals).

In addition, since the state of the slot machine 100 is maintained in a playable state without transitioning to a setting change state, the game medals that have been bet (three medals in this example) are not cleared, and the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps (three in this example) corresponding to the number of medals inserted (bet).

<Display when medal clearing operation and setting key operation/summary>
As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 150) is a gaming machine including a power supply device (e.g., the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 151) for supplying power, a door body (e.g., the front door 102 shown in FIG. 151) that is provided on the front of the gaming machine and that can be opened and closed, a detection means (e.g., a door opening/closing sensor) capable of detecting the open/closed state of the door body, a first operation means (e.g., the game medal number clear button 1172 shown in FIG. 182), a second operation means (e.g., the setting key 1174 shown in FIG. 183), and a game value number storage means (e.g., the RAM 1358 shown in FIG. 173) capable of storing the game value number relating to the game value used in the game, and the first operation means is operable when the door body is in an open state. the second operation means is provided at a position where it can be operated when the door body is in an open state, and has a first operation state (for example, a state where the setting key 1174 is merely inserted into the keyhole) and a second operation state (for example, a state where the setting key 1174 inserted into the keyhole has been rotated to a predetermined position) as operation states, and is configured to clear (or may clear) the number of game values that have not been bet when the power supply device is turned on in a state where the detection means detects the open state and the first operation means is operated (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"; for example, at the timing shown by the symbol T5 in FIG. 182(a)); In the first case, the power supply device is configured not to clear the number of game values bet (or may not clear the number of game values bet) after the power supply device is turned on, and in the first case, a first notification (for example, a clear notification shown in FIG. 182(a-4) (a notification that outputs a voice saying "cleared" using speakers 272, 277)) can be executed at a certain timing after the power supply device is turned on, and when the power supply device is turned on in a state in which the detection means detects an open state and the second operation means is operated to the second operation state (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"; for example, the timing shown by symbol T3 in FIG. 183(a)), a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed is executed. In the first case, the gaming machine is configured to set the number of game values that have not been bet to a clear state (or may not be cleared) after the power supply device is powered on, and in the second case, the gaming machine is configured to clear the number of game values that have been bet to a clear state (or may be cleared) after the power supply device is powered on, and in the second case, the gaming machine is capable of executing a second notification (for example, a setting change notification shown in FIG. 183 (a-2) (displaying the character string "setting change in progress" using the liquid crystal display device 157, and outputting a sound "setting change in progress" using speakers 272, 277)) at a certain timing after the power supply device is powered on.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, when power is restored while the first operating means is being operated, the first notification can reliably notify the player that the held medals have been cleared normally, and when power is restored while the second operating means is being operated, the held medals are not cleared but the second notification can reliably notify the player that the bet medals have been cleared normally, thereby improving convenience for the staff of the gaming establishment, etc.

<Display when the clear button and the setting key are pressed simultaneously>
Next, the display when the clear button and the setting key are operated simultaneously will be described with reference to Fig. 184. In this example, in order to avoid redundant explanation, the following mainly describes the contents different from the <display when the setting key is operated> described with reference to Fig. 183.

<Display when the clear button and setting key are pressed simultaneously/when the door is open>
FIG. 184(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display when the clear button and the setting key are operated simultaneously while the door is open.

In the example of <Display when setting key is operated/door is open> described using Figure 183 (a), in the state indicated by the symbol T3, power is restored when the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is open (door open state), the medal count clear button 1172 is not pressed (not pressed), and the operation state of the setting key 1174 is ON. In this example, power is restored at the same timing when the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is open (door open state), the medal count clear button 1172 is operated, and the operation state of the setting key 1174 is ON.

In this example, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is open (door open state), the game medal count clear button 1172 is operated, and the setting key 1174 is in the ON state when power is restored, causing a transition from a playable state to a setting change state, and the slot machine 100 is set to the setting change state.

In this state, the number of game medals is cleared to 0, and as shown in FIG. 184 (a-2), the game medal count display device 1170 displays the current number of game medals (in this example, the number "00000" indicating 0 medals) without displaying the number of game medals before the clearing (in this example, the number "00200" indicating 200 medals), and the game medals bet (in this example, 3 medals) are cleared and the game medal insertion lamp 129 is turned off.

In addition, in this state, since the state of the slot machine 100 has been set to the setting change state, as shown in FIG. 183(a-2), a setting change notification (second notification; in this example, displaying the string "setting change in progress") is executed on the liquid crystal display device 157 to notify that the setting change state is in progress, and a setting change notification (second notification; in this example, outputting the sound "setting change in progress") is executed using the speakers 272, 277 to notify that the setting change state is in progress.

In the example of <Modified display during medal clear operation/door open> described using FIG. 182(a), in the state indicated by the symbol T5, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is open (door open state), the operation state of the setting key 1174 is in the first operation state (OFF state), and power is restored with the game medal count clear button 1172 pressed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 182(a-4), the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a door open notification (in this example, "Door is open" which notifies that the front door 102 is open). The system then executes a door open notification (displaying the text string "The door is open") and starts a door open notification using speakers 272, 277 (in this example, a notification that outputs the sound "The door is open" to notify that the front door 102 is open), then temporarily halts the door open notification and executes a clear notification (first notification, in this example, a notification that outputs the sound "Cleared") to notify that the number of game medals has been cleared to 0, but in this example, the system is configured not to execute either the door open notification or the clear notification.

The state indicated by the next symbol T4 is a state in which the lever 135 is pressed in the setting change state, and the state indicated by the next symbol T5 is a state in which the lever 135 has changed from a pressed state to a non-operated (non-pressed) state.

In this state, the lever 135 has been operated, and the setting value displayed on the setting value display device 101a (see FIG. 166(b)) is stored as the new setting value.

The next state, indicated by symbol T6, is when the setting key 1174 is released from the setting change state.

In this state, the setting key 1174 inserted in the keyhole is rotated from a predetermined position to its original position (a position where the setting key 1174 can be inserted and removed), and the operation state of the setting key 1174 changes from the ON state (second operation state) to the OFF state (first operation state), transitioning from the setting change state to the playable state, and the state of the slot machine 100 is set to the playable state.

In this state, the game medal count display device 1170 displays the current number of game medals (in this example, the number "00000" is displayed, indicating 0 medals), the game medal insertion lamp 129 is kept turned off, and the liquid crystal display device 157 displays the current number of game medals (in this example, the string "000" is displayed, indicating 0 medals).

In addition, in this state, since the state of the slot machine 100 has been changed from the setting change state to the playable state, as shown in FIG. 184 (a-3), a setting change completion notification is issued using the speakers 272, 277 to notify the user that the setting change state has ended (in this example, a notification that outputs a voice saying "Setting change completed").

In this example, a clear notification that notifies the player that the number of game medals has been cleared to 0 is not executed, but instead a notification that outputs sound may be omitted and a clear display may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, or the clear notification may be executed after the setting change state has ended, or may be executed alternately with the setting change notification. In addition, the process of clearing the number of game medals to 0 may itself be executed after the setting change state has ended, and the clear notification may be executed at that timing.

<Display when the clear button and setting key are pressed simultaneously/when the door is closed>
FIG. 184(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display when the clear button and the setting key are operated simultaneously while the door is closed.

In the example of <Display when setting key is operated/when door is closed> described using FIG. 183(b), in the state indicated by the symbol T3, a specified operation is performed with the front door 102 open, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), the medal count clear button 1172 is not pressed (not pressed), and power is restored with the setting key 1174 in the ON state. In this example, at the same timing, a specified operation is performed with the front door 102 open, the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), the medal count clear button 1172 is operated, and power is restored with the setting key 1174 in the ON state.

In this example, power is restored while the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), the game medal count clear button 1172 is operated, and the setting key 1174 is in the ON state, so the slot machine 100 remains in the playable state without transitioning from the playable state to the setting change state.

In addition, in this state, the slot machine 100 is maintained in a playable state without transitioning to a setting change state, so that, as shown in FIG. 184(b-2), the liquid crystal display device 157 executes an effect (e.g., a normal effect) corresponding to the current game state (e.g., normal play), clears the number of game medals to 0, and displays the current number of game medals (in this example, the character string "000" indicating 0), and the game medal count display device 1170 displays the current number of game medals (in this example, the number "00000" indicating 0).

In addition, similar to FIG. 182 (b-4), the liquid crystal display device 157 may display a display indicating the number of game values before they are cleared (the display of the string "200 coins" indicating 200 coins as shown in FIG. 182 (b-4)) before displaying the string "00 coins" indicating 0 coins after clearing.

In addition, since the state of the slot machine 100 is maintained in a playable state without transitioning to a setting change state, the game medals that have been bet (three medals in this example) are not cleared, and the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps (three in this example) corresponding to the number of medals inserted (bet).

In addition, in this state, speakers 272 and 277 are used to issue a clear notification (in this example, a notification that outputs the sound "Cleared") to notify the player that the number of game medals has been cleared to 0.

<Display when the clear button and the setting key are pressed simultaneously/Summary>
As described above, in the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 150), when the power supply device (for example, the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 151) is turned on in a state in which the detection means (for example, the door opening/closing sensor) detects the open state, the first operation means (for example, the game medal number clear button 1172 shown in FIG. 184) is operated, and the second operation means (for example, the setting key 1174 shown in FIG. 184) is operated in the second operation state (for example, the setting key 1174 inserted in the keyhole is rotated to a predetermined position) (hereinafter referred to as the "third case"; for example, at the timing shown by the symbol T3 in FIG. 184(a)), the number of game values bet is cleared (or may be cleared) and the setting is changed. In the third case, This gaming machine is configured to clear (or may clear) the number of gaming values that have not been bet at a certain timing after the power supply device is turned on, and in the third case, a first notification (for example, a clear notification shown in FIG. 184 (b-2) (an alert outputting the sound "Cleared" using speakers 272, 277)) is not executed (or may not be executed) at a certain timing after the power supply device is turned on, and in the third case, a second notification (for example, a setting change notification shown in FIG. 184 (a-2) (displaying the string "Setting changing" using the liquid crystal display device 157, and an alert outputting the sound "Setting changing" using speakers 272, 277)) is executed (or may be executed) at a certain timing after the power supply device is turned on.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the power supply device is turned on while the detection means detects the open state, the first operating means is operated, and the second operating means is operated to the second operating state (for example, in the case of fraudulent activity), the second notification (for example, a notification regarding a high-risk setting change) is given priority over the first notification (for example, a medal clearing notification, which is low-risk), thereby providing a gaming machine that is resistant to fraud.

The first notification may be to notify that the number of game values that have not been betted has been cleared, and the second notification may be to notify that the setting has been changed.

With this configuration, for example, if fraudulent activity is committed, the second notification (a notification regarding a high-risk setting change) can be given priority over the first notification (a medal clearing notification, which is low-risk).

The first notification may be to notify that the number of game values that have not been betted has been cleared, and the second notification may be to notify that the door body is in an open state.

With this configuration, for example, if fraudulent activity occurs, the second notification (a high-risk notification about the door opening) can be prioritized over the first notification (a low-risk notification about medal clearing).

<Operation when the harness connection status changes>
Next, an example of operation when the connection state of the harness changes will be described with reference to Figures 185 to 192. In the following description, the configurations already described in other embodiments will not be described. In addition, for configurations that contradict the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and symbols in this example will take precedence.

Various boards are placed inside a gaming machine, but because space is limited, multiple boards and each operation unit are appropriately connected by harnesses. Figure 185 shows an example of the connections of boards inside a gaming machine. For example, main control board 300B, which is provided with main control unit 300, is connected to relay board RB1 by harness HB1, and this relay board RB1 is further connected to lever unit 135U (equipped with start lever 135), stop button unit 136U (equipped with stop buttons 137-139), bet button unit 132U (equipped with bet buttons 130, 132, and settlement button 134) by harnesses HA1-HA5.

Using such harnesses allows for efficient placement of boards and components in a limited space, but it also creates another problem: poor connections in the harness. Checking for such poor connections requires a considerable amount of work.

In light of this, by having some kind of action occur depending on the connection status of the harness, the connection status can be easily confirmed by the presence or absence of this action. Below, these operation examples are explained using the drawings. Note that each operation example can be used in combination as long as there is no contradiction.

[Example of operation when the harness is properly connected]
Fig. 186(a) is a diagram showing the flow of operations when the harness is connected normally. In this figure, the operations are performed in the following order: bet operation, lever operation, left stop operation, center stop operation, and right stop operation. In Fig. 186(a), the front door 102 is in a closed state throughout all operations, and the corresponding door sensor also detects the closed state.

First, when a bet operation is performed, the number of bets required to start playing is placed. This is the stage before the game starts by lever operation (reels are stopped), the normal background is displayed on the performance image display device 157, normal background music is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 are in their normal light-emitting state. In addition, the lever monitor LED provided on the main control board 300B is in the first state (lighted or unlit, a state different from the second state described below). This lever monitor LED is in the second state when the start lever 135 is pressed down, and is provided to check the state of the start lever 135. The lever monitor LED is not limited to being provided on the main control board 300B, and may be provided on the relay board RB1.

Next, when the start lever 135 is operated and changes from a non-pressed state to a pressed state, a signal of this change is received and the game begins (the reels start spinning). At this time, the effect image display device 157 starts a first display (for example, an operation instruction display (push order navigation, aim for XX), a small win suggestion display, a preview display, etc.), the speakers 272, 277 start outputting a first sound (effect corresponding to the first display), and the various lamps 420 go into a first light emission state (effect corresponding to the first display). In addition, the lever monitor LED goes into a second state (lit or unlit, a state different from the first state).

Next, when a left stop operation is performed as the first stop operation, the corresponding reel comes to a stop. At this time, the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission state. In addition, the lever monitor LED is in the first state.

Next, when a middle stop operation is performed as a second stop operation, the corresponding reel is stopped. At this time, the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission state. In addition, the lever monitor LED is in the first state.

Finally, when the right stop operation is performed as the third stop operation, all the reels come to a stop. At this time, the effect image display device 157 displays a second display (stop result display (stopped minor winnings display, XX coins got display, XX bonus display, updated display (number of credits, number of games, number of ATs remaining)), etc.), a second sound (effect corresponding to the second display) is output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 are in a second light emission state (effect corresponding to the second display). Also, the lever monitor LED is in the first state.

[Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (1)]
An example of the operation when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected will be described below with reference to Fig. 186(b). The gaming machine in this example is configured so that when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control unit 300 receives a signal similar to that received when the start lever 135 is pressed down.

In Figure 186(b), after the bet operation, the lever unit harness HA1 is unplugged, and then the left stop operation, center stop operation, and right stop operation are performed in that order. Note that explanations of parts that overlap with the contents explained in Figure 186(a) will be omitted. In this Figure 186(b), the front door 102 is in the open state to check the operation of the gaming machine, and the corresponding door sensor has also detected the open state. Each harness shown in Figure 185 is installed in a position that can be seen inside the gaming machine with the door in the open state.

First, when a bet operation is performed, the number of bets required to start playing is placed. This stage is before the game starts by operating the lever (reels are stopped), and the normal background is displayed on the performance image display device 157, normal background music is output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 are in their normal light-emitting state. Also, the lever monitor LED is in its first state.

Next, when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected while the start lever 135 is not pressed, the main control unit 300 receives a signal similar to that received when the start lever 135 changes from a not pressed state to a pressed state, thereby starting the game (the reels start spinning). At this time, the first display begins on the performance image display device 157, the first sound begins to be output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 enter a first light emission state. Additionally, the lever monitor LED enters a second state.

Next, when the left stop operation is performed as the first stop operation, the corresponding reel comes to a stop state. At this time, the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission mode. In addition, the lever monitor LED remains in the second mode because it is in the same state as when the start lever 135 is pressed down due to the lever unit harness HA1 being unplugged.

Next, when a middle stop operation is performed as a second stop operation, the corresponding reel is stopped. At this time, the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission mode. In addition, the lever monitor LED remains in the second mode because it is in the same state as when the start lever 135 is pressed down due to the lever unit harness HA1 being unplugged.

Finally, when the right stop operation is performed as the third stop operation, all the reels come to a stop. At this time, the second display is displayed on the performance image display device 157, a second sound is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 are in a second light emission state. In addition, the lever monitor LED remains in the second state because the lever unit harness HA1 has been unplugged, which is the same state as when the start lever 135 is pressed down.

In the above example, if a fault such as a poor connection occurs in the lever unit harness HA1, game play may begin even if the start lever 135 is not operated, which may make it easier to notice the fault. Also, the state of the lever monitor LED may change to the second mode even if the start lever 135 is not operated, which may make it easier to notice the fault.

Note that the configuration is not limited to the above-mentioned start lever 135, and can also be applied to other devices, such as when the harness HC2 connected to the chance button unit 190U in FIG. 185 is unplugged while the chance button 190 is not being operated, a process corresponding to pressing the chance button 190 is executed. In this case, the description of the lever monitor LED can be interpreted as a monitor for monitoring this other device.

In the above configuration, the action taken when the harness connected to the operation unit becomes disconnected is the start of reel rotation. However, for example, the action taken when the harness connected to the operation unit becomes disconnected may be an action executed during play. Furthermore, if the action taken when the harness connected to the operation unit becomes disconnected is an action that can be seen inside the gaming machine with the door open, the burden of maintenance work may be reduced. Furthermore, such an action may be executed by a process different from error processing. In this case, operation checks can be performed without using error processing.

[Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (2)]
An example of the operation when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected will be described below with reference to Fig. 186(c). The gaming machine in this example is configured so that when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control unit 300 receives a signal similar to that when the start lever 135 is pressed down. Furthermore, the main control unit 300 is configured not to accept a stop operation while it is receiving a signal indicating that the start lever 135 is pressed down.

In Figure 186(c), after the bet operation, the lever unit harness HA1 is unplugged, and then the left stop operation, center stop operation, and right stop operation are performed in that order. Note that explanations of parts that overlap with the contents explained in Figure 186(a) will be omitted. In this Figure 186(c), the front door 102 is in an open state to check the operation of the gaming machine, and the corresponding door sensor has also detected the open state. Each harness shown in Figure 185 is installed in a position that can be seen inside the gaming machine with the door in this open state.

First, when a bet operation is performed, the number of bets required to start playing is placed. This stage is before the game starts by operating the lever (reels are stopped), and the normal background is displayed on the performance image display device 157, normal background music is output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 are in their normal light-emitting state. Also, the lever monitor LED is in its first state.

Next, when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected while the start lever 135 is not pressed, the main control unit 300 receives a signal similar to that received when the start lever 135 changes from a not pressed state to a pressed state, thereby starting the game (the reels start spinning). At this time, the first display begins on the performance image display device 157, the first sound begins to be output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 enter a first light emission state. Additionally, the lever monitor LED enters a second state.

Next, the stop operations are performed in the order of left stop operation, center stop operation, and right stop operation, but as long as a signal is received that the start lever 135 is being pressed due to the lever unit harness HA1 being unplugged, the stop operation is not accepted and the corresponding reel remains in a spinning state. At this time, the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue in the first light emission mode. In addition, the lever monitor LED remains in the second mode, since the lever unit harness HA1 is unplugged and is in the same state as when the start lever 135 is pressed.

In the above example, if a fault such as a poor connection occurs in the lever unit harness HA1, the fault may be easily noticed because play may start even if the start lever 135 is not operated, or the player may be unable to stop play thereafter. In addition, the state of the lever monitor LED may also change to the second mode even if the start lever 135 is not operated, making the fault easily noticeable.

Note that the configuration is not limited to the above-mentioned start lever 135, and can also be applied to other devices, such as when the harness HC2 connected to the chance button unit 190U in FIG. 185 is unplugged while the chance button 190 is not being operated, a process corresponding to pressing the chance button 190 is executed. In this case, the description of the lever monitor LED can be interpreted as a monitor for monitoring this other device.

In the above configuration, the action taken when the harness connected to the operation unit is disconnected is the start of reel rotation. However, for example, the action taken when the harness connected to the operation unit is disconnected may be an action executed during a game. Furthermore, if the action taken when the harness connected to the operation unit is disconnected is an action that can be seen inside the gaming machine with the door open, the burden of maintenance work may be reduced. Furthermore, such an action may be executed by a process different from the error process. In this case, the operation can be checked without using the error process.

[Example of behavior when the lever unit harness is disconnected (3)]
An example of the operation when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected will be described below with reference to Fig. 187(a). The gaming machine in this example is configured so that when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control unit 300 receives a signal similar to that received when the start lever 135 is pressed down.

In Figure 187(a), the start lever 135 is pressed, a bet is placed in that state, and then the lever unit harness HA1 is unplugged. Note that explanations of parts that overlap with those explained in Figure 186(a) will be omitted. In Figure 187(a), the front door 102 is in an open state to check the operation of the gaming machine, and the corresponding door sensor has also detected that the door is in an open state. Each harness shown in Figure 185 is installed in a position that can be seen inside the gaming machine with the door in this open state.

First, when the lever is pressed, the number of bets required to start playing has not yet been made, so the game has not yet started (the reels are stopped), the performance image display device 157 displays the normal background, normal background music is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 are in their normal light-emitting state. In addition, the lever monitor LED is in the second state because the start lever 135 is pressed.

Next, when a bet operation is performed, the number of bets required to start playing is placed. At this time, the start lever 135 remains pressed, so the main control unit 300 does not receive a signal indicating that the start lever 135 has changed from a non-pressed state to a pressed state. Therefore, the state before playing begins (reels stopped state) continues. Also, the lever monitor LED remains in the second state because the start lever 135 is pressed.

Next, when the lever unit harness HA1 is unplugged, the main control unit 300 continues to receive the same signal as when the start lever 135 is pressed down. Therefore, the main control unit 300 does not receive a signal indicating that the start lever 135 has changed from a non-pressed state to a pressed state. Therefore, the state before the start of play (reel stopped state) continues. Also, the lever monitor LED remains in the second state because the start lever 135 is pressed down.

[Example of operation when the lever unit harness is disconnected (4)]
An example of the operation when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected will be described below with reference to Fig. 187(b). The gaming machine in this example is configured such that when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control unit 300 receives a signal similar to that received when the start lever 135 is pressed down.

In Fig. 187(b), the left stop button is pressed after a bet operation, the lever is pressed, the left stop button is released, and finally the lever unit harness HA1 is unplugged. Note that explanations of parts that overlap with the contents explained in Fig. 186(a) will be omitted. In Fig. 187(b), the front door 102 is in an open state to check the operation of the gaming machine, and the corresponding door sensor also detects the open state. Each harness shown in Fig. 185 is provided in a position that can be seen inside the gaming machine with the door in the open state.

First, when a bet operation is performed, the number of bets required to start playing is placed. This stage is before the game starts by operating the lever (reels are stopped), and the normal background is displayed on the performance image display device 157, normal background music is output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 are in their normal light-emitting state. Also, the lever monitor LED is in its first state.

Next, the left stop button is pressed, but since play has not yet started, the state before play begins (reels stopped) continues.

Then, the start lever 135 is operated, changing from a non-pressed state to a pressed state, and the main control unit 300 receives a signal of this change. However, in this example, because a signal that the left stop button is pressed (operated) is also received, the game does not start (the reels start spinning) and the state before the game starts (the reels are stopped) continues. Note that the lever monitor LED is in the second state because the start lever 135 is pressed.

Then, the left stop button is released. At this time, the number of bets required to start playing has been placed, but the start lever 135 remains pressed, so the main control unit 300 does not receive a signal indicating that the start lever 135 has changed from a released state to a pressed state. Therefore, the state before playing begins (reels stopped state) continues. Also, the lever monitor LED remains in the second state because the start lever 135 is pressed.

Next, when the lever unit harness HA1 is unplugged, the main control unit 300 continues to receive the same signal as when the start lever 135 is pressed down. Therefore, the main control unit 300 does not receive a signal indicating that the start lever 135 has changed from a non-pressed state to a pressed state. Therefore, the state before the start of play (reel stopped state) continues. Also, the lever monitor LED remains in the second state because the start lever 135 is pressed down.

[Example of operation when the harness between the main control board and the relay board is disconnected (1)]
An example of the operation when the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is disconnected will be described below with reference to Fig. 188(a). The gaming machine in this example is configured so that when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control unit 300 receives a signal similar to that when the start lever 135 is pressed down.

Figure 188(a) explains the operation before and after the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is unplugged. Note that explanations of parts that overlap with the contents explained in Figure 186(a) will be omitted. Note that in Figure 188(a), the front door 102 is in an open state to check the operation of the gaming machine, and the corresponding door sensor has also detected the open state. Each harness shown in Figure 185 is installed in a position that can be seen inside the gaming machine with the door in this open state.

First, before the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is unplugged, the number of bets required to start playing has been placed, and the game has not yet started by operating the lever (the reels are stopped), the performance image display device 157 displays the normal background, normal background music is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 are in the normal light emission mode. Also, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

Next, when the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is unplugged, the main control unit 300 detects this connection abnormality. At this time, the performance image display device 157 starts to display a third display (error display (board connection error display)), the speakers 272 and 277 start to output a third sound (performance corresponding to the third display), and the various lamps 420 go to a third light emission state (performance corresponding to the third display). In addition, the lever monitor LED goes to the second state, the same as when the harness HA1 of the lever unit 135U is unplugged.

In the above example, the operation when the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is disconnected is described. However, for example, when the harness HD1 connecting the sub-control board 400B and the relay board RB4 is disconnected, the performance image display device 157 may start a third display (error display (board connection error display)), the speakers 272 and 277 may start outputting a third sound (performance corresponding to the third display), and the various lamps 420 may be in a third light emission state (performance corresponding to the third display). Also, for example, if a monitor LED is provided for monitoring the operation of the chance button 190 or menu button, the same state as when the harness HC1 or harness HC2 is disconnected may be displayed.

[Example of operation when the harness between the main control board and the relay board is disconnected (2)]
An example of the operation when the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is disconnected will be described below with reference to Fig. 188(b). The gaming machine in this example is configured so that when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control unit 300 receives a signal similar to that when the start lever 135 is pressed down.

In Figure 188(b), after a bet operation, the lever unit harness HA1 is unplugged, and then the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is unplugged. Note that explanations of parts that overlap with the contents explained in Figure 186(a) will be omitted. Note that in Figure 188(a), the front door 102 is in an open state to check the operation of the gaming machine, and the corresponding door sensor has also detected the open state. Each harness shown in Figure 185 is installed in a position that can be seen inside the gaming machine when the door is in the open state.

First, when a bet operation is performed, the number of bets required to start playing is placed. This stage is before the game starts by operating the lever (reels are stopped), and the normal background is displayed on the performance image display device 157, normal background music is output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 are in their normal light-emitting state. Also, the lever monitor LED is in its first state.

Next, when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected while the start lever 135 is not pressed, the main control unit 300 receives a signal similar to that received when the start lever 135 changes from a not pressed state to a pressed state, thereby starting the game (the reels start spinning). At this time, the first display begins on the performance image display device 157, the first sound begins to be output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 enter a first light emission state. Additionally, the lever monitor LED enters a second state.

Next, when the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300 and the relay board RB1 is unplugged, the main control unit 300 detects this connection abnormality. At this time, the performance image display device 157 starts to display a third display (error display (board connection error display)), the speakers 272 and 277 start to output a third sound (performance corresponding to the third display), and the various lamps 420 go to a third light emission state (performance corresponding to the third display). In addition, the lever monitor LED goes to the second state, the same as when the harness HA1 of the lever unit 135U is unplugged.

In the above example, the operation when the harness HB1 connecting the main control board 300B and the relay board RB1 is disconnected is described. However, for example, when the harness HD1 connecting the sub-control board 400B and the relay board RB4 is disconnected, the performance image display device 157 may start a third display (error display (board connection error display)), the speakers 272 and 277 may start outputting a third sound (performance corresponding to the third display), and the various lamps 420 may be in a third light emission state (performance corresponding to the third display). Also, for example, if a monitor LED is provided for monitoring the operation of the chance button 190 or menu button, the same state as when the harness HC1 or harness HC2 is disconnected may be displayed.

[Example of behavior when multiple harnesses are disconnected]
An example of the operation when the lever unit harness HA1, the stop button unit harness HA2, and the bet button unit harness HA3 are each disconnected will be described below with reference to Fig. 189(a). The gaming machine in this example is configured so that when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the main control unit 300 receives a signal similar to that received when the start lever 135 is pressed down.

In FIG. 189(a), the following operations are performed in the order of a menu display (a screen for customizing the performance settings): unplugging the bet button unit harness HA3, pressing the bet button 132, connecting the bet button unit harness HA3, unplugging the lever unit harness HA1, unplugging the stop button unit harness HA2, pressing all stop buttons 137 to 139, connecting the stop button unit harness HA2, unplugging the stop button unit harness HA2, connecting the stop button unit harness HA2, unplugging the stop button unit harness HA2, and connecting the stop button unit harness HA2. Note that explanations of parts that overlap with those described in FIG. 186(a) will be omitted. In FIG. 189(a), the front door 102 is in an open state to check the operation of the gaming machine, and the corresponding door sensor also detects the open state. Each harness shown in FIG. 185 is provided in a position that can be seen inside the gaming machine with the door open.

First, in the initial state, the effect settings are being customized (before the game starts), the effect image display device 157 is displaying a menu, the speakers 272 and 277 are outputting menu background music, and the various lamps 420 are in a menu illumination mode.

Then, the bet button unit harness HA3 is disconnected, but this does not cause any change in state. Furthermore, if the bet button unit harness HA3 is connected while the bet button 132 is kept pressed, operation of the bet button 132 becomes effective, and the number of bets required to start playing is placed. Operation of the bet button 132 also cancels the menu display, etc., the normal background is displayed on the performance image display device 157, normal background music is output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 go into their normal illumination mode.

Next, when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected while the start lever 135 is not pressed, the main control unit 300 receives a signal similar to that received when the start lever 135 changes from a not pressed state to a pressed state, thereby starting the game (the reels start spinning). At this time, the first display begins on the performance image display device 157, the first sound begins to be output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 enter a first light emission mode.

Next, the stop button unit harness HA2 is disconnected, but this does not cause any change in state. Next, the stop button unit harness HA2 is connected while all stop buttons 137-139 are kept pressed. In this case, one of the pressed stop buttons 137-139 that can perform a valid stop operation (at this stage, all stop buttons 137-139) is accepted according to priority. In this example, the priority order is left, middle, right, and operation of the left stop button 137 is valid as the first stop operation, and the corresponding reel is stopped. Note that the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light-emitting mode. Note that, here, multiple stop buttons 137-139 are pressed when connecting the stop button unit harness HA2. If only one stop button capable of performing a valid stop operation is pressed, the operation of that stop button is accepted, but if none of the stop buttons are pressed, no operation is performed.

Next, with all the stop buttons 137-139 still pressed, the stop button unit harness HA2 is disconnected and then reconnected. In this case as well, the operation of the middle stop button 138, which is one of the pressed stop buttons 137-139 that can be used to perform a valid stop operation (at this stage, the middle stop button 138 and the right stop button 139), is accepted, and the corresponding reel comes to a stop. Note that the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 continue to emit the first light.

Next, with all stop buttons 137-139 still pressed, the stop button unit harness HA2 is disconnected and then reconnected. In this case as well, the operation of the right stop button 139, which is one of the pressed stop buttons 137-139 that can be used to perform a valid stop operation (only the right stop button 139 at this stage), is accepted, and the corresponding reel is stopped. With all reels now stopped, a second display is displayed on the performance image display device 157, a second sound is output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 are in a second light emission state.

Note that if the stop button unit harness HA2 is disconnected and then reconnected while all stop buttons 137-139 are pressed, and there is an out-of-step reel, the stop button corresponding to that reel will not be treated as capable of valid stop operation. Figure 189(b) shows an example of operation when the left reel 110 is out of step when the stop button unit harness HA2 disconnected in Figure 189(a) is first connected. In this case, of the stop buttons 137-139, the ones capable of valid stop operation are the middle stop button 138 and the right stop button 139, and it shows that operation of one of these, the middle stop button 138, is accepted and the corresponding reel is placed in a stopped state.

In the above example, for example, when replacing the stop button unit 136U, by connecting the stop button unit harness HA2 while holding down the stop button, it is possible to check whether the replaced stop button unit 136U is operating normally based on the presence or absence of the corresponding action.

In the above configuration, the action taken when the harness is connected is to stop the reels from spinning during play. However, this action is not limited to actions that are performed during play, and various actions can be applied. In particular, if this action is visible inside the gaming machine with the door open, it may be possible to reduce the burden of maintenance work. Furthermore, such actions may be performed by a process different from error processing. In this case, the operation can be checked without using error processing.

Furthermore, we will explain examples of operations related to the above operations.

In this example, a single harness bundling the signal lines for the MAX BET button, start lever, settlement button, and 1 BET button is connected to a relay board, which is then connected to the main board. The signal lines are arranged in the following order, starting from terminal number 1: MAX BET sensor signal line, power line, ground line, 1 BET sensor signal line, power line, ground line, settlement button signal line, ground line, power line, start lever sensor signal line, ground line.

In this case, when the harness is in a non-betting state and disconnected, if the harness changes from a non-connected state to a connected state when the MAX BET button and 1 BET button are operated, the operation of the MAX BET button becomes effective and a process for setting the bet number to 3 is executed, resulting in a 3 bet state, and if the harness then changes from a connected state to a non-connected state, the same process as when the lever is operated is executed, the reels spin, and the monitor LED becomes the same as when the lever is operated.

In addition, when the harness is in a non-betting state and disconnected, if the harness changes from a non-connected state to a connected state when the MAX BET button and the settlement button are operated, the operation of the MAX BET button is enabled first, and the process of setting a bet of 3 is executed, resulting in a bet of 3, and then the settlement button is enabled, and the gaming value of the set bet of 3 is returned to the player, resulting in a non-betting state. Note that if the harness changes from a connected state to a non-connected state before the settlement button is enabled, the same process as when the lever is operated is executed, the reels spin, and the monitor LED turns into the same state as when the lever is operated.

In addition, when the harness is in a non-betting state and disconnected, if the harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the 1 bet button and the settlement button are operated, the operation of the 1 bet button becomes effective first and a process for setting a bet of 1 is executed, after which the operation of the settlement button becomes effective and the gaming value of the set bet of 1 is returned to the player, and the non-betting state is resumed.

In addition, when the harness is in a non-betting state and disconnected, if the harness changes from a non-connected state to a connected state while the MAX BET button, 1 BET button, and settlement button are operated, the operation of the MAX BET button becomes effective first, the process of setting the bet of 3 is executed, and the state becomes a 3-bet state, after which the operation of the settlement button becomes effective, and the gaming value of the set bet of 3 is returned to the player, and the state becomes a non-betting state, and the operation of the 1 BET button does not become effective.

In addition, when connecting a single harness bundling the signal lines of the MAX BET button, settlement button, and 1 BET button to the relay board, the harness may be arranged in the following order from terminal number 1: MAX BET sensor signal line, power line, ground line, start lever sensor signal line, power line, ground line, settlement button signal line, ground line, power line, 1 BET sensor signal line, ground line, or as a modified example, from terminal number 1: settlement button signal line, ground line, power line, LED signal line, MAX BET sensor signal line, ground line, 1 BET sensor signal line, ground line.

In addition, when connecting a single harness bundling the signal lines of the MAX BET button and 1 BET button to the relay board, the harness may be arranged in the following order from terminal number 1 to a ground line, a MAX BET sensor signal line, a power line, a 1 BET sensor signal line, and a ground line.

Also, while an example has been given in which the MAX BET button has a higher priority than the 1 BET button, the 1 BET button may have a higher priority than the MAX BET button. In this case, when the harness is in a non-betting state and disconnected, if the MAX BET button and the 1 BET button are operated and the harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state, the operation of the 1 BET button becomes effective and a process for setting the number of bets to 1 is executed, resulting in a 1 BET state. If the harness then changes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the reels do not spin, but the monitor LEDs become the same as when the lever is operated, and the same process as when the lever is operated is not executed, and the harness is again When the harness goes from a disconnected state to a connected state, the operation of the 1 bet button becomes effective, a process to set a bet of 1 is executed, and the state becomes 2 bets; when the harness then goes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the reels do not spin, but the monitor LEDs become the same as when the lever is operated; when the harness goes from a disconnected state to a connected state again, the operation of the 1 bet button becomes effective, a process to set a bet of 1 is executed, and the state becomes 3 bets; when the harness then goes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the same process as when the lever is operated is executed, the reels spin, and the monitor LEDs become the same as when the lever is operated.

[Example of behavior when the menu button harness is disconnected]
Below, an example of the operation when the menu button unit harness HC1 is disconnected and reconnected will be described using Figure 190 (a).

In FIG. 190(a), from a state where the menu display (a screen for customizing the performance settings) is being executed, the following operations are performed in order: unplugging the menu button unit harness HC1, pressing all the menu buttons, connecting the menu button unit harness HC1, unplugging the menu button unit harness HC1, connecting the menu button unit harness HC1, unplugging the menu button unit harness HC1, and connecting the menu button unit harness HC1. Note that explanations of parts that overlap with those explained in FIG. 186(a) will be omitted. In FIG. 190(a), the front door 102 is in an open state to check the operation of the gaming machine, and the corresponding door sensor also detects the open state. Each harness shown in FIG. 185 is provided in a position that can be seen inside the gaming machine with the door in the open state.

First, in the initial state, the effect settings are being customized (before the game starts), the effect image display device 157 is displaying a menu, the speakers 272 and 277 are outputting menu background music, and the various lamps 420 are in a menu illumination mode.

Next, the menu button unit harness HC1 is disconnected, but this does not cause any change in state. Furthermore, the menu button unit harness HC1 is connected while all the menu buttons (here, the up, down, left, right and OK buttons) are pressed. In this case, one of the pressed menu buttons is accepted according to priority. In this example, the operation of the left direction button, which has the highest priority, is valid. This operation causes the performance image display device 157 to display a fourth display in which the cursor on the menu screen moves to the left, a fourth sound (performance corresponding to the fourth display) is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 to have a fourth light emission mode (performance corresponding to the fourth display). Note that here, multiple menu buttons are pressed when the menu button unit harness HC1 is connected, but if one menu button is pressed, the operation of that button is accepted, and if none of the menu buttons are pressed, no operation is executed.

Next, with all menu buttons pressed, the menu button unit harness HC1 is unplugged and then reconnected. In this case, one of the pressed menu buttons is accepted according to priority. In this example, the operation of the left direction button, which has the highest priority, is valid. This operation causes the performance image display device 157 to display a fifth display in which the cursor on the menu screen moves further to the left, a fifth sound (performance corresponding to the fifth display) is output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 go into a fifth light emission mode (performance corresponding to the fifth display).

In the above example, each time the menu button unit harness HC1 is disconnected and reconnected while all the menu buttons are pressed, the operation of the left direction button, which has the highest priority, becomes effective, and the cursor on the menu screen moves to the left. The movement of the cursor by this operation can be circular, such as when the cursor moves to the end and then reappears from the end in the opposite direction, or non-circular, in which the cursor moves to the end and does not move any further. The right edge of FIG. 190(a) shows that the fourth display and the related performance are executed again due to the circular movement of the cursor by the above operation. In contrast, FIG. 190(b) shows an example of the case where the cursor moves non-circularly by the above operation. In this example, only the state of the right edge is different from FIG. 190(a), and it shows that the fifth display and the related performance are maintained because the cursor no longer moves due to the above operation.

Furthermore, we will explain examples of operations related to the above.

For example, suppose that the menu button unit harness HC1 is connected while the left and right buttons are operated when the normal background is displayed and the menu button unit harness HC1 is not connected. In this case, the left button has a higher priority than the right button, so only the left button operation is valid. If the left button corresponds to the operation of lowering the volume by one step and the right button corresponds to the operation of raising the volume by one step, the process of lowering the volume by one step is executed as a result, and the volume display is lowered by one step. If the menu button unit harness HC1 is repeatedly connected and disconnected in this state (when both the left and right buttons are operated), the volume will be lowered by one step each time it is connected. Then, when the volume reaches the minimum, the volume is maintained at the same level and the volume display is also displayed in the same way. Note that in the above example, the case where the left button corresponds to the operation of lowering the volume by one step was described, but if the left button corresponds to the operation of raising the volume by one step, the volume will be raised by one step each time the menu button unit harness HC1 is repeatedly connected and disconnected, and eventually it will reach the maximum volume. Also, in the above example, a case was described where the process corresponding to the left directional button, which has a higher priority, is executed, but the priority is not particularly limited, and the right directional button may have a higher priority, or the up and down directional buttons may have a higher (or lower) priority.

For example, when the operation history screen (displayed by operating the Enter button in the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode) is displayed, operating the right direction button switches to the next page, and operating the left direction button switches to the previous page. Also, operating the left direction button when the first page is displayed displays the last page, and operating the right direction button when the last page is displayed returns to the first page. In this configuration, when the operation history screen is displayed and the menu button unit harness HC1 is not connected, the menu button unit harness HC1 is connected while operating the left and right direction buttons. In this case, since the left direction button has a higher priority than the right direction button, only the operation of the left direction button is valid, and as a result, the displayed page switches to the previous page. In this case, if the menu button unit harness HC1 is connected when the first page is displayed, the last page will be displayed. In the above example, the left button corresponds to the operation of switching to the previous page, but if it corresponds to the operation of switching to the next page, the pages will switch in order by repeatedly connecting and disconnecting the menu button unit harness HC1, and will eventually return to the first page from the last page. In the above example, the process corresponding to the left button, which has a high priority, is executed, but the priority is not particularly limited, and the right button may have a higher priority, or the up and down buttons may have a higher (or lower) priority.

Here, we will explain the wiring example and priority relationship of the menu button unit. Figure 191 shows an example of wiring of the menu button unit.

Figure 191 shows an example of wiring from the menu button unit harness HC1 to the menu button unit 900U. This figure shows five switches SW1 to SW5 and an LED element SW3L on the menu button unit 900U. The first switch SW1 is assigned to the left button, the second switch SW2 to the up button, the third switch SW3 to the confirm button, the fourth switch SW4 to the down button, and the fifth switch SW5 to the right button. The LED element SW3L is designed to emit light when the third switch SW3 is energized.

In this wiring example, the priority of operations is determined in the order of the wiring numbers. In this example, the order from highest priority is the left button, the up button, the confirm button, the down button, and the right button. For example, the left button (first switch SW1) has a wiring number of 2, and the up button (second switch SW2) has a wiring number of 3, so if the menu button unit harness HC1 is connected while these buttons are operated, processing will be executed according to the operation of the left button.

In addition, in this wiring example, the ground wire runs around the outside to prevent noise. Also, the high-potential wire (for example, 12V wire number 5) is on the innermost side. This is just one example, and for example, the signal wire corresponding to the button operation may be arranged inside the power wire and ground wire (one set of three wires), and if there is a corresponding light-emitting element, the wire for that may be included within this enclosure, or may be arranged outside the enclosure.

In the above example, for example, when replacing the menu button unit 900U, by connecting the menu button unit harness HC1 while holding down the menu button, it is possible to check whether the replaced menu button unit 900U is operating normally based on the presence or absence of the corresponding operation.

In the above configuration, the operation when the harness is connected is described as an operation on the menu screen, but this operation is not limited to an operation on the menu screen and may be an operation during play, and various operations can be applied. In particular, if this operation is visible inside the gaming machine with the door open, the burden of maintenance work may be reduced. Furthermore, such an operation may be executed by a process different from the error processing. In this case, the operation can be checked without using error processing.

[Example of behavior when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub control board is disconnected]
Below, using Figure 192 (a), we will explain an example of the operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected and reconnected.

In this embodiment, power is supplied to the sub-control board 400B from the power supply PS via the main control board 300B and the harness HE1. When the harness HE1 is disconnected, power is no longer supplied to the sub-control board 400B. At this time, power stored in an electrolytic capacitor provided on the sub-control board 400B is supplied, and the sub-control board 400B is maintained in operation during that time. When this power supply stops, the sub-control board 400B is in a power-off state. FIG. 192(a) shows the changes from when the harness HE1 is disconnected to when the sub-control board 400B is in a power-off state during the period from timing T1 to T2. Note that the main control board 300B is provided with a monitor LED for checking the state of the power supply, but since the power supply to the main control board 300B is maintained regardless of the connection state of the harness HE1, this monitor LED remains lit.

After the sub-control board 400B is disconnected as described above, when the harness HE1 is reconnected, power is supplied from the power supply PS via the harness HE1. At this time, the electrolytic capacitor of the sub-control board 400B stores electricity again, temporarily increasing the power consumption. In addition, the voltage on the main control board 300B side temporarily drops, but if it falls below the operating voltage of the main control board 300B, a reset process is executed on the main control board 300B (same as turning the power off and on again). When this reset process is executed, the main control board 300B transitions to a setting confirmation mode in which the current setting value can be confirmed. In addition, if the setting key provided inside the game machine is in the ON state when the reset process is executed, the main control board 300B transitions to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed. In FIG. 192(a), these changes are shown after timing T2. Note that the power supply to the main control board 300B is maintained regardless of the connection status of the harness HE1, so the monitor LED remains lit.

Here, assume that the period from when the harness HE1 becomes disconnected until when it becomes connected again is short, and while the power stored in the electrolytic capacitor provided in the sub-control board 400B is being supplied, the harness HE1 becomes connected again. In this case, the sub-control board 400B does not enter a power cut state (it continues to operate without restarting). Also, if the power consumed while the harness HE1 is disconnected is small, the amount of charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor when the harness HE1 becomes connected again may be small, and the voltage drop in the main control board 300B may not fall below the operating voltage and the operation may continue (the reset process may not be executed). In FIG. 192(b), an example is shown in which the harness HE1 becomes connected again at timing T4 while the power stored in the electrolytic capacitor provided in the sub-control board 400B is being supplied after the harness becomes disconnected at timing T3, and both the main control board 300B and the sub-control board 400B continue to operate. In this example, the electrolytic capacitor of the sub-control board 400B stores electricity again, which temporarily increases power consumption and temporarily reduces the voltage on the main control board 300B side, but the amount of change is smaller than in the example of Figure 192(a). Also, unlike the example of Figure 192(a), it is shown that the main control board 300B has not been reset after timing T4.

In the above configuration, the main control board 300B can be reset by disconnecting the harness HE1, waiting a while, and then reconnecting it. On the other hand, if you do not want to reset the main control board 300B, you can prevent it from being reset by disconnecting the harness HE1 and immediately reconnecting it.

[Technical idea corresponding to the embodiment related to the harness]
The technical ideas described in the description of Figures 185 to 192 will be described below with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
a first operating unit (e.g., a start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a lever unit harness HA1);
A gaming machine capable of executing a first process (for example, starting a reel spin) based on an operation of the first operation unit,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating unit is not being operated, the first process may be executed (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When the first harness of the first operating unit is disconnected during pre-shipment inspection at the factory or during replacement, cleaning, or maintenance of the first operating unit at the gaming parlor, the first process is executed, making it possible to confirm that the first operating unit is operating normally. Also, by executing the first process, it is possible to know that the first harness has been disconnected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the operation of the first operating unit can be checked based on whether or not a first process, which may be executed during play, is being executed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine allows you to check the operation of the first control unit without using a dedicated error processing system.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When a certain condition (e.g., a bet that allows a game to be started) is satisfied and the first harness is changed from a connected state to a disconnected state in a state in which the first operating unit is not operated, the first process is executed;
When the certain condition is not satisfied and the first operating part is not operated and the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the first process is not executed (see [Operation example (1) when the lever unit harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can also check whether a certain condition is met when the first harness becomes disconnected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A second operation unit (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132) is provided,
When the second operating portion is operated, the certain condition may be satisfied (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it is also possible to check whether the second operating section has been operated when the first harness is disconnected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
a second board (e.g., a relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (e.g., a harness HB1);
Notification means (for example, a performance image display device 157),
The notification means may execute a connection error notification (e.g., a third display) when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (see [Operation example (1) when the harness between the main control board and the relay board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the connection status of the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by a notification from the notification means.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A third operation unit (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) is provided which is connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
a first operating unit (e.g., a start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a lever unit harness HA1);
A gaming machine capable of executing a first process (for example, starting a reel spin) based on an operation of the first operation unit,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating part is not being operated, the first process may be executed (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating part is being operated and the first process based on the operation is not being executed, the first process is not executed (see [Operation Example (3) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (4) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When the first harness of the first operating unit is disconnected during pre-shipment inspection at the factory or when the first operating unit is replaced at an amusement parlor, the first process is executed, making it possible to confirm that the first operating unit is operating normally. Also, by executing the first process, it is possible to know that the first harness has been disconnected. Also, when the first operating unit is in an operating state, the first notification is not executed even if the first harness is disconnected, so it may be possible to notice that the first operating unit is being operated due to contact with some member.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the operation of the first operating unit can be checked based on whether or not a first process, which may be executed during play, is being executed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine allows you to check the operation of the first control unit without using a dedicated error processing system.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When a certain condition (e.g., a bet that allows a game to be started) is satisfied and the first harness is changed from a connected state to a disconnected state in a state in which the first operating unit is not operated, the first process is executed;
When the certain condition is not satisfied and the first operating part is not operated and the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the first process is not executed (see [Operation example (1) when the lever unit harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can also check whether a certain condition is met when the first harness becomes disconnected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A second operation unit (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132) is provided,
When the second operating portion is operated, the certain condition may be satisfied (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it is also possible to check whether the second operating section has been operated when the first harness is disconnected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
a second board (e.g., a relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (e.g., a harness HB1);
Notification means (for example, a performance image display device 157),
The notification means may execute a connection error notification (e.g., a third display) when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (see [Operation example (1) when the harness between the main control board and the relay board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the connection status of the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by a notification from the notification means.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A third operation unit (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) is provided which is connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
A light emitting means (e.g., a monitor LED for a lever);
a first operating unit (e.g., a start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a lever unit harness HA1);
A gaming machine capable of executing a first process (for example, starting a reel spin) based on an operation of the first operation unit,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating unit is not being operated, the first process may be executed (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
the light emitting means is a means that emits light in different manners when the first operation unit is operated and when it is not operated, and when the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation unit is not being operated, the light emitting means emits light in the same manner as when the first operation unit is operated (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]);
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When the first harness of the first operating unit is disconnected during pre-shipment inspection at the factory or when the first operating unit is replaced at an amusement arcade, the first process is executed, making it possible to confirm that the first operating unit is operating normally. Also, by executing the first process, it is possible to know that the first harness has been disconnected. Also, the operation of the light emitting means can be confirmed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the operation of the first operating unit can be checked based on whether or not a first process, which may be executed during play, is being executed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine allows you to check the operation of the first control unit without using a dedicated error processing system.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When a certain condition (e.g., a bet that allows a game to be started) is satisfied and the first harness is changed from a connected state to a disconnected state in a state in which the first operating unit is not operated, the first process is executed;
When the certain condition is not satisfied and the first operating part is not operated and the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the first process is not executed (see [Operation example (1) when the lever unit harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can also check whether a certain condition is met when the first harness becomes disconnected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A second operation unit (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132) is provided,
When the second operating portion is operated, the certain condition may be satisfied (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it is also possible to check whether the second operating section has been operated when the first harness is disconnected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
a second board (e.g., a relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (e.g., a harness HB1);
Notification means (for example, a performance image display device 157),
The notification means may execute a connection error notification (e.g., a third display) when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (see [Operation example (1) when the harness between the main control board and the relay board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the connection status of the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by a notification from the notification means.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A third operation unit (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) is provided which is connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
a first operating unit (e.g., a start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a lever unit harness HA1);
A movable body (e.g., reels 110 to 112),
A gaming machine capable of executing a first process (for example, starting a reel spin) based on an operation of the first operation unit,
When the first harness is changed from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating unit is not being operated, the first process may be executed.
The first process is a process of operating the movable body (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When the first harness of the first operating unit is disconnected during pre-shipment inspection at the factory or when the first operating unit is replaced at an amusement arcade, the first process is executed, making it possible to confirm that the first operating unit is operating normally. Also, by executing the first process, it is possible to know that the first harness has been disconnected. Also, the operation of the movable body can be checked.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the operation of the first operating unit can be checked based on whether or not a first process, which may be executed during play, is being executed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine allows you to check the operation of the first control unit without using a dedicated error processing system.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When a certain condition (e.g., a bet that allows a game to be started) is satisfied and the first harness is changed from a connected state to a disconnected state in a state in which the first operating unit is not operated, the first process is executed;
When the certain condition is not satisfied and the first operating part is not operated and the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the first process is not executed (see [Operation example (1) when the lever unit harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can also check whether a certain condition is met when the first harness becomes disconnected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A second operation unit (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132) is provided,
When the second operating portion is operated, the certain condition may be satisfied (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it is also possible to check whether the second operating section has been operated when the first harness is disconnected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
a second board (e.g., a relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (e.g., a harness HB1);
Notification means (for example, a performance image display device 157),
The notification means may execute a connection error notification (e.g., a third display) when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (see [Operation example (1) when the harness between the main control board and the relay board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the connection status of the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by a notification from the notification means.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A third operation unit (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) is provided which is connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
a first operating unit (e.g., a start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a lever unit harness HA1);
A gaming machine capable of executing a first process (for example, starting a reel spin) based on an operation of the first operation unit,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating unit is not being operated, the first process may be executed (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]), and the manner in which the first process is executed can be confirmed inside the gaming machine with the door open,
The first harness is provided at a position that can be confirmed inside the gaming machine when the door is open (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When the first harness of the first operating unit is disconnected during pre-shipment inspection at the factory or when the first operating unit is replaced at an amusement parlor, the first process is executed, making it possible to confirm that the first operating unit is operating normally. Also, by executing the first process, it is possible to know that the first harness has been disconnected. Also, it becomes easier for an operator to operate the first harness with the door open and to confirm the operation due to the first process.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the operation of the first operating unit can be checked based on whether or not a first process, which may be executed during play, is being executed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine allows you to check the operation of the first control unit without using a dedicated error processing system.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When a certain condition (e.g., a bet that allows a game to be started) is satisfied and the first harness is changed from a connected state to a disconnected state in a state in which the first operating unit is not operated, the first process is executed;
When the certain condition is not satisfied and the first operating part is not operated and the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the first process is not executed (see [Operation example (1) when the lever unit harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can also check whether a certain condition is met when the first harness becomes disconnected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A second operation unit (e.g., bet buttons 130, 132) is provided,
When the second operating portion is operated, the certain condition may be satisfied (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it is also possible to check whether the second operating section has been operated when the first harness is disconnected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
a second board (e.g., a relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (e.g., a harness HB1);
Notification means (for example, a performance image display device 157),
The notification means may execute a connection error notification (e.g., a third display) when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (see [Operation example (1) when the harness between the main control board and the relay board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the connection status of the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by a notification from the notification means.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A third operation unit (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) is provided which is connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B, a sub-control board 400B),
a first operation unit (e.g., a stop button unit 136U, a menu button unit 900U) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a stop button unit harness HA2, a menu button unit harness HC1);
A gaming machine equipped with
The first operation unit has a first operation part and a second operation part (e.g., a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, a left direction button and an up direction button),
A first process (e.g., stopping the left reel 110, moving the cursor left) may be executed by operating the first operation unit,
A second process (e.g., stopping the center reel 111, moving the cursor up) may be executed by operating the second operation unit.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the first operating unit is being operated, the first process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are being operated, only the first process out of the first process and the second process may be executed (see [Example of Operation When Multiple Harnesses are Disconnected] and [Example of Operation When Menu Button Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When the first harness of the first operation unit is connected during pre-shipment inspection at the factory or when the first operation unit is replaced at an amusement arcade, the first process is executed, thereby making it possible to confirm that the first operation unit is operating normally. Also, if the second process is executed without executing the first process, a break in the wiring of the first operation unit may be noticed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are unplugged] and [Example of operation when the menu button harness is unplugged]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the operation of the first operating unit can be confirmed by checking whether or not a first process, which may be executed during play, is being executed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected] and [Example of operation when menu button harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine allows you to check the operation of the first operating unit without using a dedicated error processing system.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating unit is not operated, the first process is not executed,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the second operation unit is not operated, the second process is not executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected] and [Example of operation when menu button harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the first process may not be executed when the first harness is disconnected, making it easier to check the first operating unit.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the first operating unit is not operated, the first process is not executed,
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is not operated, the second process is not executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected] and [Example of operation when menu button harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the first process may not be executed when the first harness is disconnected, making it easier to check the first operating unit.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first operation unit has a third operation part (e.g., a right stop button 139, a right direction button),
A third process (e.g., stopping the right reel 112, moving the cursor to the right) may be executed by operating the third operation unit.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the third operation unit is being operated, the third process may be executed.
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the second operation unit and the third operation unit are being operated, only the second process out of the second process and the third process may be executed (see [Example of Operation When Multiple Harnesses are Disconnected] and [Example of Operation When Menu Button Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When replacing the first operation unit in this gaming machine, it may be possible to confirm that the first operation unit is functioning normally by executing the second process.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
when a certain condition (e.g., a reel is spinning) is satisfied and the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first operating unit and the second operating unit are being operated, only the first process out of the first process and the second process is executed;
When a certain condition is not satisfied and the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first operating unit and the second operating unit are being operated, the first process is not executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can also check whether a certain condition is met when the first harness is connected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When a predetermined operation part (e.g., a start lever 135) different from the operation part belonging to the first operation unit is operated, the certain condition may be satisfied.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it is also possible to check whether a specific operating part has been operated when the first harness is connected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
a second board (e.g., a relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (e.g., a harness HB1);
Notification means (for example, a performance image display device 157),
The notification means may execute a connection error notification (e.g., a third display) when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (see [Operation example (1) when the harness between the main control board and the relay board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the connection status of the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by a notification from the notification means.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A second operation unit (e.g., a lever unit 135U) having an operation portion and connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness is provided.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
A first operation unit (e.g., a menu button unit 900U) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a menu button unit harness HC1),
the first operation unit has a first operation part and a second operation part (e.g., a left button and an up button);
A first process (e.g., moving a cursor left) may be executed by operating the first operation unit,
A second process (e.g., moving a cursor up) may be executed by operating the second operation unit,
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the first operating unit is being operated, the first process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are being operated, there is a case where only the first process of the first process and the second process is executed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]),
In a situation where the first harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state after the first case and then goes back to the first case, the output result of the first process in the previous first case may differ from the output result of the first process in the subsequent first case (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected], FIG. 190(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When the first harness of the first operation unit is connected during pre-shipment inspection at the factory or when the first operation unit is replaced at an amusement arcade, the first process is executed, making it possible to confirm that the first operation unit is operating normally. Also, if the second process is executed without executing the first process, it may be possible to notice a break in the wiring of the first operation unit. Also, the operation of the first operation unit can be confirmed by checking whether the output results from the first process are different.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the operation of the first operating unit can be confirmed by checking whether or not a first process, which may be executed during play, is being executed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected] and [Example of operation when menu button harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine allows you to check the operation of the first operating unit without using a dedicated error processing system.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating unit is not operated, the first process is not executed,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the second operation unit is not being operated, the second process is not executed (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the first process may not be executed when the first harness is disconnected, making it easier to check the first operating unit.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the first operating unit is not operated, the first process is not executed,
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is not being operated, the second process is not executed (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the first process may not be executed when the first harness is disconnected, making it easier to check the first operating unit.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first operation unit has a third operation part (e.g., a right direction button);
A third process (e.g., moving a cursor right) may be executed by operating the third operation unit,
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the third operation unit is being operated, the third process may be executed.
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the second operation unit and the third operation unit are being operated, only the second process out of the second process and the third process may be executed (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When replacing the first operation unit in this gaming machine, it may be possible to confirm that the first operation unit is functioning normally by executing the second process.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
A first operation unit (e.g., a menu button unit 900U) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a menu button unit harness HC1),
the first operation unit has a first operation part and a second operation part (e.g., a left button and an up button);
A first process (e.g., moving a cursor left) may be executed by operating the first operation unit,
A second process (e.g., moving a cursor up) may be executed by operating the second operation unit,
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the first operating unit is being operated, the first process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed.
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first operating unit and the second operating unit are being operated (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), only the first process out of the first process and the second process may be executed (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]).
In a situation where the first harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state after the first case and returns to the first case, the first process may be executed in the first case, but the first process may not be executed in the second case (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected], FIG. 190(b)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When the first harness of the first operation unit is connected during pre-shipment inspection at the factory or when the first operation unit is replaced at an amusement arcade, the first process is executed, making it possible to confirm that the first operation unit is operating normally. Also, if the second process is executed without the first process being executed, a break in the wiring of the first operation unit may be noticed. Also, the operation of the first operation unit can be confirmed by the behavior when the first process is executed and when it is not executed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the operation of the first operating unit can be confirmed by checking whether or not a first process, which may be executed during play, is being executed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected] and [Example of operation when menu button harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine allows you to check the operation of the first operating unit without using a dedicated error processing system.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating unit is not operated, the first process is not executed,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the second operation unit is not being operated, the second process is not executed (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the first process may not be executed when the first harness is disconnected, making it easier to check the first operating unit.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the first operating unit is not operated, the first process is not executed,
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is not being operated, the second process is not executed (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the first process may not be executed when the first harness is disconnected, making it easier to check the first operating unit.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first operation unit has a third operation part (e.g., a right direction button);
A third process (e.g., moving a cursor right) may be executed by operating the third operation unit,
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the third operation unit is being operated, the third process may be executed.
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the second operation unit and the third operation unit are being operated, only the second process out of the second process and the third process may be executed (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When replacing the first operation unit in this gaming machine, it may be possible to confirm that the first operation unit is functioning normally by executing the second process.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first reel and a second reel (e.g., a left reel 110 and a center reel 111) that are driven to rotate,
a first stop button (e.g., left stop button 137) for stopping the rotation of the first reel;
a second stop button (e.g., a middle stop button 138) for stopping the spinning of the second reel;
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
a stop button unit (e.g., a stop button unit 136U) having the first stop button and the second stop button and connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a stop button unit harness HA2);
A gaming machine equipped with
A first process (for example, stopping the left reel 110, changing the navigation effect) may be executed by operating the first stop button.
A second process (for example, stopping the center reel 111, changing the navigation effect) may be executed by operating the second stop button.
When the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first stop button is being operated, the first process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second stop button is operated, the second process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, there is a case where only the first process out of the first process and the second process is executed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]),
After the first case, when the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, only the second process out of the first process and the second process may be executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When inspecting before shipment at the factory or replacing the stop button unit at an amusement arcade, the first process is executed when the first harness of the stop button unit is connected, thereby making it possible to confirm that the stop button unit is operating normally. Furthermore, if the second process is executed without executing the first process, a break in the wiring of the stop button unit may be noticed. Furthermore, the operation of the stop button unit can be confirmed by stopping the reels.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are unplugged]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the operation of the stop button unit can be checked by checking whether or not a first process, which may be executed during play, is executed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine allows you to check the operation of the stop button unit without using a dedicated error processing system.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first stop button is not operated, the first process is not executed,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the second stop button is not operated, the second process is not executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the first process may not be executed when the first harness is disconnected, making it easier to check the first operating unit.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first stop button is not operated, the first process is not executed,
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second stop button is not operated, the second process is not executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the first process may not be executed when the first harness is disconnected, making it easier to check the first operating unit.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
when a certain condition (for example, a reel is spinning) is satisfied and the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, only the first process out of the first process and the second process is executed;
When a certain condition is not satisfied and both the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, the first process is not executed when the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can also check whether a certain condition is met when the first harness is connected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When a predetermined operation unit (e.g., a start lever 135) other than the operation unit belonging to the stop button unit is operated, the certain condition may be satisfied.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it is also possible to check whether a specific operating part has been operated when the first harness is connected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
a second board (e.g., a relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (e.g., a harness HB1);
Notification means (for example, a performance image display device 157),
The notification means may execute a connection error notification (e.g., a third display) when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (see [Operation example (1) when the harness between the main control board and the relay board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the connection status of the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by a notification from the notification means.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A second operation unit (e.g., a lever unit 135U) having an operation portion and connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness is provided.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first reel and a second reel (e.g., a left reel 110 and a center reel 111) that are driven to rotate,
a first stop button (e.g., left stop button 137) for stopping the rotation of the first reel;
a second stop button (e.g., a middle stop button 138) for stopping the spinning of the second reel;
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
a stop button unit (e.g., a stop button unit 136U) having the first stop button and the second stop button and connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a stop button unit harness HA2);
A gaming machine equipped with
A first process (for example, stopping the left reel 110, changing the navigation effect) may be executed by operating the first stop button.
A second process (for example, stopping the center reel 111, changing the navigation effect) may be executed by operating the second stop button.
When the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first stop button is being operated, the first process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second stop button is operated, the second process may be executed.
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first reel is not out of step and while both the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, only the first process out of the first process and the second process may be executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]).
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first reel is out of step and both the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, only the second process out of the first process and the second process may be executed (see FIG. 189(b) [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When inspecting before shipment at the factory or replacing the stop button unit at an amusement arcade, the first process is executed when the first harness of the stop button unit is connected, thereby making it possible to confirm that the stop button unit is operating normally. Furthermore, if the second process is executed without executing the first process, a break in the wiring of the stop button unit may be noticed. Furthermore, by stopping the reels, it is possible to check the operation of the stop button unit and the condition of the reels.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process may be executed during a game (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are unplugged]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the operation of the stop button unit can be checked by checking whether or not a first process, which may be executed during play, is executed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process is a process different from the error process (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine allows you to check the operation of the stop button unit without using a dedicated error processing system.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first stop button is not operated, the first process is not executed,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the second stop button is not operated, the second process is not executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the first process may not be executed when the first harness is disconnected, making it easier to check the first operating unit.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first stop button is not operated, the first process is not executed,
When the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second stop button is not operated, the second process is not executed (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the first process may not be executed when the first harness is disconnected, making it easier to check the first operating unit.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
when a certain condition (for example, a reel is spinning) is satisfied and the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, only the first process out of the first process and the second process is executed;
When a certain condition is not satisfied and both the first stop button and the second stop button are operated, the first process is not executed when the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can also check whether a certain condition is met when the first harness is connected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When a predetermined operation unit (e.g., a start lever 135) other than the operation unit belonging to the stop button unit is operated, the certain condition may be satisfied.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it is also possible to check whether a specific operating part has been operated when the first harness is connected.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
a second board (e.g., a relay board RB1) connected to the first board via a second harness (e.g., a harness HB1);
Notification means (for example, a performance image display device 157),
The notification means may execute a connection error notification (e.g., a third display) when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (see [Operation example (1) when the harness between the main control board and the relay board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the connection status of the first harness and the second harness can be distinguished by a notification from the notification means.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A second operation unit (e.g., a lever unit 135U) having an operation portion and connected to the first board via a harness different from the first harness is provided.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first control board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
A second control board (e.g., a sub-control board 400B),
A gaming machine equipped with
the first control board is electrically connected to the second control board via a first harness (e.g., harness HE1);
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the first control board maintains an activated state,
If the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state after the first case (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"), the first control board may be reset (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When the first harness goes from a disconnected state to a connected state during pre-shipment inspection at the factory or part replacement at an amusement arcade, the first control board is reset, allowing the first control board to operate normally.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first control board includes a light emitting means (e.g., a monitor LED);
Even in the first case, the light emitting means continues to emit light (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, it is possible to confirm that the first control board is in an activated state.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
Even if the second case occurs while the light emitting means continues to emit light, the light emitting means continues to emit light (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it is possible to confirm that the first control board is in a powered state even while being reset.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
If the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state before a first time period (e.g., the time period when the amount of charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor falls below the amount that can maintain the operating voltage of the main control board 300B) has elapsed since the first case occurred, the first control board is not reset (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the first control board can be reset depending on the situation.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first control board (e.g., a main control board 300B) having a predetermined operation means (e.g., a setting key) and controlling the progress of a game;
A second control board (e.g., a sub-control board 400B),
A gaming machine equipped with
the first control board is electrically connected to the second control board via a first harness (e.g., harness HE1);
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the first control board maintains an activated state,
If the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state after the first case (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"), the first control board may be reset (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected]).
If the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the specified operating means is operated after the first case, the first control board may transition to a state based on the operation of the specified operating means (e.g., a setting confirmation mode or a setting change mode) (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When the first harness goes from a disconnected state to a connected state during pre-shipment inspection at the factory or part replacement at the gaming parlor, the first control board is reset, allowing the first control board to operate normally. In addition, the gaming machine can be transitioned to a state based on the operation of a specified operating means while remaining in a powered state.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first control board includes a light emitting means (e.g., a monitor LED);
Even in the first case, the light emitting means continues to emit light (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, it is possible to confirm that the first control board is in an activated state.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
Even if the second case occurs while the light emitting means continues to emit light, the light emitting means continues to emit light (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it is possible to confirm that the first control board is in a powered state even while being reset.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
If the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state before a first time period (e.g., the time period when the amount of charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor falls below the amount that can maintain the operating voltage of the main control board 300B) has elapsed since the first case occurred, the first control board is not reset (see [Example of operation when the harness connecting the main control board and the sub-control board is disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the first control board can be reset depending on the situation.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
a first operating unit (e.g., a start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a lever unit harness HA1);
A second operation unit (e.g., a bet button 132) connected to the first board via a second harness (e.g., a bet button unit harness HA3);
A gaming machine capable of executing a first process (for example, starting a reel spin) based on an operation of the first operation unit,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating unit is not being operated, the first process may be executed (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
A second process (e.g., a process for setting a bet amount) can be executed based on an operation of the second operation unit,
When the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the second operating unit is not operated, the second process is not executed ([Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected], see FIGS. 189(a) and 189(b) ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine makes it easier for game store staff to recognize the behavior of the two operating parts, and may also enable game store staff to notice if the harness is connected incorrectly.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process may be executed in a state in which the second process is executed.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, even if a malfunction occurs in the first harness after a malfunction occurs in the second harness, the first process is not executed, so the player is not disadvantaged.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
Equipped with a light emitting means (e.g., a lever monitor LED),
the light emitting means is means for emitting light in different manners depending on whether the first operating unit is operated or not operated when the first harness is in a connected state,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation unit is not being operated, the light emitting means changes to the same light emitting mode as when the first operation unit is operated while the first harness is in the connected state (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating part is being operated and the first process based on the operation is not being executed, the first process is not executed (see [Operation Example (3) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (4) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation part is being operated and the first process based on the operation is not being executed, the light emitting means changes to the same light emitting mode as when the first operation part is operated while the first harness is in the connected state (see [Operation Example (3) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (4) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, a malfunction of the harness or the first operating unit may be inferred based on the illumination state of the illumination means and whether or not the first process is being executed.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
a first operating unit (e.g., a start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a lever unit harness HA1);
An operation unit (e.g., a stop button unit 136U, a bet button unit 132U) connected to the first board via a second harness (e.g., a stop button unit harness HA2, a bet button unit harness HA3),
A gaming machine capable of executing a first process (for example, starting a reel spin) based on an operation of the first operation unit,
The operation unit has a second operation part and a third operation part (e.g., a left stop button 137 and a middle stop button 138, or bet buttons 130, 132),
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating unit is not being operated, the first process may be executed (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
A second process (e.g., stopping the reels in response to a stop button, setting a bet amount) can be executed based on an operation of the second operation unit,
A third process (e.g., stopping the reels in response to a stop button, setting a bet amount) can be executed based on an operation of the third operation unit,
When the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the second operating unit is not operated, the second process is not executed ([Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected], see FIGS. 189(a) and 189(b) ).
When the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the third operating unit is not operated, the third process is not executed ([Example of operation when multiple harnesses are disconnected], see FIGS. 189(a) and 189(b) ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine makes it easier for game store staff to recognize the behavior of the two operating parts, and may also enable game store staff to notice if the harness is connected incorrectly.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In a state where the first process (e.g., starting the rotation of the reels) has been executed, the second process (e.g., stopping the rotation of the reels in response to a stop button) may be executed.
In a state where the first process (e.g., starting the rotation of the reels) has been executed, the third process (e.g., stopping the rotation of the reels in response to a stop button) may be executed.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, even if a malfunction occurs in the second harness after a malfunction occurs in the first harness, the second process and the third process are not executed, so the player is not disadvantaged.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
Equipped with a light emitting means (e.g., a lever monitor LED),
the light emitting means is means for emitting light in different manners depending on whether the first operating unit is operated or not operated when the first harness is in a connected state,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation unit is not being operated, the light emitting means changes to the same light emitting mode as when the first operation unit is operated while the first harness is in the connected state (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating part is being operated and the first process based on the operation is not being executed, the first process is not executed (see [Operation Example (3) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (4) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation part is being operated and the first process based on the operation is not being executed, the light emitting means changes to the same light emitting mode as when the first operation part is operated while the first harness is in the connected state (see [Operation Example (3) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (4) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, a malfunction of the harness or the first operating unit may be inferred based on the illumination state of the illumination means and whether or not the first process is being executed.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
a first operating unit (e.g., a start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a lever unit harness HA1);
A second operation unit (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) connected to the first board via a second harness (e.g., a stop button unit harness HA2);
A gaming machine capable of executing a first process (for example, starting a reel spin) based on an operation of the first operation unit,
When the first harness is changed from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating part is not being operated, the first process may be executed (see [Operation example (2) when the lever unit harness is disconnected], hereinafter referred to as the “first case”).
A second process (e.g., stopping the rotation of the reels in response to a stop button) can be executed based on an operation of the second operation unit,
When the second operating unit is operated in the first case, the second process is not executed (for example, [Operation example (2) when the lever unit harness is disconnected], see FIG. 186(c) ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

At this gaming machine, the gaming store staff may be able to notice the disconnected state of the first harness through the player.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The gaming machine has been described, which is characterized in that the second process may be executed in a state in which the first process is executed.

In this gaming machine, even if a malfunction occurs in the second harness after a malfunction occurs in the first harness, the second process is not executed, so the player is not disadvantaged.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
Equipped with a light emitting means (e.g., a lever monitor LED),
the light emitting means is means for emitting light in different manners depending on whether the first operating unit is operated or not operated when the first harness is in a connected state,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation unit is not being operated, the light emitting means changes to the same light emitting mode as when the first operation unit is operated while the first harness is in the connected state (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating part is being operated and the first process based on the operation is not being executed, the first process is not executed (see [Operation Example (3) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (4) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation part is being operated and the first process based on the operation is not being executed, the light emitting means changes to the same light emitting mode as when the first operation part is operated while the first harness is in the connected state (see [Operation Example (3) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (4) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, a malfunction of the harness or the first operating unit may be inferred based on the illumination state of the illumination means and whether or not the first process is being executed.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
a first operating unit (e.g., a start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a lever unit harness HA1);
A second operation unit (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) connected to the first board via a second harness (e.g., a stop button unit harness HA2);
A gaming machine capable of executing a first process (for example, starting a reel spin) based on an operation of the first operation unit,
When the first harness is changed from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating part is not being operated, the first process may be executed (see [Operation example (1) when the lever unit harness is disconnected], hereinafter referred to as the “first case”).
A second process (e.g., stopping the rotation of the reels in response to a stop button) can be executed based on an operation of the second operation unit,
When the second operating unit is operated in the first case, the second process may be executed (for example, [operation example (1) when the lever unit harness is disconnected], see FIG. 186(b) ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine allows game staff to check the operation of multiple control parts in stages.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
Equipped with a light emitting means (e.g., a lever monitor LED),
the light emitting means is means for emitting light in different manners depending on whether the first operating unit is operated or not operated when the first harness is in a connected state,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation unit is not being operated, the light emitting means changes to the same light emitting mode as when the first operation unit is operated while the first harness is in the connected state (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating part is being operated and the first process based on the operation is not being executed, the first process is not executed (see [Operation Example (3) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (4) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation part is being operated and the first process based on the operation is not being executed, the light emitting means changes to the same light emitting mode as when the first operation part is operated while the first harness is in the connected state (see [Operation Example (3) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (4) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, a malfunction of the harness or the first operating unit may be inferred based on the illumination state of the illumination means and whether or not the first process is being executed.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
a first operating unit (e.g., a start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a lever unit harness HA1);
A second operation unit (e.g., a bet button 132) connected to the first board via a second harness (e.g., a bet button unit harness HA3);
A gaming machine capable of executing a first process (for example, starting a reel spin) based on an operation of the first operation unit,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating unit is not being operated, the first process may be executed (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
A second process (e.g., a process for setting a bet amount) can be executed based on an operation of the second operation unit,
When the second operation unit is operated in a state in which the first operation unit is operated, the second process is executed and the first process is not executed (for example, see FIG. 187(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine allows game staff to check the operation of multiple control parts in stages.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first process may be executed in a state in which the second process is executed.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, even if a malfunction occurs in the first harness after a malfunction occurs in the second harness, the first process is not executed, so the player is not disadvantaged.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
Equipped with a light emitting means (e.g., a lever monitor LED),
the light emitting means is means for emitting light in different manners depending on whether the first operating unit is operated or not operated when the first harness is in a connected state,
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation unit is not being operated, the light emitting means changes to the same light emitting mode as when the first operation unit is operated while the first harness is in the connected state (see [Operation Example (1) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (2) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating part is being operated and the first process based on the operation is not being executed, the first process is not executed (see [Operation Example (3) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (4) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
When the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation part is being operated and the first process based on the operation is not being executed, the light emitting means changes to the same light emitting mode as when the first operation part is operated while the first harness is in the connected state (see [Operation Example (3) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected] and [Operation Example (4) When the Lever Unit Harness is Disconnected]).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, a malfunction of the harness or the first operating unit may be inferred based on the illumination state of the illumination means and whether or not the first process is being executed.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B, a sub-control board 400B),
a first operation unit (e.g., a stop button unit 136U, a menu button unit 900U) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a stop button unit harness HA2, a menu button unit harness HC1);
A gaming machine equipped with
The first operation unit has a first operation part and a second operation part (e.g., a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, a left direction button and an up direction button),
A first process (e.g., stopping the left reel 110, moving the cursor left) may be executed by operating the first operation unit,
A second process (e.g., stopping the center reel 111, moving the cursor up) may be executed by operating the second operation unit.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the first operating unit is being operated, the first process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first operating unit and the second operating unit are being operated, there is a case where only the first process of the first process and the second process is executed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are unplugged] and [Example of operation when menu button harness is unplugged]).
The first harness has a first wiring (for example, wiring number 2 in FIG. 191 ) connected to the first operating unit,
The first harness has a second wiring (for example, wiring number 3 in FIG. 191 ) connected to the second operating unit,
The first wiring has a smaller terminal number than the second wiring.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it is easy for gaming store staff to identify wiring problems if the first process is not executed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In a situation where, after the first case, the first harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state without any operation other than that of the first operation unit and the second operation unit, and then the first case is resumed, the output result of the first process in the previous first case may differ from the output result of the first process in the later first case (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is unplugged], FIG. 190(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, the output results from the first process are different, making it easier for gaming staff to check the operation.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B, a sub-control board 400B),
a first operation unit (e.g., a stop button unit 136U, a menu button unit 900U) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a stop button unit harness HA2, a menu button unit harness HC1);
A gaming machine equipped with
The first operation unit has a first operation part and a second operation part (e.g., a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, a left direction button and an up direction button),
A first process (e.g., stopping the left reel 110, moving the cursor left) may be executed by operating the first operation unit,
A second process (e.g., stopping the center reel 111, moving the cursor up) may be executed by operating the second operation unit.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the first operating unit is being operated, the first process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first operating unit and the second operating unit are being operated, there is a case where only the first process of the first process and the second process is executed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are unplugged] and [Example of operation when menu button harness is unplugged]).
The first harness has a first wiring (for example, wiring number 2 in FIG. 191 ) connected to the first operating unit,
The first harness has a second wiring (for example, wiring number 3 in FIG. 191 ) connected to the second operating unit,
The first wiring is disposed inside wiring at both ends of the first harness,
The second wiring is disposed inside the wirings at both ends of the first harness.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, if the first process is not executed, the gaming store staff can easily identify wiring problems, and can accurately check operation by inserting the wiring of the harness side connector and the wiring of the board side connector in a parallel state.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In a situation where, after the first case, the first harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state without any operation other than that of the first operation unit and the second operation unit, and then the first case is resumed, the output result of the first process in the previous first case may differ from the output result of the first process in the later first case (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is unplugged], FIG. 190(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, the output results from the first process are different, making it easier for gaming staff to check the operation.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B, a sub-control board 400B),
a first operation unit (e.g., a stop button unit 136U, a menu button unit 900U) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a stop button unit harness HA2, a menu button unit harness HC1);
A gaming machine equipped with
The first operation unit has a first operation part and a second operation part (e.g., a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, a left direction button and an up direction button),
A first process (e.g., stopping the left reel 110, moving the cursor left) may be executed by operating the first operation unit,
A second process (e.g., stopping the center reel 111, moving the cursor up) may be executed by operating the second operation unit.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the first operating unit is being operated, the first process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are being operated, there is a case where only the first process of the first process and the second process is executed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are unplugged] and [Example of operation when menu button harness is unplugged]).
The first harness has a first wiring (for example, wiring number 2 in FIG. 191 ) connected to the first operating unit,
The first wiring is disposed inside the power supply line and the ground line of the first harness (for example, a modified example in which a signal line is disposed inside the power supply line and the ground line),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, if the first process is not executed, the gaming store staff can easily identify wiring problems, and can accurately check operation by inserting the wiring of the harness side connector and the wiring of the board side connector in a parallel state.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In a situation where, after the first case, the first harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state without any operation other than that of the first operation unit and the second operation unit, and then the first case is resumed, the output result of the first process in the previous first case may differ from the output result of the first process in the later first case (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is unplugged], FIG. 190(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, the output results from the first process are different, making it easier for gaming staff to check the operation.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B, a sub-control board 400B),
a first operation unit (e.g., a menu button unit 900U) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a menu button unit harness HC1);
A gaming machine equipped with
the first operation unit has a first operation part and a second operation part (e.g., a left button and an up button);
A first process (e.g., moving a cursor left) may be executed by operating the first operation unit,
A second process (e.g., moving a cursor up) may be executed by operating the second operation unit,
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the first operating unit is being operated, the first process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first operation unit and the second operation unit are being operated, there is a case where only the first process of the first process and the second process is executed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are unplugged] and [Example of operation when menu button harness is unplugged]).
the first operation unit is a first direction button,
the second operation unit is a second directional button;
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it is easy for gaming staff to confirm that the process is being performed by operating the first directional button.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In a situation where, after the first case, the first harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state without any operation other than that of the first operation unit and the second operation unit, and then the first case is resumed, the output result of the first process in the previous first case may differ from the output result of the first process in the later first case (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is unplugged], FIG. 190(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, the output results from the first process are different, making it easier for gaming staff to check the operation.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B, a sub-control board 400B),
a first operation unit (e.g., a menu button unit 900U) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., a menu button unit harness HC1);
A gaming machine equipped with
the first operation unit has a first operation part and a second operation part (e.g., a left direction button and a right direction button);
A first process (e.g., moving a cursor left) may be executed by operating the first operation unit,
A second process (e.g., moving a cursor right) may be executed by operating the second operation unit,
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the first operating unit is being operated, the first process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a non-connected state to a connected state while the second operation unit is being operated, the second process may be executed.
When the first harness is changed from a disconnected state to a connected state while both the first operating unit and the second operating unit are being operated, there is a case where only the first process of the first process and the second process is executed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") (see [Example of operation when multiple harnesses are unplugged] and [Example of operation when menu button harness is unplugged]).
the first operation unit is a first direction button,
the second operation unit is a second directional button,
When the second process is executed after the first process is executed, the state before the first process is executed may be restored.
When the first process is executed after the second process is executed, the state before the second process is executed may be restored.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it is easy for gaming staff to confirm that the process is being performed by operating the first directional button.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In a situation where, after the first case, the first harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state without any operation other than that of the first operation unit and the second operation unit, and then the first case is resumed, the output result of the first process in the previous first case may differ from the output result of the first process in the later first case (see [Example of operation when the menu button harness is unplugged], FIG. 190(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, the output results from the first process are different, making it easier for gaming staff to check the operation.

<Caution notices for reels>
Next, an example of the operation during reel rotation will be described with reference to Figures 193 to 202. In the following description, the same reference numerals will be used for configurations already described in other embodiments (e.g., Figures 166 to 182), and the description will be omitted. In addition, for configurations that contradict the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and reference numerals of this example will take precedence.

[Example of normal game action]
Fig. 193 is a diagram showing the flow of operations in a normal game. In this diagram, operations are performed in the following order: bet operation, lever operation, left stop operation, center stop operation, and right stop operation. Note that the front door 102 is in a closed state throughout all operations, and the corresponding door sensor also detects the closed state.

First, when a bet operation is performed, the number of bets required to start playing is placed. This stage is before the game is started by lever operation (reels are stopped), and the normal background is displayed on the performance image display device 157 (display means), normal background music is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 are in the normal light emission mode. In addition, the lever monitor LED provided on the board of the main control unit 300 is in the first mode (lighting or turning off, a mode different from the second mode described below). This lever monitor LED is in the second mode when the start lever 135 is pressed down, and is provided to check the state of the start lever 135. Note that the lever monitor LED is not limited to being provided on the board of the main control unit 300, and may be provided, for example, on the relay board between the lever and the main control unit.

Next, when the start lever 135 is operated and changes from a non-pressed state to a pressed state, a signal of this change is received and the game begins (the reels start spinning). At this time, the effect image display device 157 starts a first display (for example, an operation instruction display (push order navigation, aim for XX), a small win suggestion display, a preview display, etc.), the speakers 272, 277 start outputting a first sound (effect corresponding to the first display), and the various lamps 420 go into a first light emission state (effect corresponding to the first display). In addition, the lever monitor LED goes into a second state (lit or unlit, a state different from the first state).

Next, when a left stop operation is performed as a first stop operation, the corresponding reel comes to a stop state, and a first stop sound corresponding to the first stop operation is output from the speakers 272, 277. Note that the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission state. Also, the lever monitor LED is in the first state.

Next, when a middle stop operation is performed as a second stop operation, the corresponding reel comes to a stop state, and a second stop sound corresponding to the second stop operation is output from the speakers 272, 277. At this time, the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission state. In addition, the lever monitor LED is in the first state.

Finally, when a right stop operation is performed as a third stop operation, all reels come to a stop state, and a third stop sound corresponding to the third stop operation is output from the speakers 272, 277. At this time, the effect image display device 157 displays a second display (stop result display (stopped minor winnings display, XX coins got display, XX bonus display, updated display (number of credits, number of games, number of remaining ATs)), etc.), and the speakers 272, 277 output a second sound (effect corresponding to the second display), and the various lamps 420 are in a second light emission mode (effect corresponding to the second display). Also, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode. Then,
When the game ends, the game enters a state in which the number of bets required to start the game has not been placed (non-betting state).

[Example of operation according to the passage of time from lever operation]
An example of the operation according to the elapsed time from the lever operation will be described below with reference to Fig. 194. In Fig. 194, as in Fig. 193, the operations are assumed to be performed in the order of bet operation, lever operation, left stop operation, center stop operation, and right stop operation. Note that the front door 102 is in a closed state throughout all operations, and the corresponding door sensor is also in a state of detecting the closed state. Note that the explanation of the parts that overlap with the contents explained in Fig. 193 will be omitted.

First, the bet operation and the operation in response to the operation of the start lever 135 are the same as those shown in FIG. 193.

Next, suppose that time t1 (e.g., 1 minute) has passed since the start lever was operated without any stop operation. At this time, the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, but in addition to this display, messages such as "More than time t1 has passed", "Reel is spinning", and "Please stop the reels" (hereinafter, "Caution display regarding the reels") are displayed. Also, the various lamps 420 continue to emit the first light, but the output of the first sound from the speakers 272 and 277 stops. The monitor LED for the lever is in the first mode. In this state, suppose that time t2 (e.g., 5 minutes) has passed since the start lever was operated without any further stop operation. At this time, the message "More than time t1 has passed" on the performance image display device 157 changes to "More than time t2 has passed".

Next, when a left stop operation is performed as the first stop operation, the corresponding reel comes to a stop, but unlike the example in FIG. 193, the first stop sound corresponding to the first stop operation is not output from the speakers 272, 277. Note that the first display and messages "Time t2 or more has elapsed", "Reel spinning", and "Please stop the reel" continue on the performance image display device 157, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission mode. Also, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

Next, when a middle stop operation is performed as a second stop operation, the corresponding reel comes to a stop, but unlike the example in FIG. 193, the second stop sound corresponding to the second stop operation is not output from the speakers 272, 277. Note that the first display and messages "Time t2 or more has elapsed", "Reel spinning", and "Please stop the reel" continue on the performance image display device 157, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission mode. Also, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

Finally, when the right stop operation is performed as the third stop operation, the messages "Time t2 or more has elapsed", "Reels are spinning", and "Please stop the reels" are cleared, and the game returns to the same state as when the third stop operation in FIG. 193 is performed.

In the above operation, an example was described in which three types of messages were displayed as a warning display regarding the reels, but at least one of these may be displayed without being limited to the above configuration. This warning display regarding the reels may be displayed while overlapping a portion of the first display (e.g., the operation navigation). Also, in the above operation, an example was described in which the warning display regarding the reels is displayed until the third stop operation is performed, but it may be made to disappear when any of the stop operations are performed.

In addition, in the above operation, an example was described in which the output of the first sound was stopped in conjunction with the warning display regarding the reels, but the volume of the first sound may also be reduced or silenced.

The above configuration allows the player to understand that the reels are still spinning.

[Example of operation when an abnormality occurs in the reel (1)]
An example of the operation when an abnormality occurs in the reels after the lever operation will be described below with reference to FIG. 195. In FIG. 195, it is assumed that the bet operation, the lever operation, and the left stop operation have been performed. Note that the front door 102 is in the closed state throughout all operations, and the corresponding door sensor is also in the state of detecting the closed state. Note that the explanation of the parts that overlap with the contents explained in FIG. 193 and FIG. 194 will be omitted.

First, the operation in response to the bet operation and the operation of the start lever 135 is the same as in Figures 193 and 194. Furthermore, the lamp provided inside each stop button changes from a first light indication (e.g., red light) to a second light indication (e.g., blue light). This first light indication indicates that the operation of the stop button is not accepted, and the second light indication indicates that the operation of the stop button is accepted.

Next, assume that a time t1 (e.g., one minute) has elapsed since the start lever was operated without a stop operation being performed. The operation at this time is the same as that shown in FIG. 194. Note that the lamps provided inside each stop button continue to display the second light.

Now, let us assume that an abnormality occurs in the reel unit (here, the harness connecting to the main control unit 300 is broken). In this example, all of the reels stop due to the abnormality, and furthermore, the lamps inside each stop button change from the second light-emitting display to the first light-emitting display. At this time, the performance image display device 157 does not execute a display corresponding to the reel abnormality, and continues to display the first display and the messages "Time t1 or more has elapsed", "Reel spinning", and "Please stop the reels". In addition, the various lamps 420 continue to emit light in the first state, and the lever monitor LED is in the first state.

When an abnormality occurs in the reel, the reel sensor cannot detect it properly, so the main control unit 300 determines that there is some kind of abnormality, and the operation of the stop button is not validly accepted. In Figure 195, it is shown that although the left stop operation is performed when an abnormality occurs in the reel, the corresponding action is not executed.

In the above operation, an example was described in which the reel-related warning display continues when the harness connecting the main control unit 300 and the reel unit is broken, but the same operation as in the case of a broken harness may also be performed if the harness comes loose or if there is an abnormality in the reel rotation (including loss of synchronism).

[Example of operation when an abnormality occurs in the reel (2)]
An example of the operation when an abnormality occurs in the reels after the lever operation will be described below with reference to FIG. 196. In FIG. 196, it is assumed that the bet operation and the lever operation have been performed. Note that the front door 102 is in the closed state throughout all operations, and the corresponding door sensor is also in the state of detecting the closed state. Note that the explanation of the parts that overlap with the contents explained in FIG. 193 and FIG. 194 will be omitted.

First, the betting operation and the operation of the start lever 135 are the same as those in Fig. 193 and Fig. 194. Furthermore, the lamps provided inside each stop button change from a first light-emitting display (e.g., red light) to a second light-emitting display (e.g., blue light). The first light-emitting display indicates that the operation of the stop button is not accepted, and the second light-emitting display indicates that the operation of the stop button is accepted.

Now, let us assume that an abnormality occurs in the reel unit (here, the harness connecting to the main control unit 300 is broken). When an abnormality occurs in the reel, the reel sensor cannot detect it normally, so the main control unit 300 determines that there is some kind of abnormality, and the operation of the stop button is not accepted effectively. In this example, the abnormality causes all the reels to stop, and furthermore, the lamps provided inside each stop button are shown changing from the second light-emitting display to the first light-emitting display. At this time, the performance image display device 157 does not execute a display corresponding to the reel abnormality, and the first display continues to be displayed. In addition, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light-emitting state. In addition, the lever monitor LED is in the first state.

Next, assume that a time t1 (for example, one minute) has passed since the start lever was operated. At this time, the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, but in addition to this display, messages such as "Time t1 or more has passed", "Reels are spinning", and "Please stop the reels" (attention display regarding the reels) are displayed. Also, the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission mode, but the output of the first sound from the speakers 272, 277 stops. The lever monitor LED is in the first mode. Note that the lamps provided inside each stop button continue to be in the first light emission mode.

In the above operation, an example was described in which the reel-related warning display is executed even if the harness connecting the main control unit 300 and the reel unit is disconnected, but the same operation as in the case of a disconnection may also be performed if the harness comes loose or if an abnormality in the reel rotation (including loss of synchronism) occurs.

[Example of operation when an abnormality occurs in the stop button unit (1)]
An example of the operation when an abnormality occurs in the stop button unit after the lever operation will be described below with reference to Fig. 197. In Fig. 197, it is assumed that the bet operation, the lever operation, and the left stop operation have been performed. Note that the front door 102 is in the closed state throughout all operations, and the corresponding door sensor is also in the state of detecting the closed state. Note that the explanation of the parts that overlap with the contents explained in Figs. 193 and 194 will be omitted.

First, the operation in response to the bet operation and the operation of the start lever 135 is the same as in Figures 193 and 194. Furthermore, the lamp provided inside each stop button changes from a first light indication (e.g., red light) to a second light indication (e.g., blue light). This first light indication indicates that the operation of the stop button is not accepted, and the second light indication indicates that the operation of the stop button is accepted.

Next, assume that a time t1 (e.g., one minute) has elapsed since the start lever was operated without a stop operation being performed. The operation at this time is the same as that shown in FIG. 194. Note that the lamps provided inside each stop button continue to display the second light.

Now, suppose that an abnormality occurs in the stop button unit (here, the harness connecting to the main control unit 300 is disconnected), and the operation of the stop button cannot be effectively accepted. In this example, it is shown that the abnormality causes the lamps provided inside each stop button to not display (not display, for example, turned off). At this time, the performance image display device 157 does not display the information corresponding to the abnormality in the stop button unit, and continues to display the first display and the messages "Time t1 or more has passed", "Reel spinning", and "Please stop the reels". In addition, the various lamps 420 continue to emit light in the first state, and the lever monitor LED is in the first state.

Figure 197 shows that even though the left stop operation is performed when an abnormality occurs in the stop button unit, the corresponding action is not executed.

In the above operation, an example was described in which the reel-related warning display continues if the harness connecting the main control unit 300 and the stop button unit is disconnected, but the same operation may also be performed if the harness becomes unplugged.

[Example of operation when an abnormality occurs in the stop button unit (2)]
An example of the operation when an abnormality occurs in the stop button unit after the lever operation will be described below with reference to Fig. 198. In Fig. 198, it is assumed that the bet operation and the lever operation have been performed. Note that the front door 102 is in the closed state throughout all operations, and the corresponding door sensor is also in the state of detecting the closed state. Note that the explanation of the parts that overlap with the contents explained in Figs. 193 and 194 will be omitted.

First, the operation in response to the bet operation and the operation of the start lever 135 is the same as in Figures 193 and 194. Furthermore, the lamp provided inside each stop button changes from a first light indication (e.g., red light) to a second light indication (e.g., blue light). This first light indication indicates that the operation of the stop button is not accepted, and the second light indication indicates that the operation of the stop button is accepted.

Now, suppose that an abnormality occurs in the stop button unit (here, the harness connecting to the main control unit 300 is disconnected), and the operation of the stop button cannot be effectively accepted. In this example, it is shown that the abnormality causes the display by the lamps provided inside each stop button to not be displayed (not displayed, for example, turned off). At this time, the performance image display device 157 does not display a message corresponding to the abnormality in the stop button unit, and the first display continues to be displayed. In addition, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission mode. In addition, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

Next, suppose that a time t1 (for example, one minute) has passed since the start lever was operated. At this time, the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, but in addition to this display, messages such as "Time t1 or more has passed", "Reels are spinning", and "Please stop the reels" (attention display regarding the reels) are displayed. Also, the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission mode, but the output of the first sound from the speakers 272, 277 stops. The lever monitor LED is in the first mode. Note that the lamps provided inside each stop button continue to be in the non-display state.

In the above operation, an example was described in which the reel-related warning display is executed even if the harness connecting the main control unit 300 and the stop button unit is disconnected, but the same operation as in the case of a disconnection may also be performed if the harness becomes unplugged.

[Example of operation when reel effects are executed]
An example of the operation when a reel effect is executed will be described below with reference to FIG. 199. In FIG. 199, after a bet operation and a lever operation, a reel effect is executed, and further operations up to a left stop operation, a center stop operation, and a right stop operation are performed. Note that the front door 102 is in a closed state throughout all operations, and the corresponding door sensor is also in a state where it detects the closed state. Note that explanations of parts that overlap with the contents explained in FIG. 193 and FIG. 194 will be omitted.

First, the operations performed in response to bet operations are the same as those shown in Figures 193 and 194.

Next, when the start lever 135 is operated, the same operation as in Figures 193 and 194 occurs, and the reels start to spin. However, unlike Figures 193 and 194, the reel spinning at this time is due to a reel effect, not due to the start of the game.

Then, all the reels that were spinning come to a pseudo-stop, and the reel effect ends. At this time, the first display continues on the effect image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission mode. Also, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

When the reel performance ends, the reel starts to spin. Now, let us say that time t1 (for example, one minute) has passed since the end of this reel performance without any stopping operation. At this time, the performance image display device 157 continues to display the first display, but in addition to this display, messages such as "Time t1 or more has passed", "Reel is spinning", and "Please stop the reel" (attention display regarding the reel) are displayed. Also, the various lamps 420 continue to emit the first light, but the output of the first sound from the speakers 272 and 277 stops. The monitor LED for the lever is in the first mode. Note that when time t2 (for example, five minutes) has passed since the end of the reel performance, the message "Time t1 or more has passed" on the performance image display device 157 changes to "Time t2 or more has passed" as in FIG. 194.

Next, when a left stop operation is performed as the first stop operation, and then a center stop operation is performed as the second stop operation, the corresponding reel will be stopped as in FIG. 194. Then, the reel-related warning message will continue to be displayed, and the status of the various lamps 420 and the lever monitor LED will continue. Then, when a right stop operation is performed as the third stop operation, the reel-related warning message will be cleared, and the state will be the same as when the third stop operation in FIG. 193 was performed.

Figure 194 describes an example in which a warning message regarding the reels is displayed based on the time elapsed from the lever operation (or the start of play), but Figure 199 differs in that a warning message regarding the reels is displayed based on the time elapsed from the end of the reel presentation (or the start of play). As in the above example, if the reel presentation ends at time t3 (e.g., 15 seconds) after the lever operation, the warning message regarding the reels will be displayed at time t1 + t3 after the lever operation.

[Example of operation when a pseudo game is executed (1)]
An example of the operation when a pseudo game is executed will be described below with reference to FIG. 200. In FIG. 200, after a bet operation and a lever operation, a pseudo game is executed, and further operations up to a left stop operation, a center stop operation, and a right stop operation are performed. Note that the front door 102 is in a closed state throughout all operations, and the corresponding door sensor is also in a state where it detects the closed state. Note that explanations of parts that overlap with the contents explained in FIG. 193 and FIG. 194 will be omitted.

First, the operations performed in response to bet operations are the same as those shown in Figures 193 and 194.

Next, when the start lever 135 is operated, the same operation as in Figures 193 and 194 occurs, and the reels start to spin. However, unlike Figures 193 and 194, the spinning of the reels at this time is due to the start of a pseudo game, not the start of a game.

In a simulated game, the reels can be stopped by the player's stopping operation, but in this case, the player does not perform the stopping operation, and all the reels that were spinning come to a pseudo-stop as time t3 has passed, ending the simulated game. At this time, the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light emission mode. Also, the lever monitor LED is in the first mode.

When the pseudo game ends, the reels start to spin. Now, let us say that time t1 (for example, one minute) has passed since the end of this pseudo game without any stopping operation. At this time, the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, but in addition to this display, messages such as "Time t1 or more has passed", "Reel spinning", and "Please stop the reels" (attention display regarding the reels) are displayed. Also, the various lamps 420 continue to emit the first light, but the output of the first sound from the speakers 272 and 277 stops. The monitor LED for the lever is in the first mode. Note that when time t2 (for example, five minutes) has passed since the end of the pseudo game, the message "Time t1 or more has passed" on the performance image display device 157 changes to "Time t2 or more has passed" as in FIG. 194.

Next, when a left stop operation is performed as the first stop operation, and then a center stop operation is performed as the second stop operation, the corresponding reel will be stopped as in FIG. 194. Then, the reel-related warning message will continue to be displayed, and the status of the various lamps 420 and the lever monitor LED will continue. Then, when a right stop operation is performed as the third stop operation, the reel-related warning message will be cleared, and the state will be the same as when the third stop operation in FIG. 193 was performed.

Figure 194 describes an example in which a warning message regarding the reels is displayed based on the time elapsed from the lever operation (or the start of play), but Figure 200 differs in that a warning message regarding the reels is displayed based on the time elapsed from the end of the simulated game (or the start of play). As in the above example, if the simulated game ends at time t3 (e.g., 15 seconds) from the lever operation, the warning message regarding the reels will be displayed at time t1 + t3 from the lever operation.

[Example of operation when a pseudo game is executed (2)]
An example of the operation when a pseudo game is executed will be described below with reference to FIG. 201. In FIG. 201, after a bet operation and a lever operation, a pseudo game is executed, and further operations up to a left stop operation, a center stop operation, and a right stop operation are performed. Note that the front door 102 is in a closed state throughout all operations, and the corresponding door sensor is also in a state where it detects the closed state. Note that explanations of parts that overlap with the contents explained in FIG. 193 and FIG. 194 will be omitted.

First, the operations performed in response to bet operations are the same as those shown in Figures 193 and 194.

Next, when the start lever 135 is operated, the same operation as in Figures 193 and 194 occurs, and the reels start to spin. However, unlike Figures 193 and 194, the spinning of the reels at this time is due to the start of a pseudo game, not the start of a game.

In the simulated game, when time t3 has elapsed, all the reels that were spinning come to a pseudo-stop and the simulated game ends. However, in this example, it is assumed that the player has stopped all the reels before time t3 has elapsed (when time t4 has elapsed), and the simulated game ends. At this time, the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, the first sound continues to be output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 continue to be in the first light-emitting state. Also, the lever monitor LED is in the first state.

When the pseudo game ends, the reels start to spin. Now, let us say that time t1 (for example, one minute) has passed since the end of this pseudo game without any stopping operation. At this time, the first display continues on the performance image display device 157, but in addition to this display, messages such as "Time t1 or more has passed", "Reel spinning", and "Please stop the reels" (attention display regarding the reels) are displayed. Also, the various lamps 420 continue to emit the first light, but the output of the first sound from the speakers 272 and 277 stops. The monitor LED for the lever is in the first mode. Note that when time t2 (for example, five minutes) has passed since the end of the pseudo game, the message "Time t1 or more has passed" on the performance image display device 157 changes to "Time t2 or more has passed" as in FIG. 194.

Next, when a left stop operation is performed as the first stop operation, and then a center stop operation is performed as the second stop operation, the corresponding reel will be stopped as in FIG. 194. Then, the reel-related warning message will continue to be displayed, and the status of the various lamps 420 and the lever monitor LED will continue. Then, when a right stop operation is performed as the third stop operation, the reel-related warning message will be cleared, and the state will be the same as when the third stop operation in FIG. 193 was performed.

Figure 194 describes an example in which a warning message regarding the reels is displayed based on the time elapsed from the lever operation (or the start of play), but Figure 201 differs in that a warning message regarding the reels is displayed based on the time elapsed from the end of the simulated game (or the start of play). As in the above example, if the simulated game ends at time t4 (e.g., 5 seconds) after the lever operation, the warning message regarding the reels will be displayed at time t1 + t4 after the lever operation.

[Example of operation when power is restored during gameplay]
An example of the operation when a power outage occurs during a game will be described below with reference to FIG. 202. In FIG. 202, a power outage occurs after a bet operation and a lever operation, and then power is restored. Note that the front door 102 is closed throughout all operations, and the corresponding door sensor also detects the closed state. Note that explanations of parts that overlap with those explained in FIG. 193 and FIG. 194 will be omitted.

First, the bet operation and the operation in response to the operation of the start lever 135 are the same as those in Figures 193 and 194.

Next, suppose that a power outage occurs when time t5 (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since the start lever was operated without a stop operation being performed. In the state immediately before this power outage, the performance image display device 157 continues to display the first display, the various lamps 420 continue to emit the first light, and the speakers 272 and 277 continue to output the first sound. The lever monitor LED is in the first state.

After the power is restored, each control unit of the slot machine 100 executes a recovery process to return to the state before the power failure. This recovery process is executed by each of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500, but the recovery process of the main control unit 300 is completed first, and the reels start spinning again. In addition, until the recovery processes of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 are completed, the performance image display device 157 executes a display indicating that the recovery process is in progress, the speakers 272 and 277 output the sound when the power is turned on, and the various lamps 420 are in the light-emitting state when the power is turned on. Note that the monitor LED for the lever is in the first state. Then, when the recovery processes of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 are completed after a time t6 (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the power was restored, the performance image display device 157 executes a demo display instead of the first display. Also, the sound output from the speakers 272 and 277 when the power is turned on ends, and the various lamps 420 are turned off. Since the performance image display device 157 executes a demo display, so-called operation navigation is not displayed, but this operation navigation may be performed using the illumination state of the stop button, or may be displayed on a 7-segment display or the like.

In addition, with regard to the first display, the display according to the operation of the game progress, and the corresponding effects that would be executed if there was no power interruption, parts of these displays and effects may be executed sequentially in response to the operation of the game progress after power is restored. For example, when an operation navigation suggesting a certain operation condition is not displayed (a demo display is being executed), and an operation according to this operation condition is performed, part of the first display may be executed, or various lamps 420 may be operated without outputting a sound corresponding to a stop operation. Note that by executing the first display and the corresponding effects at the timing of the start of a new game, it is possible to return to the normal state from this game.

Next, let us assume that time t1 (e.g., 1 minute) has passed since the start lever was operated without any stop operation, excluding the time due to power failure. At this time, the demo display continues on the performance image display device 157, but messages such as "Time t1 or more has passed", "Reel is spinning", and "Please stop the reel" (attention display regarding the reel) are displayed to cover part of this display. In addition, the speakers 272 and 277 continue to be in a state where no sound is being output, and the various lamps 420 continue to be turned off. Note that the lever monitor LED is in the first mode. In this state, let us assume that time t2 (e.g., 5 minutes, excluding the time due to power failure) has passed since the start lever was operated without any further stop operation. At this time, the message "Time t1 or more has passed" on the performance image display device 157 changes to "Time t2 or more has passed".

In the above example, the warning display for the reel is displayed while the demo display is on, but if the timing after the above time t1 has elapsed is during the recovery display, the warning display for the reel may be displayed as in the demo display, or the warning display for the reel may be displayed after the recovery display has ended. Also, if the warning display for the reel was displayed before the power outage, the warning display for the reel may be displayed while the recovery display is on after power is restored, or the warning display for the reel may be displayed after the recovery display has ended. Also, in the above example, the time due to the power outage was excluded even if the time due to the power outage exceeded the time t1, but an RTC (real-time clock) may be installed to include the time due to the power outage.

In the above example, the passage of time t1 is determined based on the timing when the start lever is operated, but the passage of time t1 may be determined based on the timing when power is restored and a warning display regarding the reels may be executed. In this case, a delay may occur from the passage of time t1 due to the recovery process.

[Technical idea corresponding to the embodiment of the warning display regarding the reel]
The technical ideas described in the explanation of Figures 193 to 202 will be described below with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
Notification means (e.g., a performance image display device 157);
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) that are rotated;
A stop button (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) that accepts a stop operation to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels;
A gaming machine equipped with
The notification means is a means capable of executing a predetermined notification (e.g., a warning display regarding the reel) regarding the reel being rotated when a predetermined time has elapsed while the reel is being rotated (e.g., see FIG. 194 );
The predetermined notification may be executed even if the reel stops without the stop operation before the predetermined time has elapsed while the reel is rotating (for example, see FIG. 196 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When this gaming machine issues a specific notification while the reels are stopped, this is not normal behavior, so gaming facility staff may be able to detect an abnormality in the gaming machine through the player.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
During the execution of the predetermined notification, even if the reel stops without the stop operation, the predetermined notification may continue to be executed (for example, see FIG. 195).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When this gaming machine issues a specific notification while the reels are stopped, this is not normal behavior, so gaming facility staff may be able to detect an abnormality in the gaming machine through the player.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is a means for not executing a notification corresponding to the stop of the reel when the predetermined notification is executed in a state in which the reel is stopped without the stop operation (for example, see FIG. 195 and FIG. 196 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine may be able to make the player aware of abnormalities while drawing attention to specific alerts.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The predetermined notification is a reel-related attention notification (for example, see FIG. 194 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine can notify the player or a visiting store attendant that the reels are spinning too much and prompt them to stop them.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the plurality of reels are capable of executing reel effects,
The notification means is a means that may not execute the predetermined notification while the reel performance is being executed (for example, see FIGS. 199 to 201).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can ensure that the reel performance is not interrupted by specified notifications.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is a means for executing the predetermined notification based on the fact that the predetermined time has elapsed after the execution of the reel performance and while the reel is spinning (for example, see FIGS. 199 to 201 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine can notify the player or a visiting store attendant that the reels are spinning too much and prompt them to stop them.

Also, in the above explanation,
Notification means (e.g., a performance image display device 157);
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) that are rotated;
A stop button (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) that accepts a stop operation to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels;
A gaming machine equipped with
The notification means is a means capable of executing a predetermined notification (e.g., a warning display regarding the reel) regarding the reel being rotated when a predetermined time has elapsed while the reel is being rotated (e.g., see FIG. 194 );
There is a case where the predetermined notification is executed in a state where the stop operation is invalid (for example, see FIG. 198 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this type of gaming machine, if the stop operation is disabled and a specified notification is issued, the player is unable to respond, so gaming facility staff may be able to detect an abnormality in the gaming machine through the player.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The predetermined notification may be executed even if the reel stops without the stop operation before the predetermined time has elapsed while the reel is rotating (for example, see FIG. 196 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When this gaming machine issues a specific notification while the reels are stopped, this is not normal behavior, so gaming facility staff may be able to detect an abnormality in the gaming machine through the player.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
During the execution of the predetermined notification, even if the reel stops without the stop operation, the predetermined notification may continue to be executed (for example, see FIG. 195).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When this gaming machine issues a specific notification while the reels are stopped, this is not normal behavior, so gaming facility staff may be able to detect an abnormality in the gaming machine through the player.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is a means for not executing a notification corresponding to the fact that the stop operation is in an invalid state when the predetermined notification is executed in a state in which the stop operation is invalid (for example, see FIGS. 197 and 198 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine may be able to make the player aware of abnormalities while drawing attention to specific alerts.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The predetermined notification is a reel-related attention notification (for example, see FIG. 194 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine can notify the player or a visiting store attendant that the reels are spinning too much and prompt them to stop them.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the plurality of reels are capable of executing reel effects,
The notification means is a means that may not execute the predetermined notification while the reel performance is being executed (for example, see FIGS. 199 to 201 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can ensure that the reel performance is not interrupted by specified notifications.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is a means for executing the predetermined notification based on the fact that the predetermined time has elapsed after the execution of the reel performance and while the reel is spinning (for example, see FIGS. 199 to 201 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine can notify the player or a visiting store attendant that the reels are spinning too much and prompt them to stop them.

Also, in the above explanation,
Notification means (e.g., a performance image display device 157);
A plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110 to 112) that are rotated;
A stop button (e.g., stop buttons 137 to 139) that accepts a stop operation to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels;
A gaming machine equipped with
The notification means is a means capable of executing a predetermined notification (e.g., a warning display regarding the reel) regarding the reel being rotated when a predetermined time has elapsed while the reel is being rotated (e.g., see FIG. 194 );
If the power is cut off before the predetermined time has elapsed while the multiple reels are rotating, the predetermined notification may be executed at a time different from the time when the predetermined time has elapsed after the power is restored (for example, see FIG. 202).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can issue a specified notification after power is restored.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The predetermined notification may be executed even if the reel stops without the stop operation before the predetermined time has elapsed while the reel is rotating (for example, see FIG. 196 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When this gaming machine issues a specific notification while the reels are stopped, this is not normal behavior, so gaming facility staff may be able to detect an abnormality in the gaming machine through the player.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
During the execution of the predetermined notification, even if the reel stops without the stop operation, the predetermined notification may continue to be executed (for example, see FIG. 195).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

When this gaming machine issues a specific notification while the reels are stopped, this is not normal behavior, so gaming facility staff may be able to detect an abnormality in the gaming machine through the player.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The predetermined notification may be executed before the predetermined time has elapsed since the power was restored (for example, in FIG. 202, the time t1 is determined as the sum of the elapsed time t5 before the power failure and the elapsed time t6 after the power was restored, so that the warning display regarding the reel is displayed before the time t1 has elapsed after the power was restored).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The predetermined notification may be executed after the predetermined time has elapsed since the power was restored (for example, in the modified example of FIG. 202, regardless of the elapsed time t5 before the power failure, the warning display regarding the reel is displayed after the time t1 has elapsed after the power is restored, and there is a further delay for the recovery process).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The predetermined notification is a reel-related attention notification (for example, see FIG. 194 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine can notify the player or a visiting store attendant that the reels are spinning too much and prompt them to stop them.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the plurality of reels are capable of executing reel effects,
The notification means is a means that may not execute the predetermined notification while the reel performance is being executed (for example, see FIGS. 199 to 201 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can ensure that the reel performance is not interrupted by specified notifications.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is a means for executing the predetermined notification based on the fact that the predetermined time has elapsed after the execution of the reel performance and while the reel is spinning (for example, see FIGS. 199 to 201 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine can notify the player or a visiting store attendant that the reels are spinning too much and prompt them to stop them.

<Operation when abnormality occurs in the connection between boards>
Next, an example of the operation when an abnormality occurs in the connection between the boards of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to Figures 203 and 204. In the following description, the same reference numerals will be used for the configurations already described in other embodiments (e.g., Figures 166 to 181) and the description will be omitted. In addition, for configurations that contradict the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and reference numerals of this example will take precedence.

185 shows an example of boards arranged inside the slot machine 100 and harnesses connecting them. For example, the main control board 300B on which the main control unit 300 is provided is connected to a relay board RB1 by an upstream harness HB1, and this relay board RB1 is further connected to a lever unit 135U (mounted with a start lever 135), a stop button unit 136U (mounted with stop buttons 137-139), a bet button unit 132U (mounted with bet buttons 130, 132, and a settlement button 134), a selector unit, and a door sensor by downstream harnesses HA1-HA5.

The relay board RB1 is equipped with an IC for monitoring the status of each device connected by the downstream harnesses HA1 to HA5, and the status of each device monitored by this IC is transmitted to the main control board 300B.

Figure 203 shows an example of the flow of operations when an abnormality occurs while no game is being played.

Figure 203 shows that the various harnesses are normally connected, the various operating means are not operated, and the reels are stopped, in a state where no game is being played (demo display in progress). Furthermore, the performance image display device 157 (display means) is executing a demo display, normal background music is being output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 are in a normal light-emitting state. In addition, the door sensor monitor LED provided on the board of the main control unit 300 is in a first state (lighting or turning off, a state different from the second state described below). This door sensor monitor LED goes into a second state when the door sensor detects an open state, and is provided to check the state of the front door 102. Note that the door sensor monitor LED is not limited to being provided on the board of the main control unit 300, and may be provided, for example, on the relay board between the door sensor and the main control unit.

Now, suppose that the downstream harness HA5 connecting the door sensor and the relay board RB1 is broken. FIG. 203 shows that the door sensor and the relay board RB1 are not connected (disconnected). The relay board RB1 cannot grasp the state of the door sensor due to the disconnection of the downstream harness HA5. In this case, in this embodiment, the same information as when the door sensor detects an open state is sent to the main control unit 300. In FIG. 203, the door sensor detects a closed state, but the performance image display device 157 (display means) is executing a door open error display, a door open error sound is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 are in a door open error light emission mode. In addition, the door sensor monitor LED provided on the board of the main control unit 300 is in the second mode. In this configuration, even though the front door 102 is closed, an alarm is issued to indicate that the front door 102 is open, allowing the driver to know that some abnormality has occurred in the mechanism of the front door 102, and may allow the driver to notice an abnormality in the downstream harness HA5.

Figure 204 shows an example of the flow of operations when an abnormality occurs while no game is being played.

Figure 204 shows that no game is being played (demo display in progress), just like Figure 203.

Now, let us assume that the upstream harness HB1 connecting the relay board RB1 and the main control board 300B has been broken. Fig. 204 shows that the relay board RB1 and the main control board 300B are not connected (disconnected). The relay board RB1 knows the status of each device connected by the downstream harnesses HA1 to HA5, but because the upstream harness HB1 is broken, it is unable to transmit the status of each device to the main control board 300B. In this case, in this embodiment, no new information is transmitted from the relay board RB1, so no action is taken,
No error notification is performed. Fig. 204 shows that no change occurs even if the relay board RB1 and the main control board 300B are not connected (disconnected). Note that Fig. 204 shows an example during demo display, but if the upstream harness HB1 is disconnected during a period other than when the power is turned on (for example, in a betting state or during a game (while the reels are spinning)), no operation is performed as described above.

If the power is turned on while the upstream harness HB1 is disconnected, the main control unit 300 will detect this disconnection state through processing at power-on and will notify of a board connection error. In FIG. 204, when the power is turned off once while the upstream harness HB1 is disconnected and then turned on again, a board connection error display is executed on the performance image display device 157 (display means), a board connection error sound is output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 are in a board connection error light-emitting state.

In the above configuration, if the upstream harness HB1 is disconnected, various operations cannot be accepted, allowing the user to know that some kind of abnormality has occurred. Then, when the power is turned back on, it may be possible to identify the location of the abnormality by checking whether a board connection error is reported.

[Technical idea corresponding to the embodiment when an abnormality occurs in the connection between the boards]
The technical ideas described in the description of Figures 203 and 204 will be described below with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
Notification means (e.g., a performance image display device 157);
A door sensor;
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
A second substrate (e.g., a relay substrate RB1),
A gaming machine equipped with
the first board is electrically connected to the second board by a first harness (e.g., an upstream harness HB1);
The second board is electrically connected to the door sensor by a second harness (e.g., a downstream harness HA5),
the notification means is means capable of executing a predetermined notification (e.g., a door open error) when the detection state of the door sensor changes from a closed detection state to an open detection state,
The notification means is a means capable of executing the predetermined notification even when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (for example, see FIG. 203 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

At this gaming machine, an arcade attendant may be able to notice that there is an abnormality in the second harness.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the detection state of the door sensor is the closed detection state and the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the predetermined notification is executed (for example, see FIG. 203).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this type of gaming machine, the door is closed, which may allow the gaming store staff to notice that there is an abnormality in the second harness.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the same signal as that when the detection state of the door sensor changes from the closed detection state to the open detection state is output from the second board to the first board (for example, see the description, "In this case, in this embodiment, the same information as that when the door sensor detects the open state is transmitted to the main control unit 300.").
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

At this gaming machine, an arcade attendant may be able to notice that there is an abnormality in the second harness.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
a monitor LED (e.g., a monitor LED for a door sensor) that becomes a predetermined state (e.g., the second state in FIG. 203) when the detection state of the door sensor changes from the closed detection state to the open detection state;
The monitor LED is an LED that is in the predetermined state when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (for example, see FIG. 203 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is a means for executing the predetermined notification regardless of the connection state of the first harness (for example, the connection state of the upstream harness HB1 is unrelated to the door error notification),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it may be possible to notice whether there is an abnormality in the first harness or the second harness.

Also, in the above explanation,
Notification means (e.g., a performance image display device 157);
A door sensor;
A first board (e.g., a main control board 300B);
A second substrate (e.g., a relay substrate RB1),
A gaming machine equipped with
the first board is electrically connected to the second board by a first harness (e.g., an upstream harness HB1);
The second board is electrically connected to the door sensor by a second harness (e.g., a downstream harness HA5),
the notification means is means capable of executing a predetermined notification (e.g., a door open error) when the detection state of the door sensor changes from a closed detection state to an open detection state,
The notification means is a means capable of executing the predetermined notification even when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (for example, see FIG. 203 ),
The notification means is a means capable of executing a notification (e.g., a board connection error) different from the predetermined notification when the first harness is in a disconnected state upon power-on (e.g., see FIG. 204 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

At this gaming machine, the gaming store staff may notice that there is an abnormality in the second harness. Also, the gaming store staff may notice that there is an abnormality in the first harness.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the detection state of the door sensor is the closed detection state and the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the predetermined notification is executed (for example, see FIG. 203).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this type of gaming machine, the door is closed, which may allow the gaming store staff to notice that there is an abnormality in the second harness.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the same signal as that when the detection state of the door sensor changes from the closed detection state to the open detection state is output from the second board to the first board (for example, see the description, "In this case, in this embodiment, the same information as that when the door sensor detects the open state is transmitted to the main control unit 300.").
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

At this gaming machine, an arcade attendant may be able to notice that there is an abnormality in the second harness.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
a monitor LED (e.g., a monitor LED for a door sensor) that becomes a predetermined state (e.g., the second state in FIG. 203) when the detection state of the door sensor changes from the closed detection state to the open detection state;
The monitor LED is an LED that is in the predetermined state when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state (for example, see FIG. 203 ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The notification means is a means for executing the predetermined notification regardless of the connection state of the first harness (for example, the connection state of the upstream harness HB1 is unrelated to the door error notification),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it may be possible to notice whether there is an abnormality in the first harness or the second harness.

<Power restoration when the lever unit harness is disconnected>
Next, with reference to Figure 205 (a), the restoration of power when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected will be described.

Figure 205 (a) shows an example of the power restoration operation when the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected.

The state indicated by "Menu displayed" is when the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), the MAX bet button 132 and start lever 135 are not being operated (not pressed), the bet button unit harness HA3 and lever unit harness HA1 are connected, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped.

In this state, the menu display is shown on the LCD display device 157, menu background music is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 are in a menu illumination mode.

The state indicated by the following "BET PRESS" is when the MAX BET button 132 is operated (BET is pressed) and the number of bets required to start playing is placed, and is the state before the start of playing by operating the start lever 135 (reels are stopped).

In this state, the LCD display 157 displays a normal background, normal background music is output from the speakers 272, 277, and the various lamps 420 are in their normal light-emitting state. Also, in this state, although not shown, the lever monitor LED is in a first light-emitting state (e.g., off). As explained using FIG. 186(a), this lever monitor LED is in a second light-emitting state (e.g., on) different from the first light-emitting state (e.g., off) when the start lever 135 is pressed down, and is provided to check the state of the start lever 135.

The next state, indicated by "Power Outage," is a state in which a power outage has occurred, cutting off the power supply to the power supply device 252.

In this state, power supply to each control unit, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, and each device, is stopped, and display by the liquid crystal display device 157, sound output by the speakers 272, 277, and light emission by the various lamps 420 are stopped.

The state shown next under "Lever unit harness unplugged" is the state in which the lever unit harness HA1 is unplugged when the power supply unit 252 is turned off.

In this state, since the lever unit harness HA1 is disconnected, the lever monitor LED goes into a second light emission state (e.g., lights up) (not shown).

The next state, "Power restored," is when the lever unit harness HA1 is unplugged and the power supply unit 252 power changes from OFF to ON.

As explained using FIG. 186(b), when the lever unit harness HA1 is unplugged while the start lever 135 is not pressed, the main control unit 300 receives a signal similar to that received when the start lever 135 changes from a not pressed state to a pressed state, and the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate. However, as shown in FIG. 205(a), if the power supply of the power supply device 252 changes from OFF to ON while the lever unit harness HA1 is unplugged, the reels 110 to 112 remain stopped and do not start to rotate.

In other words, in this example, when the first harness (lever unit harness HA1) goes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating means (start lever 135) is not being operated, the first control (reel rotation start process that starts the rotation of all reels 110-112) may be executed, and the first control is not executed even if a power interruption occurs in which the power supply to the power supply device is cut off and the power is restored when the first harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state.

According to this example, when the first harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the first control is not executed even if the power is restored from a power outage. This allows a malfunction such as a disconnection of the first harness to be noticed immediately, making it possible to quickly respond to the malfunction. In addition, if an operational error occurs, such as forgetting to connect the first harness, game play cannot be stopped. This makes it possible to provide a highly reliable gaming machine without causing any disadvantage to the player.

The state shown next under "Lever unit harness connection" is the state in which the lever unit harness HA1 is connected when the power supply 252 is turned on.

In this state, the lever unit harness HA1 is connected, but the reels 110 to 112 remain stopped and do not start rotating.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 150) is a gaming machine equipped with a power supply device (e.g., the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 151) that supplies power, a first board (e.g., the relay board RB1 shown in FIG. 185), a first operating means (e.g., the start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., the lever unit harness HA1 shown in FIG. 185), a second operating means (e.g., the volume button 193a, the OK button 193b), and a main control means (e.g., the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 152) that controls the game based on one of a plurality of setting values, and the main control means is a setting means that allows the player to check a playable state in which the game can be played and a setting value that is currently set. It is possible to set one state from a plurality of states including at least a confirmation state (e.g., a setting confirmation mode) and a setting change state (e.g., a setting change mode) in which one setting value can be set from the plurality of setting values, and it is configured such that when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off while the first operating means is not being operated, and when the first operating means is operated after the power is restored from the power interruption while the first operating means is not being operated, a first control (e.g., a reel rotation start process for starting the rotation of all reels 110 to 112) may be executed, and when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off while the second operating means is not being operated, and when the second operating means is operated after the power is restored from the power interruption while the second operating means is not being operated, a power interruption occurs when the power supply of the power supply device is cut off while the first operating means is not being operated, and even if the power interruption is restored while the first operating means is being operated, the first control is not executed; a power interruption occurs when the power supply of the power supply device is cut off while the second operating means is not being operated, and even if the power interruption is restored while the second operating means is being operated, the second control is executed; when the first control is executed, it is difficult or impossible to return to a state before the first control is executed, and even if the second control is executed, it is possible to return to a state before the second control is executed; The gaming machine is configured to execute the second control when the second operating means is operated after the game has transitioned from the setting confirmation state to the playable state, to not execute the second control even if the game transitions from the setting confirmation state to the playable state when the setting value is being confirmed in the setting confirmation state and the second operating means is operated, to execute the first control when the first harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating means is not being operated, and to not execute the first control even if a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off and the first harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state and then the power interruption is restored.

In the gaming machine according to this embodiment, when the first harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the first control is not executed even if the power is restored from a power outage. This allows a malfunction such as a disconnection of the first harness to be noticed immediately, and allows for a rapid response to the malfunction. In addition, if an operational error occurs, such as forgetting to connect the first harness, the game can be prevented from progressing, and a highly reliable gaming machine can be provided without causing any disadvantage to the player.

In addition, the setting confirmation state is, in principle, a state that is entered by an administrator's operation, and returning from the setting confirmation state is also performed by the administrator, and since this is a situation in which it is not necessary to return to play as quickly as possible, no control over operations is performed, taking into consideration only incorrect operations. Also, in the setting confirmation state, the administrator is concentrating on checking the settings and there is a risk that an incorrect operation will not be noticed, and for example, settings such as volume may remain at settings that the administrator did not intend, so no control over operations is performed when returning from the setting confirmation state.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 150) is a gaming machine including a power supply device (e.g., the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 151) that supplies power, a first board (e.g., the relay board RB1 shown in FIG. 185), a first operating means (e.g., the start lever 135) that is connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., the lever unit harness HA1 shown in FIG. 185), a second operating means (e.g., the volume button 193a, the OK button 193b), and a main control means (e.g., the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 152) that controls the game based on one of a plurality of setting values, and the main control means is a playable state in which the game can be played, a setting confirmation state in which the currently set setting value can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation state in which the currently set setting value can be confirmed. a setting change state (e.g., a setting confirmation mode) in which one setting value can be set from among a plurality of states including at least a setting change state (e.g., a setting change mode) in which one setting value can be set from among the plurality of setting values; when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off when the first operation means is not operated, and when the first operation means is operated after the power is restored from the power interruption when the first operation means is not operated, a first control (e.g., a reel rotation start process for starting the rotation of all reels 110 to 112) may be executed; when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off when the second operation means is not operated, and when the second operation means is operated after the power is restored from the power interruption when the second operation means is not operated, , a second control (e.g., a process for adjusting the volume, a process for displaying a menu), and is configured not to execute the first control even if a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device is cut off when the first operating means is not operated and the power is restored from the power interruption when the first operating means is operated; and is configured to execute the second control even if a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device is cut off when the second operating means is not operated and the power is restored from the power interruption when the second operating means is operated; when the first control is executed, it is difficult or impossible to return to the state before the first control was executed, and even if the second control is executed, it is possible to return to the state before the second control was executed; The gaming machine is configured such that, when the second operating means is operated after the setting change state has been transitioned to the playable state, the second control may be executed, and even if the setting change state is set and the setting change state is transitioned to the playable state while the second operating means is being operated, the second control is not executed, and when the first operating means is not being operated and the first harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the first control may be executed, and when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device is cut off and the first harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the first control is not executed even if the power interruption is restored.

In the gaming machine according to this embodiment, when the first harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the first control is not executed even if the power is restored from a power outage. This allows a malfunction such as a disconnection of the first harness to be noticed immediately, and allows for a rapid response to the malfunction. In addition, if an operational error occurs, such as forgetting to connect the first harness, the game can be prevented from progressing, and a highly reliable gaming machine can be provided without causing any disadvantage to the player.

In addition, the setting change state is, in principle, a state that is entered by the administrator's operation, and returning from the setting change state is also performed by the administrator, and since this is a situation in which it is not necessary to return to play as quickly as possible, no control over operations is performed, taking into consideration only erroneous operations. Also, in the setting change state, the administrator is focused on changing the settings and may not notice an erroneous operation, and for example, settings such as volume may remain at settings that the administrator did not intend, so no control over operations is performed when returning from the setting change state.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 150) is a gaming machine equipped with a power supply device (e.g., the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 151) that supplies power, a light emitting means (e.g., a monitor LED for a lever), a first board (e.g., the relay board RB1 shown in FIG. 185), a first operating means (e.g., the start lever 135) connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., the lever unit harness HA1 shown in FIG. 185), a second operating means (e.g., the volume button 193a, the OK button 193b), and a main control means (e.g., the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 152) that controls the game based on one of a plurality of setting values, and the main control means controls a playable state in which the game can be played, a setting confirmation state in which the currently set setting value can be confirmed (e.g., the setting a setting change state (e.g., a setting change mode) in which one setting value can be set from among a plurality of states including at least a first setting state (e.g., a confirmation mode), and a setting change state (e.g., a setting change mode) in which one setting value can be set from among the plurality of setting values; a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off when the first operation means is not operated, and when the first operation means is operated after the power is restored from the power interruption when the first operation means is not operated, a first control (e.g., a reel rotation start process for starting the rotation of all reels 110 to 112) may be executed; and when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off when the second operation means is not operated, and when the second operation means is operated after the power is restored from the power interruption when the second operation means is not operated, a second control (e.g., a process for adjusting the volume, a process for displaying a menu) may be executed. a power interruption occurs when the first operating means is not operated, and even if the power interruption is restored when the first operating means is operated, the first control is not executed; a power interruption occurs when the power supply device is cut off when the second operating means is not operated, and even if the power interruption is restored when the second operating means is operated, the second control is executed; when the first control is executed, it is difficult or impossible to return to a state before the first control is executed, and even if the second control is executed, it is possible to return to a state before the second control is executed; and when the second operating means is operated after the game has transitioned from the setting confirmation state to the playable state, the second control is executed. The gaming machine is configured such that, when the setting value is being confirmed in the setting confirmation state and the second operation means is being operated and the game transitions from the setting confirmation state to the playable state, the second control is not executed; when the first harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation means is not being operated, the first control may be executed; when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off and the first harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the first control is not executed even if the power interruption is restored; and when the first harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operation means is not being operated, the light emitting means emits light in the same manner (e.g., lights up) as when the first operation means is operated.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the first harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the first control is not executed even if the power is restored from a cutoff. Therefore, it is possible to immediately notice that a malfunction such as a disconnection of the first harness has occurred, and to quickly respond to the malfunction. In addition, if an operational error such as forgetting to connect the first harness occurs, the game can be prevented from progressing, and a highly reliable gaming machine can be provided without causing any disadvantage to the player. In addition, when the first harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating means is not being operated, the light emitting means emits the same light as when the first operating means is operated. Therefore, the light emitting means can also immediately notice that a malfunction such as a disconnection of the first harness has occurred, and to quickly respond to the malfunction.

In addition, the setting confirmation state is, in principle, a state that is entered by an administrator's operation, and returning from the setting confirmation state is also performed by the administrator, and since this is a situation in which it is not necessary to return to play as quickly as possible, no control over operations is performed, taking into consideration only incorrect operations. Also, in the setting confirmation state, the administrator is concentrating on checking the settings and there is a risk that an incorrect operation will not be noticed, and for example, settings such as volume may remain at settings that the administrator did not intend, so no control over operations is performed when returning from the setting confirmation state.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 150) is a gaming machine including a power supply device (e.g., the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 151) that supplies power, a light emitting means (e.g., a monitor LED for a lever), a first board (e.g., the relay board RB1 shown in FIG. 185), a first operating means (e.g., the start lever 135) that is connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., the lever unit harness HA1 shown in FIG. 185), a second operating means (e.g., the volume button 193a, the OK button 193b), and a main control means (e.g., the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 152) that controls the game based on one of a plurality of setting values, and the main control means is a playable state in which the game can be played, a setting confirmation state in which the currently set setting value can be confirmed (e.g., A setting confirmation mode, and a setting change state (e.g., a setting change mode) in which one of the plurality of setting values can be set, and when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off when the first operating means is not operated, and when the first operating means is operated after the power is restored from the power interruption when the first operating means is not operated, a first control (e.g., a reel rotation start process for starting the rotation of all reels 110 to 112) may be executed, and when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off when the second operating means is not operated, and when the second operating means is operated after the power is restored from the power interruption when the second operating means is not operated, a second control (e.g., a process for adjusting the volume, a process for displaying a menu) may be executed. The game device is configured to execute a control sequence such that, when the first operation means is not operated, a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off, and even if the power interruption is restored when the first operation means is operated, the first control is not executed; when the second operation means is not operated, a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off, and even if the power interruption is restored when the second operation means is operated, the second control is executed; when the first control is executed, it is difficult or impossible to return to a state before the first control is executed; even if the second control is executed, it is possible to return to a state before the second control is executed; and when the second operation means is operated after the game device has transitioned from the setting change state to the playable state, the second control may be executed. The gaming machine is configured so that, when the setting change state is set and the setting change state is transitioned to the playable state when the second operating means is operated, the second control is not executed, the first control may be executed when the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state when the first operating means is not operated, the first control is not executed even when the power supply device is cut off and the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state and the power supply device is powered off and the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state, and the light emitting means is illuminated in the same manner (e.g., lit) as when the first operating means is operated when the first harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state when the first operating means is not operated.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the first harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the first control is not executed even if the power is restored from a cutoff. Therefore, it is possible to immediately notice that a malfunction such as a disconnection of the first harness has occurred, and to quickly respond to the malfunction. In addition, if an operational error such as forgetting to connect the first harness occurs, the game can be prevented from progressing, and a highly reliable gaming machine can be provided without causing any disadvantage to the player. In addition, when the first harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating means is not being operated, the light emitting means emits the same light as when the first operating means is operated. Therefore, the light emitting means can also immediately notice that a malfunction such as a disconnection of the first harness has occurred, and to quickly respond to the malfunction.

In addition, the setting change state is, in principle, a state that is entered by the administrator's operation, and returning from the setting change state is also performed by the administrator, and since this is a situation in which it is not necessary to return to play as quickly as possible, no control over operations is performed, taking into consideration only erroneous operations. Also, in the setting change state, the administrator is focused on changing the settings and may not notice an erroneous operation, and for example, settings such as volume may remain at settings that the administrator did not intend, so no control over operations is performed when returning from the setting change state.

<Power restoration when the bed button unit harness is disconnected>
Next, using Figure 205 (b), we will explain how to restore power when the bet button unit harness HA3 is disconnected.

Figure 205 (b) shows an example of the power restoration operation when the bet button unit harness HA3 is unplugged.

The state indicated by "Menu displayed" is when the door open sensor detects that the front door 102 is closed (door closed state), the MAX bet button 132 is not being operated (not pressed), and the bet button unit harness HA3 is connected.

In this state, the menu display is shown on the LCD display device 157, menu background music is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the various lamps 420 are in a menu illumination mode.

The state shown next as "Bet button unit harness unplugged" is when the MAX bet button 132 is not being operated (not pressed) and the bet button unit harness HA3 is unplugged.

In this state, the bet button unit harness HA3 is unplugged and bets are possible, but the number of bets required to start playing has not been placed.

In other words, in this example, when the second harness (bet button unit harness HA3) goes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the second operating means (MAX bet button 132) is not being operated, the second control (the process of inserting three medals (credits) stored electronically) is not executed.

According to this example, when the second harness changes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the second operating means is not being operated, the second control is not executed, so that a malfunction such as a disconnection of the second harness can be noticed immediately and the malfunction can be dealt with promptly. In addition, if an operational error occurs, such as forgetting to connect the second harness, game play can be prevented from progressing, and a highly reliable gaming machine can be provided without causing any disadvantage to the player.

The state indicated by "Power Outage" that follows is a state in which a power outage has occurred, cutting off the power supply to the power supply device 252, and the state indicated by "Power Restored" that follows is a state in which the power supply to the power supply device 252 has changed from OFF to ON while the bet button unit harness HA3 is unplugged.

In this example, when the second harness (bet button unit harness HA3) goes from a connected state to a disconnected state, a power outage occurs in which the power supply device is cut off, and the device is configured so that even when the power is restored from the power outage, the second control (the process of inserting three medals (credits) that are electronically stored) is not executed.

The state shown next under "Bet button unit harness connection" is the state in which the bet button unit harness HA3 is connected when the power supply device 252 is turned on.

In this state, the bet button unit harness HA3 is connected, but the number of bets required to start playing has not been placed.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 150) is a gaming machine including a power supply device (e.g., the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 151) that supplies power, a first board (e.g., the relay board RB1 shown in FIG. 185), a first operating means (e.g., the start lever 135) that is connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., the lever unit harness HA1 shown in FIG. 185), a second operating means (e.g., the MAX bet button 132) that is connected to the first board via a second harness (e.g., the bet button unit harness HA3 shown in FIG. 185), a third operating means (e.g., the volume button 193a, the OK button 193b), and a main control means that controls the game based on one of a plurality of setting values, and the main control means is configured to select a playable state in which the game can proceed, a setting confirmation state (e.g., a setting confirmation mode) in which the currently set setting value can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation state in which the currently set setting value can be confirmed. a setting change state (e.g., a setting change mode) in which a set value of the number of reels can be set; a power interruption occurs when the first operation means is not operated, and when the first operation means is operated after recovery from a power interruption when the first operation means is not operated, a first control (e.g., a reel rotation start process for starting the rotation of all reels 110 to 112) may be executed; a power interruption occurs when the second operation means is not operated, and when the second operation means is operated after recovery from a power interruption when the second operation means is not operated, a second control (e.g., a process for inserting three medals (credits) that are electronically stored) may be executed; a power interruption occurs when the third operation means is not operated, and when the third operation means is not operated, a power interruption occurs when the power supply device is cut off .... When the third operating means is operated after recovery, a third control (e.g., a process for adjusting the volume, a process for displaying a menu) may be executed; when the first operating means is not operated, a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device is cut off, and when the first operating means is operated, the first control is not executed even when the device is restored from the power interruption; when the second operating means is not operated, a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device is cut off, and when the device is restored from the power interruption, the second control is not executed; when the third operating means is not operated, a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device is cut off, and when the device is restored from the power interruption, the third control may be executed; when the first control is executed, it is difficult or impossible to return to a state before the first control was executed, and when the third control is executed, the third control is executed. is able to return to a state before it was executed, and is configured to execute the third control when the third operating means is operated after transitioning from the setting confirmation state to the playable state; is configured not to execute the third control even if transitioning from the setting confirmation state to the playable state occurs when the setting value is being confirmed in the setting confirmation state and the third operating means is operated; is configured to execute the first control when the first harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the first operating means is not operated; is configured not to execute the second control when the second harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the second operating means is not operated; and is configured not to execute the first control even if a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device is cut off and the first harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state, and the first control is not executed even if the power interruption is restored.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the second harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the second operating means is not being operated, the second control is not executed, so that a malfunction such as a disconnection of the second harness can be noticed immediately and the malfunction can be dealt with promptly. In addition, if an operational error occurs, such as forgetting to connect the second harness, the game can be prevented from progressing, and a highly reliable gaming machine can be provided without causing any disadvantage to the player.

In addition, the setting confirmation state is, in principle, a state that is entered by an administrator's operation, and returning from the setting confirmation state is also performed by the administrator, and since this is a situation in which it is not necessary to return to play as quickly as possible, no control over operations is performed, taking into consideration only incorrect operations. Also, in the setting confirmation state, the administrator is concentrating on checking the settings and there is a risk that an incorrect operation will not be noticed, and for example, settings such as volume may remain at settings that the administrator did not intend, so no control over operations is performed when returning from the setting confirmation state.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 150) is a gaming machine including a power supply device (e.g., the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 151) that supplies power, a first board (e.g., the relay board RB1 shown in FIG. 185), a first operating means (e.g., the start lever 135) that is connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., the lever unit harness HA1 shown in FIG. 185), a second operating means (e.g., the MAX bet button 132) that is connected to the first board via a second harness (e.g., the bet button unit harness HA3 shown in FIG. 185), a third operating means (e.g., the volume button 193a, the OK button 193b), and a main control means that controls the game based on one of a plurality of setting values, and the main control means is configured to select a playable state in which the game can proceed, a setting confirmation state in which the currently set setting value can be confirmed (e.g., a setting confirmation mode), and a setting confirmation state in which the currently set setting value can be confirmed. a power interruption occurs when the first operation means is not operated, and when the first operation means is operated after the power interruption is restored when the first operation means is not operated, a first control (for example, a reel rotation start process for starting the rotation of all reels 110 to 112) may be executed; a power interruption occurs when the second operation means is not operated, and when the second operation means is operated after the power interruption is restored when the second operation means is not operated, a second control (for example, a process for inserting three medals (credits) that are electronically stored) may be executed; a power interruption occurs when the third operation means is not operated, and when the third operation means is not operated, a power interruption occurs when the power supply device is cut off, and when the third operation means is not operated, a power interruption occurs when the power supply device is cut off, and when the third operation means is not operated, a power interruption occurs when the power supply device is cut off, and when the third operation means is not operated, a power interruption occurs. When the third operating means is operated after the first control is returned to the power supply, a third control (e.g., a process for adjusting the volume, a process for displaying a menu) may be executed; when the first operating means is not operated, a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off, and when the first operating means is operated, the first control is not executed even when the power supply is restored from the power interruption; when the second operating means is not operated, a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off, and when the second operating means is operated, the second control is not executed even when the power supply is restored from the power interruption; when the third operating means is not operated, a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off, and when the third operating means is operated, the third control may be executed; when the first control is executed, it is difficult or impossible to return to a state before the first control was executed, and when the third control is executed, the third control is executed. The gaming machine is configured to be able to return to a state before the control was executed, and to execute the third control when the third operating means is operated after the setting change state has transitioned to the playable state, and to not execute the third control when the setting change state is set and the setting change state is transitioned to the playable state when the third operating means is operated, to execute the first control when the first harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state when the first operating means is not operated, to not execute the second control when the second harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state when the second operating means is not operated, and to not execute the first control even when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply device is cut off and the first harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state and the power interruption is restored.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the second harness goes from a connected state to a disconnected state while the second operating means is not being operated, the second control is not executed, so that a malfunction such as a disconnection of the second harness can be noticed immediately and the malfunction can be dealt with promptly. In addition, if an operational error occurs, such as forgetting to connect the second harness, the game can be prevented from progressing, and a highly reliable gaming machine can be provided without causing any disadvantage to the player.

In addition, the setting change state is, in principle, a state that is entered by the administrator's operation, and returning from the setting change state is also performed by the administrator, and since this is a situation in which it is not necessary to return to play as quickly as possible, no control over operations is performed, taking into consideration only erroneous operations. Also, in the setting change state, the administrator is focused on changing the settings and may not notice an erroneous operation, and for example, settings such as volume may remain at settings that the administrator did not intend, so no control over operations is performed when returning from the setting change state.

<Control when the menu button harness is disconnected and reconnected>
Next, an example of control when the menu button unit harness HC1 is disconnected and reconnected will be described.

As explained using FIG. 190(a), when the menu button unit harness HC1 is connected while all menu buttons (for example, a cross key 193a consisting of four buttons: up, down, right, and left, and an OK button 193b) are pressed, one of the pressed menu buttons is accepted according to priority, and for example, the operation of the left button, which has the highest priority, becomes valid.

Next, if you disconnect the menu button unit harness HC1 while all the menu buttons are pressed and then reconnect it, one of the pressed menu buttons will be accepted according to priority; for example, the operation of the left button, which has the highest priority, will be valid.

For example, suppose the menu button unit harness HC1 is disconnected and then connected while the left and right buttons are operated. In this case, the left button has a higher priority than the right button, so only the left button operation is valid. If the left button corresponds to decreasing the volume by one step and the right button corresponds to increasing the volume by one step, the result is that the process of decreasing the volume by one step is executed and the volume display goes down by one step. If the menu button unit harness HC1 is repeatedly connected and disconnected in this state (with both the left and right buttons operated), the volume will go down by one step each time it is connected. Then, when it reaches its lowest volume, the volume will be maintained at the same level and the volume display will also show the same.

That is, in this example, the first operating means (menu button) has at least a first operating part (left button) and a second operating part (right button), and is configured so that when the first harness (menu button unit harness HC1) changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the first operating part is being operated, a first control (a process of lowering the volume by one step) may be executed, when the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while the second operating part is being operated, a second control (a process of raising the volume by one step) may be executed, and when the first harness changes from a disconnected state to a connected state while at least the first operating part and the second operating part are being operated (a state in which all menu buttons are pressed), only the first control may be executed.

In this example, since only the first control may be executed, even if the first operating means is erroneously operated, control may be performed that does not disadvantage the player, and the player's motivation to play is not diminished.

In particular, when the first operating means is an operating means used when setting the volume, and the first operating means is an operating means capable of lowering the volume by operating the first operating unit, and the first operating means is an operating means capable of raising the volume by operating the second operating unit, only the first operating unit capable of lowering the volume is effective, so that even if the first operating means is operated erroneously, it is possible to avoid a situation in which sound effects, etc. are output at a high volume, and the player's motivation to play is not diminished.

In the above example, the left button corresponds to the operation of lowering the volume by one step, but if the left button corresponds to the operation of raising the volume by one step, the volume will increase by one step at a time as the menu button unit harness HC1 is repeatedly connected and disconnected, eventually reaching maximum volume. In addition, in the above example, the process corresponding to the left button, which has a higher priority, is executed, but the priority is not particularly limited, and the right button may have a higher priority, or the up and down buttons may have a higher (or lower) priority.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 150) includes a power supply device (e.g., the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 151) that supplies power, a first board (e.g., the relay board RB4 shown in FIG. 185), a first operating means (e.g., the volume button 193a) that is connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., the menu button unit harness HC1 shown in FIG. 185), a second operating means (e.g., the MAX bet button 132, the start lever 135), and a control means for controlling a game based on one of a plurality of setting values. and a main control means (e.g., a main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 152) for controlling the game machine, the main control means being capable of setting one state from a plurality of states including at least a playable state in which the game can be played, a setting confirmation state (e.g., a setting change mode) in which the currently set setting value can be confirmed, and a setting change state (e.g., a setting change mode) in which one setting value can be set from the plurality of setting values, the first operation means being a first operation unit (e.g., the left button of the volume button 193a) and a second operation unit The game machine has at least a volume button 193a (e.g., a right button of the volume button 193a), and is configured to execute a first control (e.g., a process of lowering the volume by one step) when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off when the first operation unit is not operated, and when the first operation unit is operated after the power interruption is restored when the first operation unit is not operated, a first control (e.g., a process of lowering the volume by one step) may be executed. When the second operation unit is not operated, a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off, and when the second operation unit is not operated, a second control (e.g., a process of raising the volume by one step) may be executed. When the second operation unit is not operated, a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off, and when the second operation unit is not operated, a third control (e.g., a process of inserting three medals (credits) that are electronically stored, or a reel rotation start process of starting the rotation of all reels 110 to 112) may be executed when the first operation unit is operated. a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off when the second operation unit is not operated, and the first control may be executed even when the power interruption is restored when the first operation unit is operated; a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off when the second operation unit is not operated, and the second control may be executed even when the power interruption is restored when the second operation unit is operated; a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off when the second operation unit is not operated, and the third control is not executed when the power interruption is restored when the second operation unit is operated; when the first control is executed, a state before the first control is executed is possible; when the second control is executed, a state before the second control is executed is possible; even when the third control is executed, it is difficult or impossible to return to the state before the third control is executed; when the first operation unit is operated after transition from the setting confirmation state to the playable state, the first control may be executed; The gaming machine is configured such that, when the second operation unit is operated after the first operation unit is set, the second control may be executed; when the setting value is being confirmed in the setting confirmation state and the first operation unit is being operated, the first control is not executed even if the setting confirmation state transitions from the playable state to the playable state; when the setting value is being confirmed in the setting confirmation state and the second operation unit is being operated, the second control is not executed even if the setting confirmation state transitions from the playable state to the playable state to the playable state; when the first operation unit is being operated and the first harness transitions from a non-connected state to a connected state, the first control may be executed; when the second operation unit is being operated and the first harness transitions from a non-connected state to a connected state, the second control may be executed; and when the first operation unit and the second operation unit are at least being operated and the first harness transitions from a non-connected state to a connected state, only the first control may be executed.

In the gaming machine according to this embodiment, only the first control may be executed, so even if the first operating means is erroneously operated, control may be performed that does not disadvantage the player, and the player's motivation to play is not diminished.

In addition, the setting confirmation state is, in principle, a state that is entered by an administrator's operation, and returning from the setting confirmation state is also performed by the administrator, and since this is a situation in which it is not necessary to return to play as quickly as possible, no control over operations is performed, taking into consideration only incorrect operations. Also, in the setting confirmation state, the administrator is concentrating on checking the settings and there is a risk that an incorrect operation will not be noticed, and for example, settings such as volume may remain at settings that the administrator did not intend, so no control over operations is performed when returning from the setting confirmation state.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 150) includes a power supply device (e.g., the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 151) that supplies power, a first board (e.g., the relay board RB4 shown in FIG. 185), a first operating means (e.g., the volume button 193a) that is connected to the first board via a first harness (e.g., the menu button unit harness HC1 shown in FIG. 185), a second operating means (e.g., the MAX bet button 132, the start lever 135), and a control device related to the game based on one of a plurality of setting values. and a main control means (e.g., a main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 152) for performing the above-mentioned operations, wherein the main control means is capable of setting one state from a plurality of states including at least a playable state in which a game can be played, a setting confirmation state (e.g., a setting change mode) in which a currently set setting value can be confirmed, and a setting change state (e.g., a setting change mode) in which one setting value can be set from the plurality of setting values, and the first operation means is a first operation unit (e.g., a left button of the volume button 193a) and a second operation unit (e.g., The game machine is configured to have at least one control unit (e.g., a right button of the volume button 193a) and to execute a first control (e.g., a process of lowering the volume by one step) when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off when the first operation unit is not operated, and to execute a first control (e.g., a process of lowering the volume by one step) when the first operation unit is not operated and to execute a second control (e.g., a process of raising the volume by one step) when the second operation unit is not operated and to execute a third control (e.g., a process of inserting three medals (credits) that are electronically stored, or a reel rotation start process of starting the rotation of all reels 110 to 112) when a power interruption occurs in which the power supply of the power supply device is cut off when the second operation unit is not operated, and to execute a second control (e.g., a process of inserting three medals (credits) that are electronically stored, or a reel rotation start process of starting the rotation of all reels 110 to 112) when the first operation unit is operated. a power interruption occurs when the power supply of the power supply device is not operated, and the first control may be executed even when the power interruption is restored when the first operation unit is operated; a power interruption occurs when the power supply of the power supply device is not operated, and the second control may be executed even when the power interruption is restored when the second operation unit is operated; a power interruption occurs when the power supply of the power supply device is not operated, and the third control is not executed when the power interruption is restored when the second operation unit is operated; when the first control is executed, a return to a state before the first control is executed is possible; when the second control is executed, a return to a state before the second control is executed is possible; even when the third control is executed, it is difficult or impossible to return to a state before the third control is executed; when the first operation unit is operated after transition from the setting change state to the playable state, the first control may be executed; The gaming machine is configured such that, when the second operating unit is operated after the game has transitioned to a playable state, the second control may be executed; when the game is set to the setting change state and the first operating unit is operated, the first control is not executed even when the game transitions from the setting change state to the playable state; when the game is set to the setting change state and the second operating unit is operated, the second control is not executed even when the game transitions from the setting change state to the playable state; when the game is set to the setting change state and the second operating unit is operated, the first control may be executed when the first harness changes from a non-connected state to a connected state while the first operating unit is operated; when the first harness changes from a non-connected state to a connected state while the second operating unit is operated, the second control may be executed; and when the first harness changes from a non-connected state to a connected state while at least the first operating unit and the second operating unit are operated, only the first control may be executed.

In the gaming machine according to this embodiment, only the first control may be executed, so even if the first operating means is erroneously operated, control may be performed that does not disadvantage the player, and the player's motivation to play is not diminished.

In addition, the setting change state is, in principle, a state that is entered by the administrator's operation, and returning from the setting change state is also performed by the administrator, and since this is a situation in which it is not necessary to return to play as quickly as possible, no control over operations is performed, taking into consideration only erroneous operations. Also, in the setting change state, the administrator is focused on changing the settings and may not notice an erroneous operation, and for example, settings such as volume may remain at settings that the administrator did not intend, so no control over operations is performed when returning from the setting change state.

The first operating means may be an operating means used when setting the volume, the first operating means being an operating means capable of lowering the volume by operating the first operating unit, and the first operating means being an operating means capable of raising the volume by operating the second operating unit.

With this configuration, only the first operating unit that can lower the volume is active, so even if the first operating means is operated incorrectly, it is possible to avoid a situation in which special sounds or the like are output at a high volume, and the player's motivation to play is not diminished.

<Control when the stop button unit harness is disconnected and reconnected>
Next, with reference to FIG. 206, a description will be given of the control when the stop button unit harness HA2 is disconnected and reconnected.

Figure 206 shows an example of control when the stop button unit harness HA2 is disconnected and reconnected.

In this example, the MAX BET button 132 is operated (pressed to BET) to place the number of bets required to start playing, and the start lever 135 is operated (pressed to LEVEL) to start the rotation of all reels 110-112. After that, the stop button unit harness HA2 is unplugged, the stop button unit harness HA2 is connected, and the stop button unit harness HA2 is unplugged in this order.

As a specific example, when all reels 110 to 112 are spinning and the stop buttons 137 to 139 are not being operated (not being operated), the stop button unit harness HA2 is unplugged.

In this case, of the spinning reels 110-112, the reel that corresponds to the first stop button in the recommended push order is stopped. In this example, since the recommended push order is in order (left, center, right), the operation of the left stop button 137 is effective as the first stop operation, and the corresponding left reel 110 is stopped.

Next, the center reel 111 and right reel 112 are spinning, the left reel 110 is stopped, and the stop buttons 137 to 139 are not being operated (not being operated), and the stop button unit harness HA2 is connected, but this does not result in any change in state.

Then, the center reel 111 and right reel 112 spin, the left reel 110 stops, and the stop buttons 137 to 139 are not operated (non-operated), and the stop button unit harness HA2 is unplugged.

In this case, of the spinning center reel 111 and right reel 112, the reel that corresponds to the second stop button in the recommended push order is stopped. In this example, since the recommended push order is forward (left, center, right), the operation of the center stop button 138 is effective as the second stop operation, and the corresponding center reel 111 is stopped.

Although illustration is omitted from here on, when the right reel 112 is spinning, the left reel 110 and center reel 111 are stopped, and the stop buttons 137 to 139 are not being operated (not being operated), connecting the stop button unit harness HA2 will not cause any change in state, but unplugging the stop button unit harness HA2 will stop the reel corresponding to the third stop button in the recommended push order. In this example, since the recommended push order is in order (left, center, right), the operation of the right stop button 139 is effective as the third stop operation, and the corresponding right reel 112 will be in a stopped state.

In this example, if the stop operation is performed in a button press order other than the recommended one, a penalty may be incurred, and if the stop operation is performed in the recommended button press order, the probability of winning a bell is lower (including a 0% probability of winning) compared to when the stop operation is performed in a button press order other than the recommended one.

In this example, even if the stop button unit harness HA2 is disconnected, the reels 110 to 112 can be stopped in the recommended order, so the player is not disadvantaged.

The recommended order of pressing the stop buttons 137 to 139 is not limited to forward pressing (left, center, right), but may be other orders (for example, reverse pressing (right, center, left)).

<Third stop operation, control when the stop button unit harness is disconnected during power outage>
Next, using Figure 207 (a), we will explain the control when the stop button unit harness HA2 is unplugged during power interruption during the third stop operation.

Figure 207 (a) shows an example of control when the stop button unit harness HA2 is disconnected during a power outage during the third stop operation.

In this example, when the third stop operation (in this example, pressing the right stop button 139) is being performed, a power outage occurs in which the power supply unit 252 is cut off, and during this power outage, the top button unit harness HA2 is disconnected.

In this case, even if power is restored, the winning performance will be put on hold and not executed. However, if thereafter, while the stop buttons 137 to 139 are not being operated (not being operated), a power outage occurs in which the power supply device 252 is cut off, and if the top button unit harness HA2 is connected during this power outage, the winning performance will be executed when power is restored.

In other words, in this example, if the top button unit harness HA2 is disconnected during a power outage while the winning performance is on hold, the winning performance will be put on hold and not executed even when power is restored, whereas if the top button unit harness HA2 is connected during a power outage while the winning performance is on hold, the winning performance will be executed when power is restored.

In this example, the connection status of the harness can be checked based on whether or not a winning performance is executed after power is restored, improving convenience for game center staff, etc.

<Control when the stop button unit harness is disconnected during reel rotation and power outage>
Next, using Figure 207 (b), we will explain the control when the stop button unit harness HA2 is disconnected during power outage while the reels are rotating.

Figure 207 (b) shows an example of control when the stop button unit harness HA2 is disconnected during a power outage while the reels are rotating.

In this example, while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, a power outage occurs in which the power supply unit 252 is cut off, and during this power outage the top button unit harness HA2 is disconnected.

In this case, the reels 110 to 112 are configured to rotate again after power is restored, so that the reels 110 to 112 do not stop.

In this example, even if the harness is broken, if the reels were spinning before the power was cut off, the reels can be rotated again after power is restored, and the player will not be disadvantaged.

As explained using Figures 207(a) and (b), in this example, if a power outage occurs while the winning performance is on hold, and the top button unit harness HA2 is disconnected during this power outage, the winning performance will be put on hold without being executed even when power is restored, and if a power outage occurs while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating and the top button unit harness HA2 is disconnected during this power outage, the reels 110 to 112 will start spinning again after power is restored, and the reels 110 to 112 will not stop.

In this example, the connection status of the harness can be checked based on whether or not a winning performance is executed after power is restored, which increases convenience for game store staff, etc., and even if the harness is disconnected, if the reels were spinning before the power was cut off, the reels can be rotated again after power is restored, so that players are not disadvantaged.

<Setting change operation with door closed>
Next, the setting change operation when the door is closed will be described. Prior to this explanation, however, the administrator screen, the setting change mode, and the setting confirmation mode will be described.

<Administrator screen>
The administrator screen is a screen used by an administrator, such as a store clerk, to configure various settings related to the slot machine 100. There are no particular limitations on the display content of the administrator screen, but in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 can be used to display, for example, an administrator screen SD shown in FIG.

The administrator screen SD in this example is composed of a title display of "System Settings" which indicates that it is an administrator screen, and a number of types of menu displays. The menu displays in this example include time settings, error history settings, settings history, power saving settings, etc., and an administrator such as a store clerk can arbitrarily select any of the items in the menu display by operating the cross key 193a (up key, down key, right key, left key) or the OK button 193b described using FIG. 150.

For example, when the time setting item is selected on the administrator screen SD, it is possible to set the date and time, and when the error history item is selected, it is possible to display the history of errors that have occurred in the past on the gaming machine, the history of opening and closing the front door 102, the history of powering on and off and powering back on, etc. When the setting history item is selected, it is possible to display the history of past setting changes and setting confirmations, and when the power saving setting item is selected on the administrator screen SD, it is possible to set the power saving mode (for example, simple settings such as the volume setting of the speakers 272, 277 and the brightness of the LEDs and various lamps), etc.

The items selectable on the administrator screen SD are not limited to the above example, and may include, for example, a maximum volume that can only be set by the arcade manager, an error sound to be output when an error occurs (e.g., the front door 102 is opened), and the light intensity of LEDs and various lamps.

<Settings change mode>
Next, the normal setting change mode will be described with reference to Fig. 208(a), which is a diagram showing the flow of the normal setting change mode in chronological order.

<Setting change mode/Turn the setting key SW ON with the power OFF>
The state indicated by symbol T1 in Figure 208 (a) is a state in which the power supply unit 252 is OFF, the front door 102 is in an open state (door body open state), and the setting key SW is turned ON by the amusement facility manager by changing the setting key SW from OFF to ON.

In this state, the power supply unit 252 is OFF, and power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped. Therefore, although not shown in the figure, the displays of the liquid crystal display unit 157, the setting value display unit 101a, the number of coins dispensed display unit 127, etc. are not displayed, and the output sound of the speakers 272, 277 is not output.

<Settings change mode/Starting settings change mode>
The state indicated by symbol T2 in Figure 208 (a) is a state in which, with the setting key SW indicated by symbol T1 in the same figure in the ON state, the power supply SW 244 is operated by the amusement facility manager, changing the power supply of the power supply device 252 from OFF to ON.

When the power supply from the power supply device 252 (power supply means) begins, the slot machine 100 can start control to the setting change mode (setting change state) if both the conditions that the front door 102 (door body) is open and that the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state) are met.

In other words, the slot machine 100 is configured to transition to a state in which the setting value can be changed (setting change mode) when the power is turned on while the front door 102 (door body) is open and the setting key SW is being turned from OFF (first operating state) to ON (second operating state).

Specifically, when the main control unit 300 determines in steps S203 to S204 of the initial setting process described with reference to FIG. 155 that the front door 102 is open and the setting key SW is ON, it starts the setting change process described with reference to FIG. 156.

Next, in step S302 of this setting change process, the main control unit 300 sends a setting change start command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that the setting change is to begin, and when the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting change start command from the main control unit 300, it executes a process to begin displaying the administrator screen.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 208(a-1), the administrator screen SD is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and since the device has switched to the setting change mode, the setting value display device 101a displays a numerical value (in this example, 2) indicating the current setting value (in this example, setting 2), and the speakers 272, 277 output a setting change sound (in this example, the sound "Settings are being changed" to notify the user that the settings are being changed).

In addition, because the front door 102 is in an open state, the liquid crystal display device 157 issues a door open notification (in this example, the display of the text "Door is open" to notify that the front door 102 is open), and the dispensed number display 127 issues a door open notification (in this example, the lighting of a segment corresponding to the text "dr" to notify that the front door 102 is open).

<Settings change mode/changing settings>
The states indicated by symbols T3 and T4 in FIG. 208(a) are states in which the reset switch 243 has been pressed once by the manager of the gaming establishment in the setting change mode.

In steps S305 to S307 of the setting change process, the main control unit 300 changes the setting value by incrementing the currently set value 1 to 6 by 1 each time it detects an operation of the reset SW 243, and resetting it to 1 when the setting value exceeds 6.

In the states indicated by symbols T3 and T4 in FIG. 208(a), a single operation of the reset SW243 is detected, and after a change in the setting value (in this example, a change from setting 2 to setting 3) is executed, as shown in FIG. 208(a-2), a numerical value (in this example, 3) indicating the updated setting value (in this example, setting 3) is displayed on the setting value display device 101a.

In addition, because the machine is in the setting change mode, the setting change sound continues to be output from the speakers 272, 277, and because the front door 102 is in the door body open state, the LCD display device 157 and the dispensed number display 127 continue to notify that the door is open.

<Settings change mode/settings confirmation>
The states indicated by symbols T5 and T6 in FIG. 208(a) are states in which the start lever 135 has been pressed once by the manager of the gaming establishment in the setting change mode.

If the main control unit 300 determines in step S307 of the setting change process that the start lever 135 has been operated, then in the following steps S308 to S309, it stores (confirms) the setting value displayed on the setting value display device 101a as the new setting value, erases the display on the setting value display device 101a, and hides the setting value.

In the states indicated by symbols T5 and T6 in FIG. 208(a), operation of the start lever 135 is detected in the setting change mode, so the setting value displayed on the setting value display device 101a (in this example, setting 3) is stored (confirmed) as the new setting value, and then the display of the setting value on the setting value display device 101a is erased, as shown in FIG. 208(a-3).

In addition, since this state is the setting change mode, the setting change sound continues to be output from the speakers 272, 277, and since the front door 102 is in the door body open state, the door open notification continues from the liquid crystal display device 157 and the dispensed number display 127.

<Settings change mode/Exiting settings change mode>
The state indicated by symbol T7 in FIG. 208(a) is a state in which the setting key SW has been turned OFF by an administrator of the gaming establishment in the setting change mode by changing the setting key SW from ON to OFF.

The slot machine 100 is configured to end the setting change mode when the setting key SW is changed from ON (second operating state) to OFF (first operating state) in the setting change mode.

As a specific example, when the main control unit 300 determines in step S310 of the setting change process that the setting key SW is OFF, it sends a setting change end command indicating that the setting change is to be ended to the first sub-control unit 400, and when the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting change end command from the main control unit 300, it executes a process to end the display of the administrator screen SD.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 208 (a-4), the administrator screen SD displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 is erased, but because the front door 102 is in the door body open state, the door open notification displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

In addition to the door open notification by the LCD display device 157, the dispensed number display 127 continues to notify the user that the door is open, and the speakers 272, 277 output a door open notification sound (in this example, a sound saying "The door is open" to notify the user that the front door 102 is open).

The state indicated by the symbol T8 in FIG. 208(a) is the state in which the front door 102 is closed. In this state, the front door 102 has changed from a door open state (open state) to a door body closed state (closed state), and therefore, although not shown in the figure, the door open notification by the liquid crystal display device 157, the door open notification by the payout number display 127, and the output of the door open notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277 all end, and the game transitions to the normal game state (playable state).

<Settings confirmation mode>
Next, the normal setting check mode will be described with reference to Fig. 208(b), which is a diagram showing the flow of the normal setting check mode in chronological order.

<Settings check mode/Front door: Door body closed>
The state indicated by the symbol T1 in Figure 208 (b) is a state in which the power supply device 252 is ON, the front door 102 is in the door body closed state, and normal game play is being performed.

In this state, normal play is in progress, so the normal presentation is executed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and normal presentation background music is output from the speakers 272, 277.

<Settings check mode/Front door: Door closed → Door open>
The state indicated by the symbol T2 in Figure 208 (b) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened in the door closed state indicated by the symbol T1 in the same figure, and the front door 102 changes from the door closed state to the door open state.

In this state, since the front door 102 is in an open state, a door open notification (in this example, the text "Door is open" is displayed to notify that the front door 102 is in an open state) is executed on the liquid crystal display device 157, although this is not shown in the figure.

In addition to the door open notification by the liquid crystal display device 157, the dispensed number display 127 also executes a door open notification (in this example, lighting up a segment corresponding to the letters "dr" to notify that the front door 102 is open), and outputs a door open notification sound from the speakers 272, 277 (in this example, the sound "The door is open" to notify that the front door 102 is open).

<Settings check mode/Power ON, front door (door open) and setting key SW ON>
The state indicated by symbol T3 in Figure 208 (b) is a state in which the power supply unit 252 indicated by symbol T2 in the same figure is ON, the front door 102 is in an open state, and the setting key SW is turned ON by the amusement facility manager by changing the setting key SW from OFF to ON.

When the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state (open state), the slot machine 100 can start control to a setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) when the setting key SW (operation means) is operated from OFF (first operation state) to ON (second operation state).

In other words, the slot machine 100 is configured to transition to a state in which the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode) when the setting key SW is turned from OFF (first operating state) to ON (second operating state) while the power is on.

Specifically, the main control unit 300 starts the setting confirmation process when it determines that the preset setting value confirmation valid period is in progress (for example, a period that is not in the MAX bet state (a state in which the number of medals required to start one game (3 medals in this example) have been bet, or a state in which replay is in progress)) and that the setting key SW is ON.

Next, in this setting confirmation process, the main control unit 300 sends a setting confirmation start command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that setting confirmation is to begin, and when the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting confirmation start command from the main control unit 300, it executes a process to begin displaying the administrator screen.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 208(b-2), the administrator screen SD is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and since the device has switched to the setting confirmation mode, the setting value display device 101a displays a numerical value (in this example, 3) indicating the current setting value (in this example, setting 3), and the speakers 272, 277 output a setting confirmation sound (in this example, the sound "Setting confirmation in progress" to notify that the setting is being confirmed).

In addition, because the front door 102 is in an open state, the liquid crystal display device 157 issues a door open notification (in this example, the display of the text "Door is open" to notify that the front door 102 is open), and the dispensed number display 127 issues a door open notification (in this example, the lighting of a segment corresponding to the text "dr" to notify that the front door 102 is open).

<Settings Check Mode/Reset SW Press Operation>
The states indicated by symbols T4 and T5 in FIG. 208(b) are states in which the reset switch 243 has been pressed once by the manager of the gaming establishment in the setting confirmation mode.

In the setting confirmation mode, changing the setting value using the reset SW243 is invalid, so no change (update) of the setting value is performed.

<Settings check mode/Exiting settings check mode>
The state indicated by symbol T6 in FIG. 208(b) is a state in which the setting key SW has been turned OFF by the manager of the gaming establishment in the setting confirmation mode by changing the setting key SW from ON to OFF.

The slot machine 100 is configured to end the setting confirmation mode when the setting key SW is changed from ON (second operating state) to OFF (first operating state) while in the setting confirmation mode.

As a specific example, when the main control unit 300 determines that the setting key SW is OFF during the setting value confirmation process, it sends a setting confirmation end command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that the setting confirmation is to be ended, and when the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting confirmation end command from the main control unit 300, it executes a process to end the display of the administrator screen.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 208 (b-4), the administrator screen SD displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 is erased, but because the front door 102 is in the door body open state, the door open notification displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

In addition to the door open notification by the liquid crystal display device 157, the dispensed number display 127 also executes a door open notification (in this example, lighting up a segment corresponding to the letters "dr" to notify that the front door 102 is open), and outputs a door open notification sound from the speakers 272, 277 (in this example, the sound "The door is open" to notify that the front door 102 is open).

Furthermore, since the setting confirmation mode has ended, the display of the setting value on the setting value display device 101a is erased.

<Door closing in setting confirmation mode>
Next, the door closing in the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to Fig. 209(a). Fig. 209(a) is a diagram showing an example of a time series in which a game becomes available when the front door 102 is closed in the setting confirmation mode.

Note that the state indicated by symbol T1 in Figure 209(a) is the same as the normal game state indicated by symbol T1 in Figure 208(b) except that the setting key SW is ON, so its explanation will be omitted.

<Door closing in setting confirmation mode/Front door: Door body closed state → Door body open state>
The state indicated by the symbol T2 in Figure 209(a) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened in the door closed state indicated by the symbol T1 in the same figure, and the front door 102 changes from the door closed state to the door open state.

The slot machine 100 is configured to start control to a setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) when the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that the front door 102 (door body) is in a door closed state (closed state) and the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state) and the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that the front door 102 (door body) is in a door open state (open state).

In the state indicated by the symbol T2 in FIG. 209(a), the conditions for initiating control from the normal game state (playable state) to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) are met, and the state transitions to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state), so that, as shown in FIG. 209(a-2), the liquid crystal display device 157 displays the administrator screen SD, the setting value display device 101a displays a number (in this example, 3) indicating the current setting value (in this example, setting 3), and the speakers 272, 277 output a setting confirmation sound (in this example, the sound "Setting confirmation in progress" to notify that the setting is being confirmed).

In addition, because the front door 102 is in an open state, the liquid crystal display device 157 issues a door open notification (in this example, the display of the text "Door is open" to notify that the front door 102 is open), and the dispensed number display 127 issues a door open notification (in this example, the lighting of a segment corresponding to the text "dr" to notify that the front door 102 is open).

<Door closing in setting confirmation mode/Front door: Door body open state → Door body closed state>
The state indicated by symbol T3 in Figure 209(a) is a state in which the front door 102 is closed in the door body open state indicated by symbol T2 in the same figure, and the front door 102 changes from the door body open state to the door body closed state.

The slot machine 100 of this example is configured to start control to a playable state when the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state (open state) and the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state) in a setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) in which the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that the front door 102 (door body) is in a closed state (closed state).

In the state indicated by the symbol T3 in FIG. 209(a), the conditions for starting control to switch from the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) to the normal game state (playable state) are met, and the game transitions to the normal game state (playable state), so that, as shown in FIG. 209(a-3), the liquid crystal display device 157 executes a normal presentation and outputs normal presentation background music from the speakers 272, 277.

Note that the state indicated by symbol T4 in Figure 209(a) is the same as the state indicated by symbol T2 in the same figure, so its description is omitted.

<Door Closing in Setting Check Mode (Modified Example)>
Next, door closing in the setting check mode (variation) will be described with reference to Fig. 209(b) , which is a time-series diagram showing an example in which the setting check mode is maintained when the front door 102 is closed in the setting check mode.

Note that the states indicated by symbols T1 and T2 in Figure 209(b) are the same as the states indicated by symbols T1 and T2 in Figure 209(a), so their description will be omitted.

<Door closing in setting confirmation mode (variant example) / Front door: Door body open state → Door body closed state>
The state indicated by symbol T3 in Figure 209 (b) is a state in which the front door 102 is closed in the door body open state indicated by symbol T2 in the same figure, and the front door 102 changes from the door body open state to the door body closed state.

The slot machine 100 of this example is configured to maintain the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) when the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state (open state) and the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state) even if the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that the front door 102 (door body) is in a closed state (closed state).

In the state indicated by the symbol T3 in FIG. 209(a), the conditions for maintaining the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) are met and the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) is maintained, so as shown in FIG. 209(b-3), the liquid crystal display device 157 continues to display the administrator screen SD, the setting value display device 101a continues to display a number (in this example, 3) indicating the current setting value (in this example, setting 3), and the speakers 272, 277 continue to output a setting confirmation sound (in this example, the sound "Setting confirmation in progress" to notify that the setting is being confirmed).

On the other hand, since the front door 102 has changed from an open state to a closed state, the door open notification by the LCD display device 157 and the door open notification by the dispensed number display 127 have ended.

Note that the state indicated by symbol T4 in Figure 209(b) is the same as the state indicated by symbol T2 in the same figure, so its description is omitted.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 1)>
Next, the setting change operation (Example 1) in the door closed state will be described with reference to Fig. 210. Fig. 210 is a time-series diagram showing an example of control when the setting change operation (Example 1) is performed in the door closed state.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 1)/Turn setting key SW ON with power OFF>
The state indicated by the symbol T1 in Figure 210 is a state in which the power supply unit 252 is OFF, the front door 102 is in an open door state (open state), and the setting key SW is turned from OFF to ON by the amusement facility manager, after which the front door 102 is closed (closed state).

In this state, the power supply unit 252 is OFF, and power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped. Therefore, although not shown in the figure, the displays of the liquid crystal display unit 157, the setting value display unit 101a, the number of coins dispensed display unit 127, etc. are not displayed, and the output sound of the speakers 272, 277 is not output.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 1)/Power ON with door closed>
The state indicated by symbol T2 in Figure 210 is a state in which, with the door body closed and the setting key SW in the ON position indicated by symbol T1 in the same figure, the power supply SW 244 is operated by the amusement facility manager, changing the power supply of the power supply unit 252 from OFF to ON.

When the power supply from the power supply device 252 (power supply means) is started, the slot machine 100 is configured to start control to the normal game state (playable state) without starting control to the setting change mode (setting change state) if the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that the front door 102 (door body) is in the door closed state (closed state), even if the condition that the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state) is satisfied.

In the state indicated by the symbol T2 in FIG. 210, when the power supply of the power supply device 252 changes from OFF to ON and power supply to each control unit and each device, such as the main control unit 300, sub control units 400, 500, etc., begins, the setting key SW is ON, but since the front door 102 is in the closed state, the game does not switch to the setting change mode but switches to the normal game mode, and as shown in FIG. 210(a), the normal presentation is executed on the liquid crystal display device 157 and normal presentation background music is output from the speakers 272, 277.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 1) / Front door: Door body closed state → Door body open state>
The state indicated by reference symbol T3 in FIG. 210 is a state in which the front door 102 is opened in the door body closed state indicated by reference symbol T2 in the same figure, and the front door 102 changes from the door body closed state to the door body open state.

When the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that the front door 102 (door body) is in a door closed state (closed state) and the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state) and the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that the front door 102 (door body) is in a door open state (open state), the slot machine 100 is configured to start control to a setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) without starting control to a setting change mode (setting change state).

In the state indicated by the symbol T3 in FIG. 210, the conditions for initiating control from the normal game state (playable state) to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) are met, and the state transitions to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state), so that, as shown in FIG. 210(b), the liquid crystal display device 157 displays the administrator screen SD, the setting value display device 101a displays a number (in this example, 2) indicating the current setting value (in this example, setting 2), and the speakers 272, 277 output a setting confirmation sound (in this example, the sound "Setting confirmation in progress" to notify that the setting is being confirmed).

In addition, in this state, since the front door 102 is in an open state, the liquid crystal display device 157 issues a door open notification (in this example, the display of the text "Door is open" to notify that the front door 102 is open), and the dispensed number display 127 issues a door open notification (in this example, the lighting of a segment corresponding to the text "dr" to notify that the front door 102 is open).

According to this example, when the door is opened in an irregular state where the door is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state, the state can transition to the setting confirmation state without transitioning to the setting change state. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as unauthorized changes to setting values, and also allows setting confirmation work to be performed, improving convenience for game store staff, etc.

When the conditions for starting control from the normal game state (playable state) to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) are met, control to the setting change mode (setting change state) is not started and control to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) is started. However, in the playable state where the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that the front door 102 (door body) is in the door closed state (closed state) and the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state), if the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that the front door 102 (door body) is in the door open state (open state), the game may be configured to maintain the playable state without starting control to the setting change mode (setting change state).

With this configuration, if the door is opened in an irregular state where the door is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state, the game can be maintained in a playable state without transitioning to a setting change state, thereby preventing fraudulent acts such as illegally changing the setting value.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 1)/Reset SW pressing operation>
The states indicated by symbols T4 and T5 in FIG. 210 are states in which the reset switch 243 has been pressed once by the manager of the gaming establishment in the setting confirmation mode.

In the setting confirmation mode, changing the setting value using the reset SW243 is invalid, so no change to the setting value is made.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 1) / Front door: Door body open state → Door body closed state>
The state indicated by reference symbol T6 in FIG. 210 is a state in which, in the door body open state indicated by reference symbol T5 in the same figure, the front door 102 is closed and the front door 102 changes from the door body open state to the door body closed state.

As explained using FIG. 209(a), the slot machine 100 of this example is configured to start control to a playable state when the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state (open state) and the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state) in the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state), and the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that the front door 102 (door body) is in a closed state (closed state).

In the state indicated by the symbol T6 in FIG. 210, the conditions for starting control from the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) to the normal game state (playable state) are met, and the game transitions to the normal game state (playable state), so that, as shown in FIG. 210(d), the liquid crystal display device 157 executes a normal presentation and outputs normal presentation background music from the speakers 272, 277.

As explained using FIG. 209(b), in the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) in which the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state (open state) and the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state), the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) may be maintained even if the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that the front door 102 (door body) is in a closed state (closed state).

When configured in this manner, as shown in FIG. 210(d'), the liquid crystal display device 157 continues to display the administrator screen SD, the setting value display device 101a continues to display a numerical value (in this example, 3) indicating the current setting value (in this example, setting 3), and the speakers 272, 277 continue to output a setting confirmation sound (in this example, the sound "The setting is being confirmed" which notifies the user that the setting is being confirmed), while the front door 102 has changed from a door body open state to a door closed state, and therefore the door open notification by the liquid crystal display device 157 and the door open notification by the dispensed number display 127 are terminated.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 1) / Power ON → Power OFF>
The state indicated by symbol T7 in Figure 210 is a state in which, in the setting confirmation mode indicated by symbol T6 in the same figure, with the door body closed, the power switch 244 is operated by the amusement facility manager, and the power of the power supply unit 252 is changed from ON to OFF.

In this state, the power supply unit 252 is OFF, and power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped, so that, as shown in FIG. 210(e), the displays of the liquid crystal display unit 157, the setting value display unit 101a, the number of coins dispensed display unit 127, etc. are not displayed, and the output sound of the speakers 272, 277 is not output.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 1)/Start of setting change mode>
The state indicated by symbol T8 in Figure 210 is a state in which, with the setting key SW indicated by symbol T7 in the same figure in the ON state, the power supply SW 244 is operated by the amusement facility manager, changing the power of the power supply device 252 from OFF to ON.

When the power supply from the power supply device 252 (power supply means) begins, the slot machine 100 can start control to the setting change mode (setting change state) if both the conditions that the front door 102 (door body) is open and that the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state) are met.

In other words, the slot machine 100 is configured to transition to a state in which the setting value can be changed (setting change mode) when the power is turned on while the setting key SW is being turned from OFF (first operating state) to ON (second operating state).

In the state indicated by the symbol T8 in FIG. 210, the setting change mode has been entered, and as shown in FIG. 210(f), the liquid crystal display device 157 displays the administrator screen SD, the setting value display device 101a displays a numerical value (in this example, 2) indicating the current setting value (in this example, setting 2), and the speakers 272, 277 output a setting change sound (in this example, the sound "setting is being changed" to notify that the setting is being changed).

In addition, because the front door 102 is in an open state, the liquid crystal display device 157 issues a door open notification (in this example, the display of the text "Door is open" to notify that the front door 102 is open), and the dispensed number display 127 issues a door open notification (in this example, the lighting of a segment corresponding to the text "dr" to notify that the front door 102 is open).

According to this example, the irregular state in which the door body is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state can be eliminated, and the setting can be changed, thereby improving convenience for game store staff, etc.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 1)/changing setting value>
The states indicated by symbols T9 and T10 in FIG. 210 are states in which the reset switch 243 has been pressed once by the manager of the gaming facility in the setting change mode.

In this state, as one operation of the reset SW243 is detected, after a change in the setting value (in this example, a change from setting 2 to setting 3) is executed, as shown in FIG. 210(g), the setting value display device 101a displays a numerical value (in this example, 3) indicating the updated setting value (in this example, setting 3).

In addition, in this state, since the machine is in setting change mode, the setting change sound continues to be output from the speakers 272, 277, and since the front door 102 is in the door body open state, the door open notification continues from the liquid crystal display device 157 and the dispensed number display 127.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 2)>
Next, the setting change operation (Example 2) in the door closed state will be described with reference to Fig. 211. Fig. 211 is a time-series diagram showing an example of control when the setting change operation (Example 2) is performed in the door closed state.

Although not shown in the figures, the slot machine in this example is equipped with an upper door (door body) and a lower door (door body) that can be opened and closed relative to the main body 101.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 2) / Power OFF, setting key SW ON>
The state indicated by the symbol T1 in Figure 211 is a state in which the power supply unit 252 is OFF, the upper door is in a closed state (closed state), and the lower door is in an open state (open state), and the setting key SW has been changed from OFF to ON by the manager of the amusement facility.

In this state, the power supply unit 252 is OFF, and power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped. Therefore, although not shown in the figure, the displays of the liquid crystal display unit 157, the setting value display unit 101a, the number of coins dispensed display unit 127, etc. are not displayed, and the output sound of the speakers 272, 277 is not output.

<Setting change operation with doors closed (Example 2) / Power ON with upper door closed and lower door open>
The state indicated by symbol T2 in Figure 211 is the state in which, with the upper door closed, the lower door open, and the setting key SW in the ON position indicated by symbol T1 in the same figure, the power supply SW 244 is operated by the amusement facility manager, changing the power supply of the power supply unit 252 from OFF to ON.

The slot machine of this example is configured to start control to a non-playable state and to notify the player that the door is open, without starting control to the setting change mode (setting change state), if the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that either the upper door (door body) or the lower door (door body) is in a door closed state (closed state) when the power supply from the power supply device 252 (power supply means) is started, even if the condition that the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state) is satisfied.

In the state indicated by the symbol T2 in FIG. 211, when the power supply of the power supply device 252 changes from OFF to ON and power supply to each control unit and each device, such as the main control unit 300, sub control units 400, 500, etc., begins, the setting key SW is ON, but since the upper door is in the door closed state, the game does not enter the setting change mode and enters a state where play is not possible. As shown in FIG. 211(a), the liquid crystal display device 157 issues a door open notification (in this example, the text "Door is open" is displayed to notify that the front door 102 is open), and the speakers 272, 277 output a door open notification sound (in this example, the sound "Door is open" to notify that the front door 102 is open).

In addition to (or instead of) the door open notification by the liquid crystal display device 157 and the output of the door open notification sound by the speakers 272, 277, the dispensed number display 127 may also perform a door open notification as shown in FIG. 211(c) (in this example, lighting up a segment corresponding to the letters "dr" to notify that the front door 102 is open).

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 2) / upper door closed, lower door open → lower door open>
The state indicated by symbol T3 in Figure 211 is a state in which, in the upper door closed state and the lower door open state indicated by symbol T2 in the same figure, the lower door has changed from an open state to a closed state.

In this example, the slot machine is configured to start control to normal play (playable state) without starting control to the setting change mode (setting change state) even if the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that either the upper door (door body) or the lower door (door body) is in the door closed state (closed state) and the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state) in a play-disabled state. Even if the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that both the upper door (door body) and the lower door (door body) are in the door closed state (closed state), the slot machine is configured to start control to normal play (playable state) without starting control to the setting change mode (setting change state).

In the state indicated by the symbol T3 in FIG. 211, the conditions for starting control from a non-playable state to a normal playable state (playable state) are met, so the game transitions to the normal playable state without transitioning to the setting change mode, and as shown in FIG. 211(b), the normal presentation is executed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and normal presentation background music is output from the speakers 272, 277.

According to this example, when both doors are closed in an irregular state where one of the doors is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state, the game can be transitioned to a playable state without transitioning to a setting change state, thereby preventing fraudulent acts such as illegally changing the setting value.

<Setting change operation in door closed state (Example 2) / upper and lower doors closed state → upper and lower doors open state>
The state indicated by symbol T4 in Figure 211 is a state in which the upper door and the lower door have changed from a closed state to an open state in the upper door closed state and the lower door closed state indicated by symbol T3 in the same figure.

In this example, the slot machine is configured to start control to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) without starting control to the setting change mode (setting change state) even if the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that either the upper door (door body) or the lower door (door body) is in the door closed state (closed state) and the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state) in a play-disabled state. Even if the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that both the upper door (door body) and the lower door (door body) are in the door open state (open state), the slot machine is configured to start control to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) without starting control to the setting change mode (setting change state).

In the state indicated by the symbol T4 in FIG. 211, the conditions for initiating control from the non-playable state to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) are met, so the state transitions to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) without transitioning to the setting change mode, and as shown in FIG. 211(c), the liquid crystal display device 157 displays the administrator screen SD, the setting value display device 101a displays a number (in this example, 2) indicating the current setting value (in this example, setting 2), and the speakers 272, 277 output a setting confirmation sound (in this example, the sound "Setting confirmation in progress" to notify that the setting is being confirmed).

In addition, because the front door 102 is in an open state, the liquid crystal display device 157 issues a door open notification (in this example, the display of the text "Door is open" to notify that the front door 102 is open), and the dispensed number display 127 issues a door open notification (in this example, the lighting of a segment corresponding to the text "dr" to notify that the front door 102 is open).

According to this example, when both doors are opened in an irregular state where one of the doors is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state, the state can transition to the setting confirmation state without transitioning to the setting change state. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as unauthorized changes to setting values, and also allows the setting confirmation process to be performed, improving convenience for game store staff, etc.

Note that the states indicated by symbols T6 to T10 in the following Figure 211 are the same as the states indicated by symbols T6 to T10 in Figure 210, except that the closed state of the front door 102 is replaced by the closed state of the upper and lower doors, and the open state of the front door 102 is replaced by the open state of the upper and lower doors, and therefore a description thereof will be omitted.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 3)>
Next, the setting change operation (Example 3) in the door closed state will be described with reference to Fig. 212. Fig. 212 is a time-series diagram showing an example of control when the setting change operation (Example 3) is performed in the door closed state.

Although not shown in the figures, the slot machine in this example is equipped with an upper door (door body) and a lower door (door body) that can be opened and closed relative to the main body 101.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 3) / Power OFF, setting key SW ON>
The state indicated by symbol T1 in Figure 212 is a state in which the power supply unit 252 is OFF, the upper door is in an open state (open state), and the lower door is in an open state (open state), and the setting key SW has been changed from OFF to ON by the manager of the gaming facility.

In this state, the power supply unit 252 is OFF, and power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped. Therefore, although not shown in the figure, the displays of the liquid crystal display unit 157, the setting value display unit 101a, the number of coins dispensed display unit 127, etc. are not displayed, and the output sound of the speakers 272, 277 is not output.

<Setting change operation with doors closed (Example 3) / Power ON with upper and lower doors open>
The state indicated by symbol T2 in Figure 212 is a state in which, with the upper door open, the lower door open and the setting key SW in the ON position indicated by symbol T1 in the same figure, the power supply SW 244 is operated by the amusement facility manager, changing the power supply of the power supply unit 252 from OFF to ON.

<Setting change operation in door closed state (Example 3) / upper and lower doors open state → upper and lower doors closed state>
The state indicated by symbol T3 in Figure 212 is the state in which the upper door and the lower door change from an open state to a closed state immediately after the power is turned on in the upper door closed state and the lower door open state indicated by symbol T2 in the same figure.

The slot machine of this example is configured so that even if the condition that the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state) is met when power supply from the power supply device 252 (power supply means) is started, if the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that either the upper door (door body) or the lower door (door body) (in this example, the lower door) is in the door closed state (closed state), the slot machine does not start control to the setting change mode (setting change state) and starts control to a playable state, but does not issue a door open notification.

In the state indicated by the symbol T3 in FIG. 212, the conditions for starting control to the normal game state (playable state) are met, and the game transitions to the normal game state (playable state), so that, as shown in FIG. 212(a), the liquid crystal display device 157 executes a normal presentation and outputs normal presentation background music from the speakers 272, 277.

In addition, in this state, the door open notification is not performed, so the door open notification is not performed by the liquid crystal display device 157, the door open notification is not performed by the dispensed number display 127, and the door open notification sound is not output by the speakers 272, 277.

According to this example, in an irregular state where one of the doors is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state, the game can be switched to a playable state without switching to a setting change state, thereby preventing fraudulent acts such as illegally changing the setting value.

<Setting change operation in door closed state (Example 3) / upper and lower doors closed state → upper and lower doors open state>
The state indicated by symbol T4 in Figure 212 is a state in which the upper door and the lower door have changed from a closed state to an open state in the upper door closed state and the lower door closed state indicated by symbol T3 in the same figure.

In this example, the slot machine is configured to start control to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) without starting control to the setting change mode (setting change state) even if the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that either the upper door (door body) or the lower door (door body) is in the door closed state (closed state) and the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state) and the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that both the upper door (door body) and the lower door (door body) are in the door open state (open state).

In the state indicated by the symbol T4 in FIG. 212, the conditions for starting control from the playable state to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) are met, so the state transitions to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) without transitioning to the setting change mode, and as shown in FIG. 212(b), the liquid crystal display device 157 displays the administrator screen SD, the setting value display device 101a displays a number (in this example, 2) indicating the current setting value (in this example, setting 2), and the speakers 272, 277 output a setting confirmation sound (in this example, the sound "Setting confirmation in progress" to notify that the setting is being confirmed).

In addition, because the upper and lower doors are open, the liquid crystal display device 157 issues a door open notification (in this example, the text "Doors are open" is displayed to notify that the upper and lower doors are open), and the dispensed number display 127 issues a door open notification (in this example, the segment corresponding to the letters "dr" is lit to notify that the upper and lower doors are open).

According to this example, when both doors are opened in an irregular state where one of the doors is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state, the state can transition to the setting confirmation state without transitioning to the setting change state. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as unauthorized changes to setting values, and also allows the setting confirmation process to be performed, improving convenience for game store staff, etc.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 3)/Error detection state>
The states indicated by symbols T5 and T6 in FIG. 212 are states in which an error is detected in the setting check mode.

In this state, since the main control unit 300 has detected a selector error, it sets the interrupt status to an error detection state, displays an error code corresponding to the error on the dispensed coin count display 127 (in this example, it lights up the segment corresponding to the letters "CE" indicating a selector error), and prepares to send an error command corresponding to the detected error to the first sub-control unit 400.

When the first sub-controller 400 receives this error command from the main controller 300, it executes a process to start an error notification, but in this example, since displaying the administrator screen SD takes priority over an error notification, an error notification (in this example, a display including the string "Selector error") to notify of an error (in this example, a selector error) is not executed on the liquid crystal display device 157.

<Setting change operation in door closed state (Example 3) / upper door and lower door open state → lower door closed state>
The state indicated by reference symbol T7 in Figure 212 is a state in which, in the upper and lower door open state indicated by reference symbol T6 in the same figure, the lower door has changed from an open state to a closed state.

In this state, since the lower door has changed from an open state to a closed state, the setting confirmation mode is terminated and the administrator screen SD displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 is erased. Also, since an error has been detected, the dispensed number display 127 continues to notify the error, while the liquid crystal display device 157 executes the error notification that was on hold (in this example, a display including the text string "Selector error") and outputs an error notification sound from the speakers 272, 277 (in this example, the sound "Selector error" to notify the user that a selector error has occurred).

Also, because the upper door is open, the liquid crystal display device 157 issues a door open notification (in this example, the text "Door is open" is displayed to notify that the upper door is open).

<Setting change operation in door closed state (Example 3) / upper door open state → upper door closed state>
The state indicated by reference symbol T8 in FIG. 212 is a state in which the upper door has changed from an open state to a closed state in the upper door open state indicated by reference symbol T7 in the same figure.

In this state, because an error has been detected, the error notification by the dispensed number display 127, the error notification by the LCD display device 157, and the output of the error notification sound by the speakers 272 and 277 continue, but because the upper and lower doors are now in the closed state, the door open notification by the LCD display device 157 is terminated.

<Setting change operation in door closed state (Example 3) / upper and lower doors closed state → upper and lower doors open state>
The state indicated by reference symbol T9 in Figure 212 is a state in which the upper and lower doors have changed from a closed state to an open state in the upper and lower door closed state indicated by reference symbol T8 in the same figure.

In this state, because an error has been detected, the error notification continues from the dispensed number display 127, the error notification continues from the LCD display device 157, and the error notification sound continues from the speakers 272, 277. However, because the upper and lower doors are now open, the door open notification from the LCD display device 157 is resumed.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 3)/error resolution>
The states indicated by symbols T10 and T11 in FIG. 212 are states in which an error clearing operation has been performed once by the gaming establishment's manager using the reset SW243.

In this state, the main control unit 300 erases the error detection state stored in the interrupt status because the error notification termination condition is met (in this example, the error release operation by the reset SW 243 has been accepted), and transitions to setting confirmation mode, causing the setting value display device 101a to display a number (in this example, 2) indicating the current setting value (in this example, setting 2), and outputs a setting confirmation sound from the speakers 272, 277 (in this example, the sound "Settings are being confirmed" to notify that the settings are being confirmed).

In addition, because the upper and lower doors are open, the liquid crystal display device 157 issues a door open notification (in this example, the text "Doors are open" is displayed to notify that the upper and lower doors are open), and the dispensed number display 127 issues a door open notification (in this example, the segment corresponding to the letters "dr" is lit to notify that the upper and lower doors are open).

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 4)>
Next, the setting change operation (Example 4) in the door closed state will be described with reference to Fig. 213. Fig. 213 is a time-series diagram showing an example of control when the setting change operation (Example 4) is performed in the door closed state.

Although not shown in the figures, the slot machine in this example has an upper door (door body) and a lower door (door body) that can be opened and closed relative to the main body 101, and the upper door (door body) is configured to be openable only when the lower door (door body) is in the open state.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 4) / Power OFF, setting key SW ON>
The state indicated by the symbol T1 in Figure 213 is a state in which the power supply unit 252 is OFF, the upper door is in a closed state (closed state), and the lower door is in an open state (open state), and the setting key SW has been changed from OFF to ON by the manager of the amusement facility.

In this state, the power supply unit 252 is OFF, and power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped. Therefore, although not shown in the figure, the displays of the liquid crystal display unit 157, the setting value display unit 101a, the number of coins dispensed display unit 127, etc. are not displayed, and the output sound of the speakers 272, 277 is not output.

<Setting change operation with doors closed (Example 4)/Power ON with upper door closed and lower door open>
The state indicated by symbol T2 in Figure 213 is a state in which, with the upper door closed, the lower door open, and the setting key SW in the ON position indicated by symbol T1 in the same figure, the power supply SW 244 is operated by the amusement facility manager, changing the power supply of the power supply unit 252 from OFF to ON.

The slot machine in this example is configured to start control to a playable state and to notify the player that the door is open, without starting control to the setting change mode (setting change state), if the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that either the upper door (door body) or the lower door (door body) (in this example, the lower door) is in the door open state (open state), even if the condition that the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state) is met when power supply from the power supply device 252 (power supply means) is started.

In other words, in this example, the condition for "starting control to a playable state and issuing a door open notification without starting control to the setting change mode (setting change state)" is that the lower door (door body) of the upper door (door body) and lower door (door body) is in the door open state (open state). Note that the condition for "starting control to a playable state and issuing a door open notification without starting control to the setting change mode (setting change state)" may also be that the upper door (door body) is in the door open state (open state).

In the state indicated by the symbol T2 in FIG. 213, the conditions for starting control to the normal game state (playable state) are met, and a transition to the normal game state (playable state) occurs, and therefore, as shown in FIG. 213(a), the normal presentation is being performed on the liquid crystal display device 157.

In addition, because the lower door is open, a door open notification sound is output from speakers 272, 277, and a door open notification is issued on the dispensed number display 127 (in this example, the segment corresponding to the letters "dr" is lit to notify that the lower door is open).

According to this example, in an irregular state where one of the doors is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state, the game can be switched to a playable state without switching to a setting change state, thereby preventing fraudulent acts such as illegally changing the setting value.

<Setting change operation in door closed state (Example 4) / Lower door open state → Lower door closed state>
The state indicated by symbol T3 in Figure 213 is a state in which, in the upper door closed state and the lower door open state indicated by symbol T2 in the same figure, the lower door is closed, resulting in the upper door closed state and the lower door closed state.

In this state, since the lower door is closed, as shown in FIG. 213(b), no door open notification is issued by the liquid crystal display device 157, no door open notification is issued by the dispensed number display 127, and no door open notification sound is output by the speakers 272, 277.

<Setting change operation in door closed state (Example 4) / upper door closed state → upper door open state, lower door closed state → lower door open state>
The state indicated by symbol T4 in Figure 213 is a state in which the upper door and the lower door are opened from the upper door closed state and the lower door closed state indicated by symbol T3 in the same figure, resulting in an upper door open state and a lower door open state.

In this state, since the lower door is open, as shown in FIG. 213(c), a door open notification sound is output from speakers 272, 277, and a door open notification is issued on the dispensed number display 127 (in this example, the segment corresponding to the letters "dr" is lit to notify that the lower door is open).

In this example, even if the condition that the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state) is satisfied when power supply by the power supply device 252 (power supply means) is started, if the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that either the upper door (door body) or the lower door (door body) (in this example, the lower door) is in the door open state (open state), the control to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) is not started even if the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state) and both the upper door (door body) and the lower door (door body) are in the door open state (open state).

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 4) / Power ON → Power OFF>
The state indicated by symbol T5 in Figure 213 is a state in which, with the upper door and lower door open as indicated by symbol T4 in the same figure, the lower door is closed, resulting in the upper door open and lower door closed states, and the power supply SW 244 is operated by the amusement facility manager, changing the power of the power supply unit 252 from ON to OFF.

In this state, although not shown in the figure, the power supply unit 252 is OFF, and power supply to each control unit and device, such as the main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., is stopped, so the displays on the liquid crystal display unit 157, the setting value display unit 101a, the number of coins dispensed display unit 127, etc. are not displayed, and the speakers 272, 277 do not output sound.

<Setting change operation with doors closed (Example 4) / Power ON with upper door open and lower door closed>
The state indicated by symbol T6 in Figure 213 is a state in which, with the upper door open, the lower door closed, and the setting key SW in the ON position indicated by symbol T5 in the same figure, the power supply SW 244 is operated by the amusement facility manager, changing the power supply of the power supply unit 252 from OFF to ON.

The slot machine in this example is configured so that even if the condition that the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state) is met when power supply from the power supply device 252 (power supply means) is started, if the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that either the upper door (door body) or the lower door (door body) (in this example, the upper door) is in the door open state (open state), the slot machine will not start control to the setting change mode (setting change state) but will start control to a playable state and will not issue a door open notification.

In other words, in this example, the condition for "starting control to a playable state without starting control to the setting change mode (setting change state) and not issuing a door open notification" is that the upper door (door body) of the upper and lower doors (door bodies) is in an open state (open state). It is also possible to set the condition for "starting control to a playable state without starting control to the setting change mode (setting change state) and not issuing a door open notification" is that the lower door (door body) is in an open state (open state).

In this state, since the lower door is closed, as shown in FIG. 213(d), no door open notification is issued by the liquid crystal display device 157, no door open notification is issued by the dispensed number display 127, and no door open notification sound is output by the speakers 272, 277.

According to this example, in an irregular state where one of the doors is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state, the game can be switched to a playable state without switching to a setting change state, thereby preventing fraudulent acts such as illegally changing the setting value.

<Setting change operation in door closed state (Example 4) / Lower door closed state → Lower door open state>
The state indicated by symbol T7 in Figure 213 is a state in which, in the upper door open state and the lower door closed state indicated by symbol T6 in the same figure, the lower door is opened, resulting in both the upper door open state and the lower door open state.

In this state, since the lower door is open, as shown in FIG. 213(e), a door open notification sound is output from speakers 272, 277, and a door open notification is issued on the dispensed number display 127 (in this example, the segment corresponding to the letters "dr" is lit to notify that the lower door is open).

In this example, even if the condition that the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state) is satisfied when power supply by the power supply device 252 (power supply means) is started, if the opening/closing sensor (determination means) determines that either the upper door (door body) or the lower door (door body) (in this example, the lower door) is in the door open state (open state), the control to the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) is not started even if the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state) and both the upper door (door body) and the lower door (door body) are in the door open state (open state).

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 5)>
Next, the setting change operation (Example 5) in the door closed state will be described with reference to Fig. 214. Fig. 214 is a time-series diagram showing an example of control when the setting change operation (Example 5) is performed in the door closed state.

Although not shown in the figures, the slot machine in this example is equipped with an upper door (door body) and a lower door (door body) that can be opened and closed relative to the main body 101.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 5)/Start of setting change mode>
The state indicated by symbol T1 in FIG. 214 is a state in which, with the setting key SW in the ON state, the power supply SW 244 is operated by the manager of the gaming establishment, and the power supply device 252 is changed from OFF to ON.

When the power supply from the power supply device 252 (power supply means) is started, the slot machine of this example can start control to the setting change mode (setting change state) if both the conditions that the upper door (door body) and the lower door (door body) are open and the setting key SW (operation means) is operated to ON (second operation state) are met.

In other words, the slot machine of this example is configured to transition to a state in which the setting value can be changed (setting change mode) when the power is turned on while the upper door (door body) and lower door (door body) are open and the setting key SW is being turned from OFF (first operating state) to ON (second operating state).

In the state indicated by the symbol T1 in FIG. 214, the conditions for switching to the setting change mode are met and the mode is switched to the setting change mode, so that, as shown in FIG. 214(a), the liquid crystal display device 157 displays the administrator screen SD, the setting value display device 101a displays a numerical value (in this example, 2) indicating the current setting value (in this example, setting 2), and the speakers 272, 277 output a setting change sound (in this example, the sound "setting is being changed" to notify that the setting is being changed).

In addition, since this state indicates that the upper and lower doors are in an open state, the liquid crystal display device 157 issues a door open notification (in this example, the text "Doors are open" is displayed to notify that the upper and lower doors are open), and the dispensed number display 127 issues a door open notification (in this example, the segment corresponding to the text "dr" is lit to notify that the upper and lower doors are open).

<Setting change operation when door is closed (Example 5)/changing setting value>
The states indicated by symbols T2 and T3 in FIG. 214 are states in which the reset switch 243 has been pressed once by the manager of the gaming facility in the setting change mode.

In this state, a single operation of the reset SW243 is detected, and after a change in the setting value (in this example, a change from setting 2 to setting 3) is executed, as shown in FIG. 214(b), the setting value display device 101a displays a numerical value (in this example, 3) indicating the updated setting value (in this example, setting 3).

In addition, because the setting change mode is in effect, the setting change sound continues to be output from the speakers 272, 277, and because the upper and lower doors are in the open door body state, the LCD display device 157 continues to notify that the doors are open, and the dispensed number display 127 continues to notify that the doors are open.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 5) / Power outage and power restoration>
The states indicated by symbols T4 and T5 in FIG. 214 are states in which, in the setting change mode, the power supply of the power supply device 252 changes from ON to OFF, causing a power outage, and then changes back ON to restore power.

The slot machine of this example is configured to cut off the power supply from the power supply device 252 (power supply means) before operating the start lever 135 (operation to confirm the setting value) in the setting change mode (setting change state), and then display the setting value that was set (confirmed) before the power supply was cut off if the upper door (door body) and lower door (door body) are open when power supply from the power supply device 252 (power supply means) is started.

In FIG. 214, the states indicated by symbols T4 and T5 are when power is cut off and restored before the start lever 135 is operated (operation to confirm the setting value) in the setting change mode (setting change state), and the upper door (door body) and lower door (door body) are in the open state when power is restored. As a result, as shown in FIG. 214(c), the setting value display device 101a displays a numerical value (in this example, 2) indicating the setting value (in this example, setting 2) that was set (confirmed) before the power supply was cut off, and the speakers 272 and 277 output a setting change sound (in this example, the sound "setting change in progress" to notify that the setting is being changed).

In addition, since this state indicates that the upper and lower doors are in an open state, the liquid crystal display device 157 issues a door open notification (in this example, the text "Doors are open" is displayed to notify that the upper and lower doors are open), and the dispensed number display 127 issues a door open notification (in this example, the segment corresponding to the text "dr" is lit to notify that the upper and lower doors are open).

<Setting change operation when door is closed (Example 5)/changing setting value>
The states indicated by symbols T6 and T7 in FIG. 214 are states in which the reset switch 243 has been pressed once by the manager of the gaming establishment in the setting change mode.

In this state, a single operation of the reset SW243 is detected, and after a change in the setting value (in this example, a change from setting 2 to setting 3) is executed, as shown in FIG. 214(d), the setting value display device 101a displays a numerical value (in this example, 3) indicating the updated setting value (in this example, setting 3).

In addition, because the machine is in the setting change mode, the setting change sound continues to be output from the speakers 272, 277, and because the upper and lower doors are open, the LCD display device 157 continues to notify the machine that the doors are open, and the dispensed number display 127 continues to notify the machine that the doors are open.

<Setting change operation with door closed (Example 5) / Power outage and power restoration>
The states indicated by symbols T8 and T9 in FIG. 214 are states in which, in the setting change mode, the power supply of the power supply device 252 changes from ON to OFF, causing a power outage, and then changes back ON to restore power.

The slot machine in this example is configured to, after cutting off the power supply from the power supply device 252 (power supply means) before operating the start lever 135 (operation to confirm the setting value) in the setting change mode (setting change state), display the (unconfirmed) setting value that was displayed immediately before the power supply was cut off if at least one of the upper door (door body) and lower door (door body) is in a closed state (in this example, the upper door and lower door) when power supply from the power supply device 252 (power supply means) is started.

In FIG. 214, the states indicated by symbols T8 and T9 are when power is cut off and restored before the start lever 135 is operated (to confirm the setting value) in the setting change mode (setting change state), and the upper door (door body) and lower door (door body) are closed when power is restored. As a result, as shown in FIG. 214(e), the setting value display device 101a displays a number (in this example, 3) indicating the (unconfirmed) setting value (in this example, setting 3) that was displayed immediately before the power supply was cut off, and the speakers 272, 277 output a setting change sound (in this example, the sound "setting change in progress" to notify that the setting is being changed).

In addition, in this state, since the upper and lower doors are closed, the door open notification by the liquid crystal display device 157 and the door open notification by the dispensed number display 127 are terminated.

According to this example, when the power supply from the power supply means is cut off before the operation to confirm the setting value is performed in the setting change state, and then when the power supply from the power supply means is started again and at least one of the upper door (door body) and the lower door (door body) is in a closed state, the (unconfirmed) setting value displayed immediately before the power supply was cut off is displayed. Therefore, if the operation needs to be interrupted during the setting change or other work, the operation can be resumed from where it was in the middle by turning off the power and closing the door body, thereby improving the convenience of the game store staff, etc.

In this example, power is cut off and restored before the start lever 135 is operated (operation to confirm the setting value) in the setting change mode (setting change state), and when the upper door (door body) and lower door (door body) are closed when power is restored, the (unconfirmed) setting value displayed immediately before the power supply was cut off is displayed. However, when either the upper door (door body) or the lower door (door body) is closed when power is restored, the (unconfirmed) setting value displayed immediately before the power supply was cut off may also be displayed.

<Settings change operation with door closed/Summary>
As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 150) comprises a main control means (e.g., the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 152) for controlling a game based on one of a plurality of set values, a power supply means (e.g., the power supply device 252 shown in FIG. 151) capable of supplying power to the main control means, a door body (e.g., the front door 102 shown in FIG. 150) that is provided on the front of the gaming machine and can be opened and closed, a determination means (e.g., an opening/closing sensor) for determining the open/closed state of the door body, and an operation state control means having a first operation state (e.g., an OFF state) and a second operation state (e.g., an ON state) as operation states. and a main control means (e.g., a setting key SW), the operation means being provided at a position operable only when the door is in an open state, the main control means being capable of setting one state from a plurality of states including at least a playable state (e.g., a normal game state) in which a game can proceed, a setting confirmation state (e.g., a setting confirmation mode) in which a currently set setting value can be confirmed, and a setting change state (e.g., a setting change mode) in which one setting value can be set from among the plurality of setting values, and when the determination means determines that the door is in an open state, the operation means being capable of setting one state from among the plurality of setting values When the first operation state is changed to the second operation state, it is possible to start control to the setting confirmation state, and when the power supply by the power supply means starts, if both conditions of the door body being in the open state and the operation means being operated to the second operation state are met (for example, the front door 102 is in the door open state and the setting key SW is ON, as shown by symbol T2 in FIG. 208(a)), it is possible to start control to the setting change state, and when the power supply by the power supply means starts, if the condition of the operation means being operated to the second operation state is met, This gaming machine is characterized in that, even if the determination means determines that the door body is in a closed state (for example, as shown by symbol T2 in Figure 210, when the setting key SW is in the ON state but the front door 102 is in a door closed state), control to the playable state is started without starting control to the setting change state, and even if the determination means determines that the door body is in an open state in the playable state when the determination means determines that the door body is in a closed state and the operation means is operated to the second operation state, the playable state is maintained without starting control to the setting change state.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the door is opened in an irregular state where the door is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state, the game can be maintained in a playable state without transitioning to a setting change state, thereby preventing fraudulent acts such as illegally changing the setting value.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 150) includes a main control means (e.g., main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 152) that controls gaming based on one of a plurality of set values, a power supply means (e.g., power supply unit 252 shown in FIG. 151) that can supply power to the main control means, a door body (e.g., front door 102 shown in FIG. 150) that is provided on the front of the gaming machine and can be opened and closed, a determination means (e.g., an opening/closing sensor) that determines the open/closed state of the door body, and an operation means (e.g., a setting key SW) that has a first operation state (e.g., an OFF state) and a second operation state (e.g., an ON state) as operation states. a main control means for controlling a game machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention, the main control means being capable of setting one of a plurality of states including at least a playable state in which a game can proceed (e.g., a normal game state), a setting confirmation state in which a currently set setting value can be confirmed (e.g., a setting confirmation mode), and a setting change state in which one setting value can be set from among the plurality of setting values (e.g., a setting change mode); and when the determination means determines that the door is in the open state, when the operation means is operated from the first operation state to the second operation state, It is possible to start control to the setting confirmation state, and when the power supply by the power supply means is started, if both conditions of the door body being in the open state and the operation means being operated to the second operation state are satisfied (for example, the front door 102 is in the door open state and the setting key SW is in the ON state as shown by symbol T2 in FIG. 208(a)), it is possible to start control to the setting change state, and even if the condition of the operation means being operated to the second operation state is satisfied when the power supply by the power supply means is started, the determination means determines that the door body is in the closed state. When the setting key SW is ON but the front door 102 is closed (for example, as shown by symbol T2 in FIG. 210), control to the playable state is started without starting control to the setting change state, and when the determination means determines that the door body is closed and the operation means is operated to the second operation state, in the playable state, control to the setting confirmation state is started if the determination means determines that the door body is open (for example, in the state shown by symbol T3 in FIG. 210, the front door 102 is determined to be open and transition is made to setting confirmation mode).

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the door is opened in an irregular state where the door is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state, the machine can transition to the setting confirmation state without transitioning to the setting change state. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as unauthorized changes to setting values, and also allows the machine to perform setting confirmation work, improving convenience for gaming store staff, etc.

In addition, in the playable state where the determination means has determined that the door body is in the closed state and the operation means has been operated to the second operation state, the power supply by the power supply means may be cut off to open the door body, and then when the power supply by the power supply means is started, control to the setting change state may be started (for example, in the state shown by symbol T8 in FIG. 210, when the power is restored after the front door 102 is in the open door state, the state may transition to the setting change mode).

This configuration eliminates the irregular state in which the door is closed and the operating means is operated to the second operating state, and allows the machine to transition to a setting change state, thereby improving convenience for game store staff, etc.

<Regarding the locking mechanism of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 (1)>
Next, an example of a lock mechanism for the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to Figures 215 to 218. In the following description, the same reference numerals will be used to designate components already described in other embodiments (e.g., Figures 166 to 181), and the description will be omitted. In addition, for components that are inconsistent between the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and reference numerals of this example will take precedence.

Figure 215 is a side view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 in a closed state. The slot machine 100 is provided with a locking mechanism 1401 inside for locking the front door 102 in a closed state to the main body 101, and this locking mechanism 1401 is shown by a dotted line in Figure 215. This locking mechanism 1401 is composed of a locking body 1401A provided on the front door 102 side and a latching shaft 1401B provided on the main body 101 side. When the front door 102 is closed, the latching portion 1402 (described later) of the locking body 1401A is fixed in a state where it is latched to the latching shaft 1401B, and the front door 102 in a closed state is locked to the main body 101 as shown in Figure 215. Note that the lock body 1401A moves on a circular orbit in response to the opening and closing of the front door 102, but when the lock body 1401A and the engaged shaft 1401B are close to each other, this movement can be considered to be along the front-to-rear direction of the slot machine 100. For this reason, in the following, unless otherwise specified, the movement direction of the lock body 1401A will be described as the front-to-rear direction of the slot machine 100. Note that in the following, the state in which the engaging portion 1402 of the lock body 1401A is engaged with the engaged shaft 1401B will be referred to as the locked state, and the state in which the engaging portion 1402 of the lock body 1401A is not engaged with the engaged shaft 1401B will be referred to as the unlocked state.

Figure 216(a) is a diagram showing the lock body 1401A from the side of the slot machine 100 when the lock mechanism 1401 is in an unlocked state, Figure 216(b) is a diagram showing the lock body 1401A of Figure 216(a) from the rear side of the slot machine 100, and Figure 216(c) is a diagram showing the lock body 1401A from the side of the slot machine 100 when the lock mechanism 1401 is in a locked state. Also, Figures 217(a) to (d) are diagrams showing the operation of the lock body 1401A and the locked shaft 1401B.

The lock body 1401A has a locking portion 1402 and a storage portion 1404. The storage portion 1404 has a space formed therein for storing the locking portion 1402, and further has an opening formed on the rear side through which a part of the locking portion 1402 can be exposed. FIG. 216(a) shows a state in which a part of the locking portion 1402 stored in the storage portion 1404 is exposed from the rear side of the storage portion 1404. The locking portion 1402 has a recess 1402DP formed therein, and is rotatable around a rotation shaft 1403. Furthermore, the locking portion 1402 is biased by a spring member (not shown) in a direction protruding from the opening of the storage portion 1404 to the rear side (clockwise in FIG. 216(a)). In the unlocked state (Figures 216(a) and 216(b)), a portion of the engaging portion 1402 protrudes from the rear side of the accommodating portion 1404 and abuts against the lower end 1404BB of the opening of the accommodating portion 1404, and is stopped in that position.

In the storage section 1404, an entrance path 1404ER is formed along the movement direction (front-rear direction), and the locked shaft 1401B is received along this entrance path 1404ER by the movement of the front door 102 (Fig. 217 (a) to (d)). In the entrance path 1404ER, a part of the surface of the locking section 1402 (hereinafter, the receiving surface 1402RS) is located toward the opening of the entrance path 1404ER, and the receiving surface 1402RS is pushed by the locked shaft 1401B that enters along the entrance path 1404ER, and the locking section 1402 rotates in the direction in which it is received in the storage section 1404 (counterclockwise in Fig. 216 (a)). Then, when the front door 102 moves to a position where it is in the closed state, the locking section 1402 is fixed by a latch mechanism (not shown) (Fig. 216 (c), Fig. 217 (d)). At this time, the locking portion 1402 is locked to the locked shaft 1401B. More specifically, the position of the locking portion 1402 changes due to the rotation, so that the locked shaft 1401B cannot move in the front-rear direction inside the recess 1402DP, and the front door 102 is locked. Note that by inserting a door key into the door key hole 140 and rotating it, the locking portion 1402 is released from the latch mechanism, and the front door 102 can be opened.

The main body 101 is also provided with a door sensor 1406 for detecting the closed state of the front door 102. This door sensor 1406 is pressed by the lock main body 1401A when the front door 102 is closed, and when the front door 102 is completely closed (Figure 217 (d)), a signal is output indicating that the front door 102 is closed. Note that the member that presses the door sensor 1406 need not be the lock main body 1401A, but may be another part of the front door 102. Alternatively, the door sensor 1406 may be provided on the front door 102, and the main body 101 may press the door sensor 1406.

When performing maintenance on the slot machine 100, the front door 102 must be left open. However, if the front door 102 closes naturally and enters a locked state while the user is not looking, the front door 102 must be opened again, resulting in reduced efficiency of the maintenance work. If a stopper is used to prevent the front door 102 from entering a locked state, the work becomes more complicated as more tools must be carried around. To address this issue, the locking mechanism 1401 of this embodiment is designed to maintain the unlocked state by utilizing a setting key used in the maintenance work. The specific configuration will be described below.

Fig. 218(a) is a side view showing the state where the setting key SK is inserted into the lock body 1401A, Fig. 218(b) is a side view showing the setting key SK in Fig. 218(a) in solid lines, and Fig. 218(c) is a view of the lock body 1401A in Fig. 218(a) seen from the rear side. In the lock body 1401A of this embodiment, a slit 1401SL into which the setting key SK can be inserted is formed between the storage section 1404 and the locking section 1402 (between the inner wall 1404WA of the storage section 1404 and the locking section 1402) (see Fig. 216(b)). Figs. 218(a) to 218(c) show the state where the setting key SK is inserted into this slit 1401SL. In addition, the inserted setting key SK is configured to be supported by the lower end 1404BB of the opening of the storage section 1404 and the rotating shaft 1403 so that it does not fall inside the storage section 1404.

In FIG. 216(b), there are two gaps between the accommodating portion 1404 and the locking portion 1402, but only one of the gaps (slit 1401SL) allows the setting key SK to be inserted, and the other gap does not allow the setting key SK to be inserted. More specifically, a slit-shaped first space (
The setting key SK can be inserted into the slit 1401SL, but the setting key SK cannot be inserted into the second space formed between the locking portion 1402 and the other inner wall 1404WB of the housing portion 1404. With this configuration, the space into which the setting key SK is inserted can be easily determined during maintenance, and confusion can be prevented. The configuration for preventing the setting key from being inserted into the second space is not particularly limited, and can be configured to narrow the opening portion as in this embodiment, or to provide a member that inhibits insertion. For example, the width of the second space can be narrower than that of the first space. In this case, the second space may be a space into which the setting key SK cannot be inserted, or may be a space into which the setting key SK can be inserted. In either case, by making the width of the second space narrower than that of the first space, it is easy to determine the space into which the setting key SK is inserted during maintenance, and confusion can be prevented.

In this embodiment, the width of the slit 1401SL into which the setting key can be inserted is slightly larger than the thickness of the setting key SK, and the setting key SK is not clamped within the slit 1401SL. However, the width of the slit 1401SL may be narrower so that when the setting key SK is inserted, the slit 1401SL is pushed open, and the reaction force clamps the setting key SK. In this case, it is possible to prevent the setting key SK from falling out of the lock body 1401A and being lost.

When the setting key SK is inserted as shown in FIG. 218(a), even if the front door 102 is moved, the locked shaft 1401B comes into contact with the setting key SK as shown in FIG. 218(d), and the locked shaft 1401B cannot enter along the entry path 1404ER. In this state, the front door 102 does not enter a locked state, and can remain unlocked.

Here, by differentiating the position where the engaged shaft 1401B contacts the setting key SK (diagonally lower left in FIG. 218(d), and to the right of the visual engaging portion 1402 in FIG. 218(c)) from the position where it contacts the receiving surface 1402RS (directly to the side (left) in FIG. 217(b), and to the left of the visual setting key SK in FIG. 218(c)), durability can be improved without the same position of the engaged shaft 1401B wearing out. Note that the difference in the above positions may be different in the front-to-back direction of the slot machine 100 or in the up-to-down direction, and is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment.

When the setting key SK is inserted as shown in FIG. 218(a), a signal detecting the closed state is not output (the closed state is not detected). This configuration may be such that the door sensor 1406 does not come into contact with the lock body 1401A (the detection piece does not move) and therefore does not detect the closed state, or the door sensor 1406 may come into contact with the lock body 1401A but the detection piece does not move to a position where it detects the closed state.

In FIG. 218(a), a portion of the setting key SK protrudes from the storage section 1404, but the configuration is not limited to this and the setting key SK may be stored in the storage section 1404. By having a portion of the setting key SK protrude from the storage section 1404, the setting key SK can be easily removed when work is completed.

Furthermore, when the door key is operated in the state shown in FIG. 218(a), the locking portion 1402 is in the unlocked state and therefore maintains its current position, and the setting key SK also maintains its current position (the state shown in FIG. 218(a)). Therefore, even if an operator forgets that the setting key SK has been inserted and operates the door key, it is possible to prevent the setting key SK from falling off or being lost. Note that, in order to maintain the position shown in FIG. 218(a) when the door key is operated, the door key may be operated clockwise or counterclockwise. Furthermore, although the present embodiment has been described as a case in which the position or position of the locking portion 1402 does not change, the configuration may also be such that the setting key SK maintains its inserted state even if its position or position changes.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured so that it is possible to visually confirm whether the locking portion 1402 is in a locked state or an unlocked state in the state shown in FIG. 218(d). In this embodiment, it is configured so that it is possible to determine whether the locking portion 1402 is in an unlocked state by visually confirming the locking portion 1402 protruding outside the storage portion 1404. However, even if the locking portion 1402 is configured so that it is possible to visually confirm whether the locking portion 1402 is in a locked state or an unlocked state, for example, it is possible to visually confirm whether the locking portion 1402 is in a locked state or an unlocked state. In other words, it is sufficient that the locking portion 1402 is visible in either a locked state or an unlocked state. In addition, it is possible to confirm that the setting key SK is in an unlocked state even when it is in a state shown in FIG. 218(d). In addition, the position and direction of the visual confirmation are not particularly limited, and it may be possible to confirm from the boundary between the front door 102 and the main body 101 (the side of the slot machine 100) or from above the slot machine 100. In addition, it may be possible to visually confirm from a position where the reel unit and the main control board can be confirmed in the state shown in FIG. 218(d).

In this embodiment, the configuration using the setting key SK has been described, but it may also be configured to use, for example, a game medal or a 500 yen coin. Figure 218(e) shows an example of a game medal MD inserted into the lock body 1401A. The metal piece for maintaining the unlocked state is not limited to the above, but by using one that is used during maintenance work, the trouble of preparing a separate stopper can be eliminated.

In the above embodiment, the lock body 1401A is provided on the front door 102 side, and the engaged shaft 1401B is provided on the main body 101 side. However, the engaged shaft 1401B may be provided on the front door 102 side, and the lock body 1401A may be provided on the main body 101 side. In addition, in the present embodiment, a configuration in which one lock mechanism 1401 is provided is described, but a configuration in which multiple such lock mechanisms are provided may also be used. In this case, there may be a lock mechanism located near the front and a lock mechanism located near the rear along the front-to-rear direction of the slot machine 100.

<Regarding the locking mechanism of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 (2)>
Furthermore, the locking mechanism of the front door 102 described with reference to FIGS. 215 to 218 will be described with reference to FIGS. 219 and 220.

When the locking mechanism of the front door 102 is unlocked by operating the door key, it is in the state shown in FIG. 216(a), but in this state, the locking part 1402 can also be pushed into the storage part 1404 with a finger instead of the locked shaft 1401B. When the locking part 1402 is pushed into the storage part 1404 until it is stored therein, the locking part 1402 is fixed by a latch mechanism (not shown), and the state shown in FIG. 216(c) is reached.

Even when the locking portion 1402 is housed in the housing portion 1404, the front door 102 can be kept unlocked by inserting the setting key SK or the like into the slit 1401SL, as in the example of FIG. 218. FIGS. 219(a)-(e) show the operation described in FIGS. 218(a)-(e) applied to the state in which the locking portion 1402 is housed in the housing portion 1404.

Here, a state will be described in which the locking portion 1402 is housed in the housing portion 1404 and the setting key SK is inserted into the slit 1401SL as shown in Fig. 219(a). In this state, the locking portion 1402 is released from the latch mechanism by operating the door key, and a force is generated by a spring member (not shown) that moves the locking portion 1402 in a direction that protrudes from the opening of the housing portion 1404 to the rear side (clockwise in Fig. 216(a)). At this time, the slit 140
The movement of the locking part 1402 is hindered by the frictional force between the setting key SK inserted in the locking part 1402 and the locking part 1402. Therefore, if the force that moves the locking part 1402 exceeds this frictional force, the locking part 1402 will move, and if the force does not exceed this frictional force, the locking part 1402 will not move. In addition, the locking part 1402 that has once moved may stop midway. In particular, when the locked shaft 1401B is in contact with the setting key SK as shown in FIG. 219(d), the weight of the front door 102 presses the setting key SK against the locking part 1402, increasing the frictional force, making it even more difficult for the locking part 1402 to move.

During the above operation, if the locking portion 1402 does not move, the setting key SK will not move either, and even if the locking portion 1402 moves, if the setting key SK is pressed by the locked shaft 1401B, the movement of the setting key SK is restricted. Nevertheless, the movement of the locking portion 1402 based on the operation of the door key may cause the setting key SK to move.

Figure 220(a) shows an example in which the door key is operated from the state of Figure 219(d), but the locking part 1402 and the setting key SK do not move. Also, Figure 220(b) shows an example in which the door key is operated from the state of Figure 219(e), and the locking part 1402 moves but the game medal MD does not move. Note that Figures 220(a) and (b) show an example in which the setting key SK is used and an example in which the game medal MD is used, but the movement of the locking part 1402 based on the operation of the door key is due to the frictional force between the inserted metal piece and the locking part 1402, so depending on this frictional force, the locking part 1402 may move even if the setting key SK is used, or the locking part 1402 may not move even if the game medal MD is used. Also, the inserted metal piece may move with the movement of the locking part 1402.

As described above, when the locking portion 1402 is housed in the housing portion 1404 and a metal piece for maintaining the unlocked state (e.g., a setting key SK, a gaming medal MD, or a 500 yen coin) is inserted in the slit 1401SL, the movement of the locking portion 1402 based on the operation of the door key is hindered by the frictional force between the metal piece inserted in the slit 1401SL and the locking portion 1402. With this configuration, even if an amusement store employee mistakenly operates the door key while a metal piece for maintaining the unlocked state is inserted, the movement of the locking portion 1402 is restricted, making it easier to check the inserted metal piece. In particular, when the metal piece is in contact with the locked shaft 1401B, the locking portion 1402 is less likely to move, making it easier to check the metal piece.

In addition, when the locking portion 1402 is housed in the housing portion 1404 and a metal piece for maintaining the unlocked state (e.g., a setting key SK, a game medal MD, or a 500 yen coin) is inserted in the slit 1401SL, movement of the locking portion 1402 based on the operation of the door key is inhibited. For this reason, the inserted state of the metal piece for maintaining the unlocked state may be maintained even if the door key is operated. In addition, the force of movement of the locking portion 1402 based on the operation of the door key and the frictional force between the metal piece inserted in the slit 1401SL and the locking portion 1402 may be adjusted to reliably maintain the inserted state of the metal piece for maintaining the unlocked state even if the door key is operated.

In addition, in FIG. 218, an example was described in which the metal piece for maintaining the unlocked state was inserted along the slit 1401SL, but the manner of insertion may be different. In FIG. 220(c)-(f), the metal piece for maintaining the unlocked state is inserted obliquely from the outside of the inner wall 1404WA that forms the slit 1401SL, and the tip of the metal piece is pressed against the locking portion 1402. In FIG. 220(c)(d), the locking portion 1402 is in the state of FIG. 216(a), and in FIG. 220(e)(f), the locking portion 1402 is in the state of FIG. 216(c). In FIG. 220(c)(e), the metal piece for maintaining the unlocked state is the setting key SK, and in FIG. 220(d)(f), the metal piece for maintaining the unlocked state is the game medal MD. Even with this method of insertion, the end of the metal piece is closer to the locked shaft 1401B than the end of the locking portion 1402 in the unlocked state, and when the front door 102 is moved, the locked shaft 1401B comes into contact with the metal piece, preventing the locked shaft 1401B from entering along the entry path 1404ER, so the unlocked state of the front door 102 can be maintained.

In the example of Figures 220(c) to (f), the metal piece that maintains the unlocked state protrudes from the locking portion 1402 towards the inner wall 1404WA side outside the storage portion 1404, and this metal piece is sandwiched between three points: the outer wall (P1) of the storage portion 1404, the inner wall 1404WA (P2) of the storage portion 1404, and the locking portion 1402 (P3). At this time, a force that inhibits the movement of the locking portion 1402 is applied to the tip of the metal piece. Even with this configuration, if an arcade staff member mistakenly operates the door key while a metal piece that maintains the unlocked state is inserted, the movement of the locking portion 1402 is restricted, making it easier to check the inserted metal piece.

<Regarding the locking mechanism of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 (3))
Furthermore, the locking mechanism of the front door 102 described with reference to FIGS. 215 to 218, 219, and 220 will be described with reference to FIG.

In Figures 215 to 220, an example was described in which a metal piece (setting key SK, game medal MD, 500 yen coin) that maintains the unlocked state is inserted into slit 1401SL of lock body 1401A. Here, a protrusion that protrudes toward the slit 1401SL side (or inner wall 1404B side) may be provided on locking portion 1402 of locking body 1401A. Figures 221(a) to (f) show two protrusions 1402PR provided on locking portion 1402 and recess 1402DE formed on the opposite side to these protrusions 1402. Note that Figure 221(a) is a view of locking portion 1402 from the side opposite slit 1402SL, and Figure 221(b) is a view of locking portion 1402 from the side on the slit 1402SL side. Also, FIG. 221(c) is a diagram showing the state in which the locking portion 1402 having the convex portion 1402PR is applied to FIG. 216(c), FIG. 221(d) is a diagram showing the state in which the locking portion 1402 having the convex portion 1402PR is applied to FIG. 216(a), FIG. 221(e) is a diagram showing the state in which the locking portion 1402 having the convex portion 1402PR is applied to FIG. 216(b), and FIG. 221(f) is a diagram showing the state in which the locking portion 1402 having the convex portion 1402PR is applied to FIG. 218(c).

The protrusion 1402PR is formed by pushing out and deforming the locking portion 1402 from the opposite side, and is paired with the recess 1402DE formed on the opposite side. In addition, of the two protrusions 1402PR, one is located inside the storage portion 1404 and cannot be seen, while the other is located in a position that can be seen from outside the storage portion 1404.

When a metal piece is inserted into the slit 1401SL of the lock body 1401A, the unevenness of the metal piece catches on these protrusions 1402PR, preventing the metal piece from falling off or becoming lost. Also, in the case of the configuration in FIG. 219, the frictional force between the metal piece and the locking portion 1402 can be improved. Also, because the entire locking portion 1402 does not come into contact when the metal piece is inserted, deterioration of the entire locking portion 1402 can be prevented.

<Regarding the locking mechanism of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 (4)>
Furthermore, the locking mechanism of the front door 102 described with reference to FIGS. 215 to 218, 219, 220, and 221 will be described with reference to FIG. 222.

When the configuration in which one locking mechanism 1401 is provided is explained in FIG. 215, it was mentioned that the configuration may include multiple locking mechanisms, and that there is no particular limitation as to whether the locking body 1401A (or the locked shaft 1401B) is provided on the main body 101 or the front door 102. Specific examples are explained below.

Figures 222(a) to (c) show examples of a configuration in which multiple locking mechanisms 1401 are provided for the front door 102. Of these, Figures 222(a) and (c) show a configuration in which the lock body 1401A is provided for the front door 102, and the engaged shaft 1401B is provided for the main body 101. Also, Figure 222(b) shows a configuration in which the lock body 1401A is provided for the main body 101, and the engaged shaft 1401B is provided for the front door 102. Also, Figure 222(c) shows a configuration in which the locking mechanism 1401 in Figure 222(a) is upside down (the upside-down relationship between the engaged shaft 1401B and the rotation shaft 1403 of the engaging portion 1402 is reversed). These multiple locking mechanisms 1401 are provided separately, but are configured to move to a position in which all the engaging portions 1402 are in the unlocked state (the state of Figure 216(a)) when the door key is operated. In addition, multiple lock bodies 1401A (multiple storage sections 1404) may be configured integrally, and multiple engaged shafts 1401B may be configured integrally.

In Fig. 222(d), the front door 102 is divided into an upper door and a lower door, and multiple locking mechanisms 1401 are provided on each door. In this configuration, when the door key is operated, all of the locking parts 1402 on the lower door side are configured to move to a position where they are in the unlocked state (the state in Fig. 216(a)). When the upper door opening lever, which becomes operable when the lower door is opened, is operated, all of the locking parts 1402 on the upper door side are configured to move to a position where they are in the unlocked state (the state in Fig. 216(a)). In other words, the locking parts 1402 of the locking mechanisms 1401 are configured to move in conjunction with each door.

Now, let us assume that one of the multiple locking mechanisms 1401 (all in the state shown in FIG. 216(a)) provided on the open door is in the state shown in FIG. 218 (a metal piece is inserted into the slit 1401SL). In this case, the unlocked state of the locking mechanism 1401 in the state shown in FIG. 218 is maintained, so the door does not close, and the other locking mechanisms 1401 also remain in the unlocked state.

Next, suppose that the engaging parts 1402 of the multiple locking mechanisms 1401 provided on the open door are stored in the storage parts 1404 (all in the state shown in Figure 216 (c)), and then one of the locking mechanisms 1401 is placed in the state shown in Figure 219 (a metal piece is inserted into the slit 1401SL). In this case, the door cannot be closed due to the locking mechanism 1401 in the state shown in Figure 219. Furthermore, the other locking mechanisms 1401 also cannot close the door because their engaging parts 1402 are stored in the storage parts 1404. At this time, when the door key (or opening lever) is operated, the lock mechanism 1401 in the state of FIG. 219 operates (or does not operate) according to the example of FIG. 220(a)(b), but in the case of the lock mechanism 1401 not in the state of FIG. 219 (lock mechanism 1401 in the state of FIG. 216(c)), the engaging portion 1402 moves to a position protruding from the storage portion 1404 (position of FIG. 216(a)). However, if the metal piece inserted in the slit 1401SL is maintained, the door cannot be closed. Note that even if the metal piece is inserted using the method described in FIGS. 220(c)-(f) instead of the method described in FIG. 219, if the metal piece inserted in the slit 1401SL is maintained, the door cannot be closed even if the door key is operated.

As described above, even in a configuration in which multiple locking mechanisms 1401 are provided, the door can be kept open by inserting a metal piece into the slit 1401SL, reducing the workload that would otherwise be incurred if the door were to close under its own weight during maintenance.

[Technical ideas corresponding to the embodiments of the locking mechanism of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100] Below, the technical ideas described in the explanation of Figures 215 to 222 will be described with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
A door body (e.g., a front door 102),
A main body (e.g., main body 101);
a door lock mechanism (e.g., lock mechanism 1401) that goes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking portion (e.g., locking portion 1402) and a locked portion (e.g., locked shaft 1401B) are locked;
A gaming machine equipped with
The door lock mechanism has a receiving portion (e.g., receiving portion 1404) capable of receiving the locking portion,
It is possible to put the device into a predetermined state (e.g., FIG. 218(a)) in which a metal piece (e.g., a setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (e.g., slit 1401SL) formed by the locking portion in the unlocked state and the inner wall of the housing portion,
In the predetermined state, even if an attempt is made to close the door body, the certain metal piece contacts the locked portion before the locking portion contacts the locked portion, and the door body is maintained in an open state (for example, FIG. 218(d)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine makes it easier to keep the door open, improving the ease with which store staff can clean, maintain, and inspect the machine. It also prevents deterioration of the locking parts over time.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece protrudes more toward the engaged portion than the engaging portion (for example, FIG. 218(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the door body can be kept open without the locking part coming into contact with the locked part.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In the predetermined state, a part of the metal piece protrudes from the housing portion (for example, FIG. 218(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine makes it easy to remove certain metal pieces after work is completed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The slit-shaped space has an opening whose lower end (for example, a lower end 1404BB in FIG. 216(b)) is formed by the storage portion,
The locking portion is rotatable around a shaft portion (e.g., a rotation shaft 1403),
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece is supported by a lower end of the opening and the shaft portion.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can prevent certain metal pieces from getting stuck deep inside the storage section.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the certain metal piece is inserted into the slit-shaped space, the thickness of the certain metal piece causes the slit-shaped space to be expanded and reach the predetermined state (for example, see the description that "when the setting key SK is inserted, the slit 1401SL is expanded, and the setting key SK may be clamped by the reaction force").
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine has a metal piece that is clamped to prevent it from falling or getting lost during operation.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (e.g., a front door 102),
A main body (e.g., main body 101);
a door lock mechanism (e.g., lock mechanism 1401) that goes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking portion (e.g., locking portion 1402) and a locked portion (e.g., locked shaft 1401B) are locked;
A door sensor (e.g., door sensor 1406) that detects the open/closed state of the door body;
A gaming machine equipped with
The door lock mechanism has a receiving portion (e.g., receiving portion 1404) capable of receiving the locking portion,
It is possible to put the device into a predetermined state (e.g., FIG. 218(a)) in which a metal piece (e.g., a setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (e.g., slit 1401SL) formed by the locking portion in the unlocked state and the inner wall of the housing portion,
In the predetermined state, even if the door body is to be closed, the certain metal piece contacts the locked portion before the locking portion contacts the locked portion, and the door body is maintained in an open state (for example, FIG. 218(d)).
In the predetermined state, the door sensor does not detect a closed state of the door body.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine makes it easier to keep the door open, improving the ease with which store staff can clean, maintain, and inspect the machine. It also prevents deterioration of the locking parts and door sensors over time.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece protrudes more toward the engaged portion than the engaging portion (for example, FIG. 218(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the door body can be kept open without the locking part coming into contact with the locked part.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In the predetermined state, a part of the metal piece protrudes from the housing portion (for example, FIG. 218(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine makes it easy to remove certain metal pieces after work is completed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The slit-shaped space has an opening whose lower end (for example, a lower end 1404BB in FIG. 216(b)) is formed by the storage portion,
The locking portion is rotatable around a shaft portion (e.g., a rotation shaft 1403),
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece is supported by a lower end of the opening and the shaft portion.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine can prevent metal pieces from getting stuck deep inside the housing.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
3. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
When the certain metal piece is inserted into the slit-shaped space, the thickness of the certain metal piece causes the slit-shaped space to be expanded and reach the predetermined state (for example, see the description that "when the setting key SK is inserted, the slit 1401SL is expanded, and the setting key SK may be clamped by the reaction force").
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine has a metal piece that is clamped to prevent it from falling or getting lost during operation.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (e.g., a front door 102),
A main body (e.g., main body 101);
a door lock mechanism (e.g., lock mechanism 1401) that goes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking portion (e.g., locking portion 1402) and a locked portion (e.g., locked shaft 1401B) are locked;
A gaming machine equipped with
The door lock mechanism has a receiving portion (e.g., receiving portion 1404) capable of receiving the locking portion,
It is possible to put the device into a predetermined state (e.g., FIG. 218(a)) in which a metal piece (e.g., a setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (e.g., slit 1401SL) formed by the locking portion in the unlocked state and the inner wall of the housing portion,
In the predetermined state, even if the door body is to be closed, the certain metal piece contacts the locked portion before the locking portion contacts the locked portion, and the door body is maintained in an open state (for example, FIG. 218(d)).
The portion of the locked portion that the locking portion comes into contact with is different from the portion of the locked portion that the certain metal piece comes into contact with (for example, FIG. 218(d) ).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the door can be easily kept open, which improves the workability of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff. In addition, deterioration of the locking portion and the locked portion over time can be prevented.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece protrudes more toward the engaged portion than the engaging portion (for example, FIG. 218(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the door body can be kept open without the locking part coming into contact with the locked part.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In the predetermined state, a part of the metal piece protrudes from the housing portion (for example, FIG. 218(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine makes it easy to remove certain metal pieces after work is completed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The slit-shaped space has an opening whose lower end (for example, a lower end 1404BB in FIG. 216(b)) is formed by the storage portion,
The locking portion is rotatable around a shaft portion (e.g., a rotation shaft 1403),
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece is supported by a lower end of the opening and the shaft portion.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine can prevent metal pieces from getting stuck deep inside the housing.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the certain metal piece is inserted into the slit-shaped space, the thickness of the certain metal piece causes the slit-shaped space to be expanded and reach the predetermined state (for example, see the description that "when the setting key SK is inserted, the slit 1401SL is expanded, and the setting key SK may be clamped by the reaction force").
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine has a metal piece that is clamped to prevent it from falling or getting lost during operation.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (e.g., a front door 102),
A main body (e.g., main body 101);
a door lock mechanism (e.g., lock mechanism 1401) that goes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking portion (e.g., locking portion 1402) and a locked portion (e.g., locked shaft 1401B) are locked;
A gaming machine equipped with
The door lock mechanism has a receiving portion (e.g., receiving portion 1404) capable of receiving the locking portion,
The door lock mechanism can be changed from a locked state to an unlocked state by releasing the engagement between the engaging portion and the engaged portion by operating a door key,
It is possible to put the device into a predetermined state (e.g., FIG. 218(a)) in which a metal piece (e.g., a setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (e.g., slit 1401SL) formed by the locking portion in the unlocked state and the inner wall of the housing portion,
In the predetermined state, even if the door body is to be closed, the certain metal piece contacts the locked portion before the locking portion contacts the locked portion, and the door body is maintained in an open state (for example, FIG. 218(d)).
In the predetermined state, the predetermined state is maintained even if the door key is operated (for example, the state of FIG. 218(a) is maintained even if the door key is operated),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine makes it easier to keep the door open, improving the ease of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff. It also prevents deterioration of the locking part over time. Furthermore, even if an employee forgets that a certain metal piece has been inserted and operates the door key, it prevents the certain metal piece from falling out or becoming lost.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece protrudes more toward the engaged portion than the engaging portion (for example, FIG. 218(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the door body can be kept open without the locking part coming into contact with the locked part.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In the predetermined state, a part of the metal piece protrudes from the housing portion (for example, FIG. 218(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine makes it easy to remove certain metal pieces after work is completed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The slit-shaped space has an opening whose lower end (for example, a lower end 1404BB in FIG. 216(b)) is formed by the storage portion,
The locking portion is rotatable around a shaft portion (e.g., a rotation shaft 1403),
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece is supported by a lower end of the opening and the shaft portion.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine can prevent metal pieces from getting stuck deep inside the housing.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the certain metal piece is inserted into the slit-shaped space, the thickness of the certain metal piece causes the slit-shaped space to be expanded and reach the predetermined state (for example, see the description that "when the setting key SK is inserted, the slit 1401SL is expanded, and the setting key SK may be clamped by the reaction force").
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine has a metal piece that is clamped to prevent it from falling or getting lost during operation.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (e.g., a front door 102),
A main body (e.g., main body 101);
a door lock mechanism (e.g., lock mechanism 1401) that goes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking portion (e.g., locking portion 1402) and a locked portion (e.g., locked shaft 1401B) are locked;
A gaming machine equipped with
The door lock mechanism has a receiving portion (e.g., receiving portion 1404) capable of receiving the locking portion,
It is possible to put the device into a predetermined state (e.g., FIG. 218(a)) in which a metal piece (e.g., a setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (e.g., slit 1401SL) formed by the locking portion in the unlocked state and the inner wall of the housing portion,
In the predetermined state, even if the door body is to be closed, the certain metal piece contacts the locked portion before the locking portion contacts the locked portion, and the door body is maintained in an open state (for example, FIG. 218(d)).
In the predetermined state, it is possible to visually confirm from the outside that the locking portion is in the unlocked state.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine makes it easier to keep the door open, improving the ease with which store staff can clean, maintain, and inspect the machine. It also prevents deterioration of the locking parts over time. Furthermore, workers can determine the state of the door lock mechanism from the state of the locking parts.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece protrudes more toward the engaged portion than the engaging portion (for example, FIG. 218(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the door body can be kept open without the locking part coming into contact with the locked part.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
In the predetermined state, a part of the metal piece protrudes from the housing portion (for example, FIG. 218(a)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine makes it easy to remove certain metal pieces after work is completed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The slit-shaped space has an opening whose lower end (for example, a lower end 1404BB in FIG. 216(b)) is formed by the storage portion,
The locking portion is rotatable around a shaft portion (e.g., a rotation shaft 1403),
In the predetermined state, the certain metal piece is supported by a lower end of the opening and the shaft portion.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine can prevent metal pieces from getting stuck deep inside the housing.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the certain metal piece is inserted into the slit-shaped space, the thickness of the certain metal piece causes the slit-shaped space to be expanded and reach the predetermined state (for example, see the description that "when the setting key SK is inserted, the slit 1401SL is expanded, and the setting key SK may be clamped by the reaction force").
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine has a metal piece that is clamped to prevent it from falling or getting lost during operation.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (e.g., a front door 102),
A main body (e.g., main body 101);
a door lock mechanism (e.g., lock mechanism 1401) that goes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking portion (e.g., locking portion 1402) and a locked portion (e.g., locked shaft 1401B) are locked;
A gaming machine equipped with
The door lock mechanism has a receiving portion (e.g., receiving portion 1404) capable of receiving the locking portion,
It is possible to put the locking portion in a predetermined state (e.g., FIG. 219(a)) in which a metal piece (e.g., a setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-like space (e.g., slit 1401SL) formed by the locking portion at a position accommodated in the accommodation portion and the inner wall of the accommodation portion,
In the predetermined state, even if the door body is to be closed, the certain metal piece contacts the locked portion before the locking portion contacts the locked portion, and the door body is maintained in an open state (for example, FIG. 219(d)).
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine makes it easier to keep the door open, eliminating the need to turn the door key every time to open the door, and improving the ease of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff. It also makes it easier to check whether a certain metal piece is inserted.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (e.g., a front door 102),
A main body (e.g., main body 101);
a door lock mechanism (e.g., lock mechanism 1401) that goes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking portion (e.g., locking portion 1402) and a locked portion (e.g., locked shaft 1401B) are locked;
A gaming machine equipped with
The door lock mechanism has a receiving portion (e.g., receiving portion 1404) capable of receiving the locking portion,
It is possible to put the locking portion in a predetermined state (e.g., FIG. 219(a)) in which a metal piece (e.g., a setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-like space (e.g., slit 1401SL) formed by the locking portion at a position accommodated in the accommodation portion and the inner wall of the accommodation portion,
In the predetermined state, even if the door body is to be closed, the certain metal piece contacts the locked portion before the locking portion contacts the locked portion, and the door body is maintained in an open state (for example, FIG. 219(d)).
When the certain metal piece is in contact with the latched portion in the predetermined state, the certain metal piece is maintained in the inserted state even if the door key is operated (see the description in <Regarding the lock mechanism of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 (2)>).
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine makes it easy to keep the door open, eliminating the need to turn the door key every time to open the door, and improving the workability of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff. It also makes it easier to check whether a certain metal piece is inserted. It also prevents a certain metal piece from falling out and being lost even if a store staff member mistakenly operates the door key.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (e.g., a front door 102),
A main body (e.g., main body 101);
a door lock mechanism (e.g., lock mechanism 1401) that goes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking portion (e.g., locking portion 1402) and a locked portion (e.g., locked shaft 1401B) are locked;
A gaming machine equipped with
The door lock mechanism has a receiving portion (e.g., receiving portion 1404) capable of receiving the locking portion,
It is possible to put the locking portion in a predetermined state (e.g., FIG. 219(a)) in which a metal piece (e.g., a setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-like space (e.g., slit 1401SL) formed by the locking portion at a position accommodated in the accommodation portion and the inner wall of the accommodation portion,
In the predetermined state, even if the door body is to be closed, the certain metal piece contacts the locked portion before the locking portion contacts the locked portion, and the door body is maintained in an open state (for example, FIG. 219(d)).
When the certain metal piece is in contact with the locked portion in the predetermined state, the certain metal piece may remain inserted even if the door key is operated (see the description in <Regarding the lock mechanism of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 (2)>).
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine makes it easy to keep the door open, eliminating the need to turn the door key every time to open the door, and improving the workability of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff. It also makes it easier to check whether a certain metal piece is inserted. It also prevents a certain metal piece from falling out and being lost even if a store staff member mistakenly operates the door key.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (e.g., a front door 102),
A main body (e.g., main body 101);
a door lock mechanism (e.g., lock mechanism 1401) that goes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking portion (e.g., locking portion 1402) and a locked portion (e.g., locked shaft 1401B) are locked;
A gaming machine equipped with
The door lock mechanism has a receiving portion (e.g., receiving portion 1404) capable of receiving the locking portion,
It is possible to put the locking portion in a predetermined state (e.g., FIG. 219(a)) in which a metal piece (e.g., a setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-like space (e.g., slit 1401SL) formed by the locking portion at a position accommodated in the accommodation portion and the inner wall of the accommodation portion,
In the predetermined state, even if the door body is to be closed, the certain metal piece contacts the locked portion before the locking portion contacts the locked portion, and the door body is maintained in an open state (for example, FIG. 219(d)).
When the certain metal piece is in contact with the locked portion in the predetermined state, the movement of the locking portion based on the operation of the door key is hindered by the certain metal piece (see the description in <Regarding the locking mechanism of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 (2)>).
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine makes it easier to keep the door open, eliminating the need to turn the door key every time to open the door, and improving the ease of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff. In addition, even if a store staff member mistakenly operates the door key, the movement of the locking part is limited, making it easier to check the inserted metal piece.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the certain metal piece is in contact with the locked portion in the predetermined state, the locking portion may move even if the movement of the locking portion based on the operation of the door key is hindered by the certain metal piece (see the description in <Regarding the locking mechanism of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 (2)>).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine makes it easier to keep the door open, eliminating the need to turn the door key every time to open the door, and improving the ease of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff. In addition, even if a store staff member mistakenly operates the door key, the movement of the locking part is limited, making it easier to check the inserted metal piece.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (e.g., a front door 102),
A main body (e.g., main body 101);
a first door lock mechanism (e.g., lock mechanism 1401) that goes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a first locking portion (e.g., locking portion 1402) and a first locked portion (e.g., locked shaft 1401B) are locked;
a second door lock mechanism (e.g., lock mechanism 1401, FIG. 222) that changes from an unlocked state to a locked state by engaging a second engaging portion (e.g., engaging portion 1402) with a second engaged portion (e.g., engaged shaft 1401B);
A gaming machine equipped with
The first door lock mechanism has a first accommodating portion (e.g., accommodating portion 1404) capable of accommodating the first engaging portion,
The second door lock mechanism has a second accommodating portion (e.g., accommodating portion 1404) capable of accommodating the second engaging portion,
A certain metal piece (
For example, it is possible to put the setting key SK) into a predetermined state (for example, FIG. 219(a)).
In the predetermined state, the second engaging portion is accommodated in the second accommodating portion,
In the predetermined state, even if an attempt is made to close the door, the certain metal piece contacts the first engaged portion before the first engaging portion does, and the door is not locked, and the open state of the door is maintained (for example, FIG. 219(d)).
When the certain metal piece is in contact with the first locked portion in the predetermined state, the movement of the first locking portion based on the operation of the door key is hindered by the certain metal piece (see the description in <Regarding the lock mechanism of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 (2)>).
When the certain metal piece is in contact with the first locked portion in the predetermined state, the second locking portion moves to a position protruding most from the second housing portion based on the operation of the door key (see the description in <Regarding the locking mechanism of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 (4)>).
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it becomes easier to keep the door open, eliminating the need to turn the door key every time to open the door, and improving the ease of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff. In addition, even if a gaming store staff member mistakenly operates the door key, the movement of the locking part is limited, making it easier to check the inserted metal piece. In addition, if a gaming store staff member mistakenly operates the door key, the second locking part may have moved to the most protruding position, allowing the staff member to realize that the door key has been operated incorrectly.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
When the certain metal piece is in contact with the first locked portion in the predetermined state, the first locking portion may move even when the movement of the first locking portion based on the operation of the door key is hindered by the certain metal piece (see the description in <Regarding the locking mechanism of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 (2)>).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, it becomes easier to keep the door open, eliminating the need to turn the door key every time to open the door, and improving the ease of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff. In addition, even if a gaming store staff member mistakenly operates the door key, the movement of the locking part is limited, making it easier to check the inserted metal piece. In addition, if a gaming store staff member mistakenly operates the door key, the second locking part may have moved to the most protruding position, allowing the staff member to realize that the door key has been operated incorrectly.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first storage section and the second storage section are integrally configured (see the description in <Regarding the lock mechanism of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 (4)>).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (e.g., a front door 102),
A main body (e.g., main body 101);
a door lock mechanism (e.g., lock mechanism 1401) that goes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking portion (e.g., locking portion 1402) and a locked portion (e.g., locked shaft 1401B) are locked;
A gaming machine equipped with
The door lock mechanism has a receiving portion (e.g., receiving portion 1404) capable of receiving the locking portion,
It is possible to put the device into a predetermined state (e.g., FIG. 218(a)) in which a metal piece (e.g., a setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (e.g., slit 1401SL) formed by the locking portion in the unlocked state and the inner wall of the housing portion,
In the predetermined state, even if the door body is to be closed, the certain metal piece contacts the locked portion before the locking portion contacts the locked portion, and the door body is maintained in an open state (for example, FIG. 218(d)).
The main body has the locking portion,
The door body has the locked portion,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin.
The above describes a gaming machine (see description of <Regarding the locking mechanism of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 (1)>).

This gaming machine makes it easier to keep the door open, eliminating the need to turn the door key every time to open the door, and improving the ease of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff. It also makes it easier to check whether a certain metal piece is inserted.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (e.g., a front door 102),
A main body (e.g., main body 101);
a door lock mechanism (e.g., lock mechanism 1401) that goes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking portion (e.g., locking portion 1402) and a locked portion (e.g., locked shaft 1401B) are locked;
A gaming machine equipped with
The door lock mechanism has a receiving portion (e.g., receiving portion 1404) capable of receiving the locking portion,
It is possible to put the device into a predetermined state (e.g., FIG. 218(a)) in which a metal piece (e.g., a setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (e.g., slit 1401SL) formed by the locking portion in the unlocked state and the inner wall of the housing portion,
In the predetermined state, even if the door body is to be closed, the certain metal piece contacts the locked portion before the locking portion contacts the locked portion, and the door body is maintained in an open state (for example, FIG. 218(d)).
The main body has the engaged portion,
The door body has the locking portion,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin.
The above describes a gaming machine (see description of <Regarding the locking mechanism of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 (1)>).

This gaming machine makes it easier to keep the door open, eliminating the need to turn the door key every time to open the door, and improving the ease of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff. It also makes it easier to check whether a certain metal piece is inserted.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (e.g., a front door 102),
A main body (e.g., main body 101);
a door lock mechanism (e.g., lock mechanism 1401) that goes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking portion (e.g., locking portion 1402) and a locked portion (e.g., locked shaft 1401B) are locked;
A gaming machine equipped with
The door lock mechanism has a receiving portion (e.g., receiving portion 1404) capable of receiving the locking portion,
It is possible to put the device into a predetermined state (e.g., FIG. 218(a)) in which a metal piece (e.g., a setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (e.g., slit 1401SL) formed by the locking portion in the unlocked state and the first inner wall of the housing portion,
In the predetermined state, even if the door body is to be closed, the certain metal piece contacts the locked portion before the locking portion contacts the locked portion, and the door body is maintained in an open state (for example, FIG. 218(d)).
a width of the slit-shaped space is wider than a width of a space formed by a second inner wall of the accommodating portion facing the first inner wall and the locking portion,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin.
The above describes a gaming machine (see description of <Regarding the locking mechanism of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 (1)>).

This gaming machine makes it easier to keep the door open, eliminating the need to turn the door key every time to open the door, and improving the workability of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff. In addition, the space into which the gaming store staff inserts a certain metal piece can be guided to one of the slit-shaped spaces.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (e.g., a front door 102),
A main body (e.g., main body 101);
a door lock mechanism (e.g., lock mechanism 1401) that goes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking portion (e.g., locking portion 1402) and a locked portion (e.g., locked shaft 1401B) are locked;
A gaming machine equipped with
The door lock mechanism has a receiving portion (e.g., receiving portion 1404) capable of receiving the locking portion,
It is possible to put the device into a predetermined state (e.g., FIG. 218(a)) in which a metal piece (e.g., a setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (e.g., slit 1401SL) formed by the locking portion in the unlocked state and the first inner wall of the housing portion,
In the predetermined state, even if the door body is to be closed, the certain metal piece contacts the locked portion before the locking portion contacts the locked portion, and the door body is maintained in an open state (for example, FIG. 218(d)).
the certain metal piece cannot be inserted into a space formed by a second inner wall of the accommodating portion facing the first inner wall and the locking portion,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin.
The above describes a gaming machine (see description of <Regarding the locking mechanism of the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 (1)>).

This gaming machine makes it easier to keep the door open, eliminating the need to turn the door key every time to open the door, and improving the workability of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff. It also makes it easier for store staff to determine the space into which to insert a certain metal piece.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (e.g., a front door 102),
A main body (e.g., main body 101);
a door lock mechanism (e.g., lock mechanism 1401) that goes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking portion (e.g., locking portion 1402) and a locked portion (e.g., locked shaft 1401B) are locked;
A gaming machine equipped with
The door lock mechanism has a receiving portion (e.g., receiving portion 1404) capable of receiving the locking portion,
It is possible to put the device into a predetermined state (e.g., FIG. 218(a)) in which a metal piece (e.g., a setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (e.g., slit 1401SL) formed by the locking portion in the unlocked state and the inner wall of the housing portion,
In the predetermined state, even if the door body is to be closed, the certain metal piece contacts the locked portion before the locking portion contacts the locked portion, and the door body is maintained in an open state (for example, FIG. 218(d)).
The locking portion has a protrusion (e.g., a protrusion 1402PR) that protrudes toward the inner wall,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine makes it easier to keep the door open, eliminating the need to turn the door key every time to open the door, and improving the workability of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff. In addition, the protrusions prevent the entire side of the locking part from coming into contact with a certain metal piece, preventing deterioration of the locking part.

Also, in the above explanation,
A door body (e.g., a front door 102),
A main body (e.g., main body 101);
a door lock mechanism (e.g., lock mechanism 1401) that goes from an unlocked state to a locked state when a locking portion (e.g., locking portion 1402) and a locked portion (e.g., locked shaft 1401B) are locked;
A gaming machine equipped with
The door lock mechanism has a receiving portion (e.g., receiving portion 1404) capable of receiving the locking portion,
the housing portion has an opening at a position facing at least a part of a side surface of the locking portion,
It is possible to put the device into a predetermined state (e.g., FIG. 218(a)) in which a metal piece (e.g., a setting key SK) is inserted into a slit-shaped space (e.g., slit 1401SL) formed by the locking portion in the unlocked state and the inner wall of the housing portion,
In the predetermined state, even if the door body is to be closed, the certain metal piece contacts the locked portion before the locking portion contacts the locked portion, and the door body is maintained in an open state (for example, FIG. 218(d)).
When inserting the certain metal piece into the slit-shaped space, it is also possible to have the certain metal piece protrude from the side surface of the engagement portion through the opening to the outside of the accommodation portion (for example, FIGS. 220(c) to (f)).
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine makes it easy to keep the door open, eliminating the need to turn the door key every time to open the door, and improving the workability of cleaning, maintenance, and inspection by store staff. In addition, because the parts of the locking part and the locked part that come into contact with a certain metal piece can be made different, deterioration of the locking part and the locked part can be prevented.

<Regarding the board of the slot machine 100 and the stickers attached thereto>
Next, an example of the board of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to Figures 223 to 226. In the following description, the same reference numerals will be used to designate components already described in other embodiments, and the description will be omitted. In addition, for components that are inconsistent between the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and reference numerals of this example will take precedence.

Various stickers are affixed to the board of the slot machine 100, including stickers that certify that the machine has passed inspection. In some cases, stickers that have already been affixed are removed and new stickers are affixed. If stickers are affixed in the wrong position or at an angle, it may be easy to commit fraud. In addition, there is a risk that the pattern on the board may be damaged when the sticker is peeled off. Below, a configuration for dealing with these problems is described.

Figures 223(a)-(d) and 224(a)-(b) are diagrams showing an example of the positional relationship between the wiring pattern on the board and the sticker attached to the board.

First, in the example of FIG. 223(a), two board-mounted components CM1 and CM2 are connected by two wires L1 and L2. A sticker ST is attached to the space SA partitioned by the two wires L1 and L2. Note that the board-mounted components CM1 and CM2, including this example, are not limited and may be, for example, an IC, a resistor, a capacitor, a FET, a diode, an LED, a switch, a connector, etc. Also, including this example, the wires L1 and L2 may be a signal line, a power line, a ground line, etc. Also, in this example, the sticker ST has a two-dimensional code attached, but the content displayed on the sticker is not limited.

In the above example, the wiring pattern serves as a guide for the top, bottom, left and right sides of the sticker ST. Using this guide makes it easier to determine where to attach the sticker ST, and using the space SA without a pattern makes it less likely that the pattern on the board will be damaged. In other words, this improves maintainability when removing and reattaching the sticker during maintenance or inspection.

In the example of Figure 223(b), two board-mounted components CM1 and CM2 are connected by two wires L1 and L2, as in Figure 223(a), and a sticker ST is affixed to the space SA defined by the two wires L1 and L2. In this example, the wiring pattern serves as a guide for the top and bottom edges of the sticker ST. Note that this example differs from Figure 223(a) in that the wiring pattern does not serve as a guide for the left and right edges of the sticker ST, but in this example, as in Figure 223(a), by utilizing this guide and space SA, it is possible to improve maintainability when removing and re-affixing the sticker during maintenance or inspection.

In the example of Figure 223(c), two board-mounted components CM1 and CM2 are connected by a wire L1, but this wire L1 is a single line, which is different from Figure 223(a). A sticker ST is shown affixed to a space SA partitioned by the single wire L1. In this example, the wiring pattern serves as a guide for the top, bottom, left, and right sides of the sticker ST. Using this guide makes it easy to determine the affixing position of the sticker ST, and using a space SA without a pattern makes it less likely that the pattern on the board will be damaged. In other words, it is easier to maintain when the sticker is removed and re-affixed during maintenance or inspection.

In the example of Fig. 223(d), similarly to Fig. 223(c), two board-mounted components CM1 and CM2 are connected by a single wiring L1, and a sticker ST is affixed to the space SA defined by the single wiring L1. In this example, the wiring pattern serves as a guide for the top, bottom and right sides of the sticker ST. Note that this example differs from Fig. 223(c) in that the wiring pattern does not serve as a guide for the left side of the sticker ST, but even in this example,
As in Figure 223 (c), by utilizing this guide and space SA, it is possible to improve maintainability when removing and re-attaching the sticker during maintenance or inspection.

In the example of Figure 224(a), two board-mounted components CM1 and CM2 are connected by a single wiring L1, as in Figure 223(c), and a sticker ST is affixed to a space SA defined by the single wiring L1. In this example, the wiring pattern serves as a guide for the top and left and right sides of the sticker ST. Note that this example differs from Figure 223(c) in that the wiring pattern does not serve as a guide for the bottom side of the sticker ST, but in this example, as in Figure 223(c), by utilizing this guide and space SA, it is possible to improve maintainability when removing and re-affixing the sticker during maintenance or inspection.

In the example of Figure 224(b), two board-mounted components CM1 and CM2 are connected by a single wiring L1, as in Figure 223(c), and a sticker ST is affixed to a space SA defined by the single wiring L1. In this example, the wiring pattern serves as a guide for the upper and left sides of the sticker ST. Note that this example differs from Figure 223(c) in that the wiring pattern does not serve as a guide for the right and bottom sides of the sticker ST, but in this example, as in Figure 223(c), by utilizing this guide and space SA, it is possible to improve maintainability when removing and re-affixing the sticker during maintenance or inspection.

In the above examples, maintainability can be improved by providing the wiring pattern with straight line sections that act as guides for at least two of the top, bottom, left and right sides of the sticker. In the above Figures 223(a)-(d) and 224(a)-(b), the first and second straight lines in the wiring pattern are shown to be approximately parallel to the third and fourth straight lines of the sticker ST, respectively. In particular, in the case of a sticker with a two-dimensional code attached, as in this embodiment, the presence of a pattern for detecting the position of the two-dimensional code can enhance the guiding effect.

In addition, in the above example, the seal ST is affixed to a space SA that does not have a wiring pattern, but if at least a portion of the seal ST is affixed to an area that does not have a wiring pattern, the wiring pattern can be prevented from being damaged by peeling the seal ST from this area.

In addition, in a configuration in which the wiring pattern serves as a guide, a silk screen print indicating the position for attaching a sticker may be provided separately. Figure 225(a) shows an example in which the configuration of Figure 223(c) is provided with silk screen prints SP indicating the positions for attaching a sticker at four corners. Figure 225(b) shows an example in which the configuration of Figure 223(c) is provided with silk screen prints SP indicating the positions for attaching a sticker at two corners, the upper right and lower left.

In addition, the slot machine 100 is provided with various boards, and a configuration may be adopted in which the guide for the sticker differs depending on the board, for example, a board having a sticker attached using a wiring pattern as a guide and a board having a sticker attached using silk printing as a guide. In this configuration, the type of board can be distinguished by the difference in the sticker guide.

Also, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud, a rule may be set for the orientation of the two-dimensional code relative to the direction of the board. In this configuration, fraud may be identified if the orientation of the two-dimensional code is against the rule. For example, the orientation of the two-dimensional code (the position of the pattern for detecting the corner of the two-dimensional code) relative to the reference direction of the board (the depth direction for a horizontally arranged board, and the upward direction for a vertically arranged board) may be different between the first board and the second board. In FIG. 226(a), an example is shown in which the two-dimensional code (upward, normal position) of the sticker ST1 attached to the board A and the two-dimensional code (rightward, tilted 90 degrees to the right from the normal position) of the sticker ST2 attached to the board B are different from each other relative to the reference direction. Note that these two boards may be stored in the same board case. In this configuration, the store clerk can easily check the two boards, and the efficiency of maintenance can be improved.

A similar configuration may also be adopted for the substrate and the case covering the substrate. For example, the orientation of the two-dimensional code with respect to the reference direction of the substrate (the depth direction for a substrate arranged horizontally, and the upward direction for a substrate arranged vertically) may be different between the substrate and the case covering the substrate. Figure 226 (b) shows an example in which the two-dimensional code (facing upward) of sticker ST1 affixed to substrate A and the two-dimensional code (facing downward) of sticker ST3 affixed to the case of substrate A differ with respect to the reference direction.

As shown in Figure 226(a), when the orientation of the two-dimensional code with respect to the reference direction is different between the first board and the second board, the effect of preventing fraud can be further enhanced by combining it with other configurations. An example of such a configuration will be described below using Figures 227 and 228.

In the example of Figure 227, board A (main control board) is stored in board case A, and board C (sub-control board) on which board B (sub-controller ROM board) is stacked is stored in board case B. In this configuration, there are eight two-dimensional codes QRA1 to QRA5 and QRB1 to QRB3, which will be explained in order below. Note that although the sizes of the two-dimensional codes are not the same, in the drawings below, all two-dimensional codes are shown as the same size. Also, in the example below, the stickers displaying the two-dimensional codes are roughly rectangular, but they may be roughly square or have rounded corners, and may be roughly rectangular if text is displayed in the margins.

First, let us explain the two-dimensional code around the board case A.

A two-dimensional code QRA1 facing upwards is printed on the top of board A. This two-dimensional code QRA1 is printed on an affixed sticker. The size of the two-dimensional code QRA1 is 4 mm in length and width, while the size of the sticker is 7 mm in length and width, and there is nothing written in the margins. The content read by this two-dimensional code QRA1 is a 25-digit alphanumeric string.

Board A is equipped with components A and B, each of which has a left-facing two-dimensional code QRA2, QRA3. These two-dimensional codes QRA2, QRA3 are printed directly on the components. A sticker STA1 showing the component name (medal count control ROM) is affixed to component A in the same left-facing state as the two-dimensional code QRA2 (with the characters tilted 90 degrees to the left). A sticker STA2 showing the model name is affixed to component B in the same left-facing state as the two-dimensional code QRA3 (with the characters tilted 90 degrees to the left).

On board case A, which covers board A, a two-dimensional code QRA4 is printed facing upwards on a flat surface facing the same direction as board A. This two-dimensional code QRA4 is printed on an affixed sticker. The size of the two-dimensional code QRA4 is 7 mm in both length and width, while one of the lengths and widths of the sticker is 75 mm, and the blank area contains the same content as that which can be read by the two-dimensional code QRA4 and other information. The content which can be read by this two-dimensional code QRA4 is a 10-digit alphanumeric string.

Board case A, which covers board A, has a right-facing two-dimensional code QRA5 printed on a flat surface (left side) facing in a different direction from board A. This two-dimensional code QRA5 is printed on an affixed sticker. The size of the two-dimensional code QRA5 is 9 mm in both length and width, while one of the lengths and widths of the sticker is 60 mm, and the blank area contains information different from that which can be read by the two-dimensional code QRA5. The information which can be read by this two-dimensional code QRA5 is a 10-digit alphanumeric string.

The two-dimensional code QRA5 applied to the left side surface of substrate A in substrate case A may not be visible from a position where the two-dimensional code of substrate A is visible. In the case of this embodiment, the two-dimensional code of substrate A can be seen from a position directly facing substrate A, but the two-dimensional code QRA5 applied to the left side surface of substrate A cannot be seen. The sticker with this two-dimensional code QRA5 may be affixed such that the portion other than the two-dimensional code QRA5 (e.g., the margin) is affixed from the side to the front of substrate case A.

The right end of the board case A is configured to be rotatable toward the front around the left end as an axis, and the back surface of the board A becomes visible when it is rotated 90 degrees toward the front. At this time, the left side surface rotates 90 degrees to face the rear surface, and the two-dimensional code QRA5 becomes invisible.

Next, we will explain the two-dimensional code around the board case B.

A two-dimensional code QRB2 facing downwards is printed on the top of board C. This two-dimensional code QRB2 is printed on a sticker that has been affixed to the board. The size of the two-dimensional code QRB2 is 4 mm in length and width, whereas the size of the sticker is 7 mm in length and width, with no writing in the margins. The content that can be read by this two-dimensional code QRB2 is a 25-digit alphanumeric string.

The bottom of Board B, which is stacked on Board C, has a two-dimensional code QRB1 facing downwards. This two-dimensional code QRB1 is on an affixed sticker. The size of the two-dimensional code QRB1 is 5 mm in length and width, while the size of the sticker is 8 mm in length and width, with nothing written in the margins. The content read by this two-dimensional code QRB1 is an alphanumeric string of 11 digits. A sticker STB1 showing the model name and part name is affixed to Board B in a different orientation to the right than the two-dimensional code QRB1 (the characters are tilted 90 degrees to the right). On Board B, these stickers are affixed to the locations determined by silk screen printing.

The circuit board case B has an upward-facing two-dimensional code QRB3 printed on it. This two-dimensional code QRB3 is printed on an affixed sticker. The size of the two-dimensional code QRB3 is 9 mm in both length and width, whereas the sticker is 25 mm in either length or width, and the blank space contains information different from that which can be read by the two-dimensional code QRB3. The information which can be read by the two-dimensional code QRB3 is a 12-digit alphanumeric string.

In the example of Figure 227, the two-dimensional code QRA1 on the sticker affixed to board A is oriented in the same direction as the reference direction of board A (upward in the figure), and the two-dimensional code QRB1 on the sticker affixed to board B is oriented in a different direction from the reference direction of board B (downward in the figure), and the orientation of these two-dimensional codes differs with respect to the reference direction of each board. Furthermore, on board B, the characters (model name and part name) on sticker STB1 are tilted with respect to the reference direction of board B (facing right in the figure), just like the two-dimensional code QRB1. In this example, not only can fraud be detected by the orientation of the two-dimensional code, but it may also be possible to detect fraud by a combination that includes the tilt of the characters.

In the example of FIG. 227, the two-dimensional code QRA1 on the sticker affixed to board A is oriented in the same direction as the reference direction of board A (upward in the figure), and the two-dimensional code QRB1 on the sticker affixed to board B is oriented in a different direction from the reference direction of board B (downward in the figure), and the orientation of these two-dimensional codes differs with respect to the reference direction of each board. Furthermore, the two-dimensional code QRA4 on the sticker affixed to board case A that houses board A is oriented in the same direction as the reference direction of board A (upward in the figure), and the two-dimensional code QRB3 on the sticker affixed to board case B that houses board B is oriented in the same direction as the reference direction of board B (upward in the figure). In this configuration, the orientations of the two-dimensional code QRA4 on board case A and the two-dimensional code QRA1 on board A are the same with respect to the reference direction of board A. Furthermore, the orientation of the two-dimensional code QRB3 on board case B and the two-dimensional code QRB1 on board B are different with respect to the reference direction of board B. In this example, not only can fraud be detected by the orientation of the two-dimensional codes on the two boards, but it may also be possible to detect fraud by a combination that includes the orientation of the two-dimensional code on the board case that houses these boards.

In the example of FIG. 227, the two-dimensional code QRA1 on the sticker affixed to board A is in the same direction as the reference direction of board A (upward in the figure), and the two-dimensional code QRB1 on the sticker affixed to board B is in a direction different from the reference direction of board B (downward in the figure), and the orientation of these two-dimensional codes differs with respect to the reference direction of each board. Furthermore, the two-dimensional code QRA5 on the sticker affixed to the left side of board case A that houses board A is in a direction different from the reference direction of board A (rightward in the figure), and the two-dimensional code QRB3 on the sticker affixed to board case B that houses board B is in the same direction as the reference direction of board B (upward in the figure). In this configuration, the orientations of the two-dimensional code QRA5 on the left side of board case A and the two-dimensional code QRA1 on board A differ with respect to the reference direction of board A. Furthermore, the orientation of the two-dimensional code QRB3 on board case B and the two-dimensional code QRB1 on board B are different with respect to the reference direction of board B. In this example, not only can fraud be detected by the orientation of the two-dimensional codes on the two boards, but it may also be possible to detect fraud by a combination that includes the orientation of the two-dimensional code on the board case that houses these boards.

Next, in the example of Figure 228, board A (main control board) is stored in board case A, and board C (sub-control board) on which board B (sub-controller ROM board) is stacked is stored in board case B. In this configuration, there are seven two-dimensional codes QRA6 to QRA9 and QRB4 to QRB6, which will be explained in order below. Note that although the size of each two-dimensional code is not the same, in the drawings below, all two-dimensional codes are shown at the same size. Also, in the example below, the sticker with the two-dimensional code displayed is roughly rectangular, but it may be roughly square or have rounded corners, and may be roughly rectangular if text is displayed in the margin.

First, let us explain the two-dimensional code around the board case A.

A two-dimensional code QRA6 facing upwards is printed on the top of substrate A. This two-dimensional code QRA6 is printed on an affixed sticker. The size of the two-dimensional code QRA6 is 4 mm in length and width, while the size of the sticker is 7 mm in length and width, with nothing written in the margins. The content read by this two-dimensional code QRA6 is a 25-digit alphanumeric string.

Board A is equipped with component B, and has a two-dimensional code QRA7 facing upward. This two-dimensional code QRA7 is printed directly on the component. A sticker STA3 showing the model name is attached to component B, facing upward (with the characters not tilted), just like the two-dimensional code QRA7.

On the board case A that covers the board A, a two-dimensional code QRA8 facing upwards and a two-dimensional code QRA9 facing rightwards are printed on a plane that faces the same direction as the board A. These two-dimensional codes QRA8 and QRA9 are printed on an affixed sticker. The size of the two-dimensional code QRA8 is 7 mm in length and width, while one of the sticker's dimensions is 75 mm in length and width, and the margin contains the same content as that read by the two-dimensional code QRA8 and other information. The content read by this two-dimensional code QRA8 is a 10-digit alphanumeric string. The size of the two-dimensional code QRA9 is 9 mm in length and width, while one of the sticker's dimensions is 60 mm in length and width, and the margin contains content different from that read by the two-dimensional code QRA9. The content read by this two-dimensional code QRA9 is a 10-digit alphanumeric string.

Next, we will explain the two-dimensional code around the board case B.

The top of board C has an upward-facing two-dimensional code QRB5 printed on it. This two-dimensional code QRB5 is printed on a sticker that has been affixed to it. The size of the two-dimensional code QRB5 is 4 mm in length and width, whereas the size of the sticker is 7 mm in length and width, with nothing written in the margins. The content that can be read by this two-dimensional code QRB5 is a 25-digit alphanumeric string.

Board B, which is stacked on board C, has a two-dimensional code QRB4 printed on it facing downwards. This two-dimensional code QRB4 is printed on an affixed sticker. The size of the two-dimensional code QRB4 is 5 mm in length and width, while the size of the sticker is 8 mm in length and width, with nothing written in the margins. The content read by this two-dimensional code QRB4 is an 11-digit alphanumeric string. A sticker STB2 showing the part name is affixed to board B in a left-facing orientation (characters tilted 90 degrees to the left), which is different from the two-dimensional code QRB4. On board B, these stickers are affixed to the locations determined by silk screen printing.

The circuit board case B has an upward-facing two-dimensional code QRB6 printed on it. This two-dimensional code QRB6 is printed on an affixed sticker. The size of the two-dimensional code QRB6 is 9 mm in both length and width, while one of the lengths and widths of the sticker is 25 mm, and the blank space contains information different from that which can be read by the two-dimensional code QRB6. The information which can be read by the two-dimensional code QRB6 is a 12-digit alphanumeric string.

[Technical Concepts Corresponding to the Embodiments of the Board of the Slot Machine 100 and the Affixed Stickers]
Below, the technical ideas described in the explanation of Figures 223 to 228 will be described with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
a first substrate provided with wiring having at least a first straight line and a second straight line;
A substantially rectangular seal (for example, seal ST) having at least the third straight line and the fourth straight line in its outer shape;
A gaming machine equipped with
the seal is attached to the first substrate such that the third straight line is substantially parallel to the first straight line;
the seal is attached to the first substrate such that the fourth straight line is substantially parallel to the second straight line;
A gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, Figs. 223(a)-(d), 224(a)-(b)
) was explained.

This gaming machine makes it easy to apply stickers using the wiring on the circuit board as a guide, which improves maintainability when removing and reapplying stickers during maintenance and inspection.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The direction of the first straight line is perpendicular to the direction of the second straight line (e.g., FIGS. 223(a)(c)-(d), 224(a)-(b)),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine makes it easier to align the corners of the stickers.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The direction of the first straight line is parallel to the direction of the second straight line (e.g., FIGS. 223(a) to (d), FIG. 224(b));
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine makes it easy to align the opposing sides of the stickers.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
At least a part of the seal is attached to an area (e.g., a space SA) of the first substrate where no wiring is present.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine prevents the wiring from being damaged when removing the sticker.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The sticker has a two-dimensional code displayed thereon (for example, FIGS. 223(a)-(d), 224(a)-(b)),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

The two-dimensional code position detection pattern on this gaming machine enhances the guiding effect and improves maintainability.

Also, in the above explanation,
a first substrate provided with wiring having at least a first straight line and a second straight line;
a first seal having a substantially rectangular shape having at least a third straight line and a fourth straight line in its outer shape;
a second substrate having some printed indicia (e.g., a silk screened seal position guide);
A second seal; and
A gaming machine equipped with
the first seal is attached to the first substrate such that the third straight line is substantially parallel to the first straight line;
the first seal is attached to the first substrate such that the fourth straight line is substantially parallel to the second straight line;
The second seal is attached to the second substrate along the certain printed indication.
The present invention has described a gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, see the description that "a configuration in which the sticker guides are different depending on the board").

In this gaming machine, stickers can be easily affixed using the wiring on the board as a guide, which improves maintainability when removing and re-affixing stickers during maintenance and inspection. In addition, the first board and the second board can be distinguished from each other by the difference in how the first and second stickers are affixed.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The direction of the first straight line is perpendicular to the direction of the second straight line (e.g., FIGS. 223(a)(c)-(d), 224(a)-(b)),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine makes it easier to align the corners of the stickers.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The direction of the first straight line is parallel to the direction of the second straight line (e.g., FIGS. 223(a) to (d), FIG. 224(b));
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine makes it easy to align the opposing sides of the stickers.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
At least a portion of the first seal is attached to an area (e.g., a space SA) of the first substrate where no wiring is present.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine prevents the wiring from being damaged when removing the sticker.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first seal and the second seal have a two-dimensional code displayed thereon (for example, FIGS. 223(a) to (d), 224(a) to (b)),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

The two-dimensional code position detection pattern on this gaming machine enhances the guiding effect and improves maintainability.

Also, in the above explanation,
a first substrate provided with wiring having at least a first straight line and a second straight line;
a first seal having a substantially rectangular shape having at least a third straight line and a fourth straight line in its outer shape;
A second substrate;
A second seal; and
A gaming machine equipped with
the first seal is attached to the first substrate such that the third straight line is substantially parallel to the first straight line;
the first seal is attached to the first substrate such that the fourth straight line is substantially parallel to the second straight line;
the second seal is attached to the second substrate,
an orientation of the first seal with respect to a reference direction of the first substrate is different from an orientation of the second seal with respect to a reference direction of the second substrate;
The reference direction is the upward direction in a vertically installed board, and is the depth direction of the game table in a horizontally installed board.
The gaming machine characterized by the above (for example, the configuration of FIG. 226(a) with respect to the sticker ST of FIGS. 223(a)-(d) and 224(a)-(b)) has been described.

In this gaming machine, stickers can be easily attached using the wiring on the circuit board as a guide, which improves maintainability when removing and reattaching stickers during maintenance and inspection. In addition, it may be possible to identify fraud by the orientation of the first and second stickers.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The direction of the first straight line is perpendicular to the direction of the second straight line (e.g., FIGS. 223(a)(c)-(d), 224(a)-(b)),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine makes it easier to align the corners of the stickers.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The direction of the first straight line is parallel to the direction of the second straight line (e.g., FIGS. 223(a) to (d), FIG. 224(b));
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine makes it easy to align the opposing sides of the stickers.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
At least a portion of the first seal is attached to an area (e.g., a space SA) of the first substrate where no wiring is present.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine prevents the wiring from being damaged when removing the sticker.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first seal and the second seal have a two-dimensional code displayed thereon (for example, FIGS. 223(a) to (d), 224(a) to (b)),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

The two-dimensional code position detection pattern on this gaming machine enhances the guiding effect and improves maintainability.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
a first substrate case that houses the first substrate and has a third seal (e.g., seal ST3) attached thereto;
a second substrate case that houses the second substrate and has a fourth seal attached thereto;
an orientation of the first seal with respect to a reference direction of the first substrate is different from an orientation of the third seal with respect to a reference direction of the first substrate;
an orientation of the second seal with respect to a reference direction of the second substrate is different from an orientation of the fourth seal with respect to a reference direction of the second substrate;
We have described a gaming machine (for example, FIG. 226(b)) that is characterized by the above.

With this gaming machine, it may be possible to spot cheating by the orientation of each sticker.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first substrate (e.g., substrate A, FIG. 226 );
A second substrate (e.g., substrate B, FIG. 226 ),
A first sticker (e.g., sticker ST1) on which a first two-dimensional code is displayed;
A second sticker (e.g., sticker ST2) on which a second two-dimensional code is displayed;
A gaming machine equipped with
the first seal is attached to the first substrate,
the second seal is attached to the second substrate,
an orientation of the first two-dimensional code with respect to a reference direction of the first substrate is different from an orientation of the second two-dimensional code with respect to a reference direction of the second substrate;
The reference direction is the upward direction in a vertically installed board, and is the depth direction of the game table in a horizontally installed board.
The first substrate and the second substrate are housed in one substrate case.
The present invention has described a gaming machine characterized by the above-mentioned feature (see the description such as "In order to prevent fraud, rules may be established regarding the orientation of the two-dimensional code relative to the orientation of the board.").

This gaming machine makes it easier to detect fraud based on the orientation of the two-dimensional code. It is also easy for gaming staff to check the two two-dimensional codes.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first substrate (e.g., substrate A, FIG. 227);
A second substrate (e.g., substrate B, FIG. 227 ),
A first sticker on which a first two-dimensional code (e.g., a two-dimensional code QRA1) is displayed;
a second sticker on which a second two-dimensional code (e.g., a two-dimensional code QRB1) is displayed;
a third seal (e.g., seal STB1) on which text is displayed;
A gaming machine equipped with
the first seal is attached to the first substrate,
the second seal is attached to the second substrate,
the third seal is attached to the second substrate,
an orientation of the first two-dimensional code with respect to a reference direction of the first substrate is different from an orientation of the second two-dimensional code with respect to a reference direction of the second substrate;
The reference direction is the upward direction in a vertically installed board, and is the depth direction of the game table in a horizontally installed board.
The orientation of the characters on the third seal is inclined with respect to a reference direction of the second substrate.
We have described a gaming machine (e.g., FIG. 227) that is characterized by the above.

With this gaming machine, the orientation of the two-dimensional code can make it easier to detect fraud. Also, the combination of the orientation of the text and the orientation of the two-dimensional code can make it easier to detect fraud.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first substrate (e.g., substrate A, FIG. 227);
A second substrate (e.g., substrate B, FIG. 227 ),
a first substrate case (e.g., substrate case A) that accommodates the first substrate;
a second substrate case (e.g., substrate case B) that accommodates the second substrate;
A first sticker on which a first two-dimensional code (e.g., a two-dimensional code QRA1) is displayed;
a second sticker on which a second two-dimensional code (e.g., a two-dimensional code QRB1) is displayed;
a third sticker on which a third two-dimensional code (e.g., a two-dimensional code QRA4) is displayed;
and a fourth sticker displaying a fourth two-dimensional code (e.g., a two-dimensional code QRB3),
the first seal is attached to the first substrate,
the second seal is attached to the second substrate,
the third seal is attached to the first board case,
the fourth seal is attached to the second board case,
an orientation of the first two-dimensional code with respect to a reference direction of the first substrate is different from an orientation of the second two-dimensional code with respect to a reference direction of the second substrate;
The reference direction is the upward direction in a vertically installed board, and is the depth direction of the game table in a horizontally installed board.
a direction of the third two-dimensional code with respect to a reference direction of the first substrate is the same as a direction of the first two-dimensional code with respect to the reference direction of the first substrate;
an orientation of the fourth two-dimensional code with respect to a reference direction of the second substrate is different from an orientation of the second two-dimensional code with respect to a reference direction of the second substrate;
We have described a gaming machine (e.g., FIG. 227) that is characterized by the above.

With this gaming machine, not only can fraud be detected by the orientation of the two-dimensional codes on the two boards, but it may also be possible to detect fraud by a combination that includes the orientation of the two-dimensional code on the board case that houses these boards.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first substrate (e.g., substrate A, FIG. 227);
A second substrate (e.g., substrate B, FIG. 227 ),
a first substrate case (e.g., substrate case A) that accommodates the first substrate;
a second substrate case (e.g., substrate case B) that accommodates the second substrate;
A first sticker on which a first two-dimensional code (e.g., a two-dimensional code QRA1) is displayed;
a second sticker on which a second two-dimensional code (e.g., a two-dimensional code QRB1) is displayed;
a third sticker on which a third two-dimensional code (e.g., a two-dimensional code QRA5) is displayed;
and a fourth sticker displaying a fourth two-dimensional code (e.g., a two-dimensional code QRB3),
the first seal is attached to the first substrate,
the second seal is attached to the second substrate,
the third seal is attached to the first board case,
the fourth seal is attached to the second board case,
an orientation of the first two-dimensional code with respect to a reference direction of the first substrate is different from an orientation of the second two-dimensional code with respect to a reference direction of the second substrate;
The reference direction is the upward direction in a vertically installed board, and is the depth direction of the game table in a horizontally installed board.
an orientation of the third two-dimensional code with respect to a reference direction of the first substrate is different from an orientation of the first two-dimensional code with respect to the reference direction of the first substrate;
an orientation of the fourth two-dimensional code with respect to a reference direction of the second substrate is different from an orientation of the second two-dimensional code with respect to a reference direction of the second substrate;
We have described a gaming machine (e.g., FIG. 227) that is characterized by the above.

With this gaming machine, not only can fraud be detected by the orientation of the two-dimensional codes on the two boards, but it may also be possible to detect fraud by a combination that includes the orientation of the two-dimensional code on the board case that houses these boards.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first substrate (e.g., substrate A, FIG. 227);
A second substrate (e.g., substrate B, FIG. 227 ),
a first substrate case (e.g., substrate case A) that accommodates the first substrate;
A first sticker on which a first two-dimensional code (e.g., a two-dimensional code QRA1) is displayed;
a second sticker on which a second two-dimensional code (e.g., a two-dimensional code QRB1) is displayed;
and a third sticker on which a third two-dimensional code (e.g., a two-dimensional code QRA5) is displayed.
the first seal is attached to the first substrate,
the second seal is attached to the second substrate,
the third seal is attached to the first board case,
an orientation of the first two-dimensional code with respect to a reference direction of the first substrate is different from an orientation of the second two-dimensional code with respect to a reference direction of the second substrate;
The reference direction is the upward direction in a vertically installed board, and is the depth direction of the game table in a horizontally installed board.
The third two-dimensional code cannot be seen from a direction in which the first two-dimensional code is visible.
We have described a gaming machine (e.g., FIG. 227) that is characterized by the above.

In this gaming machine, the orientation of the two-dimensional code makes it easier to detect fraud. Also, by making the third sticker difficult to see from a certain direction, it is more difficult for a fraudster to discover the two-dimensional code that is the target of comparison.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The orientation of a plane of a portion where the first two-dimensional code is present is different from the orientation of a plane of a portion where the third two-dimensional code is present;
We have described a gaming machine (e.g., FIG. 227) that is characterized by the above.

In this gaming machine, two-dimensional codes for comparison are placed on planes facing different directions, making it difficult for fraudsters to detect the presence of the two-dimensional code.

<About the power supply module>
Next, an example of a power supply module provided inside the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to Figures 229 to 230. In the following description, the same reference numerals will be used for the configurations already described in other embodiments (e.g., Figures 166 to 181) and the description will be omitted. In addition, for configurations that contradict the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and reference numerals of this example will take precedence.

Figure 229 is a diagram showing an example of a power supply module PM. In this power supply module PM, a power supply board PW is attached to a board base CA2, and a cover CA1 covering this power supply board PW is further attached to the board base CA2 and fixed to the slot machine 100 with a member not shown. The cover CA1 is composed of an upper surface TP, a lower surface BT, a front surface FR, a rear surface BK, and a right surface RT which form a space to accommodate the power supply board PW. Each of these surfaces has multiple ventilation holes AH formed over almost the entire surface. The board base CA2 is provided with corner members CR1 to CR4, which are configured to press the cover CA1 from the outside when the cover CA1 is attached to the board base CA2.

FIG. 230(a) is a view of the bottom surface BT from the bottom side. In this figure, it is shown that the corner member CR1 of the substrate base CA2 is on the front left side, and the corner member CR2 is on the rear left side. Also, FIG. 230(b) shows a cross-sectional view of line A-A in FIG. 230(a), and FIG. 230(c) shows a cross-sectional view of line B-B in FIG. 230(a). In FIG. 230(b) and FIG. 230(c), it is shown that the corner members CR1 and CR2 are located further below the bottom surface BT, so that a space is created between the bottom surface BT and the installation surface SP below it. The existence of this space allows ventilation through the ventilation opening AH to be performed smoothly. Furthermore, since ventilation becomes smooth, the degree of freedom in the shape and arrangement of the ventilation opening AH can be increased.

The thickness of the corner members CR1 and CR2 on the underside of the underside BT is smaller than the thickness of the setting key, and is configured so that the setting key cannot enter the space created on the underside of the underside BT. This allows for smooth intake and exhaust from the ventilation opening AH, and makes it difficult to tamper with the power supply module PM. Note that the thickness of the setting key is only one standard, and it is also possible to use the thickness of a gaming medal or a 500 yen coin as a standard, for example, and configure it so that a gaming medal or a 500 yen coin cannot enter the space created on the underside of the underside BT.

The top surface TP, front surface FR, and rear surface BK of the power module PM are configured with any two of the corner members CR1 to CR4 overlapping on the outside, similar to the bottom surface BT described in Figure 230(a). This makes it difficult for the ventilation opening AH to become blocked even if other devices come close to these surfaces, allowing for smooth intake and exhaust.

[Power supply module board configuration]
Next, an example of a power supply substrate PW used in a power supply module PM will be described with reference to Figs. 231 to 235. In the following description, the same reference numerals will be used for configurations already described in other embodiments (e.g. Figs. 166 to 181) and descriptions thereof will be omitted. In addition, for configurations that contradict the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and reference numerals of this example will take precedence.

Figure 231 is a diagram showing an example of a power supply board PW. This figure shows the power supply board PW installed in the slot machine 100, viewed from the right side to the left side of the slot machine 100. The up-down and front-to-back arrows in the figure indicate the directions of the slot machine 100, and for example, the left-to-right direction in Figure 231 coincides with the front-to-back direction of the slot machine 100.

Figure 232(a) is a view looking rearward from the cross section along line A-A in Figure 231, and Figure 232(b) is a view looking from the front of the power supply board PW with cover CA1 attached to the power supply board PW.

Figure 233(a) is a view of the front side from the cross section along line B-B in Figure 231, and Figure 233(b) is a view of the power supply board PW with cover CA1 attached from the rear side.

Figure 234(a) is a diagram of the power supply board PW of Figure 231 viewed from below, and Figure 234(b) is a diagram of the power supply board PW viewed from below with the cover CA1 attached to the power supply board PW.

Figure 235 shows the state in which cover CA1 is attached to the power supply board PW in Figure 231.

The power supply board PW shown in FIG. 231 is provided with a connector, a heat sink, a relay, a capacitor, a coil, a ferrite bead inductor, a resistor, a regulator, and a transformer, which are described in detail below.

The power supply board PW is provided with four heat sinks HS1 to HS4 extending in the vertical direction of the slot machine 100. In the following description, the area above these heat sinks HS1 to HS4 (above the line L1 in FIG. 231) will be referred to as the upper area. The area below this upper area will be described by dividing it into an area sandwiched between the two front heat sinks HS1 and HS2 (hereinafter, the front area), an area further rearward than the two rear heat sinks HS3 and HS4 that are connected vertically at the rear (hereinafter, the rear area), and a central area sandwiched between the front area and the rear area (hereinafter, the central area).

In the upper area, two connectors CN1, CN2 and three capacitors CP2, CP12, and CP13 are provided. Of these, the capacitors CP2 and CP12 are of the type that are not provided with a safety valve, and the capacitor CP13 is an electrolytic capacitor that is provided with a safety valve. This safety valve is an uneven surface (here, a T-shaped recess) formed on the top of the capacitor, and is intended to burst this part when a load is applied, thereby reducing damage. In addition, the side of the capacitor CP13 is covered with a film from the edge of the top (to the end of the uneven surface of the safety valve), and a mark (line) for identifying the negative terminal is displayed in the direction where the negative terminal is located. In this power supply board PW, the mark for identifying the negative terminal of the capacitor CP13 faces the rear side of the slot machine 100. The part of the safety valve is not covered with this film (the metal part is exposed), so strong reflected light is generated when light is applied to it. Note that the position of the T-shaped recess is unrelated to the position of the terminal, and there may be a deviation from the position of the negative terminal (the mark for identifying the negative terminal) for each individual.

In the front area, relay RC1, coil ID1, coil ID2, relay RC2, coil ID3, connector CN3, relay RC3, resistor RS1, and capacitor CP1 are provided in this order from the top. Of these, capacitor CP1 is an electrolytic capacitor equipped with a safety valve, and is the largest capacity capacitor on the power supply board PW. This safety valve is an uneven surface (here, a square-shaped depression) formed on the top of the capacitor, and is intended to burst this part when a load is applied, thereby reducing damage. In addition, capacitor CP1 is covered with a film from the side to the edge of the top (up to just before the uneven surface of the safety valve), and a mark (line) for identifying the negative terminal is displayed in the direction of the negative terminal. On this power supply board PW, the mark for identifying the negative terminal of capacitor CP1 faces the upper side of the slot machine 100. The part of the safety valve is not covered with this film (the metal part is exposed), so strong reflected light is generated when light is applied to it.

In the rear area, nine capacitors CP3 to CP11 are provided in order from the top. These capacitors CP3 to CP11 are the same type of electrolytic capacitor as the capacitor CP13 in the upper area, and have the same characteristics, such as the shape of the safety valve. In particular, the marks for identifying the negative terminals of these capacitors CP3 to CP11 also face the rear of the slot machine 100.

Two transformers TR1, TR2 are arranged above and below in the center of the central area. Two regulators RG1, RG2 are provided adjacent to the heat sink HS2 near the front of these transformers TR1, TR2. Two regulators RG3 to RG6 are provided adjacent to each of the two rear heat sinks HS3, HS4, and ferrite bead inductors FB1 to FB4 are provided adjacent to each of the regulators. In addition, two capacitors CP14, CP15 are provided above the upper transformer TR1, and a capacitor CP16 is provided below the lower transformer TR2. These capacitors CP14 to CP16 are electrolytic capacitors that do not have safety valves.

In addition, a capacitor CP17 and an integrated circuit IC1 are provided on the back surface of the power supply board PW.

In the above example, the shape of the safety valve of electrolytic capacitor CP1 is different from the shape of the safety valve of electrolytic capacitor CP3 in the rear region. Such differences in shape may make it easier to detect tampering with the power supply board PW. For example, the orientation of the negative terminal of electrolytic capacitor CP1 and electrolytic capacitor CP3 is different, and tampering may be detected by focusing on the shape of the safety valve and the orientation of the negative terminal. In addition, for example, the multiple electrolytic capacitors CP3 to CP11 in the rear region have the same safety valve shape and the same orientation of the negative terminal. Even if tampering results in the installation of safety valves with the same shape but negative terminals with different orientations, it can be easily detected.

As shown in FIG. 229, the power supply board PW is provided with a cover CA1. The power supply board PW is responsible for supplying power to the entire slot machine 100, and is provided with a vent AH for heat dissipation (FIGS. 229 and 230). When checking for any fraudulent activity as described above, the interior can be checked using the vent AH without removing the cover CA1. In particular, reflected light can be easily confirmed near the head of the electrolytic capacitor, and fraudulent parts installed in this vicinity can be easily detected. In the example of FIG. 235, the safety valve of the electrolytic capacitor can be seen from multiple vents AH, making it easier to check for fraudulent parts, and it can be confirmed whether the safety valve has been activated when light from the light projecting means is shone on the head of the electrolytic capacitor through the vent AH.

In the power supply board PW described above, when a load is applied to the electrolytic capacitor, the contents may eject from the safety valve, which may contaminate or damage surrounding components. For this reason, by not placing a movable body such as a reel in a position opposite the safety valve, the above problem can be prevented from occurring even if the contents eject.

In addition, when multiple electrolytic capacitors are used, there is a risk that various locations may become contaminated or damaged if these electrolytic capacitors are scattered. In the power supply board PW described above, multiple electrolytic capacitors are arranged side by side on the edge of the board in the rear region, and are concentrated therein. By providing heat sinks HS3 and HS4 on the opposite side of this edge, the area that may become contaminated or damaged can be limited.

Furthermore, if the components that make up the circuit are not located below the electrolytic capacitor, even if the contents of the electrolytic capacitor spray out and flow downward, damage to the circuit itself can be prevented. For this reason, in the above example, a configuration is adopted in which the electrolytic capacitor CP1 with the largest capacity is located at the bottom. Furthermore, if the application of an overvoltage or reverse voltage causes the safety valve of the electrolytic capacitor on the power supply board PW to operate and the contents to spray out, the space between the bottom surface BT and the installation surface SP below it can prevent the power supply board PW from being soiled by the contents, and it is easier for game store staff to find the contents that have flowed to the bottom of the power supply module PM, allowing for early detection of an abnormality in the electrolytic capacitor.

Furthermore, even if the components that make up the circuit are located below the electrolytic capacitor, if the height of these components is lower than the height of the electrolytic capacitor, a space is created below the safety valve of the electrolytic capacitor, making it difficult for damage to occur to the circuit itself even if the contents of this electrolytic capacitor spray out and flow downward. For example, ferrite bead inductors FB1-FB4 and regulators RG3-RG6 are located below electrolytic capacitor CP13 in the upper area, but because these are all components that are lower than the height of electrolytic capacitor CP13, a space is created below the safety valve of electrolytic capacitor CP13. For this reason, even if the contents of electrolytic capacitor CP13 spray out, the ferrite bead inductors FB1-FB4 and regulators RG3-RG6 are less likely to be contaminated.

To prevent damage caused by the contents of the electrolytic capacitors spilling out, components taller than the electrolytic capacitors may be placed adjacent to them. From this perspective, there are locations on the power supply board PW where heat sinks taller than the electrolytic capacitors are placed adjacent to them.

Here, depending on the shape of the vent AH formed in the cover CA1 of the power supply board PW, it may be possible to reduce contamination caused by the contents of the electrolytic capacitor. For example, if the vent AH is formed at a position overlapping (facing) the center of the safety valve of the electrolytic capacitor, it is possible to cover the contents of the electrolytic capacitor and make it easier for them to escape from CA1, making it difficult for the power supply board PW to be contaminated.

For example, if the vent AH is not formed at a position overlapping (facing) the center of the safety valve of the electrolytic capacitor, the contents and debris of the electrolytic capacitor are less likely to escape out of the cover CA1, making it less likely to soil the components around the power module PM. It is shown that, among the electrolytic capacitors in the rear region, no vent AH is formed at a position overlapping with the center of the safety valve of electrolytic capacitor CP3 other than electrolytic capacitor CP3. Also, no vent AH is formed at a position overlapping with the center of the safety valve of electrolytic capacitor CP1 in the front region.

For example, by narrowing the short-side width of the ventilation opening AH relative to the width of the electrolytic capacitor, the contents and debris of the electrolytic capacitor are less likely to escape outside the cover CA1, making it less likely to soil the components around the power module PM. As shown, the short-side width of the ventilation opening AH is narrower than the width of the electrolytic capacitors CP3 to CP11 in the rear region. Also, the short-side width of the ventilation opening AH is narrower than the width of the electrolytic capacitor CP1 in the front region.

For example, by making the longitudinal width of the ventilation opening AH narrower than the width of the electrolytic capacitor, the contents and debris of the electrolytic capacitor are less likely to escape out of the CA1, making it less likely to soil the components around the power module PM. The longitudinal width of the ventilation opening AH is narrower than the width of the electrolytic capacitor CP1 in the front region.

For example, if the vent AH is not formed in a position overlapping (facing) at least a portion of the safety valve markings of the electrolytic capacitors, the contents and debris of the electrolytic capacitors are less likely to escape out of the cover CA1, making it less likely to soil the components around the power supply module PM. It is shown that the vent AH is not formed in a position overlapping at least a portion of the safety valve markings of the electrolytic capacitors CP3 to CP11 in the rear region. Also, the vent AH is not formed in a position overlapping at least a portion of the safety valve markings of the electrolytic capacitor CP1 in the front region.

The circuit components of the power supply substrate PM are not limited to the above examples, and passive elements (resistors, capacitors, coils, transformers, filters), active elements (diodes, transistors, ICs, relays, thyristors, operational amplifiers, LEDs, sensors), etc. can be used.

[Technical Concepts Corresponding to the Embodiments of the Power Supply Module]
The technical ideas described in the explanation of Figures 229 to 235 will be described below with reference to the corresponding configurations.

In the above explanation,
A gaming machine including a power supply device (e.g., a power supply module PM) having a case formed by combining a first member (e.g., a cover CA1) and a second member (e.g., a base CA2),
The lower surface of the case is formed by a first surface (e.g., a lower surface BT) of the first member, and a second surface (e.g., corner members CR1, CR2) of the second member is overlapped on a part of the lower surface of the case on the outer periphery side.
A plurality of ventilation holes (e.g., ventilation hole AH) are formed on the first surface.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine prevents the second surface from coming into contact with other components, thereby preventing the vents on the first surface from becoming blocked, allowing the power supply to be cooled.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The second surface is formed of a plate-like member having a thickness thinner than a certain metal piece,
The certain metal piece is a setting key, a game medal, or a 500 yen coin.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can prevent metal pieces from entering the gap under the first surface.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
Any of the plurality of ventilation holes is located between the plurality of second surfaces on the lower surface of the case (for example, FIG. 230(a) and FIG. 230(c)).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine allows for greater freedom in the placement of the vents on the first surface.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
Any one of the top, front, and back surfaces of the case is a third surface of the first member (e.g., a top surface TP, a front surface FR, a rear surface BK) on which a plurality of ventilation holes are formed, and further, a fourth surface of the second member (e.g., corner members CR1 to CR4) is overlapped on the outer periphery of the third surface of the first member.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can prevent the ventilation holes from being blocked on surfaces other than the bottom.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first substrate (e.g., a power supply substrate PW),
A movable body (e.g., reels 110 to 112),
A gaming machine equipped with
The first substrate has a capacitor (e.g., electrolytic capacitors CP1, CP3 to CP11, CP13 to CP16),
The capacitor has a safety valve at its top,
The movable body is provided at a position not facing the safety valve.
We have described a gaming machine that features the above (see the description of the power supply module board configuration).

In this gaming machine, it is possible to prevent a movable body from being contaminated by contents or debris when the safety valve is activated.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first substrate has a component (e.g., heat sinks HS2, HS3, HS4),
a height of the certain component from the first substrate is greater than a height of the certain capacitor from the first substrate;
the certain component is adjacent to the certain capacitor;
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this type of gaming machine, certain parts can prevent damage caused by the contents or debris when the safety valve is activated.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first substrate is a power supply substrate,
The device includes a case formed by combining a first member (e.g., a cover CA1) and a second member (e.g., a substrate base CA2),
the first substrate is housed in the case,
The lower surface of the case is formed by a first surface (e.g., a lower surface BT) of the first member, and a second surface (e.g., corner members CR1, CR2) of the second member is overlapped on a part of the lower surface of the case on the outer periphery side.
A plurality of ventilation holes (e.g., ventilation hole AH) are formed in the first surface,
Any one of the top, front, and back surfaces of the case is formed of a third surface of the first member (e.g., a top surface TP, a front surface FR, and a rear surface BK), and a fourth surface of the second member (e.g., corner members CR1 to CR4) is overlapped on a part of the third surface on the outer periphery side of the case.
A plurality of ventilation holes (ventilation holes AH) are formed on the third surface.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can prevent the vents on two or more sides, including the bottom of the case, from being blocked, and if the safety valve of a certain capacitor is activated and the liquid contents fall downward, it may be easier for gaming staff to find the contents.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first substrate (e.g., a power supply substrate PW),
A gaming machine equipped with
the first substrate has a plurality of capacitors (e.g., electrolytic capacitors CP3-CP11) disposed along one of its edges;
a safety valve is provided at a head of the plurality of capacitors,
the first substrate is provided with a component (e.g., a heat sink HS3, HS4) adjacent to the plurality of capacitors on the opposite side of any of the edges;
We have described a gaming machine (see, for example, FIG. 231) that is characterized by the above.

In this gaming machine, multiple capacitors are grouped together to ensure an area that will not be contaminated when the safety valve is activated.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
a height of the certain component from the first substrate is greater than a height of the certain capacitor from the first substrate;
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this type of gaming machine, certain parts can prevent damage caused by the contents or debris when the safety valve is activated.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first substrate is a power supply substrate,
The device includes a case formed by combining a first member (e.g., a cover CA1) and a second member (e.g., a substrate base CA2),
the first substrate is housed in the case,
The lower surface of the case is formed by a first surface (e.g., a lower surface BT) of the first member, and a second surface (e.g., corner members CR1, CR2) of the second member is overlapped on a part of the lower surface of the case on the outer periphery side.
A plurality of ventilation holes (e.g., ventilation hole AH) are formed in the first surface,
Any one of the top, front, and back surfaces of the case is formed of a third surface of the first member (e.g., a top surface TP, a front surface FR, and a rear surface BK), and a fourth surface of the second member (e.g., corner members CR1 to CR4) is overlapped on a part of the third surface on the outer periphery side of the case.
A plurality of ventilation holes (ventilation holes AH) are formed on the third surface.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can prevent the vents on two or more sides, including the bottom of the case, from being blocked, and if the safety valve of a certain capacitor is activated and the liquid contents fall downward, it may be easier for gaming staff to find the contents.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first substrate (e.g., a power supply substrate PW),
A gaming machine equipped with
the first substrate has a capacitor (e.g., an electrolytic capacitor CP1) provided on one of its edges;
The capacitor has a safety valve at its top,
The edge on which the certain capacitor is provided is disposed on the lower side (see, for example, FIG. 231 );
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, a capacitor is placed at the very bottom, which prevents damage to the circuitry even if contents or debris fall downwards when the safety valve is activated.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first substrate has a component (e.g., a heat sink HS2),
a height of the certain component from the first substrate is greater than a height of the certain capacitor from the first substrate;
the certain component is adjacent to the certain capacitor;
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this type of gaming machine, certain parts can prevent damage caused by the contents or debris when the safety valve is activated.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first substrate is a power supply substrate,
The device includes a case formed by combining a first member (e.g., a cover CA1) and a second member (e.g., a substrate base CA2),
the first substrate is housed in the case,
The lower surface of the case is formed by a first surface (e.g., a lower surface BT) of the first member, and a second surface (e.g., corner members CR1, CR2) of the second member is overlapped on a part of the lower surface of the case on the outer periphery side.
A plurality of ventilation holes (e.g., ventilation hole AH) are formed in the first surface,
Any one of the top, front, and back surfaces of the case is formed of a third surface of the first member (e.g., a top surface TP, a front surface FR, and a rear surface BK), and a fourth surface of the second member (e.g., corner members CR1 to CR4) is overlapped on a part of the third surface on the outer periphery side of the case.
A plurality of ventilation holes (ventilation holes AH) are formed on the third surface.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can prevent the vents on two or more sides, including the bottom of the case, from being blocked, and if the safety valve of a certain capacitor is activated and the liquid contents fall downward, it may be easier for gaming staff to find the contents.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first substrate (e.g., a power supply substrate PW),
A gaming machine equipped with
the first substrate has a first capacitor (e.g., electrolytic capacitors CP3 to CP11);
the first substrate has a second capacitor (e.g., an electrolytic capacitor CP1);
a first relief valve is provided at a head of the first condenser;
a second relief valve is provided at the top of the second condenser;
the marking of the first relief valve is different from the marking of the second relief valve;
We have described a gaming machine (see, for example, FIG. 231) that is characterized by the above.

With this gaming machine, cheating by a cheater can sometimes be detected if the marks on multiple safety valves are different from the time of the last maintenance.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The negative terminal of the first capacitor is oriented in a predetermined direction (for example, to the right in FIG. 231, toward the rear of the slot machine 100),
The negative terminal of the second capacitor is oriented in a direction different from the predetermined direction (for example, the upward direction in FIG. 231 , the upward direction of the slot machine 100).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

On this gaming machine, the negative terminal display differs depending on the shape of the safety valve, so it may be possible to spot cheating.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
At least two or more predetermined first capacitors are provided;
The negative terminal indicators of the predetermined number of the first capacitors are all arranged facing a predetermined direction.
We have described a gaming machine characterized by the above (see, for example, electrolytic capacitors CP3 to CP11 and CP13 in FIG. 231).

On this gaming machine, capacitors with the same safety valve shape have the negative terminal markings aligned in the same direction, making it possible to spot fraud.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first substrate has a component (e.g., heat sinks HS3 and HS4),
a height of the certain component from the first substrate is greater than a height of the first capacitor from the first substrate;
the certain component is adjacent to the first capacitor;
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this type of gaming machine, certain parts can prevent damage caused by the contents or debris when the safety valve is activated.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first substrate is a power supply substrate,
The device includes a case formed by combining a first member (e.g., a cover CA1) and a second member (e.g., a substrate base CA2),
the first substrate is housed in the case,
The lower surface of the case is formed by a first surface (e.g., a lower surface BT) of the first member, and a second surface (e.g., corner members CR1, CR2) of the second member is overlapped on a part of the lower surface of the case on the outer periphery side.
A plurality of ventilation holes (e.g., ventilation hole AH) are formed in the first surface,
Any one of the top, front, and back surfaces of the case is formed of a third surface of the first member (e.g., a top surface TP, a front surface FR, and a rear surface BK), and a fourth surface of the second member (e.g., corner members CR1 to CR4) is overlapped on a part of the third surface on the outer periphery side of the case.
A plurality of ventilation holes (ventilation holes AH) are formed on the third surface.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can prevent the vents on two or more sides, including the bottom of the case, from being blocked, and if the safety valve of a certain capacitor is activated and the liquid contents fall downward, it may be easier for gaming staff to find the contents.

Also, in the above explanation,
A first substrate (e.g., a power supply substrate PW),
A case having a plurality of ventilation holes (for example, a combination of a cover CA1 and a substrate base CA2);
A gaming machine equipped with
The first substrate has a capacitor (e.g., electrolytic capacitors CP1, CP3 to CP11, CP13 to CP16),
The capacitor has a safety valve at its top,
A first width (e.g., a width in a vertical direction in FIG. 235 ) of a first vent (e.g., vent AH) among the plurality of vents is narrower than a width of a head of the certain capacitor (e.g., see FIG. 235 );
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, when the safety valve is activated, the contents are released to the outside through the vent, but pieces of the safety valve are prevented from flying out to the outside, preventing damage to other parts.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first substrate has a component (e.g., heat sinks HS2, HS3, HS4),
a height of the certain component from the first substrate is greater than a height of the certain capacitor from the first substrate;
the certain component is adjacent to the certain capacitor;
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this type of gaming machine, certain parts can prevent damage caused by the contents or debris when the safety valve is activated.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first substrate is a power supply substrate,
The case is formed by combining a first member (e.g., a cover CA1) and a second member (e.g., a substrate base CA2),
the first substrate is housed in the case,
The lower surface of the case is formed by a first surface (e.g., a lower surface BT) of the first member, and a second surface (e.g., corner members CR1, CR2) of the second member is overlapped on a part of the lower surface of the case on the outer periphery side.
A plurality of ventilation holes (e.g., ventilation hole AH) are formed in the first surface,
Any one of the top, front, and back surfaces of the case is formed of a third surface of the first member (e.g., a top surface TP, a front surface FR, and a rear surface BK), and a fourth surface of the second member (e.g., corner members CR1 to CR4) is overlapped on a part of the third surface on the outer periphery side of the case.
A plurality of ventilation holes (ventilation holes AH) are formed on the third surface.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This gaming machine can prevent the vents on two or more sides, including the bottom of the case, from being blocked, and if the safety valve of a certain capacitor is activated and the liquid contents fall downward, it may be easier for gaming staff to find the contents.

<Regarding the Board and Board Case of the Slot Machine 100>
Next, an example of the board and board case of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 236. In the following description, the same reference numerals will be used for the configurations already described in other embodiments (e.g., FIG. 166 to FIG. 181), and the description will be omitted. In addition, for configurations that contradict the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and reference numerals of this example will take precedence.

Figure 236(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the configuration of a board and a board case. This figure 236(a) shows a board CB and a board case CA that covers the board CB. The board CB is provided with components such as capacitors and ICs that constitute the circuit on the board, and Figure 236(a) shows circuit components CE1, CE2, and CE3 as examples of such components. The board case CA is made of a transparent material and has a shape with a different height to match the height of the board CB (the height of the circuit components CE1, CE2, and CE3). Note that the area NA of the board CB is an area only of lands where no circuit components are mounted (hereinafter, unmounted land area NA). And, the area ID of the board case CA that corresponds to this unmounted land area NA is an area to which text information related to the board CB is added (hereinafter, text information area ID).

When a board case CA as shown in FIG. 236(a) is provided, the effect of preventing tampering with the board CB can be improved, but once tampering has occurred, there is a problem that the board CB becomes difficult to see, making it difficult to notice the tampering. The board case CA described above uses a transparent material, making such problems less likely to occur.

Here, the substrate case CA may be provided with a structure (e.g., a rivet) for engaging with the substrate CB, a structure (e.g., a rivet) for engaging a cover member to prevent access to the connector on the substrate CB after the cable is removed from the substrate CB to the substrate case CA, and a structure (e.g., a character display or a sticker) for displaying information about the substrate CB and information about the functions of the substrate case CA. When such structures are provided, the visibility of the substrate CB in that area may be reduced, and there is a risk of tampering. Here, if there is an unmounted land area NA on the substrate CB that is not likely to be the target of tampering, the above structure can be provided in the area corresponding to the unmounted land area NA to make it difficult to tamper. FIG. 236(a) shows that the character information area ID corresponding to the unmounted land area NA is used in the structure for displaying information about the substrate CB. As an example of the character information area ID, characters may be printed, or characters that can be recognized may be formed by the unevenness of the substrate case CA. The text information area ID is a transparent area, although the visibility is reduced due to the presence of text, and the presence or absence of unauthorized components can be confirmed by visually checking the unmounted land area NA. If silk screen printing is applied to the unmounted land area NA, this printing can also be made visible to prevent unauthorized use.

Figure 236(b) is a schematic diagram showing a configuration in which a crimp CL is provided in the non-mounted land area NA. Since no components are provided in the non-mounted land area NA, the height of the board case CA is not required. The character information area ID in Figure 236(a) is not a configuration that requires a particular height, so it is the same height as the surrounding area. In contrast, the crimp CL in Figure 236(b) requires a certain amount of height. However, since no components are provided in the non-mounted land area NA and there is a margin of height, the height of the board case CA can be suppressed and made compact. Figure 236(b) shows that the height of the crimp CL is secured, while the height of the part where the crimp CL is provided is lower than the height of the part where the circuit component CE1 is provided. Note that the crimp CL is made of a transparent material, although its structure reduces its visibility, and the presence or absence of unauthorized components can be confirmed by visually checking the non-mounted land area NA. Note that if silk screen printing is applied to the non-mounted land area NA, this printing can also be made visible to prevent unauthorized use.

[Technical Concepts Corresponding to the Embodiments of the Board and Board Case of the Slot Machine 100]
Below, the technical ideas described in the description of Figure 236 will be described with reference to the corresponding configuration.

In the above explanation,
A first substrate (e.g., substrate CB);
A first substrate case (e.g., a substrate case CA) that accommodates the first substrate and has transparency;
A gaming machine equipped with
The first substrate has a non-component mounting land on which no component is mounted (e.g., a non-mounted land area NA),
The first board case has a first function in a first area covering the non-component-mounted land (e.g., a character information area ID, a crimp CL),
The first function is a function of displaying information about the first board or a function of enabling a predetermined operation in the first board case.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the space above the vacant land can be used to configure the first function.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The first board case has an area that is higher than the first area with respect to the first board (for example, in FIGS. 236(a) and 236(b), the area where the circuit component CE1 is provided is higher than the area corresponding to the unmounted land area NA).
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the first circuit board case can be made compact.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
The vacant land can be visually confirmed from the first area.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine allows you to check whether any unauthorized parts have been installed on unimplemented lands.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
A silk screen display corresponding to the vacant land can be visually recognized from the first area.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

This machine allows you to check whether any unauthorized parts have been installed on unimplemented lands.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first function is a function of displaying information about the first substrate,
Information about the first substrate is formed in the first area (e.g., a text information area ID),
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

With this gaming machine, the space above the lands where no components are mounted can be used for displays.

In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first function is a function of displaying information about the first substrate,
A sticker carrying information about the first substrate is attached to the first region.
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the space above the lands on which no components are mounted can be used for stickers.
In addition, the gaming machine described above,
the first function is a function that enables a predetermined operation in the first board case (e.g., a locking operation of a member);
A rivet (e.g., a rivet CL) that enables the predetermined operation by releasing is provided in the first region;
The gaming machine characterized by the above features has been described.

In this gaming machine, the space above the lands where no components are mounted can be used for crimping.

The gaming machine according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, an "enclosed gaming machine" is one that circulates and uses gaming balls enclosed within the gaming machine. The main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured on a single chip, and the main control unit and the first sub-control unit may be configured to enable two-way communication. Furthermore, while two-way communication is enabled between the main control unit and the first sub-control unit, communication from the first sub-control unit to the second sub-control unit may be one-way communication.

The actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most favorable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. Furthermore, by applying the content described in one of the multiple configurations described in the examples to other configurations, the range of play may be expanded.

In addition, the phrases "is possible" or "may occur" in this specification may be replaced with the phrase "will (always) occur", and the phrase "will (always) occur" may be replaced with the phrases "is possible" or "may occur".

The gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to gaming machines such as pinball gaming machines (pachinko machines), reel gaming machines (slot machines), enclosed gaming machines, or medal-less slot machines.

100 Slot machine 110-112 Reel 113 Display window 130, 132 Bet button 134 Settlement button 135 Start lever 137-139 Stop button 157 Performance image display device 170 Game medal number display device 171 Counting buttons 272, 277 Speaker 420 Various lamps 302 Game control unit 350 Medal number control unit 400 First sub-control unit 500 Second sub-control unit 700 Lending machine 707 Lending button 800 Hall management terminal 810 Intermediate management terminal 820 Management server

Claims (1)

A plurality of reels having a plurality of different patterns and driven to rotate;
A bet operation means;
a start operation means capable of executing a start operation for instructing the start of rotation of the plurality of reels;
a plurality of stop operation means capable of executing a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels;
a winning determination means for determining whether or not a winning has been won based on the display state of the plurality of reels;
a game value awarding means for awarding a game value in accordance with the winning determination;
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is capable of displaying a first display showing a number corresponding to a game value acquired in a specific section (hereinafter referred to as an "acquired number");
When the game value is awarded by the game value awarding means, an update display indicating an update of the first display is displayed, and then the first display indicating the acquired number obtained by adding the awarded game value to the acquired number before the game value is awarded is displayed,
When the game value is awarded by the game value awarding means, if a value obtained by adding the awarded game value to the number of acquisitions before the game value is awarded reaches a specified value, a second display can be displayed;
A betting process of a gaming value based on an operation of the betting operation means can be executed even during the display of the update display.
The start operation can be executed even during the display of the update display,
when the betting process and the start operation are executed during the display of the update display when the game value is awarded by the game value awarding means, the first display showing the acquired number obtained by adding the awarded game value to the acquired number before the game value was awarded and further subtracting the amount bet by the betting process can be displayed after the display of the update display ends,
When the betting process and the start operation are executed during the display of the update display when the specified value is reached, even if the first display displayed as a result of the betting process and the start operation being executed has not reached the specified value, the second display can be displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images